AS Series Programming Manual

Industrial Automation Headquarters

Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan City,
Taoyuan County 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301

Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant 3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, P.R.C. 215200
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290

Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

238 Min-Xia Road, Pudong District,
ShangHai, P.R.C. 201209
TEL: 86-21-58635678 / FAX: 86-21-58630003

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

1511, Byucksan Digital Valley 6-cha, Gasan-dong,

AS Series
Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, Korea, 153-704
TEL: 82-2-515-5303 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302

Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

Programming Manual
4 Kaki Bukit Ave 1, #05-05, Singapore 417939
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228

Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No 43 Sector 35, HSIIDC
Gurgaon, PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL : 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945

Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080

Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3° andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-São Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: 55 11 3568-3855 / FAX: 55 11 3568-3865

Europe
Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL : +31 (0)40-8003800 / FAX : +31 (0)40-8003898

AS-0249720-01

*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice.
2016/11/30 www.deltaww.com
 AS Series Programming Manual
Revision History
Ve r s i o n Revision Date
st
1 The first version was published. 2 0 1 6 / 11 / 3 0
 AS Series Programming Manual

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Overview ............................................................................................... 1-2

1.1.1 Related Manuals ........................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Model Description ......................................................................... 1-2

1.2 Software ................................................................................................ 1-6

1.2.1 Program Editor ............................................................................. 1-6
1.2.2 Program Organization Units and Tasks.............................................. 1-8

Chapter 2 Devices

2.1 Introduction of Devices ......................................................................... 2-2

2.1.1 Device Table ................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Basic Structure of I/O Storages ....................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Relation Between the PLC Action and the Device Type ........................ 2-3
2.1.4 Latched Areas in the Device Range .................................................. 2-4

2.2. Functions of Devices ............................................................................. 2-5

2.2.1 Values and Constants .................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Floating-point Numbers.................................................................. 2-7
2.2.2.1 Single-precision Floating-point Numbers .......................................... 2-7
2.2.2.2 Decimal Floating-point Numbers..................................................... 2-8
2.2.3 Strings ........................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.4 Input Relays (X) ........................................................................... 2-9
2.2.5 Output Relays (Y) ....................................................................... 2-10
2.2.6 Auxiliary Relays (M) .................................................................... 2-10
2.2.7 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM) ........................................................ 2-11
2.2.8 Refresh Time of Special Auxiliary Relays ......................................... 2-43
2.2.9 Stepping Relays (S)..................................................................... 2-50
2.2.10 Timers (T) ................................................................................. 2-50
2.2.11 Counters.................................................................................... 2-52
2.2.12 32-bit Counters (HC) ................................................................... 2-54
2.2.13 Data Registers (D) ...................................................................... 2-56
2.2.14 Special Data Registers (SR) .......................................................... 2-56
2.2.15 Refresh Time of Special Data Registers .......................................... 2-83
2.2.16 Additional Remarks on Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Data
Registers ................................................................................... 2-86
2.2.17 Index Register (E) ....................................................................... 2-97
2.2.18 File Registers (FR) ....................................................................... 2-97

i
Chapter 3 Instruction Tables

3.1 Instructions....................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Basic Instructions ......................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Applied Instructions ...................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Instruction Tables ............................................................................. 3-3

3.2.1 Basic Instructions ......................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Applied Instructions (Sorted numerically) ......................................... 3-4
3.2.3 Applied Instructions (Sorted Alphabetically)...................................... 3-5
3.2.4 Device Tables ............................................................................... 3-6

3.3 Lists of Basic Instructions ................................................................. 3-7

3.4 Lists of Applied Instructions.............................................................. 3-9

3.4.1 Applied Instructions (Sorted numerically) ......................................... 3-9
3.4.2 Applied Instructions (Sorted Alphabetically)..................................... 3-37

Chapter 4 Instruction Structure

4.1 API Composition of Applied Instructions ........................................... 4-2

4.2 Operand Usage Description ............................................................... 4-5

4.3 Restrictions on the Use of the Instructions ....................................... 4-6

4.4 Index Registers ................................................................................. 4-7

4.5 Pointer Registers ............................................................................... 4-9

4.6 Pointer Registers of Timers ............................................................. 4-11

4.7 Pointer Registers of 16-bit Counters ............................................... 4-12

4.8 Pointer Registers of 32-bit Counters ............................................... 4-14

4.9 File Register .................................................................................... 4-15

Chapter 5 Basic Instructions

5.1 List of Basic Instructions ................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Basic Instructions ............................................................................. 5-3

Chapter 6 Applied Instructions

6.1 Comparison Instructions ....................................................................... 6-4

ii
 6.1.1 List of Comparison Instructions ............................................................ 6-4
6.1.2 Explanation of Comparison Instructions ................................................. 6-7

6.2 Arithmetic Instructions........................................................................ 6-46

6.2.1 List of Arithmetic Instructions ............................................................ 6-46
6.2.2 Explanation of Arithmetic Instructions ................................................. 6-47

6.3 Data Conversion Instructions .............................................................. 6-78

6.3.1 List of Data Conversion Instructions .................................................... 6-78
6.3.2 Explanation of Data Conversion Instructions ........................................ 6-79

6.4 Data Transfer Instructions ................................................................ 6-117

6.4.1 List of Data Transfer Instructions ...................................................... 6-117
6.4.2 Explanation of Data Transfer Instructions........................................... 6-118

6.5 Jump Instructions ............................................................................. 6-145

6.5.1 List of Jump Instructions ................................................................. 6-145
6.5.2 Explanation of Jump Instructions ...................................................... 6-146

6.6 Program Execution Instructions ........................................................ 6-154

6.6.1 List of Program Execution Instructions .............................................. 6-154
6.6.2 Explanation of Program Execution Instructions ................................... 6-155

6.7 IO Refreshing Instructions ................................................................ 6-167

6.7.1 List of IO Refreshing Instructions ..................................................... 6-167
6.7.2 Explanation of IO Refreshing Instructions .......................................... 6-168

6.8 Convenience Instructions .................................................................. 6-170

6.8.1 List of Convenience Instructions ....................................................... 6-170
6.8.2 Explanation of Convenience Instructions ............................................ 6-171

6.9 Logic Instructions .............................................................................. 6-218

6.9.1 List of Logic Instructions ................................................................. 6-218
6.9.2 Explanation of Logic Instructions ...................................................... 6-219

6.10 Rotation Instructions....................................................................... 6-240

6.10.1 List of Rotation Instructions ........................................................... 6-240
6.10.2 Explanation of Rotation Instructions ................................................ 6-241

6.11 Timer and Counter Instructions ....................................................... 6-252

6.11.1 List of Timer and Counter Instructions ............................................. 6-252
6.11.2 Explanation of Timer and Counter Instructions.................................. 6-253

6.12 Shift Instructions............................................................................. 6-285

6.12.1 List of Shift Instructions ................................................................ 6-285
6.12.2 Explanation of Shift Instructions ..................................................... 6-286

6.13 Data Processing Instructions ........................................................... 6-323

6.13.1 List of Data Processing Instructions................................................. 6-323

iii
 6.13.2 Explanation of Data Processing Instructions ...................................... 6-324

6.14 Structure Creation Instructions ....................................................... 6-377

6.14.1 List of Structure Creation Instructions .............................................. 6-377
6.14.2 Explanation of Structure Creation Instructions................................... 6-378

6.15 Module Instructions ........................................................................ 6-386

6.15.1 List of Module Instructions ............................................................. 6-386
6.15.2 Explanation of Module Instructions .................................................. 6-387

6.16 Floating-point Number Instructions ................................................ 6-393

6.16.1 List of Floating-point Number Instructions ........................................ 6-393
6.16.2 Explanation of Floating-point Number Instructions ............................. 6-394

6.17 Real-time Clock Instructions ........................................................... 6-429

6.17.1 List of Real-time Clock Instructions .................................................. 6-429
6.17.2 Explanation of Real-time Clock Instructions ...................................... 6-430

6.18 Peripheral Instructions.................................................................... 6-453

6.18.1 List of Peripheral Instructions ......................................................... 6-453
6.18.2 Explanation of Peripheral Instructions .............................................. 6-454

6.19 Communication Instructions ........................................................... 6-470

6.19.1 List of Communication Instructions .................................................. 6-470
6.19.2 Explanation of Communication Instructions....................................... 6-471
6.19.3 Descriptions on the Communication-related Flags and Registers .......... 6-539

6.20 Other Instructions ........................................................................... 6-542

6.20.1 List of Other Instructions ............................................................... 6-542
6.20.2 Explanation of Other Instructions .................................................... 6-543

6.21 String Processing Instructions ........................................................ 6-553

6.21.1 List of String Processing Instructions ............................................... 6-553
6.21.2 Explanation of String Processing Instructions .................................... 6-554

6.22 Ethernet Instructions ...................................................................... 6-608

6.22.1 List of Ethernet Instructions ........................................................... 6-608
6.22.2 Explanation of Ethernet Instructions ................................................ 6-609

6.23 Memory Card Instructions ............................................................... 6-643

6.23.1 List of Memory Card Instructions ..................................................... 6-643
6.23.2 Explanation of Memory Card Instructions ......................................... 6-644

6.24 Task Control Instructions ................................................................ 6-660

6.24.1 List of Task Control Instructions ...................................................... 6-660
6.24.2 Explanation of Task Control Instructions ........................................... 6-661

6.25 SFC Instructions .............................................................................. 6-665

6.25.1 List of SFC Instructions .................................................................. 6-665

iv
 6.25.2 Explanation of SFC Instructions ...................................................... 6-666

6.26 High-speed Output Instructions ...................................................... 6-673

6.26.1 List of High-speed Output Instructions............................................. 6-673
6.26.2 Explanation of High-speed Output Instructions ................................. 6-675

6.27 Delta CANopen Communication Instructions ................................... 6-760

6.27.1 List of Delta CANopen Communication Instructions............................ 6-760
6.27.2 Explanation of Delta CANopen Communication Instructions ................ 6-761

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

7.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 7-2

7.1.1 Basic troubleshooting steps ............................................................ 7-2
7.1.2 Clear the States of Errors ............................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 Troubleshooting SOP ..................................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 System Log .................................................................................. 7-4

7.2 Troubleshooting for CPU Modules ...................................................... 7-5

7.2.1 ERROR LED Indicator’s Being ON ..................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ............................ 7-5
7.2.3 ERROR LED Indicator’s Raipid Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds ................... 7-7
7.2.4 ERROR LED Indicator’s Slow Blinking Every 3 Seconds and Lighting up for
1 Second ..................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.5 BAT. LOW LED Indicator’s Being ON ................................................. 7-7
7.2.6 BAT. LOW LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ........................ 7-7
7.2.7 The LED Indicators of RUN and ERROR are Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds
Simultaneously .............................................................................. 7-7
7.2.8 The LED Indicators of RUN and ERROR are Blinking One After Another
Every 0.5 Seconds. ........................................................................ 7-8
7.2.9 Other Errors (Without LED Indicators) .............................................. 7-8

7.3 Troubleshooting for I/O Modules .................................................... 7-14

7.3.1 Troubleshootings for Analog Modules (AD/DA/XA) and Temperature
Modules (RTD/TC) ...................................................................... 7-14
7.3.2 Troubleshootings for Load Cell Module AS02LC ................................ 7-15
7.3.3 Troubleshootings for Module AS00SCM as a Communication Module ... 7-15
7.3.4 Troubleshootings for Module AS00SCM as a Remote Module .............. 7-17

7.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules ............................ 7-18
7.4.1 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules ............................. 7-18
7.4.2 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Analog/Temperature Modules....... 7-23
7.4.3 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Load Cell Module AS02LC ............ 7-24

v
 7.4.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a Communication
Module ...................................................................................... 7-25
7.4.5 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a Remote
Module ...................................................................................... 7-25

vi
 1
Chapter 1 Introduction

Table of Contents
1.1 Overview .............................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1 Related Manuals ............................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Model Description.............................................................. 1-2

1.2 Software .............................................................................. 1-6

1.2.1 Program Editor ................................................................. 1-6
1.2.2 Program Organization Units and Tasks...................................... 1-8

1-1
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

1.1 Overview
_1 This manual introduces the programming of the AS series programmable logic controllers, the basic instructions, and the
applied instructions.

1.1.1 Related Manuals

The related manuals of the AS series programmable logic controllers are composed of the following.

 AS series Quick Start

It guides users to use the system before they read the related manuals.

 AS series Programming Manual

It introduces the programming of the AS series programmable logic controllers, the basic instructions, and the applied
instructions.

 ISPSoft User Manual

It introduces the use of ISPSoft, the programming languages (ladder diagrams, instruction lists, sequential function
charts, function block diagrams, and structured texts), the concept of POUs, and the concept of tasks.

 AS series Hardware Manual

It introduces electrical specifications, appearances, dimensions, and etc.

 AS series Operation Manual

It introduces functions of CPUs, devices, module tables, troubleshooting, and etc.

 AS series Module Manual

It introduces the use of special I/O modules. For example, network modules, analog I/O modules, temperature
measurement modules, and etc.

1.1.2 Model Description

Classification Model Name Description
Input: 100~240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
AS-PS02
Output: 24VDC/2A, 48W (for PLC internal use)
Power supply
Input: 100~240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
module
AS-PS02A Output: 24VDC/1.5A, 36W (for PLC internal use)
Output: 24VDC/0.5A, 12W (for external use)
CPU module, PNP output, 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD
AS332P-A interface, 2x function cards (optional), supporting 32 I/Os
(16DI+16DO) and up to 1024 I/Os, the program capacity:128K steps
CPU module, NPN output, 1x Ethernet port, 2x RS-485 ports, 1x USB
port, 1x Micro SD interface, 2x function cards (optional), supporting 32
AS332T-A
CPU module I/Os (16DI+16DO) and up to 1024 I/Os, the program capacity:128K
steps
CPU module, NPN differential output, 1x Ethernet port, 2x RS-485
ports, 1x USB port, 1x Micro SD interface, 2x function cards (optional),
AS324MT-A
supporting 24 I/Os (12DI+12DO) and up to 1016 I/Os, the program
capacity:128K steps
24VDC
Digital
5mA
input/output AS08AM10N-A
8 inputs
module
Spring-clamp terminal block

1-2
 C ha pt er 1 I ntr o duc t i on

Classification Model Name Description

5 ~ 30VDC
0.5A
1_
AS08AN01P-A 8 outputs
Sourcing output
Spring-clamp terminal block
240VAC/24VDC
2A
AS08AN01R-A 8 outputs
Relay
Spring-clamp terminal block
5 ~ 30VDC
0.5A
AS08AN01T-A 8 outputs
Sinking output
Spring-clamp terminal block
24VDC
5mA
AS16AM10N-A
16 inputs
Spring-clamp terminal block
5 ~ 30VDC
0.5A
AS16AN01P-A 16 outputs
Sourcing output
Spring-clamp terminal block
240VAC/24VDC
2A
AS16AN01R-A 16 outputs
Relay
Spring-clamp terminal block
5 ~ 30VDC
0.5A
AS16AN01T-A 16 outputs
Sinking output
Spring-clamp terminal block
24VDC
5mA
8 inputs
5 ~ 30VDC
AS16AP11P-A
0.5A
8 outputs
Sourcing output
Spring-clamp terminal block
24VDC
5mA
8 inputs
AS16AP11R-A 240VAC/24VDC
2A
8 outputs
Relay

1-3
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Classification Model Name Description

_1 Spring-clamp terminal block

24VDC
5mA
8 inputs
5 ~ 30VDC
AS16AP11T-A
0.5A
8 outputs
Sinking output
Spring-clamp terminal block
24VDC
3.2mA
AS32AM10N-A
32 inputs
MIL connector
5 ~ 30VDC
0.1A
AS32AN02T-A 32 outputs
Sinking output
MIL connector
24VDC
3.2mA
AS64AM10N-A
64 inputs
MIL connector
5 ~ 30VDC
0.1A
AS64AN02T-A 64 outputs
Sinking output
MIL connector
4-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
AS04AD-A
0~10V, 0/1~5V, -5~+5V, -10~+10V, 0/4~20mA, -20~+20mA
Conversion time: 2ms/channel
4-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 12 bits
AS04DA-A
-10~+10V, 0~20mA, 4~20mA
Analog
Conversion time: 2ms/channel
input/output
module 4-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 16 bits
0~10V, 0/1~5V, -5~+5V, -10~+10V, 0/4~20mA, -20~+20mA
Conversion time: 2 ms/channel
AS06XA-A
2-channel analog input module
Hardware resolution: 12 bits
-10~+10V, 0~20mA, 4~20mA
Conversion time: 2ms/channel
4-channe, 2-wire/3-wire RTD
Sensor type: Pt100 / Ni100 / Pt1000 / Ni1000 / JPt100 / LG-Ni1000 /
Temperature Cu50 / Cu100 / 0~300Ω / 0~3000Ω input impedance
AS04RTD-A
measurement
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (16 bits)
module
Conversion time: 200ms/channel
AS04TC-A 4-channe thermocouple

1-4
 C ha pt er 1 I ntr o duc t i on

Classification Model Name Description

Sensor type: J, K, R, S, T, E, N, B and -100~+100 mV
Resolution: 0.1°C/0.1°F (24 bits)
1_
Conversion time: 200ms/channel
2-channel, 4-wire/6-wire load cell sensor
Eigenvalue applicable to a load cell: 1, 2, 4, 6, 20, 40, 80 mV/V
Load cell
AS02LC-A Highest precision 1/10000 @ 50ms of the conversion time
module
ADC Resolution : 24 bits
Conversion time: 2.5 ~ 400ms (9 options to choose from)
Network Serial communication module, 2x communication ports, applicable to
AS00SCM-A
module communication cards, supporting MODBUS protocols
AS00SCM-A
Remote I/O
+ Applicable to AS-FCOPM function cards
module
AS-FCOPM
AS-F232 Serial communication port, RS232, functioning as a master or slave
AS-F422 Serial communication port, RS422, functioning as a master or slave
AS-F485 Serial communication port, RS485, functioning as a master or slave
CANopen communication port, supporting DS301, AS series remote
AS-FCOPM
modules and Delta servo systems
Function cards 2-channel analog input
AS-F2AD 0~10V (12 bits), 4~20mA (11 bits)
Conversion time: 3ms/channel
2-channel analog input
AS-F2DA 0~10V, 4~20mA (12 bits)
Conversion time: 2ms/channel
UC-PRG015-01A Used for the connection between a PLC and a PC via a mini USB port,
(1.5M) applicable for AS332T-A, AS332P-A, and AS324MT-A
Programming Used for the connection between a PLC and a PC via a mini USB port,
UC-PRG030-01A (3M)
cable applicable for AS332T-A, AS332P-A, AS324MT-A
Used for the connection between a PLC and a PC via a RJ45 port,
UC-PRG030-20A (3M)
applicable for AS332T-A, AS332P-A, AS324MT-A
UC-ET010-24B (1M)
MIL connector, 40Pin ↔ 40Pin, shielded, applicable for
UC-ET020-24B (2M)
AS32AM10N-A, AS32AN02T-A, AS64AM10N-A, AS64AN02T-A
I/O extension UC-ET030-24B (3M)
cable UC-ET010-24D (1M) MIL connector, 40Pin↔ 2x 20Pin, shielded, applicable for AS332T-A,
UC-ET020-24D (2M) AS332P-A, AS324MT-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS32AN02T-A,
UC-ET030-24D (3M) AS64AM10N-A, AS64AN02T-A
16 inputs/outputs, 20-Pin MIL connector, applicable for AS332T-A,
UB-10-ID16A AS332P-A, AS324MT-A, AS32AM10N-A, AS32AN02T-A,
AS64AM10N-A, AS64AN02T-A
32 inputs, 40-Pin MIL connector, applicable for AS32AM10N-A,
External UB-10-ID32A
AS64AM10N-A
terminal
16 relay outputs, 20-Pin MIL connector, NPN, applicable for AS332T-A,
module UB-10-OR16A
AS32AN02T-A, AS64AN02T-A
UB-10-OR16B 16 relay outputs, 20-Pin MIL connector, PNP, applicable for AS332P-A
32 transistor outputs, 40-Pin MIL connector, NPN, applicable for
UB-10-OT32A
AS32AN02T-A, AS64AN02T-A
UC-CMC003-01A (0.3M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series
Network cables
UC-CMC005-01A (0.5M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series

1-5
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Classification Model Name Description

_1 UC-CMC010-01A (1M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series

UC-CMC015-01A (1.5M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series
UC-CMC020-01A (2M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series
UC-CMC030-01A (3M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series
UC-CMC050-01A (5M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series
UC-CMC100-01A (10M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series
UC-CMC200-01A (20M) CANopen communication cable, applicable for AS-FCOPM series

1.2 Software
1.2.1 Program Editor
The outline of program editor ISPSoft:

 There are four types of programming languages, including the structure text (ST), the ladder diagram (LD), the
sequential function chart (SFC), and the Continuous Function Chart (CFC).
NOTE: the CFC programming is only available for ISPSoft with version 3.01 or higher.

1-6
 C ha pt er 1 I ntr o duc t i on

 The use of variables which allows the user to define the variable symbol to replace the device name of the PLC not
1_
only enhances the readability of the program, but also saves the user a lot of time to allocate the address of the
device.

 The introduction of the POU (Program Organization Unit) framework not only divides the main program into several
program units, but also replaces the traditional subroutines with functions and function blocks. The framework of the
program becomes more modular, and is easier to be managed.

 The concept of tasks which is used to manage the execution order of the programs advances the program
development to the level of project management. The large-scale program development becomes easier to be
managed.

1-7
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

1.2.2 Program Organization Units and Tasks

_1 The POUs (Program Organization Units) are the basic elements which constitute the PLC program. Differing from the
traditional PLC program, the character of the program framework introduced by IEC 61131-3 lies in the fact that the large
program is divided into several small units. These small units are called POUs. The POUs can be classified into three
types.

1. Program (PROG): The POU of the program type plays the role of the primary program in the PLC program. The
designer can define the execution of the POU of the program type as the cyclic scan or the interrupt, and arrange
the scan order in the task list for the POUs of the program type.

2. Function block (FB): The meaning of the function block (FB) in itself is similar to the subroutine. The program
defined within the function block is executed after the function block is called by the POU of the program type and
the related parameters are entered.

3. Function (FC): The meaning of the function (FC) in itself is close to the macro instruction. That is, users can write
many operation instructions or functions into the function POU, and then call them into use in the POU of the
program type or the function block.

The task is a function which stipulates that programs are executed in certain order or according to certain interrupt
condition. The meaning of the task lies in the fact that it provides each POU of the program type with a specific execution
task, and specifies the execution order for the POUs of the program type or the way to enable them.

Basically, not all of the POUs of the program type in a project will take part in the practical execution. Whether to execute
the POU of the program type or not, and how to execute it depend on the assignment of the task. If the POU of the
program type is not assigned the task, it will be saved as an ordinary source code with the project instead of being
compiled as an execution code of the PLC. In addition, only the POU of the program type needs to be assigned the task.
The execution of the function blocks or functions depends on the superior POU of the program type which calls them.
There are three types of tasks.

1. Cyclic task: The POUs of the program type assigned to the cyclic task will be scanned cyclically, and executed in
order.

2. Timed interrupt task: If the time of interrupting is reached, all POUs of the program type assigned to the timed
interrupt task will be executed in order.

3. Conditional interrupt task: Conditional Interrupts can be divided into several types. For example, the external
interrupts, the I/O interrupts, and etc. Users have to make sure of the interrupts supported by the PLC before they
create a project. If the POU of the program type is assigned to the conditional interrupt task, the function of the POU
of the program type is similar to the interrupt subroutine. If the interrupt condition is satisfied, e.g. the contact of the
external interrupt is triggered, all POUs of the program type assigned to the task will be executed in order.

1-8
 2
Chapter 2 Devices

Table of Contents
2.1 Introduction of Devices ......................................................................... 2-2
2.1.1 Device Table ................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Basic Structure of I/O Storages ....................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Relation Between the PLC Action and the Device Type ........................ 2-3
2.1.4 Latched Areas in the Device Range .................................................. 2-4

2.2. Functions of Devices ............................................................................. 2-5

2.2.1 Values and Constants ..................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Floating-point Numbers .................................................................. 2-7
2.2.2.1 Single-precision Floating-point Numbers .......................................... 2-7
2.2.2.2 Decimal Floating-point Numbers ..................................................... 2-8
2.2.3 Strings ......................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.4 Input Relays (X) ............................................................................ 2-9
2.2.5 Output Relays (Y) .........................................................................2-10
2.2.6 Auxiliary Relays (M) ......................................................................2-10
2.2.7 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM) .........................................................2-11
2.2.8 Refresh Time of Special Auxiliary Relays ..........................................2-43
2.2.9 Stepping Relays (S) ......................................................................2-50
2.2.10 Timers (T) ...................................................................................2-50
2.2.11 Counters ......................................................................................2-52
2.2.12 32-bit Counters (HC) .....................................................................2-54
2.2.13 Data Registers (D) ........................................................................2-56
2.2.14 Special Data Registers (SR) ...........................................................2-56
2.2.15 Refresh Time of Special Data Registers ............................................2-83
2.2.16 Additional Remarks on Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Data
Registers .....................................................................................2-86
2.2.17 Index Register (E) ........................................................................2-97
2.2.18 File Registers (FR) ........................................................................2-97

2-1
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2.1 Introduction of Devices

This section gives an account of values/strings processed by the PLC. It also describes the functions of devices which
include input/output/auxiliary relays, timers, counters, and data registers.

2.1.1 Device Table

Type Device name Number of devices Range
Input relay X 1024 X0.0~X63.15
_2 Output relay Y 1024 Y0.0~Y63.15
D 48,0000 D0.0~D29999.15
Data register
4
W 48,0000 W0.0~W29999.15 *

Bit device Auxiliary relay M 8192 M0~M8191

Special auxiliary relay SM 2048 SM0~SM2047
Stepping relay S 2048 S0~S2047
Timer T 512 T0~T511
Counter C 512 C0~C511
32-bit counter HC 256 HC0~HC255
Input relay X 64 X0~X63
Output relay Y 64 Y0~Y63

D 30000 D0~D29999
Data register
4
W 30000 W0~W29999 *

Special auxiliary relay SR 2048 SR0~SR2047

Word device File register FR 65536 FR0~FR65535

Timer T 512 T0~T511

Counter C 512 C0~C511
32-bit counter HC 256（512 words） HC0~HC255
10 E0~E9
Index register E 4
5 E10~E14 *

1 16 bits: -32768~32767
Constant* Decimal system K
32 bits: -2147483648~2147483647

16 bits: 16#0~16#FFFF
Hexadecimal system 16#
2 32 bits: 16#0~16#FFFFFFFF
Constant*
Single-precision -38 + 38
F 32 bits: ±1.17549435 ~±3.40282347
floating-point number
3
String* String “$” 1~31 characters
*1: The decimal forms are notated by K in the device lists in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 in AS Series Programming Manual.
For example a K50 in the AS programming manual, only the number 50 should be inputted in ISPSoft.

*2: The floating-point numbers are notated by F/DF in the device lists in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 in AS Series
Programming Manual, whereas they are represented by decimal points in ISPSoft; for the floating-point F500, one
should input 500.0.

*3: The strings are notated by “$” in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 in AS Series Programming Manual, whereas they are
represented by “ ” in ISPSoft; for the string of 1234, one should input “1234”in ISPSoft.

2-2
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

*4: Used for editing in ISPSoft only.

2.1.2 Basic Structure of I/O Storages

Access of Access of Modification by Forcing the bit
Device Function
bits words ISPSoft ON/OFF
X Input relay OK OK OK OK 2_
Y Output relay OK OK OK OK
M Auxiliary relay OK - OK -
Special auxiliary
SM OK - OK -
relay
S stepping relay OK - OK -
T Timer OK OK OK -
C Counter OK OK OK -
HC 32-bit counter OK OK OK -
D Data register OK OK OK OK
SR Special data register - OK OK -
1
FR File register - OK* - -
E Index register - OK OK -
*1: An instruction should be used for the writing of a FR.

2.1.3 Relation Between the PLC Action and the Device Type
Device type Non-latched area Latched area
PLC action Device Y Other devices File register Other devices
Power: OFF→ON Cleared Cleared Retained Retained
Restore to defaults Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared
The non-latched
Cleared Cleared Retained Retained
STOP area is cleared.
↓ The state of the
1
RUN* non-latched area is Retained Retained Retained Retained
retained.
The state of device
RUN Cleared Retained Retained Retained
Y is cleared.
↓
1 The state of device
STOP* Retained Retained Retained Retained
Y is retained.
SM204 is ON.
(All non-latched areas are Cleared Cleared Retained Retained
cleared.)
SM205 is ON.
(All latched areas are Retained Retained Retained Cleared
cleared.)
*1: For the setups of the states, please go to HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. The default of PLC STOP->RUN is “cleared
not-latched area”. The default of PLC RUN->STOP is “cleared the state of device Y”.

2-3
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2.1.4 Latched Areas in the Device Range

Device Function Device range Latched area

X Input relay X0~X63 All devices are non-latched.

Y Output relay Y0~Y63 All devices are non-latched.

1
M* Auxiliary relay M0~M8191 The default range is M6000~M8191.
_2
Some devices are latched, and cannot be
changed.
SM Special auxiliary relay SM0~SM2047
Please refer to the list of special auxiliary relays
for more information.
1
S* Stepping relay S0~S1023 The default range is S512~S1023

T Timer T0~T511 All devices are non-latched.

1
C* Counter C0~C511 The default range is C448~C511
1
HC* 32-bit counter HC0~HC255 The default range is HC128~HC255

D0~D29999 The default range is D20000~D29999

1
D* Data register
2
W0~W29999 *

FR File register FR0~FR65535 All devices are latched.

Some are latched, and cannot be changed.

SR Special data register SR0~SR2047 Please refer to the list of special data registers for
more information.

E0~E9 All devices are non-latched.

E Index register
2
E10~E14 *

*1: For the setups of the latched area, please go to HWCONFIG in ISPSoft. Set the latched area and the other areas will
be seen as non-latched areas. The range of latched areas cannot exceed the device range. For example, set the
M600~M7000 as the latched areas and that makes M0~M5999 and M7001~M8191 as the non-latched areas.

*2: Used for editing in ISPSoft only.

2-4
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

2.2. Functions of Devices

Procedure for processing the program in the PLC:

 Regenerating the input signal

1. Before the program is executed, the state of the
external input signal is read into the memory of the
Input ter minal X

Regener ating the input signal

input signal. 2_
2. When program is executed, the state in the memory of
Device memory the input signal does not change even if the input
Device memory

signal changes from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON.

Not until the next scan begins will the input signal be
Proc es s in g th e prog ram
refreshed.
 Processing the program
Device memory After the input signal is refreshed, the instructions in the
program are executed in order from the start address of the
program, and the results are stored in the device
Regener ating the output s ignal
and sending it to the output ter minal memories.
 Regenerating the state of the output
After the instruction END is executed, the state in the
device memory is sent to the specified output terminal.

2.2.1 Values and Constants

Name Description
Bit A bit is the basic unit in the binary system. Its state is either 1 or 0.
A nibble is composed of four consecutive bits (e.g. b3~b0). Nibbles can be
Nibble used to represent 0~9 in the decimal system, or 0~F in the hexadecimal
system.
A byte is composed of two consecutive nibbles (i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0). Bytes can
Byte
be used to represent 00~FF in the hexadecimal system.
A word is composed of two consecutive bytes (i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0). Words can
Word
be used to represent 0000~FFFF in the hexadecimal system.
A double word is composed of two consecutive words (i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0).
Double word Double words can be used to represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF in the
hexadecimal system.
The relation among bits, nibbles, bytes, words, and double words in the binary system is shown below.
DW D ouble w ord

W1 W0
W ord
BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 B yt e

N B7 N B6 N B5 N B4 N B3 N B2 N B1 N B0
N ib ble

b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 B it

The PLC uses four types of values to execute the operation according to different control purposes. The functions of these
values are illustrated as follows:

2-5
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

1. Binary number (BIN)

The PLC adopts the binary system to operate the values.

2. Decimal number (DEC)

The decimal number in the PLC is used as;

 the setting value of the timer (T) or the setting value of the counter (C/HC). For example, TMR C0 50
_2 (constant K).

 the device number. For example, M10 and T30 (device number)

 the number before or after the decimal point. For example, X0.0, Y0.11, and D10.0 (device number).

 the constant K: It is used as the operand in the applied instruction. For example, MOV 123 D0 (constant K).

3. Binary-coded decimal (BCD)

A decimal value is represented by a nibble or four bits, and therefore sixteen consecutive bits can represent a
four-digit decimal value.

4. Hexadecimal number (HEX)

The hexadecimal number in the PLC is used as;

 the constant 16#: It is used as the operand in the applied instruction. For example, MOV 16#1A2B D0
(hexadecimal constant).

Corresponding values:

Binary Number Decimal Number Binary Code Decimal Hexadecimal Number

(BIN) (DEC) (BCD) (HEX)

Constant K, Constant 16#,

PLC internal execution BCD related instruction
Device number Device number
0000 0 0000 0
0001 1 0001 1
0010 2 0010 2
0011 3 0011 3
0100 4 0100 4
0101 5 0101 5
0110 6 0110 6
0111 7 0111 7
1000 8 1000 8
1001 9 1001 9
1010 10 - A
1011 11 - B
1100 12 - C
1101 13 - D
1110 14 - E
1111 15 - F
10000 16 0001 0000 10
10001 17 0001 0001 11

2-6
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

2.2.2 Floating-point Numbers

The floating-point numbers are represented by decimal points in ISPSoft. For example, the floating-point number of 500 is
500.0. Please refer to section 2.2.2 in AS Series Programming Manual for more information.

The floating-point numbers are represented by decimal points in ISPSoft. For example, the floating-point number of 500 is
500.0.

2_
2.2.2.1 Single-precision Floating-point Numbers

The floating-point number is represented by the 32-bit register. The representation adopts the IEEE754 standard, and the
format is as follows.
8 -b it 2 3- bi t

S E xpo ne nt Ma nti ssa

b 31 b0

S ig n b it
0 : Po siti ve
1 : Neg ati ve

Equation:
(− 1)S × 2 E − B × 1.M ; B = 127
The single-precision floating-point numbers range from ±2-126 to ±2+128, and correspond to the range from
±1.1755×10-38 to ±3.4028×10+38.

The AS series PLC uses two consecutive registers to form a 32-bit floating-point number. Take (D1, D0) for example.
D1 (b 15 ~b 0) D0 (b 15 ~b 0)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

E xp on en t ( 8 b its ) Ma nt iss a (2 3b it s )
T he pos ition w here the d eci mal point is hid den

Ma nt iss a s ign b it (0 : Po s it iv e; 1: Ne ga tiv e)

W hen b 0~ b3 1 a re z eros , t he c on te nt is z ero .

Example 1:

23 is represented by the single-precision floating-point number.

Step 1: Convert 23 into the binary number, i.e. 23.0=10111.

Step 2: Normalize the binary number, i.e. 10111=1.0111 ×24 (0111 is the mantissa, and 4 is the exponent.).

Step 3: Get the value of the exponent.

∵ E-B=4→E-127=4 ∴ E=131=100000112

Step 4: Combine the sign bit, the exponent, and the mantissa to form the floating-point number.

0 10000011 011100000000000000000002=41B8000016

Example 2:

-23 is represented by the single-precision floating-point number.

2-7
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The steps of converting -23.0 into the floating-point number are the same as those of converting 23.0 into the
floating-point number, except that the sign bit is 1.

1 10000011 011100000000000000000002=C1B8000016

2.2.2.2 Decimal Floating-point Numbers

_2  Since single-precision floating-point numbers and double-precision floating-point numbers are not widely accepted
by people, they can be converted into decimal floating-point numbers for people to make judgement. However, as to
the operation of the decimal point, the PLC still uses single-precision floating-point numbers and double-precision
floating-point numbers.

 A 32-bibt decimal floating-point number is represented by two consecutive registers. The constant is stored in the
register whose number is smaller while the exponent is stored in the register whose number is bigger. Take (D1, D0)
for example.
[Ex ponent D1]
D eci mal f lo ati ng -po in t nu mb er=[C on sta nt D 0 ]* 1 0

Base number D0=±1,000~±9,999

Exponent D1=-41~+35
-1
The base number 100 does not exist in D0 because 100 is represented by 1,000×10 . In addition, 32-bit decimal
-41 +35
floating-point numbers range from ±1175×10 to ±402×10 .

2.2.3 Strings
What strings can process are ASCII codes (*1). A complete string begins with a start character, and ends with an ending
character (NULL code). If what you enter is a string, you can enter 31 characters at most, and the ending character 16#00
will be added automatically in ISPSoft.

1. No string (NULL code) is moved.

D0=0 (NULL)

2. The string is an even number.

D0 16#62 (b) 16#61 (a)

D1 16#64 (d) 16#63 (b)

D2 0 (NULL)

2-8
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

3. The string is an odd number.

D0 16#62 (b) 16#61 (a) 2_

D1 16#64 (d) 16#63 (b)

D2 0 (NULL) 16#65 (e)

*1: ASCII code chart

Hex 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

ASCII                

Hex 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F

ASCII                

Hex 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F

ASCII SP ! " # $ % & ' （ ） * + ， - . /

Hex 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F

ASCII 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ： ; < = > ?

Hex 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F

ASCII @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O

Hex 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F

ASCII P Q R S T U V W X Y Z     

Hex 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F

ASCII ` a b C d e f g h i j k l M n o

Hex 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F

ASCII p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ 
Note:  represents an invisible character. Please do not use it.

2.2.4 Input Relays (X)

 Function of the input

The input is connected to the input device (e.g. external devices such as button switches, rotary switches, number
switches, and etc.), and the input signal is read into the PLC. Besides, contact A or contact B of the input can be used
several times in the program, and the ON/OFF state of the input varies with the ON/OFF state of the input device.

 Input number (the decimal number):

For the PLC, the input numbers start from X0.0. The number of inputs varies with the number of inputs on the digital
input/output modules, and the inputs are numbered according to the order in which the digital input/output modules
are connected to the CPU module. The maximum number of inputs on the PLC can reach up to 8192, and the range

2-9
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

is between X0.0 and X511.15.

 Input type

The inputs are classified into two types.

1. Regenerated input: Before the program is executed, the data is fed into the PLC according to the states of the
inputs which are regenerated. For example, LD X0.0.
_2 2. Direct input: During the execution of the instructions, the data is fed into the PLC according to the states of the
inputs. For example, LD DX0.0.

2.2.5 Output Relays (Y)

 The function of the output
The task of the output is sending the ON/OFF signal to drive the load connected to the output. The load can be an
external signal lamp, a digital display, or an electromagnetic valve. There are four types of outputs. They are relays,
transistors (NPN and PNP), and TRIACs (thyristors). Contact A or contact B of the output can be used several times in
the program, but the output Y should be used only once in the program. Otherwise, according the program-scanning
principle of the PLC, the state of the output depends on the circuit connected to the last output Y in the program.

 The output number (the decimal number)

For the PLC, the input numbers start from Y0.0. The number of outputs varies with the number of outputs on the
digital input/output modules, and the outputs are numbered according to the order in which the digital input/output
modules are connected to the PLC. The maximum number of outputs on the PLC can reach up to 1024, and the
range is between Y0.0 and Y63.15.

The output which is not practically put to use can be used as a general device.

 The output type

The outputs are classified into two types.

1. Regenerated output: Not until the program executes the instruction END is the information fed out according to the
states of the outputs. For example, OUT Y0.0.

2. Direct output: When the instructions are executed, the information is fed out according to the states of the outputs.
For example, OUT DY0.0.

2.2.6 Auxiliary Relays (M)

The auxiliary relay has contact A and contact B. It can be used several times in the program. Users can combine the
control loops by means of the auxiliary relay, but cannot drive the external load by means of the auxiliary relay. The
auxiliary relays can be divided into two types according to their attributes.

1. For general use: If an electric power cut occurs when the PLC is running, the auxiliary relay for
general use will be reset to OFF. When the power supply is restored, the auxiliary
relay for general use is still OFF.

2. For latched use: If an electric power cut occurs when the PLC is running, the state of the auxiliary
relay for latched use will be retained. When the power supply is restored, the state
remains the same as that before the power electric cut.

2-10
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

2.2.7 Special Auxiliary Relays (SM)

Every special auxiliary relay has its specific function. Please do not use the special auxiliary relays which are not defined.

The special auxiliary relays and their functions are listed as follows. As to the SM numbers marked “*”, users can refer to
the additional remarks on special auxiliary relays/special data registers. “R” in the attribute column indicates that the
special auxiliary relay can read the data, whereas “R/W” in the attribute column indicates that it can read and write the
data. In addition, the mark “–” indicates that the status of the special auxiliary relay does not make any change. The mark
“#” indicates that the system will be set according to the status of the PLC, and users can read the setting value and refer
2_
to the related manual for more information.

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

Error of the operation or operand exceeding the allowed

SM0 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
range
Error of the operation or operand exceeding the allowed
SM1 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
range is locked.
SM5 Instruction inspection error ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM6 Data lost in the latched area ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM7 Not sufficient power supply (24V) ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM8 Watchdog timer error ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM9 System error ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM10 I/O bus error ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM22 Clearing the error log ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
SM23 Clearing the download log ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
SM24 Clearing the state-changing log of the PLC ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
The online-editing processing flag is on when the
SM25 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
online-editing mode starts.
The debugging mode processing flag is on when the
SM26 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
debugging mode starts.
Error occurs when the output point is the same as the output
SM28 ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
that instruction high speed used
SM30 Error occurs in the remote module ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM34 Wrong password ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
Enable saving data to the memory card. When it is ON, the
*SM36 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
PLC will run according to the value in the SR36.
SM76 The data is sent through Function Card 1. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM77 The data is sent through Function Card 2. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM78 Waiting to receive the reply through Function Card 1 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM79 Waiting to receive the reply through Function Card 2 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM80 Reception through Function Card 1 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM81 Reception through Function Card 2 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
An error occurs during the reception of the data through
SM82 Function Card 1 by using the instruction MODRW or the ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
instruction RS.
An error occurs during the reception of the data through
SM83 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
Function Card 2 by using the instruction MODRW or the

2 - 11
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

instruction RS.
_2 SM84
No data is received through Function Card 1 after a specified
○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
period of time.
No data is received through Function Card 2 after a specified
SM85 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
period of time.
Choice made by Function Card 1 between the 8-bit
processing mode and the 16-bit processing mode
SM86 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
ON: The 8-bit processing mode
OFF: The 16-bit processing mode
Choice made by Function Card 2 between the 8-bit
processing mode and the 16-bit processing mode
SM87 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
ON: The 8-bit processing mode
OFF: The 16-bit processing mode
SM90 The communication protocol of Function Card 1 changes ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM91 The communication protocol of Function Card 2 changes ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM94 Change of the LED lighting control in COM1 ○ – – – H R/W OFF
SM95 Change of the LED lighting control in COM2 ○ – – – H R/W OFF
*SM96 The data is sent through COM1. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM97 The data is sent through COM2. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM98 Waiting to receive the reply through COM1 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
*SM99 Waiting to receive the reply through COM2 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
*SM100 Reception through COM1 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM101 Reception through COM2 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
An error occurs during the reception of the data through
*SM102 COM1 by using the instruction MODRW or the instruction ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
RS.
An error occurs during the reception of the data through
*SM103 COM2 by using the instruction MODRW or the instruction ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
RS.
No data is received through COM1 after a specified period of
*SM104 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
time.
No data is received through COM2 after a specified period of
*SM105 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
time.
Choice made by COM1 between the 8-bit processing mode
and the 16-bit processing mode
*SM106 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
ON: The 8-bit processing mode
OFF: The 16-bit processing mode
Choice made by COM2 between the 8-bit processing mode
and the 16-bit processing mode
*SM107 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
ON: The 8-bit processing mode
OFF: The 16-bit processing mode
SM166 VR0 has been started (need to work with SR166) ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM167 VR1 has been started (need to work with SR167) ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM168 The connection for Function Card 1 has been established. ○ – – – N R OFF

2-12
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM169 The Function Card 1 is in operation. ○ OFF – – N R OFF

SM170 The connection for Function Card 2 has been established. ○ – – – N R OFF 2_
SM171 The Function Card 12 is in operation. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM204 All non-latched areas are cleared. ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
*SM205 All latched areas are cleared. ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
SM206 Inhibiting all output ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
*SM209 The communication protocol of COM1 changes ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
Choice made by COM1 between the ASCII mode and the
*SM210 RTU mode ○ – – – H R/W OFF
ON: The RTU mode
*SM211 The communication protocol of COM1 changes ○ OFF OFF OFF N R/W OFF
Choice made by COM2 between the ASCII mode and the
*SM212 RTU mode ○ – – – H R/W OFF
ON: The RTU mode
SM215 Running state of the PLC ○ OFF ON OFF N R/W OFF
SM218 Error occurs when the real-time clock is malfunction ○ – – – N R OFF
Error occurs when the power of the battery for the real-time
SM219 ○ – – – N R OFF
clock is low
*SM220 Calibrating the real-time clock within ±30 seconds ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
The flag of reversing the input direction for MPG 1
SM270 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(X0.0/X0.1)
The flag of reversing the input direction for MPG 2
SM271 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(X0.2/X0.3)
The flag of reversing the input direction for MPG 3
SM272 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(X0.4/X0.5)
The flag of reversing the input direction for MPG 4
SM273 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(X0.6/X0.7)
The flag of reversing the input direction for MPG 5
SM274 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(X0.8/X0.9)
The flag of reversing the input direction for MPG 6
SM275 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(X0.10/X0.11)
SM221 Enable the daylight saving time ○ – – – H R OFF
The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed
SM281 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
counter 1
The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed
SM282 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
counter 2
The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed
SM283 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
counter 3
The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed
SM284 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
counter 4
The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed
SM285 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
counter 5
The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed
SM286 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
counter 6

2-13
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed

SM287 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
_2 counter 7
The flag of reversing the input direction for high-speed
SM288 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
counter 8
SM291 The flag of clearing the input point for high-speed counter 1 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM292 The flag of clearing the input point for high-speed counter 2 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM293 The flag of clearing the input point for high-speed counter 3 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM294 The flag of clearing the input point for high-speed counter 4 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM295 The flag of clearing the input point for high-speed counter 5 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM296 The flag of clearing the input point for high-speed counter 6 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
It sets the counting mode of HC200.
SM300 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC200 counts down when SM300 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC201.
SM301 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC201 counts down when SM301 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC202.
SM302 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC202 counts down when SM302 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC203.
SM303 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC203 counts down when SM303 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC204.
SM304 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC204 counts down when SM304 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC205.
SM305 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC205 counts down when SM305 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC206.
SM306 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC206 counts down when SM306 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC207.
SM307 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC207 counts down when SM307 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC208.
SM308 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC208 counts down when SM308 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC209.
SM309 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC209 counts down when SM309 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC210.
SM310 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC210 counts down when SM310 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC211.
SM311 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC211 counts down when SM311 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC212.
SM312 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC212 counts down when SM312 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC213.
SM313 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC213 counts down when SM313 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC214.
SM314 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC214 counts down when SM314 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC215.
SM315 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC215 counts down when SM315 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC216.
SM316 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC216 counts down when SM316 is ON.)

2-14
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

It sets the counting mode of HC217.

SM317 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC217 counts down when SM317 is ON.) 2_
It sets the counting mode of HC218.
SM318 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC218 counts down when SM318 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC219.
SM319 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC219 counts down when SM319 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC220.
SM320 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC220 counts down when SM320 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC221.
SM321 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC221 counts down when SM321 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC222.
SM322 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC222 counts down when SM322 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC223.
SM323 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC223 counts down when SM323 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC232.
SM332 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC232 counts down when SM332 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC233.
SM333 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC233 counts down when SM333 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC234.
SM334 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC234 counts down when SM334 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC235.
SM335 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC235 counts down when SM335 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC236.
SM336 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC236 counts down when SM336 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC237.
SM337 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC237 counts down when SM337 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC238.
SM338 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC238 counts down when SM338 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC239.
SM339 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC239 counts down when SM339 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC240.
SM340 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC240 counts down when SM340 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC241.
SM341 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC241 counts down when SM341 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC242.
SM342 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC242 counts down when SM342 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC243.
SM343 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC243 counts down when SM343 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC244.
SM344 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC244 counts down when SM344 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC245.
SM345 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC245 counts down when SM345 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC246.
SM346 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC246 counts down when SM346 is ON.)

2-15
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

It sets the counting mode of HC247.

SM347 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
_2 (HC247 counts down when SM347 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC248.
SM348 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC248 counts down when SM348 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC249.
SM349 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC249 counts down when SM349 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC250.
SM350 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC250 counts down when SM350 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC251.
SM351 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
(HC251 counts down when SM351 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC252.
SM352 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC252 counts down when SM352 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC253.
SM353 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
(HC253 counts down when SM353 is ON.)
*SM400 Normally-open contact ○ OFF ON OFF N R OFF
*SM401 Normally-closed contact ○ OFF OFF ON N R OFF
*SM402 The pulse is ON at the time when the PLC runs. ○ OFF ON OFF N R OFF
*SM403 The pulse is OFF at the time when the PLC runs. ○ OFF OFF ON N R OFF
10 millisecond clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for 5
*SM404 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
milliseconds and is OFF for 5 milliseconds
100 millisecond clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for
*SM405 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
50 milliseconds and is OFF for 50 milliseconds
200 millisecond clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for
*SM406 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
100 milliseconds and is OFF for 100 milliseconds
One second clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for
*SM407 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
500 milliseconds and is OFF for 500 milliseconds
Whether the memory card exists
*SM450 ON: The memory card exists. ○ – – – N R OFF
OFF: The memory card does not exist.
The data in the memory card is being accessed.
*SM452 ON: The data in the memory card is being accessed. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
OFF: The data in the memory card is not accessed.
An error occurs during the operation of the memory card.
*SM453 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
ON: An error occurs.
Enabling/disabling the data logger.
SM454 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(ON: enable, OFF: disable)
The data logger is currently taking samples. (ON: buffer is
SM455 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
full or in cycle)
Execution of data logger and the memory card. (ON:
*SM456 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
execution by the values in SR902)
The state of the sample parameters in data logger (ON: the
SM457 ○ – – – N R OFF
sample parameter is set)
SM460 Y0.0/axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM461 The outputting of Y0.0/axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF

2-16
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM462 Reversing the output direction of axis 1 (Y0.1) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM463 Stopping the output of Y0.0/axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF 2_
SM464 Enabling the positive maximum value for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM465 The alarm of the positive limit for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM466 Enabling the negative maximum value for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM467 The alarm of the negative limit for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM468 Enabling the S curve ramp-up/down for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM469 Enabling fixed slope ramp-up/down for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM470 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.0/axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Executing an interrupt I500 when pulse output ends for axis
SM471 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
1 (Y0.0/Y0.1)
SM472 Y0.1 is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM473 The outputting of Y0.1 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM474 Stopping the output of Y0.1. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM475 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.1 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM476 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.0/axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1)
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM477 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.1
SM480 Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM481 The outputting of Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM482 Reversing the output direction of axis 2 (Y0.3) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM483 Stopping the output of Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM484 Enabling the positive maximum value for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM485 The alarm of the positive limit for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM486 Enabling the negative maximum value for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM487 The alarm of the negative limit for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM488 Enabling the S curve ramp-up/down for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM489 Enabling fixed slope ramp-up/down for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM490 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Executing an interrupt I501 when pulse output ends for axis
SM491 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
2 (Y0.2/Y0.3)
SM492 Y0.3 is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM493 The outputting of Y0.3 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM494 Stopping the output of Y0.3. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM495 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.3 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM496 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3)
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM497 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.3.
SM500 Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM501 The outputting of Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF

2-17
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM502 Reversing the output direction of axis 3 (Y0.5) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
_2 *SM503 Stopping the output of Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM504 Enabling the positive maximum value for axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM505 The alarm of the positive limit for axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM506 Enabling the negative maximum value for axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM507 The alarm of the negative limit for axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM508 Enabling the S curve ramp-up/down for axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM509 Enabling fixed slope ramp-up/down for axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM510 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Executing an interrupt I502 when pulse output ends for axis
SM511 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
3 (Y0.4/Y0.5)
SM512 Y0.5 is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM513 The outputting of Y0.5 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM514 Stopping the output of Y0.5. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM515 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.5 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM516 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5)
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM517 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.5
SM520 Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM521 The outputting of Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM522 Reversing the output direction of axis 4 (Y0.7) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM523 Stopping the output of Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM524 Enabling the positive maximum value for axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM525 The alarm of the positive limit for axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM526 Enabling the negative maximum value for axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM527 The alarm of the negative limit for axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM528 Enabling the S curve ramp-up/down for axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM529 Enabling fixed slope ramp-up/down for axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM530 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Executing an interrupt I503 when pulse output ends for axis
SM531 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
4 (Y0.6/Y0.7)
SM532 Y0.7 is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM533 The outputting of Y0.7 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM534 Stopping the output of Y0.7. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM535 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.7 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM536 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7)
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM537 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.7
SM540 Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM541 The outputting of Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF

2-18
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM542 Reversing the output direction of axis 5 (Y0.9) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM543 Stopping the output of Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF 2_
SM544 Enabling the positive maximum value for axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM545 The alarm of the positive limit for axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM546 Enabling the negative maximum value for axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
SM547 The alarm of the negative limit for axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM548 Enabling the S curve ramp-up/down for axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM549 Enabling fixed slope ramp-up/down for axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM550 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Executing an interrupt I504 when pulse output ends for axis
SM551 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
5 (Y0.8/Y0.9)
SM552 Y0.9 is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM553 The outputting of Y0.9 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM554 Stopping the output of Y0.9. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM555 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.9 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM556 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9)
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM557 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.9
SM560 Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM561 The outputting of Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM562 Reversing the output direction of axis 6 (Y0.11) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM563 Stopping the output of Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Enabling the positive maximum value for axis 6
SM564 ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
(Y0.10/Y0.11)
SM565 The alarm of the positive limit for axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Enabling the negative maximum value for axis 6
SM566 ○ – – – Y R/W OFF
(Y0.10/Y0.11)
SM567 The alarm of the negative limit for axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM568 Enabling the S curve ramp-up/down for axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM569 Enabling fixed slope ramp-up/down for axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM570 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
Executing an interrupt I505 when pulse output ends for axis
SM571 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
6 (Y0.10/Y0.11)
SM572 Y0.11 is outputting. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM573 The outputting of Y0.11 is complete. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
*SM574 Stopping outputting of the Y0.11. ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM575 Output completion auto-reset for Y0.11 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM576 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11)
The output immediately stops when the instruction is
*SM577 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
disabled or stops for Y0.11

2-19
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

All outputs immediately stop when the instruction is

SM580 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
_2 disabled or stops.
SM600 Zero flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM601 Borrow flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM602 Carry flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
Setting the working mode of the instruction SORT.
SM604 ON: The descending order ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
OFF: The ascending order
SM605 Designating the working mode of the instruction SMOV ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM606 8-bit or 16-bit working mode ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
It is the matrix comparison flag.
SM607 ON: Comparing the equivalent values ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
OFF: Comparing the different values
The matrix comparison comes to an end. When the last bits
SM608 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
are compared, SM608 is ON.
SM609 When SM609 is ON, the comparison starts from bit 0. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
It is the matrix bit search flag. When the matching bits are
SM610 compared, the comparison stops immediately, and SM610 is ○ OFF – – N R OFF
ON.
It is the matrix pointer error flag. When the value of the
SM611 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
pointer exceeds the comparison range, SM611 is ON.
It is the matrix pointer increasing flag. The current value of
SM612 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
the pointer increases by one.
It is the matrix pointer clearing flag. The current value of the
SM613 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
pointer is cleared to zero.
SM614 It is the carry flag for the matrix rotation/shift/output. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM615 It is the borrow flag for the matrix shift/output. ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
It is the direction flag for the matrix rotation/shift. The bits are
SM616 shifted leftward when SM616 is OFF, whereas the bits are ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
shifted rightward when SM616 is ON.
SM617 The bits with the value 0 or 1 are counted. ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM618 It is ON when the matrix counting result is 0. ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM619 It is ON when the instruction EI is executed. ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
When the results gotten from the comparison by using the
SM620 instruction CMPT# are that all devices are ON, SM620 is ○ OFF – – N R OFF
ON.
It sets the counting mode of HC0.
SM621 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC0 counts down when SM621 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC.
SM622 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC1 counts down when SM622 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC2.
SM623 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC2 counts down when SM623 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC3.
SM624 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC3 counts down when SM624 is ON.)

2-20
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

It sets the counting mode of HC4.

SM625 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC4 counts down when SM625 is ON.) 2_
It sets the counting mode of HC5.
SM626 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC5 counts down when SM626 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC6.
SM627 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC6 counts down when SM627 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC7.
SM628 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC7 counts down when SM628 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC8.
SM629 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC8 counts down when SM629 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC9.
SM630 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
(HC9 counts down when SM630 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC10. (HC10 counts down
SM631 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM631 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC11. (HC11 counts down when
SM632 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM632 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC12. (HC12 counts down
SM633 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM633 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC13. (HC13 counts down
SM634 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM634 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC14. (HC14 counts down
SM635 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM635 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC15. (HC15 counts down
SM636 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM636 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC16. (HC16 counts down
SM637 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM637 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC17. (HC17 counts down
SM638 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM638 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC18. (HC18 counts down
SM639 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM639 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC19. (HC19 counts down
SM640 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM640 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC20. (HC20 counts down
SM641 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM641 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC21. (HC21 counts down
SM642 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM642 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC22. (HC22 counts down
SM643 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM643 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC23. (HC23 counts down
SM644 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM644 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC24. (HC24 counts down
SM645 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM645 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC25. (HC25 counts down
SM646 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM646 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC26. (HC26 counts down
SM647 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM647 is ON.)

2-21
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

It sets the counting mode of HC27. (HC27 counts down

SM648 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
_2 when SM648 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC28. (HC28 counts down
SM649 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM649 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC29. (HC29 counts down
SM650 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM650 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC30. (HC30 counts down
SM651 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM651 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC31. (HC31 counts down
SM652 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM652 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC32. (HC32 counts down
SM653 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM653 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC33. (HC33 counts down
SM654 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM653 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC34. (HC34 counts down
SM655 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM655 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC35. (HC35 counts down
SM656 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM656 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC36. (HC36 counts down
SM657 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM657 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC37. (HC37 counts down
SM658 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM658 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC38. (HC38 counts down
SM659 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM659 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC39. (HC39 counts down
SM660 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM660 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC40. (HC40 counts down
SM661 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM661 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC41. (HC41 counts down
SM662 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM662 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC42. (HC42 counts down
SM663 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM663 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC43. (HC43 counts down
SM664 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM664 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC44. (HC44 counts down
SM665 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM665 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC45. (HC45 counts down
SM666 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM666 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC46. (HC46 counts down
SM667 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM667 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC47. (HC47 counts down
SM668 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM668 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC48. (HC48 counts down
SM669 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM669 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC49. (HC49 counts down
SM670 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM670 is ON.)

2-22
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

It sets the counting mode of HC50. (HC50 counts down

SM671 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM671 is ON.)
2_
It sets the counting mode of HC51. (HC51 counts down
SM672 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM672 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC52. (HC52 counts down
SM673 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM673 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC53. (HC53 counts down
SM674 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM674 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC54. (HC54 counts down
SM675 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM675 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC55. (HC55 counts down
SM676 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM676 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC56. (HC56 counts down
SM677 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM677 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC57. (HC57 counts down
SM678 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM678 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC58. (HC58 counts down
SM679 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM679 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC59. (HC59 counts down
SM680 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM680 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC60. (HC60 counts down
SM681 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM681 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC61. (HC61 counts down
SM682 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM682 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC62. (HC62 counts down
SM683 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM683 is ON.)
It sets the counting mode of HC63. (HC63 counts down
SM684 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
when SM684 is ON.)
SM685 The instruction DSCLP uses the floating-point operation. ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM686 Mode of the instruction RAMP ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM687 The execution of the instruction RAMP is complete. ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM688 The execution of the instruction INCD is complete. ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM690 String control mode ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
The input mode of the instruction HKY is the 16-bit mode.
SM691 The input is the hexadecimal input if SM691 is ON, whereas ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
A~F are function keys if it is OFF.
After the execution of the instruction HKY is complete,
SM692 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM692 is ON for a scan cycle.
After the execution of the instruction SEGL is complete,
SM693 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM693 is ON for a scan cycle.
After the execution of the instruction DSW is complete,
SM694 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM694 is ON for a scan cycle.
It is the radian/degree flag.
SM695 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
ON: The degree
SM749 An error occurs in the initialization of the data exchange via ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF

2-23
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

COM1
_2 *SM750 Data exchange via COM1 has been enabled by ISPSoft. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM752 Connection 1 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM753 Connection 2 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM754 Connection 3 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM755 Connection 4 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM756 Connection 5 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM757 Connection 6 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM758 Connection 7 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM759 Connection 8 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM760 Connection 9 via COM1 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
Connection 10 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM761 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 11 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM762 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 12 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM763 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 13 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM764 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 14 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM765 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 15 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM766 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 16 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM767 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 17 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM768 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 18 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM769 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 19 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM770 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 20 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM771 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 21 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM772 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 22 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM773 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 23 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM774 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 24 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM775 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 25 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM776 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 26 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM777 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.

2-24
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

Connection 27 via COM1 for data exchange has been

*SM778 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started. 2_
Connection 28 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM779 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 29 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM780 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 30 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM781 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 31 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM782 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 31 via COM1 for data exchange has been
*SM783 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 1 for data
*SM784 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 2 for data
*SM785 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 3 for data
*SM786 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 4 for data
*SM787 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 5 for data
*SM788 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 6 for data
*SM789 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 7 for data
*SM790 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 8 for data
*SM791 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 9 for data
*SM792 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 10 for
*SM793 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 11 for
*SM794 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 12 for
*SM795 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 13 for
*SM796 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 14 for
*SM797 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 15 for
*SM798 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 16 for
*SM799 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 17 for
*SM800 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
*SM801 The data has been received via COM 1 connection 18 for ○ OFF – – N R OFF

2-25
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

data exchange.
_2 *SM802
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 19 for
○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 20 for
*SM803 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 21 for
*SM804 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 22 for
*SM805 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 23 for
*SM806 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 24 for
*SM807 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 25 for
*SM808 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 26 for
*SM809 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 27 for
*SM810 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 28 for
*SM811 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 29 for
*SM812 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 30 for
*SM813 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 31 for
*SM814 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 1 connection 32 for
*SM815 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
*SM816 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 1 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM817 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 2 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM818 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 3 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM819 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 4 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM820 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 5 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM821 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 6 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM822 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 7 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM823 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 8 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM824 An error occurs in the COM1 connection 9 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 10 for data
*SM825 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 11 for data
*SM826 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 12 for data
*SM827 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 13 for data
*SM828 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange

2-26
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

An error occurs in the COM1 connection 14 for data

*SM829 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange 2_
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 15 for data
*SM830 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 16 for data
*SM831 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 17 for data
*SM832 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 18 for data
*SM833 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 19 for data
*SM834 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 20 for data
*SM835 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 21 for data
*SM836 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 22 for data
*SM837 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 23 for data
*SM838 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 24 for data
*SM839 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 25 for data
*SM840 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 26 for data
*SM841 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 27 for data
*SM842 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 28 for data
*SM843 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 29 for data
*SM844 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 30 for data
*SM845 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 31 for data
*SM846 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM1 connection 32 for data
*SM847 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the initialization of the data exchange via
SM861 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
COM2.
*SM862 Data exchange via COM2 has been enabled by ISPSoft. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM864 Connection 1 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM865 Connection 2 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM866 Connection 3 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM867 Connection 4 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM868 Connection 5 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF

2-27
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SM869 Connection 6 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
_2 *SM870 Connection 7 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM871 Connection 8 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
*SM872 Connection 9 via COM2 for data exchange has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
Connection 10 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM873 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 11 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM874 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 12 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM875 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 13 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM876 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 14 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM877 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 15 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM878 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 16 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM879 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 17 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM880 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 18 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM881 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 19 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM882 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 20 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM883 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 21 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM884 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 22 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM885 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 23 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM886 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 24 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM887 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 25 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM888 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 26 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM889 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 27 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM890 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 28 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM891 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 29 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM892 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 30 via COM2 for data exchange has been
*SM893 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
*SM894 Connection 31 via COM2 for data exchange has been ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF

2-28
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

started.

*SM895
Connection 32 via COM2 for data exchange has been
○ OFF – – H R/W OFF 2_
started.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 1 for data
*SM896 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 2 for data
*SM897 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 3 for data
*SM898 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 4 for data
*SM899 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 5 for data
*SM900 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 6 for data
*SM901 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 7 for data
*SM902 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 8 for data
*SM903 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 9 for data
*SM904 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 10 for
*SM905 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 11 for
*SM906 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 12 for
*SM907 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 13 for
*SM908 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 14 for
*SM909 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 15 for
*SM910 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 16 for
*SM911 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 17 for
*SM912 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 18 for
*SM913 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 19 for
*SM914 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 20 for
*SM915 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 21 for
*SM916 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 22 for
*SM917 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.

2-29
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

The data has been received via COM 2 connection 23 for

*SM918 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
_2 data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 24 for
*SM919 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 25 for
*SM920 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 26 for
*SM921 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 27 for
*SM922 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 28 for
*SM923 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 29 for
*SM924 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 30 for
*SM925 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 31 for
*SM926 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
The data has been received via COM 2 connection 32 for
*SM927 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
data exchange.
*SM928 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 1 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM929 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 2 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM930 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 3 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM931 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 4 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM932 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 5 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM933 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 6 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM934 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 7 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM935 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 8 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM936 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 9 for data exchange ○ OFF – – N R OFF
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 10 for data
*SM937 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 11 for data
*SM938 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 12 for data
*SM939 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 13 for data
*SM940 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 14 for data
*SM941 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 15 for data
*SM942 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 16 for data
*SM943 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 17 for data
*SM944 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
*SM945 An error occurs in the COM2 connection 18 for data ○ OFF – – N R OFF

2-30
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

exchange

*SM946
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 19 for data
○ OFF – – N R OFF 2_
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 20 for data
*SM947 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 21 for data
*SM948 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 22 for data
*SM949 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 23 for data
*SM950 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 24 for data
*SM951 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 25 for data
*SM952 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 26 for data
*SM953 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 27 for data
*SM954 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 28 for data
*SM955 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 29 for data
*SM956 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 30 for data
*SM957 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 31 for data
*SM958 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the COM2 connection 32 for data
*SM959 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
It is the Ethernet setting flag. When SM1000 is ON, the data
SM1000 ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
in SR1000~SR1006 is written into the flash memory.
SM1001 The state of the Ethernet connectivity ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1090 The TCP connection is busy. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1091 The UDP connection is busy. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1100 The network cable is not connected ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1106 Basic management─Ethernet connection error ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1107 Basic management of Ethernet─Basic setting error ○ OFF – – N R OFF
Basic management of the TCP/UDP socket─The local port is
*SM1109 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
already used.
SM1111 EtherNet/IP data exchange flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1113 Email service error ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1116 It is the switch of trigger 1 in the email. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1117 Trigger 1 in the email ○ OFF – – N R OFF
When trigger 1 is triggered and the email has been sent
*SM1119 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
successfully; SM1119 is ON.

2-31
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

When trigger 1 is triggered but the email cannot be sent due

*SM1120 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
_2 to email content error; SM1120 is ON.
When trigger 1 is triggered and there is an SMTP server
*SM1122 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
response timeout, SM1122 is ON.
When trigger 1 is triggered and there is an SMTP server
*SM1123 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
response error, SM1123 is ON.
When trigger 1 is triggered and the size of the attachment
*SM1124 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exceeds the limit, SM1124 is ON.
When trigger 1 is triggered and the attachment is not found,
*SM1125 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1125 is ON.
*SM1126 It is the switch of trigger 2 in the email. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1127 Trigger 2 in the email ○ OFF – – N R OFF
When trigger 2 is triggered and the email has been sent
*SM1129 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
successfully; SM1129 is ON.
When trigger 2 is triggered but the email cannot be sent due
*SM1130 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
to email content error; SM1130 is ON.
When trigger 2 is triggered and there is an SMTP server
*SM1132 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
response timeout, SM1132 is ON.
When trigger 2 is triggered and there is an SMTP server
*SM1133 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
response error, SM1133 is ON.
When trigger 2 is triggered and the size of the attachment
*SM1134 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exceeds the limit, SM1134 is ON.
When trigger 2 is triggered and the attachment is not found,
*SM1135 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1135 is ON.
*SM1136 It is the switch of trigger 3 in the email. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1137 Trigger 3 in the email ○ OFF – – N R OFF
When trigger 3 is triggered and the email has been sent
*SM1139 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
successfully; SM1139 is ON.
When trigger 3 is triggered but the email cannot be sent due
*SM1140 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
to email content error; SM1140 is ON.
When trigger 3 is triggered and there is an SMTP server
*SM1142 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
response timeout, SM1142 is ON.
When trigger 3 is triggered and there is an SMTP server
*SM1143 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
response error, SM1143 is ON.
When trigger 3 is triggered and the size of the attachment
*SM1144 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exceeds the limit, SM1144 is ON.
When trigger 3 is triggered and the attachment is not found,
*SM1145 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1145 is ON.
*SM1146 It is the switch of trigger 4 in the email. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
*SM1147 Trigger 4 in the email ○ OFF – – N R OFF
When trigger 4 is triggered and the email has been sent
*SM1149 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
successfully; SM1149 is ON.
When trigger 4 is triggered but the email cannot be sent due
*SM1150 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
to email content error; SM1150 is ON.
*SM1152 When trigger 4 is triggered and there is an SMTP server ○ OFF – – N R OFF

2-32
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

response timeout, SM1152 is ON.

*SM1153
When trigger 4 is triggered and there is an SMTP server
○ OFF – – N R OFF 2_
response error, SM1153 is ON.
When trigger 4 is triggered and the size of the attachment
*SM1154 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exceeds the limit, SM1154 is ON.
When trigger 4 is triggered and the attachment is not found,
*SM1155 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1155 is ON.
An error occurs in the initialization of the data exchange via
*SM1166 ○ – – – N R OFF
Ethernet port.
Data exchange via Ethernet port has been enabled by
*SM1167 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
ISPSoft.
Connection 1 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1168 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 2 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1169 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 3 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1170 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 4 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1171 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 5 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1172 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 6 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1173 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 7 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1174 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 8 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1175 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 9 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1176 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 10 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1177 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 11 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1178 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 12 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1179 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 13 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1180 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 14 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1181 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 15 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1182 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 16 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1183 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 17 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1184 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 18 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1185 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.

2-33
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

Connection 19 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been

*SM1186 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
_2 started.
Connection 20 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1187 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 21 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1188 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 22 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1189 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 23 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1190 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 24 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1191 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 25 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1192 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 26 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1193 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 27 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1194 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 28 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1195 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 29 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1196 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 30 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1197 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 31 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1198 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 32 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been
*SM1199 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 1
*SM1200 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 2
*SM1201 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 3
*SM1202 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 4
*SM1203 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 5
*SM1204 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 6
*SM1205 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 7
*SM1206 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 8
*SM1207 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 9
*SM1208 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
*SM1209 The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 10 ○ OFF – – N R OFF

2-34
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

for data exchange.

*SM1210
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 11
○ OFF – – N R OFF 2_
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 12
*SM1211 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 13
*SM1212 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 14
*SM1213 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 15
*SM1214 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 16
*SM1215 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 17
*SM1216 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 18
*SM1217 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 19
*SM1218 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 20
*SM1219 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 21
*SM1220 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 22
*SM1221 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 23
*SM1222 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 24
*SM1223 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 25
*SM1224 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 26
*SM1225 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 27
*SM1226 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 28
*SM1227 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 29
*SM1228 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 30
*SM1229 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 31
*SM1230 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 32
*SM1231 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
for data exchange.
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 1 for data
*SM1232 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange

2-35
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 2 for data

*SM1233 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
_2 exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 3 for data
*SM1234 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 4 for data
*SM1235 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 5 for data
*SM1236 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 6 for data
*SM1237 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 7 for data
*SM1238 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 8 for data
*SM1239 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 9 for data
*SM1240 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 10 for data
*SM1241 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 11 for data
*SM1242 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 12 for data
*SM1243 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 13 for data
*SM1244 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 14 for data
*SM1245 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 15 for data
*SM1246 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 16 for data
*SM1247 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 17 for data
*SM1248 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 18 for data
*SM1249 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 19 for data
*SM1250 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 20 for data
*SM1251 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 21 for data
*SM1252 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 22 for data
*SM1253 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 23 for data
*SM1254 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 24 for data
*SM1255 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
*SM1256 An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 25 for data ○ OFF – – N R OFF

2-36
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

exchange

*SM1257
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 26 for data
○ OFF – – N R OFF 2_
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 27 for data
*SM1258 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 28 for data
*SM1259 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 29 for data
*SM1260 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 30 for data
*SM1261 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 31 for data
*SM1262 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 32 for data
*SM1263 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
SM1269 Socket configuration error ○ OFF – – N R/W OFF
SM1270 TCP socket 1─The connection is successful. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1271 TCP socket 1─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1272 TCP socket 1─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1273 TCP socket 1─The connection is being started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1274 TCP socket 1─The connection is being closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1275 TCP socket 1─The data is being sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1277 TCP socket 1─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1278 TCP socket 2─The connection is successful. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1279 TCP socket 2─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1280 TCP socket 2─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1281 TCP socket 2─The connection is being started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1282 TCP socket 2─The connection is being closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1283 TCP socket 2─The data is being sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1285 TCP socket 2─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1286 TCP socket 3The connection is successful. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1287 TCP socket 3─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1288 TCP socket 3─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1289 TCP socket 3─The connection is being started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1290 TCP socket 3─The connection is being closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1291 TCP socket 3─The data is being sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1293 TCP socket 3─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1294 TCP socket 4─The connection is successful. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1295 TCP socket 4─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1296 TCP socket 4─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1297 TCP socket 4─The connection is being started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1298 TCP socket 4─The connection is being closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1299 TCP socket 4─The data is being sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF

2-37
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM1301 TCP socket 4─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF

_2 SM1334 UDP socket 1─The connection has been started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1335 UDP socket 1─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1336 UDP socket 1─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1337 UDP socket 1─The connection has been closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1338 UDP socket 1─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1339 UDP socket 2─The connection has been started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1340 UDP socket 2─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1341 UDP socket 2─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1342 UDP socket 2─The connection has been closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1343 UDP socket 2─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1344 UDP socket 3─The connection has been started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1345 UDP socket 3─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1346 UDP socket 3─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1347 UDP socket 3─The connection has been closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1348 UDP socket 3─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1349 UDP socket 4─The connection has been started. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1350 UDP socket 4─The data has been received. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1351 UDP socket 4─The data has been sent. ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1352 UDP socket 4─The connection has been closed. ○ ON – – Y R ON
SM1353 UDP socket 4─Error flag ○ OFF – – N R OFF
SM1375 Data exchange via EtherNet/IP has been started. ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
Connection 1 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1376 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 2 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1377 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 3 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1378 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 4 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1379 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 5 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1380 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 6 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1381 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 7 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1382 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 8 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1383 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 9 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1384 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 10 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1385 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 11 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1386 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.

2-38
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

Connection 12 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been

SM1387 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started. 2_
Connection 13 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1388 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 14 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1389 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 15 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1390 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 16 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1391 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 17 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1392 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 18 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1393 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 19 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1394 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 20 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1395 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 21 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1396 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 22 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1397 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 23 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1398 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 24 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1399 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 25 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1400 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 26 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1401 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 27 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1402 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 28 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1403 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 29 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1404 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 30 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1405 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 31 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1406 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
Connection 32 via EtherNet/IP for data exchange has been
SM1407 ○ OFF – – H R/W OFF
started.
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 1 for data
SM1408 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 2 for data
SM1409 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
SM1410 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 3 for data ○ OFF – – N R OFF

2-39
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

exchange
_2 SM1411
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 4 for data
○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 5 for data
SM1412 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 6 for data
SM1413 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 7 for data
SM1414 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 8 for data
SM1415 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 9 for data
SM1416 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 10 for data
SM1417 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 11 for data
SM1418 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 12 for data
SM1419 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 13 for data
SM1420 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 14 for data
SM1421 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 15 for data
SM1422 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 16 for data
SM1423 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 17 for data
SM1424 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 18 for data
SM1425 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 19 for data
SM1426 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 20 for data
SM1427 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 21 for data
SM1428 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 22 for data
SM1429 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 23 for data
SM1430 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 24 for data
SM1431 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 25 for data
SM1432 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 26 for data
SM1433 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange

2-40
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 27 for data

SM1434 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange 2_
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 28 for data
SM1435 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 29 for data
SM1436 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 30 for data
SM1437 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 31 for data
SM1438 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP connection 32 for data
SM1439 ○ OFF – – N R OFF
exchange
SM1440 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 1 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1441 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 2 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1442 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 3 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1443 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 4 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1444 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 5 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1445 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 6 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1446 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 7 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1447 An error occurs in the EtherNet/IP I/O connection 8 ○ OFF - - R 否 OFF

SM1631 Positioning is completed for the axis 1 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1632 Positioning is completed for the axis 2 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1633 Positioning is completed for the axis 3 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1634 Positioning is completed for the axis 4 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1635 Positioning is completed for the axis 5 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1636 Positioning is completed for the axis 6 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1637 Positioning is completed for the axis 7 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1638 Positioning is completed for the axis 8 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1641 Communication stops for the axis 1 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1642 Communication stops for the axis 2 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1643 Communication stops for the axis 3 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1644 Communication stops for the axis 4 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1645 Communication stops for the axis 5 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1646 Communication stops for the axis 6 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1647 Communication stops for the axis 7 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1648 Communication stops for the axis 8 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
SM1651 Servo is ON for the axis 1 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM1652 Servo is ON for the axis 2 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM1653 Servo is ON for the axis 3 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM1654 Servo is ON for the axis 4 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF

2-41
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SM Function   
ON RUN STOP

SM1655 Servo is ON for the axis 5 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
_2 SM1656 Servo is ON for the axis 6 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM1657 Servo is ON for the axis 7 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
SM1658 Servo is ON for the axis 8 of ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 1
SM1661 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 2
SM1662 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 3
SM1663 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 4
SM1664 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 5
SM1665 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 6
SM1666 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 7
SM1667 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The function of going back and forth is enabled for the axis 8
SM1668 ○ OFF OFF – N R/W OFF
of ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 1 of
SM1671 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 2 of
SM1672 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 3 of
SM1673 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 4 of
SM1674 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 5 of
SM1675 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 6 of
SM1676 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 7 of
SM1677 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication flag for the axis 8 of
SM1678 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
ASD-A2 CAN.
Initialization and communication are completed for ASD-A2
SM1681 ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
CAN.
SM1682 The CANopen communication error flag for ASD-A2 CAN ○ OFF OFF – N R OFF
*1: For items with a * mark, please refer to the additional remark for Additional Remarks on Special Auxiliary Relays and
Special Data Registers for details.

*2: The system will execute according to the parameters set in HWCONFIG, when the power of SM is from

OFF to ON, the state is -, and the latched area is marked as N.

*3: The communication card here means AS-F232, AS-F422 and AS-F485.

2-42
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

2.2.8 Refresh Time of Special Auxiliary Relays

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
The system automatically sets the flag to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM0~SM1
The flag is automatically set to ON when there is an operation error.
The system automatically sets the flag to ON and resets it to OFF. 2_
SM5 The flag is automatically set to ON when an error occurred during the program is written in the
PLC.
When power-on, the system checks whether the data in the latched area is lost, if the data is lost,
SM6
the flag is ON. Users reset it to OFF.
SM7 When power supply (24V) is not sufficient, the flag is ON. Users reset it to OFF.
The system automatically sets SM8 to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM8
SM8 is automatically set to ON when there is a watchdog timer error.
The system automatically sets SM9 to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM9
SM9 is automatically set to ON when there is a system error.
The system automatically sets SM10 to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM10
SM10 is automatically set to ON when there is an I/O bus error.
Users set the flag to ON, and the system automatically resets it to OFF.
SM22~SM24
The log is cleared when the flag is ON.
When users edit via the ISPSoft, the flag is ON; when users log out of ISPSoft, the flag is
SM25~SM26
automatically set to OFF.
The system will check if there is anything wrong. When there is something wrong, the flag is ON.
SM28
Users reset it to OFF.
The flag is ON automatically when there is an error occurs in the remote module. The system
SM30
resets it to OFF.
SM34 The flag is ON when wrong password is entered. The system resets it to OFF.
Users set the flag to ON and the system will save the data to the memory card. After the saving is
SM36
complete, the system resets it to OFF automatically.
Users set the flag to ON and the system will execution the communication task. After the
SM76~SM77
communication task is complete, the system resets it to OFF automatically.
The flag is ON while the communication is in process. After the communication is complete, the
SM78~SM79
system resets it to OFF automatically.
SM80~SM81 The flag is ON, after the reception is complete. Users reset it to OFF.
SM82~SM83 The flag is ON, when an error occurs in response. Users reset it to OFF.
SM84~SM85 The flag is ON, when a timeout occurs. Users reset it to OFF.
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM86~SM87 ON: The 8-bit mode
OFF: The 16-bit mode
Users set the flag to ON. After the communication protocol is changed, the system resets it to
SM90~SM91
OFF.
After power-on, the flag is ON/OFF according to the settings in HWCONFIG; users can change
SM94~SM95
this setting.
SM96~SM97 Users set the flag to ON. After the data is sent, the system automatically resets the flag to OFF.
The flag is ON while the communication is in process. After the communication is complete, the
SM98~SM99
system resets it to OFF automatically.
The system automatically sets the flag to ON, and users reset it to OFF.
SM100~SM101
The flag is set to ON when the command is received.
SM102~SM103 The system automatically sets the flag to ON, and users reset it to OFF.

2-43
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
The flag is automatically set to ON when the command received is wrong.
The system automatically sets the flag to ON, and users reset it to OFF.
SM104~SM105
The flag is set to ON when there is a receive timeout.
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM106~SM107 ON: The 8-bit mode
_2 OFF: The 16-bit mode
SM166~SM167 Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM168~SM171 The system automatically sets the flag to ON, and reset it to OFF.
Users set the flag to ON, and the system automatically resets it to OFF.
SM204~SM205
ON: Clearing the non-latched/latched areas
Users set SM206 to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM206
ON: Inhibiting all output
Users set SM209 to ON, and the system automatically resets it to OFF.
SM209
ON: The communication protocol of COM1 changes.
Users set SM210 to ON and reset it to OFF for COM1.
SM210 ON: The RTU mode
OFF: The ASCII mode
Users set SM211 to ON, and the system automatically resets it to OFF.
SM211
ON: The communication protocol of COM2 changes.
Users set SM210 to ON and reset it to OFF for COM2.
SM212 ON: The RTU mode
OFF: The ASCII mode
Users set SM215 to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM215 ON: The PLC runs.
OFF: The PLC stops.
The system checks the real-time clock when power-on.
SM218 ON: when the real-time clock is malfunction
Users reset it to OFF.
The system monitors the battery power of the real-time clock.
SM219 ON: when the power is low
The system resets it to OFF.
Users set SM220 to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM220
ON: Calibrating the real-time clock within ±30 seconds
The flag is refreshed according to the settings in HWCONFIG or when the instruction API1607
SM221 DST is executed.
ON: the instruction DST is executed.
The flag is ON when the instruction CSFO is executed.
SM270 ~ SM275 ON: enabling the function of reversing the input direction
OFF: disabling the function of reversing the input direction
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM281~SM288 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM291~SM296 ON: enabling the function of clearing the input points
OFF: disabling the function of clearing the input points
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM300 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up

2-44
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
The system set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM301~SM303 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM304 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up 2_
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM305~SM307 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM308 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM309~SM311 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM312 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM313~SM315 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM316 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM317~SM319 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM320 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM321~SM323 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM332 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM333~SM335 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM336 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM337~SM339 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM340 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up

2-45
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM341 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM342 ON: counting down
_2 OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM343 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM344 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM345 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM346 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM347 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM348 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM349 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM350 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM351 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
Users set the flag to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM352~SM353 ON: counting down
OFF: counting up
The system automatically sets the flag to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM400~SM403
The flag is refreshed every scan cycle.
The system automatically sets the flag to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM404
SM404 is refreshed every 5 milliseconds.
The system automatically sets SM405 to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM405
SM405 is refreshed every 50 milliseconds.
The system automatically sets SM406 to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM406
SM406 is refreshed every 100 milliseconds.
The system automatically sets SM407 to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM407
SM407 is refreshed every 0.5 seconds.
The system automatically sets SM450 to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM450
ON: The memory card is inserted into the PLC.

2-46
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
OFF: The memory card is removed out of the PLC.
SM452~SM453 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM454 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM455 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM456 Users set the flag to ON to save. After the saving is complete, the system resets it to OFF.
SM457 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
2_
SM460 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM461 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM462~SM464 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM465 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM466 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM467 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM468~SM471 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM472 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM473 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM474~SM477 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM480 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM481 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM482~SM484 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM485 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM486 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM487 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM488~SM491 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM492 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM493 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM494~SM497 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM500 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM501 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM502~SM504 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM505 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM506 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM507 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM508~SM511 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM512 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM513 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM514~SM517 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM520 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM521 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM522~SM524 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM525 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM526 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM527 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM528~SM531 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM532 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM533 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM534~SM537 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.

2-47
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
SM540 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM541 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM542~SM544 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM545 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.

_2 SM546 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.

SM547 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM548~SM551 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM552 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM553 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM554~SM557 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM560 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM561 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM562~SM564 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM565 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM566 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM567 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM568~SM569 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM572 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM573 The system sets the flag to ON and users reset it to OFF.
SM574 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
Users set the flag to ON and the system resets it to OFF.
SM580
ON: disabling the function of high-speed output
The system automatically sets the flag to ON and resets it to OFF.
SM600~SM602
The flag is refreshed when the instruction is executed.
Users set SM604 to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM604 ON: Sort by descending
OFF: Sort by ascending
SM605 Users set SM605 to ON and reset it to OFF.
Users set SM606 to ON and reset it to OFF.
SM606 ON: The 8-bit mode
OFF: The 16-bit mode
SM607 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM608 The flag is refreshed when the instruction is executed.
SM609 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM610~SM611 The flag is refreshed when the instruction is executed.
SM612~SM613 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM614 The flag is refreshed when the instruction is executed.
SM615~SM617 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM618 The flag is refreshed when the instruction is executed.
SM619 The flag is refreshed when the instruction EI or DI is executed.
SM620 The flag is refreshed when the instruction CMPT is executed.
SM621~SM686 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM687 The flag is refreshed when the instruction RAMP is executed.
SM688 The flag is refreshed when the instruction INCD is executed.
SM690~SM691 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM692 The flag is refreshed when the instruction HKY is executed.

2-48
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
SM693 The flag is refreshed when the instruction SEGL is executed.
SM694 The flag is refreshed when the instruction DSW is executed.
SM695 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
Every time after the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, the system is refreshed when
SM749
power-on.
SM750~SM783 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, users set the flag to ON or OFF.
2_
SM784~SM847 The flag is ON when the system is refreshed.
Every time after the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, the system is refreshed when
SM861
power-on.
SM862~SM895 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM896~SM959 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed automatically.
SM1000 Users set the flag to ON and after saving; the system sets the flag to OFF.
The flag is ON, when the Ethernet connection is active.
SM1001
The flag is OFF, when the Ethernet connection is not active.
SM1090 SM1090 is ON when the TCP connection is busy.
SM1091 SM1091 is ON when the UDP connection is busy.
SM1100 The flag is refreshed when API2200-API2210 is executed or the network cable is reconnected.
SM1106 SM1106 is ON when the PHY initialization fails.
SM1107 is ON when the IP address, the netmask address, and the gateway address are set
SM1107
incorrectly.
SM1109 SM1109 is ON when the function of the socket is enabled and the same port is used.
SM1111 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1113 The flag is ON, when there is a server error.
SM1116 SM1116 is ON when the trigger of the PLC parameter is enabled.
SM1117 SM1117 is ON when the trigger of the PLC parameter is triggered.
SM1119 SM1119 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent successfully.
SM1120 SM1120 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent in error.
SM1122~SM1123 The flag is ON when the trigger is enabled and there is an SMTP server response timeout.
SM1124 SM1124 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the size of the attachment exceeds the limit.
SM1125 SM1125 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the attachment is not found.
SM1126~SM1127 The flag is ON when the trigger of the PLC parameter is enabled.
SM1129 SM1129 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent successfully.
SM1130 SM1130 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent in error.
SM1132 SM1132 is ON when the trigger is enabled and there is an SMTP server response timeout.
SM1133 SM1133 is ON when the trigger is enabled and there is an SMTP server response error.
SM1134 SM1134 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the size of the attachment exceeds the limit.
SM1135 SM1135 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the attachment is not found.
SM1136 SM1136 is ON when the trigger of the PLC parameter is enabled.
SM1137 SM1137 is ON when the trigger of the PLC parameter is triggered.
SM1139 SM1139 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent successfully.
SM1140 SM1140 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent in error.
SM1142 SM1142 is ON when the trigger is enabled and there is an SMTP server response timeout.
SM1143 SM1143 is ON when the trigger is enabled and there is an SMTP server response error.
SM1144 SM1144 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the size of the attachment exceeds the limit.
SM1145 SM1145 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the attachment is not found.

2-49
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Special auxiliary
Refresh time
relay
SM1146 SM1146 is ON when the trigger of the PLC parameter is enabled.
SM1147 SM1147 is ON when the trigger of the PLC parameter is triggered.
SM1149 SM1149 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent successfully.
SM1150 SM1150 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the last mail has been sent in error.

_2 SM1152 SM1152 is ON when the trigger is enabled and there is an SMTP server response timeout.
SM1153 SM1153 is ON when the trigger is enabled and there is an SMTP server response error.
SM1154 SM1154 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the size of the attachment exceeds the limit.
SM1155 SM1155 is ON when the trigger is enabled and the attachment is not found.
SM1166 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, the system is refreshed.
SM1167~SM1199 After the parameters of data exchange are downloaded, users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1200~SM1263 The flag is ON, when the system is refreshed.
SM1269 The flag is ON, when there is a socket configuration error.
SM1270~SM1353 The flag is refreshed when the socket function is executed.
After the parameters of data exchange via EtherNet/IP are downloaded, users set the flag to ON
SM1375~SM1407
or OFF.1.
SM1408~SM1439 The flag is ON when an error occurs in data exchange via EtherNet/IP.
SM1440~SM1447 The flag is ON when a timeout occurs in the slave of the I/O connection via EtherNet/IP
SM1631~SM1638 The system sets the flag to ON and users set it to OFF.
SM1641~SM1648 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1651~SM1658 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1661~SM1668 Users set the flag to ON or OFF.
SM1671~SM1682 The system sets the flag to ON or OFF.

2.2.9 Stepping Relays (S)

Function of the stepping relay:

The stepping relay can be easily used in the industrial automation to set the procedure. It is the most basic device in the
sequential function chart (SFC). Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to sequential function
charts.

There are 2048 stepping relays, i.e. S0~S2047. Every stepping relay is like an output relay in that it has an output coil,
contact A, and contact B. It can be used several times in the program, but it cannot directly drive the external load.
Besides, the stepping relay can be used as a general auxiliary relay when it is not used in the sequential function chart.

2.2.10 Timers (T)

1. 100 millisecond timer: The timer specified by the instruction TMR takes 100 milliseconds as the timing unit.

2. 1 millisecond timer: The timer specified by the instruction TMRH takes 1 millisecond as the timing unit.

3. The accumulative timers are ST0~ST511. If users want to use the device-monitoring function, they can monitor
T0~T511.

4. If the same timer is used repeatedly in the program, including in different instructions TMR and TMRH, the setting
value is the one that the value of the timer matches first.

5. If the same timer is used repeatedly in the program, it is OFF when one of the conditional contacts is OFF.

6. If the same timer is used repeatedly in the program as the timer for the subroutine’s exclusive use and the
accumulative timer in the program, it is OFF when one of the conditional contacts is OFF.

2-50
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

7. When the timer is switched from ON to OFF and the conditional contact is ON, the timer is reset and counts again.

8. When the instruction TMR is executed, the specified timer coil is ON and the timer begins to count. As the value of the
timer matches the setting value (value of the timer ≧ setting value), the state of the contact is ON.

A. General-purpose timer

When the instruction TMR is executed, the general-purpose timer begins to count. As the value of the timer matches
the setting value, the output coil is ON. 2_
1. When X0.0=ON and the timer takes 100ms as the timing unit, the output coil T0 will be ON, when the value of
the timer = setting value100.

2. When X0.0=OFF or the power is off, the value of the timer is 0 and the output coil T0 will be OFF.

10 sec

X0. 0

SV: K100
T0(PV)

Y0. 0

B. Accumulative timer

When the instruction TMR is executed, the accumulative timer begins to count. As the value of the timer matches the
setting value, the output coil is ON. As long as users add the letter S in front of the letter T, the timer becomes the
accumulative timer. When the conditional contact is OFF, the value of the accumulative timer is not reset. When the
conditional contact is ON, the timer will count from the current value.

3. When X0.0=ON and the timer T250 takes 100ms as the timing unit, the output coil T250 will be ON, when the
value of the timer = setting value100.

4. When X0.0=OFF or the power is off, the timer T250 stops counting, and the value of the timer stays the same.
When X0.0=ON, the value of the timer will be accumulated and when the accumulated value = setting value
100, the output coil T250 will be ON.

2-51
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_2

T1 T2 T1+T2=10 sec

X0. 0
SV: K100
T250(PV)

Y0. 0

C. Timer used in the function block

T412~T511 are the timers which users can use in the functional block or the interrupt.

When the instruction TMR or END is executed, the timer used in the functional block begins to count. As the value of
the timer matches the setting value, the output coil is ON.

If the general-purpose timer is used in the functional block or the interrupt, and the functional is not executed, the timer
cannot count correctly.

2.2.11 Counters
 Characteristics of the 16-bit counter

Item 16-bit counter

Type General type
Number C0~C511
Direction Counting up
Setting value 0~32,767
The setting value can be either the constant or the value in the data
Specification of the setting value
register.
The counter stops counting when the value of the counter matches
Change of the current value
the setting value.
The contact is ON when the value of the counter matches the setting
Output contact
value.
When the instruction RST is executed, the current value is cleared to
Reset
zero, and the contact is reset of OFF.
Action of the contact After the scan is complete, the contact acts.
 Function of the counter

Each time the input switches from OFF to ON, the value of the counter is the same as the output coil. Users can use
either the decimal constant or the value in the data register as the setting value.

2-52
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

16-bit counter:

1. Setting range: 0~32,767 (The setting values 0 and 1 mean the same thing in that the output contact is ON when the
counter counts for the first time.)

2. For the general-purpose counter, the current value of the counter is cleared when there is a power cut. If the counter
is the latched one, the current value of the counter and the state of the contact before the power cut will be retained.
The latched counter counts from the current value when the power supply is restored.
2_
3. If users use the instruction MOV or ISPSoft to transmit a value bigger than the setting value to the current value
register C0, the contact of the counter C0 will be ON and the current value will become the same as the setting value
next time X0.1 is switched from OFF to ON.

4. Users can use either the constant or the value in the data register as the setting value of the counter.

5. The setting value of the counter can be a positive or a negative. If the counter counts up from 32,767, the next current
value becomes 0.

1. When X0.0=ON, the instruction RST will be executed and the current value of C0 will be reset to zero and the output
contact of the counter C0 will be FF.

2. When X0.1 is from OFF to ON, the value of the counter increases by one increment.

3. When the value of the counter C0 reached the setting value 5, the contact of the counter C0 will be ON (the current
value of C0 = the setting value = 5). After that the trigger from X0.1 will not be accepted by C0 and the current value
of C0 will stay at the value 5.

2-53
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

X 0.0

X 0.1

5
4 (SV)
C0 ( PV )
_2 3
2
1
0 0

Y 0.0 ,C0

2.2.12 32-bit Counters (HC)

 Characteristics of the 32-bit counter

Item 32-bit counter

Type Up/down counter Up counter High-speed counter
Number HC0 ~ HC63 HC64 ~ HC199 HC200 ~ HC255
Direction Counting up/down Counting up Counting up/down
Setting value -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Specification of the The setting value can be either the constant or the value occupying two data
setting value registers (32-bit).
Change of the current The counter keeps counting even after the value of the counter matches the setting
value value.
The contact is ON when the value of the addition counter matches the setting value.
Output contact The contact is reset to OFF when the value of the subtraction counter matches the
setting value.
When the instruction RST is executed, the current value is cleared to zero, and the
Reset
contact is reset to OFF.
Action of the contact After the instruction DCNT scan is complete, the contact acts.
 32-bit general-purpose addition/subtraction counter

1. Setting range: -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647

2. The switch between the 32-bit general-purpose addition counters and the 32-bit general-purpose subtraction
counters depends on the states of the special auxiliary relays SM621~SM684. For example, the counter HC0 is
the addition counter when SM621 is OFF, whereas HC0 is the subtraction counter when SM621 is ON.

3. Users can use either the constant or the value in the data registers as the setting value of the counter, and the
setting value can be a positive or a negative. If users use the value in the data registers as the setting value of
the counter, the setting value occupies two consecutive registers.

4. For the general-purpose counter, the current value of the counter is cleared when there is a power cut. If the
counter is the latched one, the current value of the counter and the state of the contact before the power cut will
be retained. The latched counter counts from the current value when the power supply is restored.

5. If the counter counts up from 2,147,483,647, the next current value becomes -2,147,483,648. If the counter
counts down from -2,147,483,648, the next current value becomes 2,147,483,647.

 32-bit high speed addition/subtraction counter

2-54
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Please refer to the instruction description of API1004 DCNT in AS Series Programming Manual for more details.

Example:

2_

1. X10.0 drives SM621 to determine counting direction (up/down) of HC0.

2. When X11.0 goes from OFF to ON, RST instruction will be executed and the PV in HC0 will be cleared to 0 and its
contact is OFF.

3. When X12.0 goes from OFF to ON, PV of HC0 will count up (plus 1) or count down (minus 1).

4. When PV in HC0 changes from -6 to -5, the contact HC0 will go from OFF to ON. When PV in HC0 changes from -5
to -6, the contact HC0 will go from ON to OFF.

5. If MOV instruction is applied through ISPSoft to designate a value bigger than SV to the PV register of HC0, next
time when X12.0 goes from OFF to ON, the contact HC0 will be ON and PV of HC0 will equal SV.
Accu mul ati vel y Accu mul ati vel y
X10.0 i ncr ea sin g P rog re ssive ly i ncr ea sin g
d ecre asi ng

X11.0

X12.0
5
4 4
3 3
HC0 2 2
1 1
(PV )
0 0 0
-1
-2
-3 -3
-4 -4
-5 -5
-6 -6
Wh en t he o u tpu t c on tact w as O N -7 -7
-8
Y0.0,
HC0 Con tacts

2-55
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2.2.13 Data Registers (D)

The data register stores the 16-bit data. The highest bit represents either a positive sign or a negative sign, and the values
which can be stored in the data registers range from -32,768 to +32,767. Two 16-bit registers can be combined into a
32-bit register, i.e. (D+1, D) in which the register whose number is smaller represents the low 16 bits. The highest bit
represents either a positive sign or a negative sign, and the values which can be stored in the data registers range from
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. Besides, four 16-bit registers can be combined into a 64-bit register, i.e. (D+3, D+2,
_2 D+1, D) in which the register whose number is smaller represents the lower 16 bits. The highest bit represents either a
positive sign or a negative sign, and the values which can be stored in the data registers range from
-9,223,372,036,854,776 to +9,223,372,036,854,775,807. The data registers can also be used to refresh the values in the
control registers in the modules other than digital I/O modules. Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information
regarding refreshing the values in the control registers.

The registers can be classified into two types according to their properties.

1. General-purpose register: When the PLC begins to run, or is disconnected, the value in the register will be cleared to
zero. If users want to retain the data when the PLC begins to RUN, they can refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more
information. Please notice that the value will still be cleared to zero when the PLC is disconnected.

2. Latched register: If the PLC is disconnected, the data in the latched register will not be cleared. In other words, the
value before the disconnection is still retained. If users want to clear the data in the latched area, they can use RST or
ZRST.

2.2.14 Special Data Registers (SR)

Every special data register has its definition and specific function. The system statuses and the error messages are stored
in the special data registers. Besides, the special data registers can be used to monitor the system statuses. The special
data registers and their functions are listed as follows. As to the SR numbers marked “*”, users can refer to the additional
remarks on special auxiliary relays/special data registers. The “R” in the attribute column indicates that the special data
register can read the data, whereas the “R/W” in the attribute column indicates that it can read and write the data. In
addition, the mark “–” indicates that the status of the special data register does not make any change. The mark “#”
indicates that the system will be set according to the status of the PLC, and users can read the setting value and refer to
the related manual for more information.
The “Y” in the column latched means it is latched, the “N” means it is non-latched; as for “H”, it means it
follows the settings in HWCONFIG. While execution, the programs in the PLC are editable; but the settings in
the HWCONFIG are the same.
AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched

OFF STOP RUN

Default

SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR0 Error-detecting code of the PLC operation/operand error ○ 0 0 - N R 0

SR1
The address of the operation error (32-bit) ○ 0 0 - N R 0
SR2
SR4 Error-detecting code of the grammar check error ○ 0 0 - N R 0
SR5
The address of the grammar check error (32-bit) ○ 0 0 - N R 0
SR6
*SR8
Step address at which the watchdog timer is ON (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR9
SR23 The number of times the MAC address is made. ○ - - - N R -
SR28 The last output number of which the instruction high ○ -1 -1 -1 N R -1

2-56
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

speed output is used repeatedly

SR32 The last instruction address that exceeded the allowed
○ -1 -1 - N R -1 2_
SR33 range.
The system saves data to the memory card. This function
*SR36 ○ 0 - - N R/W 0
need to work with SM36.
*SR40 Number of error logs ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR41 Error log pointer ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR43 Error log 1: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR44 Error log 1: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR45 Error log 1: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR46 Error log 1: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR47 Error log 1: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR49 Error log 2: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR50 Error log 2: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR51 Error log 2: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR52 Error log 2: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR53 Error log 2: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR55 Error log 3: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR56 Error log 3: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR57 Error log 3: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR58 Error log 3: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR59 Error log 3: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR61 Error log 4: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR62 Error log 4: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR63 Error log 4: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR64 Error log 4: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR65 Error log 4: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR67 Error log 5: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR68 Error log 5: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR69 Error log 5: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR70 Error log 5: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR71 Error log 5: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR73 Error log 6: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR74 Error log 6: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR75 Error log 6: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR76 Error log 6: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR77 Error log 6: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR79 Error log 7: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR80 Error log 7: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR81 Error log 7: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR82 Error log 7: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0

2-57
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR83 Error log 7: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0

_2 *SR85 Error log 8: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR86 Error log 8: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR87 Error log 8: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR88 Error log 8: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR89 Error log 8: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR91 Error log 9: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR92 Error log 9: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR93 Error log 9: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR94 Error log 9: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR95 Error log 9: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR97 Error log 10: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR98 Error log 10: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR99 Error log 10: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR100 Error log 10: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR101 Error log 10: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR103 Error log 11: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR104 Error log 11: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR105 Error log 11: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR106 Error log 11: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR107 Error log 11: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR109 Error log 12: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR110 Error log 12: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR111 Error log 12: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR112 Error log 12: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR113 Error log 12: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR115 Error log 13: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR116 Error log 13: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR117 Error log 13: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR118 Error log 13: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR119 Error log 13: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR121 Error log 14: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR122 Error log 14: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR123 Error log 14: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR124 Error log 14: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR125 Error log 14: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR127 Error log 15: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR128 Error log 15: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR129 Error log 15: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR130 Error log 15: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR131 Error log 15: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0

2-58
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR133 Error log 16: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0

*SR134 Error log 16: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0 2_
*SR135 Error log 16: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR136 Error log 16: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR137 Error log 16: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR139 Error log 17: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR140 Error log 17: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR141 Error log 17: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
SR142 Error log 17: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR143 Error log 17: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR145 Error log 18: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR146 Error log 18: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR147 Error log 18: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR148 Error log 18: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR149 Error log 18: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR151 Error log 19: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR152 Error log 19: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR153 Error log 19: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR154 Error log 19: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR155 Error log 19: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR157 Error log 20: The module ID ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR158 Error log 20: The error code ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR159 Error log 20: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR160 Error log 20: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR161 Error log 20: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
SR162 Duration of how long the PLC is being powered-on
○ - - - Y R -
SR163 (unit: minutes) (32-bit)
SR166 VR0 value (need to work with SM166) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR167 VR1 value (need to work with SM167) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR168 The value in the channel 1 of the Function Card 1 F2AD ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR169 The value in the channel 2 of the Function Card 1 F2AD ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR170 The value in the channel 1 of the Function Card 2 F2AD ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR171 The value in the channel 2 of the Function Card 2 F2AD ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR172 The value in the channel 1 of the Function Card 1 F2DA ○ 0 - 0 N R/W 0
SR173 The value in the channel 2 of the Function Card 1 F2DA ○ 0 - 0 N R/W 0
SR174 The value in the channel 1 of the Function Card 2 F2DA ○ 0 - 0 N R/W 0
SR175 The value in the channel 2 of the Function Card 2 F2DA ○ 0 - 0 N R/W 0
SR176 The communication ID of the Function Card 1 (COM11) ○ - - - N R 1
SR177 The protocol code of the Function Card 1 (COM11) ○ - - - N R 0x24
SR178 The communication ID of the Function Card 2 (COM12) ○ - - - N R 1
SR179 The protocol code of the Function Card 2 (COM12) ○ - - - N R 0x24

2-59
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR180 The last error code of warning ○ 0 - - N R 0

_2 SR182
The duration of a timeout for the Communication Card 1
○ - - - N R/W 200
(unit: minutes), when the value is 0, there is no timeout.
The duration of a timeout for the Communication Card 2
SR183 ○ - - - N R/W 200
(unit: minutes), when the value is 0, there is no timeout.
The communication cycle time of all the remote modules
SR185 ○ 0 - - N R 0
(unit: minutes)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR190 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 1 (default: 1-time frequency)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR191 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 2 (default: 1-time frequency)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR192 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 3 (default: 1-time frequency)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR193 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 4 (default: 1-time frequency)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR194 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 5 (default: 1-time frequency)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR195 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 6 (default: 1-time frequency)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR196 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 7 (default: 1-time frequency)
Frequency multiplication of the high speed counter
SR197 ○ 1 - - N R/W 1
group 8 (default: 1-time frequency)
16#0F 16#0FD 16#0F 16#0F
SR198 N
DB B DB DB
Pi (π), floating-point number (32-bit) ○ R
16#40 16#404 16#40 16#40
SR199 N
49 9 49 49
*SR201 Communication address of COM1 ○ - - - H R/W 1
*SR202 Communication address of COM2 ○ - - - H R/W 1
16#00
*SR209 Communication protocol of COM1 ○ - - - H R/W
24
COM1 communication timeout (unit: minute) 0 means
*SR210 ○ - - - H R/W 0
no timeout
16#00
*SR212 Communication protocol of COM2 ○ - - - H R/W
24
COM2 communication timeout (unit: minute) 0 means
*SR213 ○ - - - H R/W 0
no timeout
*SR215 Name of the function car 1 ○ - - - N R 0
*SR216 Name of the function car 2 ○ - - - N R 0
SR217 Baudrate value for COM1 (unit:100) ○ 96 - - H R/W 96
SR218 Baudrate value for COM2 (unit:100) ○ 96 - - H R/W 96
Value of the year in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~99
*SR220 ○ - - - Y R 0
(A.D.)
*SR221 Value of the month in the real-time clock (RTC): 01~12 ○ - - - Y R 1

2-60
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR222 Value of the day in the real-time clock (RTC): 1~31 ○ - - - Y R 1

*SR223 Value of the hour in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~23 ○ - - - Y R 0 2_
*SR224 Value of the minute in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~59 ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR225 Value of the second in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~59 ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR226 Value of the week in the real-time clock (RTC): 1~7 ○ - - - Y R 1
*SR227 Number of download logs (The maximum number is 20.) ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR228 Download log pointer ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR229 Download log 1: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR230 Download log 1: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR231 Download log 1: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR232 Download log 1: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR233 Download log 2: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR234 Download log 2: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR235 Download log 2: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR236 Download log 2: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR237 Download log 3: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR238 Download log 3: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR239 Download log 3: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR240 Download log 3: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR241 Download log 4: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR242 Download log 4: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR243 Download log 4: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR244 Download log 4: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR245 Download log 5: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR246 Download log 5: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR247 Download log 5: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR248 Download log 5: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR249 Download log 6: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR250 Download log 6: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR251 Download log 6: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR252 Download log 6: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR253 Download log 7: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR254 Download log 7: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR255 Download log 7: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR256 Download log 7: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR257 Download log 8: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR258 Download log 8: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR259 Download log 8: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR260 Download log 8: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR261 Download log 9: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR262 Download log 9: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0

2-61
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR263 Download log 9: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0

_2 *SR264 Download log 9: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR265 Download log 10: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR266 Download log 10: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR267 Download log 10: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR268 Download log 10: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR269 Download log 11: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR270 Download log 11: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR271 Download log 11: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR272 Download log 11: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR273 Download log 12: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR274 Download log 12: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR275 Download log 12: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR276 Download log 12: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR277 Download log 13: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR278 Download log 13: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR279 Download log 13: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR280 Download log 13: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR281 Download log 14: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR282 Download log 14: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR283 Download log 14: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR284 Download log 14: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR285 Download log 15: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR286 Download log 15: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR287 Download log 15: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR288 Download log 15: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR289 Download log 16: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR290 Download log 16: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR291 Download log 16: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR292 Download log 16: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR293 Download log 17: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR294 Download log 17: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR295 Download log 17: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR296 Download log 17: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR297 Download log 18: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR298 Download log 18: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR299 Download log 18: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR300 Download log 18: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR301 Download log 19: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR302 Download log 19: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR303 Download log 19: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0

2-62
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR304 Download log 19: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0

*SR305 Download log 20: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0 2_
*SR306 Download log 20: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR307 Download log 20: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR308 Download log 20: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
Number of PLC status change logs (The maximum
*SR309 ○ - - - Y R 0
number is 20.)
*SR310 PLC status change log pointer ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR311 PLC status change log 1: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR312 PLC status change log 1: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR313 PLC status change log 1: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR314 PLC status change log 1: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR315 PLC status change log 2: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR316 PLC status change log 2: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR317 PLC status change log 2: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR318 PLC status change log 2: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR319 PLC status change log 3: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR320 PLC status change log 3: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR321 PLC status change log 3: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR322 PLC status change log 3: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR323 PLC status change log 4: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR324 PLC status change log 4: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR325 PLC status change log 4: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR326 PLC status change log 4: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR327 PLC status change log 5: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR328 PLC status change log 5: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR329 PLC status change log 5: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR330 PLC status change log 5: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR331 PLC status change log 6: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR332 PLC status change log 6: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR333 PLC status change log 6: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR334 PLC status change log 6: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR335 PLC status change log 7: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR336 PLC status change log 7: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR337 PLC status change log 7: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR338 PLC status change log 7: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR339 PLC status change log 8: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR340 PLC status change log 8: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR341 PLC status change log 8: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR342 PLC status change log 8: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR343 PLC status change log 9: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0

2-63
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR344 PLC status change log 9: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
_2 *SR345 PLC status change log 9: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR346 PLC status change log 9: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR347 PLC status change log 10: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR348 PLC status change log 10: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR349 PLC status change log 10: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR350 PLC status change log 10: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR351 PLC status change log 11: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR352 PLC status change log 11: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR353 PLC status change log 11: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR354 PLC status change log 11: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR355 PLC status change log 12: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR356 PLC status change log 12: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR357 PLC status change log 12: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR358 PLC status change log 12: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR359 PLC status change log 13: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR360 PLC status change log 13: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR361 PLC status change log 13: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR362 PLC status change log 13: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR363 PLC status change log 14: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR364 PLC status change log 14: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR365 PLC status change log 14: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR366 PLC status change log 14: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR367 PLC status change log 15: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR368 PLC status change log 15: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR369 PLC status change log 15: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR370 PLC status change log 15: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR371 PLC status change log 16: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR372 PLC status change log 16: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR373 PLC status change log 16: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR374 PLC status change log 16: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR375 PLC status change log 17: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR376 PLC status change log 17: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR377 PLC status change log 17: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR378 PLC status change log 17: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR379 PLC status change log 18: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR380 PLC status change log 18: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR381 PLC status change log 18: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR382 PLC status change log 18: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR383 PLC status change log 19: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR384 PLC status change log 19: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0

2-64
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR385 PLC status change log 19: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR386 PLC status change log 19: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0 2_
*SR387 PLC status change log 20: The action number ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR388 PLC status change log 20: The year and the month ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR389 PLC status change log 20: The day and the hour ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR390 PLC status change log 20: The minute and the second ○ - - - Y R 0
Value of the year in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~99
*SR391 ○ - - - Y R 0
(A.D.)
*SR392 Value of the month in the real-time clock (RTC): 01~12 ○ - - - Y R 1
*SR393 Value of the day in the real-time clock (RTC): 1~31 ○ - - - Y R 1
*SR394 Value of the hour in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~23 ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR395 Value of the minute in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~59 ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR396 Value of the second in the real-time clock (RTC): 00~59 ○ - - - Y R 0
*SR397 Value of the week in the real-time clock (RTC): 1~7 ○ - - - Y R 1
When the PLC runs, the value in SR407 increases by
SR407 one every second. SR407 counts from 0 to 32767, and ○ 0 0 - N R/W 0
then from -32768 to 0.
When the PLC runs, the value in SR408 increases by
SR408 one every scan cycle. SR408 counts from 0 to 32767, ○ 0 0 - N R/W 0
and then from -32768 to 0.
SR411 The current scan time is stored in SR411 and SR412, and ○ 0 - - N R 0
the unit of measurement is 100 microseconds. The value
of the millisecond is stored in SR411. (The range is
0~65535.) The value of the microsecond is stored in
SR412 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR421. (The range is 0~900.). For example, 12 is stored
in SR411 and 300 is stored in SR412 when the current
scan time is 12.3 milliseconds.
SR413 The maximum scan time is stored in SR413 and SR414,
and the unit of measurement is 100 microseconds. The ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR414
value of the millisecond is stored in SR413.
SR415 The maximum scan time is stored in SR415 and SR416,
and the unit of measurement is 100 microseconds. The ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR416
value of the millisecond is stored in SR415.
Duration of the timer interrupt I601 (unit: minutes); the
SR421 default is 0, meaning the system will follow the settings in ○ 0 0 - N R/W 0
HWCONFIG.
Duration of the timer interrupt I602 (unit: minutes); the
SR422 default is 0, meaning the system will follow the settings in ○ 0 0 - N R/W 0
HWCONFIG.
Duration of the timer interrupt I603 (unit: minutes); the
SR423 default is 0, meaning the system will follow the settings in ○ 0 0 - N R/W 0
HWCONFIG.
Duration of the timer interrupt I604 (unit: minutes); the
SR424 default is 0, meaning the system will follow the settings in ○ 0 0 - N R/W 0
HWCONFIG.

2-65
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR440 ○ - - - Y R -
_2 MAC address
SR441 (Ex: 12:34:56:78:9A:BC => SR440=16#1234, ○ - - - Y R -
SR441=16#5678, SR442=16#9ABC)
SR442 ○ - - - Y R -

SR443 The PLC series ○ - - - Y R -

SR444 EX：AS324MTAW15500012 ○ - - - Y R -
SR445 AS SR443 = 16#5341 ○ - - - Y R -
SR446 32  SR444 = 16#3233 ○ - - - Y R -
SR447 4M  SR445 = 16#4D34 ○ - - - Y R -
TA  SR446 = 16#4154
SR448 ○ - - - Y R -
W1  SR447 = 16#3157
SR449 ○ - - - Y R -
55  SR448 = 16#3535
SR450 ○ - - - Y R -
00  SR449 = 16#3030
01  SR450 = 16#3130
SR451 ○ - - - Y R -
2  SR451 = 16#0032
If an error occurs during the operation of the memory
*SR453 ○ - - - Y R 0
card, the error code will be recorded.
SR460 The position where Y0.0/axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) is outputting.
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR461 (unit: number of pulse)

SR462 The output mode for the axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ - - - Y R/W 0

SR463 The starting/ending frequency of the axis 1(Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR464 The accelerating time of the axis 1(Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR465 The decelerating time of the axis 1(Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR466 The JOG frequency of the axis 1(Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
The number of the axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) in the position
SR467 ○ 0 0 - N R 0
planning table that is currently outputting
The numerator value transferred from the machine unit in
SR468 ○ - - - H R/W 0
the axis 1
The denominator value transferred from the machine unit
SR469 ○ - - - H R/W 0
in the axis 1
SR470 The position of the Machine unit in axis 1
○ - - - Y R 0
SR471 (single-precision floating-point values)
SR472
The target frequency of the fixed slope in axis 1 ○ - - - Y R 0
SR473
SR474 The position where Y0.1 is outputting.
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR475 (unit: number of pulse)
SR476 The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.1 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR477 The accelerating/decelerating time of the Y0.1. ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR480 The position where Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) is outputting.
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR481 (unit: number of pulse)
SR482 The output mode for the axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ - - - Y R/W 0

2-66
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.2/axis 2

SR483 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
(Y0.2/Y0.3)
2_
SR484 The accelerating time of the Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR485 The decelerating time of the Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR486 The JOG frequency of the axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
The number of the Y0.2/axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) in the position
SR487 ○ 0 0 - N R 0
planning table that is currently outputting
The numerator value transferred from the machine unit in
SR488 ○ - - - H R/W 0
the axis 2
The denominator value transferred from the machine unit
SR489 ○ - - - H R/W 0
in the axis 2
SR490 The position of the Machine unit in axis 2
○ - - - Y R 0
SR491 (single-precision floating-point values)
SR492
The target frequency of the fixed slope in axis 2 ○ - - - Y R 0
SR493
SR494 The position where Y0.3 is outputting. (unit: number of
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR495 pulse)
SR496 The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.3 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR497 The accelerating/decelerating time of the Y0.3. ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR500 The position where Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) is outputting.
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR501 (unit: number of pulse)
SR502 The output mode for the axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ - - - Y R/W 0
The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.4/axis 3
SR503 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
(Y0.4/Y0.5)
SR504 The accelerating time of the Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR505 The decelerating time of the Y0.4/axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR506 The JOG frequency of the axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
The number of the axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) in the position
SR507 ○ 0 0 - N R 0
planning table that is currently outputting
The numerator value transferred from the machine unit in
SR508 ○ - - - H R/W 0
the axis 3
The denominator value transferred from the machine unit
SR509 ○ - - - H R/W 0
in the axis 3
SR510 The position of the Machine unit in axis 3
○ - - - Y R 0
SR511 (single-precision floating-point values)
SR512
The target frequency of the fixed slope in axis 3 ○ - - - Y R 0
SR513
SR514 The position where Y0.5 is outputting. (unit: number of
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR515 pulse)
SR516 The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.5 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR517 The accelerating/decelerating time of the Y0.5 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR520 The position where Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) is outputting. ○ - - - Y R/W 0

2-67
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR521 (unit: number of pulse)

_2 SR522 The output mode for the axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ - - - Y R/W 0

The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.6/axis 4
SR523 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
(Y0.6/Y0.7)
SR524 The accelerating time of the Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR525 The decelerating time of the Y0.6/axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR526 The JOG frequency of the axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
The number of the axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) in the position
SR527 ○ 0 0 - N R 0
planning table that is currently outputting
The numerator value transferred from the machine unit in
SR528 ○ - - - H R/W 0
the axis 4
The denominator value transferred from the machine unit
SR529 ○ - - - H R/W 0
in the axis 4
SR530 The position of the Machine unit in axis 4
○ - - - Y R 0
SR531 (single-precision floating-point values)
SR532
The target frequency of the fixed slope in axis 4 ○ - - - Y R 0
SR533
SR534 The position where Y0.7 is outputting. (unit: number of
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR535 pulse)
SR536 The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.7 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR537 The accelerating/decelerating time of the Y0.7 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR540 The position where Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) is outputting.
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR541 (unit: number of pulse)
SR542 The output mode for the axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ - - - Y R/W 0
The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.8/axis 5
SR543 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
(Y0.8/Y0.9)
SR544 The accelerating time of the Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR545 The decelerating time of the Y0.8/axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR546 The JOG frequency of the axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
The number of the axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) in the position
SR547 ○ 0 0 - N R 0
planning table that is currently outputting
The numerator value transferred from the machine unit in
SR548 ○ - - - H R/W 0
the axis 5
The denominator value transferred from the machine unit
SR549 ○ - - - H R/W 0
in the axis 5
SR550 The position of the Machine unit in axis 5
○ - - - Y R 0
SR551 (single-precision floating-point values)
SR552
The target frequency of the fixed slope in axis 5 ○ - - - Y R 0
SR553
SR554 The position where Y0.9 is outputting. (unit: number of
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR555 pulse)
SR556 The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.9 ○ - - - Y R/W 200

2-68
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR557 The accelerating/decelerating time of the Y0.9 ○ - - - Y R/W 200

SR560 The position where Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) is
○ - - - Y R/W 0
2_
SR561 outputting. (unit: number of pulse)

SR562 The output mode for the axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ - - - Y R/W 0

The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.10/axis 6
SR563 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
(Y0.10/Y0.11)
SR564 The accelerating time of the Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR565 The decelerating time of the Y0.10/axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR566 The JOG frequency of the axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ - - - Y R/W 200
The number of the axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) in the position
SR567 ○ 0 0 - N R 0
planning table that is currently outputting
The numerator value transferred from the machine unit in
SR568 ○ - - - H R/W 0
the axis 6
The denominator value transferred from the machine unit
SR569 ○ - - - H R/W 0
in the axis 6
SR570 The position of the Machine unit in axis 6
○ - - - Y R 0
SR571 (single-precision floating-point values)
SR572
The target frequency of the fixed slope in axis 6 ○ - - - Y R 0
SR573
SR574 The position where Y0.11 is outputting. (unit: number of
○ - - - Y R/W 0
SR575 pulse)
SR576 The starting/ending frequency of the Y0.11 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
SR577 The accelerating/decelerating time of the Y0.11 ○ - - - Y R/W 200
*SR580 The position of the positive limit for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR581 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR582 The position of the negative limit for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR583 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR584 The position of the positive limit for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR585 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR586 The position of the negative limit for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR587 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR588 The position of the positive limit for axis 3(Y0.4/Y0.5) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR589 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR590 The position of the negative limit for axis 3(Y0.4/Y0.5) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR591 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR592 The position of the positive limit for axis 4(Y0.6/Y0.7) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR593 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR594 The position of the negative limit for axis 4(Y0.6/Y0.7) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR595 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR596 The position of the positive limit for axis 5(Y0.8/Y0.9) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR597 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)

2-69
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

*SR598 The position of the negative limit for axis 5(Y0.8/Y0.9) in

○ - - - H R/W 0
_2 *SR599 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)
*SR600 The position of the positive limit for axis 6(Y0.10/Y0.11) in
○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR601 ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)

*SR602 The position of the negative limit for axis 6(Y0.10/Y0.11)

○ - - - H R/W 0
*SR603 in ISPSoft (unit: number of pulse)

*SR604 The S curve mode for axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) ○ 0 - - N R/W 0

*SR605 The S curve mode for axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) ○ 0 - - N R/W 0
*SR606 The S curve mode for axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) ○ 0 - - N R/W 0
*SR607 The S curve mode for axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) ○ 0 - - N R/W 0
*SR608 The S curve mode for axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) ○ 0 - - N R/W 0
*SR609 The S curve mode for axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) ○ 0 - - N R/W 0
SR610
The current output speed of axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1) (unit: Hz) ○ 0 0 0 N R 0
SR611
SR612
The current output speed of axis 2 (Y0.2/Y0.3) (unit: Hz) ○ 0 0 0 N R 0
SR613
SR614 The current output speed of axis 3 (Y0.4/Y0.5) (unit: Hz)
○ 0 0 0 N R 0
SR615
SR616 The current output speed of axis 4 (Y0.6/Y0.7) (unit: Hz)
○ 0 0 0 N R 0
SR617
SR618 The current output speed of axis 5 (Y0.8/Y0.9) (unit: Hz)
○ 0 0 0 N R 0
SR619
SR620 The current output speed of axis 6 (Y0.10/Y0.11) (unit:
Hz) ○ 0 0 0 N R 0
SR621
The condition of the external interrupt : the input points of
SR623 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
X0.0~X0.15 are falling-edge triggered
The condition of the external interrupt : the input points of
SR624 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
X0.0~X0.15 are rising-edge triggered
The condition of the high-speed comparator interrupt
SR625 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
I200~I233
The condition of the high-speed comparator interrupt
SR626 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
I240~I253
The condition of the high-speed comparator interrupt
SR627 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
I260~I267
SR628 The condition of the communication interrupts I300~I307 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
SR629 The condition of the output interrupts I500~I505 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
SR630 The condition of the output interrupts I510~I519 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
SR632 The condition of the timer interrupts I601~I604 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
The condition of the extension module interrupts
SR633 ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF
I400~I415
SR634 The condition of the extension module interrupts ○ FFFF FFFF - N R FFFF

2-70
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

I416~I431

SR658
The number of the Delta CANopen communication axis
○ 0 - - N R 0 2_
from Delta servo which has a communication error
SR659 Delta CANopen communication error ○ 0 - - N R 0
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR661 ○ 0 - - N R 0
1 from Delta servo
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR662 2 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR663 3 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR664 4 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR665 5 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR666 6 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR667 7 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The PR command of Delta CANopen communication axis
SR668 8 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 1
SR671 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 2
SR672 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 3
SR673 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 4
SR674 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 5
SR675 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 6
SR676 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 7
SR677 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The alarm code of Delta CANopen communication axis 8
SR678 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 1
SR681 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 2
SR682 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 3
SR683 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 4
SR684 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 5
SR685 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 6
SR686 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 7
SR687 from Delta servo ○ 0 - - N R 0
The DO state of Delta CANopen communication axis 8
SR688 ○ 0 - - N R 0
from Delta servo
SR691 The current position of Delta CANopen communication
○ 0 - - N R 0
SR692 axis 1 from Delta servo (32-bit)

2-71
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR693 The current position of Delta CANopen communication

axis 2 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
_2 SR694
SR695 The current position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 3 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR696
SR697 The current position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 4 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR698
SR699 The current position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 5 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR700
SR701 The current position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 6 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR702
SR703 The current position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 7 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR704
SR705 The current position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 8 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR706
SR711 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
○ 0 - - N R 0
SR712 axis 1 from Delta servo (32-bit)
SR713 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 2 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR714
SR715 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 3 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR716
SR717 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 4 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR718
SR719 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 5 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR720
SR721 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 6 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR722
SR723 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 7 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR724
SR725 The target position of Delta CANopen communication
axis 8 from Delta servo (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR726
The code of the state of the master/slave in CANopen
SR820 ○ - - - Y R 0
DS301 communicaiton
SR821 The code of the CANopen DS301 version ○ - - - Y R -
SR822 CANopen communication baudrate (unit: 1kbps) ○ - - - H R 125
The code of the master state in CANopen DS301
SR825 ○ 0 - - N R 0
communication
The state of slave ID 1~16 in CANopen DS301
SR826 ○ 0 - - N R 0
communication
The state of slave ID 17~32 in CANopen DS301
SR827 ○ 0 - - N R 0
communication
The state of slave ID 33~48 in CANopen DS301
SR828 ○ 0 - - N R 0
communication

2-72
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The state of slave ID 49~64 in CANopen DS301

SR829 ○ 0 - - N R 0
communication
2_
The state of slave ID 1 in CANopen DS301
SR830 ○ 0 - - N R 0
communication
The state of slave ID 2 in CANopen DS301
SR831 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 3 in CANopen DS301
SR832 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 4 in CANopen DS301
SR833 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 5 in CANopen DS301
SR834 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 6 in CANopen DS301
SR835 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 7 in CANopen DS301
SR836 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 8 in CANopen DS301
SR837 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 9 in CANopen DS301
SR838 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 10 in CANopen DS301
SR839 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 11 in CANopen DS301
SR840 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 12 in CANopen DS301
SR841 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 13 in CANopen DS301
SR842 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 14 in CANopen DS301
SR843 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 15 in CANopen DS301
SR844 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 16 in CANopen DS301
SR845 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 17 in CANopen DS301
SR846 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 18 in CANopen DS301
SR847 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 19 in CANopen DS301
SR848 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 20 in CANopen DS301
SR849 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 21 in CANopen DS301
SR850 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 22 in CANopen DS301
SR851 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 23 in CANopen DS301
SR852 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 24 in CANopen DS301
SR853 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 25 in CANopen DS301
SR854 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 26 in CANopen DS301
SR855 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 27 in CANopen DS301
SR856 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0

2-73
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The state of slave ID 28 in CANopen DS301

SR857 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
_2 The state of slave ID 29 in CANopen DS301
SR858 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 30 in CANopen DS301
SR859 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 31 in CANopen DS301
SR860 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 32 in CANopen DS301
SR861 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 33 in CANopen DS301
SR862 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 34 in CANopen DS301
SR863 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 35 in CANopen DS301
SR864 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 36in CANopen DS301
SR865 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 37 in CANopen DS301
SR866 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 38 in CANopen DS301
SR867 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 39 in CANopen DS301
SR868 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0

The state of slave ID 40 in CANopen DS301

SR869 ○ 0 - - N R 0
communication
The state of slave ID 41 in CANopen DS301
SR870 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 42 in CANopen DS301
SR871 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 43 in CANopen DS301
SR872 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 44 in CANopen DS301
SR873 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 45 in CANopen DS301
SR874 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 46 in CANopen DS301
SR875 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 47 in CANopen DS301
SR876 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 48 in CANopen DS301
SR877 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 49 in CANopen DS301
SR878 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 50 in CANopen DS301
SR879 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 51 in CANopen DS301
SR880 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 52 in CANopen DS301
SR881 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 53 in CANopen DS301
SR882 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 54 in CANopen DS301
SR883 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 55 in CANopen DS301
SR884 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0

2-74
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The state of slave ID 56 in CANopen DS301

SR885 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0

SR886
The state of slave ID 57 in CANopen DS301
○ 0 - - N R 0
2_
communication
The state of slave ID 58 in CANopen DS301
SR887 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 59 in CANopen DS301
SR888 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 60 in CANopen DS301
SR889 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 61 in CANopen DS301
SR890 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 62 in CANopen DS301
SR891 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 63 in CANopen DS301
SR892 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0
The state of slave ID 64 in CANopen DS301
SR893 communication ○ 0 - - N R 0

SR900
The number of the samplings in the data logger (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR901
The code for the executions of data logger and the
memory card (need to work with SM456), e.g. H5AA5:
SR902 ○ 0 - - N R/W 0
write the sampling data from the data logger into the
memory card.
SR1000
Ethernet IP address (32-bit) ○ - - - H R/W 0
SR1001

SR1002
Ethernet netmask address (32-bit) ○ - - - H R/W 0
SR1003
SR1004
Ethernet gateway address (32-bit) ○ - - - H R/W 0
SR1005
SR1006 Time for which the TCP connection has been persistent ○ - - - H R/W 30
SR1007 Ethernet transmission speed ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1009 Number of TCP connections ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1010 A specific time when to resend via the TCP connection ○ - - - N R/W 20
SR1011 The connection number of MODBUS/TCP Server ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1012 The connection number of MODBUS/TCP Client ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1013 The connection number of EtherNet/IP Adapter ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1014 The connection number of EtherNet/IP Scanner ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1020 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 1 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1021 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 2 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1022 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 3 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1023 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 4 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1024 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 5 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1025 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 6 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1026 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 7 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1027 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 8 ○ 0 - - N R 0

2-75
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR1028 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 9 ○ 0 - - N R 0

_2 SR1029 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 10 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1030 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 11 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1031 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 12 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1032 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 13 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1033 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 14 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1034 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 15 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1035 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 16 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1036 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 17 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1037 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 18 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1038 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 19 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1039 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 20 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1040 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 21 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1041 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 22 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1042 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 23 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1043 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 24 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1044 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 25 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1045 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 26 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1046 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 27 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1047 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 28 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1048 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 29 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1049 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 30 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1050 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 31 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1051 The state of the EtherNet/IP connection 32 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1052 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 1 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1053 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 2 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1054 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 3 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1055 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 4 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1056 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 5 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1057 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 6 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1058 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 7 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1059 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 8 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1060 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 9 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1061 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 10 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1062 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 11 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1063 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 12 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1064 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 13 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1065 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 14 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1066 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 15 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1067 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 16 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1068 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 17 ○ 0 - - N R 0

2-76
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

SR1069 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 18 ○ 0 - - N R 0

SR1070 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 19 ○ 0 - - N R 0 2_
SR1071 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 20 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1072 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 21 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1073 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 22 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1074 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 23 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1075 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 24 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1076 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 25 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1077 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 26 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1078 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 27 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1079 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 28 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1080 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 29 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1081 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 30 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1082 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 31 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1083 Refreshing time for the EtherNet/IP connection 32 ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1100
The value of the input packet counter (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1101
SR1102
The value of the input octet counter (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1103
SR1104
The value of the output packet counter (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1105
SR1106
The value of the output octet counter (32-bit) ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1107
SR1116 Email counter ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1117 Email error counter ○ 0 - - N R 0
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1120 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 1
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1121 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 2
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1122 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 3
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1123 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 4
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1124 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 5
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1125 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 6
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1126 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 7
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1127 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 8
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1128 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 9

2-77
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The actual connection time for data exchange via the

*SR1129 ○ 0 - - N R 0
_2 Ethernet connection 10
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1130 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 11
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1131 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 12
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1132 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 13
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1133 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 14
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1134 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 15
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1135 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 16
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1136 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 17
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1137 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 18
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1138 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 19
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1139 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 20
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1140 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 21
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1141 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 22
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1142 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 23
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1143 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 24
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1144 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 25
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1145 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 26
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1146 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 27
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1147 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 28
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1148 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 29
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1149 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 30
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1150 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 31
The actual connection time for data exchange via the
*SR1151 ○ 0 - - N R 0
Ethernet connection 32
*SR1152 The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet ○ 0 - - N R 0

2-78
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

connection 1

*SR1153
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
connection 2
○ 0 - - N R 0 2_
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1154 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 3
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1155 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 4
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1156 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 5
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1157 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 6
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1158 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 7
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1159 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 8
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1160 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 9
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1161 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 10
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1162 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 11
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1163 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 12
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1164 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 13
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1165 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 14
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1166 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 15
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1167 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 16
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1168 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 17
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1169 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 18
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1170 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 19
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1171 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 20
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1172 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 21
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1173 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 22
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1174 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 23
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1175 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 24

2-79
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet

*SR1176 ○ 0 - - N R 0
_2 connection 25
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1177 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 26
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1178 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 27
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1179 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 28
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1180 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 29
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1181 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 30
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1182 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 31
The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet
*SR1183 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 32
SR1318 Socket input counter ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1319 Socket output counter ○ 0 - - N R 0
SR1320 Socket error counter ○ 0 - - N R 0
The actual cycle time of connection 1~32 for data
*SR1335 exchange via COM1 ○ 0 - - N R 0

The number of connection that is currently performing a

*SR1336 ○ 0 - - N R 0
cyclical data exchange via COM1
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1340 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 1
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1341 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 2
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1342 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 3
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1343 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 4
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1344 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 5
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1345 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 6
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1346 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 7
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1347 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 8
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1348 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 9
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1349 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 10
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1350 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 11
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1351 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 12

2-80
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The error code for data exchange via the COM1

*SR1352 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 13
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
2_
*SR1353 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 14
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1354 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 15
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1355 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 16
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1356 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 17
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1357 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 18
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1358 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 19
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1359 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 20
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1360 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 21
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1361 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 22
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1362 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 23
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1363 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 24
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1364 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 25
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1365 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 26
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1366 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 27
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1367 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 28
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1368 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 29
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1369 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 30
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1370 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 31
The error code for data exchange via the COM1
*SR1371 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 32
The actual cycle time of connection 1~32 for data
*SR1375 exchange via COM2 ○ 0 - - N R 0

The number of connection that is currently performing a

*SR1376 ○ 0 - - N R 0
cyclical data exchange via COM2
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
*SR1380 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 1
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1381 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 2

2-81
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The error code for data exchange via the COM2

SR1382 ○ 0 - - N R 0
_2 connection 3
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1383 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 4
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1384 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 5
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1385 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 6
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1386 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 7
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1387 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 8
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1388 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 9
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1389 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 10
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1390 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 11
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1391 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 12
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1392 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 13
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1393 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 14
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1394 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 15
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1395 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 16
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1396 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 17
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1397 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 18
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1398 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 19
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1399 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 20
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1400 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 21
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1401 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 22
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1402 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 23
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1403 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 24
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1404 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 25
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1405 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 26

2-82
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

AS300 Series

Attribute
Latched
OFF STOP RUN

Default
SR Function   
ON RUN STOP

The error code for data exchange via the COM2

SR1406 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 27
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
2_
SR1407 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 28
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1408 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 29
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1409 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 30
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1410 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 31
The error code for data exchange via the COM2
SR1411 ○ 0 - - N R 0
connection 32
註 1：*之 SR 請參考 SM/SR 補充說明
註 2：SR 中所述之「通訊卡」係指 AS-F232、AS-F422 及 AS-F485。

2.2.15 Refresh Time of Special Data Registers

Special data
Refresh time
register
SR0~SR2 The register is refreshed when the program is executed in error.
SR4~SR6 The register is refreshed when there is a grammar check error
SR8~SR9 The register is refreshed when there is a watchdog timer error.
SR23 The register is refreshed when there is a watchdog timer error.
The register is refreshed when the last output number of which the instruction high speed output is
SR28
used repeatedly.
SR32 The register is refreshed once when there is an error. -1 means no error occurred.
The register is refreshed by users. Users set the flag SM36 to ON and the system will save the data
SR36
to the memory card. After the saving is complete, the system resets it to OFF automatically.
SR40~SR161 The register is refreshed when there is an error.
After the production of the PLC is complete, every time the PLC is supplied with power for more than
SR162~SR163
1 minute, the number increases by 1.
SR166~SR171 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR172~SR175 The register is refreshed by users.
SR176~SR179 The register is refreshed according to the settings in HWCONFIG.
SR180 The register is refreshed when the PLC is powered-on and powered-off.
The register is refreshed according to the settings in HWCONFIG when the PLC is powered-on.
SR182~SR183
Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR185 Whenever a remote module is activated, after a cycle scan, the system refreshes the cycle time.
SR190~SR197 The register is refreshed by users.
SR198~SR199 The register is refreshed when the PLC is powered-on.
The register is refreshed according to the settings in HWCONFIG when the PLC is powered-on.
SR201~SR213
Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR215~SR216 The register is refreshed by the system.
The register is refreshed according to the settings in HWCONFIG when powered-on. After that
SR217~SR218
users can edit.

2-83
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Special data
Refresh time
register
SR220~SR226 The register is refreshed every scan cycle.
SR227~SR308 The register is refreshed when the program is downloaded to the PLC.
SR309~SR390 The register is refreshed when the status of the PLC changes.
SR391~SR397 The register is refreshed every scan cycle.

_2 SR407 The register is refreshed every second.

SR408~SR416 The register is refreshed whenever the instruction END is executed.
SR421~SR424 The register is refreshed by users.
SR440~SR443 The register is refreshed when the PLC is powered-on.
SR444~SR451 The register is refreshed when the PLC is powered-on.
SR453 The register is refreshed when there is an error.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR460
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR462~SR466 The register is refreshed by users.
SR467 The register is refreshed by the system.
When the PLC is supplied with power, the register is refreshed according to the position planning
SR468~SR469
table. Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR470 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR472 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR474
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR476~SR477 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR480
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR482~SR486 The register is refreshed by users.
SR487 The register is refreshed by the system.
When the PLC is supplied with power, the register is refreshed according to the position planning
SR488~SR489
table. Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR490 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR492 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR494
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR496~SR497 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR500
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR502~SR506 The register is refreshed by users.
SR507 The register is refreshed by the system.
When the PLC is supplied with power, the register is refreshed according to the position planning
SR508~SR509
table. Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR510 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR512 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR514
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR516~SR517 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR520
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR522~SR526 The register is refreshed by users.
SR527 The register is refreshed by the system.

2-84
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Special data
Refresh time
register
When the PLC is supplied with power, the register is refreshed according to the position planning
SR528~SR529
table. Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR530 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR532 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR534
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the setting. 2_
SR536~SR537 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR540
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR542~SR546 The register is refreshed by users.
SR547 The register is refreshed by the system.
When the PLC is supplied with power, the register is refreshed according to the position planning
SR548~SR549
table. Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR550 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR552 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR554
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR556~SR557 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR560
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR562~SR566 The register is refreshed by users.
SR567 The register is refreshed by the system.
When the PLC is supplied with power, the register is refreshed according to the position planning
SR568~SR569
table. Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR570 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR572 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed by the system whenever the high-speed output instruction is executed and
SR574
the program is scanned. If the instruction is not executed, users can edit the settings.
SR576~SR577 The register is refreshed by users.
The register is refreshed according to the settings in HWCONFIG when the PLC is powered-on.
SR580~SR603
Users can edit the settings afterwards
SR604~SR609 The register is refreshed by users.
SR610~SR621 The register is refreshed whenever the output instruction is executed.
The register is refreshed whenever the instruction EIX or DIX is executed.
SR623~SR634 ON: the interrupt is enabled
OFF: the interrupt is disabled
SR658~SR901 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR820 The register is refreshed according to the settings in CANopen Builder.
SR821 The register is refreshed when the firmware is updated.
SR822 The register is refreshed according to the settings in HWCONFIG.
SR825~SR893 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR902 The register is refreshed by users.
SR1000~SR1006 The register is refreshed by users.
SR1007 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR1009 The register is refreshed by the system.
SR1010 The register is refreshed by users.
SR1011~SR1014 The register is refreshed by the system.

2-85
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Special data
Refresh time
register
1. The register is refreshed when a connection is established.
SR1020~SR1107
2. The register is refreshed every scan cycle.
SR1116~SR1117 The register is refreshed when the program is downloaded to the PLC.
SR1120~SR1183 The register is refreshed when the communication is complete.

_2 SR1318~SR1320
The register is refreshed when the parameter is downloaded to the PLC, or when the PLC is
supplied with power.
SR1335~SR1336 After the function of data exchange is enabled, the register is refreshed every scan cycle.
SR1340~SR1371 The register is refreshed when there is an error.
SR1375~SR1376 After the function of data exchange is enabled, the register is refreshed every scan cycle.
SR1380~SR1411 The register is refreshed when there is an error.

2.2.16 Additional Remarks on Special Auxiliary Relays and Special Data

Registers
1. The scan timeout timer
 SM8/SR8

When a scan timeout occurs during the execution of the program, the error LED indicator on the PLC is ON all
the time, and SM8 is ON.

The content of SR8 is the step address at which the watchdog timer is ON.
2. Clearing the warning light
 SM22

If SM22 is ON, the error log and the warning light will be cleared.

3. The real-time clock

 SM220, SR220~SR226, and SR391~SR397

SM220: Calibrating the real-time clock within ±30 seconds

When SM220 is switched from OFF to ON, the real-time clock is calibrated.

If the value of the second in the real-time clock is within the range between 0 and 29, the value of the minute is
fixed, and the value of the second is cleared to zero.

If the value of the second in the real-time clock is within the range between 30 and 59, the value of the minute
increases by one, and the value of the second is cleared to zero.

The corresponding functions and values of SR220~SR226 and SR391~SR397 are as follows.

Device
Binary-coded Decimal Function Value
decimal system system
SR220 SR391 Year 00~99 (A.D.)
SR221 SR392 Month 1~12
SR222 SR393 Day 1~31
SR223 SR394 Hour 0~23
SR224 SR395 Minute 0~59
SR225 SR396 Second 0~59

2-86
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Device
Binary-coded Decimal Function Value
decimal system system
SR226 SR397 Week 1~7
SR391~SR397 correspond to SR220~ SR226. The difference between SR220~ SR226 and SR391~SR397 lies
in the fact that the former adopts the binary-coded decimal while the latter adopts the decimal system. For
example, December is represented as 12 in SR392 while it is represented as 12 in the binary-coded decimal.
2_
Please refer to chapter 6 for more information related to the instruction of real-time clock.

4. The functions related to communication

 SM96~SM107, SM209~SM212, SR201~SR202, and SR209~SR216

SR215 and SR216 are used to record the interface code of the communication port on the PLC. The functions
represented by the interface codes are as follows.

Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function No card RS232 RS422 RS485 F2AD F2DA FCOPM
FCOPM function card only support Function Card 2.

When the interface of the communication port on the PLC is RS485, RS232, or RS422, SR209 records the
communication format of COM1 on the PLC, and SR212 records the communication format of COM2 on the PLC.
The setting values of the communication protocols are shown in the following table. Please refer to chapter 6 for
more information related to the communication instructions.

b0 Data length 7 (value=0) 8 (value=1)

00 ： None
b1
Parity bits 01 ： Odd parity bits
b2
10 ： Even parity bits
b3 Stop bits 1 bit (value=0) 2 bits (value=1)
b4 0001 （H 1） ： 4800
b5
0010 （H 2） ： 9600
b6
b7 0011 （H 3） ： 19200

0100 （H 4） ： 38400

0101 （H 5） ： 57600

0110 （H 6） ： 115200

0111 （H 7） ： 230400

1000 （H 8） ： 500000

1001 （H 9） ： 921000

1010 （16#A） ： Undefined

1011 （16#B） ： Undefined

1100 （16#C） ： Undefined

1101 （16#D） ： Undefined

1110 （16#E） ： Undefined

2-87
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

1111 （16#F） ： User-defined

*1

b8~b15 Undefined (reserved)

*1: Please refer to the HWCONFIG settings in ISPSoft for the user-defined baudrate.
*2: Please refer to section 6.19.3 for the use of communication flags and registers.

5. Clearing the contents of the device

_2  SM204/SM205

Device number Device which is cleared

The non-latched areas in the input relays, the output relays, the stepping relays, and
the auxiliary relays are cleared.
SM204
The non-latched areas in the timers, the counters, and the 32-bit counters are
All non-latched areas are
cleared.
cleared.
The non-latched areas in the data registers and the index registers are cleared.
The watchdog timer does not act during this period of time.
The latched areas in the timers, counters, and 32-bit counters are cleared.
SM205 The latched auxiliary relays are cleared.
All latched areas are cleared. The latched data registers are cleared.
The watchdog timer does not act during this period of time.
Please refer to section 2.1.4 for more information related to the latched areas in the device range.

6. The error log in the PLC

 SR40~SR161

SR40: The maximum number of error logs which are stored in SR40 is 20. Every error log occupies 6 registers.

SR41: The error log pointer points to the latest error log. When an error occurs, the value of the error log pointer
increases by one. The range of pointer values is 0~19. For example, the error log pointer points to the fourth error
log when the value in SR41 is 3.

The time when the errors occur and the positions where the errors occur are recorded in SR42~SR161. The
corresponding functions of these data registers are as follows.

Module Error Time when the error occurs

Number Slot
ID code Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
SR42 SR45 High SR45 Low SR46 High SR46 Low SR47 High SR47 Low
1 SR43 SR44
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR48 SR51 High SR51 Low SR52 High SR52 Low SR53 High SR53 Low
2 SR49 SR50
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR54 SR57 High SR57 Low SR58 High SR58 Low SR59 High SR59 Low
3 SR55 SR56
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR60 SR63 High SR63 Low SR64 High SR64 Low SR65 High SR65 Low
4 SR61 SR62
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR66 SR69 High SR69 Low SR70 High SR70 Low SR71 High SR71 Low
5 SR67 SR68
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR72 SR75 High SR75 Low SR76 High SR76 Low SR77 High SR77 Low
6 SR73 SR74
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR78 SR81 High SR81 Low SR82 High SR82 Low SR83 High SR83 Low
7 SR79 SR80
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR84 SR87 High SR87 Low SR88 High SR88 Low SR89 High SR89 Low
8 SR85 SR86
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

2-88
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Module Error Time when the error occurs

Number Slot
ID code Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
SR90 SR93 High SR93 Low SR94 High SR94 Low SR95 High SR95 Low
9 SR91 SR92
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR96 SR99 High SR99 Low SR100 High SR100 Low SR101 High SR101 Low
10 SR97 SR98
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

11
SR102
SR103 SR104
SR105 High SR105 SR106 High SR106 Low SR107 High SR107 Low 2_
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR108 SR111 High SR111 Low SR112 High SR112 Low SR113 High SR113 Low
12 SR109 SR110
Low byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
SR114 SR117 High SR117 SR118 High SR118 Low SR119 High SR119 Low
13 SR115 SR116
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR120 SR123 High SR123 SR124 High SR124 Low SR125 High SR125 Low
14 SR121 SR122
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR126 SR129 High SR129 SR130 High SR130 Low SR131 High SR131 Low
15 SR127 SR128
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR132 SR135 High SR135 SR136 High SR136 Low SR137 High SR137 Low
16 SR133 SR134
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR138 SR141 High SR141 SR142 High SR142 Low SR143 High SR143 Low
17 SR139 SR140
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR144 SR147 High SR147 SR148 High SR148 Low SR149 High SR149 Low
18 SR145 SR146
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR150 SR153 High SR153 SR154 High SR154 Low SR155 High SR155 Low
19 SR151 SR152
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte
SR156 SR159 High SR159 SR160 High SR160 Low SR161 High SR161 Low
20 SR157 SR158
Low byte byte Low byte byte byte byte byte

7. The download log in the PLC

 SR227~SR308

SR227: The maximum number of download logs which are stored in SR227 is 20. Every download log occupies 4
registers. The download actions which are recorded are numbered, as shown in the following table.

Download action Number

Downloading the program 1
Downloading the setting of the PLC 2
Downloading the module table 3
SR228: The download log pointer points to the latest download log. When a download action is executed, the value
of the download log pointer increases by one. The range of pointer values is 0~19. For example, the
download log pointer points to the fourth download log when the value in SR228 is 3.

The time when the downloading actions occur and the action numbers are recorded in SR229~SR30. The
corresponding functions of these data registers are as follows.

Action *Time when the download action occurs

Number
number Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
SR230 SR230 SR231 SR231 SR232 SR232
1 SR229
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

2-89
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Action *Time when the download action occurs

Number
number Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
SR234 SR234 SR235 SR235 SR236 SR236
2 SR233
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR238 SR238 SR239 SR239 SR240 SR240
3 SR237
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
_2 4 SR241
SR242 SR242 SR243 SR243 SR244 SR244
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR246 SR246 SR247 SR247 SR248 SR248
5 SR245
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR250 SR250 SR251 SR251 SR252 SR252
6 SR249
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR254 SR254 SR255 SR255 SR256 SR256
7 SR253
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR258 SR258 SR259 SR259 SR260 SR260
8 SR257
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR262 SR262 SR263 SR263 SR264 SR264
9 SR261
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR266 SR266 SR267 SR267 SR268 SR268
10 SR265
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR270 SR270 SR271 SR271 SR272 SR272
11 SR269
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR274 SR274 SR275 SR275 SR276 SR276
12 SR273
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR278 SR278 SR279 SR279 SR280 SR280
13 SR277
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR282 SR282 SR283 SR283 SR284 SR284
14 SR281
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR286 SR286 SR287 SR287 SR288 SR288
15 SR285
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR290 SR290 SR291 SR291 SR292 SR292
16 SR289
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR294 SR294 SR295 SR295 SR296 SR296
17 SR293
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR298 SR298 SR299 SR299 SR300 SR300
18 SR297
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR302 SR302 SR303 SR303 SR304 SR304
19 SR301
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR306 SR306 SR307 SR307 SR308 SR308
20 SR305
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
*Time when the download action occurs: The data is stored as the values in the binary-coded decimal. The range of
values is as follows.

Function Value
Year 00~99 (A.D.)
Month 01~12
Day 01~31
Hour 00~23

2-90
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Function Value
Minute 00~59
Second 00~59

8. The PLC status change log

 SR309~SR390

SR309: The maximum number of PLC status change logs which are stored in SR309 is 20. Every PLC status 2_
change log occupies 4 registers. The PLC status change actions which are recorded are numbered, as
shown in the following table.

PLC status change Number

The PLC is supplied with power. 1

The PLC is disconnected. 2

The PLC starts to run. 3

The PLC stops running. 4

Default setting of the PLC 5

SR310: The PLC status change log pointer points to the latest PLC status change log. When the PLC status is
changed once, the value of the PLC status change log pointer increases by one. The range of pointer values is
0~19. For example, the PLC status change log pointer points to the fourth PLC status change log when the value in
SR310 is 3.

The time when the PLC status change actions occur is recorded in SR311~SR390. The corresponding functions of
these data registers are as follows.

Action *Time when the PLC status change action occurs

Number
number Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
SR312 SR312 SR313 SR313 SR314 SR314
1 SR311
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR316 SR316 SR317 SR317 SR318 SR318
2 SR315
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR320 SR320 SR321 SR321 SR322 SR322
3 SR319
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR324 SR324 SR325 SR325 SR326 SR326
4 SR323
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR328 SR328 SR329 SR329 SR330 SR330
5 SR327
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR332 SR332 SR333 SR333 SR334 SR334
6 SR331
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR336 SR336 SR337 SR337 SR338 SR338
7 SR335
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR340 SR340 SR341 SR341 SR342 SR342
8 SR339
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR344 SR344 SR345 SR345 SR346 SR346
9 SR343
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR348 SR348 SR349 SR349 SR350 SR350
10 SR347
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

2-91
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Action *Time when the PLC status change action occurs

Number
number Year Month Day Hour Minute Second
SR352 SR352 SR353 SR353 SR354 SR354
11 SR351
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR356 SR356 SR357 SR357 SR358 SR358
12 SR355
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
_2 13 SR359
SR360 SR360 SR361 SR361 SR362 SR362
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR364 SR364 SR365 SR365 SR366 SR366
14 SR363
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR368 SR368 SR369 SR369 SR370 SR370
15 SR367
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR372 SR372 SR373 SR373 SR374 SR374
16 SR371
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR376 SR376 SR377 SR377 SR378 SR378
17 SR375
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR380 SR380 SR381 SR381 SR382 SR382
18 SR379
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR384 SR384 SR385 SR385 SR386 SR386
19 SR383
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte
SR388 SR388 SR389 SR389 SR390 SR390
20 SR387
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

*Time when the PLC status change action occurs: The data is stored as the values in the binary-coded decimal. The
range of values is as follows.

Function Value
Year 00~99 (A.D.)
Month 01~12
Day 01~31
Hour 00~23
Minute 00~59
Second 00~59

9. The PLC operation flag

 SM400~SM403

SM400: The normally-open contact

SM401: The normally-closed contact

SM402: SM402 is ON during the first scan time, and then is switched OFF. The pulse width equals one scan time.

2-92
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Users can use this contact to do the initial setting.

SM403: SM403 is OFF during the first scan time, and then is switched ON. That is, the negative pulse is generated
the moment the PLC runs.

T he PLC r uns .

SM400
2_
SM401

SM402

SM403
Scan ti me

10. The initial clock pulse

 SM404，SM405，SM406，SM407

The PLC provides seven types of clock pulses. When the PLC is supplied with power, the seven types of clock
pulses act automatically.

Device Function
10 millisecond clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for 5 milliseconds and is OFF for 5
SM404
milliseconds
100 millisecond clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for 50 milliseconds and is OFF for 50
SM405
milliseconds
200 millisecond clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for 100 milliseconds and is OFF for 100
SM406
milliseconds
One second clock pulse during which the pulse is ON for 500 milliseconds and is OFF for 500
SM407
milliseconds
The clock pulses are illustrated as follows.
10 ms

SM404 (10 ms) 100 Hz

5 ms

100 ms

SM405 (100 ms) 10 Hz

50 ms

200 ms

SM406 (200 ms) 5 Hz

100 ms

1 sec

SM407 (1 sec) 1 Hz

500 ms

2-93
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

11. The flags related to the memory card

 SM36、SM450~SM453、SM456、SR36、SR453、SR902

The memory card is used to backup the data in the PLC. Please refer to chapter 6 for instruction concerning the
memory card.

Device Function
_2 Enable saving data to the memory card. When it is ON, the PLC will run according to the value in the
SM36
SR36.
Whether the memory card exists
SM450 ON: The memory card exists.
OFF: The memory card does not exist.
The data in the memory card is being accessed.
SM452 ON: The data in the memory card is being accessed.
OFF: The data in the memory card is not accessed.
An error occurs during the operation of the memory card.
SM453
ON: An error occurs.
SM456 Execution of data logger and the memory card. (ON: execution by the values in SR902)

SR36 The system saves data to the memory card. This function need to work with SM36.

SR453 If an error occurs during the operation of the memory card, the error code will be recorded.

The code for the executions of data logger and the memory card (need to work with SM456), e.g.
SR902
H5AA5: write the sampling data from the data logger into the memory card.

 SR36 only store 2 logs：

A. The number 1234 means the error log (SR40~SR161) of the PLC is stored in the memory card.
B. The number 3456 means the error log (SR40~SR161) of the PLC and the PLC state changing log
(SR309~SR390) are stored in the memory card.

12. The high-speed output instruction is being executed. The output immediately stops when the instruction is
disabled or stops.

 SM476, SM477, SM496, SM497, SM516, SM517, SM536, SM537, SM556, SM557, SM576, SM577:

OFF (default): deceleration stops

ON: immediate stops

 SM463, SM474, SM483, SM494, SM503, SM514, SM523, SM534, SM543, SM554, SM563, SM574：the flags
are used to pause outputting.
When the flag is OFF to ON, it means the output will be stopped. This should work with the abovementioned flags;
refer to the section above for more actions on stop).

When the flag is ON to OFF, it means the rest of the outputs will be executed.

13. Position control output limit in ISPSoft

 SR580~SR603

Positive output limit: set up the limit in ISPSoft; when the output position is greater than the positive limit,
the output stops immediately.

2-94
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

Negative output limit: set up the limit in ISPSoft; when the output position is smaller than the negative
limit, the output stops immediately.

When the limits of positive and negative output are both 0, it means the function is disabled. This
function should work with the output instruction. The system will only check the limit set in the ISPSoft,
when the instruction is executed. Thus it will not come to an immediate stop even when it is out of the
output limit. If an immediate stop is needed, it is suggested to use the external input as the way to check
the limit. 2_
14. S curve mode

 SR604~SR609, SM468, SM488, SM508, SM528, SM548, SM568

There are 3 S curves, small, medium and large. The range is between 0 to 2. When the value exceeds the range,
the system will treat the value as the minimum 0 or the maximum 2.

The S curve mode should work with the flags such as SM468, SM488, SM568 and so on. If the flag is ON, the
parameters of the S curve will be executed by the output instruction.

15. Ethernet IP related flags

 SM1000、SR1000~SR1006

SM/SR Function Action

ON: the values in SR1000~SR1006 is written into the flash
memory. After it is written, the PLC will reset it to OFF.
NOTE 1: do not set the flag to ON continuously to avoid
SM1000 Ethernet setting flag.
damage on the flash memory.
NOTE 2: It is required the PLC to be in the stop state to write
the values into the flash memory.
SR1000 For example: 192.168.1.5, SR1000 will be 16#C0A8 and
Ethernet IP address (32-bit) SR1001 will be 0105.
SR1001
SR1002 For example: 255.255.255.0, SR1002 will be 16#FFFF, and
Ethernet netmask address (32-bit) SR1003 will be FF00
SR1003
SR1004 For example: 192.168.1.1, SR1004 will be 16#C0A8, and
Ethernet gateway address (32-bit) SR1005 will be 0101
SR1005
Time for which the TCP connection Unit: second
SR1006
has been persistent
 SM1090、SM1091、SM1106~SM1109

SM Function Action
SM1090 The TCP connection is busy. ON: TCP connection timeout
SM1091 The UDP connection is busy. ON: UDP connection timeout
OFF: when the PHY initialization succeeds.
SM1106 Ethernet connection error
ON: when the PHY initialization fails.
OFF: correct basic setting
SM1107 Ethernet basic setting error
ON: basic setting error
TCP/UDP socket─the local port is
SM1109 ON: the same port has been used
already used.
For the error codes, the corresponding LED indicators, and other troubleshooting, please refer to chapter 12 of the AS
Series operation manual.

2-95
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

16. Email settings

 SM1113，SM1116~SM1155

If the sending of email fails, the flag of the email service error SM1113 will be ON.

The triggers of email sending and the corresponding flags (SM1116~SM1155) are listed below:

_2 Item
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4
Function

SM1116 SM1126 SM1136 SM1146

Email service
ON: enabled , OFF: disabled
SM1117 SM1127 SM1137 SM1147
Email sending
ON: email is sending now, OFF: email has been sent
SM1119 SM1129 SM1139 SM1149
Emails sent successfully
ON: email has been sent successfully

SM1120 SM1130 SM1140 SM1150

Error 1 of email sending
The email cannot be sent due to email content error

SM1122 SM1132 SM1142 SM1152

SMTP response timeout
After sending the email out, the SMTP server responds timeout.

SMTP server response SM1123 SM1133 SM1143 SM1153

error After sending the email out, the SMTP server responds error.

SM1124 SM1134 SM1144 SM1154

Error 2 of email sending
After sending the email out, the size of the attachment exceeds the limit.
SM1125 SM1135 SM1145 SM1155
Error 3 of email sending
After sending the email out, the attachment is not found, SM1125 is ON.

17. Flags and registers concerning data exchange

 Data exchange flags for COM1 connections

SM Type Function

SM750 R/W Data exchange via COM1 has been enabled by ISPSoft.

SM752 ~ SM783 R/W Connection 1~32 via COM1 for data exchange has been started.
SM784 ~ SM815 R The data has been received via COM 1 connection 1~32 for data exchange.
SM816 ~ SM847 R An error occurs in the COM1 connection 1~32 for data exchange

 Data exchange flags for COM2 connections

SM Type Function
SM862 R/W Data exchange via COM2 has been enabled by ISPSoft.
SM864 ~ SM895 R/W Connection 1~32 via COM2 for data exchange has been started.
SM896 ~ SM927 R The data has been received via COM2 connection 1~32 for data exchange.
SM928 ~ SM959 R An error occurs in the COM2 connection 1~32 for data exchange

2-96
 C ha pt er 2 D e v ic es

 Data registers for COM1 connections

SR Function
SR1335 The actual cycle time of connection 1~32 for data exchange via COM1
The number of connection that is currently performing a cyclical data exchange
SR1336
via COM1
SR1340 ~ SR1371 The error code for data exchange via the COM1 connection 1~32
 Data registers for COM2 connections 2_
SR1375 The actual cycle time of connection 1~32 for data exchange via COM2
The number of connection that is currently performing a cyclical data exchange
SR1376
via COM2
SR1380 ~ SR1411 The error code for data exchange via the COM2 connection 1~32

The error codes 1~7 are the standard response error codes of MODBUS protocol. The error code 9 means timeout.

 Data exchange flags for Ethernet connections

SM Type Function
SM1167 R/W Data exchange via Ethernet port has been enabled by ISPSoft.
SM1168 ~ SM1199 R/W Connection 1~32 via Ethernet port for data exchange has been started.
The data has been received via Ethernet port connection 1~32 for data
SM1200 ~ SM1231 R
exchange.
SM1232 ~ SM1263 R An error occurs in the Ethernet port connection 1~32 for data exchange
 Data registers for Ethernet connections

SR Function
SR1120 ~ SR1151 The actual connection time for data exchange via the Ethernet connection 1~32
SR1152 ~ SR1183 The error code for data exchange via the Ethernet connection 1~32
 Error codes for Ethernet connections

Error code Description

16#00XX Remote module response error
16#F000 Ethernet connection is not established
16#F001 Remote module response timeout

16#F003 TCP connection timeout

16#F007 Response error
16#F009 Connection lost in the remote module

2.2.17 Index Register (E)

The index register is the 16-bit data register. It is like the general register in that the data can be read from it and written
into it. However, it is mainly used as the index register. The range of index registers is E0~E9. Please refer to section 4.4
in AS Series Programming Manual for more information about the usage of index registers.

2.2.18 File Registers (FR)

 AS series PLC provides users with File Registers for storing larger amount of parameters.

 Users can edit, upload, download the parameters in the file registers via ISPSoft.

 The values in FR can be read while operating the PLC. Please refer to API2303 MEMW in AS Series programming
manual for more information about how to write in FR.

2-97
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

MEMO

_2

2-98
 3
Chapter 3 Instruction Tables
Table of Contents

3.1 Instructions ....................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Basic Instructions .......................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Applied Instructions ....................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Instruction Tables ............................................................................. 3-3

3.2.1 Basic Instructions .......................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Applied Instructions (Sorted numerically) ......................................... 3-4
3.2.3 Applied Instructions (Sorted Alphabetically) ...................................... 3-5
3.2.4 Device Tables ................................................................................ 3-6

3.3 Lists of Basic Instructions ................................................................. 3-7

3.4 Lists of Applied Instructions .............................................................. 3-9

3.4.1 Applied Instructions (Sorted numerically) ......................................... 3-9
3.4.2 Applied Instructions (Sorted Alphabetically) .....................................3-37

3-1
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3.1 Instructions
Instructions used in the AS300 series PLC include basic instructions and applied instructions.

3.1.1 Basic Instructions

Classification Description
Loading the contact, connecting the contact in series, connecting the contact in
Contact instructions
parallel, and etc.
Output instructions Bit device output; pulse output
Master control Instructions Setting and resetting the master control

_3 Rising-edge/Falling-edge Triggering the instructions that load the contact, connect the contacts in series, and
detection contact instructions connect the contacts in parallel
Rising-edge/Falling-edge
Bit device differential output
differential output instructions
Other instructions Other instructions

3.1.2 Applied Instructions

API Classification Description
0000~0083 Comparison instructions Comparisons such as =, <>, >, >=, <, <=, and etc.
Using binary numbers or binary-coded decimal numbers to add,
0100~0118 Arithmetic instructions
subtract, multiply, or divide.
Converting the binary-coded decimal number into the binary number,
0200~0217 Data conversion instructions and converting the binary number into the binary-coded decimal
number
0300~0310 Data transfer instructions Transfer the specified data
0400~0402 Jump instructions The program jumps.
Program execution
0500~0504 Enabling or disabling the interrupt
instructions
0600 I/O refreshing instructions Refreshing the I/O.
Instructions which are applied to the counters, the teaching timers,
0700~0710 Convenience instructions
the special timers, and etc.
Logical operations such as logical addition, logical multiplication, and
0800~0817 Logic instructions
etc.
0900~0904 Rotation instructions Rotating/Shifting the specified data
1000~1011 Basic instructions Timer instructions and counter instructions
1100~1115 Shift instructions Shifting the specified data
1200~1225 Data processing instructions 16-bit data processing such as decoding and encoding.
Structure creation
1300~1302 Nested loops
instructions
Reading the data from the special module and writing the data into
1400~1401 Module instructions
the special module
Floating-point number
1500~1517 Floating-point number operations
instructions
1600~1608 Real-time clock instructions Reading/Writing, adding/subtracting and comparing the time
1700~1704 Peripheral instructions I/O points connected to the peripheral
1806~1817 Communication instructions Controlling the peripheral though communication

3-2
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

API Classification Description

1900~1905 Other instructions Instructions which are different from those mentioned above
Conversion between binary/binary-coded decimal numbers and
String processing ASCII codes; conversion between binary numbers and strings;
2100~2119
instructions conversion between floating-point numbers and strings; string
processing
2200~2210 Ethernet instructions Controlling the Ethernet data exchange
Reading the data from the memory card and writing the data into the
2300~2303 Memory card instructions
memory card
2400~2401 Task control instructions Controlling the task in the program
Sequential function charts
2500~2502 Controlling the SFC instructions
(SFC) instructions
High-speed output 3_
2700~2723 High-speed output and position control instructions
instructions
Delta special CANopen
2800~2807 CANopen communication instructions especially for Delta devices
communication instructions

3.2 Instruction Tables

3.2.1 Basic Instructions

The descriptions:

: The instruction name

: The symbol used in the ladder diagram in ISPSoft

: The function

: The operands supported by the instruction

3-3
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3.2.2 Applied Instructions (Sorted numerically)

_3

The descriptions:

: The applied instruction number

: The instruction name

: If the 16-bit instruction can be used as the 32-bit instruction, a D is added in front of the 16-bit instruction to form the
32-bit instruction.

:  indicates that the instruction can be used as the pulse instruction, whereas ─ indicates that it cannot.

If users want to use the pulse instruction, they only need to add a P in back of the instruction.

: The symbol used in the ladder diagram in ISPSoft

: The function

3-4
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

3.2.3 Applied Instructions (Sorted Alphabetically)

3_

The descriptions:

: The initial of the instruction name

: The applied instruction number

～：The instruction names

If the 16-bit instruction can be used as the 32-bit instruction, a D is added in front of the 16-bit instruction to form the 32-bit
instruction.

： indicates that the instruction can be used as the pulse instruction, whereas ─ indicates that it cannot.

If users want to use the pulse instruction, they only need to add a P in back of the instruction.

: The function

3-5
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3.2.4 Device Tables

_3

The descriptions:

: The applied instruction number

: The instruction name

If the 16-bit instruction can be used as the 32-bit instruction, a D is added in front of the 16-bit instruction to form the 32-bit
instruction.

: The operand

: The function

: The devices which are supported by the operand

1. The decimal forms are notated by K, but they are entered directly in ISPSoft. For example, the decimal number
30 is entered directly in ISPSoft.
2. The hexadecimal forms are notated by 16#. For example, the decimal number 30 is represented by 16#1E in the
hexadecimal system.
3. The floating-point numbers are notated by F/DF, but they are represented by decimal points in ISPSoft. For
example, the floating-point number F500 is represented by 500.0 in ISPSoft.
4. The strings are notated by “$”, but they are represented by “ ” in ISPSoft. For example, the string 1234 is
represented by “1234” in ISPSoft.
5. ○: The hollow circle
The device cannot be modified by an index register.

3-6
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

6. ●: The solid circle

The device cannot be modified by an index register.
：The unit of the operand

：The format of the instruction

It indicates whether the instruction can be used as the pulse instruction, the 16-bit instruction, or the 32-bit
instruction

：The ladder diagram

3.3 Lists of Basic Instructions

3_
 Contact instructions

Instruction
Symbol Function Operand
code

LD

Loading contact A/Connecting

AND contact A in series/Connecting DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
contact A in parallel

OR

LDI

Loading contact B/Connecting

ANI contact B in series/Connecting DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
contact B in parallel

ORI

 Output instructions

Instruction Execution
Symbol Function Operand
code condition

OUT Driving the coil DY, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D

Keeping the
SET DY, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
device on

 Master control instructions

Instruction
Symbol Function Operand
code

MC Setting the master control N

3-7
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction
Symbol Function Operand
code

MCR Resetting the master control N

 Rising-edge/Falling-edge detection contact instructions

Instruction code Symbol Function Operand Instruction code

LDP

_3
ANDP DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
Starting the
rising-edge
ORP detection/Connecti
ng the rising-edge
detection in
PED series/Connecting
the rising-edge
detection in parallel
APED X, Y,M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D

OPED

LDF

ANDF DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D

Starting the
falling-edge
ORF detection/Connecti
ng the falling-edge
detection in
NED series/Connecting
the falling-edge
detection in parallel
ANED X, Y,M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D

ONED

3-8
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

 Rising-edge/Falling-edge differential output instructions

Execution
Instruction code Symbol Function Operand
condition

Rising-edge
PLS Y, M, SM, S
differential output

Falling-edge
PLF Y, M, SM, S
differential output

 Other instructions 3_
Instruction code Symbol Function Operand

Inverting the logical

INV ─
operation result
The circuit is rising
NP ─
edge-triggered.
The circuit is falling
PN ─
edge-triggered.
The circuit is rising
FB_NP Y, M, S, D
edge-triggered.
The circuit is falling
FB_PN Y, M, S, D
edge-triggered.

3.4 Lists of Applied Instructions

3.4.1 Applied Instructions (Sorted numerically)
 Comparison instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit Instruction
Comparing the values
0000 LD= DLD= ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF: S1≠S2
Comparing the values
0001 LD<> DLD<> ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
Comparing the values
0002 LD> DLD> ─ ON: S1＞S2
OFF: S1≦S2
Comparing the values
0003 LD>= DLD>= ─ ON: S1≧S2
OFF: S1＜S2
Comparing the values
0004 LD< DLD< ─ ON: S1＜S2
OFF: S1≧S2

3-9
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit Instruction
Comparing the values
0005 LD<= DLD<= ─ ON: S1≦S2
OFF: S1＞S2
Comparing the values
0006 AND= DAND= ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF: S1≠S2
Comparing the values
0007 AND<> DAND<> ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
_3
Comparing the values
0008 AND> DAND> ─ ON: S1＞S2
OFF: S1≦S2
Comparing the values
0009 AND>= DAND>= ─ ON: S1≧S2
OFF: S1＜S2
Comparing the values
0010 AND< DAND< ─ ON: S1＜S2
OFF: S1≧S2
Comparing the values
0011 AND<= DAND<= ─ ON: S1≦S2
OFF: S1＞S2
Comparing the values
0012 OR= DOR= ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF: S1≠S2
Comparing the values
0013 OR<> DOR<> ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
Comparing the values
0014 OR> DOR> ─ ON: S1＞S2
OFF: S1≦S2
Comparing the values
0015 OR>= DOR>= ─ ON: S1≧S2
OFF: S1＜S2
Comparing the values
0016 OR< DOR< ─ ON: S1＜S2
OFF: S1≧S2
Comparing the values
0017 OR<= DOR<= ─ ON: S1≦S2
OFF: S1＞S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0018 ─ FLD= ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF: S1≠S2

3-10
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit Instruction
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0019 ─ FLD<> ─ ON: S11≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0020 ─ FLD> ─ ON: S1＞S2
OFF: S1≦S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0021 ─ FLD>= ─ ON: S1≧S2
OFF: S1＜S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
3_
0022 ─ FLD< ─ ON: S1＜S2
OFF: S1≧S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0023 ─ FLD<= ─ ON: S1≦S2
OFF: S1＞S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0024 ─ FAND= ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF: S1≠S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0025 ─ FAND<> ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0026 ─ FAND> ─ ON: S1＞S2
OFF: S1≦S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0027 ─ FAND>= ─ ON: S1≧S2
OFF: S1＜S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0028 ─ FAND< ─ ON: S1＜S2
OFF: S1≧S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0029 ─ FAND<= ─ ON: S1≦S2
OFF: S1＞S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0030 ─ FOR= ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF: S1≠S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0031 ─ FOR<> ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0032 ─ FOR> ─ ON: S1＞S2
OFF: S1≦S2

3 - 11
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit Instruction
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0033 ─ FOR>= ─ ON: S1≧S2
OFF: S1＜S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0034 ─ FOR< ─ ON: S1＜S2
OFF: S1≧S2
Comparing the floating-point numbers
0035 ─ FOR<= ─ ON: S1≦S2
OFF: S1＞S2
_3
Comparing the strings
0036 LD$= ─ ─ ON: S1＝S2
ON: S1≠S2
Comparing the strings
0037 LD$<> ─ ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
Comparing the strings
0042 AND$= ─ ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF S1≠S2
Comparing the strings
0043 AND$<> ─ ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2
Comparing the strings
0048 OR$= ─ ─ ON: S1＝S2
OFF: S1≠S2
Comparing the strings
0049 OR$<> ─ ─ ON: S1≠S2
OFF: S1＝S2

0054 CMP DCMP  Comparing the values

0055 ZCP DZCP  Zone comparison

0056 ─ FCMP  Comparing the floating-point numbers

3-12
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit Instruction

0057 ─ FZCP  Floating-point zone comparison

0058 MCMP ─  Matrix comparison

Comparing the tables

0059 CMPT= ─ 
ON: =
3_

Comparing the tables

0060 CMPT<> ─ 
ON: ≠

Comparing the tables

0061 CMPT> ─ 
ON: >

Comparing the tables

0062 CMPT>= ─ 
ON: ≧

Comparing the tables

0063 CMPT< ─ 
ON: <

Comparing the tables

0064 CMPT<= ─ 
ON: ≦

Checking the address of the contact type of

0065 CHKADR ─ ─
pointer register

Comparing the absolute result of the contact

type
0066 LDZ= DLDZ= ─
ON: | S1- S2|＝| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2| ≠ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0067 LDZ<> DLDZ<> ─ ON: | S1- S2|≠| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＝| S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0068 LDZ> DLDZ> ─
ON: | S1- S2|＞| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2| ≦ | S3|

3-13
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit Instruction
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0069 LDZ>= DLDZ>= ─ ON: | S1- S2|≧| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＜| S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0070 LDZ< DLDZ< ─
ON: | S1- S2|＜| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|≧ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
_3 type
0071 LDZ<= DLDZ<= ─ ON:| S1- S2|≦| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＞| S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0072 ANDZ= DANDZ= ─
ON: | S1- S2|＝| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2| ≠ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0073 ANDZ<> DANDZ<> ─ ON: | S1- S2|≠| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＝| S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0074 ANDZ> DANDZ> ─
ON: | S1- S2|＞| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2| ≦ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0075 ANDZ>= DANDZ>= ─ ON: | S1- S2|≧| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＜| S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0076 ANDZ< DANDZ< ─
ON: | S1- S2|＜| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|≧ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0077 ANDZ<= DANDZ<= ─ ON: | S1- S2|≦| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＞| S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0078 ORZ= DORZ= ─
ON: | S1- S2|＝| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2| ≠ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0079 ORZ<> DORZ<> ─ ON: | S1- S2| ≠ | S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＝| S3|

3-14
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit Instruction
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0080 ORZ> DORZ> ─
ON: | S1- S2|＞| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2| ≦ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0081 ORZ>= DORZ>= ─ ON: | S1- S2| ≧ | S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＜| S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact

0082 ORZ< DORZ< ─

type 3_
ON: | S1- S2|＜| S3|
OFF: | S1- S2| ≧ | S3|
Comparing the absolute result of the contact
type
0083 ORZ<= DORZ<= ─ ON: | S1- S2| ≦ | S3|
OFF: | S1- S2|＞| S3|

 Arithmetic instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Addition of binary numbers

0100 + D+ 
S1+S2=D

Subtraction of binary numbers

0101 - D- 
S1-S2=D

Multiplication of binary numbers

0102 * D* 
S1*S2=D

Division of binary numbers

0103 / D/ 
S1/S2=D

3-15
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Addition of floating-point numbers

0104 ─ F+ 
S1+S2=D

Subtraction of floating-point numbers

0105 ─ F- 
S1-S2=D

Multiplication of floating-point numbers

0106 ─ F* 
_3 S1*S2=D

Division of floating-point numbers

0107 ─ F/ 
S1/S2=D

0112 BK+ DBK+  Addition of binary numbers in blocks

0113 BK- DBK-  Subtraction of binary numbers in blocks

0114 $+ ─  Linking the strings

0115 INC DINC  Adding one to the binary number

0116 DEC DDEC  Subtracting one from the binary number

Multiplication of binary numbers for 16-bit

0117 MUL16 MUL32 
Multiplication of binary numbers for 32-bit

Division of binary numbers for 16-bit

0118 DIV16 DIV32 
Division of binary numbers for 32-bit

3-16
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

 Data conversion instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Converting the binary number into the

0200 BCD DBCD 
binary-coded decimal number

Converting the binary-coded decimal number

0201 BIN DBIN 
into the binary number

3_

Converting the binary integer into the binary

0202 FLT DFLT 
floating-point number

Converting the 32-bit floating-point number

0204 INT DINT 
into the binary integer

Converting the 16-bit value into the 32-bit

0206 MMOV ─ 
value

Converting the 32-bit value into the 16-bit

0207 RMOV ─ 
value

Converting the binary number into the Gray

0208 GRY DGRY 
code

Converting the Gray code into the binary

0209 GBIN DGBIN 
number

0210 NEG DNEG  Two’s complement

Reversing the sign of the 32-bit floating-point

0211 ─ FNEG 
number

Converting the binary floating-point number

0212 ─ FBCD 
into the decimal floating-point number

Converting the decimal floating-point number

0213 ─ FBIN 
into the binary floating-point number

Converting the binary numbers in blocks into

0214 BKBCD ─ 
the binary-coded decimal numbers in blocks

3-17
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Converting the binary numbers in blocks into

0215 BKBIN ─ 
the binary-coded decimal numbers in blocks

0216 SCAL DSCAL  Scale value operation

_3

0217 SCLP DSCLP  Parameter type of scale value operation

 Data transfer instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Transferring the data

0300 MOV DMOV  S: Data source
D: Data destination

0302 $MOV ─  Transferring the string

0303 CML DCML  Inverting the data

0304 BMOV DBMOV  Transferring all data

0305 NMOV DNMOV  Transferring the data to several devices

3-18
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0306 XCH DXCH  Exchanging the data

0307 BXCH ─  Exchanging all data

3_
0308 SWAP DSWAP  Exchange the high byte with the low byte

0309 SMOV ─  Transferring the digits

0310 MOVB ─  Transferring several bits

 Jump instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0400 CJ ─  Conditional jump

0401 JMP ─ ─ Unconditional jump

0402 GOEND ─ ─ Jumping to END

 Program execution instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0500 DI ─ ─ Disabling the interrupt

0501 EI ─ ─ Enabling the interrupt

0503 EIX ─ ─ Disabling the specific interrupt

0504 DIX ─ ─ Enabling the specific interrupt

3-19
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

 I/O refreshing instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0600 REF ─  Refreshing the I/O

 Convenience instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

_3 0700 ALT ─  Alternating between ON and OFF

0701 TTMR ─ ─ Teaching timer

0702 STMR ─ ─ Special timer

0703 RAMP DRAMP ─ Cyclic ramp signal

0704 MTR ─ ─ Matrix input

0705 ABSD DABSD ─ Absolute drum sequencer

0706 INCD ─ ─ Incremental drum sequencer

0708 ─ DPIDE ─ PID algorithm

3-20
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Setups for comparing the inputs of

0709 XCMP ─ ─
multiple work stations

Comparing the outputs of multiple work

0710 YOUT ─ ─
stations

 Logic instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction
3_

0800 WAND DAND  Logical AND operation

0801 MAND ─  Matrix AND operation

0802 WOR DOR  Logical OR operation

0803 MOR ─  Matrix OR operation

0804 WXOR DXOR  Logical exclusive OR operation

0805 MXOR ─  Matrix exclusive OR operation

0808 WINV DINV  Logical reversed INV operation

0809 LD& DLD& ─ S1&S2

0810 LD| DLD| ─ S1|S2

3-21
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0811 LD^ DLD^ ─ S1^S2

0812 AND& DAND& ─ S1&S2

0813 AND| DAND| ─ S1|S2

_3
0814 AND^ DAND^ ─ S1^S2

0815 OR& DOR& ─ S1&S2

0816 OR| DOR| ─ S1|S2

0817 OR^ DOR^ ─ S1^S2

 Rotation instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0900 ROR DROR  Rotating to the right

0901 RCR DRCR  Rotating to the right with the carry flag

0902 ROL DROL  Rotating to the left

3-22
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0903 RCL DRCL  Rotating to the left with the carry flag

0904 MBR ─  Rotating the matrix bits

 Timer and counter instructions

3_
Instruction code Pulse
API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Resetting the contact to OFF or clearing

1000 RST DRST ─
the value in the register.

1001 TMR ─ ─ 16-bit timer (Unit: 100ms)

1002 TMRH ─ ─ 16-bit timer (Unit: 1ms)

1003 CNT ─ ─ 16-bit counter

32-bit counter (Including the use of

1004 ─ DCNT ─
high-speed counters)

1005 ─ DHSCS ─ Setting high-speed comparison

1006 ─ DHSCR ─ Resetting high-speed comparison

1007 ─ DHSZ ─ High-speed input zone comparison

1008 ─ DSPD ─ Speed detection

1009 PWD ─ ─ Pulse Width Detection

Capturing the high-speed count value in

1010 ─ DCAP ─
the external input interrupt

1011 TMRM ─ ─ 16-bit timer (Unit: 10ms)

3-23
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

 Shift instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1100 SFTR ─  Shifting the states of the devices to the right

1101 SFTL ─  Shifting the states of the devices to the left

_3
Shifting the data in the word devices to the
1102 WSFR ─ 
right

Shifting the data in the word devices to the

1103 WSFL ─ 
left

Shifting the data and writing it into the word

1104 SFWR ─ 
device

Shifting the data and reading it from the

1105 SFRD ─ 
word device

1106 SFPO ─  Reading the latest data from the data list

1107 SFDEL ─  Deleting the data from the data list

1108 SFINS ─  Inserting the data into the data list

1109 MBS ─  Shifting the matrix bits

Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit

1110 SFR ─ 
registers by n bits to the right

Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit

1111 SFL ─ 
registers by n bits to the left

Shifting the states of the n bit devices by

1112 BSFR ─ 
one bit to the right

Shifting the states of the n bit devices by

1113 BSFL ─ 
one bit to the left

3-24
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1114 NSFR ─  Shifting n registers to the right

1115 NSFL ─  Shifting n registers to the left

 Data processing instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
instruction
3_
16-bit 32-bit

1200 SER DSER  Searching the data

1201 SUM DSUM  Number of bits whose states are ON

1202 DECO ─  Decoder

1203 ENCO ─  Encoder

1204 SEGD ─  Seven-segment decoding

1205 SORT DSORT  Sorting the data

1206 ZRST ─  Resetting the zone

1207 BON DBON  Checking the state of the bit

3-25
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1208 MEAN DMEAN  Mean

1209 CCD ─  Sum check

_3
1210 ABS DABS  Absolute value

1211 MINV ─  Inverting the matrix bits

1212 MBRD ─  Reading the matrix bit

1213 MBWR ─  Writing the matrix bit

1214 MBC ─  Counting the bits with the value 0 or 1

1215 DIS ─  Disuniting the 16-bit data

1216 UNI ─  Uniting the 16-bit data

1217 WSUM DWSUM  Getting the sum

1221 LIMIT DLIMIT  Confining the value within the bounds

3-26
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1222 BAND DBAND  Deadband control

3_
1223 ZONE DZONE  Controlling the zone

1224 ─ FMEAN  The mean of the floating points

1225 ─ FSUM  The sum of the floating points

 Structure creation instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1300 FOR ─ ─ Start of the nested loop

1301 NEXT ─ ─ End of the nested loop

1302 BREAK ─ ─ Terminating the FOR-NEXT loop

 Module instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Reading the data from the control register

1400 FROM DFROM 
in the special module

3-27
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Writing the data into the control register in

1401 TO DTO 
the special module

_3  Floating-point number instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1500 ─ FSIN  Sine of the floating-point number

1501 ─ FCOS  Cosine of the floating-point number

1502 ─ FTAN  Tangent of the floating-point number

1503 ─ FASIN  Arcsine of the floating-point number

1504 ─ FACOS  Arccosine of the floating-point number

1505 ─ FATAN  Arctangent of the floating-point number

Hyperbolic sine of the floating-point

1506 ─ FSINH 
number

Hyperbolic cosine of the floating-point

1507 ─ FCOSH 
number

Hyperbolic tangent of the floating-point

1508 ─ FTANH 
number

1509 ─ FRAD  Converting the degree to the radian

1510 ─ FDEG  Converting the radian to the degree

1511 SQR DSQR  Square root of the binary number

1512 ─ FSQR  Square root of the floating-point number

3-28
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1513 ─ FEXP  Exponent of the floating-point number

1514 ─ FLOG  Logarithm of the floating-point number

Natural logarithm of the binary

1515 ─ FLN 
floating-point number

─ 
1516 FPOW Power of the floating-point number
3_

1517 RAND ─  Random number

 Real-time clock instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1600 TRD ─  Reading the time

1601 TWR ─  Writing the time

1602 T+ ─  Adding the time

1603 T- ─  Subtracting the time

1604 HOUR ─ ─ Running-time meter

1605 TCMP ─  Comparing the time

1606 TZCP ─  Time zone comparison

1607 DST ─  Daylight saving time

3-29
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1608 WWON ─ ─ Weekly working time setup

 Peripheral instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

_3 1700 TKY DTKY ─ Ten-key keypad

1701 HKY DHKY ─ Sixteen-key keypad

1702 DSW ─ ─ DIP switch

1703 ARWS ─ ─ Arrow keys

1704 SEGL ─ ─ Seven-segment display with latches

 Communication instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1806 LRC ─ ─ Longitudinal parity check

1807 CRC ─ ─ Cyclic Redundancy Check

1808 MODRW ─ ─ Reading/Writing the MODBUS data

Sending and receiving communication

1812 COMRS ─ ─
data

3-30
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Setting the communication format for a

1813 COMDF ─ 
serial communication port

Serial communication instruction

1814 VFDRW ─ ─
exclusive for Delta AC motor drive

Serial communication instruction

1815 ASDRW ─ ─
exclusive for Delta servo drive 3_

Setting the parameters in the data

1816 CCONF ─ 
exchange table of a communication port

Reading and writing Modbus data without

1817 MODRWE ─ ─
any flag used

 Other instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1900 WDT ─  Watchdog timer

1901 DELAY ─  Delaying the execution of the program

1902 GPWM ─ ─ General pulse width modulation

1904 EPUSH ─  Storing the contents of the index registers

1905 EPOP ─  Reading the data into the index registers

 String processing instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Converting the singed decimal number

2100 BINDA DBINDA 
into the ASCII code

3-31
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Converting the binary hexadecimal

2101 BINHA DBINHA 
number into the hexadecimal ASCII code

Converting the binary-coded decimal

2102 BCDDA DBCDDA 
number into the ASCII code

_3
Converting the signed decimal ASCII
2103 DABIN DDABIN  code into the signed decimal binary
number

Converting the hexadecimal ASCII code

2104 HABIN DHABIN 
into the hexadecimal binary number

Converting the ASCII code into the

2105 DABCD DDABCD 
binary-coded decimal number

2106 $LEN ─  Calculating the length of the string

Converting the floating-point number into

2109 $FSTR ─ 
the string
Converting the string into the
2110 $FVAL ─ 
floating-point number

The retrieve of the characters in the

2111 $RIGHT ─ 
string begins from the right.

The retrieve of the characters in the

2112 $LEFT ─ 
string begins from the left.

2113 $MIDR ─  Retrieving a part of the string

2115 $SER ─  Searching the string

2116 $RPLC ─  Replacing the characters in the string

2117 $DEL ─  Deleting the characters in the string

2118 $CLR ─  Clearing the string

3-32
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2119 $INS ─  Inserting the string

 Ethernet instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API instruction
Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit

2200 SOPEN ─  Opening the socket

3_
2201 SSEND ─  Sending the data through the socket

2203 SCLOSE ─  Closing the socket

2204 MSEND ─  Sending the email

Converting the IP address of the integer

2206 INTOA ─ 
type into the IP address of the string type
Converting the IP address of the string
2207 IATON ─  type into the IP address of the integer
type

2208 EIPRW ─ ─ Reading and writing the Ethernet/IP data

2209 SCONF ─  Setting TCP/UDP Socket parameters

2210 MCONF ─  Reading/Writing the Modbus TCP data

3-33
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

 Memory card instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Writing the data from the PLC into the

2300 MWRIT ─ 
memory card

Reading the data from the memory card

2301 MREAD ─ 
_3 into the PLC

2302 MTWRIT ─  Writing the string into the memory card

2303 MEMW ─  Writing the data into the file register

 Task control instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2400 TKON ─  Enabling the cyclic task

2401 TKOFF ─  Disabling the cyclic task

 Sequential function charts (SFC) instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2500 SFCRUN – – Enabling the SFC

2501 SFCPSE – – Making SFC to pause

2502 SFCSTP – – Stopping the SFC

 High-speed output instrucitons

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

High-speed pulse output (without

2700 – DPLSY –
ramp-up/down process)

3-34
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

High-speed pulse output (with

2701 – DPLSR –
ramp-up/down process)

2702 PWM DPWM – Pulse width modulation

2703 JOG DJOG – JOG output

2704 – DZRN – Zero return 3_

2705 – DPLSV – Adjustable pulse output

2706 – DDRVI – Relative position control

2707 – DDRVA – Absolute position control

2708 CSFO – – Catch speed and proportional output

2709 – DDRVM – Mark alignment positioning

2-Axis relative-coordinate point-to-point

2710 – DPPMR –
synchronized motion

2-Axis absolute-coordinate point-to-point

2711 – DPPMA –
synchronized motion

2-Axis relative-position clockwise arc

2712 – DCICR –
interpolation

2-Axis absolute-position clockwise arc

2713 – DCICA –
interpolation

2-Axis relative-position counterclockwise

2714 – DCICCR –
arc interpolation

3-35
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2-Axis absolute-position
2715 – DCICCA – counterclockwise arc
interpolation

2716 – DCCMR – The relative-position circle drawing

2717 – DCCMA – The absolute-position circle drawing

_3
The position planning table controls the
2718 TPO – –
output

Setting single-axis output parameters in

2719 – DTPWS 
the position planning table

Setting linear interpolation parameters in

2720 – DTPWL 
the position planning table

Setting arc interpolation parameters in

2721 – DPTWC 
the position planning table

–
2723 DPPGB – Point to point go back and forth

 CANopen Communication Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction
Initializing the servos for the CANopen
2800 INITC – –
communication

2801 ASDON – – Servo-ON and servo-OFF

Setting the acceleration time and

2802 CASD – –
deceleration time of a servo

2803 – DDRVIC – Servo relative position control

2804 – DDRVAC – Servo absolute position control

2805 – DPLSVC – Servo speed control

3-36
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

API Symbol Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2806 ZRNC – – Homing

Writing and reading the CANopen

2807 COPRW – –
communication data

3.4.2 Applied Instructions (Sorted Alphabetically)

Instruction code 3_
Pulse
Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0114 $+ –  Linking the strings

2118 $CLR –  Clearing the string

2117 $DEL –  Deleting the characters in the string

2109 $FSTR –  Converting the floating-point number into the string

2110 $FVAL –  Converting the string into the floating-point number

2119 $INS –  Inserting the string

– The retrieve of the characters in the string begins
2112 $LEFT 
from the left.
2106 $LEN –  Calculating the length of the string
Symbol
2113 $MIDR –  Retrieving a part of the string

0302 $MOV –  Transferring the string

– The retrieve of the characters in the string begins
2111 $RIGHT 
from the right.
2116 $RPLC –  Replacing the characters in the string

2115 $SER –  Searching the string

0102 * D*  Multiplication of binary numbers

0103 / D/  Division of binary numbers

0100 + D+  Addition of binary numbers

1210 ABS DABS  Absolute value

0705 ABSD DABSD – Absolute drum sequencer

0700 ALT –  Alternating between ON and OFF

0043 AND$<> – – S1≠S2

A 0042 AND$= – – S1＝S2

0812 AND& DAND& – S1&S2

0814 AND^ DAND^ – S1^S2

0813 AND| DAND| – S1|S2

0010 AND< DAND< – S1＜S2

3-37
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0011 AND<= DAND<= – S1≦S2

0007 AND<> DAND<> – S1≠S2

0006 AND= DAND= – S1＝S2

0008 AND> DAND> – S1＞S2

0009 AND>= DAND>= – S1≧S2

0076 ANDZ< DANDZ< – |S1-S2|＜|S3|

0077 ANDZ<= DANDZ<= – |S1-S2|≦|S3|

_3 0073 ANDZ<> DANDZ<> – |S1-S2|≠|S3|

0072 ANDZ= DANDZ= – |S1-S2|=|S3|

0074 ANDZ> DANDZ> – |S1-S2|＞|S3|

0075 ANDZ>= DANDZ>= – |S1-S2|≧|S3|

1703 ARWS – – Arrow key input

2801 ASDON – – Servo-ON and servo-OFF

– Serial communication instruction exclusive for
1815 ASDRW –
Delta servo drive
1222 BAND DBAND  Deadband control
Converting the binary number into the
0200 BCD DBCD 
binary-coded decimal number
Converting the binary-coded decimal number into
2102 BCDDA DBCDDA 
the ASCII code
Converting the binary-coded decimal number into
0201 BIN DBIN 
the binary number
Converting the singed decimal number into the
2100 BINDA DBINDA 
ASCII code
Converting the binary hexadecimal number into the
2101 BINHA DBINHA 
hexadecimal ASCII code
0113 BK- DBK-  Subtraction of binary numbers in blocks

0112 BK+ DBK+  Addition of binary numbers in blocks

B
– Converting the binary numbers in blocks into the
0214 BKBCD 
binary-coded decimal numbers in blocks
– Converting the binary numbers in blocks into the
0215 BKBIN 
binary-coded decimal numbers in blocks
0304 BMOV DBMOV  Transferring all data

1207 BON DBON  Checking the state of the bit

1302 BREAK – – Terminating the FOR-NEXT loop

– Shifting the states of the n bit devices by one bit to
1113 BSFL 
the left
– Shifting the states of the n bit devices by one bit to
1112 BSFR 
the right
0307 BXCH –  Exchanging all data

C 2802 CASD – – Setting the acceleration time and deceleration time

3-38
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

of a servo

1209 CCD –  Sum check

– Setting the parameters in the data exchange table
1816 CCONF 
of a communication port
Checking the address of the contact type of pointer
0065 CHKADR – –
register
0400 CJ –  Conditional jump

0303 CML DCML  Inverting the data

0054 CMP DCMP  Comparing the values 3_

Comparing the tables
0063 CMPT< – 
ON: <
Comparing the tables
0064 CMPT<= – 
ON: ≦
Comparing the tables
0060 CMPT<> – 
ON: ≠
Comparing the tables
0059 CMPT= – 
ON: =
Comparing the tables
0061 CMPT> – 
ON: >
Comparing the tables
0062 CMPT>= – 
ON: ≧

1003 CNT – – 16-bit counter

– Setting the communication format for a serial
1813 COMDF 
communication port
1812 COMRS – – Sending and receiving communication data
Writing and reading the CANopen communication
2807 COPRW – –
data
1807 CRC – – Cyclic Redundancy Check

2708 CSFO – – Catch speed and proportional output

Subtraction of binary numbers
0101 – D- 
S1-S2=D
2717 – DCCMA – The absolute-position circle drawing

2716 – DCCMR – The relative-position circle drawing

2-Axis absolute-position clockwise arc
2713 – DCICA –
interpolation
D 2-Axis absolute-position counterclockwise arc
2715 – DCICCA –
interpolation
2-Axis relative-position counterclockwise arc
2714 – DCICCR –
interpolation
2-Axis relative-position clockwise arc
2712 – DCICR –
interpolation
1004 – DCNT – 32-bit counter

3-39
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2707 – DDRVA – Absolute position control

2804 – DDRVAC – Servo absolute position control

2706 – DDRVI – Relative position control

2803 – DDRVIC – Servo relative position control

2709 – DDRVM – Mark alignment positioning

1006 – DHSCR – Resetting high-speed comparison

1005 – DHSCS – Setting high-speed comparison

_3 1007 – DHSZ – High-speed input zone comparison

0708 – DPIDE – PID algorithm

High-speed pulse output (with ramp-up/down
2701 – DPLSR –
process)
2705 – DPLSV – Adjustable pulse output

2805 – DPLSVC – Servo speed control

High-speed pulse output (without ramp-up/down
2700 – DPLSY –
process)
2723 – DPPGB – Point to point go back and forth
2-Axis absolute-coordinate point-to-point
2711 – DPPMA –
synchronized motion
2-Axis relative-coordinate point-to-point
2710 – DPPMR –
synchronized motion
–  Setting arc interpolation parameters in the position
2721 DPTWC
planning table
–  Setting linear interpolation parameters in the
2720 DTPWL
position planning table
 Setting single-axis output parameters in the
2719 – DTPWS
position planning table
2704 – DZRN – Zero return
Converting the ASCII code into the binary-coded
2105 DABCD DDABCD 
decimal number
Converting the signed decimal ASCII code into the
2103 DABIN DDABIN 
signed decimal binary number
0116 DEC DDEC  Subtracting one from the binary number

1202 DECO –  Decoder

1901 DELAY –  Delaying the execution of the program

0500 DI – – Disabling the interrupt

1215 DIS –  Disuniting the 16-bit data

Division of binary numbers for 16-bit
0118 DIV16 DIV32 
Division of binary numbers for 32-bit
D 0504 DIX – – Enabling the specific interrupt

1607 DST –  Daylight saving time

1702 DSW – – DIP switch

3-40
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0501 EI – – Enabling the interrupt

2208 EIPRW – – Reading and writing via Ethernet/IP connection

0503 EIX – – Disabling the specific interrupt

E
1203 ENCO –  Encoder

1905 EPOP –  Reading the data into the index registers

1904 EPUSH –  Storing the contents of the index registers

Subtraction of floating-point numbers
0105 – F- 
S1-S2=D 3_
– Multiplication of floating-point numbers
0106 F* 
S1*S2=D
– Division of floating-point numbers
0107 F/ 
S1/S2=D
Addition of floating-point numbers
0104 – F+ 
S1+S2=D
1504 – FACOS  Arccosine of the floating-point number

0028 – FAND< – S1＜S2

0029 – FAND<= – S1≦S2

0025 – FAND<> – S1≠S2

0024 – FAND= – S1＝S2

0026 – FAND> – S1＞S2

0027 – FAND>= – S1≧S2

F
1503 – FASIN  Arcsine of the floating-point number

1505 – FATAN  Arctangent of the floating-point number

Converting the binary floating-point number into the
0212 – FBCD 
decimal floating-point number
Converting the decimal floating-point number into
0213 – FBIN 
the binary floating-point number
0056 – FCMP  Comparing the floating-point numbers

1501 – FCOS  Cosine of the floating-point number

1507 – FCOSH  Hyperbolic cosine of the floating-point number

1510 – FDEG  Converting the radian to the degree

1513 – FEXP  An exponent of the floating-point number

0022 – FLD< – S1＜S2

0023 – FLD<= – S1≦S2

0019 – FLD<> – S1≠S2

0018 – FLD= – S1＝S2

F 0020 – FLD> – S1＞S2

0021 – FLD>= – S1≧S2

3-41
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

– Natural logarithm of the binary floating-point

1515 FLN 
number
1514 – FLOG  Logarithm of the floating-point number

1224 – FMEAN  The mean of the floating points

0211 – FNEG  Reversing the sign of the floating-point number

0034 – FOR< – S1＜S2

0035 – FOR<= – S1≦S2

_3 0031 – FOR<> – S1≠S2

0030 – FOR= – S1＝S2

0032 – FOR> – S1＞S2

0033 – FOR>= – S1≧S2

1516 – FPOW  A power of the floating-point number

1509 – FRAD  Converting the degree to the radian

1500 – FSIN  Sine of the floating-point number

1506 – FSINH  Hyperbolic sine of the floating-point number

1512 – FSQR  Square root of the floating-point number

1225 – FSUM  The sum of the floating points

1502 – FTAN  Tangent of the floating-point number

1508 – FTANH  Hyperbolic tangent of the floating-point number

0057 – FZCP  Floating-point zone comparison

Converting the binary integer into the binary
0202 FLT DFLT 
floating-point number
1300 FOR – – Start of the nested loop
Reading the data from the control register in the
1400 FROM DFROM 
extension module
0209 GBIN DGBIN  Converting the Gray code into the binary number

0402 GOEND – – Jumping to END

G
1902 GPWM – – General pulse width modulation

0208 GRY DGRY  Converting the binary number into the Gray code
Converting the hexadecimal ASCII code into the
2104 HABIN DHABIN 
hexadecimal binary number
H 1701 HKY DHKY – Hexadecimal key input

1604 HOUR – – Running-time meter

Converting the IP address of the string type into the
2207 IATON – 
IP address of the integer type
I 0115 INC DINC  Adding one to the binary number

0706 INCD – – Incremental drum sequencer

Initializing the servos for the CANopen
I 2800 INITC – –
communication

3-42
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Converting the 32-bit floating-point number into the

0204 INT DINT 
binary integer
Converting the IP address of the integer type into
2206 INTOA – 
the IP address of the string type
0401 JMP – – Unconditional jump
J
2703 JOG DJOG – JOG output

0037 LD$<> – – S1≠S2

0036 LD$= – – S1＝S2

0809 LD& DLD& – S1&S2

3_
0811 LD^ DLD^ – S1^S2

0810 LD| DLD| – S1|S2

0004 LD< DLD< – S1＜S2

0005 LD<= DLD<= – S1≦S2

0001 LD<> DLD<> – S1≠S2

0000 LD= DLD= – S1＝S2

L 0002 LD> DLD> – S1＞S2

0003 LD>= DLD>= – S1≧S2

0070 LDZ< DLDZ< – |S1-S2|＜|S3|

0071 LDZ<= DLDZ<= – |S1-S2|≦|S3|

0067 LDZ<> DLDZ<> – |S1-S2|≠|S3|

0066 LDZ= DLDZ= – |S1-S2|=|S3|

0068 LDZ> DLDZ> – |S1-S2|＞|S3|

0069 LDZ>= DLDZ>= – |S1-S2|≧|S3|

1221 LIMIT DLIMIT  Confining the value within the bounds

1806 LRC – – Longitudinal parity check

0801 MAND –  Matrix AND operation

1214 MBC –  Counting the bits with the value 0 or 1

0904 MBR –  Rotating the matrix bits

1212 MBRD –  Reading the matrix bit

1109 MBS –  Shifting the matrix bits

M 1213 MBWR –  Writing the matrix bit

0058 MCMP –  Matrix comparison

2210 MCONF –  Reading/Writing the Modbus TCP data

1208 MEAN DMEAN  Mean

2303 MEMW –  Writing the data into the file register

1211 MINV –  Inverting the matrix bits

3-43
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0206 MMOV –  Converting the 16-bit value into the 32-bit value

1808 MODRW – – Reading/Writing the MODBUS data

– Reading and writing Modbus data without any flag
1817 MODRWE –
used
0803 MOR –  Matrix OR operation

0300 MOV DMOV  Transferring the data

0310 MOVB –  Transferring several bits

_3 2301 MREAD – 
Reading the data from the memory card into the
PLC
2204 MSEND –  Sending the email

0704 MTR – – Matrix input

2302 MTWRIT –  Writing the string into the memory card

0117 MUL16 MUL32  Multiplication of binary numbers for 16-bit/32-bit

2300 MWRIT –  Writing the data from the PLC into the memory card

0805 MXOR –  Matrix exclusive OR operation

0210 NEG DNEG  Two’s complement

1301 NEXT – – End of the nested loop

N 0305 NMOV DNMOV  Transferring the data to several devices

1115 NSFL –  Shifting n registers to the left

1114 NSFR –  Shifting n registers to the right

0049 OR$<> – – S1≠S2

0048 OR$= – – S1＝S2

0815 OR& DOR& – S1&S2

0817 OR^ DOR^ – S1^S2

0816 OR| DOR| – S1|S2

0016 OR< DOR< – S1＜S2

0017 OR<= DOR<= – S1≦S2

0013 OR<> DOR<> – S1 ≠ S2

O
0012 OR= DOR= – S1＝S2

0014 OR> DOR> – S1＞S2

0015 OR>= DOR>= – S1≧S2

0082 ORZ< DORZ< – |S1-S2|＜|S3|

0083 ORZ<= DORZ<= – |S1-S2|≦|S3|

0079 ORZ<> DORZ<> – |S1-S2|≠|S3|

0078 ORZ= DORZ= – |S1-S2|=|S3|

0080 ORZ> DORZ> – |S1-S2|＞|S3|

3-44
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0081 ORZ>= DORZ>= – |S1-S2|≧|S3|

P 2702 PWM DPWM – Pulse width modulation

0703 RAMP DRAMP – Ramp signal

1517 RAND –  Random number

0903 RCL DRCL  Rotating to the left with the carry flag

0901 RCR DRCR  Rotating to the right with the carry flag

R 0600 REF –  Refreshing the I/O

0207 RMOV –  Converting the 32-bit value into the 16-bit value 3_
0902 ROL DROL  Rotating to the left

0900 ROR DROR  Rotating to the right

1000 RST DRST – Resetting the contact or clearing the register

0216 SCAL DSCAL  Scale value operation

2203 SCLOSE –  Closing the socket

0217 SCLP DSCLP  Parameter type of scale value operation

2209 SCONF –  Setting TCP/UDP Socket parameters

1204 SEGD –  Seven-segment decoding

1704 SEGL – – Seven-segment display with latches

1200 SER DSER  Searching the data

2501 SFCPSE – – Making SFC to pause

2500 SFCRUN – – Enabling the SFC

2502 SFCSTP – – Stopping the SFC

1107 SFDEL –  Deleting the data from the data list

1108 SFINS –  Inserting the data into the data list

S – Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit registers
1111 SFL 
by n bits to the left
1106 SFPO –  Reading the latest data from the data list
– Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit registers
1110 SFR 
by n bits to the right
– Shifting the data and reading it from the word
1105 SFRD 
device
1101 SFTL –  Shifting the states of the devices to the left

1100 SFTR –  Shifting the states of the devices to the right

1104 SFWR –  Shifting the data and writing it into the word device

0309 SMOV –  Transferring the digits

2200 SOPEN –  Opening the socket

1205 SORT DSORT  Sorting the data

1511 SQR DSQR  Square root of the binary number

3-45
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2201 SSEND –  Sending the data through the socket

0702 STMR – – Special timer

1201 SUM DSUM  Number of bits whose states are ON

0308 SWAP DSWAP  Exchange the high byte with the low byte

1603 T- –  Subtracting the time

1602 T+ –  Adding the time

1605 TCMP –  Comparing the time

_3 2401 TKOFF –  Disabling the cyclic task

2400 TKON –  Enabling the cyclic task

1700 TKY DTKY – Ten key input

1001 TMR – – 16-bit timer

T – – 16-bit timer
1002 TMRH
Writing the data into the control register in the
1401 TO DTO 
special module
2718 TPO – – The position planning table controls the output

1600 TRD –  Reading the time

0701 TTMR – – Teaching timer

1601 TWR –  Writing the time

1606 TZCP –  Time zone comparison

U 1216 UNI –  Uniting the 16-bit data

Serial communication instruction exclusive for
V 1814 VFDRW – –
Delta AC motor drive
0800 WAND DAND  Logical AND operation

1608 WWON – – Weekly working time setup

1900 WDT –  Watchdog timer

0808 WINV DINV  Logical reversed INV operation

W 0802 WOR DOR  Logical OR operation

1103 WSFL –  Shifting the data in the word devices to the left

1102 WSFR –  Shifting the data in the word devices to the right

1217 WSUM DWSUM  Getting the sum

0804 WXOR DXOR  Logical exclusive OR operation

0306 XCH DXCH  Exchanging the data

X Setups for comparing the inputs of multiple work
0709 XCMP – –
stations
Y 0710 YOUT – – Comparing the outputs of multiple work stations

0055 ZCP DZCP  Zone comparison

Z
1223 ZONE DZONE  Controlling the zone

3-46
 C ha pt er 3 I ns tr uc t i o n Tab l es

Instruction code Pulse

Classification API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2806 ZRNC – – Homing

1206 ZRST –  Resetting the zone

3_

3-47
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

MEMO

_3

3-48
 4
Chapter 4 Instruction Structure
Table of Contents
4.1 API Composition of Applied Instructions ........................................... 4-2

4.2 Operand Usage Description ............................................................... 4-5

4.3 Restrictions on the Use of the Instructions ....................................... 4-6

4.4 Index Registers ................................................................................. 4-7

4.5 Pointer Registers ............................................................................... 4-9

4.6 Pointer Registers of Timers ............................................................. 4-11

4.7 Pointer Registers of 16-bit Counters ............................................... 4-12

4.8 Pointer Registers of 32-bit Counters ............................................... 4-14

4.9 File Register .................................................................................... 4-15

4-1
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

4.1 API Composition of Applied Instructions

Every instruction has its own instruction code and API number. The API number of the instruction in the following table is
0300, and the instruction code is MOV, whose function is transferring the data.

API Instruction code Operand Function

0300 D MOV P S，D Transferring the data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S            
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

_4 S        
D        

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS
Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Data destination

1. The devices used by the instruction are listed in the operand column. S, D, n, and m are used as the operands
according to their functions. When more than one operand is used, and these operands share the same function,
they are suffixed with numbers. For example, S1, S2, and etc.

2. If the instruction can be used as the pulse instruction, the letter P is added in back of the instruction. If the 16-bit
instruction can be used as the 32-bit instruction, the letter D is added in front of the 16-bit instruction to form the
32-bit instruction. For example, “D***P” in which “***” is an instruction code.

3. F in the operand area represents the single precision floating point (32-bit)

4. The solid circle ● indicates that the device can be modified by an index register, and the hollow circle ○ indicates
that the device cannot be modified by an index register. For example, the data register designated by the operand S
can be modified by an index register.

5. The applicable model is indicated in the table. Users can check whether the instruction can be used as the pulse
instruction, the 16-bit instruction, the 32-bit instruction, or the 64-bit instruction according to the information in the
table.

6. If users want to use an instruction in the function block, and the output, input and data devices are supported among
the operands, users have to use the pointer registers. AS for the timer, the 16-bit counter, and the 32-bit counter
that are supported among the operands, users have to use the pointer register of the timer, the pointer register of

4-2
 Ch a pt er 4 Ins tr uc t i on Str uc t ur e

the 16-bit counter, and the pointer register of the 32-bit counter. Please refer to sections 4.4~4.7 for more
information or section 7.2.4 in ISPSoft.

7. The description of the symbols representing the instruction MOV in ISPSoft:

MOV, MOVP, DMOV, and DMOVP: Instruction codes

En: Enable

S: The data source (The applicable format of the operand is a word/double word.)

D: The data destination (The applicable format of the operand is a word/double word.)

The composition of applied instructions:

Some applied instructions are composed of instruction codes. For example, the instructions EI, DI, WDT, and etc. however,
most applied instructions consist of instruction codes and several operands.

Every applied instruction has its own API number and instruction code. For example, the instruction code of API0300 is
MOV (transferring the data).

Entering the instruction directly: Users can enter the instruction by means of ISPSoft. For the instruction MOV, users only
need to enter the instruction name and the operands to designate “MOV D0 D1”.
4_

Entering the instruction by dragging: Users can drag the instruction MOV from APIs in ISPSoft to the area where the
ladder diagram can be edited.

Entering the instruction by the toolbar: Users can click API/FB Selection on the toolbar in ISPSoft, and then choose API.
Finally, they can choose the instruction MOV in Data Transfer. The operands are
extra designated.

Source operand
S If there is more than one source operand, these source operands are represented by S1, S2, and
etc.
Destination operand
D If there is more than one destination operand, these destination operand is represented by D1, D2,
and etc.
If the operand only can designate the constant K/H or the register, it is represented by m, m1, m2, n, n1, or
n2.

The length of the operand (the 16-bit instruction, the 32-bit instruction, or the floating-point number instruction):

The 16-bit instruction or the 32-bit instruction

The values of the operands can be divided into the 16-bit values and the 32-bit values. Accordingly, in order to process
data of difference lengths, the instructions are divided into the 16-bit instructions and the 32-bit instructions. To separate
the 32-bit instruction from the 16-bit one, a D is added in front of the 16-bit instruction.

4-3
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

16-bit instruction MOV

When M1 is ON, the data in D0 is

transferred to D1.

32-bit instruction DMOV

When M1 is ON, the data in (D1,

D0) is transferred to (D3, D2).

The floating-point number instruction

The floating-point number instructions can support the 32-bit floating-point number instructions which correspond to the
single-precision floating-point number instructions. Users can refer to chapter 2 for more information about the
floating-point numbers.
_4
32-bit single-precision floating-point number instruction F+

When X0.0 is ON, the data in

(D11, D10) and (D21, D20) is
transferred to (D31, D30).

The continuous execution of the instruction and the pulse execution of the instruction:

1. The execution of the instructions can be divided into the continuous execution and the pulse execution. When the
instruction is not executed, the time needed to execute the program is shorter. Therefore, using the pulse instruction
in the program can lessen the scan cycle.

2. The pulse function allows the related instruction to enable the rising edge-triggered control input. The instruction is
ON within one scan cycle.

3. If the control input stays ON, and the related instruction is not executed, the control input has to be switched from
OFF to ON again in order to execute the instruction.

4. The pulse instruction:

Pulse execution When M1 is switched from OFF

to ON, the instruction MOVP is
executed once. The instruction is
not executed any more within the
scan cycle. Therefore, it is called
the pulse instruction.

Continuous execution
Whenever M1 is ON during the
scan cycle, the instruction MOV
is executed once. Therefore, the
instruction is called the
continuous instruction.

4-4
 Ch a pt er 4 Ins tr uc t i on Str uc t ur e

When the conditonal contact M1 is OFF, the instruction is not executed, and the value in the destination
operand D does not change.

4.2 Operand Usage Description

There are 2 types of operands in AS series; one type is for users to designate and the other one is for system to define.

Operands for users to designate are listed below:

1. Input relay: X0.0 ~ X63.15 or X0 ~ X63

2. Output relay: Y0.0 ~ Y63.15 or Y0 ~ Y63

3. Internal relay: M0 ~ M8191

4. Stepping relay: S0 ~ S2047

5. Timer: T0 ~ T511

6. 16-bit counter: C0 ~ C511

7. 32-bit counter: HC0 ~ HC255

4_
8. Data register: D0 ~ D29999 or D0.0 ~ D29999.15

9. File register: FR0 ~ FR65535

10. Special auxiliary flag: SM0 ~ SM2047

11. Special data register: SR0 ~ SR2047

12. Index register: E0 ~ E9

13. Constant: The decimal constants are notated by K, and the hexadecimal constants are notated by 16#.

14. String: “$”

15. Floating-point number: The single-precision floating-point numbers are notated by F

16. The length of the data in one register is generally 16 bits. If users want to store the 32-bit data in the register, they
have to designate two consecutive registers.

17. If the operand used in the 32-bit instruction designates D0, the 32-bit data register composed of (D1, D0) is
occupied. D1 represents the higher 16 bits, and D0 represents the lower 16 bits. The same rule applies to the timer
and the 16-bit counter.。

18. When the 32-bit counter HC is used as the data register, it is only can be designated by the operand used in the
32-bit instruction.

19. The index registers can only be used in the 16-bit instruction.

Please refer to chapter 2 Device for more information.

Operands for the system to define are listed below:

1. The system assigns the variables to declare such as Bool, WORD, INT and so on: U0 ~ U16387 and W0 ~ W29999.

2. To start or stop a task: TK0 ~ TK31

3. Pointer type variable symbols, the supporting devices and usage are listed below.

4-5
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Pointer type Usage

Device range PR0 ~ PR15，PR0.0~PR15.15

General pointer Maximum quantity Up to 16 pointers can be used in each function block
(Pointer) Variable symbols of WORD/DWORD/LWORD/INT/DINT/LINT
Can be assigned to types or data register, input relay or output relay devices
(e.g. X0, Y0, etc.)

Device range TR0 ~ TR7

Pointer for a timer
Maximum quantity Up to 8 pointers can be used in each function block
(T_POINTER)
Can be assigned to Variable symbols of timer type or timer type devices

Device range CR0 ~ CR7

Pointer for a counter
Maximum quantity Up to 8 pointers can be used in each function block
(C_POINTER)
_4 Can be assigned to Variable symbols of counter type or counter type devices

Device range HCR0 ~ HCR7

Pointer for a
high-speed counter Maximum quantity Up to 8 pointers can be used in each function block
(HC_POINTER) Variable symbols of 32-bit counter type or 32-bit counter type
Can be assigned to
devices

4.3 Restrictions on the Use of the Instructions

 The instructions which only can be used in the function blocks

API0065 CHKADR, FB_NP, FB_PN, NED, ANED, ONED, PED, APED, OPED

 The instructions which cannot be used in the interrupt tasks

GOEND

 The instructions which are not supported in the function blocks

LDP, ANDP, ORP, LDF, ANDF, ORF, PLS, PLF, NP, PN, MC/MCR, GOEND and all pulse instructions in applied
instructions.

If users want to use some of the instructions mentioned above, they can use the substitute instructions.

Instruction which cannot be used in the function block Substitute instruction in the function block

LDP/ANDP/ORP NED/ANED/ONED

LDF/ANDF/ORF PED/APED/OPED

PLS -

PLF -

NP FB_NP

PN FB_PN

MC -

4-6
 Ch a pt er 4 Ins tr uc t i on Str uc t ure

Instruction which cannot be used in the function block Substitute instruction in the function block

MCR -

All pulse instructions in applied commands *1

*1: Pulse instructions cannot be used in the function blocks. If users want to get the function of the pulse instruction
in the function block, they can refer to the following example.

Example:

1. First, declare 10 bit variables tempBit[10] used in the system.

2. When StartBit1 is switched from OFF to ON, method 1 (network 1) and method 2 (network 2) can only execute the
instruction MOV once; users can choose one to use.

3. The variable tempBit used in the system cannot be used repeatedly.

4_

4.4 Index Registers

The index register is the 16-bit data register. It is like the general register in that the data can be read from it and written
into it. However, it is mainly used as the index register. The range of index registers is E0~E9.

The index register is used as follows.

1. Using the register name to modify the device

When M0 is ON, E0=10, D0@E0=D (0+10)=D10, and D1=D10.

4-7
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

When M0 is ON, E0=10, E1=17, D1@E0=D (1+10)=D11, D11 is ON.

NOTE 1: AS Series supports using the register name to modify the device for example D0.1@E0 but not supporting
2-layered modification for example, [email protected]@E0.

NOTE 2: When E0=17, D0.1@E0=D0.(1+17)=D1.2, and D1.2 will be ON. And the bit part 1@E0=(1+17)=18.
However, the maximum bit number is 15. Since m=18/16=1 and the remainder is 2, the last modification result is D
(0+1).2=D1.2. D1.2 will be ON.

_4 When M0 is ON, E0=10, and M1@E0=M (1+10)=M11. M11 is ON.

2. Declaring the variables first, and then modifying the device

 Declare the three variables StartBit, Var1, and Var2 in ISPSoft.

The type of StartBit is the Boolean array, and its size is 2 bits. The range is from StartBit[0] to StartBit[1].

The type of Var1 is the word array, and its size is 11 words. The range is from Var1[0] to Var1[10].

The type of Var2 is the word, and its size is one word.

4-8
 Ch a pt er 4 Ins tr uc t i on Str uc t ur e

 When StartBit[0] is ON, E0=10, E1=1, Var1[0]@E0=Var1[10], Var2=Var1[10], and StrartBit[0]@E1=StartBit[1].

StartBit[1] is ON.

Additional remark: When users declare the variables in ISPSoft, and the variables are added to the contents of the
registers to form the addresses to the actual data, users must note the addresses to prevent the 4_
program from being executed wrongly.

4.5 Pointer Registers

 ISPSoft supports the function blocks. When the variable declaration type is VAR_IN_OUT, and the data type is
POINTER, the variable is the pointer register. The value in the pointer register can refer directly to the value stored
in the device X, Y, or D and the pointer register can point to the address associated with the variable set
automatically in ISPSoft.

 Users can declare 16 pointer registers in every function block. The range is PR0~PR15, or PR0.0~PR15.15.

Example:

1. Establish a program organization unit (POU) in ISPSoft first.

2. Establish a function block which is called FB0.

3. The program in the function block FB0

4-9
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

4. Declare the varaible in the function block FB0.

Choose VAR_IN_OUT as the declaration type, Point1 as the identifier, POINTER as the data type. The variable is
the pointer register.

5. Declare the variable in the program organization unit (POU).

_4
6. Call the function block FB0 in the program organization unit (POU).

7. The program in the program organization unit (POU)

Network 1: When StartBit[0] is ON, the address of D0 is transmitted to Point 1 in FB0.

When VarBit1 in FB0 is ON, E0=1, Var1=D0, Point1@E0=D (0+1)=D1, and Var2=D1.

Network 2: When StartBit[1] is ON, the address of CVar1[0] is transmitted to Point1 in FB0.

Var2=CVar1[1]。When VarBit1 in FB0 is ON, E0=1, Var1=CVar1[0], Point1@E0=CVar1 (0+1)=Cvar1[1],

and Var2=CVar1[1].

4-10
 Ch a pt er 4 Ins tr uc t i on Str uc t ur e

4.6 Pointer Registers of Timers

 ISPSoft supports the function blocks. If users want to use the timer in the function block, they have to declare a
pointer register of the timer in the function block. The address of the timer is transmitted to the pointer register of the
timer when the function block is called.

 When the variable declaration type is VAR_IN_OUT, and the data type is T_POINTER, the variable is the pointer
register of the timer. The value in the pointer register of the timer can refer directly to the value stored in the device T
or in the variable which is the timer in ISPSoft.

 Users can declare 8 pointer registers of the timers in every function block. The range is TR0~TR7.

 If users want to use an instruction in the function block, and the timer is supported among the operands, users have
to use the pointer register of the timer.

Example:

1. Establish a program organization unit (POU) in ISPSoft first.

2. Establish a function block which is called FB0.

4_

3. Declare the varaible in the function block FB0.

Choose VAR_IN_OUT as the declaration type, TPoint1 as the identifier, T_POINTER as the data type. The variable
is the pointer register of the timer.

4. The program in the function block FB0

5. Declare the variable in the program organization unit (POU).

The data type of CVar1 should be TIMER.

4 - 11
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6. Call the function block FB0 in the program organization unit (POU).

7. The program in the program organization unit (POU)

Network 1: When StartBit[0] is ON, the address of T511 is transmitted to TPoint1 in FB0.

_4
When VarBit1 in the FB0 is ON, the instruction TMR is executed, and TPoint1 (T511) starts counting.
When the value of TPoint1 matches the setting value, VarOut is ON.

Network 2: When StartBit[1] is ON, the address of CVar1[0] is transmitted to TPoint1 in FB0.

When VarBit1 in FB0 is ON, the instruction TMR is executed, and TPoint (CVar1) starts counting. When
the value of TPoint1 matches the setting value, VarOut is ON.

4.7 Pointer Registers of 16-bit Counters

 ISPSoft supports the function blocks. If users want to use the 16-bit counter in the function block, they have to
declare a pointer register of the 16-bit counter in the function block. The address of the 16-bit counter is transmitted
to the pointer register of the 16-bit counter when the function block is called.

 When the variable declaration type is VAR_IN_OUT, and the data type is C_POINTE, the variable is the pointer
register of the 16-bit counter. The value in the pointer register of the 16-bit counter can refer directly to the value
stored in the device T or in the variable which is the counter in ISPSoft.

 Users can declare 8 pointer registers of the 16-bit counters in every function block. The range is CR0~CR7.

 If users want to use an instruction in the function block, and the counter is supported among the operands, users
have to use the pointer register of the 16-bit counter.

4-12
 Ch a pt er 4 Ins tr uc t i on Str uc t ur e

Example:

1. Establish a program organization unit (POU) in ISPSoft first.

2. Establish a function block which is called FB0.

3. Declare the varaible in the function block FB0.

Choose VAR_IN_OUT as the declaration type, CPoint1 as the identifier, C_POINTER as the data type. The variable
is the pointer register of the 16-bit counter.

4. The program in the function block FB0 4_

5. Declare the variable in the program organization unit (POU).

The data type of CVar1 should be COUNTER.

6. Call the function block FB0 in the program organization unit (POU).

7. The program in the program organization unit (POU)

Network 1: When StartBit[0] is ON, the address of C0 is transmitted to CPoint1 in FB0.

When VarBit1 in FB0 is ON, CPoint1 (C0) is ON.

4-13
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Network 2: When StartBit[1] is ON, the address of CVar1 is transmitted to CPoint1 in FB0.

When VarBit1 in FB0 is ON, CPoint1 (CVar1) is ON.

4.8 Pointer Registers of 32-bit Counters

 ISPSoft supports the function blocks. If users want to use the 32-bit counter in the function block, they have to
declare a pointer register of the 32-bit counter in the function block. The address of the 32-bit counter is transmitted
to the pointer register of the 32-bit counter when the function block is called.

 When the variable declaration type is VAR_IN_OUT, and the data type is HC_POINTER, the variable is the pointer
_4 register of the 32-bit counter. The value in the pointer register of the 32-bit counter can refer directly to the value
stored in the device HC or in the variable which is the counter in ISPSoft.

 Users can declare 8 pointer registers of the 32-bit counters in every function block. The range is HCR0~HCR7.

 If users want to use an instruction in the function block, and the 32-bit counter is supported among the operands,
users have to use the pointer register of the 32-bit counter.

Example:

1. Establish a function block which is called FB0.

2. Declare the varaible in the function block FB0.

Choose VAR_IN_OUT as the declaration type, HCPoint1 as the identifier, HC_POINTER as the data type. The
variable is the pointer register of the 32-bit counter.

3. The program in the function block FB0

4. Declare the variable in the program organization unit (POU).

The data type of CVar1 should be COUNTER, and users have to fill in the address column with the practical
address of the 32-bit counter.

4-14
 Ch a pt er 4 Ins tr uc t i on Str uc t ur e

5. Call the function block FB0 in the program organization unit (POU).

6. The program in the program organization unit (POU)

Network 1: When StartBit[0] is ON, the address of HC0 is transmitted to HCPoint1 in FB0.

When VarBit1 in FB0 is ON, HCPoint1 (HC0) is ON. 4_

Network: When StartBit[1] is ON, the address of CVar1 is transmitted to HCPoint1 in FB0.

When VarBit1 in FB0 is ON, HCPoint1 (CVar1) is ON.

4.9 File Register

 AS series PLC provides users with File Registers for storing larger amount of parameters.

 Users can edit, upload, download the parameters in the file registers via ISPSoft.

 The values in FR can be read while operating the PLC. Please refer to API2303 MEMW in AS Series programming
manual for more information about how to write in FR.

4-15
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

MEMO

_4

4-16
 5
Chapter 5 Basic Instructions
Table of Contents

5.1 List of Basic Instructions ................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Basic Instructions.............................................................................. 5-3

5-1
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

5.1 List of Basic Instructions

Operation
Instruction code Function Operand time
(µs)
Loading contact A/Connecting contact DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
LD/AND/OR A in series/Connecting contact A in 0.025
parallel
Loading contact B/Connecting contact DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
LDI/ANI/ORI B in series/Connecting contact B in 0.03
parallel
OUT Driving the coil DY, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D 0.04
SET Keeping the device on DY, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D 0.04
MC/MCR Setting/Resetting the master control N 0.24
Starting the rising-edge DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
detection/Connecting the rising-edge
LDP/ANDP/ORP 0.22
detection in series/Connecting the
rising-edge detection in parallel
Starting the falling-edge DX, X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
detection/Connecting the falling-edge
LDF/ANDF/ORF 0.22
detection in series/Connecting the
falling-edge detection in parallel
Starting the rising-edge X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
_5 detection/Connecting the rising
PED/APED/OPED 0.22
edge-detection in series/Connecting
the rising-edge detection in parallel
Starting the falling-edge X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC, D
detection/Connecting the falling-edge
NED/ANED/ONED 0.22
detection in series/Connecting the
falling-edge detection in parallel
PLS Rising-edge output Y, M, SM, S 0.22
PLF Falling-edge output Y, M, SM, S 0.22
INV Inverting the logical operation result – 0.22
NP The circuit is rising edge-triggered. – 0.24
PN The circuit is falling edge-triggered. – 0.24
FB_NP The circuit is rising edge-triggered. Y, M, S, D 0.24
FB_PN The circuit is falling edge-triggered. Y, M, S, D 0.24

5-2
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

5.2 Basic Instructions

Instruction code Operand Function
Loading contact A/Connecting contact A in
LD/AND/OR S
series/Connecting contact A in parallel

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S          

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 
Symbol:

LD S ： Specified device

AND

OR
5_
Explanation:

1. The instruction LD applies to contact A which starts from the mother line or contact A which is the start of a contact
circuit. It functions to reserve the current contents, and store the contact state which is acquired in the accumulative
register.

2. The instruction AND is used to connect contact A in series. It functions to read the state of the contact which is
specified to be connected in series, and perform the AND operation with the previous logical operation result. The
final result is stored in the accumulative register.

3. The instruction OR is used to connect contact A in parallel. It functions to read the state of the contact which is
specified to be connected in parallel, and perform the OR operation with the previous logical operation result. The
final result is stored in the accumulative register.

Example:

1. Contact A of X0.0 is loaded, contact A of X0.1 is connected in series, contact A of X0.2 is connected in parallel, and
the coil Y0.0 is driven.

2. When both X0.0 and X0.1 are ON, or when X0.2 is ON, Y0.0 is ON.

5-3
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

Instruction code Operand Function

Loading contact B/Connecting contact B in
LDI/ANI/ORI S
series/Connecting contact B in parallel

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S          

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 
Symbol:

LDI S ： Specified device

ANI

ORI

Explanation:
_5
1. The instruction LDI applies to contact B which starts from the mother line or contact B which is the start of a contact
circuit. It functions to reserve the current contents, and store the contact state which is acquired in the accumulative
register.

2. The instruction ANI is used to connect contact B in series. It functions to read the state of the contact which is
specified to be connected in series, and perform the AND operation with the previous logical operation result. The
final result is stored in the accumulative register.

3. The instruction ORI is used to connect contact B in parallel. It functions to read the state of the contact which is
specified to be connected in parallel, and perform the OR operation with the previous logical operation result. The
final result is stored in the accumulative register.

Example:

1. Contact B of X0.0 is loaded, contact B of X0.1 is connected in series, contact B of X0.2 is connected in parallel, and
the coil Y0.0 is driven.

2. When both X0.0 and X0.1 are ON, or when X0.2 is ON, Y0.0 is ON.

5-4
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

OUT D Driving the coil

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
D      

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

D 
Symbol:

D ： Specified device

Explanation:

1. The logical operation result prior to the application of the instruction OUT is output into the specified device.

2. The action of the coil contact:

OUT
Operation Contact
result Coil Contact A Contact B
5_
(normally open) (normally closed)
False OFF OFF ON
True ON ON OFF
Example:

1. Contact B of X0.0 is loaded, contact A of X0.1 is connected in series, and the coil Y0.0 is driven.

2. When X0.0 is OFF, and X0.1 is ON, Y0.0 is ON.

5-5
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

Instruction code Operand Function

SET D Keeping the device on

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
D      

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

D 
Symbol:

D ： Specified device

Explanation:

When the instruction SET is driven, the specified device is set to ON. No matter the instruction SET is still driven, the
specified device keeps ON. Users can set the specified device to OFF by means of the instruction RST.

Example:
_5 1. Contact B of X0.0 is loaded, contact A of Y0.0 is connected in series, and Y0.1 keeps ON.

2. When X0.0 is OFF, and Y0.0 is ON, Y0.1 is ON. Even if the operation result changes, Y0.1 still keeps ON.

5-6
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

MC/MCR N Setting/Resetting the master control

Symbol:

Level of the nested

MC N ： N0~N31
program structure

MCR

Explanation:

1. The instruction MCR is used to set the master control. When the instruction MC is executed, the instructions
between MC and MCR are executed as usual. When the instruction MC is OFF, the actions of the instructions
between MC and MCR are as follows.
Instruction type Description
The timer value is reset to zero. The coil and the contact
General-purpose timer
are OFF.
The timer value is reset to zero. The coil and the contact
Timer used in the function block
are OFF.
Accumulative timer
The coil is OFF. The timer value and the state of the 5_
contact remains the same.
The coil is OFF. The timer value and the state of the
Counter
contact remains the same.
Coils driven by OUT All coils are OFF.
Devices driven by SET and RST The states of the devices remain the same.
All applied instructions are not executed. The FOR/NEXT
loop is still repeated N times, but the actions of the
Applied instruction
instructions inside the FOR/NEXT loop follow those of the
instructions between MC and MR.
2. The instruction MCR is used to reset the master control, and is placed at the end of the master control program.
There should not be any contact instruction before MCR.

3. MC/MCR supports the nested program structure. There are at most 32 levels of nested program structures
(N0~N31). Please refer to the example below.

5-7
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

Example:

_5

5-8
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

Starting the rising-edge detection/Connecting the
LDP/ANDP/ORP S rising-edge detection in series/Connecting the
rising-edge detection in parallel

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S          

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 
Symbol:

LDP

ANDP S ： Specified device

ORP

Explanation:
5_
1. The instruction LDP functions to reserve the current contents, and store the rising-edge detection of the contact in
the accumulative register.

2. The instruction ANDP is used to connect the rising-edge detection of the contact in series.

3. The instruction ORP is used to connect the rising-edge detection of the contact in parallel.

4. Only when LDP/ANDP/ORP is scanned can the state of the device be gotten, and not until LDP/ANDP/ORP is
scanned next time can whether the state of the device changes be judged.

5. Please use the instructions PED, APED, and OPED in the subroutine.

Example:

1. The rising-edge detection of X0.0 starts, the rising-edge detection of X0.1 is connected in series, the rising-edge
detection of X0.2 is connected in parallel, and the coil Y0.0 is driven.

2. When both X0.0 and X0.1 are switched from OFF to ON, or when X0.2 is switched from OFF to ON, Y0.0 is ON for a
scan cycle.

5-9
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

Instruction code Operand Function

Starting the falling-edge detection/Connecting the
LDF/ANDF/ORF S falling-edge detection in series/Connecting the
falling-edge detection in parallel

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S          

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 
Symbol:

LDF

ANDF S ： Specified device

ORF

_5 Explanation:

1. The instruction LDF functions to reserve the current contents, and store the falling-edge detection of the contact in
the accumulative register.

2. The instruction ANDF is used to connect the falling-edge detection of the contact in series.

3. The instruction ORP is used to connect the falling-edge detection of the contact in parallel.

4. Only when LDF/ANDF/ORF is scanned can the state of the device be gotten, and not until LDF/ANDF/ORF is
scanned next time can whether the state of the device changes be judged.

5. Please use the instructions NED, ANED, and ONED in the subroutine.

Example:

1. The falling-edge detection of X0.0 starts, the falling-edge detection of X0.1 is connected in series, the falling-edge
detection of X0.2 is connected in parallel, and the coil Y0.0 is driven.

2. When both X0.0 and X0.1 are switched from OFF to ON, or when X0.2 is switched from OFF to ON, Y0.0 is ON for a
scan cycle.

5-10
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

Starting the rising-edge detection/Connecting the rising
PED/APED/OPED S1，S2 edge-detection in series/Connecting the rising-edge
detection in parallel

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S1         
S2    

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 
Symbol:

PED S1 ： Specified device

APED S2 ： For internal use

5_
Output the state of the
OPED Q ：
operation result

Explanation:

1. PED/APED/OPED corresponds to LDP/ANDP/ORP. The only difference between PED/APED/OPED and

LDP/ANDP/ORP lies in the fact that users need to specify the bit device S2 in which the previous state of the contact
is stored when PED/APED/OPED is executed. Please do not use the device S2 repeatedly in the program.
Otherwise, the wrong execution result will appear.

2. The instruction APED is used to connect the rising-edge detection of the contact in series.

3. The instruction OPED is used to connect the rising-edge detection of the contact in parallel.

4. Only when PED/APED/OPED is scanned can the state of the device be gotten, and not until PED/APED/OPED is
scanned next time can whether the state of the device changes be judged.

5. PED/APED/OPED only can be used in the function block.

6. The state of the operation result will be outputted automatically after the instruction is executed. Users do not need
to input device for this.

Example:

1. The rising-edge detection of X0.0 starts, the rising-edge detection of X0.1 is connected in series, the rising-edge
detection of X0.2 is connected in parallel, and the coil Y0.0 is driven.

2. When both X0.0 and X0.1 are switched from OFF to ON, or when X0.2 is switched from OFF to ON, Y0.0 is ON for a
scan cycle.

5 - 11
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

_5

5-12
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

Starting the falling-edge detection/Connecting the
NED/ANED/ONED S1，S2 falling-edge detection in series/Connecting the
falling-edge detection in parallel

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S1         
S2    

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 
Symbol:

NED S1 ： Specified device

ANED S2 ： For internal use

5_
Output the state of
ONED Q ：
the operation result

Explanation:

1. NED/ANED/ONED corresponds to LDF/ANDF/ORF. The only difference between NED/ANED/ONED and

LDF/ANDF/ORF lies in the fact that users need to specify the bit device S2 in which the previous state of the contact
is stored when NED/ANED/ONED is executed. Please do not use the device S2 repeatedly in the program.
Otherwise, the wrong execution result will appear.

2. The instruction ANED is used to connect the falling-edge detection of the contact in series.

3. The instruction ONED is used to connect the falling-edge detection of the contact in parallel.

4. Only when NED/ANED/ONED is scanned can the state of the device be gotten, and not until NED/ANED/ONED is
scanned next time can whether the state of the device changes be judged.

5. NED/ANED/ONED only can be used in the function block.

6. The state of the operation result will be outputted automatically after the instruction is executed. Users do not need
to input device for this.

Example:

1. The falling -edge detection of X0.0 starts, the falling -edge detection of X0.1 is connected in series, the falling -edge
detection of X0.2 is connected in parallel, and the coil Y0.0 is driven.

2. When both X0.0 and X0.1 are switched from OFF to ON, or when X0.2 is switched from OFF to ON, Y0.0 is ON for a
scan cycle.

5-13
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

_5

5-14
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

PLS D Rising-edge output

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
D    

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

D 
Symbol:

PLS D ： Specified device

Explanation:

1. When the conditional contact is switched from OFF to ON, the instruction PLS is executed, and the device D sends
out a pulse for a scan cycle.

2. Please do not use the instruction PLS in the function block.

5_
Example:

When X0.0 is ON, M0 is ON for a pulse time. When M0 is ON, Y0.0 is set to ON.

Timing diagram:
X0.0
On e sc an c y c le
M0.0

Y0.0

5-15
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

Instruction code Operand Function

PLF D Falling-edge output

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
D    

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 
Symbol:

PLF D ：Specified device

Explanation:

1. When the conditional contact is switched from ON to OFF, the instruction PLF is executed, and the device D sends
out a pulse for a scan cycle.

2. Please do not use the instruction PLS in the function block.

_5

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, M0 is ON for a pulse time. When M0 is ON, Y0.0 is set to ON.

Timing chart:

X0 .0
One scan c ycle
M0

Y0 .0

5-16
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

INV - Inverting the logical operation result

Symbol:

Explanation:
The logical operation result preceding the instruction INV is inverted, and the inversion result stored in the accumulative
register.

Example:
When X0.0 is ON, Y0.0 is OFF. When X0.0 is OFF, Y0.0 is ON.

5_

5-17
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

Instruction code Operand Function

NP - The circuit is rising edge-triggered.

Symbol:

Explanation:
1. When the value in the accumulative register turns from 0 to 1, the instruction NP keeps the value 1 in the
accumulative register for a scan cycle. After the second scan cycle is finished, the value in the accumulative register
changes to 0.
2. Please use the instruction FB_NP in the function block.

Example:

Instruction: Operation:
_5
LD M0 Contact A of M0 is loaded.

AND M1 Contact A of M1 is connected in series.

NP The circuit is rising edge-triggered.

OUT Y0.0 The coil Y0.0 is driven.

Timing diagram:

M0

M1
One scan c ycle One scan c ycle
Y0 .0

5-18
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

PN - The circuit is falling edge-triggered.

Symbol:

Explanation:

1. When the value in the accumulative register turns from 1 to 0, the instruction PN keeps the value 1 in the
accumulative register for a scan cycle. After the second scan cycle is finished, the value in the accumulative register
changes to 0.

2. Please use the instruction FB_ PN in the function block.

Example:

5_
Instruction: Operation:：

LD M0 Contact A of M0 is loaded.

AND M1 Contact A of M1 is connected in series.

PN The circuit is falling edge-triggered.

OUT Y0.0 The coil Y0.0 is driven.

Timing diagram:

M0

M1
One scan cycle One scan cycle
Y0 .0

5-19
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

Instruction code Operand Function

FB_NP S The circuit is rising edge-triggered.

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S    

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 

Symbol:

S ： For internal use

Explanation:

1. When the value in the accumulative register turns from 0 to 1, the instruction FB_NP keeps the value 1 in the
accumulative register for a scan cycle. After the second scan cycle is finished, the value in the accumulative register
changes to 0.

_5 2. The previous state of the contact is stored in the bit device S. Please do not use S repeatedly in the program.
Otherwise, the wrong execution result will appear.

3. The instruction FB_NP only can be used in the function block.

Example:

Instruction: Operation:

LD M0 Contact A of M0 is loaded.

AND M1 Contact A of M1 is connected in series.

FB_NP D0.0 The circuit is rising edge-triggered.

OUT Y0.0 The coil Y0.0 is driven.

Timing diagram:

M0

M1
One scan cycl e One scan cycl e
Y0 .0

5-20
 C ha pt er 5 Bas ic I ns t r uc t i ons

Instruction code Operand Function

FB_PN S The circuit is falling edge-triggered.

Device DX DY X Y M SM S T C HC D
S    

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
Data type

S 

Symbol:

S ： For internal use

Explanation:

1. When the value in the accumulative register turns from 1 to 0, the instruction FB_PN keeps the value 1 in the
accumulative register for a scan cycle. After the second scan cycle is finished, the value in the accumulative register
changes to 0.

2. The previous state of the contact is stored in the bit device S. Please do not use S repeatedly in the program.
5_
Otherwise, the wrong execution result will appear.

3. The instruction FB_PN only can be used in the function block.

Example:

Instruction: Operation:

LD M0 Contact A of M0 is loaded.

AND M1 Contact A of M1 is connected in series.

FB_PN D0.0 The circuit is falling edge-triggered.

OUT Y0.0 The coil Y0.0 is driven.

Timing diagram:

M0

M1
One scan cycle One scan cycle
Y0 .0

5-21
 A S S er i es Pr o gr am m ing Ma n ua l

MEMO

_5

5-22
 6
Chapter 6 Applied Instructions

Table of Contents
6.1 Comparison Instructions ....................................................................... 6-4
6.1.1 List of Comparison Instructions ............................................................ 6-4
6.1.2 Explanation of Comparison Instructions................................................. 6-7

6.2 Arithmetic Instructions ....................................................................... 6-46

6.2.1 List of Arithmetic Instructions ............................................................ 6-46
6.2.2 Explanation of Arithmetic Instructions ................................................. 6-47

6.3 Data Conversion Instructions .............................................................. 6-78

6.3.1 List of Data Conversion Instructions ................................................... 6-78
6.3.2 Explanation of Data Conversion Instructions ........................................ 6-79

6.4 Data Transfer Instructions ................................................................ 6-117

6.4.1 List of Data Transfer Instructions ....................................................... 6-117
6.4.2 Explanation of Data Transfer Instructions ........................................... 6-118

_6 6.5 Jump Instructions ............................................................................. 6-145

6.5.1 List of Jump Instructions .................................................................. 6-145
6.5.2 Explanation of Jump Instructions....................................................... 6-146

6.6 Program Execution Instructions ........................................................ 6-154

6.6.1 List of Program Execution Instructions ............................................... 6-154
6.6.2 Explanation of Program Execution Instructions .................................... 6-155

6.7 IO Refreshing Instructions ................................................................ 6-167

6.7.1 List of IO Refreshing Instructions ...................................................... 6-167
6.7.2 Explanation of IO Refreshing Instructions ........................................... 6-168

6.8 Convenience Instructions .................................................................. 6-170

6.8.1 List of Convenience Instructions ........................................................ 6-170
6.8.2 Explanation of Convenience Instructions............................................. 6-171

6.9 Logic Instructions .............................................................................. 6-218

6.9.1 List of Logic Instructions .................................................................. 6-218
6.9.2 Explanation of Logic Instructions ....................................................... 6-219

6.10 Rotation Instructions....................................................................... 6-240

6.10.1 List of Rotation Instructions ............................................................ 6-240
6.10.2 Explanation of Rotation Instructions ................................................. 6-241

6-1
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

6.11 Timer and Counter Instructions ....................................................... 6-252

6.11.1 List of Timer and Counter Instructions ............................................. 6-252
6.11.2 Explanation of Timer and Counter Instructions .................................. 6-253

6.12 Shift Instructions ............................................................................ 6-285

6.12.1 List of Shift Instructions ................................................................. 6-285
6.12.2 Explanation of Shift Instructions...................................................... 6-286

6.13 Data Processing Instructions........................................................... 6-323

6.13.1 List of Data Processing Instructions ................................................. 6-323
6.13.2 Explanation of Data Processing Instructions ...................................... 6-324

6.14 Structure Creation Instructions ....................................................... 6-377

6.14.1 List of Structure Creation Instructions .............................................. 6-377
6.14.2 Explanation of Structure Creation Instructions................................... 6-378

6.15 Module Instructions ........................................................................ 6-386

6.15.1 List of Module Instructions ............................................................. 6-386
6.15.2 Explanation of Module Instructions .................................................. 6-387

6.16 Floating-point Number Instructions ................................................ 6-393

6.16.1 List of Floating-point Number Instructions ........................................ 6-393
6.16.2 Explanation of Floating-point Number Instructions ............................. 6-394

6.17 Real-time Clock Instructions ........................................................... 6-429

6.17.1 List of Real-time Clock Instructions .................................................. 6-429
6.17.2 Explanation of Real-time Clock Instructions ...................................... 6-430
_6
6.18 Peripheral Instructions.................................................................... 6-453
6.18.1 List of Peripheral Instructions ......................................................... 6-453
6.18.2 Explanation of Peripheral Instructions .............................................. 6-454

6.19 Communication Instructions ........................................................... 6-470

6.19.1 List of Communication Instructions .................................................. 6-470
6.19.2 Explanation of Communication Instructions....................................... 6-471
6.19.3 Descriptions on the Communication-related Flags and Registers .......... 6-539

6.20 Other Instructions ........................................................................... 6-542

6.20.1 List of Other Instructions ............................................................... 6-542
6.20.2 Explanation of Other Instructions .................................................... 6-543

6.21 String Processing Instructions ........................................................ 6-553

6.21.1 List of String Processing Instructions ............................................... 6-553
6.21.2 Explanation of String Processing Instructions .................................... 6-554

6.22 Ethernet Instructions ...................................................................... 6-608

6.22.1 List of Ethernet Instructions ........................................................... 6-608
6.22.2 Explanation of Ethernet Instructions ................................................ 6-609

6.23 Memory Card Instructions ............................................................... 6-643

6-2
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

6.23.1 List of Memory Card Instructions ..................................................... 6-643

6.23.2 Explanation of Memory Card Instructions .......................................... 6-644

6.24 Task Control Instructions ................................................................ 6-660

6.24.1 List of Task Control Instructions ...................................................... 6-660
6.24.2 Explanation of Task Control Instructions ........................................... 6-661

6.25 SFC Instructions .............................................................................. 6-665

6.25.1 List of SFC Instructions .................................................................. 6-665
6.25.2 Explanation of SFC Instructions ....................................................... 6-666

6.26 High-speed Output Instructions ...................................................... 6-673

6.26.1 List of High-speed Output Instructions ............................................. 6-673
6.26.2 Explanation of High-speed Output Instructions .................................. 6-675

6.27 Delta CANopen Communication Instructions ................................... 6-760

6.27.1 List of Delta CANopen Communication Instructions ............................ 6-760
6.27.2 Explanation of Delta CANopen Communication Instructions ................. 6-761

6_

6-3
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

6.1 Comparison Instructions

6.1.1 List of Comparison Instructions
Instruction code Pulse
API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0000 LD= DLD= – S1＝S2

0001 LD<> DLD<> – S1≠S2

0002 LD> DLD> – S1＞S2

0003 LD>= DLD>= – S1≧S2

0004 LD< DLD< – S1＜S2

0005 LD<= DLD<= – S1≦S2

0006 AND= DAND= – S1＝S2

0007 AND<> DAND<> – S1≠S2

0008 AND> DAND> – S1＞S2

0009 AND>= DAND>= – S1≧S2

0010 AND< DAND< – S1＜S2

0011 AND<= DAND<= – S1≦S2

0012 OR= DOR= – S1＝S2

0013 OR<> DOR<> – S1 ≠ S2

0014 OR> DOR> – S1＞S2

0015 OR>= DOR>= – S1≧S2

_6 0016 OR< DOR< – S1＜S2

0017 OR<= DOR<= – S1≦S2

0018 – FLD= – S1＝S2

0019 – FLD<> – S1≠S2

0020 – FLD> – S1＞S2

0021 – FLD>= – S1≧S2

0022 – FLD< – S1＜S2

0023 – FLD<= – S1≦S2

0024 – FAND= – S1＝S2

0025 – FAND<> – S1≠S2

0026 – FAND> – S1＞S2

0027 – FAND>= – S1≧S2

0028 – FAND< – S1＜S2

0029 – FAND<= – S1≦S2

0030 – FOR= – S1＝S2

0031 – FOR<> – S1≠S2

0032 – FOR> – S1＞S2

6-4
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0033 – FOR>= – S1≧S2

0034 – FOR< – S1＜S2

0035 – FOR<= – S1≦S2

0036 LD$= – – S1＝S2

0037 LD$<> – – S1≠S2

0042 AND$= – – S1＝S2

0043 AND$<> – – S1≠S2

0048 OR$= – – S1＝S2

0049 OR$<> – – S1≠S2

0054 CMP DCMP  Comparing the values
0055 ZCP DZCP  Zone comparison
0056 – FCMP  Comparing the floating-point numbers
0057 – FZCP  Floating-point zone comparison
0058 MCMP –  Matrix comparison
Comparing the tables
0059 CMPT= – 
ON: =
Comparing the tables
0060 CMPT<> – 
ON: <>
Comparing the tables
0061 CMPT> – 
ON: >

0062 CMPT>= – 
Comparing the tables 6_
ON: ≧
Comparing the tables
0063 CMPT< – 
ON: <
Comparing the tables
0064 CMPT<= – 
ON: ≦
0065 CHKADR – – Checking the address of the contact type of pointer register
0066 LDZ= DLDZ= – |S1-S2|=|S3|
0067 LDZ<> DLDZ<> – |S1-S2|≠|S3|
0068 LDZ> DLDZ> – |S1-S2|＞|S3|

0069 LDZ>= DLDZ>= – |S1-S2|≧|S3|

0070 LDZ< DLDZ< – |S1-S2|＜|S3|

0071 LDZ<= DLDZ<= – |S1-S2|≦|S3|

0072 ANDZ= DANDZ= – |S1-S2|=|S3|
0073 ANDZ<> DANDZ<> – |S1-S2|≠|S3|
0074 ANDZ> DANDZ> – |S1-S2|＞|S3|

0075 ANDZ>= DANDZ>= – |S1-S2|≧|S3|

0076 ANDZ< DANDZ< – |S1-S2|＜|S3|

0077 ANDZ<= DANDZ<= – |S1-S2|≦|S3|

6-5
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0078 ORZ= DORZ= – |S1-S2|=|S3|

0079 ORZ<> DORZ<> – |S1-S2|≠|S3|
0080 ORZ> DORZ> – |S1-S2|＞|S3|

0081 ORZ>= DORZ>= – |S1-S2|≧|S3|

0082 ORZ< DORZ< – |S1-S2|＜|S3|

0083 ORZ<= DORZ<= – |S1-S2|≦|S3|

_6

6-6
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

6.1.2 Explanation of Comparison Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0000~
D LD※ S1，S2 Comparing the values LD※
0005

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS
Symbol:
S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 1

Taking LD= and DLD= for example

Explanation:

1. The instructions are used to compare the value in S1 with that in S2. Take the instruction LD= for example. When the 6_
comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that in S2, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. When
the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is
met.

2. Only the 32-bit instruction can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

16-bit 32-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number
instruction instruction condition condition
0000 LD＝ DLD＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2

0001 LD＜＞ DLD＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2

0002 LD＞ DLD＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2

0003 LD＞＝ DLD＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2

0004 LD＜ DLD＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2

0005 LD＜＝ DLD＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2

Example:

1. When the value in C10 is equal to 200, Y0.10 is ON.

2. When the value in D200 is greater than -30, Y0.11 keeps ON.

3. When the value in (C201, C200) is less than 678,493, or when M3 is ON, M50 is ON.

6-7
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6

6-8
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0006~
D AND※ S1，S2 Comparing the values AND※
0011

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS
Symbol:
S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

Taking AND= and DAND=

for example

Explanation:

1. The instructions are used to compare the value in S1 with that in S2. Take the instruction AND= for example. When
6_
the comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that in S2, the continuity condition of the instruction is met.
When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the
instruction is met.

2. Only the 32-bit instruction can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

16-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number 32-bit instruction
instruction condition condition
0006 AND＝ DAND＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
0007 AND＜＞ DAND＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
0008 AND＞ DAND＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2

0009 AND＞＝ DAND＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2

0010 AND＜ DAND＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2

0011 AND＜＝ DAND＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON and the current value in C10 is equal to 100, Y0.10 is ON.

2. When X0.1 is OFF and the value in D0 is not equal to -10, Y0.11 keeps ON.

3. When X0.2 is ON and the value in (D11, D10) is less than 678,493, or when M3 is ON, M50 is ON.

6-9
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6

6-10
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0012~
D OR※ S1，S2 Comparing the values OR※
0017

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS
Symbol:
S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

Taking OR= and DOR= for example

Explanation:

1. The instructions are used to compare the value in S1 with that in S2. Take the instruction OR= for example. When the 6_
comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that in S2, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. When
the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is
met.

2. Only the 32-bit instruction can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

16-bit 32-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number
instruction instruction condition condition
0012 OR＝ DOR＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2

0013 OR＜＞ DOR＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2

0014 OR＞ DOR＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2

0015 OR＞＝ DOR＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2

0016 OR＜ DOR＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2

0017 OR＜＝ DOR＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2

Example:

1. When X0.1 is ON, or when the current value in C10 is equal to 100, Y0.10 is ON.

2. When both X0.2 and M30 are ON, or when the value in (D101, D100) is greater than or equal to 1000,000, M60 is
ON.

6 - 11
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6

6-12
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0018~ Comparing the floating-point numbers
FLD※ S1，S2
0023 LD※

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS
Symbol:
S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

Taking FLD= and DFLD= for example

Explanation:

1. This instruction is a 32-bit single precision floating point comparison instruction. 6_

2. The instructions are used to compare the value in S1 with that in S2, and the values compared are floating-point
numbers. Take the instruction FLD= for example. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that
in S2, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal
to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is met.

32-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number
instruction condition condition
0018 FLD＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2

0019 FLD＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2

0020 FLD＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2

0021 FLD＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2

0022 FLD＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2

0023 FLD＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2

6-13
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

Take the instruction FLD＝ for example. When the value in D0 is equal to that in D2, Y0.0 is ON.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the
contact is OFF, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-14
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0024~ Comparing the floating-point numbers
FAND※ S1，S2
0029 AND※

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2   DWORD       

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS
Symbol:

S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

Taking FAND= and DFAND= for example

Explanation:

1. This instruction is a 32-bit single precision floating point comparison instruction. 6_

2. The instructions are used to compare the value in S1 with that in S2, and the values compared are floating-point
numbers. Take the instruction FAND= for example. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to
that in S2, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not
equal to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is met.

32-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number
instruction condition condition
0024 FAND＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
0025 FAND＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
0026 FAND＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2

0027 FAND＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2

0028 FAND＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2

0029 FAND＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2

6-15
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

Take the instruction FAND＝ for example. When X1.0 is ON and the value in D1 is equal to that in D2, Y1.0 is ON.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the
contact is OFF, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-16
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0030~ Comparing the floating-point numbers
FOR※ S1，S2
0035 OR※

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2   DWORD       

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS
Symbol:
S1 ： Data source1

S2 ： Data source2

Taking FOR= and DFOR= for example

Explanation:

1. This instruction is a 32-bit single precision floating point comparison instruction. 6_

2. The instructions are used to compare the value in S1 with that in S2, and the values compared are floating-point
numbers. Take the instruction FOR= for example. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that
in S2, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal
to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is met.

32-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number
instruction condition condition
0030 FOR＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2

0031 FOR＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2

0032 FOR＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2

0033 FOR＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2

0034 FOR＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2

0035 FOR＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2

6-17
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

When X1.0 is ON, or when the value in D1 is equal to that in D2, Y1.0 is ON.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the
contact is OFF, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-18
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0036~
LD$※ S1，S2 Comparing the strings LD$※
0037

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2   DWORD     

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -
Symbol:

S1 ： Data source1

S2 ： Data source2

Taking LD$= for example

Explanation:

1. The instructions are used to compare the data in S1 with that in S2, and the data compared is strings. 6_
2. Up to 256 characters can be inputted in the S1 and S2 (16#00 the end symbol is included.)

3. Take the instruction LD$= for example. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that in S2, the
continuity condition of the instruction is met. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal
to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is met.

16-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number
instruction condition condition
0036 LD$＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
0037 LD$＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
th
4. Only when the data in S~S+n (n indicates the n device, up to 256 characters can be inputted) includes 16#00 can
the data be judged as a complete string. For example:

b 15 b8 b7 b0

S 16#32( 2) 16#31( 1)

S+1 16#34( 4) 16#33( 3)

S+2 16#00 16#35( 5)

" 12345 "

6-19
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

5. When two strings are the same, the corresponding comparison operation results of the instructions are listed below.
For example:
b 15 b8 b7 b0 b 15 b8 b7 b0

S1 16#42(B) 16#41(A) Comparison sign S2 16#42(B) 16#41(A)

S 1 +1 16#44(D) 16#43(C) S 2 +1 16#44(D) 16#43(C)
S 1 +2 16#00 16#45(E) S 2 +2 16#00 16#45(E)

" ABCDE " " ABCDE "

Comparison symbol Comparison operation result

$＝ Continuity
$＜＞ Discontinuity

Example:

When the string starting with the data in D0~16#00 is equal to the string staring with D2~16#00, Y0.0 is ON.

Additional remark:

_6 1. If the string contains more than 256 characters or the string does not end with 16#00, the instruction will not be
executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. During the string comparison, whenever the end symbol 16#00 is shown, the length of the string ends there.

6-20
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0042~
AND$※ S1，S2 Comparing the strings AND$※
0043

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -
Symbol:
S1 ： Data source1

S2 ： Data source2

Taking AND$= for example

Explanation:
1. The instructions are used to compare the data in S1 with that in S2, and the data compared is strings.
2. Up to 256 characters can be inputted in the S1 and S2 (16#00 the end symbol is included.) 6_
3. Take the instruction AND$= for example. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that in S2, the
continuity condition of the instruction is met. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal
to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is met.
16-bit Continuity Discontinuity
API number
instruction condition condition
0042 AND$＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
0043 AND$＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
th
4. Only when the data in S~S+n (n indicates the n device, up to 256 characters can be inputted) includes 16#00 can
the data be judged as a complete string. For example:
5. When two strings are the same, the corresponding comparison operation results of the instructions are listed below.
For example:

b 15 b8 b7 b0 b 15 b8 b7 b0

S1 16#42( B) 16#41( A) S2 16#42( B) 16#41( A)

Compar ison sign
S 1 +1 16#44( D) 16#43( C) S 2 +1 16#44( D) 16#43( C)
S 1 +2 16#00 16#45( E) S 2 +2 16#00 16#45( E)

" ABCDE " " ABCDE "

6-21
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Comparison symbol Comparison operation result

$＝ Continuity
$＜＞ Discontinuity

Example:

When the string starting with the data in D0~16#00 is equal to the string staring with D2~16#00, Y0.0 is ON.

Additional remark:

1. If the string contains more than 256 characters or the string does not end with 16#00, the instruction will not be
executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. During the string comparison, whenever the end symbol 16#00 is shown, the length of the string ends there.

_6

6-22
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0048~
OR$※ S1，S2 Comparing the strings OR$※
0049

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -
Symbol：

S1 ： Data source1

S2 ： Data source2

Taking OR$= for example

Explanation:
1. The instructions are used to compare the data in S1 with that in S2, and the data compared is strings.
2. Up to 256 characters can be inputted in the S1 and S2 (16#00 the end symbol is included.) 6_
3. Take the instruction OR$= for example. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is equal to that in S2, the
continuity condition of the instruction is met. When the comparison result is that the value in S1 is not equal
to that in S2, the discontinuity condition of the instruction is met.
16-bit Continuity Discontinuity
API number
instruction condition condition
0048 OR$＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2
0049 OR$＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2
th
4. Only when the data in S~S+n (n indicates the n device, up to 256 characters can be inputted) includes 16#00 can
the data be judged as a complete string. For example:
5. When two strings are the same, the corresponding comparison operation results of the instructions are listed below.
For example:

b 15 b8 b7 b0 b 15 b8 b7 b0

S1 16#42( B) 16#41( A) S2 16#42( B) 16#41( A)

Compar ison sign
S 1 +1 16#44( D) 16#43( C) S 2 +1 16#44( D) 16#43( C)
S 1 +2 16#00 16#45( E) S 2 +2 16#00 16#45( E)

" ABCDE " " ABCDE "

6-23
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Comparison symbol Comparison operation result

$＝ Continuity
$＜＞ Discontinuity

Example:

When the string starting with the data in D0~16#00 is equal to the string staring with D2~16#00, Y0.0 is ON.

Additional remark:

1. If the string contains more than 256 characters or the string does not end with 16#00, the instruction will not be
executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. During the string comparison, whenever the end symbol 16#00 is shown, the length of the string ends there.

_6

6-24
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0054 D CMP P S1，S2，D Comparing the values

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D   DWORD  

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS
Symbol：

S1 ： Comparison value1

S2 ： Comparison value2

D ： Comparison result

6_

Explanation：

1. The instruction is used to compare the value in S1 with that in S2, and the values compared are singed decimal
numbers. The comparison results are stored in D.

2. The operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices. The comparison results are stored in D, D+1, and D+2. If the
comparison value in S1 is greater than the comparison value in S2, D will be ON. If the comparison value in S1 is
equal to the comparison value in S2, D+1 is ON. If the comparison value in S1 is less than the comparison value in
S2, D+2 will be ON.

3. Only the instructions DCMP and DCMPP can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

1. If the operand D is M0, the comparison results will be stored in M0, M1 and M2, as shown below.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction CMP is executed. M0, M1, or M2 is ON. When X0.0 is OFF, the execution of the
instruction CMP stops. The state of M0, the state of M1, and the state of M1 remain unchanged.

6-25
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

3. If users need to clear the comparison result, they can use the instruction RST or ZRST.

Additional remark:

1. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of BOOL.

_6 2. If D+2 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-26
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0055 D ZCP P S1，S2，S，D Zone comparison

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
S           
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
S       
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS
Symbol：
Minimum value of the zone
S1 ：
comparison
Maximum value of the zone
S2 ：
comparison
S ： Comparison value 6_
D ： Comparison result

Explanation：

1. The instruction is used to compare the value in S with that in S1, and compare the value in S with that in S2. The
values compared are singed decimal numbers, and the comparison results are stored in D.

2. The value in S1 must be less than that in S2. If the value in S1 is larger than that in S2, S1 will be taken as the
maximum/minimum value during the execution of the instruction ZCP.

3. The operand D occupies three consecutive devices. The comparison results are stored in D, D+1, and D+2. If the
comparison value in S1 is less than the comparison value in S, D will be ON. If the comparison value in S is within
the range between the value in S1 and the value in S2, D+1 will ON. If the comparison value in S is greater than the
value in S2, D+2 will be ON.

4. Only the instructions DZCP and DZCPP can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

6-27
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

1. If the operand D is M0, the comparison results will be stored in M0, M1 and M2, as shown below.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction ZCP is executed. M0, M1, or M2 is ON. When X0.0 is OFF, the instruction ZCP is
not executed. The state of M0, the state of M1, and the state of M2 remain the same as those before X0.0’s being
OFF.

3. If users need to clear the comparison result, they can use the instruction RST or ZRST.

_6

Additional remark:

1. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of BOOL.

2. If D+2 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-28
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0056 FCMP P S1，S2，D Comparing the floating-point numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS － AS
Symbol：

S1 ： Floating-point comparison value1

S2 ： Floating-point comparison value2

D ： Comparison result

Explanation：
6_
1. The instruction FCMP is used to compare the floating-point number in S1 with the floating-point number in S2. The
comparison results (＞，＝，＜) are stored in D.

2. The operand D occupies three consecutive devices. The comparison results are stored in D, D+1, and D+2. If the
comparison value in S1 is greater than the comparison value in S1, D will be ON. If the comparison value in S1 is
equal to the value in S2, D+1 will ON. If the comparison value in S1 is less than the value in S2, D+2 will be ON.

Example:

1. If the operand D is M10, the comparison results will be stored in M10, M11 and M12, as shown below.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction FCMP is executed. M10, M11, or M12 is ON. When X0.0 is OFF, the instruction
FCMP is not executed. The state of M10, the state of M11, and the state of M12 remain the same as those before
X0.0’s being OFF.

3. If users want to get the comparison result ≧, ≦, or ≠, they can connect M10~M12 is series or in parallel.

4. If users want to clear the comparison result, they can use the instruction RST or ZRST.

6-29
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the
contact is OFF, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

2. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will ARRAY [3] of BOOL.

3. If D+2 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-30
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0057 FZCP P S1，S2，S，D Floating-point zone comparison

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
S         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
S 
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS － AS
Symbol：
Minimum value of the zone
S1 ：
comparison
Maximum value of the zone
S2 ：
comparison
S ： Comparison value 6_
D ： Comparison result

Explanation：

1. The instruction is used to compare the value in S with that in S1, and compare the value in S with that in S2. The
values compared are floating-point numbers, and the comparison results are stored in D.

2. The value in S1 must be less than that in S2. If the value in S1 is larger than that in S2, S1 will be taken as the
maximum/minimum value during the execution of the instruction FZCP.

3. The operand D occupies three consecutive devices. The comparison results are stored in D, D+1, and D+2. If the
comparison value in S1 is greater than the comparison value in S, D will be ON. If the comparison value in S is within
the range between the value in S1 and the value in S2, D+1 will be ON. If the compared value in S2 is less than the
value in S, D+2 will be ON.

Example:

1. If the operand D is M0, the comparison results will be stored in M0, M1 and M2.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction FZCP is executed. M0, M1, or M2 is ON. When X0.0 is OFF, the instruction FZCP
is not executed. The state of M0, the state of M1, and the state of M2 remain the same as those before X0.0’s being
OFF.

3. If users want to clear the comparison result, they can use the instruction RST or ZRST.

6-31
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 or S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers,
the contact is OFF, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

2. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of BOOL.

3. If D+2 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-32
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0058 MCMP P S1，S2，n，D Matrix comparison

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2       
n         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
n   
D   

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －
Symbol：

S1 ： Matrix source device 1

S2 ： Matrix source device 2

n ： Length of the array

D ： Pointer 6_
Explanation：

1. The search for the bits whose states are different starts from the bits specified by the number gotten from the
addition of one to the current value in D. After the bits whose states are different are found, the bit number is stored
in D, and the comparison is finished.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. When SM607 is ON, the equivalent values are compared. When SM607 is OFF, the different values are compared.
When the matching bits are compared, the comparison stops immediately, and SM610 is ON. When the last bits are
compared, SM608 is ON, and the bit number is stored in D. The comparison starts from the 0th bits in the next scan
cycle, and SM609 is ON. When the value in D exceeds the range, SM611 is ON.

4. When the instruction MCMP is executed, users need a 16-bit register to specify a certain bit among the 16n bits in
the matrix for the operation. The register is called the pointer, and is specified by users. The value in the register is
within the range between 0 and 16n-1, and corresponds to the bit within the range between b0 and b16n-1. During
the operation, users should be prevented from altering the value of the pointer in case the search for the matching
bits is affected. If the value of the pointer exceeds the range, SM611 will be ON, and the instruction MCMP will not
be executed.

5. If SM608 and SM610 occur simultaneously, they will be ON simultaneously.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, SM609 is OFF. The search for the bits whose states are different (SM607 is

6-33
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

OFF) starts from the bits specified by the number gotten from the addition of one to the current value of the pointer.

2. Suppose the current value in D20 is 2. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON four times, users can get the
following execution results.

 The value in D20 is 5, SM610 is ON, and SM608 is OFF.

 The value in D20 is 45, SM610 is ON, and SM608 is OFF.

 The value in D20 is 47, SM610 is OFF, and SM608 is ON.

 The value in D20 is 1, SM610 is ON, and SM608 is OFF.

2 Pointer
b0 D20
S1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b47
MCMP
b0
S2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

_6 b47
Additional remark:

1. The description of the operation error code:

If the devices S1+n-1 and S2+n-1 exceed the range, the instruction MCMP is not executed, SM is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#2003.

If the value in the operand n is not within the range between 1 and 256, the instruction MCMP is not executed, SM
is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. The description of the flags:

It is the matrix comparison flag.

SM607: ON: Comparing the equivalent values

OFF: Comparing the different values

SM608: The matrix comparison comes to an end. When the last bits are compared, SM608 is ON.

SM609: When SM609 is ON, the comparison starts from bit 0.

It is the matrix bit search flag. When the matching bits are compared, the comparison stops
SM610:
immediately, and SM610 is ON.

It is the matrix pointer error flag. When the value of the pointer exceeds the comparison range,
SM611:
SM611 is ON.

6-34
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

0059~
CMPT※ P S1，S2，n，D Comparing the tables
0064

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2       
n          
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
n   
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol：

S1 ： Source device 1

S2 ： Source device 2

n ： Data length
6_
D ： Comparison result

Explanation:

1. The instruction is used to compare n pieces of data in devices starting from S1 with those in devices starting from S2.
The values compared are signed decimal numbers, and the comparison results are stored in D.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. The value which is written into the operand D is a one-bit value.

4. When the results gotten from the comparison by using the instruction CMPT# are that all devices are ON, SM620 is
ON. Otherwise, SM620 is OFF.

5. If the operand S1 is a device, the comparison will be as shown below.

Compar ison result
S1 1234(BIN) S2 1111(B IN) D 1
S 1 +1 5678(BIN) S 2 +1 2222(BIN) D +1 1
S 1 +2 5000(BIN) Compar ison sign S 2 +2 3333(BIN) D +2 1
S 1 +3 1000(BIN) n > S 2 +3 4444(BIN) n D +3 0
~

S 1 +( N- 2) 10(BIN) S 2 +( N- 2) 8888(BIN) D +( N- 2) 0
S 1 +( N- 1) 90(BIN) S 2 +( N- 1) 9999(BIN) D +( N- 1) 0

6-35
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

6. If the operand S1 is a constant within the range between -32768 and 32767, the comparison will be as shown below.
Compar ison result
S2 1111(B IN) D 0
S 2 +1 2222(BIN) D +1 0
Compar iosn sign S 2 +2 3333(BIN) D +2 1
S1 3333(BIN) = S 2 +3 4444(BIN) n D +3 0

~
S 2 +( N- 2) 8888(BIN) D +( N- 2) 0
S 2 +( N- 1) 9999(BIN) D +( N- 1) 0

7. The corresponding comparison operation results of the instructions are listed below.

Comparison operation result

API number 16-bit instruction
ON OFF
0059 CMPT＝ S1＝S2 S1≠S2

0060 CMPT＜＞ S1≠S2 S1＝S2

0061 CMPT＞ S1＞S2 S1≦S2

0062 CMPT＞＝ S1≧S2 S1＜S2

0063 CMPT＜ S1＜S2 S1≧S2

0064 CMPT＜＝ S1≦S2 S1＞S2

Example:

The data in D0~D3 are compared with that in D10~D13. If the comparison result is that the data in D0~D3 is the same as
that in D10~D13, Y0.1~Y0.4 will be ON.

_6

Comparison result

D0 1000 D10 1000 Y0.1 1

Comparison sign
D1 2000 = D11 1000 Y0.2 0

D2 3000 D12 1000 Y0.3 0

D3 4000 D13 1000 Y0.4 0

Additional remark:

1. If the value in the operand n is not within the range between 1 and 256, the instruction is not executed, SM is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. If the number of devices specified by S1~S1+n, S2~S2+n, or D is insufficient, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is
ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-36
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

API Instruction code Operand Function

Checking the address of the contact type of
0065 CHKADR S，n，D
pointer register

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S
n          
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S
n   
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －
Symbol：

S ： Pointer register

n ： Number of devices

D ： Check result
6_
Explanation：

1. The instruction CHKADR is used to check whether the value in S and (the value in S)+n-1 exceed the device range.
If the check result is that the value in S and (the value in S)+n-1 do not exceed the device range, the device D will be
ON. Otherwise, it will be OFF.

2. S supports the pointer registers D, T, C, HC (POINTER/T_POINTER/C_POINTER/HC_POINTER).

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 1024.

4. The instruction CHKADR only can be used in the function block. It is used for the initial program development phase
or when not sure if the device range will be exceeded. After the program is written, this instruction can be deleted.

Example:

1. Establish a program (Prog0) and a function block (FB0) in ISPSoft.

6-37
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Declare two variables in the program.

2. Declare VarPR1, VarTR1, VarCR1, and VarHCR1 in the function block, and assign the data types POINTER,
T_POINTER, C_POINTER, and HC_POINTER to them respectively.

3. Call the function block FB0 in the program, and assign D29999, T0, C511, and HC50 to VarPR1, VarTR1, VarCR1,
and VarHCR1 in FB0 respectively.

_6

4. Use the instruction CHKADR to check whether VarPR1, VarTR1, VarCR1, and VarHCR1 exceed the range.

5. When chkPR is ON, the practical device represented by VarPR1 is D29999. Since the legal range of devices is from
D0 to D29999, and D29999+10-1=D30008, which exceeds the range, PR_ChkBit is OFF.

6. When chkTR is ON, the practical device represented by VarTR1 is T0. Since the legal range of devices is from T0 to
T511, and T0+10-1=T9, which does not exceed the range, TR_ChkBit is ON.

6-38
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

7. When chkCR is ON, the practical device represented by C511. Since the legal range of devices is from C0 to C511,
and C511+10-1=C520, which exceeds the range, CR_ChkBit is OFF.

8. When chkHCR is ON, the practical device represented by HC50 is VarHCR1. Since the legal range of deices is from
HC0 to HC255, and HC50+10-1=HC59, which does not exceed the range, HCR_ChkBit is ON.

Additional remark:

1. If the value (the practical device address) in S exceeds the device range, the instruction CHKADR is not executed,
SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the value in the operand n is not within the range between 1 and 1024, the instruction CHKADR is not executed,
SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6_

6-39
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

0066~ Comparing contact type

D LDZ※ S1，S2，S3
0071 absolute values LDZ※

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
S3           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
S3       

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS
Symbol：

S1 ： Data source1

S2 ： Data source2

S3 ： Comparison result

_6 Taking LDZ= and DLDZ= for example

Explanation:

1. The absolute value of the difference between S1 and S2 is compared with the absolute value of S3. Take LDZ= for
example. If the comparison result is that the absolute value of the differencebetween S1 and S2 is equal to the
absolute value of S3, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. If the comparison result is that the absolute
value of the difference between S1 and S2 is not equalto the absolute value of S3, the discontinuity condition of the
instruction is met.

2. Only the 32-bit instruction can use the 32-bit HC device, but not the device E.

16-bit 32-bit Continuity Discontinuity

API number
instruction instruction condition condition
0066 LDZ＝ DLDZ＝ | S1- S2|＝| S3| | S1- S2| ≠ | S3|

0067 LDZ＜＞ DLDZ＜＞ | S1- S2|≠| S3| | S1- S2|＝| S3|

0068 LDZ＞ DLDZ＞ | S1- S2|＞| S3| | S1- S2| ≦ | S3|

0069 LDZ＞＝ DLDZ＞＝ | S1- S2|≧| S3| | S1- S2|＜| S3|

0070 LDZ＜ DLDZ＜ | S1- S2|＜| S3| | S1- S2|≧ | S3|

0071 LDZ＜＝ DLDZ＜＝ | S1- S2|≦| S3| | S1- S2|＞| S3|

6-40
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

Example:

1. When the absolute difference of D10 and D11 is greater than 200, Y0.0 is ON. While the absolute difference is less
than 200, Y0.0 is OFF.

6_

6-41
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

0072~ Comparing contact type
D ANDZ※ S1，S2，S3
0077 absolute values ANDZ※

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
S3           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
S3       

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS
Symbol：

S1 ： Data source1

S2 ： Data source2

S3 ： Comparison result

_6 Taking ANDZ= and DANDZ= for example

Explanation:

1. The absolute value of the difference between S1 and S2 is compared with the absolute value of S3. Take ANDZ= for
example. If the comparison result is that the absolute value of the differencebetween S1 and S2 is equal to the
absolute value of S3, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. If the comparison result is that the absolute
value of the difference between S1 and S2 is not equalto the absolute value of S3, the discontinuity condition of the
instruction is met.

2. Only the 32-bit instruction can use the 32-bit HC device, but not the device E.

Continuity Discontinuity
API number 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction
condition condition
0072 ANDZ＝ DANDZ＝ | S1- S2|＝| S3| | S1- S2| ≠ | S3|
0073 ANDZ＜＞ DANDZ＜＞ | S1- S2|≠| S3| | S1- S2|＝| S3|
0074 ANDZ＞ DANDZ＞ | S1- S2|＞| S3| | S1- S2| ≦ | S3|

0075 ANDZ＞＝ DANDZ＞＝ | S1- S2|≧| S3| | S1- S2|＜| S3|

0076 ANDZ＜ DANDZ＜ | S1- S2|＜| S3| | S1- S2|≧ | S3|

0077 ANDZ＜＝ DANDZ＜＝ | S1- S2|≦| S3| | S1- S2|＞| S3|

6-42
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

Example:

1. When M0 is ON and the absolute difference of D10 and D11 is greater than 200, Y0.0 is ON. While the absolute
difference is less than 200, Y0.0 is OFF.

6_

6-43
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

0078~ Comparing contact type
D ORZ※ S1，S2，S3
0083 absolute values ORZ※

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
S3           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
S3       

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS
Symbol：

S1 ： Data source1

S2 ： Data source2

S3 ： Comparison result

Taking ORZ= and DORZ= for example

_6
Explanation:

1. The absolute value of the difference between S1 and S2 is compared with the absolute value of S3. Take ORZ= for
example. If the comparison result is that the absolute value of the differencebetween S1 and S2 is equal to the
absolute value of S3, the continuity condition of the instruction is met. If the comparison result is that the absolute
value of the difference between S1 and S2 is not equalto the absolute value of S3, the discontinuity condition of the
instruction is met.

2. Only the 32-bit instruction can use the 32-bit HC device, but not the device E.

Continuity Discontinuity
API number 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction
condition condition
0078 ORZ＝ DORZ＝ | S1- S2|＝| S3| | S1- S2| ≠ | S3|
0079 ORZ＜＞ DORZ＜＞ | S1- S2|≠| S3| | S1- S2|＝| S3|
0080 ORZ＞ DORZ＞ | S1- S2|＞| S3| | S1- S2| ≦ | S3|

0081 ORZ＞＝ DORZ＞＝ | S1- S2|≧| S3| | S1- S2|＜| S3|

0082 ORZ＜ DORZ＜ | S1- S2|＜| S3| | S1- S2|≧ | S3|

0083 ORZ＜＝ DORZ＜＝ | S1- S2|≦| S3| | S1- S2|＞| S3|

6-44
 C h a p t e r 6 Ap p l i e d I n s t r u c t i o n s

Example:

1. When M0 is ON and the absolute difference of D10 and D11 is greater than 200, Y0.0 is ON. While the absolute
difference is less than 200, Y0.0 is OFF.

6_

6-45
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.2 Arithmetic Instructions

6.2.1 List of Arithmetic Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0100 + D+  Addition of binary numbers

0101 - D-  Subtraction of binary numbers

0102 * D*  Multiplication of binary numbers

0103 / D/  Division of binary numbers

0104 – F+  Addition of floating-point numbers

0105 – F-  Subtraction of floating-point numbers

0106 – F*  Multiplication of floating-point numbers

0107 – F/  Division of floating-point numbers

0112 BK+ DBK+  Binary number block addition

0113 BK- DBK-  Binary number block subtraction

0114 $+ –  Linking the strings

0115 INC DINC  Adding one to the binary number

0116 DEC DDEC  Subtracting one from the binary number

_6
MUL16: Multiplication of binary numbers for 16-bit instructions
0117 MUL16 MUL32 
MUL32: Multiplication of binary numbers for 32-bit instructions

DIV16: Division of binary numbers for 16-bit instructions

0118 DIV16 DIV32 
DIV32: Division of binary numbers for 32-bit instructions

6-46
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

6.2.2 Explanation of Arithmetic Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0100 D + P S1，S2，D Addition of binary numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

Data

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
type INT

S1       
S2       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Augend

S2 ： Addend

D ： Sum 6_

Explanation:

1. The binary value in S2 is added to the binary value in S1, and the sum is stored in D.

2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The Flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), and SM602 (carry flag)

4. When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

5. The addition of 16-bit binary values:

When the operation result exceeds the range of 16-bit binary values, SM602 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

6. The addition of 32-bit binary values:

6-47
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

When the operation result exceeds the range of 32-bit binary values, SM602 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

Example 1:

The addition of 16-bit binary values: When X0.0 is ON, the addend in D10 is added to the augend in D0, and sum is stored

in D20.

 When the values in D0 and D10 are 100 and 10 respectively, D0 plus D10 equals 110, and 110 is stored in D20.

 When the values in D0 and D10 are 16#7FFF and 16#1 respectively, D0 plus D10 equals 16#8000, and 16#8000 is

stored in D20.

 When the values in D0 and D10 are 16#FFFF and 16#1 respectively, D0 plus D10 equals 16#10000. Since the

operation result exceeds the range of 16-bit binary values, SM602 is ON, and the value stored in D20 is 16#0.

Besides, since the operation result is 16#0, SM600 is ON.

Example 2:
_6
The addition of 32-bit binary values: When X0.0 is ON, the addend in (D41, D40) is added to the augend in (D31, D30),

and sum is stored in (D51, D50). (The data in D30, D40, and D50 is the lower 16-bit data, whereas the data in D31, D41,

and D51 is the higher 16-bit data).

 When the values in (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) are 11111111 and 44444444 respectively, (D31, D30) plus (D41,

D40) equals 55555555, and 55555555 is stored in (D51, D50).

 When the values in (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) are 16#80000000 and 16#FFFFFFFF respectively, (D31, D30) plus

(D41, D40) equals 16#17FFFFFFF. Since the operation result exceeds the range of 32-bit binary values, SM602 is

ON, and the value stored in (D51, D50) is 16#7FFFFFFF.

6-48
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Flag:

The 16-bit instruction:

1. If the operation result is zero, SM600 will be set to ON.

2. If the operation result exceeds 65,535, SM602 will be set to ON.

The 32-bit instruction:

1. If the operation result is zero, SM600 will be set to ON.

2. If the operation result exceeds 4,294,967,295, SM602 will be set to ON.

The 16-bit instruction: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

65,535、0、1 65,535、0、1 65,535、0、1 、2

Borrow flag Carry flag

The 32-bit instruction: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

4,294,967,295 、0、1
6_
4,294,967,295 、0、1 4,294,967,295 、0、1、2

Borrow flag Carry flag

6-49
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0101 D - P S1，S2，D Subtraction of binary numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Minuend

S2 ： Subtrahend

D ： Difference

_6

Explanation:

1. The binary value in S2 is subtracted from the binary value in S1, and the difference is stored in D.

2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The Flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), and SM602 (carry flag)

4. When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

5. When a borrow occurs during the arithmetic, SM601 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

Example 1:

The subtraction of 16-bit binary values: When X0.0 is ON, the subtrahend in D10 is subtracted from the minuend in D0,

and the difference is stored in D20.

6-50
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

 When the values in D0 and D10 are 100 and 10 respectively, D0 minus D10 leaves 90, and 90 is stored in D20.

 When the values in D0 and D10 are 16#8000 and 16#1 respectively, D0 minus D10 leaves 16#7FFF, and 16#7FFF

is stored in D20.

 When the values in D0 and D10 are 16#1 and 16#2 respectively, D0 minus D10 leaves 16#FFFF. Since the borrow

occurs during the arithmetic, SM601 is ON, and the value stored in D20 is 16#FFFF.

 When the values in D0 and D10 are 16#0 and 16#FFFF respectively, D0 minus D10 leaves 16#F0001. Since the

borrow occurs during the arithmetic, SM601 is ON, and the value stored in D20 is 16#1.

Example 2:：

The addition of 32-bit binary values: When X0.0 is ON, the subtrahend in (D41, D40) is subtracted from the minuend in

(D31, D30), and sum is stored in (D51, D50). (The data in D30, D40, and D50 is the lower 16-bit data, whereas the data in

D31, D41, and D51 is the higher 16-bit data).

6_

 When the values in (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) are 55555555 and 11111111 respectively, (D31, D30) minus (D41,

D40) D10 leaves 44444444, and 44444444 is stored in (D51, D50).

 When the values in (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) are 16#80000000 and 16#FFFFFFFF respectively, (D31, D30)

minus (D41, D40) leaves 16#F80000001. Since the borrow occurs during the arithmetic, SM601 is ON, and the

value stored in (D51, D50) is 16#80000001.

6-51
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0102 D * P S1，S2，D Multiplication of binary numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Multiplicand

S2 ： Multiplier

D ： Product

_6

Explanation:

1. The signed binary value in S1 is multiplied by the singed binary value in S2, and the product is stored in D.

2. Only the instruction D* can use the 32-bit counter.

3. The multiplication of 16-bit binary values:

S1 S2 D +1 D

b15..............b0 b15..............b0 b31.........b16 b15...........b0

b15 is the si gn bit.

* b15 is the si gn bit.= b31, i.e. b15 in D+ 1, is the sign bit.

The product is a 32-bit value, and is stored in the register (D+1, D), which is composed of 32 bits. When the sign bit

b31 is 0, the product is a positive value. When the sign bit b31 is 1, the product is a negative value.

6-52
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

4. The multiplication of 32-bit binary values:

S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D +3 D +2 D +1 D

b31...b16 b15...b0 b31...b16 b15...b0 b63...b48 b47...b32 b31...b16 b15...b0

* =
b31 is the si gn bit. b31 is the si gn bit. b63, i.e. b15 in D+3, is the sign bit.

The product is a 64-bit value, and is stored in the register (D+3, D+2, D+1, D0), which is composed of 64 bits. When

the sign bit b63 is 0, the product is a positive value. When the sign bit b63 is 1, the product is a negative value.

Example:

The 16-bit value in D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit value in D10, and the 32-bit product is stored in (D21, D20). The data in

D21 is the higher 16-bit data, whereas the data in D20 is the lower 16-bit data. Whether the result is a positive value or a

negative value depends on the state of the highest bit b31. When b31 is OFF, the result is a positive value. When b31 is

ON, the result is a negative value.

6_
D0×D10=(D21, D20)

16-bit value×16-bit value=32-bit value

6-53
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0103 D / P S1，S2，D Division of binary numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Dividend

S2 ： Divisor

D ： Quotient; remainder

_6

Explanation:

1. The singed binary value in S1 is divided by the signed binary value in S2. The quotient and the remainder are stored
in D.

2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter.

3. When the sign bit is 0, the value is a positive one. When the sign bit is 1, the value is a negative one.

4. The division of 16-bit values:

Quotient Remainder
S1 S2 D D+1

b15..............b0 b15..............b0 b15..............b0 b15..............b0

/ =
The operand D occupies two consecutive devices. The quotient is stored in D, and the remainder is stored in D+1.

6-54
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

5. The division of 32-bit values:

Quotient Remainder
S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D+1 D D+3 D+2

b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0

/ =
The operand D occupies two devices. The quotient is stored in (D+1, D), and the remainder is stored in (D+3, D+2).

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the dividend in D0 is divided by the divisor in D10, the quotient is stored in D20, and the remainder is

stored in D21. Whether the result is a positive value or a negative value depends on the state of the highest bit.

6_
Additional remark:

1. If the device exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the divisor is 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2012.

3. If the operand D used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

4. If the operand D used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [2] of DWORD/DINT.

6-55
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0104 F+ P S1，S2，D Addition of floating-point numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1        
S2        
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Augend

S2 ： Addend

D ： Sum

Explanation:
_6
1. This instruction is an operation for the addition of 32-bit single-precision floating-point numbers.

2. The floating-point number in S2 is added to the floating-point number in S1, and the sum is stored in D.

3. The Flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), and SM602 (carry flag)

 When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is less than the value which can be represented by the

minimum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#FF800000 and SM601 is ON.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is larger than the value which can be represented by the

maximum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F800000 and SM602 is ON.

Example:

The addition of single-precision floating-point numbers: When X0.0 is ON, the addend 16#4046B852 in (D21, D20) is

added to the augend 16#3FB9999A in (D11, D10), and the sum 16#4091C28F is stored in (D31, D30). 16#4046B852,

16#3FB9999A, and 16#4091C28F represent the floating point numbers 3.105, 1.450, and 4.555 respectively.

6-56
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Additional remark:

If the value in S1 or the value in S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers,

the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6_

6-57
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0105 F- P S1，S2，D Subtraction of floating-point numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1        
S2        
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Minuend

S2 ： Subtrahend

D ： Difference

_6
Explanation:

1. This instruction is an operation for the subtraction of 32-bit single-precision floating-point numbers.

2. The floating-point number in S2 is subtracted from the floating-point number in S1, and the difference is store in D.

3. The Flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), and SM602 (carry flag)

 When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is less than the value which can be represented by the

minimum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#FF800000 and SM601 is ON.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is larger than the value which can be represented by the

maximum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F800000 and SM602 is ON.

S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D+1 D

b31.........b16 b15...........b0 b31.........b16 b15...........b0 b31.........b16 b15...........b0

- =

6-58
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Example:

The subtraction of 32-bit single-precision floating-point numbers: When X0.0 is ON, the subtrahend in (D21, D20) is

subtracted from the minuend in (D21, D20), and the difference is stored in (D31, D30).

Additional remark:

If the value in S1 or the value in S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers,

the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6_

6-59
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0106 F* P S1，S2，D Multiplication of floating-point numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1        
S2        
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Multiplicand

S2 ： Multiplier

D ： Product

_6
Explanation:

1. This instruction is an operation for the multiplication of 32-bit single-precision floating-point numbers.

2. The floating-point number in S1 is multiplied by the floating-point number in S2, and the product is stored in D.

3. The Flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), and SM602 (carry flag)

 When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is less than the value which can be represented by the

minimum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#FF800000 and SM601 is ON.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is larger than the value which can be represented by the

maximum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F800000 and SM602 is ON.

S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D+1 D

b31.........b16 b15...........b0 b31.........b16 b15...........b0 b31.........b16 b15...........b0

* =

6-60
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Example:

The multiplication of 32-bit single-precision floating-point numbers: When X0.0 is ON, the multiplicand 32.5 is multiplied by

the multiplier in (D1, D0), and the product is stored in (D11, D10).

Additional remark:

If the value in S1 or the value in S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers,

the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6_

6-61
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0107 F/ P S1，S2，D Division of floating-point numbers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1        
S2        
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Dividend

S2 ： Divisor

D ： Quotient

_6
Explanation:

1. This instruction is an operation for the division of 32-bit single-precision floating-point numbers.

2. The single-precision floating-point number in S1 is divided by the single-precision flaoting-point number in S2. The
quotient is stored in D.

3. The Flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), and SM602 (carry flag)

 When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is less than the value which can be represented by the

minimum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#FF800000 and SM601 is ON.

 When the absolute value of the operation result is larger than the value which can be represented by the

maximum floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F800000 and SM602 is ON.

S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D +1 D

b31.........b16 b15...........b0 b31.........b16 b15...........b0 b31.........b16 b15...........b0

/ =

6-62
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Example:

The division of 32-bit single-precision floating-point numbers: When X0.0 is ON, the dividend in (D1, D0) is divided by the

divisor 100.7, and the quotient is stored in (D11, D10).

Additional remark:

1. If the divisor is 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2012.

2. If the value in S1 or the value in S2 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point
numbers, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6_

6-63
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0112 D BK+ P S1，S2，n，D Addition of binary values in blocks

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2         
n         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
n     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Augend

S2 ： Addend

n ： Data length
_6 D ： Sum

Explanation:

1. n pieces of data in devices starting from S2 are added to those in devices starting from S1. The augends and the
addends are binary values, and the sums are stored in D.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter.

4. When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON.

5. For the 16-bit instructions, when the operation result is less than –32,768, SM601 is ON.

6. For the 16-bit instructions, when the operation result is larger than 32,767, SM602 is ON.

7. For the 32-bit instructions, when the operation result is less than–21,474,836,488, SM601 is ON.

8. For the 32-bit instructions, when the operation result is larger than 2,147,483,647, SM602 is ON.

6-64
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

9. Take the 16-bit instruction as an example, when the operand S2 is a device (not a constant or a hexadecimal value):

} } }
S1 1 S2 1 D 1+1=2
S1 +1 2 + S2 +1 2 = D +1 2+2=4
.
.
.
.
n .
.
.
.
n .
.
.
. n
. . .
. . . . . .
. .
. .
. .

S1 +n-1 S S2 +n-1 5 D +n-1 5+5=10

10. Take the 16-bit instruction as an example, when the operand S2 is a constant or a hexadecimal value:

} } }
S1 1 S2 10 D 1+10=11
S1 +1 2 + S2 10 = D +1 2+10=12
.
.
.
.
n .
.
.
.
n .
.
.
. n
. . .
. . . . . .
. .
. .
. .

S1 +n-1 5 S2 10 D +n-1 5+10=15

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the binary values in D10~D14 are added to the binary values in D0~D4, and the sums are stored

in D100~D104.

6_

Ex ec ution res ult

D0 1 D10 10 D100 11
D1 2 D11 11 D101 13
D2 3 + D12 12 D102 15
D3 4 D13 13 D103 17
D4 5 D14 14 D104 19

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, the addend 10 is added to the binary values in D0~D4, and the sums are stored in D100~D104.

6-65
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Ex ec ution res ult

D0 1 10 D100 11
D1 2 10 D101 12
D2 3 + 10 D102 13
D3 4 10 D103 14
D4 5 10 D104 15

Additional remark:

1. For the 16-bit instructions, if the devices S1~S1+n-1, S2~S2+n-1, or D~D+n-1 exceed the device range, the
instruction is not executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. For the 32-bit instructions, if the devices S1~S1+2*n-1, S2~S2+2*n-1, or D~D+2*n-1 exceed the device range, the
instruction is not executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.
_6
3. If n<1 or n>256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

4. For the 16-bit instructions, if S1~S1+n-1 overlap D~D+n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#200C.

5. For the 32-bit instructions, if S1~S1+2*n-1 overlap D~D+2*n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#200C.

6. For the 16-bit instructions, if S2~S2+n-1 overlap D~D+n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#200C.

7. For the 32-bit instructions, if S2~S2+2*n-1 overlap D~D+2*n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#200C.

6-66
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

0113 D BK- P S1，S2，n，D Subtraction of binary values in blocks

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2         
n         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
n     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Minuend

S2 ： Subtrahend

n ： Data length
D ： Difference
6_

Explanation:

1. n pieces of data in devices starting from S2 are subtracted to those in devices starting from S1. The minuends and

the subtrahends are binary values, and the differences are stored in D.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter.

4. When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON.

5. For the 16-bit instructions, when the operation result is less than –32,768, SM601 is ON.

6. For the 16-bit instructions, when the operation result is larger than 32,767, SM602 is ON.

7. For the 32-bit instructions, when the operation result is less than–21,474,836,488, SM601 is ON.

6-67
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

8. For the 32-bit instructions, when the operation result is larger than 2,147,483,647, SM602 is ON.

9. Take the 16-bit instruction as an example, when the operand S2 is a device (not a constant or a hexadecimal value):

} } }
S1 5 S2 1 D 5-1=4
S1 +1 4 - S2 1 = D +1 4-1=3
.
.
.
.
n .
.
.
.
n .
.
.
. n
. . .
. . . . . .
. .
. .
. .

S1 +n-1 1 S2 1 D +n-1 1-1=0

10. Take the 16-bit instruction as an example, when the operand S2 is a constant or a hexadecimal value:

} } }
S1 5 S2 1 D 5-1=4
S1 +1 4 - S2 1 = D +1 4-1=3
.
.
.
.
n .
.
.
.
n .
.
.
. n
. . .
. . . . . .
. .
. .
. .

S1 +n-1 1 S2 1 D +n-1 1-1=0

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the binary values in D10~D14 are subtracted from the binary values in D0~D4, and the

differences are stored in D100~D104.

_6

Ex ec ution res ult

D0 5 D10 1 D100 4 1
D1 4 D11 2 D101 2 SM6 00
D2 3 - D12 3 D102 0
D3 2 D13 4 D103 -2
D4 1 D14 5 D104 -4

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, the subtrahend 1 is subtracted from the binary values in D0~D4, and the differences are stored in

D100~D104.

6-68
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Ex ec ution res ult

D0 10 1 D100 9
D1 9 1 D101 8
D2 8 - 1 D102 7
D3 7 1 D103 6
D4 6 1 D104 5

Additional remark:

1. For the 16-bit instructions, if the devices S1~S1+n-1, S2~S2+n-1, or D~D+n-1 exceed the device range, the
instruction is not executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. For the 32-bit instructions, if the devices S1~S1+2*n-1, S2~S2+2*n-1, or D~D+2*n-1 exceed the device range, the
instruction is not executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If n<1 or n>256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B. 6_

4. For the 16-bit instructions, if S1~S1+n-1 overlap D~D+n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#200C.

5. For the 32-bit instructions, if S1~S1+2*n-1 overlap D~D+2*n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#200C.

6. For the 16-bit instructions, if S2~S2+n-1 overlap D~D+n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#200C.

7. For the 32-bit instructions, if S2~S2+2*n-1 overlap D~D+2*n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#200C.

6-69
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0114 $+ P S1，S2，D Linking the strings

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2       
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： String 1

S2 ： String 2

D ： Device in which the string is stored

Explanation:

_6 1. When the instruction is executed, the string starting with the data in the device specified by S1 (exclusive of 16#00),
and the string starting with the data in the device specified by S2 (exclusive of 16#00) are linked and moved to the

operand D. Besides, the code 16#00 is added to the end of the linked string in the operand D. When the instruction
is not executed, the data in D is unchanged.

2. When the data source for S1, S2 or Operand D is not a string ($), the content of the data source is up to 256

characters (the ending code 16#00 included)

3. The string in the operand S1 and the string in the operand S2 are linked and moved to the operand D, as illustrated

below.

S1 B (1 6# 62 ) A (1 6# 61 ) S2 B (1 6# 42 ) A (1 6# 41 ) D B (1 6# 62 ) A (1 6# 61 )
D( 16 #6 4) C( 16 #6 3) S2 +1 D( 16 #4 4) C( 16 #4 3) D( 16 #6 4) C( 16 #6 3)
S 1 +1 = D +1
S 1 +2 ( 16 #0 0) E (1 6# 65 ) 1 2 (1 6# 00 )
S2 + (1 6# 00 ) D +2 A (1 6# 41 ) E (1 6# 65 )

D +3 C( 16 #4 3) B (1 6# 42 )

D +
14 (1 6# 00 ) D( 16 #4 4)

T ur ning into 16#00 automati cally

6-70
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

S1 B (1 6# 62 ) A (1 6# 61 ) S2 B (1 6# 42 ) A (1 6# 41 ) D d (1 6# 62 ) a (1 6# 61 )
D( 16 #6 4) C( 16 #6 3) S2 +1 D( 16 #4 4) C( 16 #4 3) d (1 6# 64 ) c( 16 #6 3)
S 1 +1 = D +1
S 1 +2 E (1 6# 65 ) ( 16 #0 0) S2 +
12 (1 6# 00 ) (1 6# 00 ) D +2 B (1 6# 42 ) A (1 6# 41 )

D +3 D( 16 #4 4) C( 16 #4 3)

D +
14 (1 6# 00 ) ( 16 #0 0)

T ur ning into 16#00 automatic ally

4. When the data source for S1, S2 or Operand D is not a string ($),the ending code 16#00 should be added to the end

of the data which is moved.

5. Suppose S1 or S2 is not a string. When the instruction is executed and the first character is the code 16#00, 16#00 is

still linked and moved.

6. The string “abcde” in the Operand S1 is shown as below.

S1 b(16#62) a(16#61)

S 1 +1 d(16#64) c(16#63)

S 1 +2 (16#00) e(16#65)

Example:

Suppose S1 is the string “ab” and S2 is the string “c”. After the conditional contact M0 is enabled, the data in D65534 is

16#6261 and the data in D65535 is16#0063.

6_

Additional remark:

1. If S1 or S2 is a string, at most 31 characters can be moved.

2. If D is not sufficient to contain the string composed of the strings in S1 and S2, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is

ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the string of S1+S2 is with more than 256 character (the ending code 16#00 included), the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If S1 or S2 overlaps D, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200C.

5. If the string in S1 or S2 does not end with 16#00, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#200E.

6-71
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0115 D INC P D Adding one to the binary number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D  DWORD      

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Destination device

Explanation:

_6 1. One is added to the value in D.

2. Only the instruction DINC can use the 32-bit counter.

3. When the 16-bit operation is performed, 32,767 plus 1 equals -32,768. When the 32-bit operation is performed,

2,147,483,647 plus 1 equals -2,147,483,648.

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the value in D0 increases by one.

6-72
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

0116 D DEC P D Subtracting one from the binary number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D       

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Destination device

Explanation:

1. One is subtracted from the value in D.

6_

2. Only the instruction DDEC can use the 32-bit counter.

3. When the 16-bit operation is performed, -32,768 minus 1 leaves 32,767. When the 32-bit operation is performed,

-2,147,483,648 minus 1 leaves 2,147,483,647.

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the value in D0 decreases by one.

6-73
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

MUL16 16-bit binary multiplication
0117 P S1，S2，D
MUL32 32-bit binary multiplication

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Multiplicand

S2 ： Multiplier

D ： Product

_6
Explanation:

1. The signed binary value in S1 is multiplied by the singed binary value in S2, and the product is stored in D.

2. Only MUL32 can use an HC device.

3. 16-bit binary multiplication:

S1 S2 D

b15..............b0 b15..............b0 b15..............b0

* =
Bit 15 is a sign bit. Bit 15 is a sign bit. Bit 15 is a sign bit.

The product gotten is a 16-bit value. It is stored in D which is a 16-bit register. If b15 in D is 0, the product stored

in D is a positive value. If b15 in D is 1, the product stored in D is a negative value.

4. 32-bit binary multiplication:

6-74
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D +1 D

b31...b16 b15...b0 b31...b16 b15...b0 b31...b16 b15...b0

Bit 31 is a si gn bit.
* Bit 31 is a si gn bit.= Bit 31 is a si gn bit.

The product gotten is a 32-bit value. It is stored in (D, D+1) which is a 32-bit register. If b31 in D is 0, the product stored in

(D, D+1) is a positive value. If b31 in D is 1, the product stored in (D, D+1) is a negative value.

Example:

The 16-bit value in D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit value in D10, and the product is stored in D20. Whether the product is a

positive value or a negative value depends on the leftmost bit (bit 15) in D20. If bit 15 in D20 is 0, the product stored in D20

is a positive value. If bit 15 in D20 is 1, the product stored in D20 is a negative value.

D0×D10=D20
6_
16-bit value×16-bit value=16-bit value

Additional remark:

1. If the product of a 16-bit multiplication is not a 16-bit signed value available, and is greater than the maximum 16-bit

positive number K32767, or less than the minimum negative number K-32768, the carry flag SM602 will be ON, and

only the low 16 bits will be written.

2. If users need the complete result of a 16-bit multiplication (a 32-bit value), they have to use API 0102 */*P. Please

refer to the explanation of API 0102 */*P for more information.

3. If the product of a 32-bit multiplication is not a 32-bit signed value available, and is greater than the maximum 32-bit

positive number K2147483647, or less than the minimum negative number K-2147483648, the carry flag SM602

will be ON, and only the low 32 bits will be written.

4. If users need the complete result of a 32-bit multiplication (a 64-bit value), they have to use API 0102 D*/D*P. Please

refer to the explanation of API 0102 D*/D*P for more information.

6-75
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

DIV16 16-bit binary division
0118 P S1，S2，D
DIV32 32-bit binary division

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Dividend

S2 ： Divisor

D ： Quotient; remainder

_6
Explanation:

1. The singed binary value in S1 is divided by the signed binary value in S2. The quotient is stored in D.

2. Only the 32-bit instruction can use an HC device.

3. Sign bit=0 (Positive number); sign bit =1 (Negative number)

4. 16-bit binary division:

Quotient
S1 S2 D

b15..............b0 b15..............b0 b15..............b0

/ =
The quotient is stored in D.

5. 32-bit binary division:

6-76
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Quotient
S 1 +1 S1 S 2 +1 S2 D+1 D

b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0 b15.....b0

/ =
D occupies two consecutive devices. The quotient is stored in (D+1, D).

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the dividend in D0 is divided by the divisor in D10, and the quotient is stored in D20.

Whether the quotient is a positive value or a negative value depends on the leftmost bit in D20.

Additional remark:

1. If the device used is not available, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON, and the error code stored in

SR0 will be 16#2003.

2. If the divisor used is 0, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON, and the error code stored in SR0 will be 6_
16#2012.

3. If you want to store the remainder gotten, you have to use “/” instruction (Division of binary values). Please refer to

the explanation of API0103 “/” instruction for more information.

6-77
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.3 Data Conversion Instructions

6.3.1 List of Data Conversion Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

Converting the binary number into the binary-coded decimal

0200 BCD DBCD 
number

Converting the binary-coded decimal number into the binary

0201 BIN DBIN 
number

Converting the binary integer into the binary floating-point

0202 FLT DFLT 
number

Converting the 32-bit floating-point number into the binary

0204 INT DINT 
integer

0206 MMOV –  Converting the 16-bit value into the 32-bit value

0207 RMOV –  Converting the 32-bit value into the 16-bit value

0208 GRY DGRY  Converting the binary number into the Gray code

0209 GBIN DGBIN  Converting the Gray code into the binary number

0210 NEG DNEG  Two’s complement

_6 0211 – FNEG  Reversing the sign of the 32-bit floating-point number

Converting the binary floating-point number into the decimal

0212 – FBCD 
floating-point number

Converting the decimal floating-point number into the binary

0213 – FBIN 
floating-point number

– Converting the binary numbers in blocks into the binary-coded

0214 BKBCD 
decimal numbers in blocks

– Converting the binary numbers in blocks into the binary-coded

0215 BKBIN 
decimal numbers in blocks

0216 SCAL DSCAL  Scale value operation

0217 SCLP DSCLP  Parameter type of scale value operation

6-78
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

6.3.2 Explanation of Data Conversion Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary number into the

0200 D BCD P S，D
binary-coded decimal number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

6_
Explanation:

1. The binary value in S is converted into the binary-coded decimal value, and the conversion result is stored in D.

2. Only the instruction DBCD can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The four fundamental operations of arithmetic in the PLC, the instruction INC, and the instruction DEC all involve

binary numbers. To show the decimal value on the display, users can use the instruction BCD to convert the binary

value into the binary-coded decimal value

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the binary value in D10 is converted into the binary-code decimal value, and the conversion result

is stored in D100.

6-79
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2. If D10=16#04D2=1234, the conversion result will be that D100=16#1234.

Additional remark:

1. If the conversion result exceeds the range between 0 and 9,999, the instruction BCD is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#200D (The binary-coded decimal value is represented by the hexadecimal value,

but one of digits is not within the range between 0 and 9.).

2. If the conversion result exceeds the range between 0 and 99,999,999, the instruction DBCD is not executed, SM0 is
ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200D (The binary-coded decimal value is represented by the hexadecimal

value, but one of digits is not within the range between 0 and 9.).

_6

6-80
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary-coded decimal
0201 D BIN P S，D
number into the binary number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

1. The binary-coded decimal value in S is converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is stored in D.
6_

2. The 16-bit binary-coded decimal value in S should be within the range between 0 and 9,999, and the 32-bit

binary-coded decimal value in S should be within the range between 0 and 99,999,999.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

4. Constants and hexadecimal values are converted into binary values automatically. Therefore, users do not need to

use the instruction.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the binary-coded decimal value in D0 is converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is

stored in D10.

6-81
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S is not the binary-coded decimal value, the operation error occurs, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#200D (The binary-coded decimal value is represented by the hexadecimal value, but one of digits is not

within the range between 0 and 9.).

2. The application of the instructions BCD and BIN:

 Before the value of the binary-coded decimal type of DIP switch is read into the PLC, users have to use the

instruction BIN to convert the data into the binary value and store the conversion result in the PLC.

 If users want to display the data stored inside the PLC in a seven-segment display of the binary-coded

decimal type, they have to use the instruction BCD to convert the data into the binary-coded decimal value

before the data is sent to the seven-segment display.

 When X1.0 is ON, the binary-coded decimal value in X0.0~X0.15 is converted into the binary value, and the

conversion result is stored in D100. Subsequently, the binary value in D100 is converted into the binary-coded

decimal value, and the conversion result is stored in Y0.0~Y0.15.

_6

3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10
F our -digit binary -coded
6 6 4 2 decimal ty pe of DIP s witch

8 1 8 1 8 1 8 1

X0.15 X0.0
F our -digit binary -coded deci mal value

T he instruction B IN is us ed to store
the binary value in D100.

T he instruction B CD is us ed to conver t
the value in D100 into the four- di gi t
binary- coded decimal value.
Y0.15 Y0.0

F our -digit binary -coded deci mal type

of sev en- segment display

6-82
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary integer into the
0202 D FLT P S，D
binary floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S       
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

1. The instruction is used to convert the binary integer into the single-precision floating-point number. 6_

2. The operand S used in the instruction FLT cannot be the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The source device S used in the instruction FLT occupies one register, and D used in FLT occupies two registers.

4. The source device S used in the instruction DFLT occupies two registers, and D used in DFLT also occupies two

registers.

 When the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the

maximum floating-point number, SM602 is ON, and the maximum floating-point number is stored in D.

 When the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the

minimum floating-point number, SM601 is ON, and the minimum floating-point number is stored in D.

 When the conversion result is zero, SM600 is ON.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the binary integer in D0 is converted into the single-precision floating-point number, and the

conversion result is stored in (D13, D12).

6-83
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2. When X0.1 is ON, the binary integer in (D1, D0) is converted into the single-precision floating-point number, and the

conversion result is stored in (D21, D20).

3. Suppose the value in D0 is 10. When X0.0 is ON, 10 is converted into the single-precision floating-point number

16#41200000, and 16#41200000 is stored in the 32-bit register (D13, D12).

4. Suppose the value in the 32-bit register (D1, D0) is 100,000. When X0.1 is ON, 100,000 is converted into the

single-precision floating-point number 16#47C35000, 16#47C35000 is stored in the 32-bit register (D21, D20).

Example 2:

Users can use the applied instructions to perform the following calculation.

 The binary integer in D10 is converted into the single-precision floating-point number, and the conversion

result is stored in (D101, D100).

_6
 The binary-coded decimal value in X0.0~X0.15 is converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is

stored in D200.

 The binary integer in D200 is converted into the single-precision floating-point number, and the conversion

result is stored in (D203, D202).

 The constant 615 is divided by the constant 10, and the quotient which is the single-precision floating-point

number is stored in (D301, D300).

 The single-precision floating-point number in (D101, D100) is divided by the single-precision floating-point

number in (D203, D202), and the quotient which is the single-precision floating-point number is stored in

(D401, D400).

 The single-precision floating-point number in (D401, D400) is multiplied by the single-precision floating-point

number in (D301, D300), and the product which is the single-precision floating-point number is stored in (D21,

D20).

 The single-precision floating-point number in (D21, D20) is converted into the decimal floating-point number,

and the conversion result is stored in (D31, D30).

6-84
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

 The single-precision floating-point number in (D21, D20) is converted into the binary integer, and the

conversion result is stored in (D41, D40).

(D1 0 ) (X0.0 ~X0 .15 ) K6 1.5

16-b it binary fo ur-digit
numbe r binary -c oded (D2 1 ,D2 0 ) Single- pr ecisi on
dec imal nu mber 6 floati ng- point number

1 2 5 4 7
(D3 1 ,D3 0 )
D eci mal f lo ati ng -po in t nu mb er
(D1 0 1,D 1 00 ) (D2 0 0) BIN (D3 0 1,D 3 00 )
8
Single- pr ecisi on
(D4 1 ,D4 0 )
Single- pr ecisi on 3
floati ng- point number floati ng- point number 3 2-b it in te ge r

(D2 0 3,D 2 02 )
Single- pr ecisi on
floati ng- point number
(D4 0 1,D 4 00 )
Single- pr ecisi on
floati ng- point number

6_

6-85
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_6

6-86
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the 32-bit floating-point number
0204 D INT P S，D
into the binary integer

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S        
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

6_
Explanation:

1. The single-precision floating-point number in the register specified by S is converted into the binary integer. The

binary floating-point number is rounded down to the nearest whole digit, and becomes the bianry integer. The binary

integer is stored in the register specified by D.

2. The source device S used in the instruction INT occupies two registers, and D used in INT occupies one register.

3. The source device S used in the instruction DINT occupies two registers, and D used in DINT also occupies two

registers.

4. The operand D used in the instruction INT cannot be the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

5. The instruction INT is the opposite of the instruction FLT.

6. When the conversion result is zero, SM600 is ON.

7. During the conversion, if the floating-point number is rounded down to the nearest whole digit, SM601 will be ON.

8. When the conversion result exceeds the range, SM602 is ON.

6-87
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

9. For the instruction INT/IINTP, the range of conversion results is between -32,768 and 32,767.

10. For the instruction DINT/DINTP, the range of conversion results is between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the single-precision floating-point number in (D1, D0) is converted into the binary integer, and the

conversion result is stored in D10. The binay floating-point number is rounded down to the nearest whole digit.

2. When X0.1 is ON, the single-precision floating-point number in (D21, D20) is converted into the binary integer, and

the conversion result is stored in (D31, D30). The binary floating-point number is rounded down to the nearest whole

digit.

_6
Additional remark:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6-88
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the 16-bit value into the 32-bit
0206 MMOV P S，D
value

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S          
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S      
D  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

The data in the 16-bit device S is transmitted to the 32-bit device D. The sing bit which is specified is copied repeatedly to

the destination.
6_
Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the value of b15 in D4 is transmitted to b15~b31 in (D7, D6). The data in (D7, D6) becomes a negative

value.

b 15 b0
0 Plus sign
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 D4
1 Minus sign

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 D7, D6
b 31 b 16 b 15 b0

6-89
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the 32-bit value into the 16-bit
0207 RMOV P S，D
value

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S          
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S  
D      

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

The data in the 32-bit device S is transmitted to the 16-bit device D. The sing bit which is specified is retained.

_6 Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the value of b31 in D7 is transmitted to b15 in D4, the values of b0~b14 are transmitted to the

corresponding bits, and the values of b15~b30 are ignored.

b31 b16 b15 b0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 D7, D6

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 D4
b15 b0

6-90
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary number into the
0208 D GRY P S，D
Gray code

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:
6_
1. The binary value in the device specified by S is converted into the Gray code, and the conversion result is stored in

the device specified by D.

2. Only the instruction DGRY can use the 32-counter, but not the device E.

3. The value in the operand S should be within the available range.

The value in the operand S used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and 32,767.

The value in the operand S used in the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and 2,147,483,647.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the constant 6513 is converted into the Gray code, and the conversion result is stored in Y1.0~Y1.15.

6-91
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

b15 b0
K6513=H1971 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

Y1.15 Y1.0
GRAY 6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
Y1

Additional remark:

If the value in S is less than 0, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-92
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the Gray code into the binary
0209 D GBIN P S，D
number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S       
D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

1. The Gray code in the device specified by S is converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is stored in
6_
the device specified by D.

2. The instruction is used to convert the Gary code in the absolute position encoder which is connected to the input

terminal of the PLC to the binary value, and the conversion result is stored in the register which is specified.

3. Only the instruction DGBIN can use the 32-counter, but not the device E.

4. The value in the device D should be within the available range.

The value in the device D used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and 32,767.

The value in the device D used in the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and 2,147,483,647.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the Gary code in the absolute position encoder which is connected to the inputs X0.0~X0.15 is

converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is stored in D10.

6-93
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

X0
X0.15 X0.0
GRAY CODE 6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

b15 b0
H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

Additional remark:

If the value in S is less than 0, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-94
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

0210 D NEG P D Two’s complement

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D       

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Device in which the two’s

complement is stored

Explanation:

1. The instruction is used to convert the negative binary value into the absolute value.

2. Only the instruction DNEG can use the 32-bit counter. 6_

3. Generally, the pulse instructions NEGP and DNEGP are used.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, all bits in D0 are inverted (0 becomes 1, and 1 becomes 0), and 1 is added to the

result. The final value is stored in the original register D10.

Example 2:

The absolute value of the negative value:

th
1. When the value of the 15 bit in D0 is 1, M0 is ON. (The value in D0 is a negative value.)

2. When M0 is ON, the instruction NEG is used to obtain the two’s complement of the negative value in D0. (The

6-95
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

corresponding positive value is obtained.)

Example 3:

The absolute value of the difference between two values:

Suppose X0.0 is ON.

1. When the value in D0 is greater than that in D2, M0 is ON.

2. When the value in D0 is equal to that in D2, M1 is ON.

3. When the value in D0 is less than that in D2, M2 is ON.

4. The value in D4 is a positive value.

_6

6-96
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

Additional remark:

The representation of the value and its absolute value:

1. Whether the data is a positive value or a negative value depends on the value of the highest bit in the register. If the

value of the highest in the register is 0, the data is a positive value. If it is 1, the data is a negative value.

2. The negative value can be converted into its absolute value by means of the instruction NEG.

(D0)=2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

(D0)=1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

(D0)=0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6_

6-97
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Reversing the sign of the 32-bit
0211 FNEG P D
floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D  DWORD     

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

D ： Device in which the sign of the

value is reversed

Explanation:

The sign of the single-precision floating-point number in the device D is reversed.

Example:

Before the instruction is executed, the value in (D1, D0) is the negative value 16#AE0F9000. When X0.0 is switched from
_6 OFF to ON, the sign of the single-precision floating-point number in (D1, D0) is reversed. In other words, after the

instruction is executed, the value in (D1, D0) is the positive value 16#2E0F9000.

Before the instruction is executed, the value in (D1, D0) is the positive value 16#2E0F9000. When X0.0 is switched from

OFF to ON, the sign of the single-precision floating-point number in (D1, D0) is reversed. In other words, after the

instruction is executed, the value in (D1, D0) is the negative value 16#AE0F9000.

6-98
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary floating-point
0212 FBCD P S，D number into the decimal floating-point
number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

1. The single-precision floating-point number in the register specified by S is converted into the decimal floating-point

number, and the conversion result is stored in the register specified by D. 6_

2. The floating-point operation in the PLC is based on the single-precision floating-point numbers, and the instruction

FBCD is used to convert the single-precision floating-point number into the decimal floating-point number.

3. The Flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), and SM602 (carry flag)

When the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum

floating-point number, SM602 is ON.

When the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum

floating-point number, SM601 is ON.

When the conversion result is zero, SM600 is ON.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the single-precision floating-point number in (D1, D0) is converted into the decimal floating-point

number, and the conversion result is stored in (D3, D2).

6-99
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Binary floating-point number D1 D0 Real number: 23 bits; Ex ponent: 8 bi ts ; sign: 1 bit

Exponent Real number

[D 3]
Decimal fl oating-point number D3 D2 Mathem atic al form [D2] X 10

Additional remark:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-100
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the decimal floating-point
0213 FBIN P S，D number into the binary floating-point
number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

1. The decimal floating-point number in the register specified by S is converted into the single-precision floating-point

number, and the conversion result is stored in the register specified by D. 6_

6
2. Suppose the value in S is 1234, and the value in S+1 is 3. The value in S is converted into 1.234x10 .

3. The value in D should be a single-precision floating-point number, and the values in S and S+1 represent the

decimal real number and the decimal exponent respectively.

4. The instruction FBIN is used to convert the decimal floating-point number into the single-precision floating-point

number.

5. The real number of decimal floating-point numbers range from -9,999 to +9,999, the exponents of decimal

floating-point numbers range from -41 to +35, and the practical range of decimal floating-point numbers in PLC is

between ±1175×10-41 and ±3402×10+35. When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the decimal floating-point number in the register in (D1, D0) is converted into the single-precision

floating-point number, and the conversion result is stored in (D3, D2).

6-101
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Exponent Real number

[D 1]
Decimal fl oating-point number D1 D0 Mathematic al form [D0] X 10

Binary floating-point number D3 D2 Real number: 23 bits; Ex ponent: 8 bits ; sign: 1 bit

Example 2:

1. Before the floating-point operation is performed, users have to use the instruction FLT to convert the binary integer

into the single-precision floating-point number. The premise of the conversion is that the value converted in the

binary integer. However, the instruction FBIN can be used to convert the floating-point number into the

single-precision floating-point number.

2. When X0.0 is ON, K314 and K-2 are moved to D0 and D1 respectively, and combine into the decimal floating-point
-2
number (3.14=314×10 ).

_6

Additional remark:

If the real number of the decimal floating-point number in the operand S is not within the range between -9,999 and +9,999,

or if the exponent of the decimal floating-point number in the operand S is not within the range between -41 and +35, the

instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6-102
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary numbers in blocks
0214 BKBCD P S，n，D into the binary-coded decimal numbers in
blocks

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
n        
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Data source

n ： Data length

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:
6_
1. n pieces of data (the binary values) in devices starting from S are converted into the binary-coded decimal values,

and the conversion results are stored in D.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

Example:

When M1 is ON, the binary values in D0 and D1 are converted into the binary-coded decimal values, and the conversion

results are stored in D4 and D5.

Additional remark:

1. If n is less than 1, or when n is larger than 256, the instruction is not execute, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#200B.

6-103
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2. If the devices specified by S+n-1 and D+n-1 exceed the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the conversion result is not within the range between 0 and 9,999, the instruction is not executed, and the error

code in SR0 is 16#200D (The binary-coded decimal value is represented by the hexadecimal number, but one of

digits is not within the range between 0 and 9.).

4. If S~S+n-1 overlap D~D+n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200C.

_6

6-104
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary numbers in blocks
0215 BKBIN P S，n，D into the binary-coded decimal numbers in
blocks

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
n        
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Data source

n ： Data length

D ： Conversion result

Explanation: 6_
1. n pieces of data (the binary-coded decimal values) in devices starting from S are converted into the binary values,

and the conversion results are stored in D.

2. The binary-coded decimal value in S should be within the range between 0 and 9,999.

3. The operand n should be within the rang between 1 and 256.

Example:

When M1 is ON, the binary-code decimal values in D0 and D1 are converted into the binary values, and the conversion

results are stored in D4 and D5.

6-105
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If n is less than 1, or when n is larger than 256, the instruction is not execute, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#200B.

2. If the devices specified by S+n-1 and D+n-1 exceed the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the data in S is not the binary-coded decimal, the instruction is not executed, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200D (The binary-coded decimal value is represented by the hexadecimal number, but one of digits is not within

the range between 0 and 9.).

4. If S~S+n-1 overlap D~D+n-1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200C.

_6

6-106
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

0216 SCAL P S1，S2，S3，D Scale value operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1          
S2          
S3          
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
S3     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source

S2 ： Slope

S3 ： Offset

D ： Destination device 6_

Explanation:

1. The operation equation in the instruction: D=(S1×S2)÷1,000+S3

2. To obtain the values in S2 and S3, users have to use the slope equation and the offset equation below first, and then

round off the results to the nearest whole digit. The final 16-bit values are entered into S2 and S3.

The slope equation: S2=[(Maximum destination value–Minimum destination value)÷(Maximum source

value–Minimum source value)]×1,000

The offset equation: S3=Minimum destination value–Minimum source value×S2÷1,000

The output curve is as shown below:

6-107
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 1:

1. Suppose the values in S1, S2, and S3 are 500, 168, and -4 respectively. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction SCAL is
executed, and the scale value is stored in D0.

2. The operation equation: D0=(500×168)÷1,000+(-4)=80

_6

Destination value

D
Slope=168
Offset=-4

Sourc e value
0 S 1=500

Example 2:

1. Suppose the values in S1, S2, and S3 are 500, -168, and 534 respectively. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction SCAL is

6-108
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

executed, and the scale value is stored in D10.

2. The operation equation: D10=(500×-168)÷1,000+534=450

Additional remark:

1. Only when the slope and the offset are known can the instruction SCAL be used. If the slope and the offset are 6_
unknown, users are suggested to use the instruction SCLP to perform the operation.

2. When the 16-bit instruction is performed, the value entered into S2 should be within the range between –32,768 and
32,767. (The practical value is within the range between –32,768 and 32,767. If the value in S2 exceeds the range,

please use the instruction SCLP to do the operation.

3. When the 32-bit instruction is performed, the value entered into S2 should be within the range between

-2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647. (The practical value is within the range between -2,147,483,648 and

2,147,483,647. If the value in S2 exceeds the range, please use the instruction SCLP to do the operation.

4. When users use the slope equation, they have to notice that the maximum source value should be larger than the

minimum source value. However, the maximum destination value is not necessarily larger than the minimum

destination value.

5. When the 16-bit instruction is performed, if the value in D is larger than 32,767, the value stored in D will be 32,767.

If the value in D is less than -32,768, the value stored in D will be -32,768.

6. When the 32-bit instruction is performed, if the value in D is larger than 2,147,483,647, the value stored in D will be

2,147,483,6477. If the value in D is less than -2,147,483,648, the value stored in D will be -2,147,483,648.

6-109
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0217 D SCLP P S1，S2，S3，D Parameter type of scale value operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1            
S2       
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1      
S2      
D      

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source

S2 ： Parameter

D ： Destination device

_6

Explanation:

1. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

2. Constant usage for the operand S1

32-bit instruction
16-bit
Constant
instruction
SM685 ON SM685 OFF

Constant  X 

hexadecima
 X 
l

Floating
X  X
number

The flag SM685 (whether to use floating point operation or not) can only be used for 32-bit instructions.

6 - 11 0
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

3. The operand S2 used in the 16-bit instruction is set as follows.

Device number Parameter Setting range

S2 Maximum source value -32,768~32,767

S2+1 Minimum source value -32,768~32,767

S2+2 Maximum destination value -32,768~32,767

S2+3 Minimum destination value -32,768~32,767

4. The operand S2 used in the 16-bit instruction occupies four devices.

5. The operand S2 used in the 32-bit instruction is set as follows.

Setting range
Device number Parameter
Integer Floating-point number

S2、S2+1 Maximum source value

S2+2、3 Minimum source value -2,147,483,648~ The range of 32-bit

floating-point numbers
S2+4、5 Maximum destination value 2,147,483,647

S2+6、7 Minimum destination value

6_
6. The operand S2 used in the 32-bit instruction occupies eight devices.

7. If the values used in the 32-bit instruction are floating-point numbers, SM658 can be set to ON. If the values are
decimal integers, SM685 can be set to OFF.

8. The operation equation in the instruction: D=[(S1–Minimum source value)×(Maximum destination value–Minimum
destination value)]÷(Maximum source value)+Minimum destination value

9. The operational relation between the source value and the destination value:

y=kx+b

y=Destination value (D)

k=Slope=(Maximum destination value–Minimum destination value)÷(Maximum source value–Minimum source

value)

x=Source value (S1)

b=Offset =Minimum destination value–Minimum source value×Slope

6 - 111
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The parameters above are being substituted for y, k, x, and b in the equation y=kx+b, and the operation equation in

the instruction is obtained.

y=kx+b=D=kS1+b=Slope×S1＋Offset＝Slope×S1＋Minimum destination value–Minimum source

value×Slope=Slope×(S1–Minimum source value)＋Minimum destination value =(S1–Minimum source

value)×(Maximum destination value–Minimum destination value)÷(Maximum source value–Minimum source value)

＋Minimum destination value

10. If S1 is larger than the maximum source value, the maximum source value will be the value in S1. If S1 is less than
the minimum source value, the minimum source value will be the value in S1. After the input values and the

parameters are set, the output curve is as shown below.

_6

Example 1:

1. Suppose the value in S1 is 500, the maximum source value in D0 is 3,000, the minimum source value in D1 is 200,
the maximum destination value in D2 is 500, and the minimum destination value in D3 is 30. When X0.0 is ON, the

instruction SCLP is executed, and the scale value is stored in D10.

2. The operation equation: D10=[(500–200)×(500–30)]÷(3,000–200)+30=80.35

80.35 is rounded off to the nearest whole digit, and becomes 80. 80 is stored in D10.

6 - 11 2
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

Destinati on value

Maximum destination
value =500
6_
D
Minimum des ti nation
value =30 S 1=500
Sourc e value
0 Minimum Maximum
sourc e value =200 sourc e value =3000

Example 2:

1. Suppose the value in S1 is 500, the maximum source value in D0 is 3,000, the minimum source value in D1 is 200,
the maximum destination value in D2 is 30, and the minimum destination value in D3 is 500. When X0.0 is ON, the

instruction SCLP is executed, and the scale value is stored in D10.

2. The operation equation: D10=[(500–200)×(30–500)]÷(3,000–200)+500=449.64

449.64 is rounded off to the nearest whole digit, and becomes 450. 450 is stored in D10.

6 - 11 3
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_6

Example 3:

1. Suppose the value in S1 is 500.0, the maximum source value in D0 is 3000.0, the minimum source value in D2 is
200.0, the maximum destination value in D4 is 500.0, and the minimum destination value in D6 is 30.0. When X0.0

is ON, SM685 is set to ON, the instruction DSCLP is executed, and the scale value is stored in D10.

2. The operation equation: D10=[(500.0–200.0)×(500.0–30.0)]÷(3000.0–200.0)+30.0=80.35

80.35 is rounded off to the nearest whole digit, and becomes 80.0. 80.0 is stored in D10.

6 - 11 4
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n str uc t io ns

6_

Additional remark:

1. The value in S1 which is used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between the minimum source value

and the maximum source value, i.e. between -32,768 and 32,767. If the value exceeds the boundary value, the

boundary value is used in the operation.

6 - 11 5
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2. The integer in S1 which is used in the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between the minimum source

value and the maximum source value, i.e. between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647. If the integer exceeds the

boundary value, the boundary value is used in the operation.

3. The floating-point number in S1 which is used in the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between the

minimum source value and the maximum source value, i.e. within the range of floating-point numbers. If the

floating-point number exceeds the boundary value, the boundary value is used in the operation.

4. When users use the instruction, they have to notice that the maximum source value should be larger than the

minimum source value. However, the maximum destination value is not necessarily larger than the minimum

destination value.

5. When the maximum source value is the same as the minimum source value, the instruction will not be executed and

it will be seen as an operation error; SM0 will be ON and the error code in SR0 is 16#2012.

6. If the operand S2 used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

ARRAY [4] of WORD.

7. If the operand S2 used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

ARRAY [4] of DWORD.

_6

6 - 11 6
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.4 Data Transfer Instructions

6.4.1 List of Data Transfer Instructions

Instruction code
API Pulse instruction Function
16-bit 32-bit

0300 MOV DMOV  Transferring the data

0302 $MOV –  Transferring the string

0303 CML DCML  Inverting the data

0304 BMOV DBMOV  Transferring all data

0305 NMOV DNMOV  Transferring the data to several devices

0306 XCH DXCH  Exchanging the data

0307 BXCH –  Exchanging all data

0308 SWAP DSWAP  Exchange the high byte with the low byte

0309 SMOV –  Transferring the digits

0310 MOVB –  Transferring several bits

6_

6 - 11 7
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.4.2 Explanation of Data Transfer Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0300 D MOV P S，D Transferring the data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S            
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S        
D        

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Data destination

_6
Explanation:

1. When the instruction is executed, the data in S is transferred to D. When the instruction is not executed, the data in

D is unchanged.

2. Only the data in S which is used in the 32-bit instruction can be the floating-point number.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

1. To transfer the 16-bit data, users should use the instruction MOV.

 When X0.0 is OFF, the data in D0 is unchanged. When X0.0 is ON, the value 10 is transferred to the data

register D0.

 When X0.1 is OFF, the data in D10 is unchanged. When X0.1 is ON, the current value of T0 is transferred to

the data register D10.

6 - 11 8
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

2. To transfer the 32-bit data, users should use the instruction DMOV.

 When X0.0 is OFF, the data in (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) is unchanged. When X0.2 is ON, the current value

in (D21, D20) is transferred to (D31, D30), and the current value of HC0 is transferred to (D41, D40).

3. To transfer the floating-point number, users should use the instruction DMOV.

 When X0.3 is OFF, the data in (D51, D50) is unchanged. When X0.3 is ON, the floating-point number 3.450 is

converted into the binary floating-point number, and the conversion result is transferred to (D51, D50).

6_

6 - 11 9
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0302 $MOV P S，D Transferring the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Data destination

Explanation:

1. When the operand S is a string and the insturction is executed, the string is transferred to D, and the code 16#00 is
_6 added to the end of the data

2. When the operand S is not a string, the code 16#00 should be added to the end of the data transferred.

3. When the ending code16#00 cannot be found in S for 256 characters in a row or even beyond the device range, the
instruction is not executed; SM0 is ON and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

4. When the the operand S is not a string and the instruction is executed, the string starting with the data in the device
specified by S (including 16#00) is transferred to D. When the instruction is not executed, the data in D is

unchanged.

5. If D is not sufficient to contain the string composed of the strings in S, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6. Suppose the operand S is not a string. When the instruction is executed and the first character is the code 16#00,
16#00 is still transferred to D.

6-120
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

7. When 16#00 appears in the low byte, the execution of the instruction is as follows.

Before the instr uction is executed:

b15~b8 b7~b0 B15~b8 b7~b0
S 16#31 16#30 D 16#38 16#39
S+1 16#33 16#32 D+1 16#36 16#37
S+2 16#35 16#34 D+2 16#34 16#35
S+3 16#30 16#00 D+3 16#32 16#33

After the instruction is executed:

b15~b8 b7~b0 b15~b8 b7~b0
S 16#31 16#30 D 16#31 16#30
S+1 16#33 16#32 D+1 16#33 16#32
S+2 16#35 16#34 D+2 16#35 16#34
S+3 16#30 16#00 D+3 16#00 16#00

16#30 in the high byte 16#32 in the high byte

is not tr ansfer red. turns into 16#00.

8. When 16#00 appears in the high byte, the execution of the instruction is as follows.

Before the instr uction is executed:

b15~b8 b7~b0 b15~b8 b7~b0
S 16#31 16#30 D 16#38 16#39
S+ 1 16#33 16#32 D+1 16#36 16#37 6_
S+ 2 16#00 16#34 D+2 16#34 16#35
S+ 3 16#37 16#36 D+3 16#32 16#33

After the instr uction is executed:

b15~b8 b7~b0 b15~b8 b7~b0
S 16#31 16#30 D 16#31 16#30
S+ 1 16#33 16#32 D+1 16#33 16#32
S+ 2 16#00 16#34 D+2 16#00 16#34
S+ 3 16#37 16#36 D+3 16#32 16#33

6-121
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

9. When S overlaps D and the device number of S is less than the device number of D, the transfer of the data to D
starts form the ending code 16#00.

Before the instruction is executed:

b15~b8 b7~b0 b15~b8 b7~b0
D0 16#31 16#30 D1 16#33 16#32
D1 16#33 16#32 D2 16#35 16#34
D2 16#35 16#34 D3 16#30 16#00
D3 16#30 16#00 D4 16#38 16#37

After the instruction is executed:

b15~b8 b7~b0 b15~b8 b7~b0
D0 16#31 16#30 D1 16#31 16#30
D1 16#33 16#32 D2 16#33 16#32
D2 16#35 16#34 D3 16#35 16#34
D3 16#30 16#00 D4 16#00 16#00

Example 1:

Suppose the operand S is the even string “1234”. When the conditional contact X0.0 is enabled, the data in D0~D3 is as

follows.

_6

The operand S:

String ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’

Hexadecimal
16#31 16#32 16#33 16#34
value

After the instruction is executed, the data in the operand D is as follows.

Device High byte Low byte Note

D0 16#32 16#31 ‘1’=16#31; ‘2’=16#32

D1 16#34 16#33 ‘3’=16#33; ‘4’=16#34

The ending code 16#00 is in the low byte.

D2 16#00 16#00
16#00 is automatically added in the high byte.

D3 Unchanged Unchanged

6-122
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 2:

Suppose the operand S is the odd string “12345”. When the conditional contact X0.0 is enabled, the data in D0~D3 is as

follows.

The operand S:

String ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’

Hexadecimal
16#31 16#32 16#33 16#34 16#35
value

After the instruction is executed, the data in the operand D is as follows.

Device High byte Low byte Note

D0 16#32 16#31 ‘1’=16#31; ‘2’=16#32

D1 16#34 16#33 ‘3’=16#33; ‘4’=16#34

D2 16#00 16#35 The ending code 16#00 is in the high byte.

D3 Unchanged Unchanged 6_
Example 3:

When the operand S is not a string and the ending code 16#00 appears in the low byte, the execution of the instruction is

as follows.

The operand S:

Device High byte Low byte Note

D100 16#31 16#30 ‘1’=16#31; ‘0’=16#30

D101 16#33 16#32 ‘3’=16#33; ‘2’=16#32

D102 16#35 16#34 ‘5’=16#35; ‘4’=16#34

D103 16#30 16#00 ‘0’=16#30; 16#00 is the ending code.

6-123
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

After the instruction is executed, the data in the operand D is as follows.

Device High byte Low byte Note

D0 16#31 16#30 ‘1’=16#31; ‘0’=16#30

D1 16#33 16#32 ‘3’=16#33; ‘2’=16#32

D2 16#35 16#34 ‘5’=16#35; ‘4’=16#34

The ending code 16#00 is in the low byte.

D3 16#00 16#00
16#00 is automatically added in the high byte.

D4 Unchanged Unchanged

Example 4:

When the operand S is not a string and the ending code 16#00 appears in the high byte, the execution of the instruction is

as follows.

The operand S:

Device High byte Low byte Note

_6 D100 16#31 16#30 ‘1’=16#31; ‘0’=16#30

D101 16#33 16#32 ‘3’=16#33; ‘2’=16#32

D102 16#00 16#34 16#00 is the ending code. ‘4’=16#34

D103 16#37 16#36 ‘7’=16#37; ‘6’=16#36

After the instruction is executed, the data in the operand D is as follows.

Device High byte Low byte Note

D0 16#31 16#30 ‘1’=16#31; ‘0’=16#30

D1 16#33 16#32 ‘3’=16#33; ‘2’=16#32

D2 16#00 16#34 16#00 is the ending code. ‘4’=16#34

D3 Unchanged Unchanged

6-124
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 5:

When S overlaps D, and the device number of S is less than the device number of D, the transfer of the data to D starts

form the ending code 16#00.

The operand S:

Device High byte Low byte Note

D0 16#31 16#30 ‘1’=16#31; ‘0’=16#30

D1 16#33 16#32 ‘3’=16#33; ‘2’=16#32

D2 16#35 16#34 ‘5’=16#35; ‘4’=16#34

D3 16#30 16#00 ‘0’=16#30; 16#00 is the ending code.

D4 16#38 16#37 ‘8’=16#38; ‘7’=16#37

After the instruction is executed, the data in the operand D is as follows. 6_

Device High byte Low byte Note

D1 16#31 16#30 ‘1’=16#31; ‘0’=16#30

D2 16#33 16#32 ‘3’=16#33; ‘2’=16#32

D3 16#35 16#34 ‘5’=16#35; ‘4’=16#34

The ending code 16#00 is in the low byte.

D4 16#00 16#00
16#00 is automatically added in the high byte.

D5 Unchanged Unchanged

6-125
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0303 D CML P S，D Inverting the data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Data destination

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to invert all bits in S, i.e. 0 becomes 1, and 1 becomes 0. The inversion result is stored in D.
If the data in S is the constant, the constant will be converted into the binary value.

2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, all bit in D1 are inverted, and the conversion result is stored in Y0.0~Y0.15.

b 15 b3 b2 b1 b0
D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Sign bi t (0: P os itive s ign; 1: Negativ e si gn)
Y0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Inversi on resul t

6-126
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 2:

The circuits below can be represented by means of the instruction CML.

6_

6-127
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0304 D BMOV P S，D，n Transferring all data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
D     
n         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Data destination

n ： Data length

_6

Explanation:

1. n pieces of data in devices starting from the device specified by S are transferred to the devices starting from the

device specified by D.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

4. In order to prevent the error which results from the overlap between the source devices and the destination devices,

the data is transferred in the following way (using the 16-bit instruction as an example).

When the device number of S is larger than the device number of D, the data is transferred in the order from  to .

1
D 20 D 19
2
D 21 D 20
3
D 22 D 21

6-128
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

When the device number of S is less than the device number of D, the data is transferred in the order from  to .

1
D 19 D 20
2
D 20 D 21
3
D 21 D 22

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in D0~D3 is transferred to D20~D23.

D0 D20
D1 D21
N=4
D2 D22
D3 D23

Example 2:

In order to prevent the error which results from the overlap between the source devices and the destination devices, the

data is transferred in the following way. 6_

1. When the device number of S is larger than the device number of D, the data is transferred in the order from  to .

1
D20 D19
2
D21 D20
3
D22 D21

6-129
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2. When the device number of S is less than the device number of D, the data is transferred in the order from  to .

1
D10 D11
2
D11 D12
3
D12 D13

Additional remark:

1. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

3. If n is larger than 256, or if n is less than 1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.
_6

6-130
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0305 D NMOV P S，D，n Transferring the data to several devices

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D     
n   DWORD       

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Data destination

n ： Data length

6_

Explanation:

1. When the instruciton is executed, the data in S is transferred to the n devices starting from the device specified by D.

When the instruction is not executed, the data in D is unchanged.

2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter.

3. The operand n used in the instruction NMOV should be within the range between 1 and 256.

S S D

S D+1

S D+2 N=5

S D+3

S D+4

6-131
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

When M0 is ON, 100 is transferred to D0~D9.

Additional remark:

1. If D~D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If the operand n used in the 16-bit instruciton is larger than 256 or less than 1, the instruction is not executed, SM0

is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

_6

6-132
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0306 D XCH P S1，S2 Exchanging the data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data which will be exchanged

S2 ： Data which will be exchanged

Explanation: 6_
1. The data in the device specified by S1 is exchanged with the data in the device specified by S2.
2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example 1:
When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in D20 is exchanged with the data in D40.

Before the instruction After the instruction

is executed: is executed:
D 20 1 20 40 D 20
D 40 40 1 20 D 40

Example 2:
When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in D100 is exchanged with the data in D200.
Before the instruction After the instruction
is executed: is executed:
D 10 0 9 8 D 10 0
D 10 1 20 40 D 10 1
D 20 0 8 9 D 20 0
D 20 1 40 20 D 20 1

6-133
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0307 BXCH P S1，S2，n Exchanging all data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Data which will be exchanged

S2 ： Data which will be exchanged

n ： Data length

_6 Explanation:

1. The data in the devices specified by S1~S1+n-1 is exchnaged with the data in the devices specified by S2~S2+n-1.

2. The operand n used in the instruction should be within the range between 1 and 256.

S1 S1 +1 S1 +2 .... S1 +n- 1 S2 S2 +1 S2 +2 .... S2 +n- 1

S1 S1 +1 S1 +2 .... S1 +n- 1 S2 S2 +1 S2 +2 .... S2 +n- 1

6-134
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in D10~D14 is exchanged with the data in D100~D104.

D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D100 D101 D102 D103 D104

1 2 3 4 5 16 17 18 19 20

After the i nstruction is executed

D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D100 D101 D102 D103 D104
16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5

Additional remark:

1. If S1+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

2. If S2+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
6_
16#2003.

3. If the operand n used in the instruciton is larger than 256 or less than 1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6-135
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0308 D SWAP P S Exchange the high byte with the low byte

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S  DWORD      

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

Explanation:

1. When the 16-bit instruction is executed, the data in the low byte in S is exchanged with the data in the high byte in S.

_6 2. When the 32-bit instruction is executed, the data in the low byte of the high word in S is exchanged with the data in

the high byte of the high word in S, and the data in the low byte of the low word in S is exchanged with the data in

the high byte of the low word in S.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in the low byte in D0 is exchanged with the data in the high byte in D0.

D0
High byte Low byte

6-136
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in the low byte in D11 is exchanged with the data in the high byte in D11, and the data in the

low byte in D10 is exchanged with the data in the high byte in D10.

D11 D10
High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

6_

6-137
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0309 SMOV P S，m1，m2，D，n Transferring the digits

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S        
m1        
m2        
D    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S   
m1   
m2   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Data source
Start digit which will be transferred from the
m1 ：
_6
source device
m2 ： Number of digits which will be transferred

D ： Data destination
Start digit where the source data is stored in
n ：
the destination device
Explanation:

1. The instruction can be used to allocate and combine the data. When the instruction is executed, the m2 digits of the
th
number which start from the m1 digit of the number in S are transferred to the m2 digits of the number which starts
th
from the n digit of the number in D.

2. The operand m1 should be within the range between 1 and 4. The operand m2 should be within the range between 1

and m1. The operand n should be within the range between m2 and 4. (Four bits are regarded as a unit.)

3. When SM605 is OFF, the data involved in the instruction is binary-coded decimal numbers.

6-138
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

D10 (16- bit binary number)

Conversi on
3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D10 (4- digit binary -coded deci mal)

Unchanged Unchanged T ransferri ng the digits

3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D20 ( 4- digit binary -coded deci mal )
Conversi on

D20 ( 16- bit binary number )

Suppose the number in S is K1234, and the number in D is K5678. After the instruction is executed, the number in S

is 1234, and the number in D is 5128.

4. When SM605 is ON, the data involved in the instruction is binary numbers.

th rd nd st
4 digit 3 digit 2 digit 1 digit
D10 ( 16- bit binary number )

T ransferring the digits

D20 ( 16- bit binary number )

th rd nd st
4 digit 3 digit 2 digit 1 digit
Unchanged Unchanged

Suppose the number in S is 16#1234, and the number in D is 16#5678. After the instruction is executed, the number

in S is 16#1234, and the number in D is 16#5128.

Example 1: 6_
1. When SM605 is OFF, the data involved in the instruction is binary-coded decimal numbers. When X0.0 is ON, the

two digits of the decimal number which start from the fourth digit of the decimal number (the digit in the thousands

place of the decimal number) in D10 are transferred to the two digits of the decimal number which start from the

third digit of the decimal number (the digit in the hundreds place of the decimal number) in D20. After the instruction
3
is executed, the digits in the thousands place of the decimal number (10 ) and the ones place of the decimal number
0
(10 ) in D20 are unchanged.

2. When the binary-code decimal number exceeds the range between 0 and 9,999, the operation error occurs, the

instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200D.

6-139
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

D10 (16- bit binary number)

Conversi on
3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D10 (4- digit binary -coded deci mal)

Unchanged Unchanged T ransferri ng the digits

3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 D20 ( 4- digit binary -coded deci mal )
Conversi on

D20 ( 16- bit binary number )

Suppose the number in D10 is 1234, and the number in D20 is 5678. After the instruction is executed, the number in

D10 is unchanged, and the number in D20 is 5128.

_6
Example 2:

When SM605 is ON, the data involved in the instruction is binary numbers. When the instruction SMOV is executed, the

binary numbers in D10 and D20 are not trasnformed into the binary-coded decimal numbers, and the digit which is

transferred is composed of four bits.

6-140
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

th rd nd st
4 digit 3 digit 2 digit 1 digit
D10 ( 16- bit binary number )

T ransferring the digits

D20 ( 16- bit binary number )

th rd nd st
4 digit 3 digit 2 digit 1 digit
Unchanged Unchanged

Suppose the number in D10 is 16#1234, and the number in D20 is 16#5678. After the instruction is executed, the

number in D10 is unchanged, and the number in D20 is 16#5128.

Example 3:

1. The instruction can be used to combine the values of the DIP switches which are connected to the input terminals

whose numbers are not consecutive.

2. The two digits of the value of the DIP switch at the right are transferred to the the two digits of the number which

start from the second digit of the number in D2, and the one digit of the value of the DIP switch at the left is

transferred to the the first digit of the number in D1.

3. The instruction SMOV can be used to transfer the first digit of the number in D1 to the third digit of the number in D2.

In other words, the two DIP switches can be combined into one DIP switch by means of the instruction SMOV.

2 1 0
10 10 10

6_
6 4 2

8 1 8 1
8 1

X0.3~X0.0 X1.15~X1.0

PLC

6-141
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. Suppose the data involved in the instruction is binary-coded decimal numbers. If the number in S is not within the
range between 0 and 9999, or if the number in D is not within the range between 0 and 9999, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200D.

_6
2. If m1 is less than 1, or if m1 is larger than 4, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200B.

3. If m2 is less than 1, or if m2 is larger than m1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0
is 16#200B.

4. If n is less than m2, or if n is larger than 4, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200B.

6-142
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0310 MOVB P S，n，D Transferring several bits

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
n          
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
n   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Data source

n ： Data length

D ： Data destination

Explanation:

1. When the instruciton is executed, n pieces of data in devices starting from the device specified by S are transferred

to the devices starting from the device specified by D. 6_

2. When S is T, C or HC, only the state of the device is transferred, and the current value of the device is not

transferred.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256. When n is less than 1, or when n is larger than 256,

the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in D0.8~D0.13 is transferred to D1.2~D1.7.

6-143
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

2. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

_6

6-144
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.5 Jump Instructions

6.5.1 List of Jump Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0400 CJ –  Conditional jump

0401 JMP – – Unconditional jump

0402 GOEND – – Jumping to the end of the program

6_

6-145
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.5.2 Explanation of Jump Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0400 CJ P S Conditional jump

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Jump destination

Explanation:

1. When some part of the program in the PLC does not need to be executed, users can use CJ or CJP to shorten the

scan time. Besides, when a dual output is used, users also can use CJ or CJP.

_6 2. If the program specified by the label is prior to the instruction CJ, the watchdog timer error will occur, and the PLC

will stop running. Please use the instruction carefully.

3. The instruction CJ can specify the same label repeatedly.

4. When the instruction is executed, the actions of the devices are as follows.

 The state of Y, the state of M, and the state of S remain the same as those before the execution of the jump.

 The timer keeps counting and when the set time is reached, the output T-coil will be driven.

 For more information on the instructions MC and MCR, please refer to the example 2 below.

 The general applied instructions are not executed.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the execution of the program jumps from NETWORK1 to LABEL1 (NETWORK3) and skips the

NETWORK2.

2. When X0.0 is OFF, the execution of the program starts from NETWORK1 to NETWORK3 in sequence, and the

instruction CJ is not executed.

6-146
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 2:

1. The instruction CJ between the instruction MC and the instruction MCR can be used in the five conditions below.

(a) The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program outside one MC/MCR loop to the part of the

program outside another MC/MCR loop.

(b) The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program outside the MC/MCR loop to the part of the

program inside the MC/MCR loop.

(c) The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program inside the MC/MCR loop to the part of the

program inside the MC/MCR loop.

6_
(d) The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program inside the MC/MCR loop to the part of the

program outside the MC/MCR loop.

(e) The execution of the program jumps from the part of the program inside one the MC/MCR loop to the part of

the program inside another the MC/MCR loop.

2. When the instruction MC is executed, the previous state of the switch contact is put onto the top of the stack inside

the PLC. The stack is controlled by the PLC, and cannot be changed by users. When the instruction MCR is

executed, the previous state of the switch contact is popped from the top of the stack. Under the conditions listed in

(b), (d), and (e) above, the number of times the items are pushed onto the stack may be different from the number of

times the items are popped from the stack. When this situation occurs, at most 32 items can be pushed onto the

stack, and the items can be popped form the stack until the stack is empty. Therefore, when CJ or CJP is used with

MC and MCR, users have to be careful of the pushing of the item onto the stack and the popping of the item from

the stack.

6-147
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_6

6-148
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 3:

The states of the devices are listed below.

State of the contact State of the contact during the State of the output coil during the

Device before the execution execution of CJ execution of CJ

of CJ M0=OFF M0=ON M0=ON

M1, M2, and M3 are M1, M2, and M3 are switched from *1
Y0.1 , M20, and S1 are OFF.
OFF. OFF to ON.
Y, M, and S
M1, M2, and M3 M1, M2, and M3 are switched from *1
Y0.1 , M20, and S1 are ON.
are ON. ON to OFF.

M4 is OFF. M4 is switched from OFF to ON. The timer is not enabled.

The timer keeps counting and when

Timer
M4 is ON. M4 is switched from ON to OFF the set time is reached, the output

T-coil will be driven.

M6 is OFF. M6 is switched from OFF to ON. ST1 is not enabled.

The accumulative timer keeps

Accumulative
counting and when the set time is
timer M6 is ON. M6 is switched from ON to OFF.
reached, the output T-coil will be

driven.
6_
M7 and M10 are
M10 is ON/OFF. The counter is not enabled.
OFF.
Counter
M7 is OFF. M10 is C0 stops counting. When M0 is
M10 is ON/OFF.
ON/OFF. switched OFF, C0 keeps counting.

M11 is OFF. M11 is switched from OFF to ON The applied instruction is not executed.
Applied
The applied instruction which is
instruction M11 is ON. M11 is switched from ON to OFF
skipped is not executed.

*1:Y0.1 is a dual output. When M0 is OFF, Y0.1 is controlled by M1. When M0 is ON, Y0.1 is controlled by M12.

6-149
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_6

6-150
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Additional remark:

Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information about the use of the label (Pointer).
6_

6-151
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0401 JMP S Unconditional jump

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S ： Jump destination

Explanation:

1. The execution of the program jumps to the part of the program specified by the label (pointer) without any condition.

2. If the program specified by the label is prior to the instruction JMP, the watchdog timer error will occur, and the PLC
_6
will stop running. Please use the instruction carefully.

3. Please refer to the instruction CJ for more information on the states of the devices while executing the instruction.

4. Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information about the use of the label (Pointer).

6-152
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0402 GOEND ─ Jumping to END

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

Explanation:

1. When the condition is met, the execution of the program jumps to END in the program.

2. Function blocks and interrupt tasks do not support the instruction. Besides, the instruction cannot be etween the
instruction FOR and the instruction NEXT.

3. When the instruction GOEND is executed, the instructions skipped are not executed, the data in all devices is

unchanged, and the states of all devices are also unchanged.

6_

6-153
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.6 Program Execution Instructions

6.6.1 List of Program Execution Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0500 DI – – Disabling the interrupt

0501 EI – – Enabling the interrupt

0503 EIX – – Disabling the specific interrupt

0504 DIX – – Enabling the specific interrupt

_6

6-154
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

6.6.2 Explanation of Program Execution Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0500 DI － Disabling the interrupt

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

Explanation:

1. Please refer to API0501 the instruction EI for more information.

6_

6-155
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0501 EI － Enabling the interrupt

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

Explanation:

1. The use of the instruction EI indicates that the interrupt task is allowed to be used in the program. (Please refer to

next page for more information on task.)

2. The interrupt task is allowed to be used between the instruction EI and the instruction DI in the program. When there

is no part of the program in which the interrupt is disabled, users can choose not to use the instruction DI.

3. During the execution of one interrupt task, a new interrupt generated will not be executed, but will be memorized.

Not until the execution of the present interrupt task is complete will the next interrupt task be executed. For example,

during the execution of I0 (#1), 2 new I0 (#2, #3) are generated, only #2 I0 will be memorized.

4. When several interrupts occur, the interrupt task which should be executed first has higher priority. When several
_6 interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt task whose pointer number is smaller is executed first.

5. When the interrupt task occurring between DI and EI, it cannot be executed, and the interrupt request will be

ignored. It is suggested not to use the instruction DI to disable interrupts while PLC operates.

6. When the immediate I/O signal is required in the execution of the interrupt task, users can use the instruction REF

or the device DX/DY in the program to refresh the state of the I/O.

7. Every interrupt number is with a temporary maskable function. Please refer to the following page for the list of

interrupt numbers.

Example:

 Set up the timed interrupt task I601 to 500ms in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft.

 When the PLC runs and once the program Cyclic_0 scans the instruction EI, the interrupt task I601 is enabled and
the interrupt task is executed. When the execution of the interrupt task is complete, the main program is executed.

 When M0 is ON, the I601 timer interrupt task will be disabled.

6-156
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

 When M1 is ON, the I601 timer interrupt task will be enabled.

 When M2 is ON, the SR623 is 0 and the I601 timed interrupt task will be disabled.

 When M3 is ON, the SR623 is 1 and the I601 timed interrupt task will be enabled.

The program Cyclic_0:

6_

The interrupt task:

6-157
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Timer interrupts in a diagram:

Execu te the instruct ion DI X
t o disable int erru pt

M 0=ON
Execut e t he instructio n EIX
to en able inte rrup t

M 1=ON
SR6 23= 0
int erru pt disable d

M 2=ON

M 3=ON

0.5
Y0.0 0.5 s ec
s ec

Additional remark:

There are 7 types of interrupt tasks:

1. External interrupts (I000~I115)

I000 represents the input X0.0 is falling edge triggered. I100 represents the input X0.1 is rising edge triggered. I101

represents the input X0.1 is falling edge triggered. And the rest can be done in the same manner.

2. Hardware high-speed comparator interrupts (I200~I253)

_6 This type of interrupts can be further divided into 6 groups. Each group is corresponding to a hardware high-speed

counter. (refer to the instruction DCNT for more information). Each group is assigned with 4 interrupt numbers (refer to

the instruction DHSCS for more information). For example, the interrupt numbers for the first group is I200~I203, and
for the second group is I210~I213 and so on.

3. Software high-speed comparator interrupts (I260~I267)

There are 8 interrupts for software high-speed comparators and these 8 interrupts are shared with 8 high-speed

counters.

4. Communication interrupts

The communication interrupt can be used as the instruction RS, that is, the receiving of the specific character triggers

the interrupt, or can be used as the general interrupt. Please refer to API1812 COMRS for more information.

COM1: I300

COM2: I302

Card 1: I304

Card 2: I306

6-158
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

5. Extension module interrupts (I400~I431)

Each module is assigned with one interrupt. Users can set up 1 interrupt service for each extension module.

6. High-speed output interrupts (I500~I519)

When the pulse outputting is complete, the interrupt request will be sent; the interrupts (I500~I505) for the complete

execution of the positioning instruction should work with special devices (SM) to activate the interrupt service. For

example, when the instruction DDRVI completes the execution of the first axis, the interrupt request I500 will be sent;

users can set the SM471 to ON to activate the interrupt service. The interrupts (I510~I519) for the complete execution

of the position planning table instruction should work with the instruction TPO. When the pulse outputting is complete,

the interrupt request will be sent.

7. Timer interrupts (I601~I604)

The timer interrupts should be set in HWCONFIG.

The timer interrupts I601~I603: The default value is 10 milliseconds (unit: 1ms) (1~2000 milliseconds).

The timer interrupts I604: The default value is 1 milliseconds (unit: 0.1ms) (0.1~200 milliseconds).

The complete interrupt numbers, descriptions and the maskable interrupts (SR) are listed below.

Interrupt Maskable interrupts

Description Bit No.
number SR
6_
I000 External interrupt: the input X0.0 is falling edge triggered. 0

I001 External interrupt: the input X0.1 is falling edge triggered. 1

I002 External interrupt: the input X0.2 is falling edge triggered. 2

I003 External interrupt: the input X0.3 is falling edge triggered. 3

I004 External interrupt: the input X0.4 is falling edge triggered. 4

I005 External interrupt: the input X0.5 is falling edge triggered. 5

I006 External interrupt: the input X0.6 is falling edge triggered. 6

SR623
I007 External interrupt: the input X0.7 is falling edge triggered. 7

I008 External interrupt: the input X0.8 is falling edge triggered. 8

I009 External interrupt: the input X0.9 is falling edge triggered. 9

I010 External interrupt: the input X0.10 is falling edge triggered. 10

I011 External interrupt: the input X0.11 is falling edge triggered. 11

I012 External interrupt: the input X0.12 is falling edge triggered. 12

I013 External interrupt: the input X0.13 is falling edge triggered. 13

6-159
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Interrupt Maskable interrupts

Description Bit No.
number SR

I014 External interrupt: the input X0.14 is falling edge triggered. 14

I015 External interrupt: the input X0.15 is falling edge triggered. 15

I100 External interrupt: the input X0.0 is rising-edge triggered. 0

I101 External interrupt: the input X0.1 is rising-edge triggered. 1

I102 External interrupt: the input X0.2 is rising-edge triggered. 2

I103 External interrupt: the input X0.3 is rising-edge triggered. 3

I104 External interrupt: the input X0.4 is rising-edge triggered. 4

I105 External interrupt: the input X0.5 is rising-edge triggered. 5

I106 External interrupt: the input X0.6 is rising-edge triggered. 6

I107 External interrupt: the input X0.7 is rising-edge triggered. 7

SR624
I108 External interrupt: the input X0.8 is rising-edge triggered. 8

I109 External interrupt: the input X0.9 is rising-edge triggered. 9

I110 External interrupt: the input X0.10 is rising-edge triggered. 10

I111 External interrupt: the input X0.11 is rising-edge triggered. 11

I112 External interrupt: the input X0.12 is rising-edge triggered. 12

I113 External interrupt: the input X0.13 is rising-edge triggered. 13

_6
I114 External interrupt: the input X0.14 is rising-edge triggered. 14

I115 External interrupt: the input X0.15 is rising-edge triggered. 15

High-speed comparator interrupt 1 of the hardware

0
I200 high-speed counter 1

High-speed comparator interrupt 2 of the hardware

1
I201 high-speed counter 1

High-speed comparator interrupt 3 of the hardware

2
I202 high-speed counter 1

High-speed comparator interrupt 4 of the hardware SR625

3
I203 high-speed counter 1

High-speed comparator interrupt 1 of the hardware

4
I210 high-speed counter 2

High-speed comparator interrupt 2 of the hardware

5
I211 high-speed counter 2

I212 High-speed comparator interrupt 3 of the hardware 6

6-160
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Interrupt Maskable interrupts

Description Bit No.
number SR

high-speed counter 2

High-speed comparator interrupt 4 of the hardware

7
I213 high-speed counter 2

High-speed comparator interrupt 1 of the hardware

8
I220 high-speed counter 3

High-speed comparator interrupt 2 of the hardware

9
I221 high-speed counter 3

High-speed comparator interrupt 3 of the hardware

10
I222 high-speed counter 3

High-speed comparator interrupt 4 of the hardware

11
I223 high-speed counter 3

High-speed comparator interrupt 1 of the hardware

12
I230 high-speed counter 4

High-speed comparator interrupt 2 of the hardware

13
I231 high-speed counter 4

High-speed comparator interrupt 3 of the hardware

14
I232 high-speed counter 4

High-speed comparator interrupt 4 of the hardware 6_

15
I233 high-speed counter 4

High-speed comparator interrupt 1 of the hardware

0
I240 high-speed counter 5

High-speed comparator interrupt 2 of the hardware

1
I241 high-speed counter 5

High-speed comparator interrupt 3 of the hardware

2
I242 high-speed counter 5

High-speed comparator interrupt 4 of the hardware

SR626 3
I243 high-speed counter 5

High-speed comparator interrupt 1 of the hardware

4
I250 high-speed counter 6

High-speed comparator interrupt 2 of the hardware

5
I251 high-speed counter 6

High-speed comparator interrupt 3 of the hardware

6
I252 high-speed counter 6

6-161
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Interrupt Maskable interrupts

Description Bit No.
number SR

High-speed comparator interrupt 4 of the hardware

7
I253 high-speed counter 6

High-speed comparator interrupt 1 of the software high-speed

0
I260 counter

High-speed comparator interrupt 2 of the software high-speed

1
I261 counter

High-speed comparator interrupt 3 of the software high-speed

2
I262 counter

High-speed comparator interrupt 4 of the software high-speed

3
I263 counter
SR627
High-speed comparator interrupt 5 of the software high-speed
4
I264 counter

High-speed comparator interrupt 6 of the software high-speed

5
I265 counter

High-speed comparator interrupt 7 of the software high-speed

6
I266 counter

High-speed comparator interrupt 8 of the software high-speed

_6 I267 counter
7

Receiving some specific word to trigger communication

0
I300 interruption in COM1

I301 Reserved 1

Receiving some specific word to trigger communication

2
I302 interruption in COM1

I303 Reserved 3
SR628
Receiving some specific word to trigger communication
4
I304 interruption in function card 1

I305 Reserved 5

Receiving some specific word to trigger communication

6
I306 interruption in function card 2

I307 Reserved 7

High-speed output interrupt: the positioning instruction

st
SR629 0
I500 completes the execution of the 1 axis

6-162
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

Interrupt Maskable interrupts

Description Bit No.
number SR

High-speed output interrupt: the positioning instruction

1
I501 completes the execution of the 2nd axis

High-speed output interrupt: the positioning instruction

2
I502 completes the execution of the 3rd axis

High-speed output interrupt: the positioning instruction

3
I503 completes the execution of the 4th axis

High-speed output interrupt: the positioning instruction

4
I504 completes the execution of the 5th axis

High-speed output interrupt: the positioning instruction

5
I505 completes the execution of the 6th axis

High-speed output interrupt 1: the position planning table

0
I510 instruction completes the execution

High-speed output interrupt 2: the position planning table

1
I511 instruction completes the execution

High-speed output interrupt 3: the position planning table

2
I512 instruction completes the execution

High-speed output interrupt 4: the position planning table

I513 instruction completes the execution

3
6_
High-speed output interrupt 5: the position planning table
4
I514 instruction completes the execution
SR630
High-speed output interrupt 6: the position planning table
5
I515 instruction completes the execution

High-speed output interrupt 7: the position planning table

6
I516 instruction completes the execution

High-speed output interrupt 8: the position planning table

7
I517 instruction completes the execution

High-speed output interrupt 9: the position planning table

8
I518 instruction completes the execution

High-speed output interrupt 10: the position planning table

9
I519 instruction completes the execution

I601 Timer interrupts 1 (unit 1ms) 0

I602 Timer interrupts 1 (unit 1ms) SR632 1

I603 Timer interrupts 1 (unit 1ms) 2

6-163
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Interrupt Maskable interrupts

Description Bit No.
number SR

I604 Timer interrupts 1 (unit 0.1ms) 3

Note: When several interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt task whose pointer number is smaller will be executed

first. PLC will complete the execution of the on-going interrupt, and then execute other occurring interrupts according to

their pointer number. For example, during the execution of the interrupt I400, if I500 and I300 occur simultaneously,

after the execution of I400 is done, PLC will execute the I300 (smaller pointer number).

_6

6-164
 Ch a pt er 6 A pp l i e d I n s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

0503 EIX S Enabling the specific interrupt

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S 

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S ： Data source

Explanation:

1. Only decimal numbers can be inputted in S and the number inputted should be an interrupt number. If the number
inputted is not an interrupt number, the instruction will not be executed and no warning will be shown. Users should

input EIX500 when they wish to enable the interrupt I500. Please refer to the interrupt number list in the explanation

of the instruction EI. 6_

2. The default for interrupt tasks in the AS series is enabled. If the instruction DIX is used to disable the interrupts,
users need to use the instruction EIX to enable the interrupts.

3. Users can use the instruction to enalbe the interrupt tasks in SR623~SR634.

4. If the instruction is not executed, an interrupt task to be performed or not is up to the contents of SR623~SR634.

5. Please refer to the examples in API0501 the instruction EI for more information.

6-165
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0504 DIX S Disabling the specific interrupt

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S DWORD 

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S ： Data source

Explanation:

1. Only decimal numbers can be inputted in S and the number inputted should be an interrupt number. If the number
inputted is not an interrupt number, the instruction will not be executed and no warning will be shown. Users should

input DIX500 when they wish to disable the interrupt I500. Please refer to the interrupt number list in the explanation

of the instruction EI.

_6
2. The default for interrupt tasks in the AS series is enabled. Users can use the instruction DIX to disable the interrupts.

3. Users can use the instruction to disable the interrupt tasks in SR623~SR634.

4. If the instruction is not executed, an interrupt task to be performed or not is up to the contents of SR623~SR634.

5. Please refer to the examples in API0501 the instruction EI for more information.

6-166
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.7 I/O Refreshing Instructions

6.7.1 I/O List of I/O Refreshing Instructions
Instruction code Pulse
API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0600 REF –  Refreshing the I/O

6_

6-167
 AS Series Programming Manual

6.7.2 Explanation of I/O Refreshing Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0600 REF P D，n Refreshing the I/O

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D  
n      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D 
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

D ： I/O point whose state is refreshed

Number of I/O points whose states are

n ：
refreshed

_6 Explanation:

1. The I/O states are not refreshed until the instruction END is executed. When the scanning of the program starts, the

states of the external inputs are read and stored in the memory. After the instruction END is executed, the states of

the outputs in the memory is sent to the output terminals. Therefore, when users need the latest I/O data in the

operation process, they can use this instruction or use the device DX/DY to execute input/output.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 16.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the PLC reads the states of the inputs X0.0~X0.15 immediately. The input signals are refreshed

without any delay.

6-168
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, the output signals from Y0.0~Y0.7 are sent to the output terminals. The output signals are refreshed

immediately without the need to wait for the execution of the instruction END.

Additional remark:

1. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If n is larger than 16, or if n is less than 1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

6_

6-169
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.8 Convenience Instructions

6.8.1 The List of Convenience Instructions
Instruction code Pulse
API Function
16-Bit 32-Bit instruction

0700 ALT –  Alternating between ON and OFF

0701 TTMR – – Teaching timer
0702 STMR – – Special timer
0703 RAMP DRAMP – Cyclic ramp signal
0704 MTR – – Matrix input
0705 ABSD DABSD – Absolute drum sequencer
0706 INCD – – Incremental drum sequencer
0708 – DPIDE – PID algorithm
0709 XCMP – – Setups for comparing the inputs of multiple work stations
0710 YOUT – – Comparing the outputs of multiple work stations

_6

6-170
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.8.2 Explanation of Convenience Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0700 ALT P D Alternating between ON and OFF

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D    DWORD   

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D 

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

D ： Destination device

Explanation:

1. When the instruction ALT is executed, the state of the device specified by D alternate between ON and OFF. 6_
2. Generally, the pulse instruction ALTP is used.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON for the first time, Y0.0 is ON. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON for the

second time, Y0.0 is OFF.

Example 2:

In the beginning, M0 is OFF. Therefore, Y0.0 is ON, and Y0.1 is OFF. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON for the first

time, M0 is ON. Therefore, Y0.1 is ON, and Y0.0 is OFF. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON for the second time, M0

is OFF. Therefore, Y0.0 is ON, and Y0.1 is OFF.

6-171
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 3:

When X0.0 is ON, T0 generates a pulse every two seconds. The output Y0.0 alternates between ON and OFF according

to the pulses generated by T0.

_6

6-172
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0701 TTMR D，n Teaching timer

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D   
n       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

D ： Device in which the time is stored

n ： Multiplier

Explanation:

1. A second is taken as the timing unit. The time for which the button switch has been turned ON is multiplied by n, and

the product is stored in D. D+1 is for system use only. When the instruction is executed, the value in D+1 cannot be

altered. Otherwise, the time will be counted incorrectly. 6_

2. When the conditional contact is ON, D is reset to 0.

3. Setting the multiplier: When n is 0, D takes a second as the timing unit. When n is 1, the time for which the button

switch has been turned ON is multiplied by 10, and D takes 100 milliseconds as the timing unit. When n is 2, the

time for which the button switch has been turned ON is multiplied by 100, and D takes 10 milliseconds as the timing

unit.

n D

K0 (unit: 1 second) 1×T

K1 (unit: 100 milliseconds) 10×T

K2 (unit: 10 milliseonds) 100×T

4. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

5. The operand n should be within the range between 0 and 2.

6-173
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 1:

1. The time for which the button switch X0.0 has been turned ON is multiplied by n, and the product is stored in D0.

Users can use the button switch to adjust the settings.

2. When X0.0 is switched OFF, the value in D0 is unchanged.

X0.0

D0

D0

T T
The time for whic h The time for whic h
the button switc h is the button switc h is
turned on. turned on.
(Unit: Second) (Unit: Second)

Additional remark:
_6
1. If D+1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If n is less than 0, or if n is larger than 2, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

3. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

6-174
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0702 STMR S，m，D Special timer

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S 
m       
D   DWORD   

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
m   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S ： Timer number (T0~T511)

m ： Setting value of the timer

D ： Output device

Explanation:

1. The instruction STMR is used to generate the off-delay relay, the one-shot circuit, and the flashing circuit. 6_

2. The timer specified by the instruction TMR takes 100 milliseconds as the timing unit.

3. The timer specified by the instruction STMR cannot be used repeatedly.

4. D occupies four consecutive devices.

5. Before the instruction is executed, please reset D~D+3.

6. When the conditional contact is not enabled and the value of the device meets one of the two conditions mentioned

below, D, D+1, and D+3 are ON for m seconds before they are switched OFF. When the conditional contact is not

enabled and the value of the device does not meet either of the two conditions mentioned below, D~D+3 keep OFF.

 The value of the timer is less than or equal to m, D is ON, and D+1 is OFF.

 The value of the timer is less than m, D +2 is OFF, and D, D+1, and D+3 are ON.

7. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

8. The operand m should be within the range between 1 and 32767.

6-175
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction STMR specifies the timer T0, and the setting value of T0 is five seconds.

2. Y0.0 is the off-delay contact. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, Y0.0 is ON. Five minutes after X0.0 is
switched from ON to OFF, Y0.0 is OFF.

3. When X0.0 is switched from ON to OFF, Y0.0 is ON for five seconds.

4. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, Y0.2 is ON for five seconds.

5. Five seconds after X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, Y0.3 is ON. Five seconds after X0.0 is switched from ON to
OFF, Y0.3 is OFF.

X0.0

Y0.0
5 s econds 5 s econds

_6 Y0.1
5 s econds 5 s econds

Y0.2
5 s econds

Y0.3
5 s econds 5 s econds 5 s econds

6. When the conditional contact X0.0 is followed by the b contact of Y0.3, the flashing currents pass through Y0.1 and
Y0.2. When X10 is switched OFF, Y0.0, Y0.1, and Y0.3 are switched OFF, and T10 is reset to 0.

6-176
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

X 0.0

Y 0.1

Y 0.2
5 s econds

Additional remark:

1. If D+3 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If m is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [4] of BOOL.

6_

6-177
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0703 D RAMP S1，S2，D，n Cyclic Ramp signal

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
D   
n         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Initial value of the ramp signal

S2 ： Final value of the ramp signal

D ： Duration of the ramp signal

_6 n ： Number of scan cycles

Explanation:

1. The instruction is used to get the slope. The slope is linear, and has an absolute relationship with the scan time.

Thus it is suggested to set a fixed scan time or write this instruction to the timer interrupt task.

2. The initial value of the ramp signal and the final value of the ramp signal are written into S1 and S2 respectively in

advance. When X0.0 is ON, D increases from the setting value in S1 to the setting value in S2. The number of scan

cycles is stored in D+1. When the value in D is equal to that in S2, or when the value in D+1 is equal to n, reached to

the scan cycles, SM687 is ON.

3. When the conditional contact is not enabled, the value in D, and D+1 are both 0, and SM687 is OFF.

4. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

5. Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to the fixing of the scan time.

6. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 32767. When the operand n is out of the range, this

instruction will not be executed.

7. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

6-178
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

8. Use with the flag SM686, the setting value in D is reset to 0. Refer to the examples below for more details.

Example:

When the instruction is used with the analog signal output, the action of cushioning the start/stop can be executed.

1. Suppose the instruction is being executed. When X0.0 is switched OFF, the execution of the instruction stops. When

X0.0 is ON again, SM687 is OFF, D12 is reset to the setting value in D10, D13 is reset to 0, and the calculation is

restarted.

2. SM686 is OFF, and when D12 is reaching the setting value in D11, SM687 is ON as a scan cycle. And when D12 is

reset to the setting value in D10, D13 is reset to 0.

D11
D10
D12
D12
D11

D10
6_
The number of scan cycl e i s n. The number of scan cycl e i s n.
D10<D11 D10>D11
The number of scan cycl e i s stored i n D13.

3. When SM686 is ON, and D12 is reaching the setting value in D11, the value in D12 will not be reset to 0, and

SM687 is ON. Till the conditional contact is closed, the value in D12 will be reset to 0 and SM687 will be OFF. When

SM686 is ON/OFF, the value in D12 changes as follows.

SM686=O N SM686=O FF

X0.0 X0.0
T he signal is enabled. T he signal is enabled.

D11
D11
D12 D12
D10 D10

SM687 SM687

6-179
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If D+1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If n is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. When the 16-Bit instruction is executed, if users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2]

of WORD/INT.

4. When the 32-Bit instruction is executed, if users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2]

of DWORD/DINT.

_6

6-180
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0704 MTR S，D1，D2，n Matrix input

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S 
D1 
D2    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D1 
D2 
n   

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS －
Symbol:
Initial input device in the matrix
S ：
scan
Initial output device in the matrix
D1 ：
scan
Initial corresponding device in the
D2 ：
matrix scan 6_
n ： Number of rows which are scanned

Explanation:

1. S specifies the initial input device in the matrix scan. The eight devices starting from the device specified by S are

the input devices in the matrix scan.

2. D1 specifies the transistor output device Y as the initial device in the matrix scan. When the conditional contact is
OFF, the states of the n devices starting from D1 are OFF.

3. One row of inputs is refreshed every scan cycle. There are 16 inputs in a row, and the scan starts from the first row
th
to the n row.

4. The eight input devices starting from the device specified by S are connected to the n output devices starting from

the device specified by D1 to form the n rows of switches. The states of the n rows of switches are read in the matrix

scan, and stored in the devices starting from the device specified by D2.

5. When the instruction is used, users can connect at most 8 rows of input switches in parallel to get 64 inputs

(8×8=64).

6-181
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6. The interval between the time when the instruction is executed and the next time when it is executed should be

longer than the time it takes for the states of the I/O points on the module to be refreshed. Otherwise, the correct

states of the inputs cannot be read.

7. Generally, the conditional contact used in the instruction is the normally-open contact SM400.

8. The operand n should be within the range between 2 and 8.

Example 1:

1. When M0 is ON, the instruction MTR is executed. The states of the two rows of switches are read in order, and

stored in the internal relays M10~M17 and M20~M27 respectively.

2. The diagram below is the external wiring diagram of the 2-by-8 matrix input circuit which is composed of X0.0~X0.7

and Y0.0~Y0.7. The corresponding internal relays of the 16 switches are M10~M17 and M20~M27.

_6
M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27

Y0.1
Y0.0
X0.1 X0.2 X0.3 X0.4 X0.5 X0.6 X0.7

M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17

X0.0 X0.1 X0.2 X0.3 X0.4 X0.5 X0.6 X0.7

3. The eight input devices starting from X0.0 are connected to the two output devices starting from Y0.0 to form the

two rows of switches. The states of the two rows of switches are read in the matrix scan, and stored in the devices

starting from M10 specified by D2. That is, the states of the first row of switches are stored in M10~M17, and the

states of the second row of switches are stored in M20~M27.

6-182
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

T he first row of i nput s ignals ar e r ead.

Y0.0 1 3
T he second r ow of input s ignal s ar e read.

Y0.1 2 4

Additional remark:

1. When this instruction is executed, a too long or a too short scan cycle time will cause the state of the switches not be

read correctly. Use the following tips to solve the issues.

 When the scan cycle is too short, the I/O may not be able to respond in time and the correct states of the

inputs cannot be read. Users can set a fixed scan time to solve this issue.

 When the scan cycle is too long, the switch may become slow to react. Users can write this instruction to the

timer interrupt task to set a fixed to execute this instruction.

2. If S+7, D1+n-1, or D2+(n*8)-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If n is less than 2, or if n is larger than 8, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

4. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [8] of BOOL.
6_

6-183
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0705 D ABSD S1，S2，D，n Absolute drum sequencer

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2       
D    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
D 
n     

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Initial device in the comparison

S2 ： Comparison value

D ： Comparison result

_6 n ： Number of comparison groups

Explanation:

1. The instruction ABSD is used to generate multiple pulses corresponding to the current values of the counter.

2. Only the instruction DABSD can use the 32-Bit counter, but not the device E.

3. When the instruction ABSD is used, n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

Example 1:

1. Before the instruction ABSD is executed, the instruction MOV is used to write the setting values in D100~D107. The

values in the even devices are minimum values, and the values in the odd devices are maximum values.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the current value of the counter C10 is compared with the maximum values and the minimum

values in D100~D107, and the comparison results are stored in M10~M13.

3. When X0.0 is OFF, the original states of M10~M13 are unchanged.

6-184
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

4. When the current value of C10 is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value, M10~M13

are ON. Otherwise, M10~M13 are OFF.

Minimum value Maximum value Current value of C10 Output

D100=40 D101=100 40≦C10≦100 M10=ON

D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=ON

D104=140 D105=170 140≦C10≦170 M12=ON 6_

D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=ON

5. Suppose the minimum value is larger than the maximum value. When the current value of C10 is less than the

maximum value (C10＜60), or when the current value of C10 is larger than the minimum value (C10＞140), M12 is
ON. Otherwise, M12 is OFF.

Minimum value Maximum value Current value of C10 Output

D100=40 D101=100 40≦C10≦100 M10=ON

D102=120 D103=210 120≦C10≦210 M11=ON

D104=140 D105=60 60≦C10≦140 M12=OFF

D106=150 D107=390 150≦C10≦390 M13=ON

6-185
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

40 100
M10

120 210
M11

60 140
M12

150 390
M13

0 200 400

Additional remark:

1. If S+2*n-1 used in the instruction ABSD exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S+4*n-1 used in the instruction DABSD exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If D+n-1 used in the instruction ABSD exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If D+2*n-1 used in the instruction DABSD exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6 5. If n used in the instruction ABSD is less than 1 or larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6-186
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0706 INCD S1，S2，n，D Incremental drum sequencer

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
D    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D 
n   

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS －
Symbol:

S1 ： Initial device in the comparison

S2 ： Counter number

D ： Comparison result

n ： Number of comparison groups 6_

Explanation:

1. The instruction INCD is used to generate multiple pulses for a pair of counters.

2. The current value of S2 is compared with the setting value in S1. When the current value matches the setting value,

the current value of S2 is rest to 0, and the current comparison group number is stored in S2+1.

3. After the comparison between the current values of S2 and the n groups of values is complete, SM688 is ON for a

scan cycle.

4. When the conditional contact is not enabled, the value in S2 is 0, the value in S2+1 is 0, D~D+n-1 are OFF, and

SM688 is OFF.

5. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

6. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

6-187
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

1. Before the instruction INCD is executed, the instruction MOV is used to write the setting values in D100~D104. The
values in D100~D104 are 15, 30, 10, 40, and 25 respectively.

2. The current values of C10 is compared with the setting values in D100~D104. When the current value matches the
setting value, C10 is rest to 0, and counts again.

3. The current comparison group number is stored in C11.

4. When the value in C11 changes by one, M10~M14 act correspondingly. Please refer to the timing diagram below.

5. When the comparison between the current values of C10 and the values in D100~D104 is complete, SM688 is ON
for a scan cycle.

6. When X0.0 is switched from ON to OFF, C10 and C11 are reset to 0, and M10~M14 are switched OFF. When X0.0
is ON again, the execution of the instruction starts from the beginning.

_6

6-188
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

X0.0
40
30 30
25
C10 15 15 15
10
Current v alue

4
C11 3
2
Current v alue 0 1 1 1
0 0

M10

M11

M12

M13

M14

SM688

Additional remark:

1. If S2+1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S1+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003. 6_

3. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

4. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200B.

5. If users declare the operand S2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

6-189
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0708 D PIDE As shown on the list below PID algorithm

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

PID_RUN     
SV  
PV  
PID_MODE   
PID_MAN     
MOUT_AUTO     
CYCLE 
KC_Kp 
Ti_Ki 
Td_Kd 
Tf 
PID_EQ     
PID_DE     
PID_DIR     
ERR_DBW   
MV_MAX   
MV_MIN   
MOUT 
BIAS   
I_MV 
_6 MV 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

Data
REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT

type

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ － AS

6-190
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Symbol:

EN ： Enable/Disable the instruction

PID_RUN ： Enabling the PID algorithm

SV ： Target value (SV)

PV ： Process value (PV)

PID_MODE ： PID control mode

PID_MAN ： PID Auto/Manual mode

MOUT_AUTO ： Manual/Auto output value

CYCLE ： Sampling time (CYCLE)

Kc_Kp ： Proportional gain

Ti_Ki ： Integral coefficient (sec. or 1/sec)

Td_Kd ： Derivative coefficient (sec)

Tf ： Derivate-action time constant (sec)

PID_EQ ： PID formula types

PID_DE ： The calculation of the PID derivative error

PID_DIR ： PID forward/reverse direction (PID_DIR)

Range within which the error value is

ERR_DBW ：
counted as 0
6_
MV_MAX ： Maximum output value (MV_MAX)

MV_MIN ： Minimum output value (MV_MIN)

MOUT ： Manual output value (MOUT)

BIAS ： Feedforward output value

I_MV ： Accumulated integral value

MV ： Output value (MV)

Explanation:

1. The instruction is used to implement the PID algorithm. After the sampling time is reached, the PID algorithm is

implemented. PID stands for Proportional, Integral, Derivative. The PID control is widely applied to mechanical

equipment, pneumatic equipment, and electronic equipment.

2. The setting of the parameters is as follows.

6-191
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Setting
Operand Data type Function Description
range

True: The PID algorithm is

implemented.

PID_RUN BOOL Enabling the PID algorithm False: The output value (MV) is reset to

0, and the PID algorithm is not

implemented.

Range of

single-

precision
SV REAL SV Target value
floating-

point

numbers

Range of

single-

precision
PV REAL PV Process value
floating-

point

numbers

_6 0: Automatic control

When PID_MAN is switched from

True to False, the output value (MV)

then is involved in the automatic

algorithm.

1: The parameters are tuned

automatically for the temperature

control.
PID_MODE DWORD/DINT PID control mode
When the tuning of the parameters is

complete, the device is automatically

set to 0, and is filled in with

appropriate parameters Kc_Kp,

Ti_Ki, Td_Kd and Tf.

Note: while using automatic control,

users can not input the setting

vaule manually.

6-192
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Setting
Operand Data type Function Description
range

True: Manual

The MV is output according to

the MOUT, but it is still within the

range between the MV_MIN and

the MV_MAX. When PID_MODE

is set to 1, the setting is

PID_MAN BOOL PID A/M mode
ineffective.

False: Automatic

The MV is output according to

the PID algorithm, and the output

value is within the range

between MV_MIN and MV_MAX.

True: Automatic

The MOUT varies with the MV.

MOUT automatic change
MOUT_AUTO BOOL False: Normal
mode
The MOUT deos not vary with

the MV.

When the instruction is 6_

scanned, the PID

algorithm is implmented
according to the

sampling time, and the

MV is refreshed. (The

PLC need the instruction

to execute; it will not run

1~40,000
CYCLE DWORD/DINT Sampling time (TS) the sampling time
(unit: ms)
automaticlly ) If TS is less

than 1, it will be counted

as 1. If TS is larger than

40,000, it will be counted

as 40,000.

When the instruction PID

is used in the interval

interrupt task, the

6-193
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Setting
Operand Data type Function Description
range

sampling time is the

same as the interval

between the timed

interrupt tasks. The

setting of the sampling

cycle is invalid here.

Range of Calculated proportional

positive coefficient (Kc or Kp)

Calculated proportional
single- If the P coefficient is less
coefficient (Kc or Kp,
Kc_Kp REAL precision than 0, the Kc_Kp will be
according to the settings in
floating- 0. Independently, if
PID_EQ)
point Kc_Kp is 0, it will not be

numbers controlled by P.

Range of If the calculated

positive coefficient I is less than

single- 0, Ti_Ki will be 0. If Ti_Ki

precision is 0, it will not be

Integral coefficient (Ti or Ki,
floating- controlled by I.
_6 Ti_Ki REAL according to the settings in
point
PID_EQ)
numbers

(unit: Ti =

sec; Ki =

1/sec)

Range of If the calculated

positive coefficient D is less than

single- 0, Td_Kd will be 0. If

Derivative coefficient (Td or
precision Ti_Ki is 0, it will not be
Td_Kd REAL Kd, according to the settings
floating- controlled by D.
in PID_EQ)
point

numbers

(unit: sec)

6-194
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Setting
Operand Data type Function Description
range

Range of If the derivate-action time

positive constant is less than 0, Tf

single- will be 0 and it will not be

Derivate-action time precision controlled by the

Tf REAL
constant floating- derivate-action time

point constant. (Derivative

numbers Smoothing)

(unit: sec)

TRUE: Dependent Formula

PID_EQ BOOL PID formula types
FALSE: Independent Formula

TRUE: Using the variations in the PV to

calculate the control value of the

derivative (Derivative of the PV).

The calculation of the PID
PID_DE BOOL FALSE: Using the variations in the error
derivative error
(E) to calculate the control value

of the derivative (Derivative of

the error).

PID forward/reverse True: Reverse action (E=SV-PV) 6_

PID_DIR BOOL
direction False: Forward action (E=PV-SV)

The error value (E) is the

difference between the

SV and the PV. When the

setting value is 0, the

function is not enabled;

Range of
otherwise the CPU
single-
module will check
Range within which the precision
ERR_DBW REAL whether the present error
error value is counted as 0. floating-
is less than the absolute
point
value of ERR_DBW, and
numbers
check whether the

present error meets the

cross status condition. If

the present error is less

than the absolute value

6-195
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Setting
Operand Data type Function Description
range

of ERR_DBW,

and meets the cross

status condition, the

present error will be

counted as 0, and the

PID algorithm will be

implemented, otherwise

the present error will be

brought into the PID

algorithm according to

the normal processing.

Suppose MV_MAX is set

to 1,000. When the MV is

Range of larger than 1,000, 1,000
single- is output. The value in

precision MV_MAX should be

MV_MAX REAL Maximum output value
floating- larger than that in

point MV_MIN. Otherwise, the

_6 numbers maximum MV and the

minimum MV will be

reversed.

Range of

single- Suppose MV_MIN is set

precision to -1,000. When the MV

MV_MIN REAL Minimum output value
floating- is less than -1,000,

point -1,000 is output.

numbers

Range of When set to PID Manual,

single- the MV value will be

precision outputted as the

MOUT REAL MV
floating- manually set MOUNT

point value, between MV_MAX

numbers and MV_MIN.

6-196
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Setting
Operand Data type Function Description
range

Range of

single-
Feedforward output
precision
BIAS REAL Feedforward output value value, used for the PID
floating-
feedforward.
point

numbers

Accumulated integral

value temporarily stored

is usually for reference.

Range of Users can still clear or
single- modify it according to

Accumulated precision their needs. When the

I_MV
integral value floating- MV is greater than the

point MV_MAX, or when the

I_MV (occupies numbers MV is less than MV_MIN,

15 consecutive REAL the accumulated integral

DWordDevice） value in I_MV is

unchanged.
6_
I_MV+1 The previous error value is temporarily stored in it.

I_MV+2 ~
For system use only
I_MV+5

I_MV+6 The previous PV is temporarily stored in it.

I_MV+7 ~
For system use only
I_MV+14

The MV is withing the range between the MV_MIN and

MV REAL MV
the MV_MAX.

6-197
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The diagram of switching to PID_MAN / MOUT_AUTO:

tID_aAN

PID
Calculation CALSE

MV

aanual input TRUE

MOUT

TRUE

CALSE

aOUT_AUTO

1. When switching the control mode (PID_MAN=0) from automatic to manual, users can set the flag

MOUT_AUTO to 1 and the output value of MOUT will go along with the output value of MV. After switching to

the manual mode (PID_MAN=1), users can set the MOUT_AUTO to 0.

2. When PID_RUN is changing from TRUE to FALSE, the PLC will reset the value in MV to 0. When the value in

MV is to be retained, users can set the EN as FALSE to dismiss the instruction and to keep the output value in

MV.

Example:

1. Before the instruction DPID is executed, the setting of the parameters should be complete.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction is executed. When M1 is ON, the DPID algorithm is implemented. When M1 is
_6
OFF, the MV is 0, and the MV is stored in D200. When X0.0 is switched OFF, the instruction is not executed, and the

previous data is unchanged.

6-198
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Additional remark:

1. The instruction can be used several times, but the registers specified by I_MV~I_MV+14 cannot be the same.

2. I_MV occupies 30 registers. I_MV used in the instruction PID in the above example occupies D126~D155.

3. The instruction DPID only can be used in the cyclic task and the interval interrupt task. When the instruction DPID is

used in the interval interrupt task, the sampling time (Cycle) is the same as the interval between the timed interrupt

tasks.

4. When the instruction is scanned, the DPID algorithm is implmented according to the sampling time (Cycle), and the

MV is refreshed. When the instruction is used in the interrupt task, the sampling time (Cycle) is the same as the

interval between the timed interrupt tasks. The PID algorithm is implemented according to the interval between the

timed interrupt tasks.

5. Before the DPID algorithm is implemented, the process value used in the instruction PID has to be a stable value.

When users need the input value in the module to implement the DPID algorithm, they have to notice the time it

takes for the analog input to be converted into the digital input.

6. When the PV (process value) is in the range of ERR_DBW, at the beginning, the present error will be brought into

the PID algorithm according to the normal processing and then the CPU module will check whether the present

error meets the cross status condition: PV (process value) goes beyond the SV (target value). Once the condition is

met, the present error will be counted as 0 to implement the PID algorithm. And after the PV (process value) is out of

the ERR_DBW range, the present error will be brought into the PID algorithm again. If PID_DE is true, that means
6_
using the variations in the PV to calculate the control value of the derivative and after the cross status condition is

met, the PLC will treat Δ PV as 0 to implement the PID algorithm. (Δ PV= current PV – previous PV). As the example

shown below, the present error will be brought into the PID algorithm according to the normal processing in the

section A and the present error or Δ PV will be counted as 0 to implement the PID algorithm in the section B.

6-199
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The PID algorithm:

1. When PID_MODE is set to 0, the PID control mode is the automatic control mode.

 Independent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=False）

t
dE
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV
0
dt

 Independent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=False & PID_DE=Ture）

t
dPV
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt − K d * + BIAS E = SV – PV
0
dt

Or

t
dPV
MV = K P E + Ki ∫ Edt + K d * + BIAS E =PV – SV
0
dt

 Dependent Formula & Derivative of E（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=False）

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS E = SV – PV or E = PV – SV
 Ti 0 dt 

_6  Dependent Formula & Derivative of PV（PID_EQ=True & PID_DE=True）

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt − Td *  + BIAS E = SV – PV
 Ti 0 dt 

Or

 1
t
dE 
MV = K c  E + ∫ Edt + Td *  + BIAS E = PV – SV
 Ti 0 dt 

2. When PID_MODE is set to 1, the PID control mode is the automatic tuning mode. After the tuning of the parameter

is complete, PID_MODE is set to 0. The PID control mode becomes the automatic control mode.

6-200
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

PID Block Diagram:

PID Block Diagram (Independent)

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND
-
REVERSE
PV 0
X(-1)

ERR_DBW

Kc_Kp
PID-P
>0 PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
<=0 +
0 +
Kc_Kp MV_LIMIT
1
MV
Ti_Ki
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, MV_MIN
+
<=0 +
0 +
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
+ MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT
PID-D PID_MAN
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

PID Block Diagram (Dependent) 6_

PID_D IR
E
+ 1
SV + DEAD BAND PID-P
-
REVERSE
PV 0
X(-1)

Kc_Kp
ERR_DBW Kc_Kp
>0

<=0
0

PID_MAN
BIAS
+ 0
+
+
MV_LIMIT
1
Ti_Ki MV
PID-I
>0
MV_MAX, M V_MIN
<=0
0
Ti_Ki MOUT_AUTO
MOUT
0
Td_Kd MOUT PID_MAN
PID-D
>0 1
0

<=0
0 1
Td_Kd, Tf MOUT

6-201
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Suggestion:

1. Owing to the fact that the instruction DPID can be used in a lot of controlled environments, users have to choose the

control function appropriately. For example, to prevent the improper control from occurring, PID_MODE can not be

used in the motor controlled environment when it is set to 1.

2. When users tune the parameters Kc_Kp, Ti_Ki, and Td_Kd (PID_MODE is set to 0), they have to tune the KP first

(according to the experience), and then set the Ti_Ki and the Td_Kd to 0. When users can handle the control, they

can increase the Ti_Ki and the Td_Kd. When the Kc_Kp is 1, it means that the proportional gain is 100%. That is, the

error value is increased by a factor of one. When the proportional gain is less than 100%, the error value is decreased.

When the proportional gain is larger than 100%, the error value is increased.

3. To prevent the parameters which have been tuned automatically from disappearing after a power cut, users have to

store the parameters in the latched data registers when is PID_MODE set to 1. The parameters which have been

tuned automatically are not necessarily suitable for every controlled environment. Therefore, users can modify the

parameters which have been tuned automatically. However, it is suggested that users only modify the Ti_Ki and the

Td_Kd.

4. The instruction should be used with many parameters. To prevent the improper control from occurring, please do not

set the parameters randomly.

Example 1: The steps of tuning the parameters used with the instruction PID
_6
b
Suppose that the transfer function of the plant is the first-order function G(s) = , the SV is 1, the sampling time Ts is
s+a
10 milliseconds. It is suggested that the steps of tuning the parameters are as follows.

Step 1: First, set the KI and the KD to 0. Next, set the KP to 5, 10, 20 and 40 successively, and record the target values and
the process values. The results are shown in the diagram below.

1.5

K P =40 SV= 1
K P =20 K P =10
1

K P =5
0.5

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 T ime (s ec)

6-202
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Step 2: When the KP is 40, there is overreaction. Thus, the KP is not chosen. When the KP is 20, the reaction curve of the

PV is close to the SV, and there is no overreaction. However, due to the fast start-up, the transient output value

(MV) is big. The KP is not chosen, either. When the KP is 10, the reaction curve of the PV approaches the SV

smoothly. Therefore, the KP is chosen. When the KP is 5, the reaction is slow. Thus, the KP is not chosen.

Step 3: After the KP is set to 10, increase the KI. For example, the KI is set to 1, 2, 4, and 8 successively. The KI should not

be larger than the KP. Then, increase the KD. For example, the KD is set to 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, and 0.2 successively.

The KD should not be larger than ten percent of the KP. Finally, the relation between the PV and the SV is present

in the following diagram.

1 .5

PV= SV

0 .5
K P =10,KI = 8,K D=0.2

0 0 .1 0 .2 0 .3 0 .4 0 .5 0 .6 0 .7 0 .8 0 .9 1 T ime (s ec)

Note: The example is only for reference. Users have to tune the parameters properly according to the practical condition

of the control system. 6_

Example 2: Using the automatic tuning function to control the temperature

Purpose: Using the automatic tuning function to calcaulte the most appropriate parameters for the PID temperature

control

Explanation:

Due to the fact that users may not be familiar with the characteristics of the temperature environment which is controlled

for the first time, they can use the automatic tuning function to make an initial adjustment (PID_MODE is set to 1). After

the tuning of the parameter is complete, PID_MODE is set to 0. The controlled environment in this sample is an oven. The

program example is as below.

6-203
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_6

The experimental result of the automatic tuning function is shown below.

6-204
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

The experimental result of using the parameters which have been tuned to control the temperature is shown below.

As the diagam above shows, after the parameters are tuned automatically, users can get a good temperature control

result. It only takes about twenty minutes to control the temperature. When the target temperature changes from 80°C to 6_
100°C, the result is as below.

As the diagam above shows, when the target temperature changes from 80°C to 100°C, the parameters tuned previously

still can be used to control the temperature. Besides, it does not take much time to control the temperature.

6-205
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Setups for comparing the inputs of multiple
0709 XCMP S1，S2，S3，S4，D
work stations

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
S3 
S4 
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data INT
type

S1 
S2 
S3   
S4  
D  

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS －
Symbol:

S1 ： Trigger input point

S2 ： High-speed counter number

_6 Setting of the numbers for work station
S3 ：
and objects
Reference value for comparison and
S4 ：
the observational error
Initial corresponding device for the
D ：
comparison result in the stack area

Explanation:

1. This instruction is only applicable for AS series with firmware version 1.04 or higher.

2. The operand S1 is for the setting of the trigger input points; high-speed inputs are X0.0~X0.15 and for inputs other
than X0.0~X0.15, they are general type. Once the instruction is executed, the external interrupts for the inputs

(X0.0~X0.15) will be enabled. Therefore it is not suggested to use the inputs with interrupt tasks; otherwise, when

the instruction is executed, the interrupts will be disabled, and only after the instruction is done, the interrupt tasks

will be resumed. For the general type, they will be affected by the scan time though they are suitable for the

environments where the inputs are not as stable.

6-206
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

3. The operand S2 works with 32-bit counters (HC0~HC255). When the inputs are high-speed trigger input type, it is
suggested to implement the hardware high-speed counter and users can use the instruction DCNT to enable the

counter. When it is required to use high-speed outputting, users can use the instruction DMOV to copy the output

current position, for example copying the axis of SR460 to HC0, (DMOV SR460 HC0).

4. The operand S3 occupies a consecutive three 16-bit devices. S3+0 is n the setting of the work station number and
S3+1 is m the maximum object number. S3+2 is the result of the object being filtered. The range for n and m is 1~32.

When the value is out of range, the value will be seen as the maximum (32) or the minimum (1). The range for S3+2

(the number of filter) is 0~32767. Value less than 0 will be seen as 0 and when the value is 0, the filtering function is

disabled. It is suggested to declare an array of 3 words or 3 consecutive word type variables.

5. It is suggested to set the maximum number for S3+1 (m). If m<n, users should take notice of the objects and make
sure they are sufficient on the production line.

6. The operand S4 occupies a consecutive of 3xn 32-bit devices (6xn 16-bit devices). If the space taken exceeds the
range of device D, the instruction will not be executed. The n is the work station number set in the operand S3. The

functions for each device and the corresponding number for S4 are listed below. It is suggested to declare an array

of 3n double words or 3 consecutive double word type variables.

Function Work station 1 Work station 2 ‧‧‧ Work station n

Reference value for comparison (32-bit) S4+0 S4+2 ‧‧‧ S4+(n-1)x2

Observational error when entering S4+2xn S4+2xn+2 ‧‧‧ S4+(2xn-1)x2

(32-bit) 6_
Observational error when leaving S4+4xn S4+4xn+2 ‧‧‧ S4+(4xn-1)x2

(32-bit)

When the reference value is set to 0 for a specific work station, the specific work station will stop working. Users can

use this technique to manage the work station.

7. The operand D is initial corresponding device for the comparison result in the stack area. The operand D occupies a
consecutive of 2xn 16-bit devices and 2xmxn 32-bit devices (or 4xmxn 16-bit devices). If the space taken exceeds

the range of device D, the instruction will not be executed. The functions for each device and the corresponding

number for D are listed below.

Function Work station 1 Work station 2 ‧‧‧ Work station n

Value of the head index (16-bit) D+0 D+1 ‧‧‧ D+(n-1)

Value of the tail index (16-bit) D+n D+(n+1) ‧‧‧ D+(2xn-1)

Compared counter result 1 of the D+2xn D+2xn+2 ‧‧‧ D+2xn+2(n-1)

object when entering (32-bit)

Compared counter result 1 of the D+4xn D+4xn+2 ‧‧‧ D+4xn+2(n-1)

6-207
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Function Work station 1 Work station 2 ‧‧‧ Work station n

object when leaving (32-bit)

： ： ： ： ：

Compared counter result m of the D+4xmxn-2xn ‧‧‧ D+4xmxn-2

object when entering (32-bit)

Compared counter result m of the D+4xmxn ‧‧‧ D+4xmxn+2

object when leaving (32-bit) (n-1)

It tends to occupy more space in the stack area. If the space taken exceeds the range of device D, the PLC will only

execute what is valid in the storage and no warning will be shown. It is suggested to declare an array of 2xn+4xmxn

words.

8. There is no limit on the number of times the instruction can be executed but only one execution can be done at a
time.

9. This instruction is suggested to use with the instruction API0710 YOUT and use the same initial corresponding
device for the comparison result in the stack area (the operand D).

10. The timing diagram of executing the high-speed counter and filter (read from right to left).

*1 * 2 *1 *1 *1 *1 * 2 *1

*4 *4
_6
*3 *3

*1. PLC reads the current counter value.

*2. Drop the counter value: the number of filters read is less than the number of filters set.

*3. Record the counter value: the signal is high (on time) and records the counter value to the comparing stack area

for entering.

*4. Record the counter value: the signal is low (off time) and records the counter value to the comparing stack area

for leaving.

11. When the signal is rising-/falling-edge triggered and complete processing filter, the PLC reads the high-speed
counter value and adds one in the value of the head index. The PLC will record the entering and leaving counter

results of each work station. The compared counter result is the current counter value + reference value +

observational error. Whether it is rising-triggered or falling-edge triggered, the value of the head index will be

accumulated. The maximum head index value is mx2 (the maximum number of object).

6-208
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

12. The value of the head index will be cyclically accumulated, when the signal is rising-/falling-edge triggered and
complete with processing the number of filters. (the default for trigger input is OFF) The maximum value of the head

index is mx2 (the maximum number of object). For example, the number of object is set to 10, the value of the head

index (default: 0) will be added to 1, 2, 3 to 20 and then 1, 2, 3 to 20 repeatedly. When the value of the head index is

set to 0, it means there is no object entered after the instruction is executed. After adding one to the value of the

head index, the PLC will check the value in the tail index. If the value (after adding one) in the value of the head

index equals to the value of the tail index, the addition will be cancelled and the counter result will be recorded.

13. When the instruction is executed and the state of the initial input is OFF, the rising-edge trigger will correspond to
the odd numbers of the head index value, and the falling-edge trigger will correspond to the even numbers of

the head index value.

14. When the instruction is executed and the state of the initial input is ON, the falling-edge trigger will correspond to
the odd numbers of the head index value, and the rising-edge trigger will correspond to the even numbers of the

head index value.

15. When the instruction is executed, values in the accumulated area and the index areas will not be cleared. If the data
is in the latched area and needed to be enabled again, users need to use the instruction ZRST to clear the values in

the head and tail indexes.

Example:

Please refer to the example in the API0710 YOUT for more information. 6_

6-209
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Comparing the outputs of multiple work
0710 YOUT S1，S2，S3，D
stations

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
S3 
D  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

S1 
S2   
S3  
D 

Pulse instruction 16-Bit instruction 32-Bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： High-speed counter number

Setting of the numbers for work station

_6 S2 ：
and objects
Initial corresponding device for the
S3 ：
comparison result in the stack area
Initial corresponding device for the
D ：
output work station
Explanation:

1. This instruction is only applicable for AS series with firmware version 1.04 or higher.

2. The operand S1 is for the setting of the high-speed counter. The high-speed counter should be set the same as the
high-speed counter set from the API0709 XCMP.

3. The operand S2 occupies a consecutive two 16-bit devices. S2+0 is n the setting of the work station number and
S2+1 is m the maximum object number. The range for n and m is 1~32. When the value is out of range, the value
will be seen as the maximum (32) or the minimum (1). The settings here should be the same as the API0709 XCMP.

4. The operand S3 is initial corresponding device for the comparison result in the stack area. The operand S3 occupies
a consecutive of 2xn 16-bit devices and 2xmxn 32-bit devices (or 4xmxn 16-bit devices). For the functions of each

device and the corresponding number for D, please refer to the API0709 XCMP. It is suggested to use the same

variable as the API0709 XCMP does.

6-210
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

5. There is no limit on the number of times the instruction can be executed but only one execution can be done at a
time.

6. This instruction is suggested to use with the API0709 XCMP and use the same initial corresponding device for the
comparison result in the stack area (the operand S3).

7. The operand D is only for the outputs of Y as well as M devices and BOOL data type. It occupies a consecutive of
work stations xn. When it is used as the output point or the M device, the instruction will run to refresh the output
states.

8. The corresponding values for the odd numbered head index (for example 1, 3, 5,…) are called compared counter
result of the object when entering. The corresponding values for the even numbered head index (for example 2, 4,
6,…) are called compared counter result of the object when leaving.

9. When the compared counter result of entering and leaving in the stack area are 0, the actions in this area will not be
executed and the state of the corresponding output work station will be OFF. Adding 2 to the value in the tail index
but the value (after adding 2) will not exceed the value of the head index.

10. When the instruction YOUT is executed, each work station will check the compared value of entering and leaving in
the tail index. When the counter value is larger or the same as the compared value of entering, the corresponding

output point will be ON and will add 1 to the value of the tail index. When the counter value is larger or the same as

the compared value of leaving, the corresponding output will be OFF and will add 1 to the value of the tail index but
the value (after adding 1) will not exceed the value of the head index.

Example: the example of work station x3 and the number of objects can be up to 4. 6_
Wo rk Work Work
station station station
Object 1 2 3
detection

Obj ect

En co der

Step 1: using the input point X0.4 as the object detection interrupts, HC202 is the high-speed counter for the encoder and

the output point Y0.0 as the initial output point for the work station to output.

Step 2: using the register to edit, set up the reference value, the observational error when entering and leaving.

Device D D500 D502 D504

Reference value for comparison (32-bit) K2000 K3000 K4000

Device D D506 D508 D510

6 - 2 11
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Observational error when entering (32-bit) K100 K120 K130

Device D D512 D514 D516

Observational error when leaving (32-bit) K50 K-20 K20

Device D D2000 D2001 D2002

Value of the head index (16-bit) K0 K0 K0

Device D D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index (16-bit) K0 K0 K0

Step 3: Set up the initial values and write the programs.

_6

6-212
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Set up 3 work stations for D0, 4 objects for D1 and 50 filters for D2. After the contact M0 is activated, settings of the object

detection, compared value setup, the compared counter result of the object entering as well as leaving, and the output

controls for each work station can be done. For instance the system detects 2 objects entered and 4 triggers to read the

compared counter results, 3000, 3500, 4500, and 5000 in HC202 (HC202=K5060). The compared value and the head/tail

index in the stack area are as below.

Device D D2000 D2001 D2002

Value of the head index (16-bit) K4 K4 K4 6_

Device D number D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index (16-bit) K1 K1 K1

Device D number D2006 D2008 D2010

Compared counter result 1 of the object

K5100 K6120 K7130
when entering (32-bit)

Device D number D2012 D2014 D2016

Compared counter result 1 of the object

K5550 K6480 K7520
when leaving (32-bit)

Device D number D2018 D2020 D2022

Compared counter result 2 of the object

K6600 K7620 K8630
when entering (32-bit)

Device D number D2024 D2026 D2028

Compared counter result 2 of the object K7050 K7980 K9020

6-213
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

when leaving (32-bit)

Device D number D2030 D2032 D2034

Compared counter result 3 of the object

K0 K0 K0
when entering (32-bit)

Device D number D2036 D2038 D2040

Compared counter result 3 of the object

K0 K0 K0
when leaving (32-bit)

_6

6-214
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

When the high-speed counter HC202 reaching 5200, the state of the output point Y is as below:

Output point Y number Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2

16-bit value ON OFF OFF

Device D number D2000 D2001 D2002

Value of the head index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)

Device D number D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index

K2 K1 K1
(16-bit)

When the high-speed counter HC202 reaching 6200, the state of the output point Y is as below:

Output point Y number Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2

16-bit value OFF ON OFF

Device D number D2000 D2001 D2002

Value of the head index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)
6_
Device D number D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index

K3 K2 K1
(16-bit)

When the high-speed counter HC202 reaching 6800, the state of the output point Y is as below:

Output point Y number Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2

16-bit value ON OFF OFF

Device D number D2000 D2001 D2002

Value of the head index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)

Device D number D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index

K4 K3 K1
(16-bit)

6-215
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

When the high-speed counter HC202 reaching 7300, the state of the output point Y is as below:

Output point Y number Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2

16-bit value OFF OFF ON

D2002
Device D number D2000 D2001

Value of the head index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)

D2003 D2004 D2005

Device D number

Value of the tail index K4 K3 K2

(16-bit)

When the high-speed counter HC202 reaching 7700, the state of the output point Y is as below:

Output point Y number Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2

16-bit value OFF ON OFF

Device D number D2000 D2001 D2002

_6 Value of the head index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)

Device D number D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index

K4 K4 K3
(16-bit)

When the high-speed counter HC202 reaching 8000, the state of the output point Y is as below:

Output point Y number Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2

Output state OFF OFF OFF

Device D number D2000 D2001 D2002

Value of the head index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)

Device D number D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index

K4 K4 K3
(16-bit)

6-216
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

When the high-speed counter HC202 reaching 8700, the state of the output point Y is as below:

Output point Y number Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2

Output state OFF OFF ON

Device D number D2000 D2001 D2002

Value of the head index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)

Device D number D2003 D2004 D2005

Value of the tail index

K4 K4 K4
(16-bit)

6_

6-217
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.9 Logic Instructions

6.9.1 List of Logic Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0800 WAND DAND  Logical AND operation

0801 MAND –  Matrix AND operation

0802 WOR DOR  Logical OR operation

0803 MOR –  Matrix OR operation

0804 WXOR DXOR  Logical exclusive OR operation

0805 MXOR –  Matrix exclusive OR operation

0808 WINV DINV  Logical reversed INV operation

0809 LD& DLD& – S1&S2

0810 LD| DLD| – S1|S2

0811 LD^ DLD^ – S1^S2

0812 AND& DAND& – S1&S2

0813 AND| DAND| – S1|S2

_6
0814 AND^ DAND^ – S1^S2

0815 OR& DOR& – S1&S2

0816 OR| DOR| – S1|S2

0817 OR^ DOR^ – S1^S2

6-218
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.9.2 Explanation of Logic Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0800 D WAND P S1，S2，D Logical AND operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

D ： Operation result
6_

Explanation:

1. The logical operator AND takes the binary representations in S1 and S2, and performs the logical AND operation on
each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in D.

2. Only the instruction DAND can use the 32-bit counter.

3. The result in each position is 1 if the first bit is 1 and the second bit is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the logical operator AND takes the data in the 16-bit device Y0 and the 16-bit device Y2, and performs

the logical AND operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in Y4.

6-219
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, the logical operator AND takes the data in the 32-bit device (Y11, Y10) and the 32-bit device (Y21, Y20),

and performs the logical AND operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in (Y41, Y40).

_6
S1
b31 b15 b0
Before the instruction Y11 Y1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
is executed S2 DA ND

Y2 1 Y2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
After the instruction D
is executed
Y4 1 Y4 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

6-220
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0801 MAND P S1，S2，D，n Matrix AND operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
D    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Matrix source 1

S2 ： Matrix source 2

D ： Operation result
6_
n ： Length of the array

Explanation:

1. The operator AND takes the n rows of binary representations in S1 and the n rows of binary representations in S2,
and performs the matrix AND operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in D.

2. The result in each position is 1 if the first bit is 1 and the second bit is 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the operator AND takes the data in the 16-bit devices Y0~Y2 and the data in 16-bit devices Y10~Y12,

and performs the matrix AND operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in the 16-bit

devices Y20~Y22.

6-221
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

S1 b15 b0
Y0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Y1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Y2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
Before the instruction
is executed S2 b15 b0
Y10 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

Y11 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

Y12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

D b15 b0
Y20 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
After the instruction
Y21 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
is executed
Y22 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Additional remark:

1. If S1+n-1, S2+n-1, or D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
_6 code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

3. Explanation of matrix instructions:

 A matrix is composed of more than one 16-bit register. The number of registers in a matrix is the length of the

array n. There are 16×n bits in a matrix, and the matrix operation is performed on one bit at a time.

 The matrix instruction takes the 16×n bits in a matrix as a string of bits, rather than takes them as values. The

matrix operation is performed on one specified bit.

 The matrix instruction mainly processes the one-to-many status or the many-to-many status, such as the

moving, the copying, the comparing, and the searching. It is a handy and important applied instruction.

 When the matrix instruction is executed, users need a 16-bit register to specify a certain bit among the 16n

bits in the matrix for the operation. The 16-bit register is called the pointer, and is specified by users. The

value in the register is within the range between 0 and 16n-1, and corresponds to the bit within the range

between b0 and b16n-1.

6-222
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

 The shift of the specified data, or the rotation of the specified data can be involved in the matrix operation.

Besides, the bit number decreases from the left to the right, as illustrated below.

Left Width: 16 bits Right

Y0 b15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b0

Y1 b31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b16

Length: n
Y2 b47 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b32

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

Mn-1 b16n- 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

 The width of the matrix (C) is 16 bits.

 Pr represents the pointer. When the value in Pr is 15, b15 is specified.

Example: The following matrix is composed of the three 16-bit devices Y0, Y1, and Y2. The data in Y0 is

16#AAAA, the data in Y1 is 16#5555, and the data in Y2 is 16#AAFF.

C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Y0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Y1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Y2

Example: The following matrix is composed of the three 16-bit devices X 0, X 1, and X 2. The data in X 0 is 6_
16#37, the data in X 1 is 16#68, and the data in X 2 is 16#45.

C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 X0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 X1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 X2

6-223
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0802 D WOR P S1，S2，D Logical OR operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

D ： Operation result

_6

Explanation:

1. The logical operator OR takes the binary representations in S1 and S2, and performs the logical inclusive OR
operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in D.

2. Only the instruction DOR can use the 32-bit counter but not the device E.

3. The result in each position is 1 if the first bit is 1, the second bit is 1, or both bits are 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the logical operator OR takes the data in the 16-bit device Y0 and the 16-bit device Y2, and performs

the logical inclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in Y4.

6-224
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b0
S1 Y0 011 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before the instruction
is executed
S2 Y2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

b15 b0
After the instruction
Y4 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
is executed D

Example 2:

When X0.1 is ON, the logical operator OR takes the data in the 32-bit device (Y11, Y10) and the 32-bit device (Y21, Y20),

and performs the logical inclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in (Y41,

Y40).

6_
S1 b31 b15 b0
Before the instruction Y11 Y1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
is executed DO R
S2
Y2 1 Y2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

After the instruction D

is executed Y4 1 Y4 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

6-225
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0803 MOR P S1，S2，D，n Matrix OR operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
D    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Matrix source 1

S2 ： Matrix source 2

D ： Operation result

_6 n ： Length of the array

Explanation:

1. The operator OR takes the n rows of binary representations in S1 and the n rows of binary representations in S2, and
performs the matrix OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in D.

2. The result in each position is 1 if the first bit is 1, the second bit is 1, or both bits are 1. Otherwise, the result is 0.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the operator OR takes the data in the 16-bit devices Y0~Y2 and the data in 16-bit devices Y10~Y12,

and performs the matrix OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in the 16-bit

devices Y20~Y22.

6-226
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

S1 b15 b0
Y0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
After the
Y1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 instruc tion
Y2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 is executed D b15 b0
Before the Y20 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
instruc tion S2 b15 MOR b0
is executed Y10 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Y21 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

Y11 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Y22 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

Y12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

Additional remark:

1. If S1+n-1, S2+n-1, or D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.
6_

6-227
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0804 D WXOR P S1，S2，D Logical exclusive OR operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

D ： Operation result

_6

Explanation:

1. The logical operator XOR takes the binary representations in S1 and S2, and performs the logical exclusive OR
operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in D.

2. Only the instruction DXOR can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The result in each position is 1 if the two bits are different, and 0 if they are the same.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the logical operator XOR takes the data in the 16-bit device Y0 and the 16-bit device Y2, and performs

the exclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in Y4.

6-228
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b0
S1 Y0 011 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Before the instruction
is executed
S2 Y2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

b15 b0
After the i nstruction
Y4 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
is executed D

Example 2:

When X0.1 is ON, the logical operator XOR takes the data in the 32-bit device (Y11, Y10) and the 32-bit device (Y21, Y20),

and performs the logical exclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in (Y41,

Y40).

6_

6-229
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0805 MXOR P S1，S2，D，n Matrix exclusive OR operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
D    
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Matrix source 1

S2 ： Matrix source 2

D ： Operation result

_6 n ： Length of the array

Explanation:

1. The operator XOR takes the n rows of binary representations in S1 and the n rows of binary representations in of S2,
and performs the matrix exclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in

D.

2. The result in each position is 1 if the two bits are different, and 0 if they are the same.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the operator XOR takes the data in the 16-bit devices Y0~Y2 and the data in 16-bit devices Y10~Y12,

and performs the matrix exclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in the

16-bit devices Y20~Y22.

6-230
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

S1 b15 b0
Y0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
After the
Y1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
instruc tion D

Before the Y2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 is executed b15 b0

instruc tion S2 b15 MXO R b0 Y20 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
is executed Y10 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Y21 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Y11 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Y22 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Y12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

Additional remark:

1. If S1+n-1, S2+n-1, or D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200B.

6_

6-231
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0808 D WINV P S， D Logical reversed INV operation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

D ： Operation result

_6 Explanation:

1. Use the data in S to execute the INV instruction. The operation result is stored in D.

2. Only the instruction DINV can use the 32-bit counter but not the device E.

3. W he n a n I N V i n s t r u c t i o n i s e xe c u t e d , r e v e r s e p r o c e s s i n g i s p e r f o r m e d . I f t h e s ta t e i s 0 b e f o r e

t h e I N V i n s t r u c t i o n i s e x e c u t e d , t h e s ta t e w i l l c h a n g e t o 1 a s a r e s u l t o f t h e I N V i n s t r u c t i o n .

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the operator WINV takes data in the 16-bit device Y0 and performs the INV operation on the

corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in the 16-bit device Y4.

6-232
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, the operator DINV takes data in the 32-bit devices Y11~Y10 and performs the INV operation on each

pair of corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in the 32-bit device Y41~Y40.

6_

6-233
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0809~ 0811 D LD＃ S1，S2 Contact type of logical operation LD＃

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

Taking LD& and DLD& for example

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to compare the data in S1 with that in S2. When the comparison result is not 0, the condition of

the instruction is met. When the comparison result is 0, the condition of the instruction is not met.

2. Only the instruction DLD＃can use the 32-bit counter but not the device E.

3. The instruction LD＃can be connected to the mother line directly.

Comparison operation result

API No. 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction
ON OFF

0809 LD& DLD& S1&S2 ≠ 0 S1&S2 = 0

0810 LD| DLD| S1|S2 ≠ 0 S1|S2 = 0

0811 LD^ DLD^ S1^S2 ≠ 0 S1^S2 = 0

4. &: Logical AND operation

5. |: Logical OR operation

6. ^: Logical exclusive OR operation

6-234
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

1. The logical operator AND takes the data in C0 and C1, and performs the logical AND operation on each pair of
corresponding bits. When the operation result is not 0, Y1.0 is ON.

2. The logical operator OR takes the data in D200 and D300, and performs the logical OR operation on each pair of
corresponding bits. When the operation result is not 0 and X1.0 is ON, Y1.1 is ON.

3. The logical operator XOR takes the data in C201 and C200, and performs the logical exclusive OR operation on
each pair of corresponding bits. When the operation result is not 0, or when X1.1 is ON, Y1.2 is ON.

6_

Additional remark:

If S1 or S2 is illegal, the condition of the instruction is not met, SM0 is ON, and the error in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-235
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0812~
D AND＃ S1，S2 Contact type of logical operation AND＃
0814

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

Taking AND& and DAND& for example

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to compare the data in S1 with that in S2. When the comparison result is not 0, the condition of
the instruction is met. When the comparison result is 0, the condition of the instruction is not met.

2. Only the instruction DAND＃can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The instruction AND＃and the contact are connected is series.

Comparison operation result

API No. 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction
ON OFF

0812 AND& DAND& S1&S2 ≠ 0 S1&S2 = 0

0813 AND| DAND| S1|S ≠ 0 S1|S2 = 0

0814 AND^ DAND^ S1^S2 ≠ 0 S1^S = 0

4. &: Logical AND operation

5. |: Logical OR operation

6. ^: Logical exclusive OR operation

6-236
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the logical operator AND takes the data in C0 and C10, and performs the logical AND operation on

each pair of corresponding bits. When the operation result is not 0, Y1.0 is ON.

2. When X0.1 is OFF, the logical operator OR takes the data in D10 and D0, and performs the logical OR operation on

each pair of corresponding bits. When the operation result is not 0, Y1.1 keeps ON.

3. When X0.2 is ON, the logical operator XOR takes the data in the 32-bit register (D200, D201) and the data in the

32-bit register (D100, D101), and performs the logical exclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits.

When the operation result is not 0, or when X0.3 is ON, Y1.2 is ON.

6_

Additional remark:

If S1 or S2 is illegal, the condition of the instruction is not met, SM0 is ON, and the error in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-237
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

0815~
D OR＃ S1，S2 Contact type of logical operation OR＃
0817

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1       
S2       

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Data source 1

S2 ： Data source 2

Taking OR& and DOR& for example

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to compare the data in S1 with that in S2. When the comparison result is not 0, the condition of

the instruction is met. When the comparison result is 0, the condition of the instruction is not met.

2. Only the instruction DOR＃can use the 32-bit counter.

3. The instruction OR＃and the contact are connected in parallel.

Comparison operation result

API No. 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction
ON OFF

0815 OR& DOR& S1&S2 ≠ 0 S1&S2 = 0

0816 OR| DOR| S1|S2 ≠ 0 S1|S2 = 0

0817 OR^ DOR^ S1^S2 ≠ 0 S1^S2 = 0

4. &: Logical AND operation

5. |: Logical OR operation

6. ^: Logical exclusive OR operation

6-238
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

1. When X0.1 is ON, Y0.0 is ON. Besides, when the logical operator AND performs the logical AND operation on each

pair of corresponding bits in C0 and C10 and the operation result is not 0, Y0.0 is ON.

2. When X0.2 and X0.3 are ON, Y0.1 is ON. When the logical operator OR performs the logical OR operation on each

pair of corresponding bits in the 32-bit register (D10, D11) and the 32-bit register (D20, D21) and the operation result

is not 0, Y0.1 is ON. Besides, when the logical operator XOR performs the logical exclusive OR operation on each

pair of corresponding bits in the 32-bit counter HC0 and the 32-bit register (D200, D201) and the operation result is

not 0, Y0.1 is ON.

6_

Additional remark:

If S1 or S2 is illegal, the condition of the instruction is not met, SM0 is ON, and the error in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-239
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.10 Rotation Instructions

6.10.1 List of Rotation Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

0900 ROR DROR  Rotating to the right

0901 RCR DRCR  Rotating to the right with the carry flag

0902 ROL DROL  Rotating to the left

0903 RCL DRCL  Rotating to the left with the carry flag

0904 MBR –  Rotating the matrix bits

_6

6-240
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.10.2 Explanation of Rotation Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

0900 D ROR P D，n Rotating to the right

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D       
n           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Device which is rotated

n ： Number of bits forming a group

6_

Explanation:

1. The values of the bits in the device specified by D are divided into groups (n bits as a group), and these groups are

rotated to the right.

2. Only the instruction DROR can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 16. The operand n used in

the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 32. When n is less than 0, the instruction will not be

executed; when n exceeds the range, it will be seen as the maximum value (32) of the range, and the instruction will

be executed.

4. Generally, the pulse instructions RORP and DRORP are used.

6-241
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the values of the bits in D10 are divided into groups (four bits as a group), and
these groups are rotated to the right. (The value of the bit marked ※ is transmitted to the carry flag SM602.)

b 15 ※ b0
Carry flag
0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

After the rotation is ex ecuted

b 15 b0 Carry flag
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0

Additional remark:

1. If the device exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-242
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0901 D RCR P D，n Rotating to the right with the carry flag

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D       
n           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Device which is rotated

n ： Number of bits forming a group

6_
Explanation:

1. The values of the bits in the device specified by D are divided into groups (n bits as a group), and these groups are

rotated to the right with the carry flag SM602.

2. Only the instruction DRCR can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 16. The operand n used in

the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 32. When n is less than 0, the instruction will not be

executed; when n exceeds the range, it will be seen as the maximum value (32) of the range, and the instruction will

be executed.

4. Generally, the pulse instructions RCRP and DRCRP are used.

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the values of the bits in D10 are divided into groups (four bits as a group), and
these groups are rotated to the right with the carry flag SM602. (The value of the bit marked ※ is transmitted to the carry

flag SM602.)

6-243
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Carry flag
b 15 ※ b0
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

After the rotation is executed

Carry flag b 15 b0
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Additional remark:

1. If the device exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-244
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0902 D ROL P D，n Rotating to the left

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D       
n           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Device which is rotated

n ： Number of bits forming a group

6_
Explanation:

1. The values of the bits in the device specified by D are divided into groups (n bits as a group), and these groups are

rotated to the left.

2. Only the instruction DROL can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 16. The operand n used in

the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 32. When n is less than 0, the instruction will not be

executed; when n exceeds the range, it will be seen as the maximum value (32) of the range, and the instruction will

be executed.

4. Generally, the pulse instructions ROLP and DROLP are used.

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the values of the bits in D10 are divided into groups (four bits as a group), and
these groups are rotated to the left. (The value of the bit marked ※ is transmitted to the carry flag SM602.)

6-245
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Carry flag b 15 ※ b0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

After the rotation is executed

Carry flag b 15 b0
1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Additional remark:

1. If the device exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-246
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0903 D RCL P D，n Rotating to the left with the carry flag

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D       
n           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Device which is rotated

n ： Number of bits forming a group

6_
Explanation:

1. The values of the bits in the device specified by D are divided into groups (n bits as a group), and these groups are

rotated to the left with the carry flag SM602.

2. Only the instruction DRCL can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 16. The operand n used in

the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 32. When n is less than 0, the instruction will not be

executed; when n exceeds the range, it will be seen as the maximum value (32) of the range, and the instruction will

be executed.

4. Generally, the pulse instructions RCLP and DRCLP are used.

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the values of the bits in D10 are divided into groups (four bits as a group), and
these groups are rotated to the left with the carry flag SM602. (The value of the bit marked ※ is transmitted to the carry

flag SM602.)

6-247
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Carry flag ※
b 15 b0
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

After the r otation is ex ec uted

Carry flag
b 15 b0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Additional remark:

1. If the device exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-248
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

0904 MBR P S，D，n Rotating the matrix bits

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D    
n   DWORD      

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:

S ： Matrix source

D ： Operation result

n ： Length of the array

Explanation:

1. The values of the n rows of bits in S are rotated to the right or to the left. When SM616 is OFF, the values of the bits 6_
are rotated to the left. When SM616 is ON, the values of the bits are rotated to the right. The vacancy resulting from

the rotation is filled by the value of the bit rotated last, and the operation result is stored in D. The value of the bit

rotated last not only fills the vacancy, but also is transmitted to the carry flag SM614.

2. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 16. The operand n used in

the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 32. When n is less than 0, the instruction will not be

executed; when n exceeds the range, it will be seen as the maximum value (32) of the range, and the instruction will

be executed.

3. Generally, the pulse instruction MBRP is used.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, SM616 is OFF. The values of the bits in the 16-bit registers D0~D2 are rotated to the left, and the
operation result is stored in the 16-bit registers D20~D22. The value of the bit marked ※ is transmitted to the carry flag

SM614.

6-249
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Before the rotation

S
is executed b15 b0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0
Carry flag
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D1
S M614 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D2
※
After MB R is executed

D
SM616=0 b15 b0
After the rotation 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D20
to the left is executedCarry flag 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D21
S M614 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D22

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, SM616 is ON. The values of the bits in the 16-bit registers D0~D2 are rotated to the right, and the
operation result is stored in the 16-bit registers D20~D22. The value of the bit marked ※ is transmitted to the carry flag
_6 SM614.

6-250
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Before the rotation S Carry flag

is executed b15 ※ b0
D0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 SM614
D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

MBR

SM616=0 D
b15 b0 Carry flag
After the rotation D20 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
to the left is exec uted 0
D21 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
D22 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
SM614

Additional remark:

1. If S+n-1 or D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2003.

2. The flags:

SM614: It is the carry flag for the matrix rotation/shift/output.

SM616: It is the direction flag for the matrix rotation/shift.

6_

6-251
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.11 Timer and Counter Instructions

6.11.1 List of Timer and Counter Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1000 RST DRST – Resetting the contact to OFF or clearing the value in the register.

1001 TMR – – 16-bit timer (Unit: 100ms)

1002 TMRH – – 16-bit timer (Unit: 1ms)

1003 CNT – – 16-bit counter

1004 – DCNT – 32-bit counter (Including the use of high-speed counters)

1005 – DHSCS – Setting high-speed comparison

1006 – DHSCR – Resetting high-speed comparison

1007 – DHSZ – High-speed input zone comparison

1008 – DSPD – Speed detection

1009 PWD – – Pulse Width Detection

– Capturing the high-speed count value in the external input

1010 – DCAP
interrupt

1011 TMRM – – 16-bit timer (Unit: 10ms)

_6

6-252
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.11.2 Explanation of Timer and Counter Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

Resetting the contact or clearing the

1000 D RST D
register

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S        

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

D ： Device which is reset

Explanation: 6_
1. DRST only supports the clearing of the values in the 32-bit HC device and two consecutive 16-bit D devices. For

other devices, use RST instruction to clear their values.

2. When RST instruction is driven, the specified devices will act as follows.

Device State

Bit The coil and contact are set to OFF.

The current timer value and counter value are set to 0. And the coil and contact are set to
T，C
OFF.

Word The 16-bit content value will be cleared to 0.

DWord，HC，Real The 32-bit content value including the floating point number will be cleared to 0.

3. If RST instruction is not executed, the state of the device specified by the instruction will keep unchanged.

4. The instruction supports the direct output.

6-253
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, Y0.5 is set to OFF.

The 32-bit D1 or D0 will be cleared to zero as X0.0 is ON.

_6

6-254
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1001 TMR S1，S2 16-bit timer (100ms)

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Timer number

S2 ： Setting value of the timer

Explanation:

Refer to the explanation of API1002 TMRH instruction for details. 6_

6-255
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1002 TMRH S1，S2 16-bit timer (1ms)

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Timer number

S2 ： Setting value of the timer

Explanation:

1. The T timer specified by TMR instruction takes 100ms as the timing unit. And the T timer specified by TMRH

_6 instruction takes 1ms as the timing unit.

2. The range of the setting values of the timers in TMR and TMRH instructions is 0~32767.

3. If the same T timer is used repeatedly in the program, including being used in the different instructions TMR and

TMRH, the setting value is the one that the value of the timer matches first.

4. The T timer will reset to zero automatically when the conditional contact changes from ON to OFF.

5. As long as users add the letter S in front of the device T, the timer used in the instruction TMR

becomes an accumulative timer. When the conditional contact is OFF, the value of the accumulative timer is not

cleared. When the conditional contact is ON, the timer counts from the current value. The ST accumulative timer

should be used with the instruction RST together to clear the value of the timer.

6. If the same T timer is used repeatedly in the program, it is OFF when one of the conditional contacts is OFF.

7. If the same T timer is used repeatedly as T and ST in the program, T is OFF when one of the conditional contacts is

OFF.

8. When the instruction TMR is executed, the specified timer coil is ON and the timer begins to

count. As the value of the timer matches the setting value, the contact is ON.

6-256
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

9. The timers T0~T411 are defined as general timers. T412~T511 are subroutine timers by default. If the ranges of the

two types of timers need be changed, use the hardware configuration software HWCONFIG for the modification.

10. The general timers will compare the timing values when TMR instructions are scanned. They are applied to the

condition every time the TMR instruction status is scanned.

For the subroutine timers, the system counts the time and compares the timing values after the END instruction is

executed. And so the subroutine timers are applied to the situation in which TMR instruction is executed not in every

scan but the long-lasting timing and comparing are needed.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the setting value 50 is loaded to the timer T0. When the value of T0 matches 50, the contact of T0 is

ON.

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, the setting value 50 is loaded to the timer T0. When the value of T0 is 25 and

X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, T0 counts up from 25 to 50, and the contact of T0 is ON. 6_

Example 3:

When X0.0 is ON, the setting value 1000 is loaded to the timer T5. When the value of T5 is 500 and

X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, T5 counts up from 500 to 1000, and the contact of T5 is ON.

6-257
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 4:

When X0.0 is ON, the setting value 1000 is loaded to the timer T5. When the value of T5 is 500 and

X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, T5 counts up from 500 to 1000, and the contact of T5 is ON.

Additional remark:

When the operand S1 is declared via ISPSoft, the data type TIMER should be selected for the general T timer. If the

accumulative ST timer is used, users need specify the ST device.

_6

6-258
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1003 CNT S1，S2 16-bit counter

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Counter number

S2 ： Setting value of the counter

Explanation:

1. When the instruction CNT is switched from OFF to ON, it indicates that the specified counter coil changes from OFF

to ON and then the value of the counter is increased by 1. When the value of the counter matches the setting value,
6_
the contact of the counter will be ON.

2. When the value of the counter matches the setting value, the state of the contact and value of the counter both

remain unchanged if any counting pulse is input. Use RST to reset the counter for one more counting.

Example:

When SM408 is ON for the first time, the setting value 10 is loaded to the counter C0 and the counter begins counting.

After SM408 is swiched from OFF to ON ten times, the value of C0 is 10 and the contact of C0 is ON. After C0 is ON,

SM408 continues to switch from OFF to ON. But the value of C0 will not be accumulated after it reaches the setting value

of C0.

Additional remark:

When the operand S1 is declared via ISPSoft, the data type COUNTER should be selected.

6-259
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1004 DCNT S1，S2 32-bit counter

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1
S2  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Counter value

S2 ： Setting value of the counter

Explanation:

_6 1. DCNT is the instruction to enable the 32-bit counter within the range between HC0 and HC255.

2. When the operand S1 is declared via ISPSoft, the data type CNT can not be selected and users should specify an

HC device number.

3. For the count-up/count-down counters HC0~HC63, when the conditional contact of the instruction DCNT is

switched from OFF to ON, the counters will count up by increasing the values by 1 when SM621~SM684 are OFF or

count down by decreasing the values by 1 when SM621~SM684 are ON.

4. For the count-up counters HC64~HC199, they will count up by increasing the values by 1 when the conditional

contact of the instruction DCNT is switched from OFF to ON.

5. When the instruction DCNT is OFF, the counter will stop counting. But the original count value will not be cleared.

RST can be used to clear the count value and reset the contact to OFF.

6. Refer to the following pages for details on the high-speed counter HC200~HC255.

6-260
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

NETWORK1

When PLC runs, the value of the counter HC0 is cleared and the counter counts up as SM621 is OFF. At the moment,

SM408 is ON for the first time. So the setting value 10 will be loaded to the counter HC0 and the counter will begin

counting.

NETWORK2

After SM408 is swiched from OFF to ON ten times, the value of the counter HC0 matches the setting value 10 and the

contact of HC0 is ON. After HC0 is ON, the value of the counter will keep increasing because SM408 continues to change

from OFF to ON though the value of HC0 has reached the setting value.

NETWORK3

When HC0 continues to count up and the value reaches the setting value 20, the counter will count down as SM621 is ON

in the program. After SM408 is switched from OFF to ON ten times and the value of HC0 decreases from 10 to 9, the

contact of HC0 will be OFF.

After the contact of HC0 is OFF, the value of HC0 will still continue to decrease since SM408 continues to change from

OFF to ON.

6_

Additional remark:

1. For the setting mode of SM621~SM684, refer to the explanation of the 32-bit counter HC in Chapter 2.

6-261
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Explanation of the high-speed counter:

AS300 high-speed counters can be classified into hardware counter (Up to 200KHz input at most and for differential input

points, up to 4MHz input ) and software counter (up to 10KHz at most).

Hardware counter:

Input X0.

HC No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
#1 #1
HC200 P R
#1
HC201 P D R
#1 #1
HC202 A B R
#2
HC203 -- -- --

HC204 P R

HC205 P D R

HC206 A B R

HC207 -- -- --

HC208 P R

HC209 P D R

_6
HC210 A B R

HC211 -- -- --

HC212 P R

HC213 P D R

HC214 A B R

HC215 -- -- --

HC216 P

HC217 P D

HC218 A B

HC219 -- --

HC220 P

HC221 P D

HC222 A B

HC223 -- --

Note 1: P: single-phase pulse input, D: Direction signal input, A and B: two phase two input, R: Reset signal input.

6-262
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Note 2: ‘--‘ means that the counting mode is reserved and unable to use now. The empty box indicates no function.

Note3: Refer to the SM/SR table for count up/down state selection and the selection of how many times frequency input.

Note 4: The function of R (input resetting) is disabled by default. Refer to SM/SR comparison table on how to use R.

Take HC200 for example. SM291 is switched to ON to start the R function and then the rising edge of X0.12 triggers the

clearing of the value of HC200.

Software counter:

Input X0.

HC No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

HC232 P

HC233 P D

HC234 A B
#5 #5
HC235 UP DN

HC236 P

HC237 P D

HC238 A B

HC239 UP DN
6_
HC240 P

HC241 UP DN

HC242 P

HC243 UP DN

HC244 P

HC245 UP DN

HC246 P

HC247 UP DN

HC248 P

HC249 UP DN

HC250 P

HC251 UP DN

HC252 P

HC253 P

6-263
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Note 5: UP: Single phase count-up input (Same as CW), DN: Single phase count-down input (Same as CCW)

The high-speed counters within the range of HC200~HC255, which has not been listed in the table are the reserved

devices inside PLC. They are not recommended to the program designer for use.

The high-speed counter, SM/SR and function are corresponded as shown in the following table.

Count-up/count-down function Starting the Reversing the Counting mode

Reset function direction

HC No. SM No. Attribute Explanation SM No. SM No. SR No.

HC200 SM300 R/W Show/ set SM281

HC201 SM301 R Show SM291 （Applicable for SR190

HC202 SM302 R Show HC201）

HC204 SM304 R/W Show/ set SM282

HC205 SM305 R Show SM292 （Applicable for SR191

HC206 SM306 R Show HC205）

HC208 SM308 R/W Show/ set SM283

HC209 SM309 R Show SM293 （Applicable for SR192

HC210 SM310 R Show HC209）

HC212 SM312 R/W Show/ set SM284

_6
HC213 SM313 R Show SM294 （Applicable for SR193

HC214 SM314 R Show HC213）

HC216 SM316 R/W Show/ set SM285

HC217 SM317 R Show -- （Applicable for SR194

HC218 SM318 R Show HC217）

HC220 SM320 R/W Show/ set SM286

HC221 SM321 R Show -- （Applicable for SR195

HC222 SM322 R Show HC221）

HC232 SM332 R/W Show/ set

SM287
HC233 SM333 R Show
-- （Applicable for SR196
HC234 SM334 R Show
HC233）
HC235 SM335 R Show

HC236 SM336 R/W Show/ set -- SM288 SR197

6-264
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Count-up/count-down function Starting the Reversing the Counting mode

Reset function direction

HC No. SM No. Attribute Explanation SM No. SM No. SR No.

HC237 SM337 R Show （Applicable for

HC237）
HC238 SM338 R Show

HC239 SM339 R Show

HC240 SM340 R/W Show/ set

HC241 SM341 R Show

Supports one time
HC242 SM342 R/W Show/ set frequency and rising
-- --
HC243 SM343 R Show edge –triggered

counting only
HC244 SM344 R/W Show/ set

HC245 SM345 R Show

Supports one time

frequency and rising

HC246 SM346 R/W Show/ set -- --
edge –triggered

counting only

HC247 SM347 R Show

HC248 SM348 R/W Show/ set

6_
HC249 SM349 R Show Supports one time

frequency and rising

HC250 SM350 R/W Show/ set -- --
edge –triggered
HC251 SM351 R Show
counting only
HC252 SM352 R/W Show/ set

HC253 SM353 R Show

Note 1: All SM special flags in the above table are OFF by default.

Note 2: When SM under “Count-up/count-down function” is OFF, it indicates that the corresponding counter
counts up or displays it is counting up. If SM is ON, it indicates that the corresponding counter counts
down or displays it is counting down.

Note 3: The “R” under Attribute means “Read only” and “W” means “Set”.

Note 4: The SR special registers under “Counting mode” are of 1 time frequency input by default. The input
value 2 indicates double frequency and 4 is the 4 times frequency. 4 times frequency is only applicable
for the counter of A/B 2-phase input. If the value is not 1, 2 and 4 in SR, PLC will run with the 1 time
frequency.

6-265
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Note 5: All single-phase counters above counts by using 1 time frequency and the rising-edge counting mode
changing the input point from OFF to ON.

Note 6: Reversing the direction is applicable for the counters of “P” (Pulse input) and “D” (Direction). When
SM is ON, the counting direction (up/down) will be reversed. For example, when the preset direction
input is OFF, the counter counts up. When SM is set to ON, the counter will change to count down.

_6

6-266
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1005 D HSCS S1，S2，D Setting high-speed comparison

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2   
D   
DWORD 

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Counter number

S2 ： Comparative value

D ： Comparison result

Explanation:
6_

1. The instruction should be used with the high-speed counter of number HC200 and above together. If the high-speed

counter specified by S1 changes by increasing or decreasing by 1 in the value, DHSCS instruction will make the

comparison immediately. When the current value of the high-speed counter is equal to the comparative value

specified by S2, the device specified by D will change to ON. After that, the device specified by D remains ON even if

the comparison result is that the current value and the comparative value become not equal..

2. If the device specified by D is Y0.0~Y0.15, the comparison result that the value of S2 is equal to the current value of

the high-speed counter will be output to the output terminals Y0.0~Y0.15. And other Y devices will be affected by the

scan cycle. But all devices are updated immediately and not affected by the scan cycle.

3. The D operand can also specify an interrupt device I within the range: I2, =00~67.

4. The high-speed counters can be classified into the software counter and hardware counter. The available high-speed

comparators and interrupt device numbers are listed in the following table.

6-267
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Type Range of counter numbers High-speed comparator High-speed interrupt

number device number

HC200 ~ HC203 Comparator: I200~I203

HCC00~HCC03

HC204 ~ HC207 Comparator: I210~I213

HCC04~HCC07

HC208 ~ HC211 Comparator: I220~I223

HCC08~HCC11
Hardware counter
HC212 ~ HC215 Comparator: I230~I233

HCC12~HCC15

HC216 ~ HC219 Comparator: I240~I243

HCC16~HCC19

HC220 ~ HC223 Comparator: I250~I253

HCC20~HC223

Software counter HC232 ~ HC253 - I260~I267

5. Explanation of the hardware comparators for DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ instructions:

 Every one group of hardware counters share 4 high-speed comparators. One DHSCS or DHSCR instruction
occupies 1 high-speed comparator. One DHSZ instruction uses 2 high-speed comparators.

_6
 During the program editing, every group of hardware counters can use 4 high-speed comparators at most for
DHSCS, DHSCR or DHSZ instructions. Otherwise, the syntax error will occur.

6. Explanation of the software comparators for DHSCS and DHSCR instructions:

 There are 8 software comparators for comparison of the Set or Reset function. Every one DHSCS or DHSCR
instruction uses one high-speed comparator.

 The software comparators compare the interrupt by assigning a corresponding software comparator
according to the interrupt numbers. It is noted that the same interrupt number can not be used repeatedly.

 For DHSCS or DHSCR instructions, the Set or Reset comparators for them can not exceed 8 pieces in the
program. Otherwise, the syntax error will occur.

7. Explanation of the software comparators for DHSZ instruction:

 There are 8 software comparators for the zone comparison. One DHSZ instruction uses one comparator.

 DHSZ instruction can use maximum 8 software comparators. Otherwise, the syntax error will occur if the used
software comparators are more than 8 pieces.

6-268
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 1:

When M0 is ON, DHSCS instruction is executed.

When the current value of HC200 changes from 99 to 100 or from 101 to 100, Y0.10 is ON, which will output to the

external output terminal Y0.10 in real time and it will remain ON.

Example 2:

The Y output of DHSCS instruction is different from the general Y output.

1. When M0 is ON, DHSCS instruction is executed. When the current value of HC200 changes from 99 to 100 or from

101 to 100, Y0.10 will output its state to the external output terminal immediately, which is irrelevant to the program
6_
scan time.

2. When the current value of HC200 changes from 99 to100, the contact of HC200 is ON immediately. But when the
execution of SET Y0.11 is reached, Y0.11 will still be affected by the scan time and will output its state after END is

passed .

6-269
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 3:

The interrupt in hardware high-speed comparsion:

When the current value of HC200 changes from 99 to100 or 101 to100, the program jumps to the interrup pointer for

execution of the interrupt program and Y0.10 is ON.

Main program:

I200 interrupt program:

_6

6-270
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1006 D HSCR S1，S2，D Resetting high-speed input comparison

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2   
D   
DWORD  

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Counter number

S2 ： Comparative value

D ： Comparison result

Explanation:

1. The instruction should be used with the high-speed counter of number HC200 and above together. If the high-speed 6_
counter specified by S1 changes by increasing or decreasing the value by 1, DHSCR instruction will make the

comparison immediately. When the current value of the high-speed counter is equal to the comparative value
specified by S2, the device specified by D will change to OFF. After that, the device specified by D remains OFF even

if the comparison result is that the current value and the comparative value become not equal.

2. If the device specified by D is Y0.0~Y0.15, the comparison result that the comparative value of S2 is equal to the

current value of the counter will be output to the external output terminals Y0.0~Y0.15. And other Y devices will be

affected by the scan cycle. But all devices are updated immediately and not affected by the scan cycle.

3. D operand can also specify the HC device to reset, which is only limited to the condition in which the high-speed

counter number is the same as that of S1.

4. Refer to DHSCS instruction for more information.

Example 1:

1. When M0 is ON and HC200 changes its current value from 99 to 100 or from 101 to 100, Y0.10 will be reset to OFF.

2. When HC200 changes its current value from 199 to 200, the contact of HC200 is ON and Y0.11 is ON. But the

6-271
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

program scan time output will be delayed.

Example 2:

For HC200 specified as the hardware high-speed counter of the same number, the contact of HC200 will be reset to OFF

when HC200 changes its current value from 999 to 1000 or from 1001 to 1000.

_6

1 00 0

2 00

not affec ted b y the s can ti me

HC2 00

affected by the s can ti me

6-272
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1007 D HSZ S1，S2，S3，D High-speed input zone comparison

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2   
S3   
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  
S3  
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Counter number
Lower bound of the comparison
S2 ：
zone
Upper bound of the comparison
S3 ：
zone
D ：
Comparison result (3 consecutive 6_
devices)
Explanation:

1. The instruction should be used with the high-speed counter of number HC200 and above together. The low bound of

S2 must be less than the upper bound of S3. If the zone limit values are not set properly, PLC will make the

adjustment of them automatically.

2. If S1 specifies a software counter and the specified counter changes by increasing or decreasing by 1 in the value,

DHSZ instruction will make the comparison right away. The comparison condition and output state are shown below.

Comparison condition D+0 state D+1 state D+2 state

The count value of S1 < the lower bound

ON OFF OFF
specified by S2

The lower bound specified by S2 <= the count

OFF ON OFF
value of S1 < the upper bound specified by S3

The count value of S1 >= the upper bound

OFF OFF ON
specified by S3

6-273
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Note: The lower bound specified by S2 must be less than the upper bound specified by S3. If the zone bound is set

incorrectly, PLC will make the adjustment automatically.

3. If S1 specifies a hardware counter and the value of the specified counter reaches the lower bound specified by S2 or

the upper bound specified by S3, DHSZ instruction will make the comparison immediately according to the count

direction (up/down). And the comparison condition and output state are shown in the following table

Count direction Comparison condition D+0 state D+1 state D+2 state

The count value of S1 == the lower

OFF ON OFF
bound specified by S2
Count up
The count value of S1 == the
OFF OFF ON
upper bound specified by S3

The count value of S1 == the lower

ON OFF OFF
bound specified by S2
Count down
The count value of S1 == the
OFF ON OFF
upper bound specified by S3

4. If the device specified by D is Y0.0~Y0.15, the comparison result will be output to the external output terminals

Y0.0~Y0.15. And other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. But all devices are updated immediately and not

affected by the scan cycle.

5. Refer to DHSCS instruction for other relevant information on the high-speed zone comparison.
_6
Example:

1. When D is specified as Y0.10, Y0.11~Y0.12 will be occupied automatically.

2. When DHSZ is executed, the instruction compares the current value in HC200 with the

upper/lower bound (1500/2000) of the comparison zone, and one of Y0.10~Y0.12 will be ON according to the

comparison result.

3. When the current value in HC200 <1500, Y0.10 is ON. When 1500<= the current value in HC200<2000, Y0.11 is ON.

When the current value in HC200>=2000, Y0.12 is ON.

6-274
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1008 D SPD S1，S2，D Speed detection

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2    
D DWORD 

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  
D  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Counter value

S2 ： Setting value of the cycle time

D ： Detected speed value

Explanation:

1. When executing this speed detection instruciton, S1 has to be used with the instruction DCNT to enable the high 6_
speed counter with the counter number over HC200 (including HC200).

2. S2 is the setting value of the cycle time with the unit of millisecond (ms). Setting range is between 10~1000. When the

value is out of range, the system will execute it as the minimum value or the maximum value and the PLC will not

send error messages.

3. When the set value in S2 is reached, this instruction will store the number of pulses in the D apporinted device. That is

why the PLC will not be affected by the PLC scanning.

4. This instruction has no limitation on the editing times, but it only allows 8 sets of speed detection instructions to run
th
simultaneously. The 9 set of the speed detection instruction or later ones will be ignored and no error messages will

be sent. When executing this instruction, the set parameters of the operand will be recorded. Thus during the

execution of this instruciton, editing on the parameters is not allowed.

Example:

Where there is an input pulse signal in X0.0, DSPD instruction can be used for the speed detection. When M0 is ON,

DSPD will have the number of pulses counted by HC200 shown in D0 every 500ms.

6-275
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

In the following example, the value in D0 is 7500 and the actual pulse input frequency of X0.0 is 15kHz (7500/500ms).

_6

6-276
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1009 PWD S1，S2，D Pulse Width Detection

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2    
D1 
D2   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  
D1  
D2 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Number of the input point

S2 ： Unit of measurement
Pulse width detection time (32-bit
D1 ：
value)
D2 ： Updated flag 6_
Explanation:

1. S1 supports the following 8 inputs, X0.0/X0.1/X0.2/X0.3/X0.4/X0.6/X0.8/X0.10. But S1 cannot share the same inputs

with the high speed counter.

2. S2 is the unit of measurement. The instruction will not be executed if the setting value of S2 is not the one among the

codes in the following table.

6-277
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

S2 code Unit of Range of detection Applicable frequency Remark

measurement range

0 1us 1Hz ~ 10kHz

Duty-on
1 1ms 0.02Hz ~ 100Hz

Not supported by X0.1

2 10ns 10Hz ~ 1MHz
and X0.3.

4 1us 1Hz ~ 10kHz

Cycle time

5 1ms 0.02Hz ~ 100Hz

Other values PWD will not be executed.

3. D1 is used for storing the pulse width detection time (32-bit value) and the detection range is 0~100,000,000. If the

vaule is over the maximum value, it will be seen as the maximum value. If the vaule is 0, that means during the

execution of this instruction, there is no input switched from ON to OFF.

4. D2 is the updated flag. Whenever the detection of the S1 input is completed and the instruciton is scanned, the

updated flag will be switched to ON for one scan cycle time. Users can check if the detection value has been updated

to the most recent value using the updated flag. When the instruciton is executed for the first time, the updated flag

will be reset to OFF as well.

_6 5. When the value in S2 is among 0, 1 and 2, refer to the timing diagram below for the procedures performed such as

storing detection values and updating flags during the execution of the instruction. Time to start the timer is when the

S1 input is switched from OFF to ON as it is shown in the position  of the following diagram. Time to store the

detection time is when the S1 input is switched from ON to OFF as shown in the position  of the following diagram.

enable

PWD disable    disable

S1
  

D1 0 100 101 100

D2
Figure 1 Detection mode when the value in S2 is 0, 1 or 2
6. When the value in S2 is 4, or 5, refer to the timing diagram below for the procedures performed such as storing

detection values and updating flags during the execution of the instruction. Time to start the timer is when the S1 input

6-278
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

is switched from OFF to ON as it is shown in the position  of the following diagram. Time to store the detection time

is when the S1 input is switched from OFF to ON as shown in the position  of the following diagram.

enable

PWD disable    disable

S1
 

D1 0 100 101

D2
Figure 2 Detection mode when the value in S2 is 4 or 5
7. This instruction has no limitation on the editing times, but it only allows 8 sets of pulse width detection instructions to
th
run simultaneously. The 9 set of the pulse width detection instruction or later ones will be invalid and no error

messages will be sent. When executing this instruction, the set parameters of the operand will be recorded. Thus

during the execution of this instruciton, editing on the parameters is not allowed.

8. Before executing this instruction, please check the input hardware response time and the pulse time set in

HWCONFIG. For example, when the value in the S2 is set to 0 or 2, that means the unit of measurement is

microsecond (μs). And the S1 input value should be set to 0 to disable the Input Point Filter Time in HWCONFIG. 6_
Example:

There is a pulse signal of 10kHz in the input X0.0. When M0 is ON, the instruction PWD can detect the input signal of

the X0.0 and have the pulse width shown in D10/D11 (32-bit data), the time unit is set to 0 and the width detected

from D10 is 50µs.

6-279
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Capturing the high-speed count value in the
1010 D CAP S1，S2，D
external input interrupt

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ - AS

Symbol:
Number of an external interrupt
S1 ：
input point
S2 ： High-speed counter number
Register for storing the captured
D ：
value
Explanation:

_6 1. Only the 16 input points X0.0~X0.15 of PLC can be used in S1. They are used with the external interrupt service

program to start the function. It is to be noted that S1 should not share the same input point with the high-speed

counter.

2. The high-speed counter HC device is selected in S2. The HC device has to be used with the DCNT instruction to start

the counting function.

3. The captured value of the high-speed counter is stored in (32-bit) D when the interrupt takes place. Time to store data

is when the interrupt occurs and not affected by the PLC program scan.

4. The procedure of the instruction operation is shown below: (Suppose that the input interrupt is triggered by the falling

edge.)

  When the execution of the instruction starts, the value in D will not change and users can enter the default

value.

  When the interrupt in S1 occurs, the value of the counter specified by S2 is captured immediately and stored in D.

6-280
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

enable

DCAP disable disable

S2

S1
  

D -- 1000 2000 500

5. The instruction can start DCAP instructions for four different input points at most. If one input point is set as the

external interrupt triggered by the rising edge and falling edge, the time to capture the value is when the input is

triggered by the rising edge and by falling edge respectively and the count value is stored in the device specified by D.

When two instructions specify the same interrupt input point, the one which is started first will use the interrupt input

point first.

6. The HC device number is set in S2. The high-speed counters within the range of HC200~HC255 are recommended.
For details on the counters, refer to the explanation of API1004 DCNT instruction.

Example:

6_

6-281
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

External interrupt is triggered by the rising edge in X0.7.

External interrupt is triggered by the falling edge in X0.7.

_6

Note:

1. When M0 is ON, the DCAP instruction is enabled. When an external interrupt occurs in X0.7, the value in HC200
is captured and stored to (32-bit) D0.

2. When the external input interrupt is triggered by the rising edge once, E0 is modified to 0 through setting D100,
the count value in D0 is stored to D10 through modifying E0 and the value in D100 is 0+2.

6-282
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

3. When the external input interrupt is triggered by the falling edge once, E0 is modified to 2 through setting D100,
the count value (10+E0=12) in D0 is stored to D12 through modifying E0 and the value in D100 is 0+2. When the

value in D100 is 20, D100 is cleared to 0.

4. If the external interrupt is triggered by the rising edge and falling edge five times respectively, the value capturing
will be carried out 10 times and the captured values will be stored in D10, D12…D28.

st
The 1 captured value= D10

nd
The 2 captured value= D12

th
The 10 captured value=D28

th
The 11 captured value=D10

6_

6-283
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1011 TMRM S1，S2 16-bit timer (10ms)

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Timer number

S2 ： Setting value of the timer

Explanation:

The instruction takes 10ms as the unit.

_6 Refer to the explanation of API1002 TMRH instruction for details.

6-284
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6.12 Shift Instructions

6.12.1 The List of Shift Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1100 SFTR –  Shifting the states of the devices to the right

1101 SFTL –  Shifting the states of the devices to the left

1102 WSFR –  Shifting the data in the word devices to the right

1103 WSFL –  Shifting the data in the word devices to the left

1104 SFWR –  Shifting the data and writing it into the word device

1105 SFRD –  Shifting the data and reading it from the word device

1106 SFPO –  Reading the latest data from the data list

1107 SFDEL –  Deleting the data from the data list

1108 SFINS –  Inserting the data into the data list

1109 MBS –  Shifting the matrix bits

– Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit registers by n bits to the
1110 SFR 
right

1111 SFL –  Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit registers by n bits to the left
6_
1112 BSFR –  Shifting the states of the n bit devices by one bit to the right

1113 BSFL –  Shifting the states of the n bit devices by one bit to the left

1114 NSFR –  Shifting n registers to the right

1115 NSFL –  Shifting n registers to the left

6-285
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.12.2 Explanation of Shift Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the states of the devices to

1100 SFTR P S，D，n1，n2
the right

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S     
D    
n1      
n2      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

S 
D 
n1   
n2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS －

Symbol:
Initial device in which the value is
S ：
shifted
Initial device in which the value is
D ：
_6 shifted
n1 ： Length of the data which is shifted

n2 ： Number of bits forming a group

Explanation:

1. The states of the n1 bit devices starting from D are divided into groups (n2 bits as a group), and these groups are

shifted to the right. The states of the n2 bit devices starting from S are shifted to the devices starting from D to fill the

vacancy.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction SFTRP is used.

3. The operand n1 should be within the range between 1 and 1024. The operand n2 should be within the range
between 1 and n1.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the states of the sixteen bit devices starting from M0 to M15 are divided

into groups (four bits as a group), and these groups are shifted to the right.

2. The shift of the states of the bit devices to the right during a scan is illustrated as follows.

6-286
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

 M3~M0 → Being carried

 M7~M4 → M3~M0

 M11~M8 → M7~M4

 M15~M12 → M11~M8

 X0.3~X0.0 → M15~M12

F our bits as a group ar e shifted to the r ight.

X 0.3 X 0.2 X 0.1 X 0.0

5
M1 5 M1 4 M1 3 M1 2 M11 M1 0 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

4 3 2 1

6_
Example 2:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the states of the sixteen bit devices starting from M0 to M15 are divided

into groups (five bits as a group), and these groups are shifted to the right.

2. The shift of the states of the bit devices to the right during a scan is illustrated as follows.

 M0 → Being carried

 M5 → M0

 M10~M6 → M5~M1

 M15~M11 → M10~M6

 X0.4~X0.0 → M15~M11

6-287
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

F ive bits as a group is s hifted to the right.

X 0.4 X 0.3 X 0.2 X 0.1 X 0.0
5
M1 5 M1 4 M1 3 M1 2 M11 M1 0 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

4 3 2 1

Additional remark:

1. If S+n2-1 or D+n1-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2003.

2. If n1 is less than 1, or if n1 is larger than 1024, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#200B.

3. If n2 is less than 1, or if n2 is larger than n1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

_6

6-288
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

1101 SFTL P S，D，n1，n2 Shifting the states of the devices to the left

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S     
D    
n1      
n2      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 
n1   
n2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device in which the value is shifted

D ： Initial device in which the value is shifted

n1 ： Length of the data which is shifted

n2 ： Number of bits forming a group 6_

Explanation:

1. The states of the n1 bit devices starting from D are divided into groups (n2 bits as a group), and these groups are

shifted to the left. The states of the n2 bit devices starting from S are shifted to the devices starting from D to fill the

vacancy.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction SFTLP is used.

3. The operand n1 should be within the range between 1 and 1024. The operand n2 should be within the range

between 1 and n1.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the states of the sixteen bit devices starting from M0 to M15 are divided

into groups (four bits as a group), and these groups are shifted to the left.

2. The shift of the states of the bit devices to the left during a scan is illustrated as follows.

6-289
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

 M15~M12 → Being carried

 M11~M8 → M15~M12

 M7~M4 → M11~M8

 M3~M0 → M7~M4

 X0.3~X0.0 → M3~M0

F our bits as a group ar e shifted to the left

X 0.3 X 0.2 X 0.1 X 0.0

5
Being c arri ed M1 5 M1 4 M1 3 M1 2 M11 M1 0 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

1 2 3 4
_6
Example 2:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the states of the sixteen bit devices starting from M0 to M15 are divided

into groups (five bits as a group), and these groups are shifted to the left.

2. The shift of the states of the bit devices to the left during a scan is illustrated as follows.

 M15 → Being carried

 M10 → M15

 M9~M5 → M14~M10

 M4~M0 → M9~M5

 X0.4~X0.0 → M4~M0

6-290
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

F ive bits as a group ar e shifted to the left.

X 0.4 X 0.3 X 0.2 X 0.1 X 0.0
5
Being c arri ed M1 5 M1 4 M1 3 M1 2 M11 M1 0 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

1 2 3 4

Additional remark:

1. If S+n2-1 or D+n1-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2003.

2. If n1 is less than 1, or if n1 is larger than 1024, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#200B.

3. If n2 is less than 1, or if n2 is larger than n1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

6_

6-291
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the data in the word devices to the
1102 WSFR P S，D，n1，n2
right

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D    
n1      
n2      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n1   
n2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:
Initial device in which the value is
S ：
shifted
Initial device in which the value is
D ：
shifted
n1 ： Length of the data which is shifted

_6 n2 ： Number of bits forming a group

Explanation:

1. The data in the n1 word devices starting from D is divided into groups (n2 words as a group), and these groups are

shifted to the right. The data in the n2 word devices starting from S are shifted to the devices starting from D to fill the

vacancy.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction WSFRP is used.

3. The operand n1 should be within the range between 1 and 512. The operand n2 should be within the range between

1 and n1.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in the sixteen word devices starting from D20 to D35 is divided

into groups (four words as a group), and these groups are shifted to the right.

2. The shift of the data in the word devices to the right during a scan is illustrated as follows.

6-292
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

 D23~D20 → Being carried

 D27~D24 → D23~D20

 D31~D28 → D27~D24

 D35~D32 → D31~D28

 D13~D10 → D35~D32

F our r egi ster s as a group are shifted to the r ight.

D1 3 D1 2 D11 D1 0

5
D3 5 D3 4 D3 3 D3 2 D3 1 D3 0 D2 9 D2 8 D2 7 D2 6 D2 5 D2 4 D2 3 D2 2 D2 1 D2 0 Being c arri ed

4 3 2 1

6_
Example 2:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in the sixteen word devices starting from D20 to D35 is divided

into groups (five words as a group), and these groups are shifted to the right.

2. The shift of the data in the word devices to the right during a scan is illustrated as follows.

 D20 → Being carried

 D25 → D20

 D30~D26 → D25~D21

 D35~D31 → D30~D26

 D14~D10 → D35~D31

6-293
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

F ive r egi sters as a group ar e shifter to the right.

D1 4 D1 3 D1 2 D11 D1 0

5
D3 5 D3 4 D3 3 D3 2 D3 1 D3 0 D2 9 D2 8 D2 7 D2 6 D2 5 D2 4 D2 3 D2 2 D2 1 D2 0 Being c arri ed

4 3 2 1

Additional remark:

1. If S+n2-1 or D+n1-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0
is 16#2003.

2. If n1 is less than 1, or if n1 is larger than 512, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

3. If n2 is less than 1, or if n2 is larger than n1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.
_6

6-294
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the data in the word devices to the
1103 WSFL P S，D，n1，n2
left

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D    
n1      
n2      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n1   
n2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:
Initial device in which the value is
S ：
shifted
Initial device in which the value is
D ：
shifted
n1 ： Length of the data which is shifted

n2 ： Number of bits forming a group 6_

Explanation:

1. The data in the n1 word devices starting from D is divided into groups (n2 words as a group), and these groups are

shifted to the left. The data in the n2 word devices starting from S are shifted to the devices starting from D to fill the

vacancy.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction WSFLP is used.

3. The operand n1 should be within the range between 1 and 512. The operand n2 should be within the range between

1 and n1.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in the sixteen word devices starting from D20 to D35 is divided

into groups (four words as a group), and these groups are shifted to the left.

2. The shift of the data in the word devices to the left during a scan is illustrated as follows.

6-295
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

 D35~D32 → Being carried

 D31~D28 → D35~D32

 D27~D24 → D31~D28

 D23~D20 → D27~D24

 D13~D10 → D23~D20

F our r egi ster s as a group ar e shifted to the l eft.

D1 3 D1 2 D11 D1 0

5
Being carri ed D3 5 D3 4 D3 3 D3 2 D3 1 D3 0 D2 9 D2 8 D2 7 D2 6 D2 5 D2 4 D2 3 D2 2 D2 1 D2 0

1 2 3 4

_6
Example 2:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in the sixteen word devices starting from D20 to D35 is divided

into groups (five words as a group), and these groups are shifted to the left.

2. The shift of the data in the word devices to the left during a scan is illustrated as follows.

 D35 → Being carried

 D30 → D35

 D29~D25 → D34~D30

 D24~D20 → D29~D25

 D14~D10 → D24~D20

6-296
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

F ive r egi sters as a group ar e shifted to the left.

D1 4 D1 3 D1 2 D11 D1 0

5
Being c arri ed D3 5 D3 4 D3 3 D3 2 D3 1 D3 0 D2 9 D2 8 D2 7 D2 6 D2 5 D2 4 D2 3 D2 2 D2 1 D2 0

1 2 3 4

Additional remark:

1. If S+n2-1 or D+n1-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2003.

2. If n1 is less than 1, or if n1 is larger than 512, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

3. If n2 is less than 1, or if n2 is larger than n1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

6_

6-297
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the data and writing it into the word
1104 SFWR P S，D，n
device

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S          
D    
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Device in which the data is shifted

D ： Initial device

n ： Data length

Explanation:

_6 1. The data in the n word devices starting from the device specified by D is defined as a first in, first out data type, and

the device specified by D is taken as a pointer. When the instruction is executed, the value of the pointer increases

by one, and the data in the device specified by S is written into the device specified by the pointer. When the value

of the pointer is larger than or equal to n-1, the instruction does not process the writing of the data, and the carry flag

SM602 is ON.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction SFWRP is used.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 2 and 512.

Example:

1. The value of the pointer D0 is cleared to 0 first. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in D20 is written

into D1, and the value in D0 becomes 1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON again, the data in D20 is written to

D2, and the value in D0 becomes 2.

2. The data in the word device is shifted and written in the following way.

 The data in D20 is written into D1.

 The value in D0 becomes 1.

6-298
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

n=10
Sourc e
D20 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Pointer
D0=3 2 1

Additional remark:

1. If the value in D is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed. SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

3. If n is less than 2, or if n is larger than 512, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B. 6_
4. The instruction SFWR can be used with the instruction SFRD to write and read the data.

6-299
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the data and reading it from the
1105 SFRD P S，D，n
word device

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S     
D    
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device

D ： Device in which the data is shifted

n ： Data length

Explanation:

_6 1. The data in the n word devices starting from the device specified by S is defined as a first in, first out data type, and

the device specified by S is taken as a pointer. When the instruction is executed, the value in the device specified by

S decreases by one, the data in the device specified by S+1 is written into the device specified by D, the data in the

devices specified by S+n-1~S+2 is shifted to the right, and the data in the device specified by S+n-1 is unchanged.

When the value in the device specified by S is equal to 0, the instruction does not process the reading of the data,

and the zero flag SM600 is ON.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction SFRDP is used.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 2 and 512.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data in D21 is written into D0, the data in D29~D22 is shifted to the right,

the data in D29 is unchanged, and the value in D20 decreases by one.

2. The data in the word device is shifted and read in the following way.

 The data in D21 is read and shifted to D0.

 The data in D29~D22 is shifted to the right.

6-300
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

 The value in D20 decreases by one.

n=10

D0 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20
Pointer

T he data is read.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

3. If n is less than 2, or if n is larger than 512, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200B.

4. The instruction SFWR can be used with the instruction SFRD to write and read the data.
6_

6-301
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1106 SFPO P S，D Reading the latest data from the data list

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S    
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device

D ： Device in which the data is stored

Explanation:

1. The device specified by S is taken as a pointer. When the instruction is executed, the data in the device specified by
_6 the value of the pointer is written into the device specified by D and cleared to 0, and the value in the device

specified by S decreases by one. When the value in the device specified by S is equal to 0, the instruction does not

process the reading of the data, and the zero flag SM600 is ON.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction SFPOP is used.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in the device specified by the value in D0 is written into D10. After the data is shifted, the data

in the device specified by the value in D0 is cleared to 0, and the value in D0 increases by one.

6-302
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

D S
D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
1000 7
Pointer
T he data is read.

D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
1000 0 6
Pointer

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S+(The value in S) exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#2003.

6_

6-303
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1107 SFDEL P S，D，n Deleting the data from the data list

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S    
D      
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device

D ： Device in which the data is stored

n ： Device in which the data is deleted

_6 Explanation:

1. The value in the device specified by S indicates the length of the data, and the data is in the devices specified by

S+1~S+(The value in S). When the instruction is executed, the data in the device specified by S+n is stored in D
and deleted, the data in the devices specified by S+n+1~S+(The value in S) is shifted to the right, the data in the

device specified by S+(The value in S) is cleared to 0, and the value in the device specified by S decreases by one.

When the value in the device specified by S is equal to 0, the instruction does not process the deleting of the data,

and the zero flag SM600 is ON.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction SFDELP is used.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 32767.

Example:

Suppose the value in D0 is 9, and n is 4. When X0.0 is ON, the data in D4 is stored in D20. After the data in D4 is deleted,

the data in D5~D9 is shifted to the right, and the value in D0 decreases by one.

6-304
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

S
D n=4
D20 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
4712 857 123 100 111 22 48 5 799 9
T he length of the data
T he data is deleted.

D20 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
22 0 4712 857 123 100 111 48 5 799 8
T he length of the data

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S+n exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If S+(The value in S) exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#2003.
6_
4. If n is larger than the value in S, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

5. If n is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6-305
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1108 SFINS P S，D，n Inserting the data into the data list

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S    
D          
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device

D ： Data which is inserted

n ： Device into which the data is inserted

Explanation:

_6 1. The value in the device specified by S indicates the length of the data, and the data is in the devices specified by

S+1~S+(The value in S). When the instruction is executed, the data in D is inserted into S+n, the original data in the

devices specified by S+n~S+(The value in S) is shifted to the left, and the value in the device specified by S
increases by one. When the value in the device specified by S is equal to 32767, the instruction does not process

the writing of the data, the value in the device specified by S does not increase, and the carry flag SM602 is ON.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction SFINSP is used.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 32767.

Example:

Suppose the value in D0 is 8, and n is 4. When X0.0 is ON, the data in D200 is inserted into D4, the original data in D4~D8

is shifted to D5~D9, and the value in D0 increases by one.

6-306
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

D n=4 S
D200 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
22 4712 857 123 100 111 48 5 799 8
T he length of the data
T he data is inserted.

D200 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
22 4712 857 123 100 111 22 48 5 799 9
T he length of the data

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S+n exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003

3. If S+(The value in S)+1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If n is larger than the value in S, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

5. If n is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6_

6-307
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1109 MBS P S，D，n Shifting the matrix bits

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D    
n         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Matrix source

D ： Operation result

n ： Length of the array

Explanation:

_6 1. The values of the n rows of bits in S are shifted to the right or to the left. When SM616 is OFF, the values of the bits

are shifted to the left. When SM616 is ON, the values of the bits are shifted to the right. The vacancy (from shifted to

the left is b0 and from shift to the right is b16n-1) resulting from the shift is filled by the state of the borrow flag

SM615, the value of the bit shifted last (from shifted to the left is b16n-1 and from the shift to the right is b0) is

transmitted to the carry flag SM614, and the operation result is stored in D.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. Generally, the pulse instruction MBSP is used.

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, SM616 is OFF. The values of the bits are shifted to the left. Suppose SM615 is OFF. After the values of

the bits in the 16-bit registers D0~D2 are shifted to the left, the operation result is stored in the 16-bit registers D20~D22,

and SM614 is ON.

6-308
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

b 15 b0 Borr ow flag
D0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
Carry flag 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D1
D2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

After the s hift

b 15 b0
Borr ow flag
D20 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
Carry flag D21 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
1 D22 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, SM616 is ON. The values of the bits are shifted to the right. Suppose SM615 is ON. After the values of

the bits in the 16-bit registers D0~D2 are rotated to the right, the operation result is stored in the 16-bit registers D20~D22,

and SM614 is OFF.

6_

b 15 b0 Carry flag
D0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Borr ow flag D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

After the s hift

b 15 b0 Carry flag
D20 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Borr ow flag D21 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
1 D22 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

6-309
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If S+n-1 or D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

3. The flags:

SM614: It is the carry flag for the matrix rotation/shift/output.

SM615: It is the borrow flag for the matrix shift/output.

SM616: It is the direction flag for the matrix rotation/shift.

_6

6-310
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit
1110 SFR P D，n
registers by n bits to the right

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D      
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D ： Device involved in the shift

n ： Number of bits

Explanation:

1. The values of the bits in D are shifted by n bits to the right. The vacancies (b15~b15-n+1) resulting from the shift is

filled by 0, and the value of bn-1 is transmitted to SM602.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 16. 6_

3. Generally, the pulse instruction SFRP is used.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the values of b0~b15 in D0 are shifted by 6 bits to the right, and the value of b5 is transmitted to SM602.

The values of b10~b15 are cleared to 0 after the shift.

The shift of the values of the bits to the right during a scan is illustrated as follows.

 b5~b0 → Being carried (The value of b5 is transmitted to SM602.)

 b15~b6 → b9~b0

0 → b15~b10

6 - 3 11
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

b 15 ※ b0 Carry flag
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

After the shift

b 15 b0 Carry flag
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Being fil led by 0

Additional remark:

If n is less than 0, or if n is larger than 16, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

_6

6-312
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the values of the bits in the 16-bit
1111 SFL P D，n
registers by n bits to the left

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D      
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D ： Device involved in the shift

n ： Number of bits

Explanation:

1. The values of the bits in D are shifted by n bits to the left. The vacancies (b0~bn-1) resulting from the shift is filled by

0, and the value of b16-n is transmitted to SM602.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 16. 6_

3. Generally, the pulse instruction SFLP is used.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the values of b0~b15 in D0 are shifted by 6 bits to the right, and the value of b10 is transmitted to

SM602. The values of b0~b5 are cleared to 0 after the shift.

The shift of the values of the bits to the left during a scan is illustrated as follows.

 b15~b10 → Being carried (The value of b10 is transmitted to SM602.

 b9~b0 → b15~b6

0 → b5~b0

6-313
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

b 15 ※ b0
Carry flag
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

After the s hift

Carry flag
b 15 b0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Being fill ed by 0

Additional remark:

If n is less than 0, or if n is larger than 16, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

_6

6-314
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the states of the n bit devices by one bit to
1112 BSFR P D，n
the right

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D    
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D 
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D ： Initial device involve in the shift

n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. The states of the n bit devices starting from D are shifted by one bit to the right. The state of D+n-1 is cleared to 0,

and the state of D is transmitted to the carry flag SM602.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction BSFRP is used. 6_

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 1024.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the states of M0~M5 are shifted by one bit to the right, the state of M5 is cleared to 0, and the state of

M0 is transmitted to the carry flag SM602.

6-315
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Carry flag
0 0 0 1 0 1
After the shift

M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Carry flag
0 0 0 0 1 0 1

Being c leared to 0

Additional remark:

1. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 1024, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

_6

6-316
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Shifting the states of the n bit devices by
1113 BSFL P D，n
one bit to the left

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D    
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D 
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D ： Initial device involve in the shift

n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. The states of the n bit devices starting from D are shifted by one bit to the left. The state of D is cleared to 0, and the

state of D+n-1 is transmitted to the carry flag SM602. 6_

2. Generally, the pulse instruction BSFLP is used.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 1024.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the states of M0~M5 are shifted by one bit to the left, the state of M0 is cleared to 0, and the state of M5

is transmitted to the carry flag SM602.

6-317
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Carry flag
0 0 0 1 0 1

After the s hift

M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Carry flag
0 0 1 0 1 0 0

Being c leared to 0

Additional remark:

1. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 1024, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

_6

6-318
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

1114 NSFR P D，n Shifting n registers to the right

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D    
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D ： Initial device involve in the shift

n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. The data in the n registers starting from D is shifted to the right, and the data in D+n-1 is cleared to 0.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction NSFRP is used.

6_
3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 512.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in D1~D6 is shifted to the right, and the data in D6 is cleared to 0.

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
30 2235 9578 754 28 423 11
After the shift

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
0 30 2235 9578 754 28 423

Being cleared to 0

6-319
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 512, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

_6

6-320
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

1115 NSFL P D，n Shifting n registers to the left

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D    
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D ： Initial device involve in the shift

n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. The data in the n registers starting from D is shifted to the left, and the data in D is cleared to 0.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction NSFLP is used.

6_
3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 512.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the data in D0~D5 is shifted to the left, and the data in D0 is cleared to 0.

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
30 2235 9578 754 28 423 11
After the shift

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
2235 9578 754 28 423 11 0

Being c leared to 0

6-321
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 512, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

_6

6-322
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.13 Data Processing Instructions

6.13.1 List of Data Processing Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1200 SER DSER  Searching the data

1201 SUM DSUM  Number of bits whose states are ON

1202 DECO –  Decoder

1203 ENCO –  Encoder

1204 SEGD –  Seven-segment decoding

1205 SORT DSORT  Sorting the data

1206 ZRST –  Resetting the zone

1207 BON DBON  Checking the state of the bit

1208 MEAN DMEAN  Mean

1209 CCD –  Sum check

1210 ABS DABS  Absolute value

1211 MINV –  Inverting the matrix bits


1212 MBRD – Reading the matrix bit
6_
1213 MBWR –  Writing the matrix bit

1214 MBC –  Counting the bits with the value 0 or 1

1215 DIS –  Disuniting the 16-bit data

1216 UNI –  Uniting the 16-bit data

1217 WSUM DWSUM  Getting the sum

1221 LIMIT DLIMIT  Confining the value within the bounds

1222 BAND DBAND  Deadband control

1223 ZONE DZONE  Controlling the zone

1224 – FMEAN  The mean of the floating points

1225 – FSUM  The sum of the floating points

6-323
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.13.2 Explanation of Data Processing Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

1200 D SER P S1，S2，D，n Searching the data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2           
D     
n           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT
type

S1     
S2     
D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Initial device involved in the comparison

S2 ： Compared data
_6
Initial device in which the comparison
D ：
result is stored

n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. n singed decimal values in the registers starting from the register specified by S1 are compared with the singed
decimal value in the register specified by S2, and the comparison results are stored in the registers D~D+4.

6-324
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Device Description

D Number of equal values

Data number of the first equal

D+1
value

Data number of the last equal

D+2
value

Data number of the minimum

D+3
value

Data number of the maximum

D+4
value

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the values in D10~D19 are compared with the value in D0, and the comparison results are stored

in D50~D54. When the equal value does not exist, the values in D50~D52 are 0.

2. The data number of the minimum value is stored in D53, and the data number of the maximum value is stored in

D54. If there is more than one minimum value or maximum value, the data number which is bigger is stored. 6_

6-325
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Compared Data
S1 Value Result D Value Description
data number

D10 88 0 D50 4 Number of equal values

Data number of the first

D11 100 1 Equal D51 1
equal value

Data number of the last

D12 110 2 D52 8
equal value

Data number of the

D13 150 3 D53 7
minimum value
n S2

D0=100 Data number of the

D14 100 4 Equal D54 9
maximum value

D15 300 5

D16 100 6 Equal

D17 5 7 Minimum

D18 100 8 Equal

D19 500 9 Maximum

_6
Additional remark:

1. If S1+n-1 or D+4 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If the operand n used in the 16-bit instruction is less than 1 or larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0

is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. If the operand n used in the 32-bit instruction is less than 1 or larger than 128, the instruction is not executed, SM0

is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

4. If the operand D used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

ARRAY [5] of WORD/INT.

5. If the operand D used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

ARRAY [5] of DWORD/DINT.

6-326
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1201 D SUM P S，D Number of bits whose states are ON

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Destination device

Explanation:

1. The number of bits whose values are 1 in S is stored in D.

6_

2. When the values of the bits in the source device specified by S are 0, the zero flag SM600 is ON.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the number of bits whose values are 1 in D0 is stored in D2.

b15 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3
D0 D2

Additional remark:

If the device exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-327
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1202 DECO P S，D，n Decoder

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D       
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
D    
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Source device
Device in which the decoded values
D ：
are stored
Number of bits whose values are
n ：
decoded
Explanation:

_6 n
1. The values of the lower n bits in the source device specified by S are decoded as the values of the lower 2 bits in D.

n
2. The values of the consecutive n bits in the source device specified by S are decoded as the values of the lower 2
bits in D.

3. When the source device specified by S is a timer or counter, the device will be seen as a word device.

4. When D is a bit device, n is within the range between 1 and 8. When n is 8, the values of the 8 bits is decoded as

the values of the 256 bits. (Please note that the devices in which the decoded values are stored can not be used

repeatedly.)

5. When D is a word device, n is within the range between 1 and 4. When n is 4, the values of the 4 bits is decoded as

the values of the 16 bits.

6. Generally, the pulse instruction DECOP is used.

Example 1:

1. When Y0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the instruction DECO decodes the values of the 3 bits in X0.0~X0.2 as the
values of the 8 bits in M100~M107.

6-328
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

2. After the values of the 3 bits in X0.0~X0.2 are added up, the value 3 is gotten. The third bit in M10~M1007, that is,
the bit in M103, is set to 1.

3. After the instruction DECO is executed and Y0.0 is switched OFF, the values of the 8 bits in M100~M107 are
unchanged.

X0.2 X0.1
0 1 1

4 2 1

3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100

Example 2:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the instruction DECO decodes the values of b2~b0 in D10 as the values of
b7~b0 in D20, and the values of b15~b8 in D10 become 0.
6_
2. The values of the lower 3 bits in D10 is decoded as the values of the lower 8 bits in D20. The values of the higher 8
bits are 0.

3. After the instruction DECO is executed and X0.0 is switched OFF, the data in D20 is unchanged.

b15 D10 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
4 2 1
T he values of b15~b8
in D10 bec ome 0.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
b15 D20 b0

6-329
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. Suppose D is a bit device. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 8, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. Suppose D is a word device. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 4, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,

and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. Suppose S is a bit device. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. Suppose D is a bit device. If D+(2^n)-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-330
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1203 ENCO P S，D，n Encoder

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D      
n   DWORD        

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Source device
Device in which the encoded values
D ：
are stored
Number of bits whose values are
n ：
encoded
Explanation:

1.
n
When S is a word device, the values of the lower 2 bits in the source device specified by S are encoded as the 6_
values of the lower n bits in D.

n
2. When S is a bit device, the higher bit with the value S+(n-1) from the lower 2 bits is processed and the result is

stored in D.

3. When the source device specified by S is a timer or counter, the device will be seen as a word device.

4. When S is a bit device, n is within the range between 1 and 8. When n is 8, the values of the 256 bits is encoded as

the values of the 8 bits.

5. When S is a word device, n is within the range between 1 and 4. When n is 4, the values of the 16 bits is encoded as

the values of the 4 bits.

6. Generally, the pulse instruction ENCOP is used.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the instruction ENCO encodes the values of the 8 bits in M0~M7 as the

values of the lower 3 bits in D0, and the values of b15~b3 in D0 become 0.

6-331
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2. After the instruction ENCO is executed and X0.0 is switched OFF, the data in D is unchanged.

M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

b15 D0 4 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
b0
T he values of b15~b3 in D0 become 0.

Example 2:

1. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the instruction ENCO encodes the values of b0~b7 in D10 as the values of

b2~b0 in D20, and the values of b15~b3 in D20 become 0. (The values of b8~b18 in D10 are invalid data.)

2. After the instruction ENCO is executed and X0.0 is switched OFF, the data in D is unchanged.
_6

b15 D10 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
T he values of b8~b18 in D10 are invalid data.

b15 D20
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
b0
T he values of b15~b3 in D20 become 0.

Additional remark:

1. If there is no bit whose value is 1 in the source device specified by S, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,

and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-332
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

2. Suppose S is a bit device. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 8, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. Suppose S is a word device. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 4, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,

and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

4. Suppose S is a bit device. If S+(2^n)-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. Suppose D is a bit device. If D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6_

6-333
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1204 SEGD P S，D Seven-segment decoding

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S          
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Source device

Device in which the

D ：
seven-segment data is stored

Explanation:

The values of the lower 4 bits (b0~b3) in the source device specified by S are decoded as the seven-segment data stored

_6 in D.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the values of b0~b3 in D0 are decoded as the seven-segment data stored in Y0.0~Y0.15. If the data in

the source device exceeds four bits, the values of the lower 4 bits are decoded.

6-334
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

The relation between the seven-segment data and the bit pattern of source data is presented in the following table.

Segment s tate
Bi t Assi gnment
Hex Dis play
pattern of s egments B0(a) B1(b) B2(c) B3(d) B4(e) B5(f) B6(g)

0 0000 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 0001 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 0010 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON

3 0011 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

4 0100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

5 0101 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON

6 0110 a ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON

7 0111 f g b ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF

8 1000 e c ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
d
9 1001 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON

A 1010 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON

B 1011 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON

C 1100 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

D 1101 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON

E 1110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

F 1111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

6_

6-335
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1205 D SORT P S，m1，m2，D，n Sorting the data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S 
m1   
m2   
D 
n   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S     
m1     
m2     
D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

Initial device in which the original data is

S ：
stored
m1 ： Number of rows of data
_6
m2 ： Number of columns of data
Initial device in which the sorted data is
D ：
stored
Reference value involved in the sorting of
n ：
the data

Explanation:

1. The data which is sorted is stored in the m1×m2 registers starting from the register specified by D. If S and D specify

the same register, the sorted data is the same as the original data in the register specified by S.

2. The operand m1 should be within the range between 1 and 32. The operand m2 should be within the range between
1 and 6. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and m2.

3. When SM604 is OFF, the data is sorted in ascending order. When SM604 is ON, the data is sorted in descending

order.

4. It is suggested to use pluse type instruction instead of sorting repeatly.

5. Only the 32-bit instruction can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

6-336
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

1. Suppose SM604 is OFF. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the data is sorted in ascending order.

2. The data which will be sorted is shown below.

m2 columns of data

Column

Column 1 2 3 4 5

Student
Chinese English Math Physics
Row number

1 (D0) 1 (D5) 90 (D10) 75 (D15) 66 (D20) 79

2 (D1) 2 (D6) 55 (D11) 65 (D16) 54 (D21) 63

6_
m1 rows of data

3 (D2) 3 (D7) 80 (D12) 98 (D17) 89 (D22) 90

4 (D3) 4 (D8) 70 (D13) 60 (D18) 99 (D23) 50

5 (D4) 5 (D9) 95 (D14) 79 (D19) 75 (D24) 69

6-337
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3. When the value in D100 is 3, the data is sorted as follows.

m2 columns of data

Column

Column 1 2 3 4 5

Student
Chinese English Math Physics
Row number

1 (D50) 4 (D55) 70 (D60) 60 (D65) 99 (D70) 50

2 (D51) 2 (D56) 55 (D61) 65 (D66) 54 (D71) 63

m1 rows of data

3 (D52) 1 (D57) 90 (D62) 75 (D67) 66 (D72) 79

4 (D53) 5 (D58) 95 (D63) 79 (D68) 75 (D73) 69

5 (D54) 3 (D59) 80 (D64) 98 (D69) 89 (D74) 90

4. When the value in D100 is 5, the data is sorted as follows.

m2 columns of data
_6
Column

Column 1 2 3 4 5

Student
Chinese English Math Physics
Row number

1 (D50) 4 (D55) 70 (D60) 60 (D65) 99 (D70) 50

2 (D51) 2 (D56) 55 (D61) 65 (D66) 54 (D71) 63

m1 rows of data

3 (D52) 5 (D57) 95 (D62) 79 (D67) 75 (D72) 69

4 (D53) 1 (D58) 90 (D63) 75 (D68) 66 (D73) 79

5 (D54) 3 (D59) 80 (D64) 98 (D69) 89 (D74) 90

6-338
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Additional remark:

1. If the device exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If m1, m2, or n exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6_

6-339
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1206 ZRST P D1，D2 Resetting the zone

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D1          
D2          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D1    
D2    

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D1 ： Initial device which is reset

D2 ： Final device which is reset

Explanation:

1. When the instruction is executed, the values in D1~D2 are cleared. The device type should be the same to perform
this instruction.
_6
2. When the device number of D1 is larger than the device number of D2, only D2 is reset.

3. The instruction ZRST can use the 32-bit counter.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the auxiliary relays M300~M399 are reset to OFF.

2. When X1.0 is ON, the 16-bit counters C0~C127 are reset. (The values of C0~C127 are cleared to 0, and the contact

and the coil are reset to OFF.)

3. When X2.0 is ON, the stepping relays S0~S127 are reset to OFF.

4. When X3.0 is ON, the output relays Y0.0~Y1.15 are reset to OFF.

5. When X4.0 is ON, the 32-bit counters HC0~HC63 are reset. (The values of HC0~HC63 are cleared to 0, and the

contact and the coil are reset to OFF.)

6. When X5.0 is ON, the timers T0~T127 are reset. (The values of T0~T127 are cleared to 0. and the contact and the

coil are reset to OFF.)

6-340
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6_

Additional remark:

1. If D1 and D2 are different types of devices, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2007.

2. If D1 and D2 contain different formats of data, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2007.

6-341
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1207 D BON P S，D，n Checking the state of the bit

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D     
n           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D 
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Device in which the check result is stored

n ： Bit whose state is judged

_6

Explanation:

th
1. The state of the n bit in S is checked, and the result is stored in D.

2. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and 15, and the operand n used

in the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and 31.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

th
1. When X0.0 is ON, Y0.1 is ON if the value of the 15 bit in D0 is 1. When X0.0 is ON, Y0.1 is OFF if the value of the
th
15 bit in D0 is 0.

2. When X0.0 is switched OFF, the state of Y0.1 remains the same as that before X0.0’s being OFF.

6-342
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Y0.1=OFF
D0
b15 b0
1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Y0.1=ON
D0

Additional remark:

If n exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6_

6-343
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1208 D MEAN P S，D，n Mean

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
D       
n           
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Initial device
Device in which the mean is
D ：
stored
n ： Number of devices

_6

Explanation:

1. After the values in the n devices starting from the device specified by S are added up, the mean of the sum is stored

in D.

2. If a remainder appears in the calculation, it is left out.

3. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 256

4. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the values in the three registers starting from D0 are added up. After the values are added up, the sum

is divided by 3. The quotient is stored in D10, and the remainder is left out.

6-344
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

(D0+D1+D2)/3 D10

D0 100

After the instruction

D1 113 D10 112
is executed

D2 125 T he quotient 2 is left out.

Additional remark:

1. If the operand n used in the 16-bit instruction is less than 1 or larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0
is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. If the operand n used in the 32-bit instruction is less than 1 or larger than 128, the instruction is not executed, SM0
is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

6_

6-345
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1209 CCD P S，D，n Sum check

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D    
n          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device
Device in which the sum is
D ：
stored
n ： Number of pieces of data

_6 Explanation:

1. In communication, the sum check is used to compare checksums on the same data on different occasions or on
different representations of the data in order to verify the data integrity.

2. The 16-bit conversion mode: When SM606 is OFF, the working mode of the instruction is the 16-bit conversion

mode. The n pieces of data in the registers starting from the register specified by S (eight bits as a group) are added

up. The sum is stored in the register specified by D, and the values of the parity bits are stored in D+1.

3. The 8-bit conversion mode: When SM606 is ON, the working mode of the instruction is the 8-bit conversion mode.

The n pieces of data in the registers starting from the register specified by S (Eight bits forms a group, and only low

eight bits are valid.) are added up. The sum is stored in the register specified by D, and the values of the parity bits

are stored in D+1.

4. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

6-346
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 1:

1. When SM606 is OFF, the working mode of the instruction is the 16-bit conversion mode.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the six pieces of data in D0~D2 (eight bits as a group) are added up. The sum is stored in D100,

and the values of the parity bits are stored in D101.

S Data
D0 Low 100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
D0 High 111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
D1 Low 120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
D1 High 202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
D2 Low 123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
D2 High 211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
D100 867 Sum
D101 00 01 000 1
T he parity bit is set to 1 if the number of ones i s odd.
6_
T he parity bit is set to 0 if the number of ones i s even.

D100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

D101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Pari ty bits

Example 2:

1. When SM606 is ON, the working mode of the instruction is the 8-bit conversion mode.

2. When X0.0 is ON, the six pieces of data in D0~D5 (eight bits as a group) are added up. The sum is stored in D100,

and the values of the parity bits are stored in D101.

6-347
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

S Data
D0 Low 100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
D1 Low 111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
D2 Low 120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
D3 Low 202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
D4 Low 123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
D5 Low 211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
D100 867 Sum
D101 00 01 000 1
T he parity bit is set to 1 if the number of ones is odd.
T he parity bit is set to 0 if the number of ones is even.

D100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1

D101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Pari ty bits

_6
Additional remark:

1. Suppose SM606 is ON. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. Suppose SM606 is OFF. If S+n/2-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

4. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

6-348
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1210 D ABS P D Absolute value

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D       

DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:
Device involved in the getting
D ：
of the absolute value

Explanation:

1. When the instruction ABS is executed, the absolute value of the value in the device specified by D is gotten.

2. Generally, the pulse instruction ABSP is used. 6_

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

Suppose the value in D0 before the execution of the instruction is -1234. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the

absolute value of -1234 in D0 is gotten. That is, the value in D0 becomes 1234 after the instruction is executed.

6-349
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1211 MINV P S，D，n Inverting the matrix bits

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D    
n         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Matrix source

D ： Operation result

n ： Length of the array

Explanation:

_6 1. The bits in the n devices starting from the device specified by S are inverted, and the inversion result is stored in D.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the bits in the three 16-bit registers D0~D2 are inverted, and the inversion result is stored in the 16-bit

registers D20~D22.

6-350
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b0
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
D1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
D2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

After the i nstruction is executed

b15 b0
D20 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D21 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D22 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Additional remark:

1. If S+n-1 or D+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not execute, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200B.

6_

6-351
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1212 MBRD P S，n，D Reading the matrix bit

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
n         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Matrix source

n ： Length of the array

D ： Pointer

_6 Explanation:

1. When the instruction is executed, the state of SM613 is checked. If SM613 is ON, the value of the pointer D is

cleared to 0. The value of the bit specified by the value of the pointer D is read into SM614. After the value of the bit

is read, the state of SM612 is checked. If SM612 is ON, the value of the pointer D increases by one.

2. When the value of the last bit is read, SM608 is ON, and the bit number is recorded in the pointer D.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

4. The value of the pointer is specified by users. The values range from 0 to 16n−1, and correspond to the range from

b0 to b16n−1. If the value of the pointer exceeds the range, SM611 is set to 1, and the instruction is not executed.

Example:

1. Suppose SM613 is OFF and SM612 is ON when X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON.

2. Suppose the current value in D20 is 45. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON three times, users can get the

following execution results.

6-352
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

 The value in D20 is 46, SM614 is OFF, and SM608 is OFF.

 The value in D20 is 47, SM614 is ON, and SM608 is OFF.

 The value in D20 is 47, SM614 is OFF, and SM608 is ON.

b15 b0
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
D1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
D2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

45 Ptr
D20

Additional remark:

1. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.
6_
2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

3. The flags:

SM608: The matrix comparison comes to an end. When the last bits are compared, SM608 is

ON.

SM611: It is the matrix pointer error flag. When the value of the pointer exceeds the comparison

range, SM611 is ON.

SM612: It is the matrix pointer increasing flag. The current value of the pointer increases by

one.

SM613: It is the matrix pointer clearing flag. The current value of the pointer is cleared to zero.

SM614: It is the carry flag for the matrix rotation/shift/output.

6-353
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1213 MBWR P S，n，D Writing the matrix bit

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S    
n         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Matrix source

n ： Length of the array

D ： Pointer

Explanation:

_6 1. When the instruction is executed, the state of SM613 is checked. If SM613 is ON, the value of the pointer D is

cleared to 0. The state of SM615 is written into the bit specified by the value of the pointer D. After the state of

SM615 is written into the bit, the state of SM612 is checked. If SM612 is ON, the value in the pointer D increases by

one.

2. When the state of SM615 is written into the last bit, SM608 is ON, and the bit number is recorded in the pointer D. If

value of the pointer D exceeds the range, SM611 is ON.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

4. The value of the pointer is specified by users. The values range from 0 to 16n−1, and correspond to the range from

b0 to b16n−1. If the value of the pointer exceeds the range, SM611 is set to 1, and the instruction is not executed.

Example:

1. Suppose SM613 is OFF and SM612 is ON when X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON.

2. Suppose the current value in D20 is 45. When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON one time, users can get the

execution result shown below. When the value in D20 is 45, SM615 is OFF, and SM608 is OFF.

6-354
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b0
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 SM 615
D1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
D2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

45 Ptr

After the instruction i s exec uted D20

b15 b0
D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 SM 615
D1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
D2 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

46 Ptr
D20

Additional remark:

1. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
6_
16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200B.

3. The flags:

SM608: The matrix comparison comes to an end. When the last bits are compared, SM608 is ON.

SM611: It is the matrix pointer error flag. When the value of the pointer exceeds the comparison range, SM611 is

ON.

SM612: It is the matrix pointer increasing flag. The current value of the pointer increases by one.

SM613: It is the matrix pointer clearing flag. The current value of the pointer is cleared to zero.

SM615: It is the borrow flag for the matrix shift/output.

6-355
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1214 MBC P S，n，D Counting the bits with the value 0 or 1

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S    
n         
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Matrix source

n ： Length of the array

D ： Operation result

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to count the bits with the value 1 or 0 in the n devices starting from the device specified by S.

The operation result is stored in D.

2. When SM617 is ON, the bits with the value 1 is counted. When SM617 is OFF, the bits with the value 0 is counted.
When the operation result is 0, SM618 is ON.

3. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 256.

Example:

Suppose SM617 is ON. When X0.0 is ON, the bits with the value 1 are counted, and the operation result is stored in D20.

Suppose SM617 is OFF. When X0.0 is ON, the bits with the value 0 are counted, and the operation result is stored in D20.

6-356
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b0
D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 12
D1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 SM 617 D20
D2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
1 36
SM 617 D20

Additional remark:

1. If S+n-1 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

3. The flags:

SM617: The bits with the value 0 or 1 are counted.

SM618: It is ON when the matrix counting result is 0.

6_

6-357
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1215 DIS P S，n，D Disuniting the 16-bit data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S        
n          
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Data source

n ： Number of devices

D ： Operation result

_6 Explanation:
1. The 16-bit value in the register specified by S is divided into four groups (four bits as a group), and these groups are
stored in the low four bits in every register (The registers range from D to D+(n-1).).
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 b15 b4 b3 b0
S D
D +1 n
D +2
D +3

All becomes 0. T he positions i n whcih

the data is stored.
2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 4.

Example:

Suppose the value in D0 is 16#1234. When M0 is enabled, the instruction DIS is executed. The value in D0 is divided into

four groups (four bits as a group), and these groups are stored in the low four bits in every register (The registers range

from D10 to D13.).

6-358
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 b15 b4 b3 b0

D0 1 2 3 4 4 D1 0
3 D11
4
2 D1 2
1 D1 3

All becomes 0. T he positions in whcih

the data is stored.

Additional remark:

1. If D~D+(n-1) exceed the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 4, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 6_
16#200B.

6-359
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1216 UNI P S，n，D Uniting the 16-bit data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
n          
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Data source

n ： Data length

D ： Operation result

_6
Explanation:

1. The 16-bit values in the registers specified by S~S+(n-1) are divided into groups (four bits as a group), and every

group which is composed of b0~b3 is stored in the register specified by D (b0~b15).

b15 b4 b3 b0
S
S +1
S +2
S +3 D
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0

Being i gnor ed T he data whic h

is stored

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 4.

Example:

Suppose the values in D0~D3 are 16#1234, 16#5678, 16#8765, and 16#4321 respectively. When M0 is enabled, the

instruction UNI is executed. The values in D0~D3 are divided into groups (four bits as a group), and every group which is

composed of b0~b3 is stored in D10(b0~b15).

6-360
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

b15 b4 b3 b0
D0 1 2 3 4

D1 5 6 7 8
D2 8 7 6 5
D3 4 3 2 1 1 5 8 4 D1 0
b15 b12 b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0

Additional remark:

1. If S~S+(n-1) exceed the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.
6_
2. If n is less than 1, or if n is larger than 4, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#200B.

6-361
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1217 D WSUM P S，n，D Getting the sum

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
n           
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
n     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

n ： Data length

D ： Operation result

_6

Explanation:

1. The signed decimal values in S~S+n-1 are added up, and the sum is stored in the register specified by D.

S
S +1
D +1 D
S +2
B in ar y val ue s n
S +3
S +4 B in ar y val ue
S +5

S S +1

S +3 S +2
D +1 D

S +5 S +4
B in ar y val ue s n D +3 D +2

S +7 S +6

B in ar y val ue
S +9 S +8

6-362
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

2. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 256.

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

When the instruction WSUM is executed, the values in D0~D2 are added up, and the sum is stored in D10.

(D0+D1+D2) D10

D0 100

After the instruction

D1 113 D10 338
is executed

D2 125

Additional remark:
6_
1. If n used in the 16-bit instruction is less than 1 or larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. If n used in the 32-bit instruction is less than 1 or larger than 128, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. If S+n-1 or D exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

4. If the operand D used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

DWORD or ARRAY [2] of WORD.

5. If the operand D used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

ARRAY [2] of DWORD.

6-363
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1221 D LIMIT P S1，S2，S3，D Confining the value within the bounds

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
S3           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
S3     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Minimum output value

S2 ： Maximum output value

S3 ： Input value

_6 D ： Output value

Explanation:

1. The input value in S3 is compared with the minimum output value in S1 and the maximum output value in S2, and the

comparison result is stored in D.

If the minimum output value in S1 is larger than the input value in S3, the output value stored in D is equal

to the minimum output value in S1.

If the maximum output value in S2 is less than the input value in S3, the output value stored in D is equal

to the maximum output value in S2.

If the input value in S3 is within the range between the minimum output value in S1 and the maximum

output value in S2, the output value stored in D is equal to the input value in S3.

6-364
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

If the minimum output value in S1 is larger than the maximum output value in S2, the instruction is not

executed.

2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

 When X0.0 is ON, the state of X1 is converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is stored in D0.

Besides, the value stored in D0 is compared with 500 and 5000, and the comparison result is stored in D1.

Minimum output Maximum output

Output value in D0 Function Output value in D1
value value

499 D0<500 500

500 5000 5001 D0>5000 5000

6_
600 500≦D0≦5000 600

Additional remark:

If the minimum output value in S1 is larger than the maximum output value in S2, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is

ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-365
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1222 D BAND P S1，S2，S3，D Deadband control

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
S3           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
S3     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:
Minimum value of the
S1 ：
deadband
Maximum value of the
S2 ：
deadband
S3 ： Input value

_6 D ： Output value

Explanation:

1. The minimum value of the deadband in S1 or the maximum value of the deadband in S2 is subtracted from the input

value in S3, and the difference is stored in D.

If the minimum value of the deadband in S1 is larger than the input value in S3, the

minimum value of the deadband in S1 is subtracted from the input value in S3, and the

difference is stored in D.

If the maximum value of the deadband in S2 is less than the input value in S3, the

maximum value of the deadband in S2 is subtracted from the input value in S3, and

the difference is stored in D.

6-366
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

If the input value in S3 is within the range between the minimum of the deadband in S1

and the maximum value of the deadband in S2, the output value stored in D is 0.

If the minimum value of the deadband in S1 is larger than the maximum value of the

deadband in S2, the instruction is not executed.

2. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

3. The figures:

BAND is not exec uted. BAND is exec uted.

Output value Output value

T he lower l imit value

of the deadband

Input value Input value

T he upper li mit value

of the deadband

4. The minimum value of the deadband in S1, the maximum value of the deadband in S2, the input value in S3, and the
output value in D should be within the range described below.
6_
 If the instruction BAND is executed, the minimum value of the deadband in S1, the maximum value of the

deadband in S2, the input value in S3, and the output value in D is within the range between -32768 and 32767.

Suppose the minimum value of the deadband in S1 is 10 and the maximum value of the deadband in S3 is

-32768. The output value in D is calculated as follows.

Output value in D=-32768-10=16#8000-16#000A=16#7FF6=32758

 If the instruction DBAND is executed, the minimum value of the deadband in S1, the maximum value of the

deadband in S2, the input value in S3, and the output value in D is within the range between -2147483648 and

2147483647. Suppose the minimum value of the deadband in (S1+1, S1) is 1000 and the maximum value of

the deadband in (S3+1, S3) is -2147483648. The output value in (D+1, D) is calculated as follows.

Output value in (D+1, D)

=-2147483648-1000=16#80000000-16#000003E8=16#7FFFFC18

=2147482648

6-367
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, -1000 or 1000 is subtracted from the binary-coded decimal value in X1, and the difference is stored in

D1.

The execution results:

Minimum value Maximum

Input value in
of the value of the Function Output value in D1
D0
deadband deadband

-1200 D0<-1000=>D1=D0-（-1000） -200

-1000 1000 1200 D0>1000=>D1=D0-1000 200

500 -1000≦D0≦1000=>D0=0 0
_6

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, -10000 or 10000 is subtracted from the binary-coded decimal value in (X2, X1), and the difference is

stored in (D11, D10).

6-368
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

The execution results:

Minimum value Maximum

Input value in Output value in (D11,
of the value of the Function
(D1, D0) D10)
deadband deadband

（D1，D0）<-10000

-12000 =>（D11，D10） -2000

=（D1，D0）-（-10000）

（D1，D0）>10000
-10000 10000
12000 =>（D11，D10） 2000

=（D1，D0）-10000

-10000≦（D1，D0）≦10000
5000 0
=>（D1，D0）=0

Additional remark:

If the minimum value of the deadband in S1 is larger than the maximum value of the deadband in S2, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6_

6-369
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1223 D ZONE P S1，S2，S3，D Controlling the zone

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1           
S2           
S3           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1     
S2     
S3     
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Negative deviation

S2 ： Positive deviation

S3 ： Input value

_6 D ： Output value

Explanation:

1. The negative deviation in S1 or the positive deviation in S2 is added to the input value in S3, and the sum is stored in

D.

If the input value in S3 is less than 0, the negative deviation in S1 is added to the input

value in S3, and the sum is stored in D.

If the input value in S3 is larger than 0, the positive deviation in S2 is added to the input

value in S3, and the sum is stored in D.

If the input value in S3 is equal to 0, the output value stored in D is 0.

6-370
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

2. The figures:

Z ONE is not ex ec uted. Z ONE is exec uted.

Output value Output value

Positiv e deviation

Input value Input value

Negativ e deviation

3. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter but not the device E.

4. The negative deviation in S1, the positive deviation in S2, the input value in S3, and the output value in D should be

within the range described below.

 If the instruction ZONE is executed, the negative deviation in S1, the positive deviation in S2, the input value in

S3, and the output value in D is within the range between -32768 and 32767. Suppose the negative deviation

in S1 is -100 and the input value in S3 is -32768. The output value in D is calculated as follows.

Output value in D=(-32768)+(-100)=16#8000+16#FF9C=16#7F9C=32668

 If the instruction DZONE is executed, the negative deviation in S1, the positive deviation in S2, the input value
6_
in S3, and the output value in D is within the range between -2147483648 and 2147483647. Suppose the

negative deviation in (S1+1, S1) is -1000 and the input value in (S3+1, S3) is -2147483648. The output value in

(D+1, D) is calculated as follows.

Output value in (D+1, D)

=-2147483648+(-1000)=16#80000000+16#FFFFFC18=16#7FFFFC18=2147482648

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, -100 or 100 is added to the binary-coded decimal value in X1, and the sum is stored in D10.

6-371
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The execution results:

Negative Positive Input value in Output value in D10

Function
deviation deviation D0

-10 D0<0=>D10=（-10）+（-100） -110

-100 100 0 D0=0=>D10=0 0

50 D0>0=>D10=50+100 150

Example 2:

When X0.0 is ON, -10000 or 10000 is added to the binary-coded decimal value in (X2, X1), and the sum is stored in (D11,

D10).

_6

Negative Positive Input value in (D1, Output value in (D11,

Function
deviation deviation D0) D10)
（D1，D0）<0
-10 =>（D11，D10） -10010
=（-10）+（-10000）
-10000 10000 （D1，D0）=0
0 0
=>（D11，D10）=0
（D1，D0）>0
50 10050
=>（D11，D10）=50+10000

6-372
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1224 FMEAN P S，D，n The mean of the floating points

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S  
n    
D DWORD   

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
n  
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Initial device
Device in which the mean is
D ：
stored
n ： Number of devices

Explanation:
6_
1. After the single precision floating points in the n devices starting from the device specified by S are added up, the

mean of the sum is stored in D.

2. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 256,

3. The flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), SM602 (carry flag):

 When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

 If the value while adding or the absolute result of the operation is less than the floating point number can be

shown, the D=16#FF800000 and the borrow flag SM601 is ON.

 If the value while adding or the absolute result of the operation is larger than the floating point number can be

shown, the D=16#7F800000 and the carry flag SM602 is ON.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, add the values of the 3 single precision floating points in (D1, D0), (D3, D2), (D5, D4) and then divide

the addition result by 3, after that store the result in (D11, D10).

6-373
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

[(D1, D0) +( D3, D 2)+(D5, D4 )]/3 ( D11, D 10)

(D1, D 0) 10 0.1 Aft er the inst ruc ti on is execu ted.

( D11, D1 0) 11 2.2
(D3, D 2) 113.2

(D5, D 4) 123.3

Additional remark:

1. If the operand n used is less than 1 or larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. If S+2*n-1exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

3. If the value in S exceeds the range of the floating point number can be shown, the instruction is not executed, SM0
is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.
_6

6-374
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1225 FSUM P S，n，D The sum of the floating points

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S  
n    
D DWORD   

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
n  
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source

n ： Data length

D ： Operation result

Explanation: 6_
1. After the single precision floating points in the n devices starting from the device specified by S are added up, the

sum is stored in D.

2. The operand n used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 256,

3. The flags: SM600 (zero flag), SM601 (borrow flag), SM602 (carry flag):

 When the operation result is zero, SM600 is ON. Otherwise, it is OFF.

 If the value while adding or the absolute result of the operation is less than the floating point number can be

shown, the D=16#FF800000 and the borrow flag SM601 is ON.

 If the value while adding or the absolute result of the operation is larger than the floating point number can be

shown, the D=16#7F800000 and the carry flag SM602 is ON.

6-375
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

S +1 S

S +3 S +2

S +5 S +4 D +1 D
F lo at ing p oi nt nu mb ers n=5

S +7 S +6
F l oatin g po int n umbers

S +9 S +8

Example:

When the instruction FSUM is executed, the values of the 3 single precision floating points in (D1, D0), (D3, D2), (D5, D4)

will be added up and the result will be stored in (D11, D10).

[( D1, D 0)+( D3, D 2)+(D5 , D4)] ( D11, D10 )

(D1, D0) 10 0.1

Aft er t he inst ruc tio n is execu ted.

(D3, D2) 113.2 (D11, D10) 33 8.6

_6 (D5, D4) 125.3

Additional remark:

1. If the operand n used is less than 1 or larger than 256, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. If S+2*n-1exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

3. If the value in S exceeds the range of the floating point number can be shown, the instruction is not executed, SM0
is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6-376
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.14 Structure Creation Instructions

6.14.1 List of Structure Creation Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1300 FOR – – Start of the nested loop

1301 NEXT – – End of the nested loop

1302 BREAK – – Terminating the FOR-NEXT loop

6_

6-377
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.14.2 Explanation of Structure Creation Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

1300 FOR S Start of the nested loop

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S ： Number of times the loop is executed repeatedly

Explanation:

Please refer to the instruction API1301 NEXT for more details.

_6

6-378
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1301 NEXT － End of the nested loop

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

Explanation:

1. The program between FOR and NEXT is executed N times. After the program between FOR and NEXT is executed

N times, the program follows NEXT is executed. The instruction FOR specifies the number of times the program

between FOR and NEXT is executed.

2. N should be within the range between 1 and 32,767. If N is less than 1, it is count as 1.

3. If the program between FOR and NEXT is not executed, it can be skipped by the use of the instruction CJ.

4. The following conditions result in errors.

 The instruction NEXT is prior to the instruction FOR.

 The instruction FOR exists, but the instruction NEXT does not exist.
6_
 The instruction NEXT follows the instruction FEND or END.

 The number of times the instruction FOR is used is different from the number of times the instruction NEXT is

used.

5. FOR/NEXT supports the nested program structure. There are at most 32 levels of nested program structures. If the

loop is executed many times, it takes more time for the program in the PLC to be scanned, and the watchdog timer

error will occur. Users can use the instruction WDT to resolve the problem.

6-379
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 1:

After program A is executed three times, the program follows the instruction NEXT is executed. Program B is executed

four times every time program is executed. Therefore, program B is executed twelve times in total.

Example 2:

When X0.0 is OFF, the program between FOR and NEXT is executed. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction CJ is executed.
_6 The execution of the program jumps to LABEL 1:, i.e. network 6, and network 4~network 5 are not executed.

6-380
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example 3:

If the program between FOR and NEXT is not executed, it can be skipped by the use of the instruction CJ. When X0.1 in

network 8 is ON, the instruction CJ is executed. The execution of the program jumps to LABEL 1:, i.e. network 12, and

network 9~network 11 are not executed.

6_

6-381
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_6

6-382
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Additional remark:

Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to the usage of the label.

6_

6-383
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1302 BREAK D Terminating the FOR-NEXT loop

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D  DWORD     

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:
Device in which the remaining
D ： number of times the loop can be
executed is stored

Explanation:

1. The instruction BREAK is used to terminate the FOR/NEXT loop. The remaining number of times the FOR/NEXT

loop can be repeated is stored in D, and the execution of the program jumps to the instruction NEXT and execute

the next instruction.

_6
2. When the instruction BREAK is executed, the remaining number of times the FOR/NEXT loop can be repeated is

stored in D, including this time the instruction BREAK is executed.

3. When the instruction BREAK is executed for the first time to terminate the FOR/NEXT loop, the execution of the
program cannot jump to the instruction NEXT to execute the next instruction. But if the instruction BREAK is

executed for more than one time to terminate the FOR/NEXT loop, the execution of the program can jump to the

instruction NEXT to execute the next instruction.

Example:

When the FOR/NEXT loop is executed, 1 is added to the value in D0. When the value in D0 is equal to 30, the FOR/NEXT

loop is terminated, and the remaining number of times the FOR/NEXT loop can be repeated, i.e. 71, is stored in D10. The

execution of the program jumps to LABEL 1:, i.e. network 6, and 1 is added to the value in D2.

6-384
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6_

Additional remark:

1. If the instruction BREAK is outside the FOR/NEXT loop, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed,
SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2017.

2. Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to the usage of the label.

6-385
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.15 Module Instructions

6.15.1 List of Module Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1400 FROM DFROM  Reading the data from the control register in the extension module

1401 TO DTO  Writing the data into the control register in the extension module

_6

6-386
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6.15.2 Explanation of Module Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

Reading the data from the control

1400 D FROM P m1，m2，m3，D1，D2，n
register in the extension module

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

m1         
m2         
m3         
D1    
D2    
n         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

m1     
m2     
m3     
D1     
D2     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol: 6_
Numbers of the CPU module or the
m1 ：
remote extension module
The order numbers of the extension
m2 ：
number

m3 ： Control register number

D1 ： Device in which the data is stored

D2 ： Device in which the error code is stored

n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. Users can use this instruction to read the data from the control register in the extension module.

2. The operand m1 should be within the range between 0 and 16. 0 represents the CPU module, and 1~16 represent
the extension modules.

6-387
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3. The operand m2 represents the number of the right-side extension modules that is connected to the CPU module or
the remote modules. The first device is number 1, the second device is number 2 and so on. Any type of the

connected modules will be counted and up to 32 devices can be connected.

4. The operand m3 specifies the control register number.

5. When the instruction FROM is executed, D2 is set to 0. When an error occurs, D2 is not set to 0. Please refer to the
additional remark below for more information about the error codes. When the instruction is not executed, D2 will not

be specified by any error code.

6. The operand m1 should be within the range between 1 and 8.

7. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not he device E.

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the instruction FROM is executed. Read the data stored in CR#2 from the right

side of the first module and store the data in D100. Owing to the fact that no error occurs, the code stored in D110 is

16#0000.

_6

Additional remark:

1. If the values in m1 and m2 exceed the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,

and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If D1~D1+n-1 exceed the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

3. If the value in n exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

4. Due to the fact that the use of the instruction FROM decreases the execution efficiency of the CPU module and that

of the I/O module, users are suggested to use pulse type instruction to perform a single trigger as the example

shown above.

6-388
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

5. When the instruction is executed, if there is any error responded from modules, the error code will be stored in D2.

The descriptions of the error codes are shown below:

Error code Description

16#1400 Reading the data from the control register (CR) in the module but no such CR number.

16#1401 The value inputted in the module is invalid.

16#1402 The module is not responding. Communication timeout.

6_

6-389
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Writing the data into the control register in
1401 D TO P m1，m2，m3，S，D，n
the extension module

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

m1         

m2         

m3         

S       

D    

n         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

m1     
m2     
m3     
S     
D     
n     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

_6 Symbol:

Numbers of the CPU module or the

m1 ：
remote extension module
The order numbers of the extension
m2 ：
number

m3 ： Control register number

S ： Device in which the data is stored

Device in which the error code is

D ：
stored

n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. Users can use this instruction to write the data to the control register in the extension module.

2. The operand m1 should be within the range between 0 and 16. 0 represents the CPU module, and 1~16 represent

6-390
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

the extension modules.

3. The operand m2 represents the number of the right-side extension modules that is connected to the CPU module or
the remote modules. The first device is number 1, the second device is number 2 and so on. Any type of the

connected modules will be counted and up to 32 devices can be connected.

4. The operand m3 specifies the control register number.

5. When the instruction FROM is executed, D2 is set to 0. When an error occurs, D2 is not set to 0. Please refer to the
additional remark below for more information about the error codes. When the instruction is not executed, D2 will not

be specified by any error code.

6. The operand m1 should be within the range between 1 and 8.

7. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not he device E.

8. When S is a hexadecimal value, n hexadecimal values are transmitted to the I/O module. Suppose S is 16#0001
and n is 3. Three 16#0001s are transmitted to the I/O module.

Example:

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON, the instruction TO is executed. Write the data stored in D100 to CR#2 in the right

side of the first module. Owing to the fact that no error occurs, the code stored in D110 is 16#0000.

6_

Additional remark:

1. If the values in m1 and m2 exceed the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If D1~D1+n-1 exceed the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

3. If the value in n exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6-391
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

4. Due to the fact that the use of the instruction TO decreases the execution efficiency of the CPU module and that of

the I/O module, users are suggested to use pulse type instruction to perform a single trigger as the example shown

above.

5. When the instruction is executed, if there is any error responded from modules, the error code will be stored in D2.

The descriptions of the error codes are shown below:

Error code Description

16#1400 Reading the data from the control register (CR) in the module but no such CR number.

16#1401 The value inputted in the module is invalid.

16#1402 The module is not responding. Communication timeout.

_6

6-392
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.16 Floating-point Number Instructions

6.16.1 List of Floating-point Number Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1500 – FSIN  Sine of the floating-point number

1501 – FCOS  Cosine of the floating-point number

1502 – FTAN  Tangent of the floating-point number

1503 – FASIN  Arcsine of the floating-point number

1504 – FACOS  Arccosine of the floating-point number

1505 – FATAN  Arctangent of the floating-point number

1506 – FSINH  Hyperbolic sine of the floating-point number

1507 – FCOSH  Hyperbolic cosine of the floating-point number

1508 – FTANH  Hyperbolic tangent of the floating-point number

1509 – FRAD  Converting the degree to the radian

1510 – FDEG  Converting the radian to the degree

1511 SQR DSQR  Square root of the binary number


1512 – FSQR Square root of the floating-point number
6_
1513 – FEXP  Exponent of the floating-point number

1514 – FLOG  Logarithm of the floating-point number

1515 – FLN  Natural logarithm of the binary floating-point number

1516 – FPOW  Power of the floating-point number

1517 RAND –  Random number

6-393
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.16.2 Explanation of Floating-point Number Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

1500 FSIN P S，D Sine of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Sine value

Explanation:

1. Whether the source value specified by S is a radian or a degree depends on the state of SM695.
_6
2. If SM695 is OFF, the source value specified by S is a radian. Radian=Degree×π/180.

3. If SM695 is ON, the source value specified by S is a degree.

Degree=Radian×180/π. (0 ≦Degree≦360 )
o 0

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

5. The sine of the source value specified by S is stored in the register specified by D.

6. The relation between radians and sine values are shown below.

6-394
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the binary-coded decimal value in X1.15~X1.0 is converted into the binary value, and the conversion

result is stored in D0. The binary value in D0 is converted into the floating-point number, and the conversion result is

stored in (D11, D10). The floating-point number in (D11, D10) is converted into the radian, and the conversion result is

stored in (D21, D20). The sine of the radian in (D21, D20) is stored in (D31, D30), and the sine value is the floating-point

number.

X1.15~X1.0 BIN D0 F LT D11~D10

0 0 9 0 90 R90
Binary -coded Binary val ue F loating- point 6_
decimal value number

F RAD D21~D20 F SIN D31~D30

R1.570796 R1
F loating- point F loating- point
number number

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction
is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

2. If SM695 is ON, and the value in S is less than 0 or larger than 360, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and
the error code is 16#2003.

6-395
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1501 FCOS P S，D Cosine of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Cosine value

Explanation:

1. Whether the source value specified by S is a radian or a degree depends on the state of SM695.

_6
2. If SM695 is OFF, the source value specified by S is a radian. Radian=Degree×π/180.

3. If SM695 is ON, the source value specified by S is a degree.

Degree=Radian×180/π. (0 ≦Degree≦360 )
o 0

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

5. The cosine of the source value specified by S is stored in the register specified by D.

6. The relation between radians and cosine values are shown below.

6-396
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the binary-coded decimal value in X1.15~X1.0 is converted into the binary value, and the conversion

result is stored in D0. The binary value in D0 is converted into the floating-point number, and the conversion result is

stored in (D11, D10). The floating-point number in (D11, D10) is converted into the radian, and the conversion result is

stored in (D21, D20). The cosine of the radian in (D21, D20) is stored in (D31, D30), and the cosine value is the

floating-point number.

X1.15~X1.0 BIN D0 F LT D11~D10

6_
0 3 6 0 360 R360
Binary -coded Binary value F loating-point
decimal value number

F RAD D21~D20 F CO S D31~D30

R6.283185 R1
F loating-point F loating-point
number number

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction

is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

2. If SM695 is ON, and the value in S is less than 0 or larger than 360, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code is 16#2003.

6-397
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1502 FTAN P S，D Tangent of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Tangent value

Explanation:

1. Whether the source value specified by S is a radian or a degree depends on the state of SM695.

_6 2. If SM695 is OFF, the source value specified by S is a radian. Radian=Degree×π/180.

3. If SM695 is ON, the source value specified by S is a degree.

Degree=Radian×180/π. (0 ≦Degree≦360 )
o 0

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

5. The tangent of the source value specified by S is stored in the register specified by D.

6. The relation between radians and tangent values are shown below.

6-398
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the binary-coded decimal value in X1.15~X1.0 is converted into the binary value, and the conversion

result is stored in D0. The binary value in D0 is converted into the floating-point number, and the conversion result is

stored in (D11, D10). The floating-point number in (D11, D10) is converted into the radian, and the conversion result is

stored in (D21, D20). The tangent of the radian in (D21, D20) is stored in (D31, D30), and the tangent value is the

floating-point number.

6_

X1.15~X1.0 BIN D0 F LT D11~D10

0 0 4 5 45 R56
Binary -coded Binary val ue F loating- point
decimal value number

F RAD D21~D20 F TAN D31~D30

R0.785398 R1
F loating- point F loating- point
number number

6-399
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction

is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

2. If SM695 is ON, and the value in S is less than 0 or larger than 360, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code is 16#2003.

_6

6-400
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1503 FASIN P S，D Arcsine of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Arcsine value

Explanation:

-1
1. Arcsine value=sin

The relation between sine values and arcsine values are shown below. 6_

2. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

6-401
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the arcsine of the floating-point number in (D1, D0) is stored in (D11, D10). The arcsine value in (D11,

D10) is converted into the degree, and the conversion result is stored in (D21, D20). The degree in (D21, D20) is

converted into the integer, and the conversion result is stored in (D31, D30). The integer in (D31, D30) is converted into

the binary-coded decimal value, and the conversion result is stored in Y0.15~Y0.0.

D0 F ASIN D11~D10 F DEG D21~D20

R1 R1.570796 R45
F loating- point F loating- point F loating- point
_6 number number number

DINT D31~D30 BCD Y1.15~Y1.0

90 0 0 4 5
Binary v al ue Binary -coded
decimal value

Additional remark:

1. The floating-point number specified by the operand S should be within the range between –1.0 and +1.0. If the

floating-point number is not within the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2003.

2. If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction

is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6-402
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1504 FACOS P S，D Arccosine of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Arccosine value

Explanation:

-1
1. Arccosine value=cos

The relation between cosine values and arccosine values are shown below.

6_

2. If the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum

floating-point number, SM602 is ON.

3. If the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum

floating-point number, SM601 is ON.

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

6-403
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the arccosine of the floating-point number in (D1, D0) is stored in (D11, D10). The arccosine value in

(D11, D10) is converted into the degree, and the conversion result is stored in (D21, D20). The degree in (D21, D20) is

converted into the integer, and the conversion result is stored in (D31, D30). The integer in (D31, D30) is converted into

the binary-coded decimal value, and the conversion result is stored in Y0.15~Y0.0.

D0 F ACO S D11~D10 F DEG D21~D20

R1 R3.141592 R180
F loating- point F loating- point F loating- point
_6 number number number

DINT D31~D30 BCD Y1.15~Y1.0

180 0 1 8 0
Binary v al ue Binary -coded
decimal value

Additional remark:

1. The floating-point number specified by the operand S should be within the range between –1.0 and +1.0. If the

floating-point number is not within the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0

is 16#2003.

2. If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction

is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6-404
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1505 FATAN P S，D Arctangent of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Arctangent value

Explanation:

-1
1. Arctangent value=tan

2. The relation between tangent values and arctangent values are shown below. 6_

3. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

6-405
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the arctangent of the floating-point number in (D1, D0) is stored in (D11, D10). The arctangent value in

(D11, D10) is converted into the degree, and the conversion result is stored in (D21, D20). The degree in (D21, D20) is

converted into the integer, and the conversion result is stored in (D31, D30). The integer in (D31, D30) is converted into

the binary-coded decimal value, and the conversion result is stored in Y0.15~Y0.0.

D0 F ATAN D11~D10 F DEG D21~D20

R1 R0.785398 R45
F loating- point F loating- point F loating- point
_6 number number number

DINT D31~D30 BCD Y1.15~Y1.0

45 0 0 4 5
Binary v al ue Binary -coded
decimal value

Additional remark:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6-406
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

Hyperbolic sine of the floating-point
1506 FSINH P S，D
number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ：

D ：

Explanation:

Hyperbolic sine value=(e -e )/2.

s -s
1.

2. If the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum

floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F800000, and SM602 is ON. 6_

3. If the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum

floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F800000, and SM601 is ON.

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the hyperbolic sine of the floating-point number in (D1, D0) is stored in (D11, D10). The
hyperbolic sine value in (D11, D10) is the floating-point number.

S Single-pr ecision
D1 D0
floati ng- poi nt number

D D11 D10 Hyperbolic sine value

6-407
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

2. If the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum
floating-point number, SM602 is ON.

3. If the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum
floating-point number, SM601 is ON.

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

Additional result:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-408
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

Hyperbolic cosine of the floating-point
1507 FCOSH P S，D
number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Hyperbolic cosine value

Explanation:

Hyperbolic cosine value=(e +e )/2.

s -s
1.

2. If the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum
6_
floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F800000, and SM602 is ON.

3. If the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum
floating-point number, the value in D is 16#FF800000, and SM601 is ON.

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the hyperbolic cosine of the floating-point number in (D1, D0) is stored in (D11, D10). The

hyperbolic cosine value in (D11, D10) is the floating-point number.

6-409
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

S D1 D0 Single-pr ecision
floati ng- point number

D D11 D10 Hyperbolic cosi ne value

2. If the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum

floating-point number, SM602 is ON.

3. If the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum

floating-point number, SM601 is ON.

4. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

Additional remark:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-410
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

Hyperbolic tangent of the floating-point
1508 FTANH P S，D
number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

D ： Hyperbolic tangent value

Explanation:

Hyperbolic tangent value=(e -e )/(e +e ).

s -s s -s
1.

2. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

6_

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the hyperbolic tangent of the floating-point number in (D1, D0) is stored in (D11, D10). The
hyperbolic tangent value in (D11, D10) is the floating-point number.

Single- pr ecision
S D1 D0
floati ng- point number

D D11 D10 Hyperbolic tangent value

2. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

6 - 4 11
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-412
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1509 FRAD P S，D Converting the degree to the radian

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source (degree)

D ： Conversion result (radian)

Explanation:

1. The equation below is used to convert degrees into radians.

6_
2. Radian＝Degree×(π/180).

3. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the degree in (D1, D0) is converted into the radian, and the conversion result is stored in (D11, D10).

The radian in (D11, D10) is the floating-point number.

Degree
S D1 D0
F loating- point number

D D11 D10 Radian (Degree ×π/180 )

F loating- point number

6-413
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-414
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1510 FDEG P S，D Converting the radian to the degree

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Data source (radian)

D ： Conversion result (Degree)

Explanation:

1. The equation below is used to convert radians into degrees.

2. Degree＝Radian×(180/π).

6_
3. If the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum

floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F7FFFFF.

4. If the absolute value of the conversion result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum

floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F7FFFFF.

5. If the conversion result is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the radian in (D1, D0) is converted into the degree, and the conversion result is stored in (D11, D10).

The degree in (D11, D10) is the floating-point number.

6-415
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Radian
S D1 D0 Fl oating-point number

D D11 D10 Degree ( Radian×180 /π )

Fl oating-point number

Additional remark:

If the value in S exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

_6

6-416
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1511 D SQR P S，D Square root of the binary number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S       
      

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Device in which the result is stored

Explanation:

1. The square root of the value in the device specified by S is calculated, and the result is stored in the device specified 6_
by D.

2. The operation result stored in D is an integer. If the floating-point number is rounded down to the nearest whole digit,

SM601 is ON.

3. If the operation result stored in D is 0, SM600 is ON.

4. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the square root of the value in D0 is calculated, and the result is stored in D10.

6-417
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. The value in the device specified by S only can be a positive value. If the value in the device specified by S is a

negative value, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

_6

6-418
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1512 FSQR P S，D Square root of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

D ： Device in which the result is stored

Explanation:

1. The square root of the floating-point number in the register specified by S is calculated, and the result is stored in

the register specified by D.

2. If the operation result stored in D is 0, SM600 is ON. 6_

Example 1:

When X0.0 is ON, the square root of the floating-point number in (D1, D0) is calculated, and the result is stored in (D11,

D10).

Additional remark:

1. The value in the device specified by S only can be a positive value. If the value in the device specified by S is a

negative value, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

6-419
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1513 FEXP P S，D An exponent of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

Device in which the operation result is

D ：
stored

Explanation:

1. Exponentiation involves two numbers, the base e which represents 2.71828, and the exponent in the device
specified by S.

_6 2. EXP[D+1, D]=[S+1, S].

3. The number in the device specified by S can be a positive number or a negative number. The register specified by D

should be a 32-bit register, and the number in the device specified by S should be a floating-point number.

The value in the register specified by D is e . (e is 2.71828, and S represents the source data.)
S
4.

5. If the absolute value of the conversion result is larger than the value which can be represented by the maximum

floating-point number, the value in the register specified by D is 16#7F800000, and SM602 is ON.

6. If the operation result stored in D is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the value in (D1, D0) is converted into the floating-point number, and the conversion result is

stored in (D11, D10).

2. When X0.1 is ON, the exponentiation with the value in (D11, D10) as the exponent is performed. The result is a

floating-point number, and is stored in (D21, D20).

6-420
Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6_

6-421
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1514 FLOG P S1，S2，D Logarithm of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Device in which the base is stored

S2 ： Source device
Device in which the operation result is
D ：
stored
Explanation:

_6 1. The logarithm of the value in S2 with respect to the value in S1 is calculated, and the single-precision floating-point

operation result is stored in D.

2. The values in S1 and S2 only can be positive values.

S1 =S2.→D=LogS1S2.
D
3.

4. Example: Suppose the values in S1 and S2 are 5 and 125 respectively. Find log5125.

S1 =S2.→5D=125.→D=log5125=3.
D
5.

6. If the operation result stored in D is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the values in (D1, D0) and (D3, D2) are converted into the floating-point numbers, and the
conversion results are stored in (D11, D10) and (D13, D12) respectively.

2. When X0.1 is ON, the logarithm of the floating-point number in (D13, D12) with respect to the floating-point number
in (D11, D10) is calculated, and the operation result is stored in (D21, D20).

6-422
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 is less than or equal to 1, or if the value in S2 is less or equal to 0, the instruction is not executed,
SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6_

6-423
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Natural logarithm of the binary
1515 FLN P S，D
floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S         
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S ： Source device

Device in which the operation result is

D：
stored

Explanation:

1. The natural logarithm of the operand S is calculated by the single-precision floating-point operation.

2. The value in S only can be a positive value.

_6
e =S.→The value in D=lnS.
D
3.

4. If the operation result stored in D is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the value in (D1, D0) is converted into the floating-point number, and the conversion result is

stored in (D11, D10).

2. When X0.1 is ON, the natural logarithm of the floating-point number in (D11, D10) is calculated, and the operation

result is stored in (D21, D20).

6-424
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S is less than or equal to 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

6_

6-425
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1516 FPOW P S1，S2，D A power of the floating-point number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1        
S2        
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Device in which the base is stored

S2 ： Device in which the power is stored

Device in which the operation result is
D ：
stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The single-precision floating-point number in S1 is raised to the power of the value in S2, and the he single-precision

floating-point operation result is stored in D.

2. D=POW[S1+1，S1]^[S2+1，S2]

3. The value in S1 only can be a positive value, whereas the value in S2 can be a positive value or a negative value.

3
4. Suppose the values in S1 and S2 are 5 and 3 respectively. D=5 =125.

5. If the absolute value of the operation result is large than the value which can be represented by the maximum

floating-point number, the value in D is 16#7F7FFFFF, and SM602 is ON.

6. If the absolute value of the operation result is less than the value which can be represented by the minimum

floating-point number, the value in D is 16#FF800000, and SM601 is ON.

7. If the operation result stored in D is 0, SM600 is ON.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the values in (D1, D0) and (D3, D2) are converted into the floating-point numbers, and the

conversion results are stored in (D11, D10) and (D13, D12) respectively.

6-426
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

2. When X0.1 is ON, the floating-point number in (D11, D10) is raised to the power of the floating-point number in (D13,

D12), and the operation result is stored in (D21, D20).

3. When X0.2 is ON, the binary floating-point number in (D21, D20) is converted into the binary-coded decimal

floating-point number, and the conversion result is stored in (D31, D30).

6_
Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 is less than 0, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-427
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1517 RAND P S1，S2，D Random number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1          
S2          
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Minimum value

S2 ： Maximum value

D ： Device in which the result is stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to generate the random number within the range between the minimum value in S1 and the
maximum value in S2, and the result is stored in D.

2. If the value in S1 is larger than the value in S2, the values in S1 and S2 are taken as the maximum value and the

minimum value respectively when the instruction is executed.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the random number within the range between the minimum value in D0 and the maximum value in D10

is generated, and the result is stored in D20.

Additional remark:

The values in S1 and S2 should be within the range between 0 and 0~32767. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range,

the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-428
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

6.17 Real-time Clock Instructions

6.17.1 List of Real-time Clock Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1600 TRD –  Reading the time

1601 TWR –  Writing the time

1602 T+ –  Adding the time

1603 T- –  Subtracting the time

1604 HOUR – – Running-time meter

1605 TCMP –  Comparing the time

1606 TZCP –  Time zone comparison

1607 DST –  Daylight saving time

1608 WWON – – Weekly working time setup

6_

6-429
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.17.2 Explanation of Real-time Clock Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

1600 TRD P D Reading the time

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

D ： Device in which the result is stored

Explanation:

1. D: The device in which the current time is stored

_6
2. The operand D occupies seven consecutive devices.

3. The built-in real-time clock in the CPU module provides the data relating to the year, the week, the moth, the day,
the minute, and the second. The data is stored in SR391~SR397. The instruction TRD is used to read the current

time into the seven registers.

4. The last two digits of the year number for A.D. are stored in SR391.

Example:

When M0 is ON, the current time is read from the real-time clock into D0~D6. The value 1 in SR397 represents Monday,

the value 2 represents Tuesday, and by analogy, the value 7 represents Sunday.

6-430
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Special data General data

Item Value Item
register register

SR391 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D0 Year (A.D.)

SR392 Month 1~12 D1 Month

SR393 Day 1~31 D2 Day

SR394 Hour 0~23 D3 Hour

SR395 Minute 0~59 D4 Minute

SR396 Second 0~59 D5 Second

SR397 Week 1~7 D6 Week

Additional remark:

1. If D+6 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. When SM220 is ON, the real-time clock is calibrated within ±30 seconds. If the value of the second in the real-time

clock is within the range between 0 and 29, the value of the second is cleared to zero. If the value of the second in

the real-time clock is within the range between 30 and 59, the value of the minute increases by one, and the value of

the second is cleared to zero.

6_

6-431
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1601 TWR P S Writing the time

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S DWORD    

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Data source

Explanation:

1. S: The device into which the setting value is written

2. The operand S occupies seven consecutive devices.

3. When users want to adjust the built-in real-time clock in the CPU module, they can use the instruction to write the

_6 correct current time into the built-in real-time clock.

4. When the instruction is executed, the new setting time is instantly written into the real-time clock in the PLC.

Therefore, when the instruction is executed, users have to make sure that the new setting time is consistent with the
time when the new setting time is written into the real-time clock.

Example:

When M0 is ON, the correct current time is written into the built-in real-time clock in the PLC.

6-432
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

General data Special data

Item Value Item
register register

D20 Year (A.D.) 00~99 SR391 Year (A.D.)

D21 Month 1~12 SR392 Month

New setting time

Real time clock

D22 Day 1~31 SR393 Day

D23 Hour 0~23 SR394 Hour

D24 Minute 0~59 SR395 Minute

D25 Second 0~59 SR396 Second

D26 Week 1~7 SR397 Week

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM is ON, and the

error code in SR is 16#2003.

2. If S+6 exceeds the device range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM is ON, and the error

code in SR is 16#2003.

3. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [7] of WORD/INT.

6_

6-433
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1602 T+ P S1，S2，D Adding the time

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1     
S2     
D   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Source device 1

S2 ： Source device 2

D ： Device in which the result is stored

_6
Explanation:

1. The value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second in the real-time clock specified by S2 are

added to the value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second in the real-time clock specified

by S1, and the sum is stored in the register specified by D.

2. The operands S1, S2, and D each occupy three consecutive devices.

3. If the sum is larger than or equal to 24 hours, SM602 is ON, and the result gotten from the subtraction of 24 hours

from the sum is stored in D.

4. If the sum is 0 (0 hour 0 minute 0 second), SM600 is ON.

Example:

When M0 is ON, the instruction T+ is executed. The alue of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second

in D10~D12 are added to the value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second in D0~D2, and the

sum is stored in D20~D22.

6-434
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

D0 8 ( Hour ) D10 6 ( Hour ) D20 14 ( Hour )

D1 10 ( Minute) + D11 40 ( Minute ) D21 50 ( Minute )
D2 20 ( Second) D12 6 ( Second ) D22 26 ( Second )
8 hour 10 minute 20 second 6 hour 40 minute 6 second 14 hour 50 minute 26 second

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,

and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S1+2, S2+2, or D+2 exceeds the device range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is
ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If users declare the operand S1 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

4. If users declare the operand S2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/IN.

5. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT. 6_

6-435
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1603 T- P S1，S2，D Subtracting the time

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1     
S2     
D   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Source device 1

S2 ： Source device 2

D ： Device in which the result is stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second in the real-time clock specified by S2 are

subtracted from the value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second in the real-time clock

specified by S1, and the difference is stored in the register specified by D.

2. The operands S1, S2, and D all occupy three consecutive devices.

3. If the difference is a negative, SM601 is ON, and the result gotten from the addition of 24 hours to the difference is

stored in D.

4. If the difference is 0 (0 hour 0 minute 0 second), SM600 is ON.

Example:

1. When M0 is ON, the instruction T- is executed. The value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the

second in D10~D12 are subtracted from the value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second

in D0~D2, and the difference is stored in D20~D22.

D0 20 ( Hour ) D10 14 ( Hour ) D20 5 ( Hour )

D1 20 ( Minute) - D11 30 ( Minute ) D21 49 ( Minute )
D2 5 ( Second) D12 8 ( Second ) D22 57 ( Second )
20 hour 20 minute 50 second 14 hour 30 minute 8 second 5 hour 49 minute 57 second

6-436
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

2. If the difference is a negative, SM601 is ON.

5 ( Hour ) 19 ( Hour ) 10 ( Hour )

20 ( Minute) - 11 ( Minute) 9 ( Minute)
30 ( Second) 15 ( Second ) 15 ( Second )
5 hour 20 minute 30 second 19 hour 11 mi nute 15 second 10 hour 9 minute 15 second

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,

and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S1+2, S2+2, or D+2 exceeds the device range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is

ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If users declare the operand S1 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

4. If users declare the operand S2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT. 6_
5. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

6-437
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1604 HOUR S，D1，D2 Running-time meter

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S        
D1 
D2     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
D1   
D2 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS

Symbol:
Time after which the output
S ：
device is ON
D1 ： Current time

D2 ： Output device

Explanation:

_6 1. S: The time after which the output device is ON (Unit: Hour)

D1: The current time (Unit: Hour)

D2: The output device

2. S: The time after which the output device is ON (Unit: Hour)

The operand S used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 1 and 32,767.

3. The instruction HOUR:

D1: The current time (Unit: Hour)

The value in D1 should be within the range between 0 and 32,767.

D1+1: The current time which is less than one hour (Unit: Second)

The value in D1+1 should be within the range between 0 and 3,599.

D1+2 is for system use only. The value in it cannot be altered when the instruction is executed. Otherwise, an error

will occur.

6-438
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

When the current time is 32,767 hour 3,599 second, the timer stops counting. After the values in D1 and D1+1 are

cleared to 0, the timer starts to count again.

4. When the time for which the input contact has been ON reaches the setting time, the ouput device is ON. When the

time for which the input contact has been ON does not reach the setting time, the ouput device is not ON. This

function allows users to manage the running time of the machine and the maintenance.

5. After the output device is ON, the timer countinues to count.

6. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

Example 1:

The 16-bit instruction HOUR: When X0.0 is ON, the timer starts to count. When the time for which X0.0 has been ON

reaches 100 hours, Y0.0 is ON. The current time is recorded in D0, and the current time which is less than one hour is

recorded in D1. D2 is for system use. The value in it can not be altered. Otherwise, an error will occur.

6_

Additional remark:

1. When S is less than or equal to 0, the instruction is not executed, and the state of the output device is unchanged.

2. If the value in D1 used in the instruction HOUR is less than 0, the state of the output device is unchanged.

3. If D1+2 used in the instruction HOUR exceeds the device range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not
executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If the operand D1 used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

5. If the operand D1 used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [2] of DWORD/DINT.

6-439
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1605 TCMP P S1，S2，S3，S，D Comparing the time

Device
X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F
S1          
S2          
S3          
S   
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Hour of the setting time

_6
S2 ： Minute of the setting time

S3 ： Second of the setting time

S ： Current time

D ： Comparison result

Explanation:

1. The value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second specified by S1~S3 are compared with
the value of the hour, the value of the minute, and the value of the second in the devices starting from the device

specified by S, and the comparison result is stored in D.

2. The hour of the current time is in the device specified by S, and the value of the hour should be within the range

between 0 and 23. The minute of the current time is in the device specified by S+1, and the value of the minute

should be within the range between 0 and 59. The second of the current time is in the device specified by S+2, and

the value of the second should be within the range between 0 and 59.

3. The operand D occupies three consecutive devices. The comparison result is stored in D, D+1, and D+2.

4. Users generally use the instruction TRD to read the current time from the real-time clock first, and then they use the

6-440
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

instruction TCMP to compare the time.

5. If the setting time in S1~S3 is larger than the current time in S, D is ON, D+1 is OFF, and D+2 is OFF.

6. If the setting time in S1~S3 is equal to the current time in S, D is OFF, D+1 is ON, and D+2 is OFF.

7. If the setting time in S1~S3 is less than the current time in S, D is OFF, D+1 is OFF, and D+2 is ON.

Example:

1. When X0.0 is ON, the instruction is executed. The setting time 12 hour 20 minute 45 second is compared with the

current time in D20~D22, and the comparison result is stored in M10~M12. When X0.0 is switched from ON to OFF,

the instruction is not executed. Besides, the state of M10, the state of M11, and the state of M12 remain the same as

those before X0.0’s being ON.

2. If users want to get the comparison result ≧, ≦, or ≠, they can connect M10~M12 is series or in parallel.

6_

Additional remark:

1. If S+2 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If D+2 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-441
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3. If the value in S exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the

error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If the values in S1~S3 exceed the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and

the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD.

6. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of BOOL.

_6

6-442
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1606 TZCP P S1，S2，S，D Time zone comparison

Device
X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F
S1    
S2    
S   
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Lower limit time

S2 ： Upper limit time

S ： Current time
6_
D ： Comparison result

Explanation:

1. The instruction is used to compare the current time specified by S with the lower limit time specified by S1, and

compare the current time specified by S with the upper limit time specified by S2, and the comparison result is stored

in D.

2. The hour of the lower limit time is in the device specified by S1, the minute of the lower limit time e is in the device

specified by S1+1, and the second of the lower limit time is in the device specified by S1+2.

3. The hour of the upper limit time is in the device specified by S2, the minute of the upper limit time e is in the device

specified by S2+1, and the second of the upper limit time is in the device specified by S2+2.

4. The hour of the current time is in the device specified by S, the minute of the current time e is in the device specified

by S+1, and the second of the current time is in the device specified by S+2.

5. The time in the device specified by S1 must be less than the time in the device specified by S2. If the time in the

device specified by S1 is larger than the time in the device specified by S2, the time in the device specified by S1 will

be taken as the upper/lower limit time during the execution of the instruction TZCP.

6-443
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6. Users generally use the instruction TRD to read the current time from the real-time clock first, and then they use the

instruction TZCP to compare the time.

7. If the current time in the device specified by S is less than the lower limit time in the device specified by S1, and is

less than the upper limit time in the device specified by S2, D is ON. If the current time in the device specified by S is

larger than the lower limit time in the device specified by S1, and is larger than the upper limit time in the device

specified by S2, D+2 is ON. In other conditions, D+1 is ON.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the instruction TZCP is executed. M10, M11, or M12 is ON. When X0.0 is OFF, the instruction TZCP is

not executed, the state of M10, the state of M11, and the state of M12 remain the same as those before X0.0’s being ON.

_6

Additional remark:

1. If S1+2, S2+2, S+2, or D+2 exceeds the device range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code
in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the values in S1, S2, and S exceed the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003

3. If users declare the operand S1 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

4. If users declare the operand S2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

5. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

6. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of BOOL.

6-444
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1607 DST P S，S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，D Daylight saving time

Device
X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F
S     
S1     
S2     
S3     
S4     
S5     
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data INT
type

S   
S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
S5   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
6_
Symbol:
Disable/enable/read the daylight saving
S ：
time
S1 ： Month of the daylight saving start time

S2 ： Date of the daylight saving start time

S3 ： Month of the daylight saving end time

S4 ： Date of the daylight saving end time

Duration of the daylight saving time
S5 ：
(minutes)
D ： The state of the daylight saving function

Explanation:

1. When the operand S is 0, the function of daylight saving time is disabled. When the operand S is 1, the function of

daylight saving time is enabled. When the operand S is 2, the function of daylight saving time is being read. When

the value shown in the S is not in the range of 0~2, it means the function of daylight saving time is being read.

2. After the instruction is executed, the state of the daylight saving time will be stored in D. When the value in D is OFF,

the daylight saving time is disabled. When the value in D is ON, the daylight saving time is enabled.

6-445
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3. S1、S2: Settings for the month and the date to start the daylight saving time

4. S3、S4: Settings for the month and the date to end the daylight saving time

5. S5: Settings for the duration of the daylight saving time; unit: minute

6. When the instruction is executed to disable or enable the function of daylight saving time, the system time of the PLC

will not be affected.

7. When the function of daylight saving time is enabled and the system runs for the first time during the start time (S1,

S2), the system time will add the value set in S5 for one time. When the function of daylight saving time is disabled

and the system runs for the first time during the end time (S1, S2), the system time will subtract the value set in S5 for

one time.

8. When the S is set to enable the daylight saving time, the start/end month should be set between 1~12 and the

start/end date should be set between 1~31. The start date should be set before the end date, for example, do not set
st st
the start date as Oct. 1 and the end date as April 1 . And the value should be set according to the actual calendar,
st
for example if users set a date as April 31 but there is no such date, this function will not be enabled and the SM0

will be ON, the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

9. When the S is set to enable the daylight saving time, the settings range should be within 1~1439 minutes, if not this

function will not be enabled and the SM0 will be ON, the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

10. When the S is set to disable the daylight saving time, the values in S1~S5 are irrelevant.
_6
11. When the S is set to read the state of the daylight saving function and the output state of D is ON, the PLC will save

the setting values in operand S1~S5. The device is be set to D while the S is set to read. If the device is set to K or

16#, the values will not be saved. And the SM0 will be ON, the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

Example 1:

st rd
To enable the daylight saving function and set the daylight starting on April 1 and ending on September 3 and the

duration is 60 minutes.

6-446
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

When the X0.0 is ON, the M0 will be ON too, meaning the daylight saving function is enabled.

That is the PLC system time will add 60 minutes when the date April 1st comes, and when the date September 3rd comes,

the PLC system will subtract the 60 minutes to stop the daylight saving.

Example 2:

Use the instruction DST or the HWCONFIG in ISPSoft to read the daylight saving state.

When the X0.0 is ON, the settings concerning the daylight saving will be stored in the assigned registers; see the

examples below:

Device Setting Value Description

D1 4 Starting month: April 6_

st
D2 1 Starting date: 1

D3 9 Ending month: September

st
D4 3 Ending date: 1

D5 60 Duration: 60 minutes

M1 ON The function of daylight saving time is ON.

6-447
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1608 WWON S1，S2，D Weekly working time setup

Device
X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F
S1 
S2 
S3 
S4 
D   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： The hour to start working (occupies 7 consecutive devices)

The minute to start working (occupies 7 consecutive
S2 ：
devices)
_6 S3 ： The hour to stop working (occupies 7 consecutive devices)
The minute to stop working (occupies 7 consecutive
S4 ：
devices)
D ： Output control

Explanation:

1. S1~ S1+6 allows users to set the hour to start working on Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday /
Friday / Saturday respectively. This operand occupies 7 consecutive devices, users can use the variables in ARRAY

to declare the operands.

2. S2~ S2+6 S1~ S1+6 allows users to set the minutes to start working on Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday /
Thursday / Friday / Saturday respectively. This operand occupies 7 consecutive devices, users can use the variables

in ARRAY to declare the operands.

3. S3~ S3+6 allows users to set the hour to stop working on Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday /

Friday / Saturday respectively. This operand occupies 7 consecutive devices, users can use the variables in ARRAY

to declare the operands.

4. S4~ S4+6 allows users to set the minutes to stop working on Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday /

6-448
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

Friday / Saturday respectively. This operand occupies 7 consecutive devices, users can use the variables in ARRAY

to declare the operands.

5. When the hour value in S1 is larger than the value set in S3, it means the time to stop working is the next day. For

example when users set the time to start working at 18:00 on Monday and the time to stop working at 6:00 , it means

the time to stops working is at 6:00 Tuesday.

Start working time Stop working time

Day Start Hour Start Minute Stop Hour Stop Minute

Sunday S1 24 S2 00 S3 24 S4 00

Monday S1+1 18 S2+1 00 S3+1 06 S4+1 00

6. The setting rage for the hour is 0~23. When the setting value is out of range, this function will not be enabled. The

setting rage for the minute is 0~59. When the setting value is out of range, this function will be enabled but will use 0

as the setting value.

7. When it is required to set the work time to be more than 1 day, users can set the hour as 24 and that means the

system will not check the start working time and the stop working time. For example, to set the start working time to 8

am Monday and the stop working time to 8pm Tuesday, settings will be like this S1+1=8, S3+1=24, S1+2 =24 and
S3+2=20. See the formula below:

Start working time Stop working time

Day Start Hour Start Minute Stop Hour Stop Minute 6_

Sunday S1 24 S2 00 S3 24 S4 00

Monday S1+1 08 S2+1 00 S3+1 24 S4+1 00

Tuesday S1+2 24 S2+2 00 S3+2 20 S4+2 00

8. This instruction should work with the real-time clock. Before operating, please make sure the battery is securely

installed and working fine.

9. There is no limit on the number of times the instruction can be executed but the output control device D cannot be

used repeatedly. If users use the device D repeatedly, only the last output result from the instruction WWON will be

executed.

8. If there are more than 1 work hours are needed, please use the instruction WWON for several times as required.

Please note the output control device D cannot be used repeatedly.

6-449
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 1:

Set a working time from 8:00 to 18:00 from Monday to Friday and no work on Saturday and Sunday.

The settings for the device D:

Start working time Stop working time

Day Start Hour Start Minute Stop Hour Stop Minute

Sunday D0 24 D10 00 D20 24 D30 00

Monday D1 08 D11 00 D21 18 D31 00

Tuesday D2 08 D12 00 D22 18 D32 00

Wednesday D3 08 D13 00 D23 18 D33 00

Thursday D4 08 D14 00 D24 18 D34 00

Friday D5 08 D15 00 D25 18 D35 00

Saturday D6 24 D16 00 D26 24 D36 00

_6
When M0 is ON, the Y0.0 is ON from 8:00 to 18:00 from Monday to Friday and for other times the Y0.0 is OFF.

Example 2:

Set a working time from 18:00 Monday to 08:00 Tuesday and from 18:00 Tuesday to 08: 00 Wednesday. Follow this

pattern to 08:00 Saturday and no work on Sunday.

6-450
 Ch a pt er 6 Ap p l i ed I ns t r uc t i ons

The settings for the device D:

Start working time Stop working time

Day Start Hour Start Minute Stop Hour Stop Minute

Sunday D0 24 D10 00 D20 24 D30 00

Monday D1 18 D11 00 D21 08 D31 00

Tuesday D2 18 D12 00 D22 08 D32 00

Wednesday D3 18 D13 00 D23 08 D33 00

Thursday D4 18 D14 00 D24 08 D34 00

Friday D5 18 D15 00 D25 08 D35 00

Saturday D6 24 D16 00 D26 24 D36 00

When M0 is ON, the Y0.0 is ON from 18:00 to 8:00 the next day from Monday to Friday and for other times the Y0.0 is
OFF.

Example 3:

Set a working time from 08:00 to 12:00 and from 14:00 to 17:30 from Monday to Friday. No work on Saturday and Sunday.

6_

6-451
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The settings in the morning for the device D:

Start working time Stop working time

Day Start Hour Start Minute Stop Hour Stop Minute

Sunday D0 24 D10 00 D20 24 D30 00

Monday D1 08 D11 00 D21 12 D31 00

Tuesday D2 08 D12 00 D22 12 D32 00

Wednesday D3 08 D13 00 D23 12 D33 00

Thursday D4 08 D14 00 D24 12 D34 00

Friday D5 08 D15 00 D25 12 D35 00

Saturday D6 24 D16 00 D26 24 D36 00

The settings in the afternoon for the device D:

Start working time Stop working time

Day Start Hour Start Minute Stop Hour Stop Minute

Sunday D40 24 D50 00 D60 24 D70 00

Monday D41 14 D51 00 D61 17 D71 30

Tuesday D42 14 D52 00 D62 17 D72 30

_6
Wednesday D43 14 D53 00 D63 17 D73 30

Thursday D44 14 D54 00 D64 17 D74 30

Friday D45 14 D55 00 D65 17 D75 30

Saturday D46 24 D56 00 D66 24 D76 00

When M0 is ON, the Y0.0 is ON from 08:00 to 12:00 and 14:00 to 17:30 from Monday to Friday and for other times the

Y0.0 is OFF.

6-452
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6.18 Peripheral Instructions

6.18.1 List of Peripheral Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1700 TKY DTKY – Ten-key keypad

1701 HKY DHKY – Sixteen-key keypad

1702 DSW – – DIP switch

1703 ARWS – – Arrow keys

1704 SEGL – – Seven-segment display with latches

6_

6-453
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.18.2 Explanation of Peripheral Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

1700 D TKY S，D1，D2 Ten-key keypad

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S 
D1    
D2    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S 
D1     
D2 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Initial device
Device in which the value is
D1 ：
stored
D2 ： Output signal

_6 Explanation:

1. The ten external inputs starting from the input specified by S represents 0~9 in the decimal system. They are

connected to ten keys. Users can enter a four-digit decimal value 0~9,999 (16-bit instruction) or an eight-digit

decimal value 0~99,999,999 (32-bit instruction) by pressing the keys in order. The decimal value is stored in D1, and
the output signals are stored in D2.

2. The operand S occupies ten bits.

3. The operand D2 occupies eleven bits. Please do not change the states of the bits during the execution of the

instruction.

4. When the conditional contact is not enabled, the eleven bits starting from the bit specified by D2 is OFF.

5. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

6. Only when D1 uses 32-bit instructions, the 32-bit counter can be used.

6-454
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example:

1. The ten external inputs starting from X0.0 is connected to ten keys which represent 0~9 in the decimal system.
When M0 is ON, the instruction is executed. The value that users enter is stored as a binary value in D0, and the

output signals are stored in M10~M19.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

24VDC

X0.0 X0.1 X0.2 X0.3 X0.4 X0.5 X0.6 X0.7 X0.8 X0.9 S/S

Note: The digital input module AH16AM10N-5A is used in this example.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Numeric keys
6_

Binary -coded One- di gi t binary- coded

decimal value decimal code

Ov erflowi ng 10
3 2
10 10
1
10
0

Binary -coded
decimal value

Binary
value D0

2. If the keys connected to X0.5, X0.3, X0.0, and X0.1 are pressed in the order shown in the timing chart, the result
5,301 is stored in D0. The maximum value which can be stored in D0 is 9,999. If the value exceeds four digits, the

first digit from the left overflows.

3. After the key connected to the X0.2 is pressed and before other keys are pressed, M12 is ON. The same applies to
other keys.

6-455
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

4. When a key connected to the input within the range between X0.0 and X0.9 is pressed, the corresponding output
within the range between M10 and M19 is ON.

5. When one of the keys is pressed, M20 is ON.

6. When the conditional contact M0 is switched OFF, the value which was stored in D0 is unchanged. However,
M10~M20 are switched OFF.

X0.0 3

X0.1 4

X0.3 2

X0.5 1

M10

M11

M13

M15

Output si gnal

_6 M20 1 2 3 4

Additional remark:

1. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [10] of BOOL.

2. If users declare the operand D2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [11] of BOOL.

6-456
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

1701 D HKY S1，S2，D1，D2，D3 Sixteen-key keypad

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
D1 
D2    
D3    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2   
D1 
D2     
D3 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Initial input device

S2 ： For system use only

6_
D1 ： Initial output device

D2 ： Device in which the value is stored

D3 ： Output signal

Explanation:

1. The four external inputs starting from the input specified by S are connected to the four external outputs starting

from the output specified by D1 to form a 16-key keypad. The value that users enter by pressing the keys is stored in
D2, and the output signals are stored in D3. If several keys are pressed simultaneously, the value which is smaller is

stored.

2. The value that users enter by pressing the keys is temporarily stored in D2. If the 16-bit instruction HKY is executed,

the maximum value which can be stored in D2 is 9,999. If the value exceeds four digits, the first digit from the left

overflows. If the 32-bit instruction DHKY is executed, the maximum value which can be stored in D2 is 9,999. If the

value exceeds eight digits, the first digit from the left overflows.

3. After the execution of the instruction is complete, SM692 is ON. That is to say, SM692 is ON for a scan cycle after

the execution of the matrix scan is complete.

6-457
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

4. Only when D2 uses 32-bit instructions, the 32-bit counter can be used.

Example:

1. The four external inputs X0.0~X0.3 are connected to the four external outputs Y0.0~Y0.3 to form a 16-key keypad.
When X1.0 is ON, the instruction is executed. The value that users enter is stored as a binary value in D0, and the

output signals are stored in M0~M7.

The function of SM691:

 If SM691 is ON, 0~F are taken as hexadecimal values in the execution of the instruction HKY.

 Numeric keys:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Kyes

Ov erflowi ng 16
3
16
2 1
16 16
0

_6

D0

 If SM691 is OFF, A~F are taken as function keys in the execution of the instruction HKY.

 Numeric keys:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Numeric keys

Bina ry -c oded One- di gi t binary- coded

dec imal v alue
decimal code

Ov erflowi ng 10
3
10
2
10
1
10
0

Bina ry -c oded
dec imal v alue

Binary
D0
value

6-458
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

 Function keys:

 When A is pressed, M0 keeps ON. When D is pressed, M0 is switched OFF, and M3 keeps ON.

 If several function keys are pressed, the key which is pressed first has priority.

F E D C B A

M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

2. Output signals:

 When a key within the range between A and F is pressed, M6 is ON.

 When a key within the range between 0 and 9 is pressed, M7 is ON.

3. When the conditional contact X1.0 is switched OFF, the value which was stored in D0 is unchanged. However,
M0~M7 are switched OFF.

4. The external wiring:

C D E F

8 9 A B

4 5 6 7
6_
0 1 2 3
24VDC
+
X0.0 X0.1 X0.2 X0.3 S/S Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 UP ZP

Note: The transistor output module AH16AP11T-5A is used in this example.

Additional remark:

1. When this instruction is executed, a too long or a too short scan cycle time will cause the state of the switches not be

read correctly. Use the following tips to solve the issues.

 When the scan cycle is too short, the I/O may not be able to respond in time and the correct states of the

inputs cannot be read. Users can set a fixed scan time to solve this issue.

 When the scan cycle is too long, the switch may become slow to react. Users can write this instruction to the

timer interrupt task to set a fixed to execute this instruction.

2. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [4] of BOOL.

3. If users declare the operand D1 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [4] of BOOL.

4. If users declare the operand D3 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [8] of BOOL.

6-459
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1702 DSW S1，S2，D1，D2，n DIP switch

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
D1 
D2   
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S1 
S2   
D1 
D2   
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Initial input device

S2 ： For system use only

_6 D1 ： Initial output device

D2 ： Device in which the value is stored

n ： Number of DIP switches

Explanation:

1. The four or eight external inputs starting from the input specified by S1 are connected to the four external outputs

starting from the output specified by D1 to form a four-digit DIP switch or two four-digit DIP switches. The value that

users enter by pressing the DIP switch is stored in D2. Whether there is one four-digit DIP switch or two four-digit
DIP switches depends on n.

2. If n is 1, the operand D2 occupies one register. If n is 2, the operand D2 occupies two registers.

3. S2 and S2+1, which are for system use only, occupy two devices. Please do not alter the values in these devices.

4. After the execution of the instruction is complete, SM694 is ON for a scan cycle.

5. When the conditional contact is not enabled, the four external outputs starting from the output specified by D1 keep

OFF.

6-460
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

Example:

1. X0.0~X0.3 are connected to Y0.0~Y0.3 to form the first DIP switch, and X0.4~X0.7 are connected to Y0.0~Y0.3 to

form the second DIP switch. When X1.0 is ON, the instruction is executed. The value that users enter by pressing

the first DIP switch is converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is stored in D20. The value that

users enter by pressing the second DIP switch is converted into the binary value, and the conversion result is stored

in D21.

2. When X1.0 is ON, Y0.0~Y0.3 are ON cyclically. After the execution of the instruction is complete, SM694 is ON for a

scan cycle.

3. The outputs Y0.0~Y0.3 must be transistors.

X1.0
Cycli c ac tion

Y0.0 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s

6_
Y0.1 0.1s

Inter ruption
Y0.2 0.1s

Y0.3 0.1s
T he execution of the
SM694 insturc iton is complete.

4. The DIP switches:

0 1 2 3
10 10 10 10

Bina ry - cod ed d ecim al

wirin g of D IP sw itch es

A dio de (1 N4 14 8) m u st
b e con ne cted i n series .

+
3 2 1 0
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 10 10 10 10
X 0 .0 X 0.1 X 0 .2 X 0 .3 X 0. 4 X 0.5 X 0.6 X0 .7 S /S Y 0.3 Y 0.2 Y 0.1 Y0 .0 UP ZP

F irst D IP sw itch S eco nd D IP sw tich

N o te : Th e tra nsist or o ut pu t mo du le AH 16 AP11 T-5 A is use d in th is exam ple .

6-461
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. If n exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. If users declare the operand D1 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [4] of BOOL.

_6

6-462
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

1703 ARWS S1，S2，D1，D2，n Arrow keys

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
D1   
D2 
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2   
D1   
D2 
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Initial input device

S2 ： For system use only

D1 ： Device in which the setting value is stored

6_
D2 ： Initial output device

n ： Positive/Negative logic

Explanation:

1. If the instruction is executed, S1 is defined as the down arrow, S1+1 is defined as the up arrow, S1+2 is defined as

the right arrow, and S1+3 is defined as the left arrow. The setting value is stored in D1, and it should be within the

range between 0 and 9,999.

2. The operand S1 occupies four consecutive bit devices.

3. S2 is for system use only. Please do not alter the value in it.

4. The operand D2 occupies eight consecutive bit devices.

5. When the conditional contact is disabled, the eight bit devices starting from the bit device specified by D2 keep OFF.

6. The operand n should be within the range between 0 and 3. Please refer to the additional remark on the instruction

API1704 SEGL for more information.

6-463
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

7. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

Example:

1. If the instruction is executed, X0.0 is defined as the down arrow, X0.1 is defined as the up arrow, X0.2 is defined as

the right arrow, and X0.3 is defined as the left arrow. The setting value is stored in D20, and it should be within the

range between 0 and 9,999.

3
2. When X1.0 is ON, the digit in the place 10 is selected. If the left arrow is pressed, the places are selected in

sequence (10 →10 →10 →10 →10 →10 ).

3 0 1 2 3 0

If the right arrow is pressed, the places are selected in sequence (10 →10 →10 →10 →10 →10 ). The LED
3 2 1 0 3 2
3.

indicators with the corresponding places are connected to Y0.4~Y0.7. When the digits in the places are selected in

sequence, the LED indicators are ON in sequence.

4. If the up arrow is pressed, the digit in the place selected changes (0→1→2→…8→9→0→1). If the down arrow is

pressed, the digit in the place selected changes (0→9→8→…1→0→9). The new digit is shown on seven-segment

display.

_6
Up arr ow
Y 0.4
Y0 .5
X 0.1
Y 0.6
Y 0.7 LED indic ators
Left arrow X 0.3 X 0.2 Right arr ow
3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10
1 X 0.0
Y 0.0
2
Y 0.1
4
Y 0.2
Y 0.3
8 Down arrow

T he four key s ar e used to select

Four -digit sev en- segment display the place and change the digit

Additional remark:

1. If n exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

2. If users declare the operand S1 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [4] of BOOL.

3. If users declare the operand D2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [8] of BOOLL.

6-464
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

1704 SEGL S1，S2，D，n Seven-segment display with latches

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1        
S2 
D 
n        
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D 
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Source device

S2 ： For system use only

D ： Initial output device

n ： Positive/Negative logic 6_
Explanation:

1. The eight external outputs starting from the output specified by D are connected to a four-digit seven-segment

display, or the twelve external outputs starting from the output specified by D are connected to two four-digit

seven-segment displays. Every place is equipped with a driver which converts a binary-coded decimal value into

seven-segment data, and every driver is equipped with a latch which can be used to store state information.

2. The value in S1 is the value which will be shown on first seven-segment display, and the value in S1+1 is the value

which will be shown on second seven-segment display.

3. S2 is for system use only. Please do not alter the value in it.

4. The operand n should be within the range between 0 and 7. Please refer to the additional remark for more

information.

5. Whether there is one four-digit seven-segment display or two four-digit seven-segment displays, and whether an

output is a positive logic output or a negative logic output depend on n.

6. If there is one four-digit seven-segment display, eight outputs are occupied. If there are two four-digit

6-465
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

seven-segment displays, twelve outputs are occupied.

7. When the instruction is executed, the outputs are ON cyclically. If the conditional contact is switched from OFF to

ON during the execution of the instruction, the outputs are ON cyclically again.

8. After the execution of the instruction is complete, SM693 is ON for a scan cycle.

Example:

1. When X1.0 is ON, the instruction is executed. Y0.0~Y0.4 form a circuit. The value in D10 is converted into the

binary-coded decimal value, and the conversion result is shown on first seven-segment display. The value in D11 is

converted into the binary-coded decimal value, and the conversion result is shown on second seven-segment

display. If the value in D10 or D11 exceeds 9,999, the operation error occurs.

2. When X1.0 is ON, Y0.4~Y0.7 are ON cyclically. It takes twelve scan cycles for Y0.4~Y0.7 to be ON. After the

execution of the instruction is complete, SM693 is ON for a scan cycle.

_6 3. If there is on four-digit seven-segment display, n is within the range between 0 and 3.

 After the pins 1, 2, 4, and 8 are connected in parallel, they are connected to Y0.0~Y0.3 on the PLC, and the

latches are connected to Y0.4~Y0.7 on the PLC.

 When X1.0 is ON, the instruction is executed. Y0.4~Y0.7 are ON cyclically, and the value in D10 is shown on

seven-segment display.

4. If there are two four-digit seven-segment displays, n is within the range between 4 and 7.

 After the pins 1, 2, 4, and 8 are connected in parallel, they are connected to Y0.8~Y0.11 on the PLC, and the

latches are connected to Y0.4~Y0.7 on the PLC.

 The value in D10 is shown on first seven-segment display, and the value in D11 is shown on second
seven-segment display. If the values in D10 and D11 are 1234 and 4321 respectively, 1234 is shown on

second seven-segment display.

6-466
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

5. The wiring:
Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 Y0.4 Y0.5 Y0.6 Y0.7 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11 UP ZP

0 1 2 3
1 2 4 8 +
10 10 10 10
24VDC

3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
1
2 V+ 1
2 V+
4 4
8 8

First 7-segment display Second 7-segment display

Note: The transistor output module AH16AN01T-5A is used in this example.

Additional remark:

 Whether an output is a positive output or a negative output, and whether there is one four-digit

seven-segment display or two four-digit seven-segment displays depend on n.

 The outputs on the PLC should be NPN transistors whose collectors are open collectors. Besides, an output

has to connect a pull-up resistor to the DC power supply (less than 30 V DC). Therefore, when an output is

ON, a signal of low potential is output.

 The negative logic:

Output
6_
Binary-coded
(Binary-coded Signal
decimal value
decimal code)

b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

6-467
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

 The positive logic:

Output
Binary-coded
(Binary-coded Signal
decimal value
decimal code)

b3 b2 b1 b0 8 4 2 1 A B C D

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

 The latch:

Positive logic Negative logic

Latch Signal Latch Signal
_6 1 0 0 1
 The setting value of the parameter n:

Number of

seven-segment One Two

displays

Output

(Binary-coded ＋ － ＋ －

decimal code)

Latch ＋ － ＋ － ＋ － ＋ －

n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

‘＋’: Positive logic

‘－’: Negative logic

 Users can edit the parameters in n to modify the logics for the output transistor and the input of the

seven-segment display.

6-468
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

 The connection of the common-anode four-digit seven-segment display with IC 7447 is as follows.

3 2 1 0
8 4 2 1 10 10 10 10

1K 120

B Vcc
C f
LT g 3 a f 2 1 b
+
5VDC RBO a
RBI b e d c h g 0
D c
A d
GND e
IC7447
C0

6_

6-469
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6.19 Communication Instructions

6.19.1 List of Communication Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

1806 LRC – – Longitudinal parity check

1807 CRC – – Cyclic Redundancy Check

1808 MODRW – – Reading/Writing the MODBUS data

1812 COMRS – – Sending and receiving communication data

– Setting the communication format for a serial communication

1813 COMDF 
port

– Serial communication instruction exclusive for Delta AC

1814 VFDRW –
motor drive

– Serial communication instruction exclusive for Delta servo

1815 ASDRW –
drive

– Setting the parameters in the data exchange table of a

1816 CCONF 
communication port

1817 MODRWE – – Reading and writing Modbus data without any flag used

_6

6-470
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6.19.2 Explanation of Communication Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

1806 LRC S，n，D Longitudinal parity check

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S  
n    
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device to which the LRC is applied

n ： Number of bytes
Initial device in which the operation result is
D ：
stored

Explanation: 6_
1. Please refer to the additional remark on the instruction LRC for more information about the LRC check code.

2. The operand n should be an even number, and should be within the range between 1 and 1000. If n is not within

the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 and SM1 are ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#200B.

3. The 16-bit conversion mode: When SM606 is OFF, the hexadecimal data in the device specified by S is divided into

the high 8-bit data and the low 8-bit data. The LRC is applied to every byte, and the operation result is stored in the

high 8-bit and the low 8-bit in the device specified by D. The number of bytes depends on n.

4. The 8-bit conversion mode: When SM606 is ON, the hexadecimal data in the device specified by S is divided into

the high 8-bit data (invalid data) and the low 8-bit data. The LRC is applied to every byte, and the operation result is

stored in the low 8-bit in the two registers. The number of bytes depends on n. (The values of the high 8 bits in the
two registers are 0.)

6-471
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example:

1. The PLC is connected to the VFD-S series AC motor drive (ASCII mode: SM210 is OFF; 8-bit mode: SM606 is ON.).

The PLC sends the command, and reads the data in the six devices at the addresses starting from 16#2101 in the

VFD-S series AC motor drive.

PLCVFD-S

The PLC sends “：01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF”.

The PLC sends the data.

Register Data Description

D100
Low 8 bits ‘：’ 16#3A STX
D101
‘0’ 16#30 ADR 1 AD (1, 0) is the station address of the AC motor
Low 8 bits
D102 drive.
‘1’ 16#31 ADR 0
Low 8 bits
D103
Low 8 bits ‘0’ 16#30 CMD 1
CMD (10) is the command code.
D104
‘3’ 16#33 CMD 0
Low 8 bits
D105
‘2’ 16#32
Low 8 bits
D106
Low 8 bits ‘1’ 16#31
Initial data address
_6 D107
‘0’ 16#30
Low 8 bits
D108
‘1’ 16#31
Low 8 bits
D109
Low 8 bits ‘0’ 16#30
D110
‘0’ 16#30
Low 8 bits
Number of data (counted by the word)
D111
‘0’ 16#30
Low 8 bits
D112
Low 8 bits ‘6’ 16#36
D113
‘D’ 16#44 LRC CHK 0
Low 8 bits
LRC CHK (01) is the error checking code.
D114
Low 8 bits ‘4’ 16#34 LRC CHK 1
D115
Low 8 bits CR 16#0D
END
D116
LF 16#0A
Low 8 bits
LRC CHK (01) above is the error checking code. It can be calculated by means of the instruction LRC. (8-bit mode:

SM606 is ON.)

6-472
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

LRC check code: 16#01+16#03+16#21+16#01+16#00+16#06=16#2C

The two’s complement of 16#2C is 16#D4. ‘D’ (16#44) is stored in the low 8-bit in D113, and ‘4’

(16#34) is stored in the low 8-bit in D114.

Additional remark:

1. The format of the communication data in the ASCII mode:

STX ‘：’ The start-of-text character is ‘：’ (16#3A).

Address Hi ‘0’ Communication address:

Address Lo ‘1’ The 8-bit address is composed of two ASCII codes.

Function Hi ‘0’ Function code:

Function Lo ‘3’ The 8-bit function code is composed of two ASCII codes.

‘2’ Data: The n×8-bit data is composed of 2n ASCII codes.

‘1’

‘0’ 6_
DATA（n-1）
‘2’
…….
‘0’
DATA 0
‘0’

‘0’

‘2’

LRC CHK Hi ‘D’ LRC check code:

LRC CHK Lo ‘7’ The 8-bit check code is composed of two ASCII codes.

END Hi CR End-of-text character:

END Lo LF ，END Lo=LF（16#0A）

END Hi=CR（16#0D）

2. LRC check code: The values starting from the communication address to the data are added up. The two’s

complement of the sum gotten is the LRC check code.

Example: 16#01+16#03+16#21+16#02+16#00+16#02=16#29

The two’s complement of 16#29 is 16#D7.

6-473
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

1807 CRC S，n，D Cyclic Redundancy Check

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S  
n    
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S ： Initial device to which the CRC is applied

n ： Number of bytes
Initial device in which the operation result is
D：
stored

Explanation:
_6
1. Please refer to the additional remark on the instruction CRC for more information about the CRC check code.

2. The operand n should be within the range between 1 and 1000. If n is not within the range, the operation error
occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 and SM1 are ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

3. The 16-bit conversion mode: When SM606 is OFF, the hexadecimal data in the device specified by S is divided into

the high 8-bit data and the low 8-bit data. The CRC is applied to every byte, and the operation result is stored in the

high 8-bit and the low 8-bit in the device specified by D. The number of bytes depends on n.

4. The 8-bit conversion mode: When SM606 is ON, the hexadecimal data in the device specified by S is divided into

the high 8-bit data (invalid data) and the low 8-bit data. The CRC is applied to every byte, and the operation result is

stored in the low 8-bit in the two registers. The number of bytes depends on n.

Example:

1. The PLC is connected to the VFD-S series AC motor drive (RTU mode: SM210 is ON; 16-bit mode: SM606 is ON.).

The value 16#12, which will be written into the device at 16#2000 in the VFD-S series AC motor drive, is written into

the device in the PLC first.

6-474
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

PLCVFD-S

The PLC sends 01 06 2000 0012 02 07.

The PLC sends the data.

Register Data Description

D100
16#01 Address
Low 8 bits

D101
16#06 Function
Low 8 bits

D102
16#20
Low 8 bits
Data address
D103
16#00
Low 8 bits

D104
16#00
Low 8 bits
Data
D105
16#12
Low 8 bits

D106
16#02 CRC CHK 0 6_
Low 8 bits

D107
16#07 CRC CHK 1
Low 8 bits

CRC CHK (01) above is the error checking code. It can be calculated by means of the instruction CRC. (8-bit mode:

SM606 is ON.)

CRC check code: 16#02 is stored in the low 8-bit in D106, and 16#07 is stored in the low 8-bit in D107.

6-475
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Additional remark:

1. The format of the communication data in the RTU mode:

START Time interval

Address Communication address: 8-bit binary address

Function Function code: 8-bit binary code

DATA（n-1） Data: n×8-bit data

…….

DATA 0

CRC check code:

CRC CHK Low
The 16-bit check code is composed of two 8-bit binary codes.

CRC CHK High

END Time interval

2. CRC check code: The check code starts from the address to the data. The operation rule is as follows.

Step 1: Suppose the data in the 16-bit register (the register in which the CRC check code is stored) is

16#FFFF.

Step 2: The logical operator XOR takes the first 8-bit message and the low 8-bit data in the 16-bit
_6
register, and performs the logical exclusive OR operation on each pair of corresponding bits.

The operation result is stored in the 16-bit register.

Step 3: The values of the bits in the 16-bit registers are shifted by one bit to the right. The value of the

highest bit becomes 0.

Step 4: If the value of the right-most bit which is shifted to the right is 0, the data gotten from step 3 is

stored in the 16-bit register. Otherwise, the logical operator XOR takes 16#A001 and the data

in the 16-bit register, and performs the logical exclusive OR operation on each pair of

corresponding bits. The operation result is stored in the 16-bit register.

Step 5: Repeat step 3 and step 4, and perform the operation on the 8-bit message.

Step 6: Repeat step 2~step 5, and get the next 8-bit message. Perform the operations on all

messages. The final result in the 16-bit register is the CRC check code. Notice that the low

8-bit data in the 16-bit register is interchanged with the high 8-bit data in the 16-bit register

before the CRC check code is put into the check code of the message.

6-476
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

1808 MODRW S1，S2，S3，S，n Reading/Writing the MODBUS data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S 
n    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S    
n   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Unit address

S2 ： Function code 6_
S3 ： Device address
Register involved in the
S ：
reading/writing of the data
n ： Data length

Explanation:

1. The operand S1 should be within the range between 0 and 254; 0 is the broadcasting mode.

2. S2: The function code

For example:

Function Data
Description Devices that support devices for slaves
code length

01 PLC reads the data from several bit devices. 1~1600 X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC

02 PLC reads the data from several bit devices. 1~1600 X, Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC

PLC reads the data from several word

03 1~100 X, Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E
devices.

6-477
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Function Data
Description Devices that support devices for slaves
code length

PLC reads the data from several word

04 1~100 X
devices.

05 PLC writes the state into a bit device. 1 Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC

06 PLC writes the data into a word device. 1 Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E

0F PLC writes the states into several bit devices. 1~1600 Y, M, SM, S, T, C, HC

PLC writes the data into several word

10 1~100 Y, SR, D, T, C, HC, E
devices.

Only the function codes mentioned above are supported, and other function codes can not be executed. Please

refer to the examples below.

3. S3: The device address. If the address is illegal for the designated communication device, the communication

device will respond with an error message. For example, the device address 16#8000 is illegal in DVP-ES2.

S: The register involved in the reading/writing of the data

The data which will be written into the external equipment is stored in the register in advance.

The data which is read from the external equipment is stored in the register.

4. n: The length of the data

_6 For the word type communication function code, the data length cannot exceed 100 words.

For the bit type (Bool) communictication function code, the data lengthe ranges from 1 to 1600bits.

5. The functions of S3, S, and n vary with the function code used.

Function
S3 S n
code

Address from which the Register in which the

H01 Length of data read
data is read. data read is stored.

Address from which the Register in which the

H02 Length of data read
data is read. data read is stored.

Address from which the Register in which the

H03 Length of data read
data is read. data read is stored.

Address from which the Register in which the

H04 Length of data read
data is read. data read is stored.

H05 Address into which the Status value written No meaning

6-478
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Function
S3 S n
code

data is written.

Address into which the Register in which the

H06 No meaning
data is written. data written is stored

Address into which the Register in which the

H0F Length of data written
data is written. data written is stored

Address into which the Register in which the

H10 Length of data written
data is written. data written is stored

6. There is no limitation on the times of using this instruction, however only one instruction can be executed on the

same COM port at a time.

7. If the communication timeout occurs, timeout flags are ON. After the problem is solved, users have to reset timeout

flags to OFF. When using the instruction MODRW, the timeout value cannot be 0, and the value should be set

between 100 ~ 32767ms; when the value is set to 0, it will be seen as 200ms.

8. In the MODBUS ASCII mode, users only need to set up the data (non-ASCII mode) for transmission, the instruction

will convert the non-ASCII mode to the ASCII mode, consisting of the head code (:), the converted ASCII code,

checksum (LRC) and tail code (CRLF). The data which is received is stored as the ASCII character in the internal

register. The PLC automatically converts the data into the hexadecimal value, and if the communication data is

correct, the conversion result will be stored in S. and the completion flag SM will be ON. 6_
9. In the MODBUS RTU mode, users only need to set up the data for transmission, the instruction will add the
checksum (CRC) and the data which is received is stored as the ASCII character in the internal register. The PLC

automatically converts the data into the hexadecimal value, and if the communication data is correct, the
conversion result will be stored in S.

Communication protocol setup example:

1. The following exapmles use PLC communication port 1 and special registers to demonstrate how to setup a

communication protocol.

2. Users can set up the PLC communication port via the HWCONFIG of ISPSoft, or via the relative spcial registers, or

API1813 COMDF to set up the communication. Please refer to ISPSoft manual for setups in HWCONFIG. As for

communication register setups (SM, SR), please refer to section 6.19.3 for more details.

3. The communication setup for this example is RS485 ASCII, 9600, 8, E, 1 (SR209=16#0025).

4. Set the communication timeout to 3000ms (SR210=3000).

5. Set the communication mode to ASCII mode (SM210=OFF).

6-479
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

6. Enable the communication protocol (SM209=ON).

For users who set up the communication port via the instruction API1813 COMDF, this step can be ignored.

_6

For users who set up the communication port in ISPSoft－＞HWCONFIG－＞COM Port, this step can be ignored.

6-480
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 1:

1. Function code 01 (16#01): The PLC reads the data from several bit devices which are not discrete input devices.

(16 peiece of data is read in this example.) For the function code 02, the operation is the same as the function code

01.

AS CPU module series is connected to the DVP-ES2 series PLC.

When SM96 and X0.0 are on, AS CPU module series sends and receives the Y0~Y17 commands from DVP-ES2.
6_
When the address of Y0 is 16#0500, the states of Y0~Y17 in DVP-ES2 are listed below:

Device Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

State ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

Value D 2

Device Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

State OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Value 0 4

The operands of the instruction MODRW:

Operand Description Device

S1 Unit address 16#0001

S2 Function code 16#0001

S3 Device address 16#0500

6-481
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Register involved in the

S D10.0
reading/writing of the data
n Data length 16

ASCII mode:

The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16# values.

 AS sends the communication command: “：01 01 05 00 00 10 E9 CR LF”.

 AS receives the communication command: “：01 01 02 D2 04 26 CR LF”.

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “01 01 05 00 00 10 3D 0A”.

 AS receives the communication command: “01 01 02 D2 04 E4 9F”.

If the format is correct, SM100 will be ON.

2. The responding messages of DVP-ES2 will be stored in registers D10.0 to 10.15. (The data read is

D10.15~D10.0=16#04D2. )

Device D10.7 D10.6 D10.5 D10.4 D10.3 D10.2 D10.1 D10.0

State ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

Value D 2

_6 Device D10.15 D10.14 D10.13 D10.12 D10.11 D10.10 D10.9 D10.8

State OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Value 0 4

3. After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will

be confirmed and determined whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, corresponding special flags

SM100 will be on, if not SM102 will be ON.

6-482
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 2:

1. Function code 03 (16#03): The PLC reads the data from several bit devices which are not discrete input devices. (8

peiece of data is read in this example.) For the function code 04, the operation is the same as the function code 03.

2. AS CPU module series is connected to the DVP-ES2 series PLC.

When SM96 and X0.0 are on, AS CPU module series sends and receives the D32~D39 from DVP-ES2.

3. When the address of D32 is 16#1020, the values of D32~D39 in DVP-ES2 are listed below:

6_
Device D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39

Value (16#) 1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC

The operands of the instruction MODRW:

Operand Description Device

S1 Unit address 16#0001

S2 Function code 16#0003

S3 Device address 16#1020

Register involved in the
S D10
reading/writing of the data
n Data length 8

6-483
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

ASCII mode:

The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16# values.

 AS sends the communication command: “：01 03 10 20 00 08 C4 CR LF”.

 AS receives the communication command: “：01 03 10 12 34 56 78 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC AA

CR LF”.

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “01 03 10 20 00 08 41 06”.

 AS receives the communication command: “01 03 10 12 34 56 78 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC 90

FE”.

If the format is correct, SM100 will be ON.

 The responding messages of DVP-ES2 will be stored in registers D10 to D17.

 Values in D10~D17 :

Device D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Value
1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC
(16#)

4. After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will

_6 be confirmed and determined whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, corresponding special flags

SM100 will be on, if not SM102 will be ON.

6-484
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 3:

1. Function code 05 (16#05): PLC writes the state into a bit device. The device is set to ON in this example.

2. AS CPU module series is connected to the DVP-ES2 series PLC. D10.0 is ON and the Y0 of the DVP-ES2 series
6_
PLC is also ON. When SM96 and X0.0 are ON, the PLC can set the state of Y0.

The operands of the instruction MODRW:

Operand Description Device

S1 Unit address 1

S2 Function code 16#0005

S3 Device address 16#0500

S Register involved in the reading/writing of the data D10.0

n Data length (no meaning in here) 1

ASCII mode:

The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16# values.

 AS sends the communication command: “：01 05 05 00 FF 00 F6 CR LF”

 AS receives the communication command: “：01 05 05 00 FF 00 F6 CR LF”

6-485
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “01 05 05 00 FF 00 8C F6”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 05 05 00 FF 00 8C F6”

If the format is correct, SM100 will be ON.

3. After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will

be confirmed and determined whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, corresponding special flags
SM100 will be on, if not SM102 will be ON.

4. When the DVP-ES2 receives this instruction, the Y0 will be ON.

5. The parameter n will not be used in here, since this function code here is for to write.

_6

6-486
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 4:

1. Function code 06 (16#06): PLC writes the state into a word device.

2. AS CPU module series is connected to the DVP-ES2 series PLC.

6_
3. Suppose D10 is 16#55AA (waiting to write data to the device T0 of the DVP-ES2).

When SM96 and X0.0 are ON, the PLC can write data to the T0 of the DVP-ES2 series PLC. The address of T0 is

16#0600.

The operands of the instruction MODRW:

Operand Description Device

S1 Unit address 1

S2 Function code 16#0006

S3 Device address of T0 16#0600

S Register T0 involved in the reading/writing of the data D10

n Data length (no meaning in here) 0

6-487
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

ASCII mode:

The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16# values.

 AS sends the communication command: “：01 06 06 00 55 AA F4 CR LF”

 AS receives the communication command: “：01 06 06 00 55 AA F4 CR LF”

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “01 06 06 00 55 AA 36 6D”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 06 06 00 55 AA 36 6D”

If the format is correct, SM100 will be ON.

4. After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will

be confirmed and determined whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, corresponding special flags

SM100 will be on, if not SM102 will be ON.

5. When the DVP-ES2 receives this instruction, it will write data stored in the device D10 to the device T0 of the

DVP-ES2.

6. The parameter n will not be used in here, since this function code here is for to write.

_6

6-488
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 5:

1. Function code 0F (16#0F): PLC writes the states into several bit devices.

2. AS CPU module series is connected to the DVP-ES2 series PLC. 6_

 Suppose D10.15~D10.0=16#04D2 (waiting to write the state of Y0~Y17 of the DVP-ES2)

Device D10.7 D10.6 D10.5 D10.4 D10.3 D10.2 D10.1 D10.0

State ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

Value D 2

Device D10.15 D10.14 D10.13 D10.12 D10.11 D10.10 D10.9 D10.8

State OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Value 0 4

When SM96 and X0.0 are ON, the PLC can set the state of Y0~Y17 of the DVP-ES2. The address of Y0 is

16#0500.

6-489
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The operands of the instruction MODRW:

Operand Description Device

S1 Unit address 1

S2 Function code 16#000F

S3 Device address of Y0 16#0500

Registers Y0~Y17 involved in the

S D10.0
reading/writing of the data

n Data length 16

ASCII mode:

The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16# values.

 AS sends the communication command: “：01 0F 0500 0010 02 D2 04 03 CR LF”

 AS receives the communication command: “：01 0F A0 00 00 10 40 CR LF”

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “01 0F 05 00 00 10 02 D2 04 EA 43”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 0F A0 00 00 10 76 07”

_6 If the format is correct, SM100 will be ON.

3. After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will

be confirmed and determined whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, corresponding special flags

SM100 will be on, if not SM102 will be ON.

Device Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

State ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

Value D 2

Device Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10

State OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Value 0 4
4. The parameter n will not be used in here, since this function code here is for to write.

6-490
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 6:

1. Function code 10 (16#10): PLC writes the states into several word devices.

2. AS CPU module series is connected to the DVP-ES2 series PLC.

3. Suppose the values for D20~27 are listed below. (waiting to write data to the devices T0~7 of the DVP-ES2).

Device D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27

Value (16#) 1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC 6_

When SM96 and X0.0 are ON, the PLC can write data to the T0~7 of the DVP-ES2 series PLC. The address of T0

is 16#0600.

The operands of the instruction MODRW:

Operand Description Device

S1 Unit address 1

S2 Function code 16#0010

S3 Device address of T0 16#0600

Register T0~7 involved in the reading/writing

S D20
of the data

n Data length (no meaning in here) 8

6-491
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

ASCII mode:

The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16# values.

 AS sends the communication command: “：01 10 0600 00 08 10 1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC
8F CR LF”

 AS receives the communication command: “：01 10 06 00 00 08 E1 CR LF”

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “01 10 06 00 00 08 10 1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC
0B 0C”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 10 06 00 00 08 C1 47”

If the format is correct, SM100 will be ON.

5. After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will

be confirmed and determined whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, corresponding special flags

SM100 will be on, if not SM102 will be ON. When the DVP-ES2 receives this instruction, it will write data stored in

the devices D20~27 to the device T0~7 of the DVP-ES2.

Device T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7

Value (16#) 1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC
_6
6. The parameter n will not be used in here, since this function code here is for to write.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 or S2 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,

and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the device specified by S is not sufficient to contain the n pieces of data, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is

ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If n exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in

SR0 is 16#200B.

4. If the function code specified by S2 is related to the bit device, the device specified by S has to be the bit device.

Otherwise, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. If the function code specified by S2 is related to the word device, the device specified by S has to be the word

device. Otherwise, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, and the error code in SR0 is

16#2003.

6-492
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6. If the communication command is 0x05 or 0x06, n does not work. The state or the data is written into one bit device

or one word device.

7. If sending flags SM96 and SM97 are not ON, the instruction MODRW is not executed.

8. If the communication timeout occurs, the timeout flags SM104 and SM105 are ON, and the receving flags SM98

and SM99 are OFF.

9. If the error occurs during the reception of the data, the error flags SM102 and SM103 are ON, and the receving

flags SM98 and SM99 are OFF.

10. If the function code specified by S2 is related to the word device, the device in the external equipment with which the

PLC communicates has to be the word device. If the function code specified by S2 is related to the bit device, the

device in the external equipment with which the PLC communicates has to be the bit device.

11. As for communication register setups (SM, SR), please refer to section 6.19.3 for more details.

6_

API Instruction code Operand Function

6-493
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Self-defined sending and receiving communication

1812 COMRS S1，S2，S3，D1，D2
data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    

S2  

S3    

D1 

D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
D1   
D2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Communication port number (1~2,

11~12)
_6 S2 ： Source of the data which is sent

S3 ： Length of the data which is sent

Initial device in which
D1 ： communication data received is
stored
Condition of ending the receiving of
D2
data
Explanation:

1. S1 is a communication port number, COM1 is number 1, COM 2 is number 2, Card 1 is number 11 and Card 2 is
number 12. If the data is out of the communication port range, the instruction will not execute any sending or

receiving.

2. If a specific character or specific characters are used as the condition of ending the receiving of data, it is

suggested that the instruction should be applied to ASCII data. If the instruction is not applied to ASCII data, it is

suggested that a timeout period should be used as the condition of ending the receiving of data.

3. S2: Source of the data which is sent

S3: Length of the data which is sent

6-494
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

If S2 is D100 and S3 is 10, the values in the low bytes in D100~D109 will be sent through the communication port

specified by S1.

4. If the setting value in S3 is 0, no string will be sent. The maximum number of characters which can be sent is 256

words.

5. D1: Length of the data which has been received.

D1+1~D1+n: Devices in which the data received is stored

If D1 is D200, the value in D2 is 3, and the value in D2+1 is 16#0D0A, the data received will be stored in the low

bytes in the devices starting from D201 (the high bytes will be unchanged), the receiving of data will not stop until

the consecutive stop characters 16#0D and 16#0A are received, the length of the data received will be written to

D200 after 16#0D and 16#0A are received, and a completion flag will be set to ON after the receiving of data stops.

6. D2: Mode of receiving data

D2+1: Condition of ending the receiving of data

D2 and D2+1 are described below.

D2 Mode of receiving data Setting value in D2+1 Remark

Not receiving communication data Unused After the sending of data is complete, a
0
completion flage will be set to ON.

When the time which passes The setting value in If the time that users set is greater than 6_
before the next piece of data is D2+1 is time. The unit 3000 milliseconds, the value in D2+1 will

received exceeds the time set in of measurement for be 3000. If the time that users set is less

1 D2+1, the receiving of data is time is 1 millisecond. than 5 milliseconds, the value in D2+1

complete. The setting value in will be 5.

D2+1 is in the range of

5 to 3000.

2 The data received ends with a The setting value in If a specific character is 16#0A, the

specific character. D2+1 is a specific value in D2+1 will be 16#000A.

character.

3 The data received ends with two The setting value in If two specific characters are 16#0D and

consecutive specific characters. D2+1 is two specific 16#0A, the value in D2+1 will be

characters. 16#0D0A.

4 The data received starts with a A specific character is If a start character is 16#3A, and time is

specific character. When the time stored in the high byte 15 milliseconds, the value in D2+1 will

which passes before the next in D2+1, and time is be 16#3A0F.

6-495
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

piece of data is received exceeds stored in the low byte in

the time set in D2+1, the receiving D2+1. (The time set in

of data is complete. the low byte in D2+1 is

in the range of 5

milliseconds to 255

millseconds.)

5 The data received starts with a The setting value in If a start character is 16#3A, and a stop

specific character, and ends with a D2+1 is a specific start character is 16#0A, the value in D2+1

specific character. character, and a will be 16#3A0A.

specific end character.

6 A specific quantity of data is The setting value in If users want to receive 10 characters,

received. D2+1 is the length of the value in D2+1 is 10.

the data which is

received. Setting range

is 1~256.

7 The data received ends with a The setting value in If an end character is 16#0A, the value

specific character and generate D2+1 is a specific end in D2+1 will be 16#000A.

communication interruptions. character.

8 Set the quantity of data received The setting value in If users want to receive 10 characters,

and then generate communication D2+1 is the length of the value in D2+1 is 10.
_6
interruptions. the data which is

received. Setting range

is 1~256.

9 The data received ends with a A specific end If an end character is 16#0A, and time is

specific character or a specific character is stored in 15 milliseconds, the data length is 15

quantity of data received; when the high byte in D2+1, words, the value in D2+1 will be

either condition is met, the and time is stored in the 16#0A0F.

transmission is complete. low byte in D2+1. (The

time set in the low byte

in D2+1 is in the range

of 1 milliseconds to 255

millseconds.)

Others If the mode used is not a mode

which is supported, the instruction

will not be executed.

6-496
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio n s

7. Except mode 6 and 8, when data received in D2 exceeds the maximum range of the received data length 256 words
and no ending character is received, the instruction will stop executing and will regard this opearation as a receiving

error. D1+0 is 0 and D1+1~ will not be inputted in the received data.

8. The relation among communication port, related spcial auxiliary relays, and a related special data register are

described in section 6.19.3.

9. Timing diagrams

 Mode of receiving data: 0

When data is sent, users can not cancel the sending of the data. If the conditional contact preceding the

instruction is not enable, the data will still be sent, but a completion flag will not be set to ON after the sending

of the data is complete.

 Mode of receiving data: 1 or 4

Starting the ex ecution

of the ins truc ti on
Sending d ata

Reception fl ag

Rec eiving d ata

Completion fl ag
6_

Comm uni cation

timeout fl ag

2 3 2 5
1 4 4 1

Description:

① Users start/stop the execution of the instruction.

② Time in which data is sent

The period of time in which data is sent is not measured.

③ After the first character is received, the time which passes before the next character is received will be

measured. Whenever a character is received, the time measured is cleared. The completion flag will not

be set to ON until the time measured is greater than the setting value in D2+1.

④ If the instruction is still enabled after users reset the completion flag or the communication flag, the next

communication data is sent automatically when the instruction is scanned in the next cycle.

6-497
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

⑤ When the PLC begins to receive data, it begins to measure the time which passes. The communication

timeout will not be set to ON until the time measured exceeds the timeout period set. It is suggested that

the timeout period set should be longer than the time set in D2+1.

 Mode of receiving data: 2, 3, 5, 6, or 9.

Starting the ex ecution

of the ins truc ti on
Sending d ata

Reception fl ag

Rec eiving d ata

Completion fl ag

Comm uni cation

timeout fl ag

2 3 2 2
1 4 4 1

Description:

①  Users start/stop the execution of the instruction.

②  Time in which data is sent

_6
The period of time in which data is sent is not measured.

③  After the first character is received, the time which passes before the next character is
received will be measured. Whenever a character is received, the time measured is cleared.

A communication timeout flag will not be set to ON until the time measured exceeds the

timeout period set.

④  If the instruction is still enabled after users reset a completion flag or a communication flag,

the next communication data is sent automatically when the instruction is scanned in the

next cycle.

10. Mode of sending data/Mode of receiving data

8-bit mode: The command which is edited is stored in the initial transmission device, and the command which will

be sent include the head code and the tail code. The 16-bit data is divided into the high 8-bit data and the low 8-bit

data. The high 8-bit data is ignored, and the low 8-bit data can be sent or received. (Take standard Modbus for
example.)

Sending the data: (PLC→External equipment)

6-498
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Receiving the data: (External equipment→PLC)

16-bit mode: The command which is edited is stored in the initial transmission device, and the command which will

be sent include the head code and the tail code. When SM106/SM107 is OFF, the 16-bit data is divided into the

high 8-bit data and the low 8-bit data.

Sending the data: (PLC→External equipment)

6_

Receiving the data: (External equipment→PLC)

The data which the PLC receives from the external equipment includes the head and the tail code. Therefore, users

have to be aware of the setting of a length.

11. When the mode is 7 or 8, the corresponding communication port and the interruption number are listed below.

Communicaiton port
COM1 COM2 Card1 Card2
number

Interruption number I300 I302 I304 I306

6-499
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The followings use COM1 (RS485) as examples.

Example 1:

The mode in D2 is 0 (not receiving communication data) and set the mode of sending data/Mode of receiving data to 8-bit

mode (SM106=ON).

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=4.

2. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#0031, D101=16#0032, D102=16#0033, D103=16#0034.

3. Set D10=16#0000 (sending data only, not receiving data).

4. Enable the contact X0.0.

5. PLC sends out 4 pieces of data.

6. Sending data: PLC→External equipment 31 32 33 34.

7. Since receiving data is not required, after the PLC sends out all the data, the operation ends. SM100=0.
_6
8. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

6-500
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 2:

The mode in D2 is 1 (setting the time value to 5~3000ms) and set the mode of sending data/Mode of receiving data to

16-bit mode (SM106=OFF).

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=4.

2. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#3231, D101=16#3433.

3. Set D10=16#0001 (mode: 1), D11=300 (set the time value to 300ms).

4. Enable the contact X0.0.

5. PLC sends out 4 pieces of data.

6. Sending data: PLC→External equipment 31 32 33 34.

7. After the external equipment received the data from the PLC, 5 consecutive data will be sent to the PLC and each

sent is with less than 20ms. External equipment 35 36 37 38 39.

8. D200=5 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#3635, D202=16#3837, 6_
D203=16#0039.

9. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

10. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC will start receiving data.

The interval time of every data reception is set in D11. When the interval time exceeds the set time and no data is

coming in, the SM100 will be ON.

6-501
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 3:

The mode in D2 is 2 (The data received ends with a specific character.) and set the mode of sending data/Mode of

receiving data to 8-bit mode (SM106=ON).

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=0, meaning the PLC will not send data but only receives data.

2. Set D10=16#0002 (mode: 2), D11=16#000A (the ending character is 16#0A).

3. Enable the contact X0.0.

4. PLC is waiting to receive data from the external equipment. (D20=0, meaning the PLC will not send data to the

external equipment.).

5. The external equipment sends data to the PLC.

External equipment → PLC 31 32 33 34 35 0A.

6. D200=6 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#0031, D202=16#0032,

_6 D203=16#0033, D201=16#0034, D202=16#0035, D203=16#000A

7. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

8. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC will start receiving data

till the ending character (16#0A) is received. When the reception of data is complete, SM100 is ON. If the

communication timeout occurs but the ending character (16#0A) is still not received, the communication timeout

flag SM104 will be ON.

6-502
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 4:

The mode in D2 is 3 (The data received ends with two specific character.) and set the mode of sending data/Mode of

receiving data to 16-bit mode (SM106=OFF).

The example uses DVP-ES2 as the external equipment and is going to write H1234 to the D100 of the DVP-ES2.

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=17.

2. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#303A, D101=16#3031, D102=16#3136, D103=16#3630,

D104=16#3134, D105=16#3332, D106=16#3334, D107=16#0D46, D108=16#000A.

3. Set D10=16#0003 (mode: 3), D11=16#0D0A (the ending character is 16#0D and 16#0A).

4. Enable the contact X0.0

5. PLC sends out 17 pieces of data.

Sending data: PLC→External equipment 3A 30 31 30 36 31 30 36 34 31 32 33 34 33 46 0D 0A

(ASCII code: 0106106412343FCRLF) 6_

6. The external equipment receives data from the PLC and the last 2 data are 16#0D and 16#0A.

External equipment → PLC 3A 30 31 30 36 31 30 36 34 31 32 33 34 33 46 0D 0A

(ASCII code: 0106106412343FCRLF)

7. D200=17 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#303A, D202=16#3031,

D203=16#3136, D204=16#3630, D205=16#3134, D206=16#3332, D207=16#3334, D208=16#0D46,

D209=16#000A.

8. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

9. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC will start receiving data

till the ending character (16#0D0A) is received. When the reception of data is complete, SM100 is ON. If the

communication timeout occurs but the ending character (16#0D0A) is still not received, the communication

timeout flag SM104 will be ON.

6-503
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 5:

The mode in D2 is 4 (The data received starts with a specific character and set the time value to 5~255ms.) and set the

mode of sending data/Mode of receiving data to 8-bit mode (SM106=ON).

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=4.

2. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#0031, D101=16#0032, D102=16#0033, D103=16#0034.

3. Set D10=16#0004 (mode: 4), D11=16#3A0F (the starting character is 16#3A and set the time value to 16#0F,
meaning 15ms).

4. Enable the contact X0.0.

5. PLC sends out 4 pieces of data.

Sending data: PLC→External equipment 31 32 33 34

6. The external equipment receives data from the PLC and then sends 7 consecutive words to the PLC with an

interval of 1ms between each sending.

_6 External equipment → PLC 30 3A 35 36 37 38 39

7. D200=6 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#003A, D202=16#0035,
D203=16#0036, D204=16#0037, D205=16#0038, D206=16#0039.

8. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

9. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC is ready to receive data.

When receiving the starting character 16#3A, the PLC will start receiving data. The interval time of every data

reception is set in D11. When the interval time exceeds the set time 16#0F (15ms) and no data is coming in, the

SM100 will be ON.

6-504
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 6:

The mode in D2 is 5 (The data received starts and ends with a specific character) and set the mode of sending data/Mode

of receiving data to 16-bit mode (SM106=OFF).

The example uses DVP-ES2 as the external equipment and is going to read data in the D100 of the DVP-ES2.

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=17.

2. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#303A, D101=16#3031, D102=16#3133, D103=16#3630,
D104=16#3034, D105=16#3030, D106=16#3831, D107=16#0D37, D108=16#000A

3. Set D10=16#0005 (mode: 5), D11=16#3A0A (the starting character is 16#3A and the ending character is 16#0A).

4. Enable the contact X0.0.

5. PLC sends out 17 pieces of data.

Sending data: PLC→External equipment 3A 30 31 30 36 31 30 36 34 31 32 33 34 33 46 0D 0A

(ASCII code: 0106106412343FCRLF)

6_
6. The external equipment receives data from the PLC and the last 2 data are 16#0D and 16#0A.

External equipment → PLC 3A 30 31 30 36 31 30 36 34 31 32 33 34 33 46 0D 0A

(ASCII code: 0106106412343FCRLF)

7. D200=15 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#303A, D202=16#3031,

D203=16#3033, D204=16#3132, D205=16#3332, D206=16#4234, D207=16#0D34, D208=16#000A.

8. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

9. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC is ready to receive data.

When receiving the starting character 16#3A, the PLC will start receiving data till the ending character 16#0A is

received. And the the SM100 will be ON. If the communication timeout occurs but the starting character 16#3A or

the ending character 16#0A is still not received, the communication timeout flag SM104 will be ON.

6-505
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 7:

The mode in D2 is 6 (the received data length) and set the mode of sending data/Mode of receiving data to 8-bit mode

(SM106=ON).

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=4.

2. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#0031, D101=16#0032, D102=16#0033, D103=16#0034.

3. Set D10=16#0006 (mode: 6), D11=16#0008 (8 pieces of data to be received).

4. Enable the contact X0.0.

5. PLC sends out 4 pieces of data.

Sending data: PLC→External equipment 31 32 33 34

6. The external equipment receives data from the PLC and then sends 8 consecutive data to the PLC.

External equipment → PLC 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

_6
7. D200=8 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#0032, D202=16#0033,

D203=16#0034, D204=16#0035, D205=16#0036, D206=16#0037, D207=16#0038, D208=16#0039.

8. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

9. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC is ready to receive data.

When receiving the set quantity of data, the SM100 will be ON. If the communication timeout occurs but the set

quantity of data is still not received, the communication timeout flag SM104 will be ON.

6-506
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 8:

The mode in D2 is 7 (The data received ends with a specific character and generates communication interruptions.) and

set the mode of sending data/Mode of receiving data to 8-bit mode (SM106=ON).

Communication interruption programs:

1. Clear the interruption: D30=0

2. The length for the data to be sent: D20=4.

3. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#0031, D101=16#0032, D102=16#0033, D103=16#0034.

4. Set D10=16#0007 (mode: 7), D11=16#000A (16#0A is the ending character).

5. Enable the contact X0.0.

6_
6. PLC sends out 4 pieces of data.

Sending data: PLC→External equipment 31 32 33 34

7. D30=0 (the programs in the interruption are not executed.)

8. The external equipment sends data to the PLC.

External equipment → PLC 31 32 33 34 35 0A

9. D200=6 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#0031, D202=16#0032,

D203=16#0033, D201=16#0034, D202=16#0035, D203=16#000A.

10. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

11. D30=1 (the interruption is trigger and then the INC D30 is executed.)

12. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC is ready to receive data.

When receiving the set ending character (16#06), the SM100 will be ON. If the communication timeout occurs but

the set ending character is still not received, the communication timeout flag SM104 will be ON.

6-507
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Example 9:

The mode in D2 is 8 (The set quantity of data is received and generates communication interruptions.) and set the mode

of sending data/Mode of receiving data to 8-bit mode (SM106=ON).

Communication interruption programs:

1. Clear the interruption: D30=0

2. The length for the data to be sent: D20=4.

3. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#0031, D101=16#0032, D102=16#0033, D103=16#0034.

4. Set D10=16#0008 (mode: 8), D11=16#0008 (8 pieces of data to be received).

5. Enable the contact X0.0.

_6
6. PLC sends out 4 pieces of data.

Sending data: PLC→External equipment 31 32 33 34

7. D30=0 (the programs in the interruption are not executed.)

8. The external equipment receives data from the PLC and then sends 8 consecutive data to the PLC.

9. External equipment → PLC 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

10. D200=8 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#0032, D202=16#0033,

D203=16#0034, D204=16#0035, D205=16#0036, D206=16#0037, D207=16#0038, D208=16#0039.

11. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

12. D30=1 (the interruption is trigger and then the INC D30 is executed.)

13. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC is ready to receive data.

When receiving the set quantyity of data, the SM100 will be ON. If the communication timeout occurs but the set

quantity of data is still not received, the communication timeout flag SM104 will be ON.

6-508
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example 10:

The mode in D2 is 9 (The set ending character or the set quantity of data is received) and set the mode of sending

data/Mode of receiving data to 8-bit mode (SM106=ON).

1. The length for the data to be sent: D20=4.

2. The contents for the data to be sent: D100=16#0031, D101=16#0032, D102=16#0033, D103=16#0034.

3. Set D10=16#0009 (mode: 9), D11=16#0A0F (the ending character is 16#0A and the set data length is 16#0F).

4. Enable the contact X0.0.

5. PLC sends out 4 pieces of data.

Sending data: PLC→External equipment 31 32 33 34

6. The external equipment receives data from the PLC and then sends 15 pieces of data to the PLC.

External equipment → PLC 31 32 33 34 35 0A 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

7. D200=6 (number of the data received), the content of the received data: D201=16#0031, D202=16#0032, 6_
D203=16#0033, D204=16#0034, D205=16#0035, D206=16#000A.
th
The PLC stops receiving data after the 6 of data is received.

8. SM100=ON: the reception of data is complete.

9. For another data sending, users can set the flag SM100 to OFF to start the operation again.

NOTE: When the data sending is complete, the receiving flag SM98 will be ON and then the PLC is ready to receive data.

When receiving the set ending character or the set quantity of data, the SM100 will be ON. If the communication

timeout occurs but the set ending character or the set quantity of data is still not received, the communication

timeout flag SM104 will be ON.

Additional remark:

1. There is no limit on the number of times the communication instruction COMRS can be executed. However, every
communication port can only be enabled by one communication instruction, and the communication instructions

which follow will not be executed.

2. When COMRS is executed, no checksum is used. If users need a checksum, they can use COMRS and another
instruction available.

6-509
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

3. If the value in D2 is 2, 3, 5, 6 or 9, it is suggested that users should set a timeout period. After a timeout period is set,
the sending of data will be retried if a stop character is not received.

4. The instruction does not automatically clear the value in D1~D1+n whenever the instruction is just executed or the
PLC begins to receive new communication data. Only after a completion flag is switched from OFF to ON can users

know whether data is received and how much data the PLC receives. If the users want to clear the values in

D1~D1+n, they can use the instruction ZRST.

5. If the value in S1 is out of range, the instruction will not be executed.

6. If the number of devices starting from S2 is not equal to the value in S3, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will
be ON, and the error code in SR0 will be 16#2003.

7. If the value in D2 is not in the range of 0 to 9, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON, and the error
code in SR0 will be 16#200B.

8. If the value in D2 is 6, 8 or 9, and the number of devices starting from D1 is not equal to the value in D2+1, the
instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON, and the error code in SR0 will be 16#2003.

9. The quantity of data received is greater than the number of devices starting from D1, the data which can not be
stored will be ignored.

10. If a completion flag is ON, the PLC will stop receiving data. If a communication port receives data when a
completion flag is ON, the data will not be received.

11. If the setting value in S3 is less than 0 or greater than 256, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON, and
the error code in SR0 will be 16#200B.

12. When the mode of D2 is 6 or 8, the length of D2+1 is less than 1 or greater than 256, the instruction will not be
_6
executed. SM0 will be ON, and the error code in SR0 will be 16#200B.

6-510
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Setting the communication format for a serial

1813 COMDF P S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，D
communication port

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1  

S2  

S3  

S4  

S5  

D  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
D

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
6_
Symbol:

S1 ： Baud Rate (Unit:100 bps)

S2 ： Number of data bits

S3 ： Parity bit

S4 ： Number of end bits

S5 ： MODBUS format selection

D ： Communication port number

Explanation:

1. The instruction only provides the way of directly setting the parameter values, instead of variable declaration.

2. S1 sets the baud rate with the unit 100bps. For example, the input value 96 indicates 9600bps.

3. S2 sets the number of data bits. The input value 7 indicates 7 data bits. 8 means 8 data bits. If the value is not 7 or 8

in S2, the instruction is executed with the default value.

6 - 5 11
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

4. S3 sets the parity bit. The value 0 indicates None (no parity bit). 1 corresponds to Odd bit checking. The setting

value 2 corresponds to Even bit checking. If the value is not 0, 1 or 2 in S3, the default value is filled automatically.

5. S4 sets the number of end bits. The value 1 (preset) indicates 1 bit. 2 means 2 bits. If the value is not 1 or 2 in S4,

the instruction is executed with the default value.

6. S5 sets the communication mode of the Modbus communication protocol. The value 0 indicates ASCII (default

value) and 1 means RTU. If the value is not 0 or 1 in S5, the instruction is executed with the default value.

7. D sets communication port number. The serial number of COM1 is 1, COM2 is 2, Card1 is 11 and Card2 is 12. If the

setting value is out of the valid range, the instruction will not perform any communication port format setting.

8. Users can also directly set the communication port through ISPSoft－＞HWCONFIG－＞COM Port or the special

registers. (For the setting in HWCONFIG, refer to ISPSoft user manual. Refer to section 6.19.3 for the setting in the

communication-related SR and SM registers.)

9. The communication at the actual communication port will change immediately after the setting of the instruction is

used. If some communication is being carried out at the moment, it will be forced to cancel. Additionally, the

corresponding setting value in SM/SR will change accordingly. For details on SM/SR, refer to section 6.19.3.

10. The instruction will not make any setting for the actual communication port when the communication format setting

is the same as the previous setting.

Example:
_6
1. Take PLC COM1 for example here. Other PLC communication ports are similar to it in the communication setting.

2. The contact of the start condition is X0.0.

3. The (RS485) communication format of PLC COM1 is set to 115200, 8, E and 1.

4. The (RS485) communication mode of PLC COM1 is set to ASCII.

5. Explanation of the COMDF instruction:

Operand Description Content value

S1 Baud Rate 115200 bps 1152

S2 The number of data bits 8 8

S3 Parity bit E 2

S4 The number of end bits 1 1

S5 MODBUS format selection ASCII 0

D Communication port number PLC COM1 1

6-512
C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6_

6-513
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Serial communication instruction exclusive for

1814 VFDRW S1，S2，S3，S
Delta AC motor drive

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      

S2      

S3      

S 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Communication port number

S2 ： VFD station address

_6
S3 ： Function code

S ： Source and received data

Explanation:

1. S1 sets a communication port number. The serial number of COM1 is 1, COM2 is 2, Card1 is 11 and Card2 is 12. If

the value exceeds the valid range, the instruction will not execute the receiving of any communication data.

2. S2 sets the station address of VFD AC motor drive. If the station address is 0, it indicates that the broadcast mode is

adopted. The range is 0~254. The instruction will not be executed if the value is out of the range.

3. S3 the communication function code and S the source or received data are explained in the following table.

S3
S source and received
function S3 function name Remark
data
code

0 Reset due to abnormality Unused Any value can be input in S.

6-514
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

S3
S source and received
function S3 function name Remark
data
code

1 Clockwise running Velocity value Refer to AC motor drive user manual for the
command setting value and the unit.

2 Counterclockwise running Velocity value

command

3 Stop Unused Any value can be input in S.

4 Jog clockwise running Unused For the setting of the jog velocity, refer to AC
command motor drive user manual.

5 Jog counterclockwise Unused

running command

Refer to AC motor drive user manual for the

meaning of the state values of the 5 bit

6 Reading the state Received state values
addresses H2100 ~ H2104 of VFD.

4. Timing chart for the communication of sending and receiving data:

Enable/disable t he exec ution

of the instruction
6_
Sending data

Rec eption fl ag

Receiv ing data

Compl etion fl ag

 l m
 n
Description:

  Users start/stop the execution of the instruction.

  Transmitting data begins after the instruction is started. During the time, the communication timeout time is not

measured.

  The reception flag is set. From the moment when the first character is received to the moment when the next

6-515
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

character is received, the period of time will be measured. Whenever a character is received, the time

measured is cleared. The communication timeout flag will be generated if the time measured is greater than

the communication timeout setting value.

  When the receiving of data is completed, the completion flag is set. Users must clear the flag themselves.

  Before the communication instruction is sent out once again, the instruction need be stopped for one cycle

after the completion flag is watched. And then the instruction is started in the next cycle.

5. There is no limit to the number of times to use the instruction. One communication port can only be used for the

output and execution of one communication instruction every time. If the receiving and sending of data is completed,

the instruction need be disabled to release the communication control right.

Example of setting communication protocol:

1. Set PLC COM1 (RS485) port with the station address 2 and the communication format: ASCII, 115200, 7, N, 2

through HWCONFIG.

2. Make a basic setting using the panel of Delta C2000 AC motor drive according to the following steps.

A. Setting 09-00 to 1, the station address of the AC motor drive is set to 1.

B. Setting 09-01 to 115.2, RS485 baud rate of the AC motor drive is 115200.

C. Setting 09-04 to 1, RS485 communication format of the AC motor drive is 7, N, 2.

_6
D. Setting 09-20 to 1, the frequency instruction is input through RS485.

E. Setting 09-21 to 2, the running instruction is input through RS485.

Example:

By using VFDRW instruction to control the velocity, make VFD run forward at the frequency of 120Hz, run reversely at the

frequency of 180Hz and then stop running.

6-516
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6_
1. Connect AS COU to VFD.

Set D202=12000 at first. When M1 is ON, VFD starts to accelerate after receiving the command of clockwise

running and then runs clockwise at the frequency of 120Hz.

2. Set D204=18000 at first. When M2 is ON, VFD starts to decelerate till it stops after receiving the command of

counterclockwise running and then it runs counterclockwise at the frequency of 180Hz.

3. When M3 is ON (at the moment, the value in D206 is ineffective), VFD decelerates to stop after receiving the stop

command.

4. When M4 is ON, the values of H2100~H2104 of VFD are read to D220~224.

Device
D220 D221 D222 D223 D224

Frequency
Content Error code VFD state Output frequency Output current
command

6-517
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The state of VFD:

As Bit2 =1, VFD executes the jog command. As Bit4~3= 11B, VFD runs counterclockwise. As the frequency

command is 18000, it indicates that VFD starts to run at the frequency of 180Hz.

(For the definitions of parameter addresses in the communication protocol, refer to Delta AC motor drive user

manual.)

5. The reception completion flag SM100 is ON, the values of M1~M5 are cleared so as to avoid influencing the

execution of the next communication command.

After the receiving of the data that VFD sends back is completed, the format of the data sent back from VFD will be

checked. If the data format is correct, SM100 is ON. Otherwise, SM102 is ON.

_6

6-518
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Serial communication instruction exclusive for

1815 ASDRW S1，S2，S3，S
Delta servo drive

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      

S2      

S3      

S 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Communication port number

S2 ： Station address of the servo

6_
S3 ： Function code

S ： Source and received data

Explanation:

1. S1 sets a communication port number. The serial number of COM1 is 1, COM2 is 2, Card1 is 11 and Card2 is 12. If

the value exceeds the valid range, the instruction will not execute the receiving of any communication data.

2. S2 sets the station address of the servo. If the station address is 0, it indicates that the broadcast mode is adopted.

The range of the value is 0~254. The instruction will not be executed if the value is out of the valid range.

3. For details on servo parameters, refer to Delta servo operation manual.

4. S3 the communication function code and S the source or received data are explained in the following table.

6-519
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Applied to A, AB, A+, B series

S3 function
S3 function name S source or received data Remark
code

Occupies 5 consecutive devices Reading the state value from

0 Reading the servo state value
S~S+4 P0-04~ P0-08

Occupies 8 consecutive devices Reading the value in the

1 Reading the servo register value
S~S+7 registers of P0-09~P0-16

Occupies 8 consecutive devices Writing the data in the registers

2 Writing the servo register value
S~S+7 of P0-09~P0-16

The range of velocity: 1~3000;

Jog velocity input, clockwise
4999 (Clockwise running); Writing the data into the register
3 running, counterclockwise
4998 (Counterclockwise of P4-05
running and stop
running) ; 5000 (Stop)

1: Servo On; Writing the data into the register

4 Servo ON/OFF
Other value: Servo OFF of P2-30

Writing the data into the registers

5 Velocity command The valid range: -5000~5000
of P1-09 ~P1-11

Writing the data into the registers

6 Torque command The valid range: -300~300
of P1-12 ~ P1-14
_6
Applied to A2 series

S3 function
S3 function name S source or received data Remark
code

Reading the servo state value Occupies 10 consecutive Reading the state value from

16 devices S~S+9 P0-09 ~ P0-13

(32-bit value)

Writing data into the servo Occupies 8 consecutive devices Writing the data into the registers

17 register S~S+7 of P0-17 ~ P0-20

(32-bit value)

Writing the mapping parameter Occupies 8 consecutive devices Writing the data into the registers

18 value S~S+7 of P0-25 ~ P0-28

(32-bit value)

Jog velocity input, clockwise The range of velocity: 1~5000; Writing data into the register of
19
running, counterclockwise 4999 (Clockwise running); P4-05

6-520
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

running, 4998 (Counterclockwise

stop running) ;

0 (Stop)

Servo ON/OFF 1: Servo On; Writing the data into the register
20
Other value: Servo OFF of P2-30

Velocity command Occupies 6 consecutive devices Writing data into the registers of

21 (3 sets) with the range of the setting P1-09 ~ P1-11

value: -60000~60000 (32-bit value)）

Torque command Occupies 6 consecutive devices Writing the data into the registers

22 (3 sets) with the range of the setting of P1-12 ~ P1-14

value: -300~300 (32-bit value)

Setting the mapping targets of Occupies 8 consecutive devices Writing the data into the registers

23 servo parameters S~S+7 of P0-35 ~ P0-38

(32-bit value)

5. Timing chart for the communication of sending and receiving data:

Enable/disable t he exec ution

of the instruction

Sending data
6_

Rec eption fl ag

Receiv ing data

Compl etion fl ag

 l m
 n
Description:

 Users start/stop the execution of the instruction.

Transmitting data begins after the instruction is started. During the period, the communication timeout time is

not measured.

 The reception flag is set. From the moment when the first character is received to the moment when the next

character is received, the period of time will be measured. Whenever a character is received, the time

measured is cleared. The communication timeout flag will be generated if the time measured is greater than

6-521
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

the communication timeout setting value.

  When the receiving of data is completed, the completion flag is set. Users must clear the flag themselves.

  Before one communication instruction is sent out once again, the instruction need be disabled for one cycle

after the completion flag is watched. And then it is started in the next cycle.

6. There is no limit to the number of times to use the instruction. One communication port can only be used for the

output and execution of one communication instruction every time. If the receiving and sending of data is completed,

the instruction need be disabled to release the communication control right.

Example of setting communication protocol:

1. Set PLC COM1 (RS485) port to ASCII, 115200, 8, E, 1 as the communication format through HWCONFIG.

2. Make a basic setting using the panel of Delta ASDA-A2 servo according to the following steps.

A. By setting P2-08 to 10, the factory setting is restored.

B. Repower the servo after power off.

C. Set P1-01 to 0001 (PR mode).

D. By setting P3-00 to 2, the station address of the servo is set to 2.

E. By Setting P3-01 to 0205, the RS485 baud rate of the servo is set to 115200.
_6
F. By setting P3-02 to 0004, the RS485 communication format of the servo is 8, E, 1.

G. Power the servo on again after the setting above is completed.

Example:

By using ASDRW instruction to control the velocity, make the servo run to the relative position 5000000PUU by

accelerating for 400ms from the speed of 3000.0r/min and then decelerating for 200ms.

6-522
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6_

6. Connect AS CPU to ASDA-A2.

Set D100=1 at first. When M1 is ON, ASDA-A2 is Servo ON.

7. Set the values in D200~D207 as the following table shows, which will be written to P0-35~P0-38 of ASDA-A2. 8

consecutive devices are occupied.

Device D200 D201 D202 D203 D204 D205 D206 D207

Setting value（16#） 05140515 06020602 06030603 053C0507

When M2 is ON, the values in D200~D207 are written to P0-35~P0-38 of ASDA-A2.

6-523
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The setting values of P0-35~P0-38 are used for setting the mapping target of P0-25~P0-28. Users can set the

mapping target by referring to Delta servo operation manual.

ASDA-A2 P0-35 P0-36 P0-37 P0-38

Setting value（16#） 0514 0515 0602 0602 0603 0603 053C 0507

When the value of P0-38 is set to 053C 0507, it indicates that the mapping parameter target of P0-28 is P5-60 (16

bits) and P5-07 (16 bits).

ASDA-A2 P0-25 P0-26 P0-27 P0-28

Mapping parameter
P5-20, P5-21 P6-02 P6-03 P5-60, P5-07
target

Acceleration/deceleration
Target velocity and
time1
Parameter name Path type1 Path1 data PR command trigger
Acceleration/deceleration

time2

8. Setting values in D220~D227 are shown below.

Device D220 D221 D222 D223 D224 D225 D226 D227

Setting value（16#） 0190 00C8 0000 1083 4C4B40 7530 0001

When M3 is ON, the values in D220~D227 are written into P0-25~28 of ASDA-A2.
_6
ASDA-A2 P0-25 P0-26 P0-27 P0-28

Setting value（16#） 0190 00C8 0000 1083 4C4B40 7530 0001

The servo starts running after acceleration time=0190 (400ms), deceleration time=00C8 (200ms), path type=1083,

position command=4C4B40 (5000000PUU), target velocity=7530 (3000.0rpm) and PR command trigger =1 are set.

9. Set the values in D240~D247 as the following table shows, which will be written into P0-17~ P0-20 of ASDA-A2. 8

consecutive devices are occupied.

Device D240 D241 D242 D243 D244 D245 D246 D247

Setting value（10#） 41 0 0 0

When M4 is ON, the values in D240~D247 are written into P0-17~20 of ASDA-A2.

The setting values of P0-17~20 are used for setting the contents of P0-09~12.

(Users can set the contents to be displayed by referring to Delta servo operation manual.)

6-524
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

ASDA-A2 P0-17 P0-18 P0-19 P0-20

Setting value（10#） 41 0 0 0

When P0-17 is set to 41, it indicates that the content of P0-09 is the drive state.

ASDA-A2 P0-09 P0-10 P0-11 P0-12

Number of motor Number of motor Number of motor

Content Drive state
feedback pulses feedback pulses feedback pulses

10. When M5 is set to ON, the values of P0-17~ P0-20 of ASDA-A2 are read to D260~D267.

Device D260 D262 D264 D266

Number of motor Number of motor Number of motor

Content Drive state
feedback pulses feedback pulses feedback pulses

When the drive state bit, Bit 4 is1, it indicates that the target position is reached.

(Refer to Delta servo operation manual for the explanation of P0-46.)

11. When the reception completion flag SM100 is set to ON, the values of M1~M5 are cleared to avoid influencing the

execution of the next communication command.

After the receiving of the data that ASDA-A2 sends back is completed, the format of the data sent back from

ASDA-A2 will be checked. If the data format is correct, SM100 is ON. Whereas, SM102 is ON if the data format is

incorrect. 6_

6-525
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Setting the parameters in the data
1816 CCONF P S1~S11
exchange table of a communication port

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5    
S6    
S7  
S8    
S9    
S10    
S11  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1~S11 Refer to the explanation of the instruction.

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:
Refer to the
S1~S11 ： explanation of the
_6 instruction.

6-526
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Explanation:

1. The names and descriptions of S1~S11 are listed in the following table.

Device Name Description Data type Remark

1=COM1, 2=COM2.
Communication port
S1 If other value is filled, the instruction will not WORD
number
execute the modification of the operand.

The valid range: 1~32.

Item number in the data If the value is out the range, the instruction
S2 WORD
exchange table will not execute the modification of the

operand.

The valid range: 0 and 1~240. A

If the value is greater than 240, the negative

The station address of the instruction will take 240 as the value number
S3 WORD
remote equipment automatically. If the value is 0 or less than 0, will be

the originally set station address will not be seen as

changed. 0.

Supports 16#01, 02, 03, 04 and 17.

If the value exceeds the range, the

Function code for reading
S4 instruction will not execute the modification WORD 6_
data
of the operand. If S4=16#17, the value of S8

will be seen as 16#17.

Reading the remote

S5 16#0000~16#FFFF WORD
communication address

Bit function code: Supports 0~256 bits;

Word function code: Supports 0~100 words.

S6 Reading data length The value 0 indicates not to read data. WORD

If the value is greater than the maximum, the

maximum value will be taken for execution.

Bit function code: only M device is

The local register for storing selectable. BOOL

S7
the data received Word function code: only D device is WORD

selectable.

Function code for writing Supports 16#05, 06, 0F, 10.

S8 WORD
data If the value is out of the range above, the

6-527
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Device Name Description Data type Remark

instruction will not execute the modification

of the operand.

Writing the remote

S9 16#0000~16#FFFF WORD
communication address

Bit function code: supports 256 bits.

Word function code: supports 100 words.

S10 Writing data length The value 0 indicates not to write data. WORD

If the value is greater than the maximum, the

maximum value will be taken for execution.

The local register into which Bit function code: only M is selectable. BOOL
S11
the remote data are written Word function code: only D is selectable. WORD

2. It is suggested that the instruction be set as the pulse instruction when the instruction is used.

3. See the details about the Modbus function codes in S4 and S8 as below.

The command that AS reads the data from several bit devices (which are not discrete input devices) is 1 (16#01).

The command that AS reads the data from several bit devices (which are only discrete input devices) is 2 (16#02).

The command that AS reads the data from several word devices (which are not input registers) is 3 (16#03).
_6
The command that AS reads the data from several word devices (which are only input registers) is 4 (16#04).

The command that AS writes the state into a bit device is 5 (16#05).

The command that AS writes the state into a word device is 6 (16#06).

The command that AS writes the state into several bit devices is 15 (16#0F).

The command that AS writes the data into several word devices is 16 (16#10).

The command that AS synchronously reads from and writes the data into several word devices is 23 (16#17).

Only the function codes mentioned above are supported. For other function code setting value, such as 0, it will be

seen as invalid (including communication address, length and the start register) and the instruction will execute the

data exchange function based on the original communication parameter settings.

4. When users select16#17 (for reading and writing synchronously) in S4 (the function code for reading), the operand

S8 (the function code for writing) is seen as invalid and 16#17 is automatically seen for writing data.

6-528
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

5. When users select16#05 or 16#06 in S8 (the function code for writing), the operand S10 (for writing the data length)

is seen as invalid and 16#05 or 16#06 is automatically seen for writing a piece of data.

6. The parameter values specified by the instruction are valid only while PLC is running. After PLC is repowered, the

data in the data exchange table set through HWCONFIG are taken as default values. If there are the values of

parameters to be modified in the execution, the instruction will be needed for modifying them.

7. The instruction is used to immediately set the parameters for communication connection when the data exchange

function is not started. The new communication parameter will not be able to execute till the next cycle if the data

exchange function is being executed and meanwhile the communication parameters of the connection number are

just changed.

For example, while the data exchange function is executing the parameters of connection 3, the instruction

specifies the parameters of connection 3 to change. So the newly changed communication parameters will not be

executed till the next cycle when connection 3 is reached.

8. The instruction only provides the function of revising the communication parameters. Refer to the following flags for

starting and closing of the communication connection function if PLC program is used for starting or closing of the

connection number.

When users set the automatic scan function through the editing software, the start/stop flag of the connection

number will automatically update the start/stop state once after the data exchange function finishes executing the

scan.
6_
See the following table for the details on SM and the explanation.

SM No. Attribute Explanation of COM1 data exchange parameters

SM750 R/W The flag for enabling the data exchange

SM752 ~ SM783 R/W The flags for enabling the data exchange connection 1~32

SM784 ~ SM815 R The reading success flags of the data exchange connection 1~32

SM816 ~ SM847 R The error flags of the data exchange connection 1~32

SM No. Attribute Explanation of COM2 data exchange parameters

SM862 R/W The flag for enabling the data exchange

SM864 ~ SM895 R/W The flags for enabling the data exchange connection 1~32

SM896 ~ SM927 R The reading success flags of the data exchange connection 1~32

SM928 ~ SM959 R The error flags of the data exchange connection 1~32

PLC will set it to ON when the reading success flag mentioned above indicates the data receiving is completed and

the data checked are correct. If an error occurs in receiving of the data or communication timeout happens, the

6-529
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

error flag will be set to ON. (Users can refer to error codes.) Since the reading success flag and error flag of every

connection number are not ON simultaneously, PLC will not reset any of them to OFF in the data exchange.

9. See the following table for (only-read registers) SR in the data exchange function and the explanation.

SR No. Description

SR1335 The cycle of actual connection 1~32 in the COM1 data exchange

SR1336 The cyclic connection number in the COM1 data exchange currently

SR1340 ~ SR1371 The error codes of connection 1~32 in the COM1 data exchange

SR1375 The cycle of actual connection 1~32 in the COM2 data exchange

SR1376 The cyclic connection number in the COM2 data exchange currently

SR1380 ~ SR1411 The error codes of connection 1~32 in the COM2 data exchange

10. The data exchange function does not provide the writing success flag. It is suggested that the connection number in

execution can be referred to for judging whether the writing of data succeeds or not if the writing success flag need

be used.

For example, when the executed connection number is 3 in SR1336, the communication actions which are taken

successively are to read communication data first and then to write communication data after reading is finished.

Finally the connection number is modified into 4 after writing is completed.

_6 11. If the length value in S6 and the initial device of S7 are out of the range of D or M device, the length value in S6 will be

automatically revised to the value within the valid range. For example, if the length value in S6 is100 and the initial

device of S7 is M8182, the value in S6 will be revised into 10 automatically.

12. In the following cases, the instruction will not be executed and the parameter settings in HWCONFIG will not be

changed. And SM0 will be set to ON and the error code will be 16#200B in SR0.

 When the setting values in S1, S2, S4 and S8 are out of the specified range, it is seen as an input error.

 When S4 or S8 function code selects the bit type for reading or writing data, the local device for storing data S7

or S11 must select M device. If the selection is not M, it is seen as an input error.

 When S4 or S8 function code selects the word type for reading or writing data, the local device for storing data

S7 or S11 must select D device. If the selection is not D, it is seen as an input error.

6-530
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Example: AS COM1 (RS485):

1. For the data exchange between AS CPU and DVP-ES2 CPU, the COM1 data exchange table in ISPSoft HWConfig
is shown as follows.

Remote
Detection Remote Function
Item No. station Local device Length How to start
method device code
address

Specified D50  D50 50 H03 Program

1 2
connection D100  D100 50 H10 control

Specified D150  D150 50 H03 Program

2 2
connection D200  D200 50 H10 control

2. Before the data exchange is started, suppose that the corresponding data between AS CPU and DVP-ES2 CPU
are listed in the following table.

AS PLC (Master) Content value ES2 PLC (Slave) Content value

D50~D99 0 D50~D99 1~50

D100~D149 100~149 D100~D149 0

D150~D199 0 D150~D199 150~199

6_
D200~D249 200~249 D200~D249 0

3. The function of the data exchange between AS CPU and DVP-ES2 CPU is started as X0.1 is ON.

6-531
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

_6
4. After the data exchange is started, the corresponding data between AS CPU and DVP-ES2 CPU are changed as
shown in the following table.

AS PLC (Master) Content value ES2 PLC (Slave) Content value

D50~D99 1~50 D50~D99 1~50

D100~D149 100~149 D100~D149 100~149

D150~D199 150~199 D150~D199 150~199

D200~D249 200~249 D200~D249 200~249

5. As X0.0 is ON, the COM1 data exchange table parameters of AS CPU are modified as below.

Item Remote station Remote Function How to

Detection method Local device Length
No. address device code start

Specified D5000  D500 1 H04 Program

1 3
connection D6000  D600 1 H06 control

2 Specified 3 M100  M0 10 H01 Program

6-532
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

Item Remote station Remote Function How to

Detection method Local device Length
No. address device code start

connection M110  M50 10 control

H0F

6. Due to the change of COM1 data exchange table parameters, the corresponding data between AS CPU and
DVP-ES2 CPU are modified as below.

AS PLC (Master) Content value ES2 PLC (Slave) Content value

D5000 3000 D500 3000

D6000 4000 D600 4000

M100~M109 ON M0~M9 ON

M110~M119 OFF M50~M59 OFF

6_

6-533
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

API Instruction code Operand Function

Reading and writing Modbus data without any flag
1817 MODRWE S1，S2，S3，S4，S，n，D
used

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
S 
n    
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD

LREAL
WORD
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
INT

type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
S    
n   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -
_6 Symbol:

S1 ： Communication port number

S2 ： Unit address

S3 ： Function code

S4 ： Device address
Register involved in the reading and writing of the
S ：
data
n ： Data length
The flag for setting the completion of the reading
D ：
and writing the data

Explanation:

1. S1 sets the serial number of a communication port. The serial number of COM1 is 1, COM2 is 2, Card1 is 11 and

Card2 is 12. If the value exceeds the valid range, the instruction will not execute the receiving of any

communication data.

2. Refer to the explanation of API1808 MODRW instruction for the meaning of S2, S3, S4, S and n.

6-534
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

3. D sets the communication state flags when the communication instruction completes the communication. 3

consecutive devices are occupied by the flags. Users must reset them to OFF by themselves. The explanations of

the flag states are shown in the following table.

Operand Description

D The Receiving of the data succeeds.

D +1 An error occurs in the receiving of the data.

D +2 Reception timeout flag

NOTE: Only one flag will be set to ON among the three state flags and meanwhile the corresponding special flags

(SM) will be also set to ON every time the communication is completed. Refer to section 6.19.3 for the use

of the special flag.

4. The timing for sending the instruction is when the instruction is started. Users must disable the instruction for a scan

cycle after the communication is completed. And then the next communication instruction can be sent just after the

instruction is restarted.

5. The communication action and control sequence of the instruction are similar to API1808 MODRW instruction. The

only difference between them is that the sending of the communication command can be done without users’

control over the flag for sending the data.

Example:

The MODRW program and MODRWE program are compared by taking PLC COM1 and function code 03 to read 8 6_
pieces of data from D20 of DVP-ES2 for example. The same is for other PLC communication ports. For the use of other

function codes, refer to API1808 MODRW instruction and the following example.

1. The device address of D20 in DVP-ES2 CPU, 16#1020 and the content values in D20~D27 are shown in the table

below.

Device D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27

Value (16#) 1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC

2. AS reads the content values from D20~D27 in DVP-ES2 CPU through the communication.

6-535
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Method 1: Using MODRW instruction

The data in D20~D27 of DVP-ES2 are read when SM96 is ON and X0.0 is ON.

Explanation of MODRW operands

_6 Operand Description Device

S1 Unit address 16#0001

S2 Function code 16#0003

S3 Reading the device address of D20 16#1020

S The initial register for storing the data read D10

n Reading the data length 8

The communication response between AS CPU and DVP-ES2

ASCII mode: (The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16#

values.)

 AS sends the communication command: “01 03 10 20 00 08 C4 CR LF”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 03 10 12 34 56 78 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC AA

CR LF”

6-536
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “ 01 03 10 20 00 08 41 06”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 03 10 12 34 56 78 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC 90

FE”

SM100 is ON due to no error in the data.

After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will
be confirmed and judged whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, SM100 is ON. Whereas, SM102 is

ON if the data format sent back is incorrect. SM104 is ON if there is no response.。

Method 2: Using MODRWE instruction

The data in D20~D27 of DVP-ES2 are read when X0.0 is ON.

6_

Explanation of MODRWE operands

Operand Description Device

S1 Communication port number 16#0001

S2 Unit address 16#0001

S3 Function code 16#0003

S4 Reading the device address of D20 16#1020

S The initial register for storing the data read D10

n Reading the data length 8

The flag for setting the completion of the

D M0
reading and writing data

6-537
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

The communication response between AS CPU and DVP-ES2

ASCII mode: (The ASCII codes do not need to be converted intentionally and they are all expressed in the 16#

values.)

 AS sends the communication command: “01 03 10 20 00 08 C4 CR LF”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 03 10 12 34 56 78 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC AA

CR LF”

RTU mode:

 AS sends the communication command: “01 03 10 20 00 08 41 06”

 AS receives the communication command: “01 03 10 12 34 56 78 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 AA BB CC 90

FE”

M0 is ON due to no error in the data.

After the receiving of the data sent back from DVP-ES2 is completed, the data format sent back from DVP-ES2 will

be confirmed and judged whether it is correct. If no error occurs in the format, M0 is ON. Whereas, M1 is ON if the

data format sent back is incorrect. M2 is ON if there is no response. And meanwhile the corresponding special flags

SM100, SM102 and SM104 are ON as well.

3. The content values in D10~D17 of AS CPU:

_6
Device D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Value (16#) 1234 5678 1122 3344 5566 7788 99AA BBCC

Additional remarks:

1. The data type is ARRAY [3] of BOOL if D operand is declared via ISPSoft.

2. If D+2 exeeds the device range, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON and the error code will be

16#2003 in SR0.

6-538
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

6.19.3 Descriptions on the Communication-related Flags and Registers

Communication-related flags (SM)
Flag
Description Action
COM1 COM2 Card 1 Card 2
Data sending request flag
If users want to use the instruction to send and
receive the data, they have to use the pulse Users set the flag to ON,
instruction to set the flag to ON. When the and the system
SM96 SM97 SM76 SM77
instruction is executed, the PLC sends and automatically resets it to
receives the data. After the sending of the data is OFF.
complete, the system automatically resets the flag
to OFF.
The system automatically
When the flag is ON, the PLC is waiting to receive
SM98 SM99 SM78 SM79 sets the flag to ON and
the data.
resets it to OFF.
Reception complete flag
After the receiving of the data is complete, the
The system automatically
system automatically sets the flag to ON. When the
SM100 SM101 SM80 SM81 sets the flag to ON, and
flag is ON, the data received can be processed.
users reset it to OFF.
After the processing of the data received is
complete, users have to reset flags to OFF.
Data receiving error flag The system automatically
SM102 SM103 SM82 SM83 An error occurs during the reception of the data by sets the flag to ON, and
using the data receiving instruction. users reset it to OFF.
Communication timeout error flag
If users set the communication timeout (in SR) and The system automatically
SM104 SM105 SM84 SM85 no data is received after the timeout period, the flag sets the flag to ON, and
is ON. After the problem is solved, users have to users reset it to OFF.
reset the flag to OFF.
The choice between the 8-bit processing mode and
the 16-bit processing mode Users set the flag to ON
SM106 SM107 SM86 SM87
ON: The 8-bit processing mode and reset it to OFF. 6_
OFF: The 16-bit processing mode
Communication mode
ON: RTU mode
Users set the flag to ON
SM210 SM212 - - OFF: ASCII mode
and reset it to OFF.
This setup can be done in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft,
not available for Card1 and Card 2.
Communication protocol changed flag
The communication protocol changes in
accordance with the setting values in SR. If the flag
is set to ON, the communication protocol changes
in accordance with the setting values in SR and
then the system automatically resets the flag to
Users set the flag to ON
SM209 SM211 SM90 SM91 OFF.
and reset it to OFF.
NOTE: this change will not affect the parameters
set in HWCONFIG. When the PLC is
powered-on again, the PLC will operate
according to the communication protocol
set in the HWCONFIG.

NOTE: the above flags are non-latching types.

6-539
 A S S er i es Pr og r am m ing M an u a l

Communication-related registers (SR)

Special data register

Description
COM1 COM2 Card 1 Card 2

SR201 SR202 SR176 SR178 The communication port address

Communication protocol

SR209 SR212 SR177 SR179 For details, please refer to the following table to set up the communication

formatfor a serial communication port.

Communication timeout, unit: ms

Suppose the setting value is larger than 0. When the communication instruction

is executed and the PLC is in the receiving state, but no data is received after the
SR210 SR213 SR182 SR183 timeout period or the intervening time of the two characters exceeds the setting

value, the timeout flag will be ON. The register can be set to 0 and the

communication timeout monitoring will be disabled. The MODRW instruction

should be set between 100~32767 (ms).

Setting the communication format for a serial communication port

b0 Data length 7 (value=0) 8 (value=1)

00 ： None

b2~b1 Parity bits 01 ： Odd

_6 10 ： Even

b3 stop bits 1 bit (value=0) 2 bits (value=1)

0001 （16#1） ： 4800

0010 （16#2） ： 9600

0011 （16#3） ： 19200

0100 （16#4） ： 38400

0101 （16#5） ： 57600

b7~b4
0110 （16#6） ： 115200

0111 （16#7） ： 230400 Not available for RS-232

1000 （16#8） ： 500000 Not available for RS-232

1001 （16#9） ： 921000 Not available for RS-232

1111 （16#F） ： Self-defined*1

b8~b15 Undefined (reserved)

*1: Users can set up the baud rate via the HWCONFIG of ISPSoft.

6-540
 C ha pt er 6 A p pl i e d In s tr uc t io ns

The data transmission speed is as follows.

Baud rate (bps) RTU timeout timer (ms) Baud rate (bps) RTU timeout timer (ms)

4800 9 115200 1

9600 5 230400 1

19200 3 - -

38400 2 - -

57600 1 - -

6_

6-541
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

6.20 Other Instructions

6.20.1 List of Other Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction
1900 WDT –  Watchdog timer
1901 DELAY –  Delaying the execution of the program
1902 GPWM – – General pulse width modulation
1904 EPUSH –  Storing the contents of the index registers
1905 EPOP –  Reading the data into the index registers

_6

6-542
 Ch ap te r 6 Ap pl ie d Instruc ti ons

6.20.2 Explanation of Other Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

1900 WDT P ─ Watchdog timer

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS ─

Symbol:

Explanation:

1. In the AS series PLC, there is a watchdog timer which is used to monitor the operation of the system.

2. The instruction WDT is used to reset the watchdog timer in the PLC. If the program scanning time exceeds 200

milliseconds, the error LED indicator is ON, and the PLC stops running.

3. The particular point when the watchdog timer acts:

 The system is abnormal.

 The execution of the program takes much time, and therefore the scam time is larger than the setting value of

the watchdog timer. There are two way users can use to improve the situation.

(a) Using the instruction WDT

STEP0 END
WDT

t1 t2

(b) Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information about changing the setting value of the

watchdog timer.

6-543
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

Suppose the program scanning time is 300 milliseconds. After the program is divided into two parts, and the instruction

WDT is inserted between these two parts, the time it takes to scan either the first part of the program or the second part of

the program is less than 200 milliseconds.

_6

6-544
 Ch ap te r 6 Ap pl ie d Instruc ti ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1901 DELAY P S Delaying the execution of the program

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S          

DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS ─

Symbol:

S ： Delay

Explanation:

After the instruction DELAY is executed, the execution of the program following the DELAY is delayed for a period of time
specified by users.

The unit of S is 0.1 milliseconds.

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the instruction DELAY is executed. The execution of the program following DELAY is delayed for two

milliseconds. That is, Y0.0 is ON and the states of Y0.0~Y0.15 are refreshed two milliseconds after the instruction DELAY

is executed.

6-545
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Input X0.0

Out put Y0.0

T =2ms

Additional remark:

1. If S I less than 0, there is no delay.

2. If S is larger than 1000, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. Users can adjust the delay according to the practical condition.

4. The delay will increase due to the communication or other influences.

_6

6-546
 Ch ap te r 6 Ap pl ie d Instruc ti ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1902 GPWM S1，S2，D General pulse width modulation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2    
D   DWORD  

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

─ AS ─

Symbol:

S1 ： Pulse width

S2 ： Pulse cycle

D ： Output device

Explanation:

1. When the instruction GPWM is executed, every pulse with a width specified by S1 and with a cycle specified by S2 is

output from the device specified by D.

2. The pulse width specified by S1 is t. t should be within the range between 0 and 3276 milliseconds.

3. The pulse cycle specified by S2 is T. T should be within the range between 1 and 32767 milliseconds, and S1 should

be less than S2.

4. S2+1 and S2+2 are parameters for system use. Please do not occupy them.

5. If S1 is less than 0, there is no pulse output. If S1 is larger than S2, the output device keeps ON.

6. S1 and S2 can be altered during the execution of the instruction GPWM.

7. If the conditional contact is not enabled, there is no pulse output.

8. When the on-line editing is used, please reset the conditional contact to initialize the instruction.

Example:

When the program is executed, the values in D0 and D2 are 1000 and 2000 respectively. When X0.0 is ON, the pulses

illustrated below are output from Y0.0. When X0.0 is OFF, Y0.0 is OFF.

6-547
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

t =1000ms

Y0.0

T= 2000ms

Additional remark:

1. The instruction counts by the scan cycle. Therefore, the maximum error is one scan cycle. Besides, S1, S2, and

(S2-S1) should be larger than the scan cycle. Otherwise, an error occurs when the instruction GPWM is executed.
_6
2. If the instruction is used in the function block or the interrupt task, the inaccurate pulse output will occur.

3. If users declare the operand S2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

6-548
 Ch ap te r 6 Ap pl ie d Instruc ti ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1904 EPUSH P D Storing the contents of the index registers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D 

DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS ─

Symbol:

Device in which the value in the index

D：
register is stored

Explanation:

1. The values in E0~E9 are stored in the devices specified by the value in D. The allowed value for D is in the range of
0~99. Values exceed the range will not be executed.

2. The execution of the instruction involves sixteen devices, and the last six devices are for system use. If the

instruction is executed and the number of times the data is stored is n, which is the value in D, the data in E0~E9 is

stored in D+(16*n+1)~D+(16*n+16), and the value in D becomes n+1.

3. The range of device D should be 16x100+1.

4. This instruction uses pulse instruction to interact with the stack, pushing a value onto the stack. Therefore, users

need to reset the contact upon the next operation.

5. When the instruction is used with the instruction EPOP, the value which is stored last in the device specified by the

value in D is read first, following the LIFO (last in first out) principle.

The num ber of ti mes

D t he dat a is stored .

D+1 E0
D+2 E1
......

......

D + 10 E9

For system u se
D +16

D +17 E0
D + 18 E1
D + 19 E2
......

......

6-549
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

Suppose the value in D0 is 0.

When X0.0 is ON for the first time, the data in E0~E9 is transmitted to D1~D10 and the value in D0 becomes 1.

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON for the second time, the data in E0~E9 is transmitted to D17~D26, and the value

in D0 becomes 2.

When X0.0 is switched from OFF to ON for the nth time, the data in E0~E9 is transmitted to (n*16)+1~(n*16)+10.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in D is less than 0 or greater than 99, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in
SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the range of device is not sufficient for the D+((the value in D)+1)*16-1), the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

_6

6-550
 Ch ap te r 6 Ap pl ie d Instruc ti ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

1905 EPOP P D Reading the data into the index registers

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

D 

DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS ─

Symbol:

D ： Device from which the value is read

Explanation:

1. The values in the devices specified by the value in D are read into E0~E9, and the value in D decreases by one. The

allowed value for D is in the range of 1~100. Values exceed the range will not be executed.

2. The execution of the instruction involves sixteen devices, and the last six devices are for system use. If the

instruction is executed and the number of times the data is stored is n, which is the value in D, the data in E0~E9 is

stored in D+16*(n-1)+1~D+16*(n-1)+10, and the value in D becomes n-1.

3. This instruction uses pulse instruction to interact with the stack, taking the TOP VALUE from the stack and assigns it

to the specified variable. Therefore, users need to reset the contact upon the next operation.

4. The value which is stored last in the device specified by the value in D is read first, following the LIFO (last in first out)
principle.

The num ber of t im es

D t he data i s st ored .

D+1 E0
D+2 E1
......

......

D + 10 E9

F or syst em u se
D +16

D +17 E0
D + 18 E1

D + 19 E2
......

......

6-551
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

When X0.0 is ON, the value in D0 is set to 0, and the values in E0~E9 are transmitted to D1~D10. After the execution of

FB0 is complete, the values in D1~D9 are read into E0~E9 via the instruction EPOP.

_6 Additional remark:

1. If the value in D is less than 0 or greater than 100, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in
SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the range of device is not sufficient for the D+((the value in D) *16-1), the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-552
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

6.21 String Processing Instructions

6.21.1 List of String Processing Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2100 BINDA DBINDA  Converting the singed decimal number into the ASCII code

Converting the binary hexadecimal number into the

2101 BINHA DBINHA 
hexadecimal ASCII code

Converting the binary-coded decimal number into the ASCII

2102 BCDDA DBCDDA 
code

Converting the signed decimal ASCII code into the signed

2103 DABIN DDABIN 
decimal binary number

Converting the hexadecimal ASCII code into the

2104 HABIN DHABIN 
hexadecimal binary number

Converting the ASCII code into the binary-coded decimal

2105 DABCD DDABCD 
number

2106 $LEN –  Calculating the length of the string

2109 $FSTR –  Converting the floating-point number into the string

2110 $FVAL –  Converting the string into the floating-point number 6_

– The retrieve of the characters in the string begins from the
2111 $RIGHT 
right.

– The retrieve of the characters in the string begins from the

2112 $LEFT 
left.

2113 $MIDR –  Retrieving a part of the string

2115 $SER –  Searching the string

2116 $RPLC –  Replacing the characters in the string

2117 $DEL –  Deleting the characters in the string

2118 $CLR –  Clearing the string

2119 $INS –  Inserting the string

6-553
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

6.21.2 Explanation of String Processing Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the singed decimal

2100 D BINDA P S，D
number into the ASCII code

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

Device in which the conversion result

D：
is stored

_6

Explanation:

1. The signed decimal binary number in S is converted into the ASCII code, and the conversion result is stored in D.

2. The instruction supports SM690, which controls the ending character.

3. The value in S used in the 16-bit instruction should be a binary number and should be within the range between

-32768 and 32767. The operand D occupies four word devices. The data is converted as follows.

b15 b0 b15 b7

b8 b0

1234  16#32 16#31 D+0

16#34 16#33 D+1

16#00 16#00 D+2

If SM690 is OFF, the ending character 16#0000 is stored in D+2. If SM690 is ON, the value in D+2 is unchanged
without the ending character.

6-554
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Besides, if the value in S is a positive value, only value will be inputted but not the sign character in D. If the value in

S is a negative value, the sign character in D “-” will be stored in 16#2D. For example, if the value in S is -12345 and

SM690 is OFF, the conversion result is as follows.

b15 b0 b15 b7

b8 b0

-1234  16#31 16#2D（-） D+0

16#33 16#32 D+1

16#00 16#34 D+2

4. The value in S used in the 32-bit instruction should be a binary number and should be within the range between

-2147483648 and 2147483647. The operand D occupies six word devices. The data is converted as follows.

b31 b0 b15 b7

b8 b0

12345678  16#32 16#31 D+0

16#34 16#33 D+1

16#36 16#35 D+2

16#38 16#37 D+3

16#00 16#00 D+4

If SM690 is OFF, the ending character 16#0000 is stored in D+4. If SM690 is ON, the value in D+4 is unchanged

without the ending character.

6_
Besides, if the value in S is a positive value, only value will be inputted but not the sign character in D as the

previous example shown. If the value in S is a negative value, the sign character in D “-” will be stored in 16#2D. For

example, if the value in S is -12345678, and SM690 is OFF, the conversion result is as follows.

b31 b0 b15 b7

b8 b0

-12345678  16#31 16#2D D+0

16#33 16#32 D+1

16#35 16#34 D+2

16#37 16#36 D+3

16#00 16#38 D+4

6-555
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example 1:

Suppose the value in L0 is 5126 and SM690 is OFF. When the PLC runs, the values are D0=16#3135, D1=16#3632,

D2=16#0000.

D10 b15 b7

b8 b0

5126  16#31 16#35 D0

16#36 16#32 D1

16#00 16#00 D2

Example 2:

Suppose the value in D10 is -3842563 and SM690 is OFF. When the PLC runs, the values are D0=16#332D,

D1=16#3438, D2=16#3532, D3=16#3336, D4=16#0000.

_6

D10 b15 b7

b8 b0

-3842563  16#33 16#2D D0

16#34 16#38 D1

16#35 16#32 D2

16#33 16#36 D3

16#00 16#00 D4

6-556
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Additional remark:

1. If value in the device D is not sufficient for conversion, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the operand D used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [4] of WORD/INT.

3. If the operand D used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [6] of WORD/INT.

6_

6-557
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary hexadecimal number
2101 D BINHA P S，D
into the hexadecimal ASCII code

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value
Device in which the conversion
D ：
result is stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The hexadecimal binary number in S is converted into the ASCII code, and the conversion result is stored in D.

2. The instruction supports SM690, which controls the ending character.

3. The value in S used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 16#0000 and 16#FFFF, and should

be a four-digit binary number. The operand D occupies three word devices. The data is converted as follows.

b15 b0 b15 b7
b8 b0
02A6  16#32 16#30 D+0
16#36 16#41 D+1
16#00 16#00 D+2
If SM690 is OFF, 16#0000 is stored in D+2. If SM690 is ON, the value in D+2 is unchanged. For example, if the

value in S is 16#02A6 and SM690 is OFF, the conversion result is as follows.

4. The value in S used in the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 16#00000000 and 16#FFFFFFFF,

and should be an eight-digit binary number. The operand D occupies five word devices. The data is converted as
follows.

b31 b0 b15 b7
b8 b0
03AC 6251  16#33 16#30 D+0
16#43 16#41 D+1

6-558
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

16#32 16#36 D+2

16#31 16#35 D+3
16#00 16#00 D+4
If SM690 is OFF, 16#0000 is stored in D+4. If SM690 is ON, the value in D+4 is unchanged. For example, if the

value in S is 16#03AC625E and SM690 is OFF, the conversion result is as follows.

Example 1:

Suppose the value in D10 is 16#9C06 and SM690 is OFF. When PLC runs, the values are D0=16#4339, D1=16#3630,

D2=16#0000.

D10 b15 b7

b8 b0

16#9C06  16#43 16#39 D0

16#36 16#30 D1

16#00 16#00 D2 6_
Example 2:

Suppose the value in D10 is 16#7B3C581F and SM690 is OFF. When PLC runs, the values are D0=16#4237,

D1=16#4333, D2=16#3835, D3=16#4631, D4=16#0000.

6-559
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

D10 b15 b7

b8 b0

16#7B3C 581F  16#42 16#37 D0

16#43 16#33 D1

16#38 16#35 D2

16#46 16#31 D3

16#00 16#00 D4

Additional remark:

1. If D+2 used in the 16-bit instruction exceeds the device range, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If D+4 used in the 32-bit instruction exceeds the device range, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the operand D used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

4. If the operand D used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [5] of WORD/INT.

_6

6-560
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the binary-coded decimal
2102 D BCDDA P S，D
number into the ASCII code

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S           
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S     
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

Device in which the conversion

D ：
result is stored

Explanation:

1. The binary-coded decimal number in S is converted into the ASCII code, and the conversion result is stored in D. 6_

2. The instruction supports SM690, which controls the ending character.

3. The binary-coded decimal value in S used in the 16-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and 9999,

and should be a four-digit binary-coded decimal value. The operand D occupies three word devices. The data is
converted as follows.

b15~12 b7~4 b15 b7

b11~8 b3~0 b8 b0
0 8 7 6  16#38 16#30 D+0
Thousands T U 16#36 16#37 D+1
Hundreds ens nits
16#00 16#00 D+2
If SM690 is OFF, the ending character 16#0000 is stored in D+2. If SM690 is ON, the value in D+2 is unchanged
without the ending character.

4. The binary-coded decimal value in S used in the 32-bit instruction should be within the range between 0 and

99999999, and should be an eight-digit binary-coded decimal value. The operand D occupies five word devices.

The data is converted as follows.

6-561
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

b31 b0 b15 b7
b8 b0
0876 5432  16#38 16#30 D+0
16#36 16#37 D+1
16#34 16#35 D+2
16#32 16#33 D+3
16#00 16#00 D+4
5. If SM690 is OFF, the ending character 16#0000 is stored in D+5. If SM690 is ON, the value in D+5 is unchanged

without the ending character.

6. Even if the first digit of binary-coded decimal value in S is 0, it will be converted into the ASCII code 0 (16#30).
Example 1:

Suppose the binary-coded decimal value in D10 is 1295 and SM690 is OFF. When PLC runs, the values are D0=16#3231,

D1=16#3539, D2=16#0000.

D10 b15 b7
b8 b0
1295  16#32 16#31 D0
16#35 16#39 D1
_6 16#00 16#00 D2

Example 2:

Suppose the binary-coded decimal value in D10 is 00578352 and SM690 is OFF. When PLC runs, the values are

D0=16#3030, D1=16#3735, D2=16#3338, D3=16#3235, D4=16#0000.

D10 b15 b7
b8 b0
0057 8352  16#30 16#30 D0
16#37 16#35 D1
16#33 16#38 D2
16#32 16#35 D3
16#00 16#00 D4

6-562
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S used in the 16-bit instruction is not within the range between 0 and 9999, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200D. (The binary-coded decimal value is represented by

the hexadecimal number, but one of digits is not within the range between 0 and 9.)

2. If the value in S used in the 32-bit instruction is not within the range between 0 and 99999999, the instruction is not

executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200D. (The binary-coded decimal value is represented by

the hexadecimal number, but one of digits is not within the range between 0 and 9.)

3. If D+2 used in the 16-bit instruction exceeds the device range, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If D+4 used in the 32-bit instruction exceeds the device range, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. If the operand D used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

6. If the operand D used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be

ARRAY [5] of WORD/INT.

6_

6-563
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the signed decimal ASCII code
2103 D DABIN P S，D
into the signed decimal binary number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

Device in which the conversion

D ：
result is stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The signed decimal ASCII code in S is converted into the signed decimal binary number, and the conversion result
is stored in D.

2. The operand S used in the 16-bit instruction occupies three word devices, and the decimal ASCII code in S should
be within the range between -32768 and 32767. If the value in S is a string and without the ending character 16#00,
the conversion can be up to 5 digits (sign excluded).

b15 b7 b15
b8 b0 b0
S+0 “2“ “1“  1234 D
S+1 “4“ “3“
S+2 16#00 16#00

3. If the first character is “ ” (a space), the sign is a positive sign. If the first character is “-”, the sign is a negative sign.
Take the string “2345” for example.

b15 b7 b15
b8 b0 b0
S+0 “2“ “-“  -2345 D
S+1 “4“ “3“
S+2 16#00 “5“

6-564
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

4. The operand S used in the 32-bit instruction occupies six word devices, and the decimal ASCII code in S should be
within the range between -2147483648 and 2147483647. If the value in S is a string and without the ending
character 16#00, the conversion can be up to 10 digits (sign excluded).

b15 b7 b31
b8 b0 b0
S+0 “2“ “1“  1234567890 D
S+1 “4“ “3“
S+2 “6“ “5“
S+3 “8“ “7“
S+4 “0“ “9“
S+5 16#00 16#00
5. If the first character is “ ” (a space), the sign is a positive sign. If the first character is “-”, the sign is a negative sign.
Take the string “-234567890” for example.

b15 b7 b31
b8 b0 b0

S+0 ‘2‘ ‘-’  -234567890 D

S+1 ‘4‘ ‘3‘

S+2 ‘6’ ‘5‘

S+3 ‘8‘ ‘7‘

S+4 ‘0’ ‘9‘

S+5 16#00 16#00

6. If the first digit of the string in the device S is blank (16#20) + sign (16#2B), it will be seen as 0. For the second digit,
6_
if the number is not 0~9, it will be seen as the ending of a string and no error message will be shown. For example if

the word order is 16#2016#3116#3216#2B, the conversion result is 12.

7. The string range in the device S for 16-bit instruction is 1~6 (positive/negative signs included) and for 32-bit
instruction is 1~11 (positive/negative signs included).

8. Only the 32-bit instructions can use the 32-bit counter, but not the device E.

Example 1:

Suppose the values are D20=16#302D, D21=16#3433, D22=16#0035. When PLC runs, the value is D0=-345.

b15 b7 b15
b8 b0 b0
D20 16#30 16#2D  -345 D0
D21 16#34 16#33
D22 16#00 16#35

6-565
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example 2:

Suppose the values are D20=16#322D, D21=16#3433, D22=16#3635, D23=16#2037, D24=16#0000, D25=16#0000.

When PLC runs, the value is D0=-234567.

b15 b7 b31

b8 b0 b0

D20 16#32 16#2D  -234567 D0

D21 16#34 16#33

D22 16#36 16#35

D23 16#20 16#37

D24 16#00 16#00

D25 16#00 16#00

_6 Example 3:

Suppose the string value in S is 12. When PLC runs, the value is D0=12.

Additional remark:

1. If the value of the first word in S is an ending character (16#00), the instruction will see the value in S as 0 (16#30).

2. If the value of the first digit in S is 16#20 (blank) or 16#2B (+) or 16#2D (-) and the second digit is 16#00, the

instruction will see the value in S as 0 (16#30).

3. Even if the first digit of binary-coded decimal value in S is 0, it will be converted into the ASCII code 0 (16#30).

4. The value of the first digit in S only supports ASCII codes, 16#30~16#39 (0~9), 16#200 (blank), 16#2D (negative

6-566
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

sign), 16#2B (positive sign), 16#00 (ending character). If the value of the first digit in S is not ASCII code, the
instruction will not be executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. Except the first digit, if the value of other digits in S is not ASCII codes, 16#30~16#39 or 16#00, it will be seen as
16#00.

6. If the value in S exceeds the device range, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003. The instruction will
not be executed.

7. If the operand S used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [3] of WORD/INT.

8. If the operand S used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will
be ARRAY [6] of WORD/INT.

6_

6-567
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the hexadecimal ASCII code into
2104 D HABIN P S，D
the hexadecimal binary number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

Device in which the

D ： conversion result is
stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The hexadecimal ASCII code in S is converted into the hexadecimal binary number, and the conversion result is

stored in D.

2. The operand S used in the 16-bit instruction occupies two word devices. If the value in S is a string and without the

ending character 16#00, the conversion can be up to 4 digits (sign excluded). The hexadecimal ASCII code in S

should be within the range between 0000 and FFFF. If S is a string, the string should be within the range between
“0” and “FFFF”.

b15 b7 b15

b8 b0 b0

S+0 “A“ “5“  16#5A8D D

S+1 “D“ “8“

3. The operand S used in the 32-bit instruction occupies four word devices. If the value in S is a string and without the

ending character 16#00, the conversion can be up to 8 digits (sign excluded). The hexadecimal ASCII code in S

should be within the range between 00000000 and FFFFFFFF. If S is a string, the string should be within the range
between “0” and “FFFFFFFF”.

6-568
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

b15 b7 b31

b8 b0 b0

S+0 “C” “5“  16#5CB8 07E1 D

S+1 “8“ “B“

S+2 “7“ “0“

S+3 “1“ “E“

4. The string range in the device S for 16-bit instruction is 1~4 and for 32-bit instruction is 1~8.

Example 1:

Suppose the values are D20=16#3641, D21=16#4633 (ASCII 16#A63F). When PLC runs, the value is D0=-22977.

b15 b7 b15

b8 b0 b0
6_
D20 16#36 16#41  16#A63F D0

D21 16#46 16#33

Example 2:

Suppose the values are D20=16#4634, D21=16#3244, D22=16#3738, D23=16#3035 (ASCII 16#4FD28750). When PLC

runs, the value is (D1, D0)=16#4FD28750.

6-569
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

b15 b7 b31

b8 b0 b0

D20 16#46 16#34  16#4FD2 8750 D0

D21 16#32 16#44

D22 16#37 16#38

D23 16#30 16#35

Example 3:

Suppose the string value in S is A. When PLC runs, the value is D20=16#A=10.

Example 4:

_6 Suppose the values are D20=16#3641, D21=16#4600 (ASCII 16#00A6). When PLC runs, the value is D0=166.

b15 b7 b15

b8 b0 b0

D20 16#36 16#41  16#00A6 D0

D21 16#46 16#00

Additional remark:

1. If the ASCII code in S is not within the range between 16#30~16#39 (“0”~”9”), or within the range between
16#41~16#46 (“A”~”F”), the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-570
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

2. If the operand S used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

3. If the operand S used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [4] of WORD/INT.

6_

6-571
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the ASCII code into the
2105 D DABCD P S，D
binary-coded decimal number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D       
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
D     

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS AS

Symbol:

S ： Source value

Device in which the conversion

D：
result is stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The ASCII code in S is converted into the binary-coded decimal number, and the conversion result is stored in D.

2. The operand S used in the 16-bit instruction occupies two word devices, and the ASCII code in S should be within

the range between 0000 and 9999. If S is a string, the string should be within the range between “0” and “9999”.

b15 b7 b15~b12 b11~b8 b7~b4

b8 b0 b3~b0

S+0 “8“ “9“  9 8 7 6 D

S+1 “6“ “7“ 千 百 十 個

3. The operand S used in the 32-bit instruction occupies four word devices, and the ASCII code in S should be within

the range between 0000000 and 99999999. If S is a string, the string should be within the range between “0” and
“99999999”.

6-572
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

b15 b7 b15~b12 b11~b8 b7~b4

b8 b0 b3~b0

S+0 “8“ “9“  5 4 3 2 D

S+1 “6“ “7“ 9 8 7 6 D+1

S+2 “4“ “5“

S+3 “2“ “3“

4. If the value in S is 16#20 the value is processed as 16#30. If the value in S is 16#00, the value is processed as an
ending character..

5. If S used in the 16-bit instruction is a string, the number of characters contained in the string should be within the

range between 1 and 4. If S used in the 32-bit instruction is a string, the number of characters contained in the string
should be within the range between 1 and 8.

Example 1:

Suppose the values are D20=16#3820, D21=16#3637 (ASCII 876). When PLC runs, the value will be converted into

Y0=16#876.

6_

b15 b7 b15~b12 b11~b8 b7~b4

b8 b0 b3~b0

D20 16#38 16#20  0 8 7 6 Y0

D21 16#36 16#37

6-573
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example 2:

Suppose the values are D20=16#3738, D21=16#3536, D22=16#3334, D23=16#3132 (ASCII 87654321). When PLC runs,

the value is (D11, D10)= 16#87654321.

b15 b7 b31

b8 b0 b0

D20 16#37 16#38  8765 4321 D0

D21 16#35 16#36

D22 16#33 16#34

D23 16#31 16#32

Example 3:
_6
Suppose the string value in S is 1. When PLC runs, the value is D20=16#0001.

Example 4:

Suppose the string value in S is 1234. When PLC runs, the value is (D21, D20)= 16#00001234.

6-574
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Additional remark:

1. If the ASCII code in S is not ASCII codes 16#30~16#39, 16#20, 16#00, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If S is a string and the number of characters contained in the string exceeds the range, the instruction is not
executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the operand S used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

4. If the operand S used during the execution of the 32-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [4] of WORD/INT.

6_

6-575
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

2106 $LEN P S，D Calculating the length of the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S     
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： String

D ： Length of the string

Explanation:

1. The length of the string in S is calculated, exclusive of 16#00 with which the string ends. The length of the string is

stored in D.

_6 2. The value stored in D should be within the range between 0~32767. If exceeding the range, the value in D will be

seen as 32767.

b15 b8 b 7 b0
S Sec ond char acter Fi rs t c haracter
S+1 F ourth c harac ter Thir d char acter b15 b0
S+2 Six th c harac ter Fifth charac ter n D

1 6#00 Length of the s tring

S+ n (En d ing c ha ract er) n thc harac ter

If the data in S~S+4 is ABCDEFGHI, the calculation result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 16#42( B) 16#41( A)
S+1 16#44( D) 16#43( C) ABCDEF GHI b15 b0
S+2 16#46( F) 16#45( E) 9 D
S+3 16#48( H) 16#47( G)
S+4 16#00 16#49( I)
( En di ng cha ra cter )

6-576
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Example 1:

Suppose S is the string “DELTA”. When the PLC runs, the value in D0 is 5.

Example 2:

Suppose the data in D0~D2 is as follows. When the PLC runs, the value in L0 is 5.

D0 16#45 (E) 16#44 (D)

D1 16#54 (T) 16#4C (L)

D2 16#00 (Ending character) 16#41 (A)

6_

Additional remark:

1. If the string does not end with 16#00, the instruction will execute to the maximum value 32767.

2. If the length of the value exceeds the device range, the last character will be seen as the ending character.

6-577
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the floating-point number into
2109 $FSTR P S1，S2，D
the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2      
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1 
S2   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Source value

S2 ： Initial device in which the format is stored

Initial device in which the conversion result
D ：
is stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The floating-point number in S1 is converted into the string in accordance with the setting of S2, and the conversion
result is stored in D.

2. The floating-point number in S1 is converted into the string and added with the ending character 16#00 and then
store the conversion result in D.

High byte Low byte

D Second ASCII code First ASCII code

（S1+1，S1） D+1 Fourth ASCII code Third ASCII code

 D+2 Sixth ASCII code Fifth ASCII code

Floating-point number …… ……

D +n-1 mth ASCII code m-1th ASCII code

D +n 16#00 ending character

Floating-point string

3. The conversion result varies with the setting of S2.

4. The value in S2+1 should be within the range of 2≦S2+1≦20; the signs (+,-), digits in the integer and decimal

6-578
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

number can be included but the point in the decimal number and the exponent number are not included. .

Operand Description

0: Decimal format
S2
1: Exponential

S2+1 Number of character

5. If the value in S1 is a positive number, the first ASCII code can be inputted in D; if the value in S1 is a negative
number, the sign 16#2D (-) will be inputted first and then the second ASCII can be inputted.

6. Decimal format (S2=0)

After con ve rsio n,

the fl oa ting -p oin t string
in th e device D.
Sign Integ er r De ci ma l

 The value in S2+1 should be within the range of 2≦S2+1≦20; the signs (+,-), digits in the integer and decimal

number can be included but the point in the decimal number and the exponent number are not included..

 Example 1:

Suppose the number of characters is 8. When the floating-point numbers are -1.2345678 and 123456. The

calculation is as follows.

D Floating-point number Floating-point number

number -1.2345678 123456 6_

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

D 16#31 (1) 16#2D (-) 16#32 (2) 16#31 (1)

D+1 16#32 (2) 16#2E (.) 16#34 (4) 16#33 (3)

D+2 16#34 (4) 16#33 (3) 16#36 (6) 16#35 (5)

16#00
D+3 16#36 (6) 16#35 (5)
ending character

16#00
D+4 16#38 (8)
ending character
After the conversion, if the floating-point number can be shown in S2+1 but the length exceed the value in

S2+1, the digits in decimal will be rounded off. If the floating-point string cannot fulfill all the number of
characters, it is not required to fulfill.

6-579
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

 Example 2:

After the conversion, if the floating-point number can be shown in S2+1, the instruction will use the exponential
format to convert. For example the number of characters is 5 digits and the floating-point number is 1234567,

the conversion result is1.2346E+06.

Floating-point number
D number
1234567

D 16#2E (.) 16#31 (1)

D+1 16#33 (3) 16#32 (2)

D+2 16#36 (6) 16#34 (4)

D+3 16#2B (+) 16#45 (E)

D+4 16#32 (6) 16#30 (0)

16#0000
D+5
ending character

 Example 3:

After the conversion, if the floating-point number can be shown in S2+1, the instruction will use the exponential
format to convert. For example the number of characters is 2 digits and the floating-point number is
_6 0.00012345, the conversion result is1.2E-04.

Floating-point number
D number
0.00012345

D 16#2E (.) 16#31 (1)

D+1 16#45 (E) 16#32 (2)

D+2 16#30 (0) 16#2D (-)

16#00
D+3 16#34 (4)
ending character

 Example 4:

After the conversion, if the absolute value of the floating-point number is <=10-5, the instruction will use the

exponential format to convert. For example the number of characters is 4 digits and the floating-point number

is 0.00001234, the conversion result is1.234E-05.

6-580
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Floating-point number
D number
0.00001234

D 16#2E (.) 16#31 (1)

D+1 16#33 (3) 16#32 (2)

D+2 16#45 (E) 16#34 (4)

D+3 16#30 (0) 16#2D (-)

16#00
D+4 16#35 (5)
ending character

7. Exponential format (S2=1)

After con ve rsio n,

the fl oa ting -p oin t string
Si gn In tege r r De ci ma l Exponential

in th e device D.

 The value in S2+1 should be within the range of 2≦S2+1≦20; the signs (+,-), digits in the integer and decimal

number can be included but the point in the decimal number and the exponent number are not included. After

calculation, the length will add the exponents (4 digits) and the point of the decimal number in.

 The number of character in the area for the integer is 1 digit.

 The number of character in the area for the exponent is 4 words. 6_

If the exponent is a positive number, 16#2B (+) will be added in the area for exponent in D. If the exponent is a

negative number, 16#2D (-) will be added in the area for exponent in D. The number of character in the area

for the exponent is 2 digits. If there is only 1 digit in the conversion result, the first digit of the area for the

exponent will be added 16#30 (0).

 Example:

Suppose the number of characters is 8. When the floating-point numbers are -123.456789 and 123456. The

calculation is as follows.

Floating-point number Floating-point number

D number
-123.456789 12345

High byte Low byte High byte Low byte

D 16#31 (1) 16#2D (-) 16#2E (.) 16#31 (1)

D+1 16#32 (2) 16#2E (.) 16#33 (3) 16#32 (2)

D+2 16#34 (4) 16#33 (3) 16#35 (5) 16#34 (4)

6-581
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

D+3 16#36 (6) 16#35 (5) 16#2B (+) 16#45 (E)

D+4 16#45 (E) 16#38 (8) 16#34 (4) 16#30 (0)

16#00
D+5 16#30 (0) 16#2B (+)
ending character

16#00
D+6 16#32 (2)
ending character
After the conversion, if the floating-point number can be shown in S2+1, the exceeding digits will be rounded
off.

The conversion result of the string length for the floating number -123.456789 in a number of 8 characters is

13 (the ending character excluded).

The conversion result of the string length for the floating number 12345 in a number of 8 characters is 10 (the

ending character excluded).

If the floating-point string cannot fulfill all the number of characters, it is not required to fulfill.

Example 1:

The floating-point number in (D1, D0= 12.3456) is converted into the decimal format of the string (D4=0, D5=8).

_6

D10 16#32（2） 16#31（1）

D11 16#33（3） 16#2E（.）

D12 16#35（5） 16#34（4）

16#00
D13 16#36（6）
ending character

6-582
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Example 2:

The floating-point number in (D1, D0 = 0.0012345678) is converted into the exponential format of the string (D4=1, D5=8).

D10 16#2E (.) 16#31 (1)

D11 16#33 (3) 16#30 (2)

D12 16#35 (5) 16#34 (4)

D13 16#37 (7) 16#36 (6)

D14 16#45 (E) 16#38 (8)

D15 16#30 (0) 16#2D (-)

16#00
D16 16#33 (3)
ending character

Additional remark:

1. If the value in S1 exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the 6_
instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

2. If the value in S2 is neither 0 nor 1, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

3. If the value in S2+1 exceeds the range 2≦S2+1≦20, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code

in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If users declare the operand S2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

6-583
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the string into the floating-point
2110 $FVAL P S，D
number

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Source value

Device in which the conversion

D ：
result is stored

Explanation:

1. The string in S is converted into the floating-point number, and the conversion result is stored in D.

High byte Low byte

_6 S Second ASCII code First ASCII code

S+1 Fourth ASCII code Third ASCII code （D+1，D）

S+2 Sixth ASCII code Fifth ASCII code 

…… …… Floating-point number

S +n-1 mth ASCII code m-1th ASCII code

16#00
S +n
ending character

Floating-point string

 Refer to the following sections for the ASCII code usage.

 For the decimal or exponential formats, the maximum length for the floating-point string (m) is 24 words

(16#00 the ending character excluded) and as for n, the maximum length is 13 words.

2. The format of the value in S can be decimal or exponential. The PLC will determine the format according to the value

in S automatically.

 Decimal format: the length for the floating-point string is 9; the ending character 16#00 is not included.

6-584
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

High byte Low byte

S 16#31 (1) 16#32 (2)

S+1 16#32 (2) 16#2E (.) D

S+2 16#34 (4) 16#33 (3)  21.234567

S+3 16#36 (6) 16#35 (5)

16#00
S+4 16#37 (7)
ending character

OR

High byte Low byte

S 16#31 (1) 16#2D (-)

S+1 16#32 (2) 16#2E (.) D

S+2 16#34 (4) 16#33 (3)  -1.234568

S+3 16#36 (6) 16#35 (5)

16#00
S+4 16#38 (8)
ending character
 Exponential format: the length for the floating-point string is 9; the ending character 16#00 is not included.

High byte Low byte

S 16#31 (1) 16#2D (-) 6_

S+1 16#32 (2) 16#2E (.) D

S+2 16#45 (E) 16#33 (3)  -1230

S+3 16#30 (0) 16#2B (+)

16#00
S+4 16#32 (3)
ending character
3. If the sign code in S is 16#20, 16#30, or 16#2B the conversion result is a positive value. If the sign code in S1 is
16#2D, the conversion result is a negative value.

Example 1:

6-585
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

D0 16#31 (1) 16#32 (2)

D1 16#32 (2) 16#2E (.) （D11，D10）

D2 16#34 (4) 16#33 (3)  21.234567

D3 16#36 (6) 16#35 (5)

16#00
D4 16#37 (7)
ending character

Example 2:

D0 16#31 (1) 16#2D (-)

D1 16#32 (2) 16#2E (.) （D101，D100）

D2 16#45 (E) 16#33 (3)  -1230

_6
D3 16#30 (0) 16#2B (+)

16#00
D4 16#32 (3)
ending character

Additional remark:

1. If the length of the string in S exceeds 25 bytes and does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0
is 16#2003.

2. There are some rules for the value in S. if the value in S is not followed by the rules, the instruction will not be

executed, SM0 is ON and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

The first ASCII code: signs16#2B(+), 16#2D(-), blank16#20, and numbers 16#30(0)~16#39(9) are allowed.

If the first ASCII code is a sign or a blank, the second ASCII code should be a number.

The second ASCII code can be in a format of decimal or exponential.

6-586
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

 Decimal format:

Integ er OR In tege r
r D ecimal
The point“,”(16#2E), can only be inputted once and there should be numbers before and after the

point.

 Exponential format:

Inte ger Exp one nt OR In tege r

r De ci ma l Exp one nt
The point“,”(16#2E), can only be inputted once and there should be numbers before and after the

point.

There should be a number before the exponent.

Integer: Only numbers “0” (16#30)~“9”(16#39) are allowed.

Decimal: Only numbers “0” (16#30)~“9”(16#39) are allowed.

Exponent: The format for a 4 digit ASCII code is as below.

Fi rst Second 6_
E OR e +OR- n umber
nu mb er

There should be an “E” (16#45) or ”e” (16#65) and can only be used once.

There should be a sign “+”(16#2B) or “-” (16#2D) and can only be used once.

There should be 2 digits; numbers “0” (16#30)~“9”(16#39).

3. If the string in S is out of range, the instruction is not executed, SM is ON, and the error code in SR0 is

 If the first character in the string is a number ”0”~”9” (16#30~16#39), the range for a floating-point string is

1~24. The minimum length for the string is 1.

 If the first character in the string is a blank (16#20) or a sign (“+”(16#2B) or “-” (16#2D)), the range for a

floating-point string is 2~24. The minimum length for the string is “+1”.

4. If the conversion result exceeds the range of values which can be represented by the floating-point numbers, the

instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2013.

6-587
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

The retrieve of the characters in the string
2111 $RIGHT P S，n，D
begins from the right.

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
n          
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： String
Number of characters which
n ：
are retrieved
Device in which the characters
D：
retrieved are stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to retrieve n characters in the string in S from the right, and the characters which are

retrieved are stored in D. When S is a string device, the maximum length for the value in S is 31 words; when the S

is not a string device, the maximum length for the value in S is 255 words.

2. If n is 0, the value in D is 0. The maximum length for n is 255 words. .

b15 b8 b7 b0
S Second A SCII code F irst ASCII code
S +1 F our th ASCII code T hi rd AS CII c ode
.. ... ... ... ... ... ... .

n-1 A SCII c ode from the last

th
n ASCII code fr om the las t
th

n-3 A SCII c ode from the last

th
n-2 A SCII c ode from the last
th
~

Second ASC II code from the last T hi rd AS CII c ode from the l as t
16#00 F irst ASC II code from the last

n-1 A SCII c ode from the last n ASCII code fr om the las t
th th
D
n-3 A SCII c ode from the last
th
n-2 A SCII c ode from the last
th
D +1
.....................

Second ASC II code from the last T hi rd AS CII c ode from the l as t
16#00 F irst ASC II code from the last

6-588
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

If the data in S is ABCDEF12345 and n is 5, five characters in the string in S are retrieved from the right. The
conversion result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 16#42(B) 16#41(A) 16# 32(2) 16#31(1) D
S +1 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) D +1
ABCDE F12345 S +2 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) 16#00 16# 35(5) D +2
S +3 16# 32(2) 16# 31(1)
S +4 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) T he fifth charac ter from the last
S +5 16# 00 16# 35(5)

Example:

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#42(B) 16#41( A) 16# 46(F ) 16#45( E) D10
D1 16# 44(D) 16#43( C) 16# 48(H) 16# 47(G) D11
D2 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) 16# 00 D12
D3 16#48( H) 16#47( G) T he fourth char ac ter from the last
D4 16# 00

Additional remark: 6_
1. If the operand S is not a string ($) but a device with a string, the string in S can read up to 256 words (16#00 ending

character included). If the string in S does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. If n is less than 0, it will be seen as 0. If n is greater than the length of the string in S, it will be seen as the length of

the string is S.

3. If D is not sufficient to contain n characters, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

6-589
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

The retrieve of the characters in the string
2112 $LEFT P S，n，D
begins from the left.

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S       
n          
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S    
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： String
Number of characters which
n ：
are retrieved
Device in which the characters
D：
retrieved are stored

Explanation:

_6 1. The instruction is used to retrieve n characters in the string in S from the left, and the characters which are retrieved

are stored in D. When S is a string device, the maximum length for the value in S is 31 words; when the S is not a

string device, the maximum length for the value in S is 255 words.

2. If n is 0, the value in D is 0.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S Second ASCII code F irst ASCII code Second ASCII code F irst ASCII code D
S +1 F our th ASCII code T hi rd A SCII c ode F our th ASCII code T hi rd A SCII c ode D +1
.....................

...........
~

n-1 A SCII code from the last

th
n-1 A SCII code from the last
th
n-2 A SCII code from the last
th
n-2 A SCII code from the last
th

n+1 AS CII c ode from the last

th
n ASCII c ode from the l as t
th
n ASCII c ode from the l as t
th
16#00
~

16#00 Last A SCII c ode

If the data in S is ABCDEF12345 and n is 7, seven characters in the string in S are retrieved from the left. The
conversion result is as follows.

6-590
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S 16#42(B) 16#41( A) 16# 42(B) 16#41( A) D
S +1 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) D +1
ABCDEF 12345 S +2 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) D +2
S +3 16# 32(2) 16# 31(1) 16# 00 16# 31(1) D +3
S +4 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) Seventh c haracter
S +5 16# 00 16# 35(5)

Example:

When M0 is ON, the instruction $LEFT is executed. The six characters starting from the character in D100 are retrieved,

and stored in D10.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 6 D100 16#42(B) 16#41( A) 16# 42(B) 16#41( A) D10
D101 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) D11
D102 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) D12
Six th charac ter D103 16# 48(H) 16#47( G) 16# 00 D13
D104 16# 00

Additional remark: 6_
1. If the operand S is not a string ($) but a device with a string, the string in S can read up to 256 words (16#00 ending

character included). If the string in S does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. If n is less than 0, it will be seen as 0. If n is greater than the length of the string in S, it will be seen as the length of

the string is S.

3. If D is not sufficient to contain n characters, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

6-591
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

2113 $MIDR P S1，S2，D Retrieving a part of the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2       
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1    
S2   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： String
Part of the string which is
S2 ：
retrieved
Device in which the characters
D ：
retrieved are stored

Explanation:

_6 1.
th
Suppose the values in S2 and S2+1 are n and m respectively. The m characters starting from the n character in the
string in S1 are retrieved, and stored in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0

S1 Se con d AS CII co de First ASCI I c ode n+ 1

th
AS CII co de f rom th e las t n
th
A SCII c ode from t he las t D
n+ 3 AS CII co de f rom th e las t
th
S1+1 Fourt h AS CII cod e Third A SCII co de n+ 2
th
AS CII co de f rom th e las t D +1
. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. ..

.. .. .. .. ...
~

n+ 1
th
AS CII co de f rom th e las t n t h A SCII c ode from t he las t n+ m-2 t h AS CII co de f rom th e las t n+ m-3 t h AS CII co de f rom t he las t
n+ 2 AS CII co de f rom th e las t n+ m-1 AS CII co de f rom th e las t
th th
n+ 3 t h AS CII co de f rom th e las t 16#0 0
~

n+ m ASCI I c ode fro m the las t n+ m-1 AS CII co de f rom th e las t

th th
~

16#0 0 Las t ASCI I c ode

2. If the data in S1 is ABCDEFGHIJK, the value in S2 is 3, and the value in S2+1 is 7, the seven characters starting from
the third characters in the string are retrieved from the left. The conversion result is as follows.

6-592
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 16#42(B) 16#41(A) 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) D
S1 +1 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) 16# 46(F ) 16#45(E) D+1
S2
S1 +2 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) 16# 48(H) 16# 47(G) D+2
Thi rd cha ra cter D+3
S1+3 16# 48(H) 16# 47(G) 16# 00 16# 49(I)
S1 +4 16# 4A(J ) 16# 49(I)
16# 00 16# 4B(K) Se ven th ch ar acte r
S1+5

3. If the value of S2 is S2<=0, S2+1<-1or S2+1=0, the instruction is not executed.

4. If the value in S2+1 is -1, the characters in S1 starting from the character indicated by the value in S2 to the last

character in S1 are retrieved.

5. If the data in S1 is ABCDEFGHIJK, the value in S2 is 5, and the value in S2+1 is -1, the conversion result is as
follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 16#42(B) 16#41( A) 16# 46(F ) 16#45( E) D
S1 +1 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) 16# 48(H) 16# 47(G) D +1
S1 +2 16# 46(F ) 16# 45(E) 16# 4A(J ) 16# 49(I) D +2
S1+3 16# 48(H) 16# 47(G) Fifth c harac ter 16# 00 16# 4B(K)
S1 +4 16# 4A(J ) 16# 49(I)
S1+5 16# 00 16# 4B(K)

Example:
6_

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 16#32(2) 16#31( 1) 16# 34(4) 16#33( 3) D0
D11 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) D1
D12 16#36( 6) 16# 35(5) 16# 00 D2
D13 16# 00 16# 37(7)

D20 3
D21 4

Additional remark:

1. If the operand S1 is not a string ($) but a device with a string, the string in S1 can read up to 256 words (16#00

ending character included). If the string in S1 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200E.

2. If the value of S2 is S2<=0 or S2+1<-1, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-593
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

3. If the value in S2 or S2 + S2+1 is larger than the length of the string in S1, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#2003.

4. If the value in S2+1 is larger than the number of characters which can be retrieved from the string in S1, SM0 is ON,
and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. If D is not sufficient to contain S2+1 characters, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in
SR0 is 16#2003.

6. If the operand S2 used during the execution of the 16-bit instruction is declared in ISPSoft, the data type will be
ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

_6

6-594
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

2115 $SER P S1，S2，n，D Searching the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1       
S2       
n          
D      
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1    
S2    
n   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： String which is searched

S2 ： String which is searched for

nth character in S2 from which the
n ：
search begins
D ： Search result 6_
Explanation:

1. The instruction is used to search the string from the nth character in S2 for the string which is the same as the string

in S1, and the search result is stored in D.

2. When the nth character exceeds the string in S2, or S1>S2, D is 0.

3. Suppose the string in S2 is “ABCDEFGHIJK”, the string in S1 is “EFGH”, and n is 3. The search begins from the third

character in S2, and the value in D is 5.

Ig n o r e d

6-595
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

b15 b8 b7 b0
16#32(2) 16#31( 1) D0
AB 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C) D1
Searc hing the str ing from the thi rd c har acter
16# 42(B) 16#41( A) D2
Matching c har acter
16# 48(H) 16# 47(G) D3
Ignored 16# 00

After the instruction is ex ecuted

5 D100

Additional remark:

1. If the operand S1 is not a string ($) but a device with a string, the string in S1 can read up to 256 words (16#00
_6 ending character included). If the string in S1 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200E.

2. If the operand S1 is not a string ($) but a device with a string, the string in S2 can read up to 256 words (16#00
ending character included). If the string in S1 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is
16#200E.

3. If n is less than or equal to 0, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-596
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

2116 $RPLC P S1，S2，S3，S4，D Replacing the characters in the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2       
S3          
S4          
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： String which is replaced

S2 ： New string

S3 ：
Number of characters in S1 which are 6_
replaced
The characters in S1 starting from the
S4 ： character indicated by the value in S4 are
replaced.
Device in which the execution result is
D ：
stored

Explanation:

1. The characters in S1 starting from the character indicated by the value in S4 are replaced by the characters in S2, the

number of characters which are replaced is indicated by the value in S3, and the result is stored in D.

2. The four characters starting from the sixth character in the string “1234567890” are replaced by “MN”, and the result

is “12345MN0”.

6-597
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 16#32(2) 16#31( 1) 16# 32(2) 16#31( 1) D
S1+1 16# 34(4) 16#33( 3) 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) D+1
S1+2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) 16# 4D(M) 16# 35(5) D+2
S1+3 16# 38(8) 16# 37(7) After the instruction 16# 30(0) 16# 4E(N) D+3
S1+4 16# 30(0) 16# 39(9) is executed 16# 0000 D+4
S1+5 Ignored 16# 00

S2 16# 4E(N) 16#4D( M)

S2+1 Ignored 16# 00

S3 4 Number of characters which are r eplaced

S4 6 Character which i s r eplaced

3. If the string in S2 is 16#00, the instruction has the function of deleting the characters.

4. If the value in S3 is larger than the number of characters which can be replaced in the string in S1, the characters in

S1 starting from the character indicated by the value in S4 to the last character in S1 are replaced.

5. If the value in S3 is equal to 0, the instruction is not executed.

Example:

When M0 is ON, the data in D0~D7 is “1234ABAB1234AB”, and the data in D10~D11 is “CDEF”. When the instruction

$RPLC is executed, the characters in D0~D7 starting from the character indicated by the value in D51 are replaced by the

characters in D10~D11. The number of characters which are replaced is indicated by the value in D50, and the result is

_6 stored in D20~D27.

6-598
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

If the values in D50 and D51 are 3 and 4 respectively, the execution result is as follows.

A f te r t he in s t ruc t io n
is ex ec u t ed.

Ig n o r e d

I g n or ed

N u m b e r o f c h ar ac t er s w h ic h a r e r e p la c e d

C h a r a c t e r w h ic h i s r e p la c e d

If the values in D50 and D51 are 4 and 4 respectively, the execution result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31( 1) 16# 32(2) 16#31( 1) D20
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 43(C) 16# 33(3) D21
D2 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A) 16# 45(E) 16# 44(D) D22
D3 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A) 16# 42(B) 16# 46(F ) D23
After the instruction
D4 16# 32(2) 16# 31(1) 16#32 (2) 16#31 (1) D24
is executed
D5 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) D25
D6 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A) 16# 42(B) 16#41 (A) D26
Ignored 16#00 16# 0000
6_
D7 D27

D10 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C)

D11 16# 45(F ) 16# 45(E)
D12 Ignored 16#00

D50 4 Number of characters which are r eplaced

D51 4 Character which is r epl ac ed

6-599
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

If the values in D50 and D51 are 20 and 4 respectively, the execution result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31(1) 16# 32(2) 16#31(1) D20
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 43(C) 16# 33(3) D21
D2 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A) 16# 45(E) 16# 44(D) D22
D3 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A) After the instruction 16# 00 16# 46(F ) D23
D4 16# 32(2) 16# 31(1) is executed
D5 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3)
D6 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A)
D7 Ignored 16# 00

D10 16# 44(D) 16# 43(C)

D11 16# 45(F ) 16# 45(E)
D12 Ignored 16# 00

D50 20 Number of characters which are replaced

D51 4 Character which i s r eplaced

If the values in D50, D51, and D10 are 3, 4, and 16#00 respectively, the execution result is as follows. The three

characters in D0~D7 starting from the fourth character are deleted.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31(1) 16# 32(2) 16#31(1) D20
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 41(A) 16# 33(3) D21
D2 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A) 16# 31(1) 16# 42(B) D22
D3 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A) After the instruction 16# 33(3) 16# 32(2) D23
D4 16# 32(2) 16# 31(1) is executed 16# 41(A) 16# 34(4) D24
D5 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 00 16#42(B) D25
D6 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A)
D7 16# 00

_6 D10 16# 00

D50 3 Number of character s which are replaced

D51 4 Character which i s r eplaced

Additional remark:

1. If the string in S1 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. If the string in S2 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

3. If the value in S3 <0 or S4<=0 or the value in S4 is larger than the length of the string in S1, SM0 is ON, and the error
code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If the replaced value in the string (16#00 the ending character included) in S1 is larger than 256, the instruction will
not be executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-600
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

2117 $DEL P S1，S2，S3，D Deleting the characters in the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2          
S3          
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： String
Number of characters which are
S2 ：
deleted
The characters in S1 starting from the
S3 ： character indicated by the value in S3
are deleted.
D ：
Device in which the execution result is 6_
stored

Explanation:

1. The characters in S1 starting from the character indicated by the value in S3 are deleted, the number of characters

which are deleted is indicated by the value in S2, and the result is stored in D.

2. The four characters starting from the third character in the string “1234567890” in S1 are deleted, and the result

“127890” is stored in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 16#32(2) 16#31( 1) 16# 32(2) 16#31( 1) D
S1 +1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 38(8) 16# 37(7) D +1
S1 +2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) 16# 30(0) 16# 39(9) D +2
S1+3 16# 38(8) 16# 37(7) After the instruction 16# 0000 D +2
S1 +4 16# 30(0) 16# 39(9) is executed

S1 +5 Ignored 16# 00

S2 4

S3 3

6-601
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

3. If the value in S2 is larger than the number of characters which can be deleted in the string in S1, the characters in S1

starting from the character indicated by the value in S3 to the last character in S1 are deleted, and 16#00 is stored in

D.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 16#32(2) 16#31(1)
S1 +1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) b15 b8 b7 b0
16# 32(2) 16#31(1) D
S1 +2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5)
D +1
S1+3 16# 38(8) 16# 37(7) After the instruction 16# 0000

S1 +4
is executed
16# 30(0) 16# 39(9)
S1 +5 Ignored 16# 00

Larger than the number of charac ter s

10
S2 which can be deleted i n the str ing in S1
S3 3

4. If the value in S2 is equal to 0, the instruction is not executed.

Example:

When M0 is ON, the data in D0~D3 is “1234567”. When the instruction $DEL is executed, the characters in D0~D3

starting from the character indicated by the value in D11 are deleted. The number of characters which are deleted is

indicated by the value in D10, and the result is stored in

_6

If the values in D10 and D11 are 3 and 4 respectively, the execution result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31( 1) b15 b8 b7 b0
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 32(2) 16#31( 1) D20
D2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) 16# 37(7) 16# 33(3) D21
D3 16# 00 16# 37(7) 16# 00 D22
After the instruction
is executed
D10 3

D11 4

If the values in D10 and D11 are 5 and 4 respectively, the execution result is as follows. Owing to the fact that the number

of characters which are deleted exceeds the range, the characters in D0~D3 starting from the fourth character to the last

character are deleted.

6-602
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31( 1)
b15 b8 b7 b0
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3)
16# 32(2) 16#31( 1) D20
D2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) D21
After the instruction 16# 00 16# 33(3)
D3 16# 00 16# 37(7)
is executed

D10 5 Ex ceeding the range

D11 4

If the values in D10 and D11 are 5 and 1 respectively, the execution result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31(1)
b15 b8 b7 b0
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3)
16# 37(7) 16#36(6) D20
D2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) D21
16# 00
D3 16# 00 16# 37(7) After the instruction
is executed
D10 5

D11 1

Additional remark:

1. If the string in S1 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. If the value in S2 is less than 0, the value in S3 is less than or equal to 0, or the value in S3 is larger than the length of

the string in S1, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6_

6-603
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

2118 $CLR P S Clearing the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S  DWORD   

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： String which is cleared

Explanation:

1. The string in S is cleared. If the string in S does not end with 16#00, up to 255 characters will be cleared.

b15 b8 b7 b0
S 16#31(1) 16# 2D(-) S 16# 0000
S +1 16# 33(3) 16# 32(2) S +1 16# 0000
S +2 16# 34(4) 16# 35(5) S +2 16# 0000

_6 S +3 16# 36(6) 16# 2E(.) S +3 16# 0000

S +4 16# 38(8) 16# 37(7) After the instruction S +4 16# 0000
is executed 16# 0000
S +5 16# 00 S +5

Example:

The string in D0 is cleared, as illustrated below.

b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31(1) 16# 0000 D0
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 0000 D1
D2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) 16# 0000 D2
D3 16# 00 16# 37(7) After the instruction 16# 0000 D3
is executed

6-604
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

2119 $INS P S1，S2，S3，D Inserting the string

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2       
S3          
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： String

S2 ： String which is inserted

The string is inserted into S1 after the
S3 ：
character indicated by the value in S3.
D ： Device in which the execution result is stored
6_
Explanation:

1. The string in S2 is inserted into the string in S1 after the character indicated by the value in S3, and the result is

stored in D.

2. If the string in either S1 or S2 is a null string, the other string which is not a null string is stored in D.

3. If the strings in S1 and S2 are null strings, 16#0000 is stored in D.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S1 16#32(2) 16#31( 1) 16# 32(2) 16#31( 1) D
S1 +1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) D +1
S1 +2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) D +2
S1+3 16# 38(8) 16# 37(7) 16# 4E(N) 16# 4D( M) D +3
After the instruction
S1 +4 16# 30(0) 16# 39(9) 16# 38(8) 16# 37(7) D +4
is executed
S1 +5 16# 00 16# 30(0) 16# 39(9) D +5
16# 00 D +6
S2 16# 4E(N) 16# 4D( M)
S2 +1 16# 00

S3 6

6-605
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

When M0 is ON, the data in D0~D3 is “1234567”, and the data in D10 is “AB”. When the instruction $INS is executed, “AB”

is inserted into the string in D0~D3 after the character indicated by the value in D30. The result is stored in D20~D24.

If the value in D30 is 1, the execution result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31( 1) 16# 41(A) 16#31( 1) D20
D1 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) 16# 32(2) 16# 42(B) D21
D2 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) 16# 34(4) 16# 33(3) D22
_6 D3 16# 00 16# 37(7) After the instruction 16# 36(6) 16# 35(5) D23
is executed 16# 00 16# 37(7) D24
D10 16# 42(B) 16# 41(A)
D11 Ignored 16# 00

D30 1

If the value in D30 is 0, the execution result is as follows.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 16#32(2) 16#31(1) 16#42(B) 16 #41(A) D20
D1 16#34(4) 16#33(3) 16#32(2 ) 16 #31(1) D21
D2 16#36(6) 16#35(5) Af ter 16#34(4) 16 #33(3) D22
execution 16# 36(6)
D3 16#00 16#37(7) 16 #35(5) D23
16#00 16 #37(7) D24
D10 16#42(B) 16#41(A)
D11 I gnored 16#00

D30 0

6-606
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Additional remark:

1. If the string in S1 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. If the string in S2 does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

3. If the value in S3 is less than 0, or if the value in S3 is larger than the length of the string in S1, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If the inserted value in the string (16#00 the ending character included) in S1 is larger than 256, the instruction will
not be executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6_

6-607
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

6.22 Ethernet Instructions

6.22.1 List of Ethernet Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API instruc Function
16-bit 32-bit
tion

2200 SOPEN –  Opening the socket

2201 SSEND –  Sending the data through the socket

2203 SCLOSE –  Closing the socket

2204 MSEND –  Sending the email

Converting the IP address of the integer type into the IP address of

2206 INTOA – 
the string type

Converting the IP address of the string type into the IP address of the
2207 IATON – 
integer type

2208 EIPRW – – Reading and writing the Ethernet/IP data

2209 SCONF –  Setting TCP/UDP Socket parameters

2210 MCONF –  Reading/Writing the Modbus TCP data

_6

6-608
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

6.22.2 Explanation of Ethernet Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

2200 SOPEN P S1，S2，S3 Opening the socket

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
S3         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT
Data

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:
S1 ： Socket mode

S2 ： Socket number

S3 ： Start mode

6_6
Explanation:

1. S1 is 1 if users want to open the TCP socket, and S1 is 0 if users want to open the UDP socket. S2 is the socket
number. The AS series PLC as the client sends the TCP connection request to the server if S3 is 1, and the AS
series PLC as the sever waits for the TCP connection request from the client if S3 is 0. If users want to start the UDP
connection, S3 can be 0 or 1.

2. The operand S1 should be either 0 or 1; the operand S2 should be within the range between 1 and 4; the operand S3
should be either 0 or 1.

3. Before using the instruction, users have to accomplish the following setting in HWCONFIG of ISPSoft.

 PLC Parameter Setting→Ethernet-Basic→Setting the IP addres and the netmask address

 PLC Parameter Setting→Ethernet-Advance→Socket→Enable Socket Function

 PLC Parameter Setting→Ethernet-Advance→Socket→TCP/UDP Socket Connection and Setting the sockets

which will be used.

4. Refer to API2209 SCONF instruction for the modification of the TCP and UDP Socket parameters

6-609
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

5. When the TCP Socket is opened, the settings of the Socket IP and communication ports are shown as below.

Local Remote
Start
Remote IP communication communication Description
Mode
port port

Specific IP Illegal
1 0 0
address

Master mode,
Specific IP
1 0 Not equal to 0 Specifies the IP address; but not specify the
address
local communication port.

Specific IP
1 Not equal to 0 0 Illegal
address

Master mode,

Specific IP Specifies the IP address, local

1 Not equal to 0 Not equal to 0
address communication port and remote
communication port

No limit to the No limit to the

1 0.0.0.0 Illegal
value value

Specific IP No limit to the

0 0 Illegal
_6 address value

Slave mode,
Specific IP
0 Not equal to 0 0 Specifies the IP address; but not specify the
address
remote communication port.

Slave mode,
Specific IP
0 Not equal to 0 Not equal to 0 Specifies the IP address and remote
address
communication port.

No limit to the
0 0.0.0.0 0 Illegal
value

Slave mode,

0 0.0.0.0 Not equal to 0 0 Not specify the IP address and remote

communication port

Slave mode,

0 0.0.0.0 Not equal to 0 Not equal to 0 Not specify the IP address, but specifies the
remote communication port.

6-610
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

6. If the data are transmitted through the TCP socket, and no error occurs after the instruction is executed, the socket
starts to establish the connection with the remote device and the flag of being starting the connection is ON. If the
connection is made successfully, the flag of successful connection is ON, and the flag of being starting the
connection is OFF. If an error occurs, the error flag is ON.

Being Being
Successfu
Having Having starting closing Being
TCP Socket l
received sent the the the sending Error flag
Number connectio
the data data connectio connectio the data
n
n n

1 SM1270 SM1271 SM1272 SM1273 SM1274 SM1275 SM1277

2 SM1278 SM1279 SM1280 SM1281 SM1282 SM1283 SM1285

3 SM1286 SM1287 SM1288 SM1289 SM1290 SM1291 SM1293

4 SM1294 SM1295 SM1296 SM1297 SM1298 SM1299 SM1301

7. If the data are transmitted through the UDP socket, and no error occurs after the instruction is executed, the flag of
having started the connection is ON. If an error occurs, the error flag is ON.

UDP Socket Having started Having received Having sent the Being closing
Error flag
Number the connection the data data the connection

1 SM1334 SM1335 SM1336 SM1337 SM1338

2 SM1339 SM1340 SM1341 SM1342 SM1343

6_6
3 SM1344 SM1345 SM1346 SM1347 SM1348

4 SM1349 SM1350 SM1351 SM1352 SM1353

8. Generally, the pulse instruction SOPENP is used.

Example 1:

1. The system framework below illustrates how to establish the TCP connection between a computer as Server and an
AS series PLC as Client.

6 - 6 11
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

2. ISPSoft -> HWCONFIG（Ethernet - Basic）

Ethernet configuration
IP Addressing Mode Static
IP Address 192.168.1.111
Netmask address 255.255.255.0
Gateway address 192.168.1.1

3. a）ISPSoft -> HWCONFIG（Ethernet – Advance > Socket > TCP Socket Connection）

b）SCONF instruction

TCP Socket Connection

_6 Remote IP 192.168.1.110

Remote port 3201

Local port 3200

Send Data Address D1000

Send Data Length 200

Receive Data Address D2000

Receive Data Length 200

Keep Alive Timer 10

4. The parameters related to TCP Socket1 are set first in HWCONFIG of the ISPSoft configuration software or in the
SCONF instruction.

5. When M0 is ON, whether the socket is closed, has been connected, or is being connected is checked. If the socket
is not closed, has not been connected, or is not being connected, the connection procedure is performed. After the
socket has been connected, M0 will is switched to OFF.

6-612
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

6. When M1 is ON, whether the socket has been connected and no data are being sent is checked. If the socket has
been connected, and no data are being sent, the data will be sent. If the socket has not been connected, the
instruction will not be executed. After the sending of the data is completed, M1 will be switched to OFF.

7. When M2 is ON, whether the socket has been connected and the flag of having received the data is ON is checked.
If the socket has been connected and the flag of having received the data is ON, it means that the data have already
been received.

8. When M3 is ON, whether the socket has been connected is checked. If the socket has been connected, the
connection will be closed. If the socket has not been connected, the instruction will not be executed. After the
connection is closed, M2 and M3 will be switched to OFF.

6_6

6-613
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

_6

6-614
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

6_6

Example 2:

1. The example illustrates how to establish the UDP connection between a computer and an AS series PLC.

2. When M0 is ON, whether the socket has been connected is checked. If the socket has not been connected, the
connection procedure is performed. After the socket has been connected, M0 will be switched to OFF.

3. When M1 is ON, the data are sent. After the sending of the data is completed, M1 will be switched to OFF.

6-615
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

4. When M2 is ON, whether the socket has been connected and the flag of having received the data is ON is checked.
If the socket has been connected and the flag of having received the data is ON, it means that the data have been
received.

5. When M3 is ON, whether the socket has been connected is checked. If the socket has been connected, the
connection will be closed. If the socket has not been connected, the instruction will not be executed. After the
connection is closed, M2 and M3 will be switched to OFF.

_6

6-616
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

Additional remark:

1. Errors in TCP connection are explained below.

Error code Error flag Description

16#2003 SM0 S1, S2, or S3 exceeds the range.

16#600C SM1109 The local socket has been used.

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network is not connected.

16#6200 Error flag of TCP Socket Illegal IP address

16#6201 Error flag of TCP Socket Illegal TCP Socket communication mode setting

16#6202 Error flag of TCP Socket Illegal TCP Socket mode setting

16#6203 Error flag of TCP Socket Illegal address for sending data

16#6204 Error flag of TCP Socket The length of sent data exceeds the range

16#6205 Error flag of TCP Socket The device where data are sent exceeds the range

16#6206 Error flag of TCP Socket Illegal address for receiving data

16#6207 Error flag of TCP Socket The length of received data exceeds the range

16#6208 Error flag of TCP Socket The device for receiving data exceeds the range

16#6212 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket communication timeout

16#6213 Error flag of TCP Socket The size of data actually received is larger than the set data. 6_6
16#6214 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket connection is rejected by the remote equipment

16#6215 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket has not been connected

16#6217 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket connection has been triggered.

16#6218 Error flag of TCP Socket The sending of data through TCP Socket has been triggered.

16#621A Error flag of TCP Socket Disabling the TCP Socket connection has been triggered.

2. Errors in UDP connection are explained below.

Error code Error flag Description

16#2003 SM0 S1, S2, or S3 exceeds the range.

16#600C SM1109 The local socket has been used.

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network is not connected.

16#6209 Error flag of UDP Socket Illegal IP address

16#620A Error flag of UDP Socket Illegal communication mode

16#620C Error flag of UDP Socket Illegal address for sending data

6-617
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

Error code Error flag Description

16#620D Error flag of UDP Socket The length of sent data exceeds the range

16#620E Error flag of UDP Socket The device where data are sent exceeds the range

16#620F Error flag of UDP Socket Illegal address for receiving data

16#6210 Error flag of UDP Socket The length of data actually received exceeds the range.

16#6211 Error flag of UDP Socket The device where data are received exceeds the range.

16#6213 Error flag of UDP Socket The size of data actually received is larger than the set data.

16#6215 Error flag of UDP Socket UDP Socket is not connected

16#6217 Error flag of UDP Socket UDP Socket connection has been triggered.

16#6218 Error flag of UDP Socket The sending of UDP Socket data has been triggered.

16#621A Error flag of UDP Socket Disabling the UDP Socket connection has been triggered.

3. When the client and server are both AS series PLC and the timeout time settings are same, the server will cut the
connection automatically if the timeout occurs in the server first. Thus the error flag in the client will not be ON.
Whereas, if the timeout occurs in the client first, the error flag in the client will be ON and the connection will be cut.

_6

6-618
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

API Instruction code Operand Function

2201 SSEND P S1，S2 Sending the data through the socket

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT
Data

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
type

S1   
S2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:

S1 ： Socket mode

S2 ： Socket number

Explanation:

1. S1 is 1 if users want to open the TCP socket, and S1 is 0 if users want to open the UDP socket. S2 is the socket
number.
6_6
2. The operand S1 should be either 0 or 1, and the operand S2 should be within the range between 1 and 4.

3. Before using this instruction, users need to use the instruction SOPEN to open the socket. If the flag of successful
connection (of TCP socket) is ON, or the flag of having started the connection (of UDP socket) is ON, this instruction
can be used.

4. If the data are sent through the TCP socket, and no error occurs after the instruction is executed, the data are sent,
and the flag of being sending the data is ON. If the data are sent successfully, the flag of having sent the data is ON,
and the flag of being sending the data is OFF. If an error occurs, the error flag is ON.

TCP Socket number Being sending the data Having sent the data Error flag

1 SM1275 SM1272 SM1277

2 SM1283 SM1280 SM1285

3 SM1291 SM1288 SM1293

4 SM1299 SM1296 SM1301

6-619
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

5. If the data are sent through the UDP socket, and no error occurs after the instruction is executed, the flag of having
sent the data is ON. If an error occurs, the error flag is ON.

UDP Socket number Having sent the data Error flag

1 SM1336 SM1338

2 SM1341 SM1343

3 SM1346 SM1348

4 SM1351 SM1353

6. Generally, the pulse instruction SSENDP is used.

Example:

Refer to the example in SOPEN instruction.

Additional remark:

1. Errors in TCP connection are explained below.

Error code Error flag Description

16#2003 SM0 S1 or S2 exceeds the range.

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network has not been connected.

16#6202 Error flag of TCP Socket Illegal TCP Socket mode setting
_6
16#6203 Error flag of TCP Socket Illegal address for sending data

16#6204 Error flag of TCP Socket The length of sent data exceeds the range.

16#6205 Error flag of TCP Socket The device where data are sent exceeds the range.

16#6212 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket connection timeout

Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket TCP Socket connection is rejected by the remote
16#6214
equipment.

16#6215 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket has not been connected.

16#6218 Error flag of TCP Socket The sending of data has been triggered.

2. Errors in UDP connection are explained below.

Error code Error flag Description

16#2003 SM0 S1 or S2 exceeds the range.

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network has not been connected.

16#620A Error flag of UDP Socket Illegal UDP Socket communication mode setting

6-620
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

16#620C Error flag of UDP Socket Illegal address for sending data

16#620D Error flag of UDP Socket The length of sent data exceeds the range

16#620E Error flag of UDP Socket The device for sending data exceeds the range

16#6218 Error flag of UDP Socket The sending of data has been triggered.

6_6

6-621
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

API Instruction code Operand Function

2203 SCLOSE P S1，S2 Closing the socket

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2         
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT
Data

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
type

S1   
S2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:

S1 ： Socket mode

S2 ： Socket number

Explanation:

1. S1 is 1 if users want to close the TCP socket, and S1 is 0 if users want to close the UDP socket. S2 is the socket
number.

_6 2. The operand S1 should be either 0 or 1, and the operand S2 should be within the range between 1 and 4.
3. Before closing the socket, users need to make sure that the socket has been connected. Otherwise, the instruction is
not executed.
4. If the TCP socket is closed by the client, the server continues to be connected to the local communication port (the
flag of successful connection is ON). If the TCP socket is closed is by the server, the server will not be connected to
the local communication port after the execution of the instruction is completed. After the TCP socket is closed, the
corresponding flags will be OFF.
5. After the instruction is executed to close the UDP socket, the corresponding flag is OFF.
6. If the TCP socket is closed, and no error occurs after the instruction is executed, the connection with the remote
device starts being closed and the flag of being closing the connection is ON. If the connection is closed successfully,
the flag of being closing the connection is OFF. If an error occurs, the error flag is ON.

TCP Socket number Being closing the connection Error flag

1 SM1274 SM1277

2 SM1282 SM1285

3 SM1290 SM1293

4 SM1298 SM1301

6-622
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

7. If the UDP socket is closed, and no error occurs after the instruction is executed, the flag of having started the
connection is OFF. If an error occurs, the error flag is ON.

UDP Socket number Error flag

1 SM1338

2 SM1343

3 SM1348

4 SM1353

8. Generally, the pulse instruction SCLOSEP is used.

Example:

Please refer to the example of the execution of SOPEN.

Additional remark:

1. Errors in TCP connection are explained below.

Error code Error flag Description

16#2003 SM0 S1 or S2 exceeds the range.

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network has not been connected.

16#6212 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket communication timeout

16#6214 Error flag of TCP Socket TCP Socket connection is rejected by the remote device
6_6
16#621A Error flag of TCP Socket Disabling TCP Socket connection has been triggered.

2. Errors in UDP connection are explained below.

Error code Error flag Description

16#2003 SM0 S1 or S2 exceeds the range.

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network has not been connected.

16#621A Error flag of UDP Socket Disabling UDP Socket connection has been triggered.

6-623
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

API Instruction code Operand Function

2204 MSEND P S1，S2，S3，D Sending the email

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1         
S2      
S3      
D     
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:
Remote email
S1 ：
number
S2 ： Email subject

S3 ： Email body
Completion of the
D ：
_6 instruction

Explanation:

1. Users can send an email by setting S1, S2, and S3.

2. Before using the instruction, users have to accomplish the following setting in ISPSoft.

 PLC Parameter Setting→Ethernet-Basic→Setting the IP addres and the netmask address

 PLC Parameter Setting→Ethernet-Advance→Email→Setting the SMTP server, the port, the local email
address, and the SMTP subject

 PLC Parameter Setting→Ethernet-Advance→Email and Trigger Configuration→Setting the email address

 If the account identification is required, PLC Parameter Setting→Ethernet-Advance→Email→Setting the user

name and the password

6-624
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

3. The email is set as follows.

Operand Description Setting range

The value in S1 should be within the range between 1 and 15.

Bit0~bit3 set in ISPSoft indicate the remote email addresses. (Users can
Remote email set 4 email addresses in ISPSoft.) Bit0 corresponds to remote email 1;
S1
number bit1 corresponds to remote email 2 and so on.

If users want to send an email, they have to set the corresponding bit in
ISPSoft.

S2 Email subject The size of the email subject can be up to 16 words.

S3 Email body The size of the email body can be up to 64 words.

Completion of the After the execution of the instruction is completed, the bit is ON. If the
D
instruction execution of the instruction is abnormal, the next bit is ON.

4. Generally, the pulse instruction MSENDP is used.

Example:

Suppose the value in D0 is 00010100. When X0.0 is ON, the email is sent to remote email number 3 and remote email
number 5. After the communication with the SMTP sever is completed, M20 is ON. If no error occurs during the
communication, M21 is OFF and Y0.0 is ON.

6_6

6-625
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

Additional remark:

1. For the length of the string in S2 or S3, the system will capture the data with the end of 16#00. If the length of the
string is larger than the maximum value (with16#00 as the end), the length of the string in S2 or S3 will be counted
equal to the maximum value.

2. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

3. Please reserve one word between S2 and S3 for the interrupt character.

4. Errors in the execution of the instruction are explained as below.

Error code Error flag Description

1. D+1 exceeds the device range

16#2003 SM0
2. S1<1 or S1>15

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network has not been connected.

16#6100 D+1 Communication conflicts.

16#6107 D+1 E-mail communication timeout

16#6108 D+1 An error in the password authentication of the SMTP server account

16#6111 D+1 An invalid remote email address

_6

6-626
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the IP address of the integer
2206 INTOA P S，D
type into the IP address of the string type

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S  
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT
Data

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
type

S   
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:
S ： Source value

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

1. The IP address in S and S+1 is converted into the IP address of the string type, and the conversion result is stored
in D.

2. The operand D occupies eight consecutive devices.

6_6
Example:

D 10 " 9" " 1"

D 11 "." "2 "

Afte r th e in struction
D 12 "6 " " 1"
D0 16 #C0( 192) 16#A8(16 8) D1 3
is exe cu ted "." "8 "
D1 16#00 ( 0) " 192.168.0.1"
16 #01 (1) D 14 " 0" " 0"
D 15 "." " 0"
D 16 "0 " "0 "
D1 7 16 # 00 "1 "

Additional remark:

1. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

2. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [8] of WORD/INT.

6-627
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

API Instruction code Operand Function

Converting the IP address of the string type
2207 IATON P S，D
into the IP address of the integer type

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S   
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT
Data

LINT

TMR

CNT
INT
type

S    
D   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:
S ： Source value

D ： Conversion result

Explanation:

1. The IP address of the string type in S is converted into the IP address of the integer type, and the conversion result
is stored in D and D+1.

_6 2. The operand S occupies eight consecutive devices.

"192 .16 8. 0.1 "

S+ 0 " 9" "1 "

S+ 1 ". " "2 "
S+2 "6 " "1 " Af ter t he inst ruct ion
S+ 3 "8 " is e xecut ed D +0 16 #C 0(19 2) 16# A8(168 )
". "
S+ 4 " 0" "0 " D+1 1 6# 00 (0) 1 6#0 1 (0 1)
S+ 5 ". " "0 "
S+6 "0 " " 0"
S+ 7 1 6# 00 " 1"

3. There are 1~3 characters in every section of the IP address of the string type in S. These sections are separated by
“.” (16#2E). For example, users can enter “192.168.0.1” instead of “192.168.000.001”

4. The value converted from the characters in every section of the IP address of the string type in S should be within
the range of 0~255.

6-628
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

Example 1:

" 19 2. 16 8 .0 .1 "

D10 " 9" "1 "

D 11
". " "2 "
D 12 "6 " "1 "
Aft er t he instructio n
D1 3 ". " "8 " is e xe cute d D0 1 6# C 0(1 92 ) 16 #A 8(16 8 )
D1
D14 " 0" "0 " 1 6 #0 0 (0 ) 16 #0 1 (1 )
D15 ". " "0 "
D 16 "0 " " 0"
D1 7 1 6# 00 " 1"

Example 2:

6_6

Af ter t he instruct ion

is e xecut ed
D0 1 6 #C0 (1 92 ) 16 #A 8(1 68 )
"1 92 .16 8.0 .1"
D1 16 #0 0( 0) 1 6# 01( 1)

Additional remark:

1. If the string in S does not end with 16#00, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200E.

2. In the string in S, except for the code representing the decimal point, the other binary codes have to be within the
range between 16#30 and 16#39. If the other binary codes are not within the range between 16#30 and 16#39, the
instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the number of decimal points “.” in the string in S is not equal to 3, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and
the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If the value converted from the characters in any section of the IP address of the string type in S is out of the range
of 0~255, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. The number of characters in any section of the IP address of the string type in S is within the range of 1~3. If the

6-629
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

number of characters in any section of the IP address of the string type in S is larger than 3, the instruction is not
executed, SM0 is ON and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [8] of WORD/INT.

7. If users declare the operand D in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD/INT.

_6

6-630
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

API Instruction code Operand Function

Reading and writing the
2208 EIPRW S1~S7，n，S，D1，D2
Ethernet/IP data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1  
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5    
S6    
S7    
n    
S 
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

Data
LINT

TMR

CNT
INT

type

S1~D2 Refer to Explanation in the instruction.

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS -
Symbol:
See Explanation
S1~S7，n，S ：
below.
6_6

See Explanation
D1~D2 ：
below.

6-631
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

Explanation:
1. The name and explanation of S1~S7, n, S and D1~D2 are listed in the following table.

Operand Name Description Data type Remark

The first two sections of the IP address

occupy the first word and the remaining Occupies
two sections of the IP address occupy the two
S1 IP address WORD[2]
second word. For example: If the IP consecutive
address is 192.168.1.5, S1=16#C0A8 and words
S1+1=16#0105.

S2 Connection mode 0: UCMM WORD

Range: 16#0000~00FF. If the function

Function code
S3 code exceeds the range, the instruction WORD
(Service Code)
will not be executed.

S4 Class ID Refer to Ethernet/IP protocol. WORD

S5 Instance ID Refer to Ethernet/IP protocol. WORD

S6 Attribute ID switch ON: Enable; OFF: Disable BOOL

S7 Attribute ID Refer to Ethernet/IP protocol. WORD

_6 n
The length of read and The size of the data which are written or
WORD
written data read. Unit: byte; maximum: 200 bytes.

The register where the sent data comes

The register involved with
S from or the register where the received WORD[n]
the read/ written data
data are stored

0 ： Communication is not triggered to

execute.

1：Communication is being performed.

D1 Communication status 2：Communication is completed and no WORD

error occurs.

3：A communication error occurs.

4：An error occurs in the parameter setting.

Occupies
The major error code and extended error two
D2 Error code WORD[2]
code consecutive
words

6-632
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

2. When the instruction is enabled for the first time, it indicates that the communication command is sent. If the number

of slaves connected reaches the upper limit, the communication status value in D1 is 0, which means the
communication is not triggered to execute.

3. When the set parameter value exceeds the range, the instruction is not executed and the communication status
value in D1 is 4

Example 1:

The vendor code of the device (at 192.168.1.5) are read and the read data are stored in D100. The EtherNet/IP Object
parameters are set as below.

(1) Class ID = 1

(2) Instance ID = 1

(3) Attribute ID = 1

6_6

6-633
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

_6

6-634
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

Example 2:

The maximum frequency (01-00) of the AC motor drive (at 192.168.1.6) is set to 60.00Hz. The EtherNet/IP Object
parameters are set as below.

(1) Class ID = 16#0300

(2) Instance ID = 16#0001

(3) Attribute ID = 16#0000

6_6

Additional remark:

1. If users declare the operand S1 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD.

2. If users declare the operand S in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [n] of WORD of which n is the size of the
read/written data.

6-635
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

3. If users declare the operand D2 in ISPSoft, the data type will be ARRAY [2] of WORD.

4. Errors in the execution of the instruction are explained as below.

Error code Error flag Description

1. The value in S1, S2, S3 or S6 exceeds the range.

16#2003 SM0 / D1
2. S + n is out of the range of the device address.

16#200B SM0 The operand n is out of the range.

16#600D SM1100 Ethernet network is not connected.

16#6301 D1 The connection with the remote device is broken.

16#6302 D1 The remote device response timeout

16#6303 D1 An Illegal IP address

16#6304 D1 An error in the response command service code

16#6305 D1 An error in the response command length

16#6306 D1 Communication conflicts

5. The status code in D2 [0] is explained as below.

Status code Description How to deal with

16#00 Connection succeeds

_6 16#01 Connection error Check if the EDS file of the slave is correct.

1. Check if the number of devices which the master is connected

Devices connected are to exceeds the limit.

16#02
unavailable 2. Check if the number of devices which the slave is connected to
exceeds the limit.

An error in the parameter

16#03 Check if the read/written data in S are correct.
setting.

Check if the settings of Class ID (S4), Instance ID (S5) and Attribute

16#04 Path error
ID (S7) are proper.

The path to the Check if the settings of Class ID (S4), Instance ID (S5) and Attribute
16#05
destination does not exist. ID (S7) are proper.

1. Check if the Ethernet port of the slave device is connected

properly.
16#07 The connection is broken.
2. Check if the setting of Keep alive timer for the slave device is
proper.

6-636
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

Status code Description How to deal with

Service code is not

16#08 Check if the set function code (S3) is proper.
supported

Check if the set registers involved in reading/writing data and the

16#09 Wrong attribute value
contents are proper.

Check if the slave device object attribute allows PLC to perform the
16#0A An error in the attribute list
Get_Attribute_List and Set_Attribute_List function.

16#0B Transmission conflicts Check if the service setting is repeated.

16#0C Object status conflicts Check if the Owner IO connection has been established.

Check if the slave has supported the set object. The service does
16#0D Object has existed.
not need to execute if the set object has been supported.

16#0E Attribute is not writable. Check if the object attribute supports the write function.

No privilege to perform
16#0F Check if the slave device is allowed to perform the service code.
the service code

The device can not

16#10 perform the service Check if the Owner IO connection has been established.
currently.

The size of response data Check if the length of data in object attribute exceeds the limit (100
16#11
is too large. words). 6_6
The data access
16#12 sequence error occurs Check if the data length and data type are right.
when Tag is accessed.

The transmitted data are

16#13 Check if the length (n) of read/written data is right.
too short.

Attribute value is Check if the set Attribute ID switch (S6) and Attribute ID (S7) are
16#14
unsupported. correct.

The transmitted data are

16#15 Check if the read/written data length (n) is right.
too much.

16#16 The object is inexistent. Check if the set Class ID (S4) is right.

The data access

1. Check if the Ethernet network connection is correct.
16#17 sequence has an error
2. Check if some packet is lost in the Ethernet communication.
when Tag is accessed.

16#18 Check if a slave device state error occurs.

6-637
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

Status code Description How to deal with

Attribute value is not

stored.

Attribute value storage

16#19 Check if a slave device hardware error occurs.
error

Router error. The length

Check if the read/written data length (n) exceeds the limit of the
16#1A of the request packet
router.
exceeds the limit.

Router error. The length

Check if the read/written data length (n) exceeds the limit of the
16#1B of the response packet
router.
exceeds the limit.

User-defined object
16#1F Refer to the definition of the slave device error.
access error

16#20 Illegal parameter value Check if the read/written value in S is correct.

_6

6-638
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

API Instruction code Operand Function

2209 SCONF P S1~S10 Setting TCP/UDP Socket parameters

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5    
S6    
S7    
S8    
S9    
S10    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

Data
LINT

TMR

CNT
INT

type

S1~S10 Refer to Explanation in the instruction.

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:
S1~S10 ：
See Explanation 6_6
below

Explanation:

1. The name and explanation of S1~S10 are listed in the following table.

Operand Name Description Data type Remark

S1 TCP/UDP selection 0: TCP, 1: UDP WORD

6-639
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

Operand Name Description Data type Remark

S2 Socket number Range: 1~4 WORD

The first two sections of the IP address occupy Occupies

the first word and the remaining two sections of two
S3 Remote IP address the IP address occupy the second word. For WORD[2] consecu
example: If the IP address is 192.168.1.5, tive
S3=16#C0A8 and S3+1=16#0105. words

S4 Remote port Range: 0~65535; 0 indicates any port. WORD

S5 Local port Range: 0~65535; 0 indicates any port. WORD

Specifies the number of a D device. Range:

The register where 0~29999. For example: the setting value 100
S6 the sent data comes means S7 bytes of data are sent from the WORD
from registers starting from D100 (from the low byte to
high byte).

The size of the sent

S7 Maximum: 200 Bytes. WORD
data

Specifies the number of a D device. Range:

The register where 0~29999. For example: the setting value 200
S8 the received data means S9 bytes of data are received and stored WORD
_6 are stored. to the registers starting from D200 (from the low
byte to high byte).

The size of the

S9 Maximum: 200 Bytes WORD
received data

Applicable

S10 Connection time Range: 1~30000, unit: second. WORD to TCP

mode only

2. The pulse instruction is recommended for the setting when the instruction is used.

3. The Socket parameters take the setting values in HWCONFIG by default. When the parameter values need be
changed randomly during the communication, the instruction will be needed for the modification.

4. If the parameters are set when the socket number is in communication, the setting values will not be effective until
the communication is completed. It is suggested that the setting should be made after making sure that the socket is
not used.

5. If any one of the setting value of parameters is out of the range, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 is ON and
the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-640
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

API Instruction code Operand Function

2210 MCONF P S1~S11 Reading/Writing the Modbus TCP data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2  
S3    
S4    
S5    
S6    
S7  
S8    
S9    
S10    
S11  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1~S11 Refer to Explanation in the instruction.

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -
Symbol:
See Explanation
S1~S11 ：
below
6_6

Explanation:

1. The names and explanations of S1~S11 are listed in the following table.

Operand Name Description Data type Remark

MODBUS TCP data exchange table

S1 Data Exchange Table No. WORD
number, range: 1~32

6-641
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

Operand Name Description Data type Remark

The first two sections of the IP address

occupy the first word and the
Occupies
remaining two sections of the IP
two
S2 Remote IP address address occupy the second word. For WORD[2]
consecutive
example: If the IP address is
words
192.168.1.5, S2=16#C0A8 and
S2+1=16#0105.

Range: 0~255. If the setting value

Station address of the remote
S3 exceeds the range, the value in the low WORD
slave
byte will be used automatically.

Range: 16#01, 02, 03, 04 and 17.

If the function code is out of the range,

S4 The Read function code the modification of received WORD

parameters including the address and

data length is not performed.

Reading the remote

S5 16#0000~16#FFFF WORD
communication address

The function code for reading Bit

_6 device supports max. 256 bits

S6 Reading the data length WORD
The function code for reading Word
device supports max.100 words

The function code for reading data in

The local register where the Bit device supports M device only BOOL
S7
received data are stored The function code for reading data in WORD
Word device supports D device only.

Range: 16#05, 06, 0F and 10.

If the function code is out of the range,

S8 The Write function code the modification of sent parameters WORD

including address and data length is

not performed.

Writing the remote

S9 Range:16#0000~16#FFFF WORD
communication address

Function code for writing data in Bit

S10 Writing the data length WORD
device: supports max. 256 bits

6-642
 Chapt er 6 Ap pl i ed I nst ruct i on s

Operand Name Description Data type Remark

Function code for writing data in Word

device: supports max. 100 words

The function code for writing data in Bit

The local register where the device supports M device only BOOL
S11
remote data are written The function code for writing data in WORD
Word device supports D device only.

2. It is suggested to use the instruction as the pulse instruction.

3. The Modbus communication function codes in S4 and S8 are explained as follows.

When AS series PLC reads the data in multiple bit devices (not discrete input devices), the function code sent is 1
(16#01).

When AS series PLC reads the data in multiple bit devices (not discrete input devices), the function code sent is 2
(16#02).

When AS series PLC reads the data in multiple word devices (not input registers), the function code sent is 3
(16#03).

When AS series PLC reads the data in multiple word devices (not input registers), the function code sent is 4
(16#04).
6_6
When AS series PLC writes the status in one bit device, the function code sent is 5 (16#05).

When AS series PLC writes the data in one word device, the function code sent is 6 (16#06).

When AS series PLC writes the status in multiple bit devices, the function code sent is 15 (16#0F).

When AS series PLC writes the data in multiple word devices, the function code sent is 16 (16#10).

When AS series PLC writes the data in multiple word devices, the function code sent is 23 (16#17).

At present, AS series PLC only supports the function codes above.

4. The parameter values set in the instruction are valid only while PLC is running. When PLC is repowered after power
off, it will take the setting values in the data exchange table by default. If some parameter values need be revised
during the data exchange, the instruction will be used for the modification of the parameter values.

5. If the specified number is in communication, the newly set parameter values will be effective when the next
communication is performed after the current communication is completed.

6. When any one of the parameter values is not within the valid range, the instruction will not be executed; SM0 is ON
and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

6-643
 AS Seri es Progr amm i ng Manual

7. AS series PLC does not support Modbus TCP communication instructions. If the PLC program is used for the
control, please enable the “Program control” mode in the data exchange table first and use the SM number in the
following table.

SM number Attribute Explanation of the Ethernet data exchange parameters

SM1167 R/W The flag for enabling the data exchange

SM1168 ~ SM1199 R/W The flag for enabling the data exchange connection 1~32

SM1200 ~ SM1231 R The success flag of the data exchange connection 1~32

SM1232 ~ SM1263 R The error flag of the data exchange connection 1~32

When the receiving of data are OK, the success flag will be ON. When an error occurs in receiving data, the error
flag will be ON. The success flag and error flag of one connection number are not switched to ON simultaneously.

8. The (Read-only) SR used in the data exchange is explained as follows.

SR number Explanation

SR1120 ~ SR1151 Respectively indicate the actual communication time of connection 1~32.

SR1152 ~ SR1183 Respectively indicate the communication error codes of connection 1~32.

The error codes in SR1152 ~ SR1183 are defined as below.

Error code Explanation

_6 16#00XX Remote device response error

16#F000 Ethernet network is not connected.

16#F001 Remote device response timeout

16#F003 TCP connection timeout

16#F007 Response command error

16#F009 The connection with the remote device is disconnected.

6-644
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Item Code Description

Binary value

Default value
0
The file name extension is .dmd.

The unit of the value is the word.

The values are separated by a comma.

The unit of the value is the word.

1 The file name extension is .cvs.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are separated by a comma.

The unit of the value is the double word.

2 The file name extension is .cvs.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

File format
The values are separated by a tab.
6_
The unit of the value is the word.

3 The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are separated by a tab.

The unit of the value is the double word.

4 The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are not separated by any mark.

The unit of the value is the word.

5
The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

6-645
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Item Code Description

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are not separated by any mark.

The unit of the value is the double word.

6 The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

Appending

The data which is written into the memory card is added after the last value

0 in the file.

Default value

Function option If the file does not exist, it is created automatically.

Overwriting

The data which is written into the memory card replaces the values in the
1
file starting from the value indicated by the value in S4.

If the file does not exist, it is created automatically.

Reserved - The values of bit8~bit15 are 0.

_6  S: The data source

 S1: The length of the data which is written into the file

If the value in S1 is 0, the data is not written into the file.

Item Description

If the file format is 0, 1, 3, or 5, the unit of the value is the word. If the file format is
Value unit
2, 4, or 6, the unit of the value is the double word.

Parameter unit Double word

The devices in which the data is stored can not exceed the device range, and the

Length of the data size of the data which is written into the file can not be more than four gigabytes.

(Please refer to chapter 2 for more information about the devices.)

 S2: The line advance

The value in S2 should be within the range between 0 and 256.

 S3~S3+4: S3 occupies five devices. Nine characters at most constitute a file name, including 16#00. If the
string does not end with 16#00, the error occurs. If the ending character is read, the reading of the

6-646
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

characters stops, and whether the file name is legal is checked. The characters which can be used

to constitute a file name are A~Z, a~z, and 0~9. Besides, the file name extension depends on the

file format. The file which is created is in the default folder. If the file name is “Test1”, the characters

are written into the devices as follows.

 The default folder path:

Model name Folder path

AS332T-A

AS332P-A PLC CARD\AS300\UserProg

AS324MT-A

 S4: The value in the file which is overwritten is indicated by the value in S4.

Item Description

If the file format is 0, 1, 3, or 5, the unit of the value is the word. If the file format is 2, 4, or
Value unit
6, the unit of the value is the double word.
6_
Parameter unit The parameter unit is the double word.

If the function option is 0, S4 is not used.

If the function option is 1, the data which is written into the memory card replaces the
Usage values in the file starting from the value indicated by the value in S4.

The value in S4 should indicate the value in the file.

If the value in S4 is 0, the first value in the file is overwritten.

2. The related flags:

Flag Description

SM450 If the memory card is in the CPU module, the flag is ON.

The write protection switch on the memory card

SM451 ON: The memory card is write protected.

OFF: The memory card is not write protected.

The data is being written from the PLC to the memory card, or the data is being read
SM452
from the memory card into the PLC.

6-647
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Flag Description

If an error occurs during the operation of the memory card, the flag is ON. If the flag is
SM453
ON, users have to reset it to OFF. The error code is stored in SR453.

3. The related error codes (SR453):

Error code Description

16#005E An error occurs when the memory card is initialized.

16#005F The path is incorrect, or the file does not exist.

16#0060 The default folder cannot be created.

16#0061 The memory space is insufficient.

16#0062 The memory card is write protected.

16#0063 An error occurs when the data is written into the file.
16#0064 The data cannot be read from the memory card.
16#0065 The file is a read-only file.
4. If the format of the file into which the data is written is 0, the format of the file from which the data is read is 0.

Otherwise, the data cannot be read, and SM453 is ON. The same applies to the other file formats.

Example:

SM450 is ON when the memory card is inserted into the CPU module; SM452 is ON when MWRIT is executed; SM452 is

OFF when the execution of MWRIT is complete. MWRITP the pulse instruction cannot be used continuously. If executing

this pulse instruction to write data into the memory card continuously, it may exceed its written limitation and may lead to

_6 memory card broken.

Operand Setting value Description

The file into which the data is written

The file format:

The values are separated by a comma.

D0 16#0011
The unit of the value is the word.

The file name extension is .cvs.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

D1 - The data which is written into the file

6-648
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Operand Setting value Description

D10, D11 16#00000030 The size of the data which is written into the file is 48 words.

D300 16#000A Ten values are written into every line.

D20=16#6554

D20 D21=16#7473 The file name is “Test1”.

D22=16#0031

The data which is written into the memory card replaces the values in the file
D30、D31 16#00000000
starting from the first value.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in C exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the value in S1 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the value in S2 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If the value in S3 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.
6_

6-649
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction code Operand Function

Reading the data from the memory card
2301 MREAD P C，S，S1，S2，S3，D
into the PLC

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

C    
S  
S1    
S2    
S3    
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data INT
type

C 
S 
S1 
S2 
S3 
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

_6 C ： Control parameter

S ： File name

S1 ： Data address in the file

S2 ： Reserved

S3 ： Data length

D ： Data destination

Explanation:

1. The description of the operands:

 C: The control parameter

6-650
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Item Code Description

Binary value

The default value is 0.

0
The file name extension is .dmd.

The unit of the value is the word.

File format The values are separated by a comma.

The unit of the value is the word.

1 The file name extension is .cvs.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are separated by a comma.

The unit of the value is the double word.

2 The file name extension is .cvs.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are separated by a tab.

The unit of the value is the word.

3 6_
The file name extension is .txt.
3
The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are separated by a tab.

File format
The unit of the value is the double word.

4 The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values are not separated by any mark.

The unit of the value is the word.

5 The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

6 The values are not separated by any mark.

6-651
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Item Code Description

The unit of the value is the double word.

The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The value which is stored is a hexadecimal value.

The values in the file starting from the value indicated by the value in S1. are read.
0
The default value is 0.

Function option The number of values is stored in D and D+1.

1 If the file format is 0, 1, 3, or 5, the unit of the value is the word. If the file format is 2,

4, or 6, the unit of the value is the double word.

Reserved - The values of bit8~bit15 are 0.

 S~S+4: S occupies five devices. Nine characters at most constitute a file name, including 16#00. If the string
does not end with 16#00, the error occurs. If the ending character is read, the reading of the

characters stops, and whether the file name is legal is checked. The characters which can be used

to constitute a file name are A~Z, a~z, and 0~9. Besides, the file name extension depends on the file

format. The file which is created is in the default folder. If the file name is “Test1”, the characters are

written into the devices as follows.

_6

 The default folder path:

Model name Folder path

AS332T-A

AS332P-A PLC CARD\AS300\UserProg

AS324MT-A

 S1: The value in the file which is read is indicated by the value in S1.

Item Description

If the file format is 0, 1, 3, or 5, the unit of the value is the word. If the file format is
Value unit
2, 4, or 6, the unit of the value is the double word.

Parameter unit The parameter unit is the double word.

The value in S1 should indicate the value in the file.

Usage
If the value in S1 is 0, the first value in the file is read.

6-652
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

 S3: The length of the data which is read from the file

The devices in which the data is stored cannot exceed the device range. If the value in S3 is larger than
the number of values in the file, the length of the data read from the file is the number of values in the file.

The unit S3 is the double word.

 D: The initial device in which the data is stored.

2. The related flags:

Flag Description

SM450 If the memory card is in the CPU module, the flag is ON.

The write protection switch on the memory card

SM451 ON: The memory card is write protected.

OFF: The memory card is not write protected.

The data is being written from the PLC to the memory card, or the data is being read from the
SM452
memory card into the PLC.

If an error occurs during the operation of the memory card, the flag is ON. If the flag is ON,
SM453
users have to reset it to OFF. The error code is stored in SR453.

3. The related error codes (SR453):

Error code Description 6_

16#005E An error occurs when the memory card is initialized.

16#005F The path is incorrect, or the file does not exist.

16#0060 The default folder cannot be created.

16#0061 The memory space is insufficient.

16#0062 The memory card is write protected.

16#0063 An error occurs when the data is written into the file.

16#0064 The data cannot be read from the memory card.

4. If the format of the file into which the data is written is 0, the format of the file from which the data is read is 0.

Otherwise, the data cannot be read, and SM453 is ON. The same applies to the other file formats.

Example:

SM450 is ON when the memory card is inserted into the CPU module; SM452 is ON when MREAD is executed; SM452 is

OFF when the execution of MREAD is complete.

6-653
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Operand Setting value Description

The file from which the data is read

The file format:

The values are separated by a comma.

D0 16#0011
The unit of the value is the word.

The file name extension is .csv.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

D300=16#6554

D300 D301=16#7473 The file name is “Test1”.

D302=16#0031

D10, D11 16#00000000 The values in the file starting from the first value are read.

D1 16#000A Ten values are read from every line.

D30、D31 16#00000020 The size of the data which is read from the file is 32 words.
_6
D20 - The data which is read is stored in D20.

Additional remark:

1. If the value in C exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the value in S2 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the value in S3 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

4. If the value in D exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-654
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

2302 MTWRIT P C，S，S1，S2，S3 Writing the string into the memory card

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

C    
S  
S1    
S2    
S3  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

C 
S 
S1 
S2 
S3 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

C ： Control parameter

S ： Data source 6_
S1 ： Data length

S2 ： Separation mark

S3 ： File name

Explanation:

1. The description of the operands:

 C: The control parameter

Parameter
Description
value

If the file exists, the data which is written into the memory card is added after the last byte in
0
the file.

6-655
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

(Appending) If the file does not exist, it is created automatically.

If the file exists, the new data which is written into the memory card replaces the old data in
1
the file. The size of the file is the size of the new data.
(Overwriting)
If the file does not exist, it is created automatically.

 S: The data source

If the string which is written into the file is “12345”, the characters are stored in the devices as follows.

Owing to the fact that a byte is taken as the basic unit, the first character is stored in the low byte in D300,

the second character is stored in the high byte in D300. The same applies to the other characters. “16#00”

is stored in the high byte in D300+2, and indicates the end of the string.

S300 S300+1 S300+2

byte 2 byte 1 byte 4 byte 3 byte 6 byte 5
16#32 16#31 16#34 16#33 16#00 16#35

 S1: The length of the data which is written into the memory card

A byte is taken as the basic unit. The devices in which the data is stored cannot exceed the device range,

and the length of the data which is written into the memory card cannot be more than 255 bytes.

 S2: The separation mark

If the value in S1 is N, the value in S2 is written into the memory card as follows.
_6
S2Operand
Description
High byte Low byte

16#00 or not
16#00 The N-byte data is written into the file.
16#00

The N+1-byte data is written into the file. The value in the high byte in S2 is the
Not 16#00 16#00
value in the N+1st byte.

The N+2-byte data is written into the file. The value in the high byte in S2 is the
Not 16#00 Not 16#00 value in the seventh byte, and the value in low byte in S2 is the value in the N+2th

byte.

 S3~S3+4: S3 occupies five devices. Nine characters at most constitute a file name, including 16#00. If the
string does not end with 16#00, the error occurs. If the ending character is read, the reading of the

characters stops, and whether the file name is legal is checked. The characters which can be used

to constitute a file name are A~Z, a~z, and 0~9. Besides, the file name extension depends on the

file format. The file which is created is in the default folder. If the file name is “Test1”, the characters

are written into the devices as follows.

6-656
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

S3 'e' 'T' S3 16#65 16#54

ASCII代碼
S3 +1 't' 's' S3 +1 16#74 16#73
S3+2 NUL '1' S3+2 16#00 16#31

 The default folder path

Model name Folder path

AS332T-A

AS332P-A PLC CARD\AS300\UserProg

AS324MT-A

2. The related flags:

Flag Description

SM450 If the memory card is in the CPU module, the flag is ON.

The write protection switch on the memory card

SM451 ON: The memory card is write protected.

OFF: The memory card is not write protected.

The data is being written from the PLC to the memory card, or the data is being read
SM452
from the memory card into the PLC.

SM453
If an error occurs during the operation of the memory card, the flag is ON. If the flag is 6_
ON, users have to reset it to OFF. The error code is stored in SR453.

3. The related error codes (SR453):

Error code Description

16#005E An error occurs when the memory card is initialized.

16#005F The path is incorrect, or the file does not exist.

16#0060 The default folder can not be created.

16#0061 The memory space is insufficient.

16#0062 The memory card is write protected.

16#0063 An error occurs when the data is written into the file.

16#0064 The data can not be read from the memory card.

16#0065 The file is a read-only file.

6-657
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

SM450 is ON when the memory card is inserted into the CPU module; SM452 is ON when MTWRIT is executed; SM452

is OFF when the execution of MTWRIT is complete.

Operand Setting value Description

The file into which the data is written

The file format:

The unit of the character is the byte.

D0 16#0001
The file name extension is .txt.

The ASCII codes are adopted.

The data in D300 is written into the file.

D300 - The data which is written into the file

_6 D10 16#000A The size of the string which is written into the file is 10 bytes.

After the data is written into the file, the separation mark is added after the last
D1 16#0A00
byte in the file.

D30=16#6554

D30 D31=16#7473 The file name is “Test1”.

D32=16#0031

Additional remark:

1. If the value in C exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

2. If the value in S1 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

3. If the value in S3 exceeds the range, the operation error occurs, the instruction is not executed, SM0 is ON, and the
error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

6-658
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction code Operand Function

2303 MEMW P S，D，n Writing the data into the file register

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S     
D 
n   DWORD      

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 
D 
n 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

The initial address of the data

S ：
source

The initial address in which

D ：
the data is stored

n ： Data length

6_
Explanation:

1. S: The initial address of the data source; it is suggested to declare an array type of variables.

2. D: The initial address in which the data is stored; it is suggested to assign an address for the file register and declare an
array type of variables.

3. n: The length of the data which is written into the file register, ranging from 1 to 2048. When exceeding, the
instruction will not be executed, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#200B.

4. If the device S or D exceeds the allowed range, SM0 is ON, and the error code in SR0 is 16#2003.

5. Since it takes 60~120ms for the instruction to write, it is suggested to use this instruction when the PLC is idle. For

example there is no external interrupt task, no high-speed outputting, or any immediate events for the PLC to

process.

6. The instruction will only write when the contact is from OFF to ON and will only write once.

NOTE: This file register can only be written into for 100,000 times.

6-659
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

6.24 Task Control Instructions

6.24.1 List of Task Control Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2400 TKON –  Enabling the cyclic task

2401 TKOFF –  Disabling the cyclic task

_6

6-660
 Ch ap te r 6 Ap pl ie d Instruc ti ons

6.24.2 Explanation of Task Control Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

2400 TKON P S Enabling the cyclic task

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S   DWORD     

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Task number

Explanation:

1. The cyclic task specified by S is enabled.

2. When the PLC runs, the execution of the cyclic tasks depends on the setting of the cyclic tasks in ISPSoft.
6_
3. The description of the operands:

 The operand S should be within the range between 0 and 31.

 Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information about creating and enabling the tasks.

Example:

When the PLC runs, cyclic task (0) is enabled. Since the instruction TKON in cyclic task (0) is executed, cyclic task (1) is

enabled, and Y0.0 is ON.

The two cyclic tasks are created in ISPSoft. Cyclic task (0) is enabled when the PLC runs, and cyclic task (1) is not

enabled when the PLC runs.

6-661
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Cyclic task (1) is enabled by the execution of the instruction TKON in cyclic task (0).

Cyclic task (1) is executed.

Additional remark:

Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to tasks.

_6

6-662
 Ch ap te r 6 Ap pl ie d Instruc ti ons

API Instruction code Operand Function

2401 TKOFF P S Disabling the cyclic task

Device
X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F
S       

DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS AS -

Symbol:

S ： Task number

Explanation:

1. The cyclic task specified by S is disabled.

2. When the PLC runs, the execution of the cyclic tasks depends on the setting of the cyclic tasks in ISPSoft.

3. The description of the operands:

6_
 The operand S should be within the range between 0 and 31.

 Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information about creating and enabling the tasks.

Example:

When the PLC runs, cyclic task (0) and cyclic task (1) are enabled. Since the instruction TKOOFF in cyclic task (0) is

executed, cyclic task (1) is disabled, and Y0.0 is OFF.

The two cyclic tasks are created in ISPSoft. Cyclic task (0) and cyclic task (1) are enabled when the PLC runs, and cyclic

task (1) is disabled when the instruction TKOFF in cyclic task (0) is executed.

Cyclic task (1) is disabled by the execution of the instruction TKOFF in cyclic task (0).

6-663
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Cyclic task (1) is not executed.

Additional remark:

Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to tasks.

_6

6-664
 Chapter 6 Applied Instructions

6.25 SFC Instructions

6.25.1 List of SFC Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API Function
16-bit 32-bit instruction

2500 SFCRUN – – SFC Run

2501 SFCPSE – – SFC Pause

2502 SFCSTP – – SFC Stop

6_

6-665
 AS Series Programming Manual

6.25.2 Explanation of Task Control Instructions

API Instruction code Operand Function

2500 SFCRUN S1，S2，S3 SFC Run

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1
S2   
S3
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S1
S2   
S3

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Name of the SFC POU

S2 ： Function code

S3 ： Device address
_6

Explanation:

1. The designated SFC program of S1 will be activated according to the setups of S2.

2. When the instruction is executed, the SFC POU designated by S1 will be activated only when the SFC POU is being
scanned.

3. Operand:

 S1 defines the name of the SFC POU.

 When the designated SFC POU of S1 is executed, the parameters such as SFC/STEP/ACTION/TRANSITION

of the SFC program will be cleared when S2=0 or 1, and the execution will start according to the value

specified in S2.

 S2=0, the system will execute the SFC POU from the initial Step.

 S2=1, the system will execute the SFC POU from the designated Step of S3.

6-666
 Chapter 6 Applied Instructions

 S2=2, the status and the parameters such as SFC/STEP/ACTION/TRANSITION of the SFC will NOT be
cleared and the system will start executing from where it pauses.

 S3 designates the step to be started in the SFC program of S1.

4. The range of S2 is 0 to 2. When it is out of range, it will be seen as 0.

5. When the state of the SFC POU is RUN, executing this instruction is invalid.

Example:

Set up one LD(ladder) POU and specify its POU name as Main, and 2 SFC POUs with the names of TestSFC1 and

TestSFC2.

1. When the program is executed (RUN), TestSFC1 and TestSFC2 will execute the SFCSTP, and 2 SFC POUs will stop

executing.

2. When M0 is set from OFF to ON, TestSFC1/ TestSFC2 POU will execute the SFCRUN* instructions. Refer to the

contents of TestSFC1 and TestSFC2 for execution details of the 2 POUs. When S2 is set to 0, the status and the
parameters of the SFC will be cleared and will begin to execute from STEP 1. When S2 is set to 1, the status and the

parameters will be cleared and will begin to execute from the designated STEP of S3.

3. When M1 is set from OFF to ON, TestSFC1 POU will pause. When S2 is set to 1, all the executing actions and the
outputs of the SFC will be cleared, and the system will run the final scan.

4. When M2 is set from OFF to ON, TestSFC1 POU will execute its actions. When S2 is set to 1, the status and the 6_
parameters will be cleared, and the system will begin to execute from STEP 2.

5. When M3 is set from OFF to ON, TestSFC2 POU will pause. When S2 is set to 0, all the executing actions of the SFC
and the outputs will be kept, and the system will not run the final scan.

6. When M4 is set from OFF to ON, TestSFC1 POU will execute its actions. When S2 is set to 2, the status and the
parameters will be kept and will begin to execute from where it pauses.

6. *SFCRUN will activate SPC POU at the next scan.

6-667
 AS Series Programming Manual

Main POU

_6

6-668
 Chapter 6 Applied Instructions

TestSFC1 POU

TestSFC2 POU 6_

Additional Remark:
Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to SFC.

6-669
 AS Series Programming Manual

API Instruction code Operand Function

2501 SFCPSE S1，S2 SFC Pause

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1
S2   
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1
S2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Name of the SFC POU

S2 ： Function code

Explanation:

1. The designated SFC POU of S1 will pause according to the setups of S2.
_6
2. When the instruction is executed, the SFC POU designated by S1 will be paused only when the SFC POU is being
scanned.

3. When pausing, the status and the parameters such as SFC/STEP/ACTION/TRANSITION of the SFC will be kept.

4. Operand:

 S1 defines the name of the SFC POU.

 When S2=0, all the executing actions of the SFC and the outputs will be kept, and the system will not run the
final scan.

 When S2=1, all the executing actions and the outputs of the SFC POU will be cleared, and the system will run
the final scan..

5. The range of S2 is 0 to 1. When it is out of range, it will be seen as 0.

6. When the state of the SFC POU is PAUSE/STOP, executing this instruction is invalid.

6-670
 Chapter 6 Applied Instructions

Example:

Please refer to the SFCRUN programing example for more information.

Additional Remark:

Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to SFC.

6_

6-671
 AS Series Programming Manual

API Instruction code Operand Function

2502 SFCSTP S SFC Stop

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

- AS －

Symbol:

S ： Name of the SFC POU

Explanation:

1. The designated SFC POU of S will stop.

_6 2. When the instruction is executed, the SFC POU designated by S1 will stop only when the SFC POU is being
scanned.

3. When stopping, the status and the parameters of the SFC will be cleared, and the system will run the final scan.

4. When the state of the SFC POU is STOP, executing this instruction is invalid.

Example:

Please refer to the SFCRUN programing example for more information.

Additional Remark:

Please refer to ISPSoft User Manual for more information related to SFC.

6-672
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

6.26 High-speed Output Instructions

6.26.1 List of High-speed Output Instructions
Instruction code Pulse

API instruction Function

16-bit 32-bit

2700 – DPLSY – High-speed pulse output (without ramp-up/down process)

2701 – DPLSR – High-speed pulse output (with ramp-up/down process)

2702 PWM DPWM – Pulse width modulation

2703 JOG DJOG – JOG output

2704 – DZRN – Zero return

2705 – DPLSV – Adjustable pulse output

2706 – DDRVI – Relative position control

2707 – DDRVA – Absolute position control

2708 CSFO – – Catch speed and proportional output

2709 – DDRVM – Mark alignment positioning

2-Axis relative-coordinate point-to-point synchronized

2710 – DPPMR –
motion

2-Axis absolute-coordinate point-to-point synchronized 6_

2711 – DPPMA –
motion

2-Axis relative-position clockwise arc

2712 – DCICR –
interpolation

2-Axis absolute-position clockwise arc

2713 – DCICA –
interpolation

2-Axis relative-position counterclockwise arc

2714 – DCICCR –
interpolation

2-Axis absolute-position counterclockwise arc

2715 – DCICCA –
interpolation

2716 – DCCMR – The relative-position circle drawing

2717 – DCCMA – The absolute-position circle drawing

2718 TPO – – The position planning table controls the output

 Setting single-axis output parameters in the position

2719 – DTPWS
planning table

6-673
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Instruction code Pulse

API instruction Function

16-bit 32-bit

–  Setting linear interpolation parameters in the position

2720 DTPWL
planning table

–  Setting arc interpolation parameters in the position planning

2721 DTPWC
table

2723 DPPGB – Point to point go back and forth

_6

6-674
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

6.26.2 Explanation of High-speed Output Instructions

API Instruction Operand Description

High-speed pulse output (without

2700 D PLSY S1，S2，D
ramp-up/down process)

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1  
S2  
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S1 : Pulse output frequency

S2 : Number of output pulses

D : Pulse output device

6_

Explanation:

1. S1 specifies the pulse output frequency as 4MHz for the line driver output models and the value within the range of
0Hz~200kHz for the open collector output models. The unit of the output frequency is 1Hz.The tolerable error rate

for 200kHz is about 0.02% and for 100kHz is about 0.01%. The error rate is decreasing with the decreasing

frequency. For example, if the output frequency is set to 199990Hz, the actual output is 199960Hz. If the output

frequency is set to 99999Hz, the actual output is 99990Hz. If the output frequency is out of the valid range, PLC will

take the maximum or minimum frequency for output automatically.

2. The output frequency specified by S1 can change during the execution of the instruction without the execution of
ramp up/down process. The time to change the frequency is when the being executed instruction is scanned and

the output of a full pulse which the instruction is outputting is completed.

3. S2 specified the number of output pulses. The range: 0~2,147,483,647. When the number of output pulses is set to
0, it means the number of pulses is not restricted and pulses can be output constantly till the instruction is disabled.

When the number of pulses specified is less than 0, no pulse is output.

4. After the output is started, the number of output pulses specified by S2 will not be allowed to change again.

6-675
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

5. D only specifies Y0.0~Y0.11 as the output point. After the instruction is enabled, its output function becomes the
high-speed output. The basic instruction output point control will be invalid. It is suggested that the general output

function should not be used after the high-speed output function is used in the program.

6. The ratio of Duty-OFF Time and Duty-ON Time for the pulse output is 1:1.

7. There is no limit to how many times the instruction is used and repeated use of the same output points. But every

one output point can only be started and output by one high-speed output instruction in one scan cycle and the

instruction which is started first will occupy the output point first.

8. After every high-speed output instruction for every output point is enabled, other instruction occupying the same

output point can not be started till the high-speed output instruction which is being executed is disabled.

9. When the high-speed output instruction is enabled in the interrupt program or is not edited in the main process, it is

suggested that the instruction should be used with the auto-reset function together when output is completed and

PLC will update the output state in the END instruction.

10. After the stop flag is set, PLC will stop the output and clear the Busy flag only after the start instruction is executed a

second time and outputs a full pulse. PLC will continue to outpout pulses when the stop flag is reset and the

previously remaining pulse output is not finished. The stop flag is set and reset by designers.

11. The high-speed output points and corresponding SM/SR are listed in the following table.

Output point number Attribute#2 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 Y0.4 Y0.5
_6
Busy flag R SM460 SM472 SM480 SM492 SM500 SM512

Completion flag#3 R/W SM461 SM473 SM481 SM493 SM501 SM513

Stop flag R/W SM463 SM474 SM483 SM494 SM503 SM514

Output completion
R/W SM470 SM475 SM490 SM495 SM510 SM515
auto-reset#4

Present output
SR460 SR474 SR480 SR494 SR500 SR514
position#1 R/W
SR461 SR475 SR481 SR495 SR501 SR515
（32-bit）

Output point number Attribute #2 Y0.6 Y0.7 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11

Busy flag R SM520 SM532 SM540 SM552 SM560 SM572

Completion flag #3 R/W SM521 SM533 SM541 SM553 SM561 SM573

Stop flag R/W SM523 SM534 SM543 SM554 SM563 SM574

Output completion
R/W SM530 SM535 SM550 SM555 SM570 SM575
auto-reset #4

6-676
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Output point number Attribute#2 Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 Y0.4 Y0.5

Present output position

SR520 SR534 SR540 SR554 SR560 SR574
#1
R/W
SR521 SR535 SR541 SR555 SR561 SR575
（32-bit）

Note:

#1: All present output positions are latched when power is off.

#2: R means “Ready-only” registers and the data in the registers can not be modified. R/W means the data can be

read and written in the registers.

#3: It is suggested that the completion flag should be cleared by designers. If the completion flag is not cleared, it

will be cleared automatically when the high-speed output instruction is enabled next time.

#4: The output completion auto-reset flag is set by designers. PLC will clear the flag automatically after the output

is completed.

Example 1:

1. When X0.0 is ON, Y0.0 outputs 200 pulses with the frequency of 1kHz. SM461 is ON when the pulse output is

completed and then Y0.12 is ON.

2. When X0.0 is OFF, Y0.0 stops the output. The pulse output is restarted when X0.0 is ON again. 6_

0.5ms

Output point
輸出Y0.0
Y0 2 3 200

1ms

6-677
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example 2:

External interrupt input X0.0

External interrupt input X0.1

_6

Explanation:

1. Y0.0 outputs 1000 pulses whenever X0.0 receives the external interrupt signal once. Y0.2 outputs 1000 pulses
whenever X0.1 receives the external interrupt signal once.

2. When the external interrupt input X triggers the pulse output from Y, the interval time between the Y pulse
output completion and the next external interrupt input X trigger must be one PLC scan cycle or above.

Example 3: (ST program)

6-678
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Explanation:

1. When M0 is ON, Y0.0 outputs 1000 pulses with the frequency of 1kHz.

2. When the pulse output is completed, SM461 is ON and then SM470 is ON.

3. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, the pulse output will be restarted.

6_

6-679
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

High-speed pulse output (with

2701 D PLSR S1，S2，S3，D
ramp-up/down process)

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S1  
S2  
S3  
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Target output frequency

S2 ： Number of output pulses

_6 S3 ： Ramp-up/ down time

D ： Pulse output device

Explanation:

1. S1 specifies the pulse output frequency as 4MHz for the line driver output models and the value within the range of
0Hz~200kHz for the open collector output models. The unit of the output frequency is 1Hz.The tolerable error rate

for 200kHz is about 0.02% and for 100kHz is about 0.01%. The error rate is decreasing with the decreasing

frequency. For example, if the output frequency is set to 199990Hz, the actual output is 199960Hz. If the output

frequency is set to 99999Hz, the actual output is 99990Hz. If the output frequency is out of the valid range, PLC will

take the maximum or minimum frequency for the pulse output automatically.

2. After the instruction is enabled, the target output frequency specified by S1 can be changed and the ramp up/down
process is performed according to the set ramp up/down time. The time to change the frequency is when the being

executed instruction is scanned and the output of a full pulse which is being output is completed.

3. S2 is the number of output pulses. The range: 0~2,147,483,647. When the number of pulses is set to 0, it means
the number of pulses is not restricted and pulses can be output continuously till the instruction is disabled.

4. After the output is started, the number of output pulses which S2 specifies will not be allowed to change again.

6-680
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

5. S3 sets the ramp-up/down time with the unit of 1ms. The value is effective when the instruction is enabled for the

first time. If the target frequency specified by S1 is modified in the ramp-up process, the ramp up/down time will be
reloaded for execution. But if the target frequency is modified when the output enters the ramp-down process, the

changing will be invalid.

6. D only specifies the output device among Y0.0~Y0.11. After the instruction is enabled, its output function becomes
the high-speed output. The general instruction output point control will be invalid. It is suggested that the general

output function should not be used after the high-speed output function is used in the program.

7. The target output frequency S1, number of output pulses S2 and Ramp up/down time S3 are illustrated in the
following figure.

8. The ratio of Duty-OFF Time and Duty-ON Time for the pulse output is 1:1.

9. There is no limit to how many times the instruction is used and the repeated use of the same output points. But 6_
every output point can be started for output only by one high-speed output instruction in one scan cycle and the

instruction which starts the output point first will occupy the output point first.

10. After the high-speed output instruction for one output point is enabled, other instruction which is specified to occupy

the same output point can not be started till the high-speed output instruction in execution is disabled.

11. When the high-speed output instruction is enabled in the interrupt program or is not edited in the main program, it is

suggested that the instruction should be used with the auto-reset function together when the output is completed

and PLC will update the output state in the END instruction.

12. After the stop flag is set, PLC will perform the ramp-down stop or immediately stop the output only after the start

instruction is executed a second time and a full pulse is output.

13. Refer to PLSY instruction for explanation of the high-speed output points and corresponding SM/SR.

6-681
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2702 D PWM S1，S2，D Pulse width modulation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1          
S2          
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1     
S2     
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Pulse output width

S2 ： Pulse output cycle

D ： Pulse output device

_6 Explanation:

1. The 16-bit instruction PWM takes 100us as the output unit and the 32-bit instruction DPWM takes 1us as the output
unit.

Output instruction PWM DPWM

Range of pulse output width S1 0 ~ 30000 0 ~ 60000

Range of pulse output cycle S2 0 ~ 30000 0 ~ 60000

2. S1 the pulse output width (Duty ON) is defined as t, S2 the pulse output cycle time (Cycle time) is T as below. S1≦

S2 is recommended.

3. D can only use Y0.0~Y0.11 as the pulse output device.

6-682
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

4. There is no limit to how many times the instruction is used in the program. But only one of the output instructions
which use the same output point can be executed in the same scan cycle. When several high-speed pulse output

instructions start the same point in the program, PLC will first perform the output based on the instruction which is

executed first.

5. If S1≦0 or S2≦0, it will be seen as 0 output (the pulse output is OFF). If S1＞S2, it will be seen as S1＝S2. When S1

＝S2 and S2 is not 0, the pulse output will be always ON.

6. The pulse output width S1 and pulse output cycle S2 can be modified when PWM is executed.

7. Relevant special registers SR are listed in the following table.

Output point number Attribute Y0.0 Y0.1 Y0.2 Y0.3 Y0.4 Y0.5

Present output
SR460 SR474 SR480 SR494 SR500 SR514
position#1 R/W
SR461 SR475 SR481 SR495 SR501 SR515
（32-bit）

Output point number Attribute Y0.6 Y0.7 Y0.8 Y0.9 Y0.10 Y0.11

Present output position

SR520 SR534 SR540 SR554 SR560 SR574
#1
R/W
SR521 SR535 SR541 SR555 SR561 SR575
（32-bit）

#1：All present output positions are latched when power is off.

Example: 6_

When X0.0 is ON, Y0.1 outputs the following pulses. When X0.0 is OFF, Y0.1 output changes to OFF.

t=1000ms

Output Y0.1
Output Y1

T=2000ms

6-683
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2703 D JOG S1，S2，S3，D1，D2 JOG output

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1        
S2        
S3        
D1 
D2  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1     
S2     
S3     
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Ramp-up time
_6
S2 ： Target output frequency

S3 ： Ramp-down time

D1 ： Pulse output device

D2 ： Auxiliary output device

Explanation:

1. S1 is the ramp-up time with the unit of 10ms. For example: the setting value 10 means the ramp-up time is 100ms.
After the instruction is enabled, the output frequency can be divided into ten times and it speeds up once every

10ms. And it will speed up to JOG target frequency specified by S2 when S1 the ramp-up time is reached.

2. When the instruction is disabled, its output frequency will ramp down once every 10ms based on the set ramp-down

time. The output will not stop till the ramp-down time is reached. If the ramp-down time is set to 0, the output will

stop immediately.

3. The range of ramp-up time S1 and ramp-down time S3 is 0~3000 (that is 0~30 seconds). If the setting value is out of
the range, PLC will take the minimum or maximum value for the output. The ramp-up time and ramp-down time will

6-684
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

be affected by the scan time. If the accurate time is required to switch the ramp-up and ramp-down process, the

output instruction with the ramp up/down designed such as DDRVI instruction is recommended to use.

4. The range of the target output frequency S2 is -200K~200kHz. If the setting value is out of the range, PLC will take
the minimum or maximum value for the output. If the output frequency is a positive number, it indicates the forward

ouput. If the output frequency is a negative number, it indicates the reverse output.

5. The output point for D1 must be selected from Y0.0~Y0.11 as the following table shows. For the auxiliary output

point for D2, the output points in the following table can be referred to. If users choose other output point or M device,

the value in SR indicating the output mode will be invalid and the “Pulse+direction” mode will be valid by default. D2
is a direction output point here.

D1 selects the even output point number.

Output point for D1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10

Direction output point

Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11
for D2

Busy flag SM460 SM480 SM500 SM520 SM540 SM560

Output mode SR462 SR482 SR502 SR522 SR542 SR562

Present output SR460 SR480 SR500 SR520 SR540 SR560

position SR461 SR481 SR501 SR521 SR541 SR561

D1 selects the odd output point number. 6_

Output point for D1 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11

Direction output point

Y1.0 or above or any M deivice (Bool)
for D2

Busy flag SM472 SM492 SM512 SM532 SM552 SM572

Present output SR474 SR494 SR514 SR534 SR554 SR574

position SR475 SR495 SR515 SR535 SR555 SR575

6. If SR=0, it indicates the “Pulse+direction” output mode. When SR=1, it means the A/B phase output. (Note: The

output mode can be selected only when D1 uses the even output point and D2 uses the recommended direction
output point.)

7. When the output begins, the Busy flag SM is set to ON. When the output is completed, the Busy flag will be reset to

OFF automatically and the Completion flag will not be ON.

8. The output timing diagram: (For the Busy flag in the following figure, refer to the Busy flags of axes.)

6-685
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Jog_in

Busy flag
S2 > 0
S1 S3
D1
0 Time
S1 S3
S2 < 0

9. The target output frequency can be modified during the execution of the instruction. When the new frequency is

greater than the previous one, the ramp-up slope is used. Whereas, the ramp-down slope is used if the new

frequency is less than the previous one.

10. The ramp-up/down slope is set through conversion of the set time and target frequency when the instruction is

enabled. Thus the slope will not change with the changing target frequency in the process of the the instruction

output. For example, the original target frequency for the output is 1kHz and then it is modified as 2kHz. Thus the
actual ramp-down time will be different from the time set originally. The following dotted line is the ramp-up/down

timing diagram after the target frequency is modified.

_6

Jog_in
Change S2

S2
D1
Time

S1 S3

6-686
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction Operand Description

2704 D ZRN S1，S2，S3，S4，D Zero return

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
S4 
D 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4 
D 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Target frequency for zero return

6_
S2 ： JOG frequency for DOG

S3 ： Zero return mode

S4 ： Input device for DOG

D ： Pulse output device

Explanation:

1. The range of the target frequency for zero return S1 is 1Hz~200kHz. The JOG frequency S2 should be less than the
target frequency S1. The JOG frequency S2 is the start frequency. If S1 is less than S2, S1 will be revised

automatically into the one equal to S2.

2. The input point for S4 and output point for D must match for use. Do not change them during the execution of the

instruction. The input point for S4 can only be one of the 16 high-speed input points X0.0 ~ X0.15. For the selection

of D output point and direction output point, refer to the following table. If D is not the preset “Pulse+direction” output
(default: 0), change the mode into A/B phase output by setting SR to 1.

6-687
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Axis number Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6

It can be any one of the input points X0.0 ~ X0.15. But the same input point can not be

selected for different axis output. If DOG point shakes or the switch bounces, please
Input point for S4
set the input point filter time in HWCONFIG.

Output point for D Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10

Direction output point Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11

Output mode SR462 SR482 SR502 SR522 SR542 SR562

Busy flag SM460 SM480 SM500 SM520 SM540 SM560

Completion flag SM461 SM481 SM501 SM521 SM541 SM561

SR460 SR480 SR500 SR520 SR540 SR560

Present output position
SR461 SR481 SR501 SR521 SR541 SR561

3. S3 is for selection of a zero return mode and the function code is set by two high and low16-bit parameters. See the
details as below.

Code
Functions High Explanation
Low 16-bit
16-bit

_6 When the instruction is enabled, the search for the

zero point is toward the negative direction with the
Leaves the zero point in the target frquency. When the zero point is ON (the
negative direction and then zero point signal changes from OFF to ON), the
0 0
stops frequency is decreased to the JOG speed and the
(Mode 0) the motion in the negative direction will continue
and will not stop till the zero point signal changes
from ON to OFF.
When the instruction is enabled, the search for the
zero point is toward the negative direction with the
Leaves the zero point in the target frquency. When the zero point is ON (the
positive direction and then zero point signal changes from OFF to ON), the
0 1
stops frequency is decreased to 0 immediately and then
(Mode 1) the the motion is toward the positive direction at the
JOG speed and will not stop till the zero point
signal changes from ON to OFF.
The operation of returing to the zero point is the
same as that for the low 16-bit code. After the
Number
zero point is ON, the motion will continue
of pulses
Mode 0 Moves again after according to the number of pulses specified.
for 2
returning to the zero point When the high 16-bit code is a positive number,
motion
the search is toward the positive direction.
Whereas, the negative value means that the
search is toward the negative direction.
Mode 0 Searches Z phase Number 3 The motion of returing to the zero point is the

6-688
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

after returning to the zero of Z same as that for the low 16-bit code. After the
point phases zero point is returned to, the motion will continue
(Z phase input point is set in according to the number of Z phases. When the
HWCONFIG ) high 16-bit code is a positive number, the search
is toward the positive direction. Whereas, the
negtive value indicates that the search is toward
the negative direction. Suppose that the
rising-edge trigger of X0.1 is specified as the
condition for Z phase input by HWCONFIG, the
counting will be performed once whenever the
rising-edge trigger of X0.1 occurs.
Choosing the value 4~7 means selecting the
Number
functions of code 0~3 respectively and the
of pulses 4+0=4
Mode 0 Outputs the clear specified output point will send an ON signal
for 4+1=5
signal after returning to the which is about 20ms wide when the function
moition
zero point. 4+2=6 execution is completed. The range of the output
or
(Output clear point is set in 4+3=7 point is Y0.12~Y0.15 and Y1.0 ~ Y1.15. For
number
HWCONFIG ) (bit2=ON) example, if Y1.12 is specified as the output point
of Z
in HWCONFIG, it indicates Y1.12 is for the output
phases
of clear signals.
Leaves the zero point in the
8+0=8
positive direction and then The operation for zero point return is the same as
0 8+1=9
stops that for code 1 (Mode 1)
(bit3=ON)
(Mode 1)
The operation for zero point return is the same as
that for low 16-bit code 1.
After the zero point is returned to, the motion will
Number
Mode 1 Outputs the continue in accordance with the number of pulses
of pulses 8+2=10
number of pulses after the specified. When the value of the high 16-bit code is
for (bit3=ON)
zero point is returned to
moition
a positive number, the motion will go toward the
positive direction. Whereas, the motion will be in
6_
the negative direction if the value is a negative
number.
The operation for zero point return is the same as
that for low 16-bit code 1.
After the zero point is returned to, the motion will
continue in accordance with the number of Z
Mode 1 Searches for Z
Number phases to seek. When the value of the high 16-bit
phase after returning to the
of Z 8+3=11 code is a positive number, the motion will go
zero point
phases (bit3=ON) toward the positive direction. Whereas, the motion
(Z phase input point is set in
will be in the negative direction if the value is a
HWCONFIG )
negative number.
If the rising edge trigger of X0.1 is the condition for
Z phase input, the counting will be performed once
whenever the rising-edge trigger of X0.1 occurs.
0 or
Mode 1 Outputs the clear number
signal after returning to the of pulses 12 ~ 15
After the zero point in mode 1 is returned to, the
zero point or (bit3=bit2
20ms-width clear signal is output.
(Output clear point is set in number =ON)
HWCONFIG ) of Z
phases
+16 When in the low 16-bit code, bit 4 is ON, it means
DOG point is B point
(bit4=ON) the zero point is ON as DOG point changes from

6-689
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

ON to OFF and the zero point is left as DOG point

changes from OFF to ON.
4. The execution sequence is as follows based on the value of the low 16-bit code in the table above:

The DOG signal is determined by the value of bit4  Mode 0 or mode 1 for the zero point return is selected

according to the value of bit3.  The operation of the zero point return is performed according to the values of bit 1

and bit 0  The operation of signal clear specifief by bit2 is performed.

5. Please set the input point and the rising edge trigger condition in HWCONFIG, when the position control system

needs the positive and negative limit input points. Note that the limit input points must not be the same as the zero

point and Z phase input points.

6. The Completion flag will be set to ON after the instruction finishes performing the specified function. For example,

selecting the function of code 6, PLC will set the Completion flag to ON only when the Z phase seeking is

completed.

7. After DZRN instruction is enabled, the interrupt service program will not be executed till DZRN instruction is

disabled if the specified input point for zero point is the same as that for the external input interrupt in the program.

8. When the limit switch is started by HWCONFIG and the external input interrupt service program exists, the interrupt

program will be executed together.

9. Steps for performing the functions:

Function code 0:
_6
 The DZRN function is enabled and the search for the zero point is toward the negative direction with the target

frequency.

 After the DOG signal is received, the output frequency will decrease into JOG frequency. The output will

continue toward the negative direction and will not stop till the zero point signal changes from ON to OFF.

 The output will stop when the signal changes from ON to OFF after DOG signal is left.

Negative direction

Completion flag ON

DOG signal ON

Frequen cy

Target frequency

JOG frequency
Time
1 2 3

6-690
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Function code 1:

 The DZRN function is enabled and the search for the zero point is toward the negative direction with the target

frequency.

 After the DOG signal is received, the output is toward the positive direction with the JOG frequency after the

output frequency is decreased and the motion direction is reversed. The output will not stop till the zero point

signal changes from ON to OFF.

 DOG signal is left and PLC will stop when the signal changes from ON to OFF.

P ositive
Negative direction direction

Completion flag ON

DOG signal ON
F requency

Target frequency

JOG frequency
Time
1 2 3 4
6_
Function code 2:

 The DZRN function is enabled and the search for the zero point is toward the negative direction with the target

frequency.

After DOG signal is received, the output will decrease the frequency to JOG frequency and will continue toward

the negative direction.

 When DOG signal is left and the signal changes from ON to OFF, the number of pulses specified will be output.

 The first pulse output starts.

 When the 100th pulse output is completed, PLC will stop and the Completion flag will be ON.

6-691
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Completion flag ON

DOG signal ON

Output Y

Frequency

Target frequency

JOG frequency
Time

1 2 3 4 5

Function code 3:

 DZRN function is enabled and the search for the zero point is toward the negative direction with the target

frequency.

 After the DOG signal is received, the output frequency will decrease to JOG frequency and the motion will

continue toward the negative direction.

 The motion will go on according to the number of Z phases when the signal changes from ON to OFF after DOG

signal is left.

 The first Z phase pulse

_6  The motion will stop after the 2

nd
Z phase is completed and the Completion flag will be ON.

Completion flag ON

DOG signal ON

Z phase pulse

Frequency

Target frequency

JOG frequency
Time

1 2 3 4 5

Function code 4:

 DZRN function is enabled and the search for the zero point is toward the negative direction with the target

frequency.

 After the DOG signal is received, the output frequency will decrease to JOG frequency and will continue toward

the negative direction. The output will not stop till the zero point signal changes from ON to OFF.

6-692
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

 After DOG signal is left, the output will stop when the signal changes from ON to OFF and the clear signal will be

ON for about 20 milliseconds.

Negative direction

Completion flag ON

Clear signal ON

DOG signal ON
Frequency

Target frequency

JOG frequency
Time
1 2 3

Function code 0+ the negative limit function enabling:

The negative limit input point is set in HWCONFIG and then the setting is downloaded to PLC. (PLC will

automatically judge the negative limit function when the instruction is enabled.)

 DZRN function is enabled and the search for the zero point is toward the negative direction with the target

frequency.

 After the negative limit switch is ON, the motion will stop and then will go toward the positive direction after the

direction is reversed.

6_
 The motion will continue to go toward the positive direction after leaving the negative limit switch.

 The output frequency will ramp down after DOG signal is received. The reverse output will be performed with the
JOG frequency after the direction is reversed.

 The output will stop when the signal changes from ON to OFF after the DOG signal is left.

Positive Negative
Negative direction direction direction

Completion flag ON

DOG signal

Negative limit switch ON

Frequency

Target frequency

JOG frequency
Time

1 2 3 4 5

6-693
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example 1:

When M0 is ON, the zero return is started by outputting the pulse from Y0.0 with the frequency of 20kHz.

When DOG signal is received and X0.4 is ON, Y0.0 outputs the pulse with the JOG frequency of 1kHz. And the output will

not stop till X0.4 changes from ON to OFF.

Example 2:

When M0 is ON, the zero return is performed by outputting the pulse from Y0.0 with the frequency of 20kHz.

When DOG signal is received and X0.4 is ON, PLC decreases the frequency to the JOG frequency of 1kHz and the

output is conducted with the JOG frequency of 1kHz. When X0.4 is OFF, PLC starts to seek the Z phase pulse. When

X0.5 receives two pulses, PLC stops and Y1.4 outputs a 20ms-width pulse.

_6

Explanation:

1. If the rising-edge trigger at X0.5 is specified as the condition for Z phase input in HWCONFIG, the counting will be

performed once whenever the rising-edge trigger at X0.5 occurs.

2. Y1.4 is specified as the output point for outputting the clear signal in HWCONFIG.

3. S3 is set as 16#00020007. The value of the high 16-bit code, 02 means to search Z phase twice. The value of the
low 16-bit code, 07 means to output the clear signal (20ms wide) after the Z phase is found.

6-694
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction Operand Description

2705 D PLSV S，D1，D2 Adjustable pulse output

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S      
D1 
D2  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S ： Pulse output frequency

D1 ： Pulse output device

D2 ： Pulse direction output device

6_
Explanation:

1. S1 specifies the pulse output frequency. The range is -4MHz ~ +4MkHz for the line driver output models and
-200kHz ~ +200kHz for the open collector output models. The minus sign and plus sign indicate the positive

direction and negative direction. The pulse output frequency can be changed during the pulse output. But if the new

frequency is different from the previous frequency in direction, the instruction will stop the output and one cycle later

it will output the target frequency again.

2. Refer to the following table for selection of pulse output devices for D1 and D2. When the output mode for D1 and

D2 is not the default “Pulse+direction” output (0 is the default value), please modify the mode by setting SR to 1.
And the mode is changed into A/B phase output.

Axis number Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6

Output point for D1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10

Direction output point

Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11
for D2

6-695
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Output mode SR462 SR482 SR502 SR522 SR542 SR562

Busy flag SM460 SM480 SM500 SM520 SM540 SM560

SR460 SR480 SR500 SR520 SR540 SR560

Output present

register SR461 SR481 SR501 SR521 SR541 SR561

3. The output point for the pulse direction output device D2 will be affected by the scan cycle if it is not the output point
which is recommended to use.

4. The pulse direction output device D2 will change its own state according to the minus sign and plus sign of S. D2 is

OFF if S is plus (+) and D2 is ON if S is minus (-).

5. There is no ramp-up/down setting in the instruction. Thus the ramp-up operation at the beginning and ramp-down

stop operation can not be performed. If the function of ramp-up/down must be achieved, please use API 0703

DRAMP instrunction for increasing and decreasing of the pulse output frequency.

6. While the instruction is executing the pulse output, the output will immediately stop if the drive condition changes

to OFF.

Example:

When M10 is ON, Y0.0 outputs the pulse with the frequency of 20kHz. Y0.1 = OFF means the positive direction for the

pulse output.
_6

6-696
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction Operand Description

2706 D DRVI S1，S2， D1，D2 Relative Position control

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
D1 
D2  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1  
S2  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:
Number of output pulses
S1 ：
(Relative positioning)
S2 ： Pulse output frequency

D1 ： Pulse output device

6_
D2 ： Pulse direction output device

Explanation:

1. S1 is the number of output pulses (Relative positioning). The available range is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 of
which the “+/-”signs indicate the positive and negative directions.

2. S2 is the pulse output frequency. Available range: 1Hz ~ +200k Hz for open collector output models and1Hz ~ +4Mk
Hz for line driver output models.

3. Refer to the following table for selection of pulse output devices for D1 and D2. When the output mode for D1 and D2
is not the default “Pulse+direction” output (0 is the default value), please modify the mode by setting SR to 1. And

the mode is changed into A/B phase output.

Axis number Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6

Output point for D1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10

Direction output point for D2 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11

Output mode SR462 SR482 SR502 SR522 SR542 SR562

6-697
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

DDRVI and DDRVA support the output devices for D1 which can be the odd points as shown in the following table.
Only the “Pulse+direction” output mode is supported. The input points Y0.0, Y0.2…Y0.10 are not recommended to

use as the high-speed output points.

Axis number Axis 7 Axis 8 Axis 9 Axis 10 Axis 11 Axis 12

Output point for D1 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11

Direction output point for D2 Y1.0 or above or any M deivice (Bool)

4. If the pulse direction output device for D2 is not the output point recommended in the table above, the output will be
affected by the scan time.

5. When D2 uses the output mode “pulse+direction” and S1 has the minus sign, D2 is ON. When S1 has the plus sign,

D2 is OFF. D2 will not be OFF immediately after the pulse output in the negative direction is completed. D2 is
switched to OFF when the contact for the execution of the instruction is OFF.

6. For the instruction execution, the parameters such as the start/end frequency and ramp-up/down time need be

used. For SM/SR which axes correspond to, refer to the following table.

When D1 selects the even output point as the output device

Output point for D1 Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10

_6
Busy flag SM460 SM480 SM500 SM520 SM540 SM560

Completion flag SM461 SM481 SM501 SM521 SM541 SM561

Reversing the output

SM462 SM482 SM502 SM522 SM542 SM562
direction

Stop flag SM463 SM483 SM503 SM523 SM543 SM563

Enabling S curve
SM468 SM488 SM508 SM528 SM548 SM568
ramp-up/down

Enabling fixed slope

SM469 SM489 SM509 SM529 SM549 SM569
ramp-up/down

Output completion
SM470 SM490 SM510 SM530 SM550 SM570
auto-reset

Executing an interrupt

program when pulse SM471 SM491 SM511 SM531 SM551 SM571

output ends

Corresponding
I500 I501 I502 I503 I504 I505
interrupt I number

6-698
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

The output

immediately stops
SM476 SM496 SM516 SM536 SM556 SM576
when the instruction is

disabled or stops

Present output SR460 SR480 SR500 SR520 SR540 SR560

position SR461 SR481 SR501 SR521 SR541 SR561

Start/end
SR463 SR483 SR503 SR523 SR543 SR563
frequency(Hz）

Ramp-up time（ms） SR464 SR484 SR504 SR524 SR544 SR564

Ramp-down time（ms） SR465 SR485 SR505 SR525 SR545 SR565

Target frequency of SR472 SR492 SR512 SR532 SR552 SR572

the fixed slope SR473 SR493 SR513 SR533 SR553 SR573

S curve mode SR604 SR605 SR606 SR607 SR608 SR609

Present output SR610 SR612 SR614 SR616 SR618 SR620

frequency SR611 SR613 SR615 SR617 SR619 SR621

When D1 selects the odd output point as the output device

Output point for D1 Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11

Busy flag SM472 SM492 SM512 SM532 SM552 SM572

6_
Completion flag SM473 SM493 SM513 SM533 SM553 SM573

Output stop flag SM474 SM494 SM514 SM534 SM554 SM574

Output completion
SM475 SM495 SM515 SM535 SM555 SM575
auto-reset

The output

immediately stops
SM477 SM497 SM517 SM537 SM557 SM577
when the instruction is

disabled or stops

Present output SR474 SR494 SR514 SR534 SR554 SR574

position SR475 SR495 SR515 SR535 SR555 SR575

Start/end
SR476 SR496 SR516 SR536 SR556 SR576
frequency(Hz）

Ramp-up/down time
SR477 SR497 SR517 SR537 SR557 SR577
（ms）

6-699
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

The flags such as S curve ramp-up/down, fixed slope ramp-up/down and executing an interrupt program when

pulse output ends are not supported by the odd output points.

If the output is ongoing, the preset output is the ramp-down stop when the instruction is disabled or stops

temporarily. If the output has to be stopped immediately, users should set the immediately stop flag to ON.

7. Refer to the following table for Attribute, Factory default and Latched of SM/SR that axes correspond to.

Factory
Item Attribute StopRun RunStop Power ON Latched
default

Busy flag R OFF OFF OFF OFF N

Completion flag R/W OFF OFF OFF OFF N

Stop flag R/W OFF OFF OFF OFF N

Output completion N
R/W OFF OFF OFF OFF
auto-reset

Enabling S curve N
R/W OFF OFF OFF OFF
ramp-up/down

Enabling fixed slope N

R/W OFF OFF OFF OFF
ramp-up/down

Executing an interrupt N

_6 program when pulse R/W OFF OFF OFF OFF

output ends

The output N

immediately stops
R/W OFF OFF OFF OFF
when the instruction is

disabled or stops

Present output
R / Wd No change No change No change 0 Y
position

Start/end Y
R / Wd No change No change No change 200
frequency(Hz）

Ramp-up time（ms） R / Wd No change No change No change 200 Y

Ramp-down time（ms） R / Wd No change No change No change 200 Y

Target frequency of R / Wd Y
No change No change No change 0
the fixed slope

S curve mode R / Wd No change No change 0 0 N

6-700
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Present output
R 0 0 0 0 N
frequency

Note: R mean the device is readable. W means the device is writable. Wd means the device is writable any time

execpt when the high-speed output is performed.

8. After the function of output completion auto-reset is enabled, the flag will be reset to OFF automatically when the

output is completed. Thus the flag need be set to ON again if the auto-reset function is needed for the next output

operation. It is suggested that the rising-edge or falling-edge should be used to trigger the flag every time. The

function is usually used in the case that the output instruction DDRVI can not be scanned and executed by PLC

program after DDRVI is enabled. For example, the instruction is enabled in the interrupt program.

9. If the Completion flag is used for setting the I interrupt function, the flag will automatically be reset to OFF when the

output is completed and the interrupt program is entered. Thus the flag need be set to ON again for the next output

in which the interrupt occurs. It is suggested that the rising-edge or falling-edge should be used the trigger the flag

every time.

Example 1:

When M10 is ON, Y0.0 outputs 20,000 pulses with the frequency of 2kHz (Relative positioning). Y0.1 = OFF means the

positive direction.

6_

Additional remark:

1. Explanation of relative positioning: specify the travel distance from current position with the “+/-” signs.

F requency

+ 3, 000 pulse
Target frequency

S tart/end frequency

Current position

-3, 000 pulse

6-701
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

2. Setting ramp up/down and the items for relative positioning

a) Y0.0 output curve diagram

F requency
Number of
S1:: output pulses

Slope ramp-up
S2
S tart/end frequency
SR463
Time

Ramp-up time Ramp-down time

SR464 SR465
b) Several DRVI instructions can be edited using the same output point in the user program. Only one
instruction can be started whenever the PLC program is executed. For example, when one instruction is

used to start Y0.0 for output, then other instructions which also use Y0.0 for output will not be executed. The

instruction which starts the output point first will use the point first.

c) After the instruction is enabled, the modification of other all parameters will not be accepted till the
instruction is disabled.

3. The ramp-up and ramp-down for fixed slopes

a) Y0.0 output curve diagram

_6 F requency

Fixed slope
Target frequency

Target frequency

Original slope

S tart/end frequency
Time

Ramp-up time Ramp-down time

b) Start the fixed slope flag SM469 and write the target frequency of the fixed slope into SR472.

c) The new slope will take the place of the orginal slope and the positioning will be performed by DDRVI as the
figure above shows.

d) The general slope is determined by the start/end frequency, target frequency and ramp up/down time.

The fixed slope is determined by the start/end frequency, target frequency of the fixed slope and ramp

up/down time.

6-702
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

e) When the target frequency of the fixed slope is less than the target frequency, the fixed slope function will not
be started.

4. The stop flag and immediately stop flag

a) The output diagram based on example 1

Ramp-down stop Immediately stop

b) Ramp-down stop
 When M10 is ON, DDRVI instruction is enabled and starts to output pulses. And SM460, the Busy flag is

ON.

 When the instruction is disabled (M10 is OFF) or the stop flag SM463 is ON, the state of the immediately 6_
stop flag SM476 will be confirmed.

 If the immediately stop flag SM476 is OFF, the output will ramp down till stop and then SM460 the Busy

flag is OFF.

 If M10 is not OFF and the stop flag SM463 is not ON after the instruction is enabled, Y0.0 will stop the

output after outputting 20,000 pulses.

c) Immediately stop
 If the instruction is disabled (M10 is OFF) or the stop flag SM463 is ON, the state of the immediately stop

flag SM476 will be confirmed.

 If the immediately stop flag SM476 is ON, the output will stop immediately and SM460 the Busy flag will

be OFF.

5. Hardware limit function

6-703
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

a) The output curve diagram of axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1)

Positive limit function Negative limit function

b) Operation of the positive limit

 Positive limit input point X0.6 is set in HWCONFIG and then the setting is downloaded to PLC. When

SM464 is set to ON, it means that the positive limit function is started.

 DDRVI outputs 20,000 pulses in the positive direction. (Note: the instruction will not output in the positive
direction if the positive limit point is ON when the function is started)

 When the limit input point X0.6 is triggered by the external mechanism and is ON, it indicates that the

condition for the hardware positive limit function is met.

_6  DDRVI instruction will stop the output immediately and the positive limit alarm SM465 is ON.

 If the condition for the hardware limit function is not met, Y0.0 will stop the output after outputting 20,000

pulses.

c) Operation of the negative limit

 Negative limit input point X0.7 is set in HWCONFIG and then the setting is downloaded to PLC. When

SM466 is set to ON, it means that the negative limit function is started.

 DDRVI outputs 20,000 pulses in the negative direction. (Note: the instruction will not output in the
negative direction if the negative limit point is ON when the function is started)

 When the limit input point X0.7 is triggered by the external mechanism and is ON, it indicates that the

condition for the hardware negative limit function is met.

 DDRVI instruction will stop the output immediately and the negative limit alarm SM467 is ON.

 If the condition for the hardware limit function is not met, Y0.0 will stop the output after outputting -20,000

pulses.

6-704
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

d) SM flags related to the limit function

Axis number Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6

Enabling the hardware SM464 SM486 SM506 SM526 SM546 SM566

positive limit

Positive limit alarm SM465 SM487 SM507 SM527 SM547 SM567

flag

Enabling the hardware SM466 SM488 SM508 SM528 SM548 SM568

negative limit

Negative limit alarm SM467 SM489 SM509 SM529 SM549 SM569

flag

Note: The limit point alarm flag is an only-read flag and is set or reset automatically by PLC according to the state

of the start flag.

6. Software limit function

a) The output curve diagram of axis 1 (Y0.0/Y0.1)

Positive limit function Negative limit function

6_

b) Operation of the positive limit

 Positive software limit position is set in HWCONFIG (by taking SR580=11,000 for example). After the setting

is downloaded to PLC, it means the positive limit function is started.

 DDRVI starts to output 20,000 pulses in the positive direction. (Note: the instruction will not output in the
positive direction if the positive limit is exceeded when the function is started)

 When the current position SR460 > the limit position SR580, it means that the condition for the software limit

function is met.

6-705
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

 DDRVI instruction will stop the output immediately and the positive limit alarm SM465 is ON.

 If the condition for the limit function is not met,

Y0.0 will stop the output after outputting 20,000
pulses.

a) Operation of the negative limit

 Negative software limit position is set in HWCONFIG (by taking SR582=-11,000 for example). After the setting

is downloaded to PLC, it means the negative limit function is started.

 DDRVI starts to output 20,000 pulses in the negative direction. (Note: the instruction will not output in the
negative direction if the negative limit is exceeded when the function is started)

 When the current position SR460 < the limit position SR582, it means that the condition for the software

negative limit function is met.

_6  DDRVI instruction will stop the output immediately and the negative limit alarm SM467 is ON.

 If the condition for the software limit function is not met, Y0.0 will stop the output after outputting -20,000

pulses.

b) SR related to the limit function

Axis number Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6

Positive software limit SR580 SR584 SR588 SR592 SR596 SR600

position SR581 SR585 SR589 SR593 SR597 SR601

Negative software limit SR582 SR586 SR590 SR594 SR598 SR602

position SR583 SR587 SR591 SR595 SR599 SR603

Positive output limit: The output will stop immediately if the current position is greater than the positive limit

position.

Negative output limit: The output will stop immediately if the current position is less than the negative limit

position.

When the positive and negative limits are both 0, the software limit function can not be started. Since the

6-706
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

software limit function will check the output position when the output instruction is scanned, the stop of the

output will be affected by the PLC scan. To quickly stop the output in real time, please use the external input

point as the limit point.

7. ST Example:

Explanation

1. When M0 is ON, Y0.0 outputs 1000 pulses with the frequency of 1kHz.

2. When the pulse output is completed, SM461 is ON and meanwhile SM470=ON is triggered.

3. The pulse output will restart when M0 changes from OFF to ON again.

6_

6-707
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2707 D DRVA S1，S2， D1，D2 Absolute position control

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
D1 
D2  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1  
S2  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:
Number of output pulses
S1 ：
(Absolute positioning)
S2 ： Pulse output frequency

_6 D1 ： Pulse output device

D2 ： Pulse direction output device

Explanation:

1. S1 is the number of output pulses (Relative positioning). The available range is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647
among which the “+/-”signs indicate the positive and negative directions.

2. S2 is the pulse output frequency. Available range: 1Hz ~ +200k Hz for open collector output models and1Hz ~ +4Mk
Hz for line driver output models.

3. The absolute positioning is that the pulse output is conducted from current position till the specified target position is
reached. For example, the number of output pulses at current position is 100 and the number of pulses at the target

position S1 is set to 1000. So the number of the actual output pulses is 1000-100=900.

4. Refer to DDRVI instruction for relevant explanation.

6-708
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Example:

If the value of the present output position SR460 (32-bit) is 100 and M10 is ON, by means of DDRVA instruction, Y0.0 will

output pulses with the frequency of 2kHz till the value in SR460 becomes 20,000 (Absolute positioning). Y0.1 = OFF

means the positive direction.

Additional remark:

1. Absolute positioning: the way of specifying the distance from the center (zero point).

F requency

+ 3, 000 pulse
Target frequency

S tart/end frequency
6_
Zero point

0 pulse

6-709
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2708 CSFO S1，S2， S3，D Catch speed and proportional output

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
S3 
S4 
S5 
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1 
S2  
S3  
S4 
S5 
D1 
D2  

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

_6 － AS -

Symbol:

S1 ： Signal input device

S2 ： Number of input pulses

S3 ： Pulse input frequency

Setting the denominator (output frequency)
S4 ： of the proportion of the input frequency and
output frequency

S5 ： Setting the numerator (input frequency) of

the proportion of the input frequency and
output frequency
D1 ： Pulse output device

D2 ： Pulse output frequency

Explanation:

1. S1 can only specify X0.0, X0.2, X0.4, X0.6, X0.8 and X0.10 as the input points and occupies two consecutive points
for input. The instruction can not be executed if the input points are not among the points specified above. After the

6-710
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

input points are selected, the high-speed counter will be specified automatically. If there is a DCNT instruction with

the same high-speed counter in the program, PLC will first execute the instruction which starts the counter first. The

input points and corresponding high-speed counters are shown in the following table.

Group number 1 2 3 4 5 6

S1+0 input point

X0.0 X0.2 X0.4 X0.6 X0.8 X0.10
（Phase A）

S1+1 input point

X0.1 X0.3 X0.5 X0.7 X0.9 X0.11
（Phase B）

High-speed counter
HC202 HC206 HC210 HC214 HC218 HC222
number

Flag of reversing
SM270 SM271 SM272 SM273 SM274 SM275
input direction

2. If the high-speed counters for the instruction can only use the phase A/B input mode, please set the flag of

reversing the input direction to ON when MPG is connected but has not rotated yet and the input point of PLC is

ON.

3. S2 is the number of input pulses. Please use the 32-bit variable to declare the parameter.

4. S3 is the frequency of input pulses. Please use the 32-bit variable to declare the parameter with the unit of 1Hz.

5. S4 is the denominator (output frequency) of the proportion of the input frequency and output frequency. S5 is the
6_
numerator (input frequency) of the proportion of the input frequency and output frequency. The range of S4 and S5 is
1~255. If the setting value exceeds the range, the instruction will take the maximum or minimum value for

calculation automatically. For example, if input frequency: output frequency= 5:3, the denominator output frequency

is K3 and the numerator input frequency is K5. If the input frequency: output frequency=1:2, the denominator output

frequency is K2 and the numerator input frequency is K1.

6. D1 can only specify Y0.0, Y0.2, Y0.4, Y0.6, Y0.8 and Y0.10 as the output points and occupies two consecutive
points for output.

The output points and corresponding output mode SR are shown in the following table.

Output axis number 1 2 3 4 5 6

D1+0 output point Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10

D1+1 output point Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11

Output mode SR462 SR482 SR502 SR522 SR542 SR562

6 - 7 11
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

7. D2 is the frequency of output pulses. Please use the 32-bit variable to declare the parameter with the unit of 1Hz.

8. There is no limit to how many times the instruction is used. But its high-speed input and output points can not be

used by other instructions whenever the instruction is enabled. Otherwise, the instruction can not be executed.

Note:

1. The input pulse frequency is calculated on the base of the input pulse width (ON) in the positive half cycle. If pulse

width for ON: pulse width for OFF is not 1:1, PLC takes the ON width as the standard for conversion by default.

2. The input pulse=ON means the input point LED is on. Please notice whether the input point LED is OFF and whether

the flag of reversing the input direction need be activated if the MPG is used but it has not rotated yet.

Example 1：

X0.0/X0.1 input pulses for detection of the MPG. When M0 is ON, the setting values of S4 and S5 are both 1 (D4=1 and

D5=1). When the input frquency is 10Hz (D0, D1=10) and the number of pulses is 10 (D2, D3=10), the output axis

(Y0.0/Y0.1) will output 10 pulses (SR460, SR461=10) with the frequency of 10Hz (D10, D11=10).

_6

Example 2：

When M0 is ON, the setting values of S4 and S5 are 3 and 5 (D4=3, D5=5) respectively. When the input frequency of

MPG is 100Hz (D0, D1=100) and the number of pulses is 100 (D2, D3=100), the output axis (Y0.0/Y0.1) will output 60

pulses (SR460, SR461=60) with the frequency of 60Hz (D10, D11=60).

6-712
Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

6_

6-713
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2709 D DRVM S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，S6，D1，D2 Mark alignment positioning

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3  
S4    
S5    
S6    
D1 
D2  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1  
S2  
S3 
S4  
S5  
S6  
D1 
D2 

_6 Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Target number of output pulses

S2 ： Target output frequency

S3 ： Input point number for receiving the external interrupt signal

The number of output pulses at the end of the forepart mask
S4 ：
section
The number of output pulses at the beginning of the rear mask
S5 ：
section
The number of output pulses in the ramp-down process after the
S6 ：
interrupt signal is received
D1 ： Pulse output device

D2 ： Direction pulse output device

Explanation:

1. When the value of S1 is 0, it indicates the output is a maximum 32-bit value (with a sign) and the output will not
perform the ramp-down stop till the mark signal is received.

6-714
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

If the value of S1 is not 0 and the external interrupt does not occur, the output pulses of the target number are output.

The range of S1 is -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647 of which the “+/-” sign means the positive/negative direction.

2. When the value of S2 is less than or equal to 0, the output is not enabled. If the output frequency is greater than the
maximum frequency, PLC will take the maximum frequency for output.

3. S3 can specifiy M or X device as the input point. The input source signal will be affected by the scan cycle if the
selected input point is not the one among X0.0~X0.15 in PLC .

4. The instruction must be used by combination of the input point number and external interrupt program so as to

achieve the real-time ramp-down output. For the operation of rising-edge or falling-edge trigger for the external

interrupt, please make the selection of them during the editing of the external interrupt program.

A. Using the external interrupt (I0xx, I1xx): when the external interrupt occurs, the ramp-down stop is performed

after the mark signal is received. No operation is performed if the external interrupt is not enabled.

B. Without using the external interrupt (I0xx, I1xx): When the instruction is executed, the ramp-down stop will be

performed after the mark signal is received if the rising edge occurs at X point and it will be affected by the scan

time.

5. The number of output pulses in the forepart mask section is between 1 and S4. When the setting value for S4 is 0, it
means not to enable the forepart-section mask function. When the number of pulses to be masked exceeds the

value of S1, the instruction will take the target number of output pulses S1 as the condition for the number to be
masked. If the external input trigger occurs within the number of output pulses to be masked, the external input
6_
interrupt will be invalid automatically.

6. The number of output pulses in the rear mask section is between S5 and S1. When S5 =0 or S5 >=S1, it means that
the rear mask section function is not enabled. When the external input trigger occurs in the mask sections, the

external input interrupt will be invalid automatically. When S4 >S5, it indicates the external input interrupt is invalid in
the output process.

7. If the forepart and rear mask sections are both set and S4 < S5, it means the valid input interrupt occurs in the section

between S4+1 and S5-1.

8. If S6 is set to 0 after the mark signal is received, it means that the ramp-down stop should be performed based on

the ramp-down time. If S6 =-1 or < 0 after the mark signal is received, it means that the output will immediately stop.

If the setting value of S6 is not enough to achieve the ramp-down stop within the ramp-down time, the instruction will

limit the target frquency and perform the ramp-down stop in accordance with the set ramp-down time. If S6 is greater
than the number of pulses output within the ramp-down time, the instruction will output the number of the redundant

pulses with the output frequency of when the interrupt is triggered and then perform the ramp-down process.

9. If the output has entered the ramp-down process when the external input interrupt trigger occurs, the instruction will

complete the output of the number of pulses specified by S6.

6-715
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

10. See the following timing diagram about the output, interrupt trigger, mask and relavant flags.(For the completion flag,

refer to the Completion flag SM of axes in DDRVI instruction.)

EN
S4 S5

S3

finish flag
S2

D1
Time
0
Pulse No.
S6
S1

11. The target frequency S2 of the instuction can be modified in the process of the pulse output.Since the number of
output pulses in the ramp-down section has been set when the instruction is enabled, the timing diagram for

changing the frequency is shown as the following dot line.

_6 S3

Change S2

S2
D1
Time
Pulse No.
S6

12. Refer to DDRVI instruction for the selection of pulse output devices for D1 and D2. If the output points are not the
recommended ones, the direction output D2 will be affected by the scan cycle.

6-716
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Example 1：

X0.4 external interrupt program

Note:

1. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, Y0.0 starts to output the pulses. After more than 30,000 pulses are output, the
external interrupt is detected on X0.4. The value in D0 will increase by 1 and the pulse output stops after 20,000

pulses are output (S6:20,000). If the interrupt does not occur, the output will not stop till 100,000 pulses are output. 6_
2. If the number of output pulses is between 1~30,000, it belongs to the forepart mask section. The external interrupt
occurs at X0.4 at the moment and the instruction will not perform the operation of the ramp-down stop.

3. If the number of output pulses is between 70,000~100,000, it belongs to the rear mask section. The external
interrupt occurs at X0.4 at the moment and the instruction will still not perform the operation of the ramp-down stop.

4. When the pulse output is completed, SM461 is ON and M0 is reset.

Additional remark:

1. The alignment mark function and mask function:

 When DDRVM is enabled, the pulse output starts.

 When the interrupt occurs for the mark alignment, the ramp-down process is performed and the output stops

after the output of the number of the pulses specified by S6 is completed.

 When the interrupt for the mark alignment does not occur or takes no effect, DDRVM stops outputting the pulses

after outputting the target number of pulses specified by S1.

6-717
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

S4: The number of output pulses in the forepart mask section. If the interrupt occurs in the section, the interrupt will
be ineffective for the mark alignment.

S5: The number of output pulses in the rear mask section. If the interrupt occurs in the section, the interrupt will be
ineffective for the mark alignment.

S2: The target output frequency

2. The mark alignment function is enabled in the ramp-up and target frequency and ramp-down sections.
_6
When the mark alignment function is not enabled:

The output will stop after 100,000 pulses are output when the mark alignment function is not enabled.

Case 1 of when the mark alignment occurs in the ramp-up section

The operation of the mark alignment is performed when the number of pulses is 3000. The target frequency of 10kHZ can

not be reached if S6 is 15,000.

6-718
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Case 2 of when the mark alignment occurs in the ramp-up section

The operation of the mark alignment is performed when the number of pulses is 6000. The target frequency of 10kHZ can
be reached if S6 is 15,000.

When the mark alignment occurs in the target frequency section

The operation of the mark alignment is performed when the number of pulses is 50,000.
6_

6-719
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Case 1 of when the mark alignment occurs in the ramp-down section

The operation of the mark alignment is performed when the number of pulses is 95,000.

Case 2 of when the mark alignment occurs in the ramp-down section

The operation of the mark alignment is performed when the number of pulses is 95,000. After the mark alignment, the
number of output pulses for S6 is -1. (The output stops immediately.)

_6

6-720
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction Operand Description

2-Axis relative-coordinate
2710 D PPMR S1，S2，S3， D1，D2
point-to-point synchronized motion

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1  
S2  
S3  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:
Number of output pulses of X
S1 ：
axis 6_
Number of output pulses of Y
S2 ：
axis
Maximum point-to-point output
S3 ：
frequency
D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1 and S2 specify the number of output pulses (relative positioning) of X axis and Y axis. Range: -2,147,483,648 ~
+2,147,483,647 (The “+/-” sign indicates the positive/negative direction).

2. S3 specifies the maximum point to point output frequency. Range: 1Hz ~ +200k Hz.

3. D1 and D2 are the output devices for X axis and Y axis respectively. Users can designate the following 6 axes for
output but the fixed direction output points can not be changed. The direction signal: OFF means the positive

direction and ON is the negative direction. If the preset “Pulse+direction” output mode is not used (default: 0),

change the output mode by setting SR to 1.

6-721
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Axis number Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6

Output points for D1

Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10
and D2

Fixed direction output

Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11
point

Output mode SR462 SR482 SR502 SR522 SR542 SR562

4. PLC will assign the value of S3 to X axis or Y axis which output the largest number of pulses. But if the numbers of
pulses which the two axes output are excessively different so that no proper output frequency can be calculated

through the numbers of their output pulses, PLC will automatically decrease the maximum point to point frequency

and no alarm information will appear.

5. The parameters such as the start/end frequency and ramp-up/down time of axes are used in the execution of the

instruction. Instead of the originally configured parameters of axes, the X axis parameters are taken as the reference

source. For example, When X axis selects axis1 and Y axis selects axis 3 for the output, axis 1 parameters will be

taken as the parameter sources for the start frequency and ramp up/down time.

6. See the flags of axes and corresponding SM/SR in the following table.

Axis number Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6

Busy flag SM460 SM480 SM500 SM520 SM540 SM560

Completion flag SM461 SM481 SM501 SM521 SM541 SM561

_6
Present output SR460 SR480 SR500 SR520 SR540 SR560

position SR461 SR481 SR501 SR521 SR541 SR561

Start/end frequency SR463 SR483 SR503 SR523 SR543 SR563

Ramp-up time SR464 SR484 SR504 SR524 SR544 SR564

Ramp-down time SR465 SR485 SR505 SR525 SR545 SR565

7. The instruction has no limit to how many times it is used. But when the instruction is enabled, the instruction can not

execute the output till Y axis completes the output and is released if Y axis output is being used.

8. When the 2-axis synchronized pulse output is completed, the corresponding Completion flags of the two axes will be

set. Since the same timing for the completion of the 2-axis synchronized pulse output can not be ensured every time,

the execution of the next user program should go on after the corresponding Completion flags of the two axes are

judged simultaneously.

6-722
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Example:

1. Draw a rhombus as below.

Y軸

(0,0)
X軸

(-27000,-27000) (27000,-27000)

(0,-55000)
2. Steps:

 Set the coordinates of four points (0, 0), (-27000, -27000), (0, -55000), (27000, -27000) (as the figure
above). Calculate the relative coordinates of the four points and obtain (-27000, -27000),

(27000, -28000), (27000, 28000), and (-27000, 27000). Place them in the 32-bit registers (D200, D202), (D204,

D206), (D208, D210), (D212, D214).

 RUN the PLC. Set M0 to ON to start the 2-axis line drawing.

6_

6-723
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6
3. Operation:

When PLC runs and M0 is ON, PLC will start the first point-to-point motion with the frequency of 100KHz. D0 will increase
by 1 whenever a point-to-point motion is completed and the second point-to-point motion will

start to execute automatically. The operation pattern repeats until the fourth point-to-point

motion is completed.

6-724
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction Operand Description

2-Axis absolute-coordinate
2711 D PPMA S1，S2，S3， D1，D2
point-to-point synchronized motion

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1  
S2  
S3  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:
Number of output pulses of X
S1 ：
axis
S2 ：
Number of output pulses of Y 6_
axis
Maximum point-to-point output
S3 ：
frequency
D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1 and S2 specify the number of output pulses (absolute positioning) of X axis and Y axis.

2. For relevant explanation, refer to DPPMR instruction.

Example:

1. Draw a rhombus as the figure below.

6-725
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

A xis Y

(0,0)
Axis X

(-27,000, -27,000) (27,000, -27,000)

(0, -55,000)

2. Steps:

 Set the four coordinates (-27000, -27000), (0, -55000), (27000, -27000) and (0, 0) (as the
figure above). Place them in the 32-bit registers (D200, D202), (D204, D206), (D208, D210),

(D212, D214).

 RUN the PLC. Set M0 to ON to start the 2-axis line drawing.

_6

6-726
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

3. Operation:

When PLC runs and M0 is ON, PLC will start the first point-to-point motion with the frequency of 100KHz. D0 will increase 6_
by 1 whenever a point-to-point motion is completed and the second point-to-point motion will

start to execute automatically. The operation pattern repeats until the fourth point-to-point

motion is completed.

6-727
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2-Axis relative-position clockwise arc
2712 D CICR S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，D1，D2
interpolation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
S4      
S5      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

_6 － － AS

Symbol:
X axis target coordinate (Relative
S1 ：
positioning)
Y axis target coordinate (Relative
S2 ：
positioning)
S3 ： The shift of the center

S4 ： Target reference frequency

S5 ： Function selection

D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1, S2 and S3 respectively designate the X axis target coordinate, Y axis target coordinate (relative position) and the
shift of the center of a circle. Refer to the following clockwise arc operation for details.

2. D1 and D2 are the pulse output devices for X axis and Y axis respectively. Refer to DPPMR instruction for the
selection of output points and output mode of axes.

6-728
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

3. S4 sets the target frequency for reference. The target reference frequency will be used for the prior calculation when
PLC plans the travel path for the arc after the instruction is enabled. But if the estimated calculation process can not

achieve the arc travel path, the output frequency will be decreased automatically so as to fulfill the synchronized arc

drawing function.

4. S5 is the setting value for function selection. When the setting value is 0, the arc resolution takes the 10° arc as the

basic angle for motion. When the setting value is 1, the arc resolution takes the 5° arc as the basic angle for motion.
When the setting value is not 1, 0 will be taken as the setting value for the execution of the instruction.

Operation of drawing the clockwise arc:

1. See the four quadrants (QI, QII, QIII and QIV) of a coordinate system as below. Point A indicates the current

coordinates on X axis and Y axis.

II I
X
A
III IV

2. Point B is the target coordinates specified by S1 and S2. Point O is the center of a circle where point A and point B
are in. 6_
3. S3 is the distance that the center point O shifts by.

4. When the target point B is in QI and QIV of point A, the arc travel paths are performed as the solid lines in the figures

below based on the setting values in S3. (r: radius)

S3 >= 0
O
S3 < 0 B
A
r O
r

A
S3>= 0 S3< 0
5. When the target point B is in QII and QIII of point A, the arc travel paths are shown as the solid lines in the figures

below based the setting values in S3.

6-729
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

S3 < 0
O
S3 >= 0 A B O
r
r

B
S3>= 0 S3< 0
6. When of target point B, X axis coordinate = 0 and Y axis target coordinate >= 0, point B is defined as the point

staying in QI of point A. Whereas, if Y axis target coordinate < 0, point B is defined as the point staying in QIII of

point A.

Example:

1. Draw a DELTA LOGO as the figure below.

_6

2. Steps: the logo can be divided into three parts.

 An ellipse= use DCICR instruction for the relative-position clockwise arc interpolation.

 The absolute coordinates of the ellipse: P1（39930，-9982）, P2（-9982，39930）, P3（73206，123119） and P4

（123119，73206）.

 Taking （39930，-9982） as the start point, the obtained relative coordinates: （-49912，49912）, （83188，83189）,

（49913，-49913） and （-83189，-83188）.

6-730
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

6_

When PLC runs and M1 is ON, PLC will start the drawing of the first segment of the arc. D1 will

increase by 1 whenever a segment of arc is completed and the second segment of the arc will start to

6-731
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

execute automatically. The operation pattern repeats until the fourth segment of arc is completed.

When D1=1, using DCICR, PLC will perform the drawing of the first-segment arc from P1 to P2 with the shift of the

center of the circle: 18825 and arc resolution: 5.

When D1=2, using DCICR, PLC will perform the drawing of the second-segment arc from P2 to P3 with the shift of

the center of the circle: 110295 and arc resolution: 5.

When D1=3, using DCICR, PLC will perform the drawing of the third-segment arc from P3 to P4 with the shift of the

center of the circle: 18825 and arc resolution: 5.

When D1=4, using DCICR, PLC will perform the drawing of the fourth-segment arc from P4 to P1 with the shift of the

center of the circle: 110295 and arc resolution: 5.

 A circle = use DCCMR instruction for the relative-position circle drawing.

 The absolute coordinates of the circle: P5（86213，15435） and P6（103048，37425）. Taking （86213，15435）

as the start point, the relative coordinates of the center of the circle is （16835，21990）.

_6 When PLC runs and M2 is ON, PLC will start to perform the relative-position circle drawing with the target reference

frequency of 20kHz.

 A delta = use DPPMA for the absolute-position 2-axis synchronized motion.

 Absolute coordinates of the delta= start point P7 （-80360，23641）, P8（208552，-23641）and P9（62096，206884）.

6-732
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

When PLC runs and M0 is ON, PLC will start to perform the first segment of 2-axis synchronized motion with the
6_
frequency of 50kHz. D1 will increase by 1 whenever a segment of 2-axis synchronized motion is completed and the

second segment of 2-axis synchronized motion will start to execute automatically. The operation pattern repeats until

the third segment of 2-axis synchronized motion is completed.

When D1=1, PLC will start to draw the line from P7 to P8 with DPPMA.

When D1=2, PLC will start to draw the line from P8 to P9 with DPPMA.

When D1=3, PLC will start to draw the line from P9 to P7 with DPPMA.

6-733
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2-Axis absolute-
2713 D CICA S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，D1，D2 position clockwise arc
interpolation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
S4      
S5      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ －
_6 AS

Symbol:
X axis target coordinate (Absolute
S1 ：
positioning)
Y axis target coordinate (Absolute
S2 ：
positioning)
S3 ： The shift of the center

S4 ： Target reference frequency

S5 ： Function

D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1 and S2 respectively designate the X axis target coordinate, Y axis target coordinate. For relevant
explanation, refer to DCICR instruction.

6-734
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction Operand Description

2-Axis relative-
2714 D CICCR S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，D1，D2 position counterclockwise arc
interpolation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
S4      
S5      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS 6_
Symbol:
X axis target coordinate (Relative
S1 ：
positioning)
Y axis target coordinate (Relative
S2 ：
positioning
S3 ： The shift of the center

S4 ： Target reference frequency

S5 ： Function

D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1, S2 and S3 respectively designate the target coordinate on X axis, target coordinate on Y axis and the shift of the
center of a circle. Refer to the following operation of drawing the counterclockwise arc for details.

2. D1 and D2 are the output devices for X axis and Y axis respectively. Refer to DPPMR instruction for the selection of
output points and output mode of axes.

6-735
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

3. S4 sets the target frequency for reference. The target reference frequency will be used for the prior calculation when
PLC plans the travel path for the arc after the instruction is enabled. But if the estimated calculation process can not

achieve the planned arc travel path, the output frequency will be decreased automatically so as to fulfill the

synchronized arc drawing function.

4. S5 is the setting value for function selection. When the setting value is 0, the arc resolution takes the 10° arc as the

basic angle for motion. When the setting value is 1, the arc resolution takes the 5° arc as the basic angle for motion.
When the setting value is not 1, 0 will be taken as the setting value for the execution of the instruction.

Operation of drawing the counterclockwise arc:

1. See the four quadrants (QI, QII, QIII and QIV) of a coordinate system as below. Point A indicates the current

coordinates on X axis and Y axis.

II I
X
A
III IV

2. Point B is the target coordinates specified by S1 and S2. Point O is the center of a circle where point A and point B
_6 are in.

3. S3 is the distance that the center point O shifts by.

4. When the target point B is in QI and QIV of point A, the arc travel paths are performed as the solid lines in the two

figures below based on the setting values in S3. (r: radius)

S3 < 0
O
S3 >= 0 B
A
r O
r

A
S3>= 0 S3< 0
5. When the target point B is in QII and QIII of point A, the arc travel paths are shown as the solid lines in the figures

below based the setting values in S3.

6-736
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

S3 >= 0
O
S3 < 0 A
B
r O
r

B
S3>= 0 S3< 0
6. When X axis coordinate of target point B = 0 and Y axis coordinate >= 0, point B is defined as the point staying in QI

of point A. Whereas, if Y axis coordinate < 0, point B is defined as the point staying in QIII of point A.

Example:

1. Draw a DELTA LOGO as the figure below.

6_

2. Steps: the logo is divided into three parts.

 An ellipse= use DCICR instruction for the relative-position counterclockwise arc interpolation.

 The absolute coordinates of the ellipse: P1（39930，-9982）, P4（123119，73206）, P3（73206，123119） and P2

（-9982，39930）

 Taking （39930，-9982） as the start point, the obtained relative coordinates: （83189，83188）, （-49913，49913）,

（-83188，-83189） and（49912，-49912）.

6-737
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6

6-738
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

When PLC runs and M1 is ON, PLC will start the drawing of the first segment of clockwise arc with the frequency of

50kHz. D1 will increase by 1 whenever a segment of arc is completed and the second segment of arc will start to

execute automatically. The operation pattern repeats until the fourth segment of arc is completed.

When D1=1, using DCICCR, PLC will perform the drawing of the first-segment arc from P1 to P4 with the shift of the

center of the circle: -110295 and arc resolution: 5.

When D1=2, using DCICCR, PLC will perform the drawing of the second-segment arc from P4 to P3 with the shift of

the center of the circle: -18825 and arc resolution: 5.

When D1=3, using DCICCR, PLC will perform the drawing of the third-segment arc from P3 to P2 with the shift of the

center of the circle: -110295 and arc resolution: 5.

When D1=4, using DCICCR, PLC will perform the drawing of the fourth-segment arc from P2 to P1 with the shift of

the center of the circle: -18825 and arc resolution: 5.

 A circle = use DCCMR instruction for the relative-position circle drawing. Refer to the example in API 2712 DCICR
for detailed operation.

 A delta = use DPPMA for the absolute-position 2-axis synchronized motion. Refer to the example in API 2712
DCICR for detailed operation.

6_

6-739
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2-Axis absolute-
2715 D CICCA S1，S2，S3，S4，S5，D1，D2 position counterclockwise arc
interpolation

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
S4      
S5      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

_6 － － AS

Symbol:
X axis target coordinate (Absolute
S1 ：
positioning)
Y axis target coordinate (Absolute
S2 ：
positioning)
S3 ： The shift of the center

S4 ： Target reference frequency

S5 ： Function

D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1 and S2 respectively designate the target coordinate on X axis, target coordinate on Y axis. For relevant
explanation, refer to DCICCR instruction.

6-740
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

API Instruction Operand Description

2716 D CCMR S1，S2，S3，S4，D1，D2 The relative-position circle drawing

Devie X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
S4      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
type INT

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:
X axis coordinate of the center 6_
S1 ：
(Relative positioning)
Y axis coordinate of the center
S2 ：
(Relative positioning)
S3 ： Function selection

S4 ： Target reference frequency

D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1 and S2 are respectively the X axis coordinate and Y axis coordinate of the center of a circle. (Relative position)

2. S3 is the setting value for function selection. When the setting value is 0, the arc resolution takes a 10° arc as the
basic angle for clockwise motion. When the setting value is 1, the arc resolution takes a 5° arc as the basic angle for

clockwise motion. When the setting value is 2, the arc resolution takes a 10° arc as the basic angle for

counterclockwise motion. When the setting value is 3, the arc resolution takes a 5° arc as the basic angle for
counterclockwise motion.

6-741
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

3. D1 and D2 are the pulse output devices of X axis and Y axis respectively. Refer to DPPMR instruction for the
selection of output points and output mode of axes.

4. S4 sets the target frequency for reference. The target reference frequency will be used for the prior calculation when
PLC plans the travel path for the arc after the instruction is enabled. But if the calculation process which is estimated

can not achieve the planned arc travel path, the output frequency will be decreased automatically so as to fulfill the

synchronized arc drawing function.

When the X axis coordinate of the center point O=0, point O is defined as the point staying in QI of point A if Y axis

target coordinate >= 0. Whereas, if Y axis target coordinate < 0, point B is defined as the one staying in QIII of point

A.

The clockwise circle drawing:

Point A is the present position and point O is the target center, r is the radius of the circle as the figures below.

O O
r

A
_6 Center O in QI and QIV Center O in QII and QIII

The counterclockwise circle drawing:

O O
r

Center O in QI and QIV Center O in QII and QIII

6-742
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Example:

1. Taking (40000, 50000) as the center O and (10000, 10000) as point A, draw a circle as below.

O (4 0000, 50000)
O

A (10000, 10000)
A

2. Steps:

 The obtained relative coordinates of point O: (30000, 40000)

 The coordinates of point A is the present position; SR460=10000 and SR480=10000

 S3=1 and the clockwise circle drawing is performed with a 5° as the basic motion angle.

 When PLC runs and M0 is set to ON, the relative-position circle drawing starts.

6_

3. Operation:

 When PLC runs and M0 is ON, PLC starts to perform the clockwise circle drawing with the frequency of 100kHz.

 When the circle drawing is completed, SM461 and SM481 are ON.

6-743
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2717 D CCMA S1，S2，S3，S4，D1，D2 The absolute-position circle drawing

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1      
S2      
S3      
S4      
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:
_6 X axis coordinate of the center
S1 ：
(Absolute positioning)
Y axis coordinate of the center
S2 ：
(Absolute positioning)
S3 ： Function selection

S4 ： Target frequency

D1 ： Pulse output device for X axis

D2 ： Pulse output device for Y axis

Explanation:

1. S1 and S2 are respectively the X axis coordinate and Y axis coordinate of the center of a circle. (Absolute
positioning). For other explanation, refer to DCCMR instruction.

6-744
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Example:

1. Taking (40000, 50000) as the center O and (10000, 10000) as point A, draw a circle as below.

O (4 0000, 50000)
O

A (10000, 10000)
A

2. Steps:

 Fill the absolute X coordinate and Y coordinate (40000, 50000) in the instruction

 Point A is the present position, SR460=10000 and SR480=10000

 S3 is 1 and the clockwise circle drawing is performed with a 5° as the basic motion angle.

 When PLC runs and M0 is ON, the absolute-position circle drawing starts.

6_

3. Operation:

 When PLC runs and M0 is ON, PLC starts to perform the clockwise circle drawing with the frequency of 100kHz.

 When the circle drawing is completed, SM461 and SM481 are ON.

6-745
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

The position planning table controls
2718 TPO S，D1，D2
the output

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S    
D1 
D2    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S   
D1   
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS -

Symbol:
The first output number in the position
S ：
planning table
D1 ： The output number which is being output
Switch flag at the end of the
D2 ：
consecutive-number output

_6
Explanation:

1. S is the number listed in the position planning table. If the number does not exist in the table, the instruction will not
be executed, SM0 will be ON and the error code SR0=16#2027 will be kept.

2. S is the first output number when PLC is enabled. Refer to the value in D1 if there are consecutive-number outputs
during the output.

3. When one single number or the first one of consecutive numbers is output, the switch flag D2 will be set to OFF.

When the consecutive-number output reaches the output number to be switched to, D2 will be ON for a scan cycle
and will be ON again till the last number output is completed.

The example and timing diagram for the flag state switching are shown as below.

6-746
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

M0
TPO
M0 EN D1 D100 D100 1 2 3
1 S D2 M100
M100

4. The switch flag D2 will be affected by PLC scan time. If the time for switching to the next number of output is shorter
than the scan time, the flag for switching to the number of output may not reset to OFF.

6_

6-747
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

Setting single-axis output
2719 D TPWS P S1，S2，S3 parameters in the position planning
table

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1  
S2  
S3  

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:
A number listed in the position
S1 ：
planning table
S2 ： Target position

S3 ： Target speed

_6 Explanation:

1. S1 is the number listed in the position planning table. If the number does not exist in the table or the number is not
under Single-axis point-to-point motion or Single-axis multi-segment motion, the instruction will not be executed,

SM0 will be ON and the error code SR0=16#2027 will be kept.

2. S2 is the target position which is a 32-bit integer. If the mechanical unit conversion is used during the editing of the
position planning table in the software, please use the conversion instruction for modification first.

3. S3 is the target speed. The range: 1Hz~200,000Hz. (Note: The maximum speed of the output axis Y0 and Y2 can be
set to 4MHz for AS324MT.)

4. When the instruction is enabled to modify the parameters of the single axis which is outputting pulses, the modified

parameters will be kept in the table and will not be effective till the next output is started.

6-748
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

5. The parameters modified by the instruction can only be modified while PLC is running. The last written parameter will

not be kept when the power turns OFF. The table which is edited in the software and downloaded to PLC is seen as

the default position planning table whenever the power is ON.

6_

6-749
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

Setting linear interpolation
2720 D TPWL P S1，S2，S3，S4 parameters in the position planning
table

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
type INT

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:
A number listed in the position
S1 ：
planning table
S2 ： Target position of X axis
_6
S3 ： Target position of Y axis

S4 ： Target speed

Explanation:

1. S1 is the number listed in the position planning table. If the number does not exist in the table or the output of the
number does not belong to 2-axis linear interpolation, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON and the

error code SR0=16#2027 will be kept.

2. S2 and S3 are respectively the target positions of X axis and Y axis which can only be 32-bit integers. If the
mechanical unit conversion is used during the editing of the position planning table in the software, please use the

conversion instruction for modification first.

6-750
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

3. S4 is the target speed. The range: 1Hz~200,000Hz.

4. When the linear interpolation is executed, the target frequency S4 will automatically correspond to the output of an
axis which is farthest from its target position. If X axis and Y axis can not achieve the simultaneous reaching of the

target positions, PLC will automatically decelerate the frequency so as to make the two axes reach the target

positions simultaneously.

6. When the instruction is enabled to modify parameters of two axes any one of which is outputting, the modified

parameters of the two axes will be kept in the table and will not be effective till the next 2-axis output is started.

5. The parameters modified by the instruction can be modified only while PLC is running. The last written parameter will

not be kept when the power turns OFF. The table which is edited in the software and downloaded to PLC is seen as

the default position planning table whenever the power is ON.

6_

6-751
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

Setting arc interpolation parameters
2721 D TPWC P S1，S2，S3，S4，S5
in the position planning table

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1    
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT
type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4  
S5  

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

AS - AS

Symbol:
A number listed in the position
S1 ：
planning table
_6
S2 ： X axis coordinate of the center

S3 ： Y axis coordinate of the center

S4 ： The shift of the center

S5 ： Target speed

Explanation:

1. S1 is the number listed in the position planning table. If the number does not exist in the table or the output of the
number does not belong to 2-axis arc interpolation, the instruction will not be executed, SM0 will be ON and the error

code SR0=16#2027 will be kept.

6-752
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

2. S2 and S3 are respectively the coordinates of the center on X axis and Y axis. S4 is the shift of the center. The three
parameters can only be 32-bit integers. If the mechanical unit conversion is used during the editing of the position

planning table in the software, please use the conversion instruction for modification first.

3. S5 is the target speed. The range: 1Hz~200,000Hz. It is the referece speed for the actual output. PLC will
automatically decelerate the speed if the 2-axis synchronized output can not be achieved.

4. When the instruction is enabled to modify parameters of two axes any of which is outputting, the modified parameters

of the two axes will be kept in the table and will not be effective till the next 2-axis output is started.

5. The parameters modified by the instruction can be modified only while PLC is running. The last written parameter will

not be kept when the power turns OFF. The table which is edited in the software and downloaded to PLC is seen as

the default position planning table whenever the power is ON.

The instruction does not support the change of the clockwise and counterclockwise motion direction. For the direction

change, please add or modify the output parameters for arc interpolation in the position planning table in the software.

6_

6-753
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2723 D PPGB S1，S2，S3，S4，D1，D2 Point-to-point go back and forth

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1 
S2 
S3 
S4 
D1 
D2 
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR
Data

CNT
INT

type

S1  
S2  
S3  
S4 
D1 
D2 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ - AS

Symbol:
_6
S1 ： Relative target position A

S2 ： Relative target position B

S3 ： Target speed
Target speed ratio adjusted value
S4 ：
(floating point value)
D1 ： Pulse output device

D2 ： Changeable target speed indicator

Explanation:

1. This high speed output instruction is used for a movement going back and forth between 2 target positions which

are converted from the two relative target positions specified by S1 and S2, applicable for warping machines in the
textile industry and winding & binding machines in the cable industry, and many more.

2. When the instruction starts the output, the relative positions S1 and S2 need be specified first so that the instruction
can make the prior calculation for switching to the next output. After the instruction is enabled, users can modify the

target positions which are to exectue but the outputting target positions can not be changed.

6-754
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

 DPPGB instruction is enabled. When S1 is 30,000 and S2 is -30,000, the motion will go toward the target position
A1=30,000.

 If the pulse position >15,000, the relative positions are modified into S1:20,000 and S2:-20,000 and the target
position is A1=30,000 at the moment. The target positions obtained through calculation are B1=10,000(A1+ S2) and

A2=30,000(B1+ S1) since the outputting target positions can not be modified.

3. S3 is the target speed (32-bit integer), and S4 is the target speed ratio adjusted value (floating point). The actual

speed is the result of multiplying the values of S3 and S4 and then making the calculation result rounded down to the
32-bit integer. The acceptable input speed range is 1~200kHz. When values are out of range, PLC will

automatically take the minimum or the maximum of the range for operation. The ratio formula for the actual target
6_
speed is S3 x S4. For instance, target speed is 1kHz, the adjusted floating point is 1.2345 and the actual will be
1234Hz.

4. When the outputting is ongoing, the target speed and the adjusted ratio can be modified, and the result will be

updated to the actual output speed once the instruction is scanned. But it is suggested that the target speed should

not change too greatly in case the calculated deceleration will be affected.

5. The output points for D1 can only be Y0.0, Y0.2, Y0.4, Y0.6, Y0.8 and Y0.10 and it occupies 2 consecutive points
for output. The output sets and the output special register modes are listed below.

Output axis number 1 2 3 4 5 6

D1+0 output points Y0.0 Y0.2 Y0.4 Y0.6 Y0.8 Y0.10

D1+1 output points Y0.1 Y0.3 Y0.5 Y0.7 Y0.9 Y0.11

Output modes SR462 SR482 SR502 SR522 SR542 SR562

6. D2 is the flag indicating the changeable target speed and the adjusted ratio. When this flag is ON, that means the
executing target speed can be modified. When the flag is switching from ON to OFF, that means it is now

decelerating and the current target speed will be seen as the target speed of the next output.

6-755
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

7. This instruction has no limitation on the execution times. But during execution, the appointed high speed axis

cannot be occupied by other instructions. Otherwise it will not be executed.

Output timing diagram:

Speed
D2 = OFF
D2 = ON

S3 x S4
D1 +1 = OFF
S1

S2 Position

D1 +1 = ON
S3 x S4

D2 = ON
D2 = OFF

Example:

_6 When M0 is ON, DPPGB instruction starts to perform the motion going back and forth between the target positions which

are calculated from two relatives target positions specified by S1 and S2 at the actual target speed of 8500Hz(5000*1.7).
Y0.0 is the output point. Y0.1=OFF means the positive direction.

6-756
Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

6_

6-757
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Explanation:

1. After the instruction starts the output, modify the relative target positions A for S1 and B for S2.

a) The output curve diagram of Y0.0:

b) Explanation:
 When S1:30,000, S2:-30,000 and M0 has DPPGB instruction enabled, the motion goes toward the
position A1=30,000.

 When D0=1 and the position: number of pulses in SR460 >15,000, the relative positions are changed into

S1:26,000 and S2:-28,000.

At the moment, the target position is A1=30,000 since the outputting target position can not be modified. The
_6 target positions obtained through calculation are B1=2,000(A1-28,000), A2=28,000(B1+26,000).

 When D0=2 and the position: number of pulses in SR460 >15,000, the relative positions are changed into

S1:22,000 and S2:-24,000.

At the moment, the target position is A2=28,000 since the outputting target position can not be modified.

The target positions obtained through calculation are B2=4,000(A2-24,000), A3=26,000(B2+22,000).

 When D0=3 and the position: number of pulses in SR460 >15,000, the relative positions are changed into

S1:18,000 and S2:-20,000.

The target positions obtained through calculation are B3=6,000(A3-20,000)，A4=24,000(B3+18,000).

 When D0=4 and the position: number of pulses in SR460 >15,000, the relative positions are changed into

S1:30,000 and S2:-24,000.

The target positions obtained through calculation are B4=0(A4-24,000) and A1=30,000(B4+30,000).

6-758
 Cha p ter 6 App l ied Ins truc tio ns

Step S1: Relative position S2: Relative position Target position B Target position A

 30,000 -30,000 - A1=30,000

 26,000 -28,000 B1=2,000 A2=28,000

 22,000 -24,000 B2=4,000 A3=26,000

 18,000 -20,000 B3=6,000 A4=24,000

 30,000 -24,000 B4=0 A1=30,000

6_

6-759
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

6.27 Delta CANopen Communication Instructions

6.27.1 List of CANopen Communication Instructions

Instruction code Pulse

API instruction Function

16-bit 32-bit

2800 INITC – – Initializing the servos for the CANopen communication

2801 ASDON – – Servo-ON and servo-OFF

2802 CASD – – Setting the acceleration time and deceleration time of a servo

2803 – DDRVIC – Servo relative position control

2804 – DDRVAC – Servo absolute position control

2805 – DPLSVC – Servo speed control

2806 ZRNC – – Homing

2807 COPRW – – Writing and reading the CANopen communication data

_6

6-760
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

6.27.2 Explanation of CANopen Communication Instructions

API Instruction Operand Description

Initializing the servos for the

2800 INITC S
CANopen communication

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S DWORD  

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S 

Pulse Instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

The number of servos for

S:
initialization

Explanation:

1. Before the instruction is executed, please make sure that “Delta ASD-A2 control” is selected as the working mode of 6_
the function card 2 in the hardware configuration software HWCONFIG.

2. The range of S: 1~8. When the input value is greater than 8, PLC will automatically take 8 as the value of S for the
initialization. The set station addresses can only start from 1 and the middle numbers can not be skipped or

reserved.

3. SM1681 will be cleared to OFF when the instruction is enabled. SM1681 will be set to ON when all slaves complete

the initialization.

4. SM1682 will be set to ON when an error occurs during the execution of the communication. Besides, SR658 will

keep the number of the axis in which an error occurs and SR659 will keep the error code.

Example: (The Communication with Delta servo ASD-A2M)

1. Before using Delta CANopen instructions, please mount AS-FCOPM card in AS series PLC (Slot 2 only) and make

sure that “Delta ASD-A2 control” is selected as the working mode of AS-FCOPM card 2 in the configuration software

HWCONFIG. The baud rate is set to 1000kbps or one of 125k, 250k, 500k and 1000kbps.

6-761
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Figure 1 Function card 2 setting

_6

Figure 2 Working mode selection

2. Connect AS series PLC to ASDA series with a CANopen communication cable as shown in the figure below. (The

terminal resistor of120Ω in AS-FCOPM card need be switched to ON so as to enable the terminal resistor.)

6-762
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

3. Follow the steps below for the basic setting on the panel of ASD-A2.

a. Set the servo parameter P2-08 to 10 to restore the factory setting.

b. Repower the servo after power off.

c. Set P1-01 to 0001 (PR mode).

d. Set P3-01 to 0400 and the baud rate of the servo for CAN communication to 1.0Mbit/s. (The set baud rate should

be the same as that for the PLC.)

e. Set a station address for every servo based on the quantity of servos. P3-00 of each servo is set to 1, 2 and 3 in

order. Maximum 8 servos can be set.

f. Repower the servo after power off.

g. The operation can begin after the basic setting is finished.

4. Download the example program and set M0 to ON. Then the instruction will make the servos of station addresses

1~3 initialized. When SM1681 is ON, it means the initialization is completed. (When the servo enters the CANopen

mode successfully, CO-LD information will be displayed.)

6_

5. The settings of the servo drive in the AS series initialization process are shown below.

a. Set P2-30 (auxiliary function) to 5. It means that the servo does not need to store the setting values in EEPROM

for permanent retention in order to prolong the servo life span.

b. Reset P6-02 (PATH#1) to 0 and P6-06(PATH#3) to 0. (It indicates that PATH#1 & #3 in PR mode are cleared)

c. Set P3-06 (SDI source) to 16#0100. (It means that DI1~DI8 are controlled by the hardware, EDI9 is controlled by

the software and EDI10~EDI14 are controlled by the hardware.)

d. Reset P4-07 (SDI status controlled manually) to 0.

e. Set P2-36 (EDI9) to 16#0101. (It means that the function of EDI9 is selected as Servo ON.)

f. Set P0-17 (CM1A) to 1. (It indicates that the mapping parameter is the pulse command output register CMD_O.)

g. Set P0-18 (CM2A) to 64. (It indicates that the mapping parameter is the pulse command register CMD_E.)

6-763
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

h. Set P5-20~P5-35 (acceleration time) to 1. (It indicates that the acceleration time is 1ms.)

i. Set P5-60~P5-75 (target speed) to 1. (It indicates that the target speed is 0.1rpm)

j. Make PDO1 correspond to P5-07 (PR command), P0-01(Fault code) and P0-46 (state of DO point).

k. Make PDO2 correspond to P0-09 (CM1 state: CMD_O) and P0-10(CM2 state: CMD_E).

6. For the servo parameters set in the above six items a, b, f, g, j and k, do not use COPRW instruction to modify them.

7. When the absolute-type servo is used, users should use the COPRW communication instruction for writing 16#0100

to P3-12 so that relevant absolute-type servo parameters will be written to EEPROM at the moment when power is

off.

8. To modify the hardware DI signal setting of ASD-A2, Uses can set relevant DI signal configuration parameters by

manual or by using the COPRW instruction. COPRW can be used for the modification of the configuration after the

execution of INITC instruction is completed and before the servo is enabled.

9. For more details about the servo parameters, refer to Delta servo operation manual.

_6

6-764
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

API Instruction Operand Description

2801 ASDON S1，S2 Servo-ON and servo-OFF

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1          
S2  
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Station address of a servo

S2 ： Servo-ON and servo-OFF

Explanation:

1. The execution of INITC must be finished before the instruction is executed. 6_

2. The range of S1: K1~K8.

3. If S2 is a non-zero value, the servo is enabled (Servo ON). If S2 is 0, the servo is disabled (Servo OFF).

4. Every servo has a flag (SM1651~M1658) for displaying own state. The actual servo state can be known from the flag.

When the flag is ON, the servo is Servo-ON. When the flag is OFF, the servo is Servo-OFF.

5. SM1682 will be set to ON if an error occurs during the communication. Besides, SR658 will keep the number of the

axis in which an error occurs and SR659 will keep the error code.

Example:

1. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, the INITC instruction starts to make the servos of station addresses 1~3

initialized until SM1681 is ON.

2. When M1 changes from OFF to ON, the ASDON instruction starts to make the servo of station address 2 enabled.

When SM1652 is ON, it indicates Servo-ON.

6-765
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6

6-766
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

API Instruction Operand Description

Setting the acceleration time and

2802 CASD S1 ， S2 ， S3
deceleration time of a servo

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1          
S2          
S3          
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Station address of a servo

S2 ： Acceleration time（ms）

S3 ： Deceleration time（ms）
6_

Explanation:

1. The execution of INITC must be finished before the instruction is executed.

2. The range of S1: 1~8.

3. The range of S2 and S3: 0~32767. If the values of S2 and S3 are out of the range, 0 will be seen as the input value.
(Unit: ms)

4. The acceleration time is the period of time during which the servo speeds up from 0 to 3000.0 rpm. The deceleration

time is the period of time during which the servo speeds down from 3000.0 rpm to 0.

5. When the instruction is enabled, SM1681 will be cleared to OFF. When the servo has responded to the received

command, SM1681 will be ON.

6. SM1682 will be set to ON when an error occurs during the communication. Besides, SR658 will keep the number of

the axis in which an error occurs and SR659 will keep the error code.

6-767
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

1. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, the INITC instruction makes the servos of station addresses 1~3 initialized till
SM1681 is ON.

2. When M1 changes from OFF to ON and the target speed of the servo of station addresses 2 is 3000rpm, the CASD
instruction sets the acceleration time of servo 2 to 3000ms and the deceleration time to 9000ms.

3. If the target speed of servo 2 is 1000 rpm, the acceleration time and deceleration time will be as follows.

Acceleration time: [3000ms/3000rpm]*1000rpm=1000ms

Deceleration time: [9000ms/3000rpm]*1000rpm=3000ms

_6

6-768
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

API Instruction Operand Description

2803 D DRVIC S1 ， S2 ， S3 Servo relative position control

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1   
S2    
S3    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1  
S2  
S3  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Station address of a servo

S2 ： Relative target position

S3 ： Target speed
6_

Explanation:

The execution of INITC and ASDON (servo ON) instructions must be finished before the instruction is executed.

1. The range of S1: 1~8.

2. The range of S2: -2147483648 ~ 2147483647. The +/- sign means the forward / reverse direction. The target position
is a relative position.

3. The unit of the value of S3: 0.1rpm.The range: 1~60000. It indicates 0.1~6000.0 rpm.

4. When the target position is reached, the corresponding finish flags of axes (SM1631~SM1638) will be ON.

5. Refer to the following table for the corresponding SM and SR of axes.

6. SM1682 will be set to ON when an error occurs during the communication. Besides, SR658 will keep the number of

the axis in which an error occurs and SR659 will keep the error code.

6-769
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

Example:

1. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, the INITC instruction starts to make the servos of station addresses 1~3

initialized till SM1681 is ON.

2. When M1 changes from OFF to ON, the ASDON instruction starts to make the servo of station address 2 enabled.

When SM1652 is ON, it means that the servo is Servo-ON.

3. When M2 changes from OFF to ON, servo 2 moves to the relative position 100000 PUU at 100.0r/min.

The finish flag SM1632 is ON when the target position is reached.

_6

6-770
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

Explanation of special flags (SM) and registers (SR) related to ASD-A2 CAN communication instructions

Special flags (SM) and registers (SR) related to ASD-A2 CAN communication

Flag R/W ID. 1 ID. 2 ID. 3 ID. 4 ID. 5 ID. 6 ID. 7 ID. 8

The flag is set in HWCONFIG and is set to ON when PLC changes

Enabling the specific function R/W
from Stop to Run.

Initialization and communication are

R SM1681
completed

CANopen communication error flag R SM1682

SM163 SM163 SM163 SM163 SM163 SM163 SM163 SM163

Positioning is completed. R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SM164 SM164 SM164 SM164 SM164 SM164 SM164 SM164

Stop flag R/W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SM165 SM165 SM165 SM165 SM165 SM165 SM165 SM165

Servo-ON flag R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The function of going back and forth is SM166 SM166 SM166 SM166 SM166 SM166 SM166 SM166
enabled. R/W
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Only DDRVAC is supported.
The go-back/go-forth direction indication SM167 SM167 SM167 SM167 SM167 SM167 SM167 SM167
flag. R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Only DDRVAC is supported.
The number of the axis which has a 6_
R SR658
communication error

Communication error code R SR659

Servo parameters of axes correspond to special registers in the CAN communication as below.

Servo parameter name (Number) ID. 1 ID. 2 ID. 3 ID. 4 ID. 5 ID. 6 ID. 7 ID. 8

PR command（P5_07）  SR661 SR662 SR663 SR664 SR665 SR666 SR667 SR668

Alarm code（P0_01）
(hexadecimal)  SR671 SR672 SR673 SR674 SR675 SR676 SR677 SR678

DO state（P0_46）  SR681 SR682 SR683 SR684 SR685 SR686 SR687 SR688

SR691 SR693 SR695 SR697 SR699 SR701 SR703 SR705

Servo current position（P0_09） 
SR692 SR694 SR696 SR698 SR700 SR702 SR704 SR706

SR711 SR713 SR715 SR717 SR719 SR721 SR723 SR725

Target command position（P0-10） 
SR712 SR714 SR716 SR718 SR720 SR722 SR724 SR726

6-771
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

The table of ASD-A2 CAN error code is shown below.

Error code Cause

0x0002 The slave has no response to the SDO message.

An error occurs in the message the slave receives. The error often occurs in the setting of COPRW
0x0003 instruction so that the slave can not receive the complete message.

0x0004 The slave PDO message is not received.

0x0005 An error occurs in the using of the instruction operand.

0x0006 One of the servos is being used when the INITC instruction is executed.

_6

6-772
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

API Instruction Operand Description

2804 D DRVAC S1 ， S2 ， S3 Servo absolute position control

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1   
S2    
S3    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1  
S2  
S3  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Station address of a servo

S2 ： Absolute target position

S3 ： Target speed
6_
Explanation:

1. Before the instruction is executed, the execution of INITC and ASDON (Servo ON) instructions must be finished

2. The range of S1: 1~8.

3. The range of S2: -2147483648 ~ 2147483647. The +/ - sign means the forward / reverse direction. The target position
is an absolute position.

4. Refer to DRVIC instruction for the explanation of other content and example.

Example 1:

1. When M0 changes OFF to ON, the INITC instruction makes the servos of station addresses 1~3 initialized till

SM1681 is ON.

2. When M1 changes from OFF to ON, the ASDON instruction starts to make the servo of station address 2 enabled.

When SM1652 is ON, it means Servo-ON.

6-773
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

3. When M2 changes from OFF to ON, servo 2 moves from current position to the absolute position 100,000 PUU at

100.0r/min.

The finish flag SM1632 is ON when the target position is reached.

_6

Example 2:

1. Add one row of program to the program in example 1. When PLC runs and SM1662 is ON, the function of going back

and forth of servo 2 is enabled.

2. As the figure shows below, the servo moves from current position 20,000 to the absolute target position 100,000 after
M2 is ON and then it goes back and forth between the absolute position 100,000 and 0.
The direction indication flag SM1672 is ON when the servo goes toward the target position for the first time after
Servo-ON. After that, the flag will repeat the state changing from ON to OFF.
3. The target position can be modified any time in the motion. But the timing for making the new target position valid is
the next cycle of when the servo goes back and forth.

6-774
Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

6_

6-775
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2805 D PLSVC S1 ， S2 Servo speed control

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1   
S2    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1  
S2  

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ － AS

Symbol:

S1 ： Station address of a servo

S2 Target speed

Explanation:

_6
1. The execution of INITC and ASDON (Servo ON) instructions must be finished before the instruction is executed.

2. The range of S1: 1~8.

3. The range of S2: -60000 ~ 60000. The +/- sign means the forward / reverse direction. Unit: 0.1rpm.

4. For corresponding SM and SR of axes, refer to DRVIC instruction.

5. SM1682 will be set to ON when an error occurs during the communication. Besides, SR658 will keep the number of

the axis in which an error occurs and SR659 will keep the error code.

Example:

1. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, the INITC instruction starts to make the servos of station addresses 1~3

initialized till SM1681 is ON.

2. When M1 changes from OFF to ON, the ASDON instruction starts to make the servo of station address 2 enabled.

When SM1652 is ON, it means Servo-ON.

6-776
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

3. When M2 changes from OFF to ON, servo 2 moves at 100.0r/min until M2 is OFF.

6_

6-777
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

API Instruction Operand Description

2806 ZRNC S1 ， S2 ， S3 Homing

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1   
S2    
S3    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data

INT
type

S1   
S2   
S3   

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol:

S1 ： Station address of a servo

st
S2 ： The 1 – segment speed

nd
S3 ： The 2 – segment speed

_6 Explanation:

1. The execution of INITC and ASDON (Servo ON) instructions must be finished before the instruction is executed.

2. The range of S1: 1~8.

3. The range of S2: 1 ~ 20000. Unit: 0.1 rpm

4. The range of S3: 1 ~ 5000. Unit: 0.1 rpm

5. When the servo returns to the home point, the corresponding finish flag of axes will be ON. Refer to DRVIC

instruction for the explanation of special flags (SM) and registers (SR).

6. SM1682 will be set to ON when an error occurs during the execution of the communication. Besides, SR658 will keep

the number of the axis in which an error occurs and SR659 will keep the error code.

Example:

1. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, the INITC instruction starts to make servo 1 initialized till SM1681 is ON.

2. When M1 changes from OFF to ON, the acceleration time (10000) and deceleration time (20000) of servo 1 are set

by using the CASD instruction. When SM1651 is ON, it means Servo-ON.

6-778
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

3. When M2 changes from OFF to ON,

The 2-byte data are written to P5-04 of servo 1. When D100=5 and the writing of data is finished, M100 is ON.

The 4-byte data are written to P6-00 of servo 1. When D102=0 and the writing of data is finished, M101 is ON.

The 4-byte data are written to P6-01 of servo 1. When D104=0 and the writing of data is finished, M102 is

ON.

P5-04 is used for setting the homing mode.

P6-00 and P6-01 are the homing definition.

4. When M3 changes from OFF to ON, the homing function is enabled for servo 1.

6_

6-779
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6

6-780
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

API Instruction Operand Description

Writing and reading the CANopen

2807 COPRW S1 ， S2 ， S3
communication data

Device X Y M S T C HC D FR SM SR E K 16# “$” F

S1   
S2    
S3    
S4    
S5 
D    
DWORD

STRING
LWORD
WORD

LREAL
BOOL

REAL
UINT

DINT

LINT

TMR

CNT
Data
type INT

S1   
S2   
S3   
S4   
S5   
D 

Pulse instruction 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction

－ AS －

Symbol: 6_
S1 ： Station address of a servo

S2 ： Request code

S3 ： Index

S4 ： Sub-index

S5 ： Read/write device
Communication completion
D ：
flag

Explanation:

1. The range of S1: 1~127. If the value is out of the range (<1 or >127), the minimum or maximum value will be
automatically seen as the value of S1 by the instruction.

2. S2 can only specify four types of request codes as shown in the following table.

H23 Writing the 4-byte data

H2B Writing the 2-byte data

6-781
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

H2F Writing the 1-byte data

Reading the data. The data length is contained in the SDO response

H40 message.

3. For S3 and S4, refer to the object dictionary in Delta servo operation manual.

4. It is suggested that COPRW instruction should be executed after the execution of INITC instruction is finished in case

that the written parameter values may be overwritten by the INITC instruction. COPRW instruction is used for the

CANopen SDO communication. If the station address of a slave exceeds the range of 1~8, COPRW instruction can

be used for the setting, reading and writing of slave-related parameters.

5. SM1682 will be set to ON when an error occurs during the communication. Besides, SR658 will keep the number of

the axis in which an error occurs and SR659 will keep the error code.

Note: When COPRW instruction is used, users must edit the process of dealing with the communication errors in
order to avoid resulting in incorrect communication process incurred by unexpected communication errors.

6. The timing diagram of COPRW instruction.

 When COPRW instruction is enabled for the first time, the instruction will send the command code immediately if

no other CANopen communication uses it.

 The instruction is sending the command code.

 The sending is finished and the finish flag is set to ON.

_6
 Users modify the next data to be sent out. Then the next command code is sent out immediately after the finish

flag is cleared to OFF.

The sending is finished and the COPRW instruction is disabled.

6-782
 Ch ap te r 6 App l ied Ins tr uc ti ons

7. COPRW instruction only supports the following “Delta ASD-A2 control” mode for the hardware configuration setting.

Most of the parameters in Delta ASDA-A2 are displayed in the decimal format. Users can convert the parameters into

index addresses by using the formula: the index address of PX-YY=0x2000 +（X << 8）+ YY

Example: P2-10 = 0x2000 +（0x0002 << 8）+ 0x000A = 0x220A

P5-04 = 0x2000 +（0x0005 << 8）+ 0x0004 = 0x2504

P1-44 = 0x2000 +（0x0001 << 8）+ 0x002C = 0x212C 6_

Example:

1. When M0 changes from OFF to ON, the INITC instruction starts to make the servo of station addresses 1~3 initialized

till SM1681 is ON.

2. When M1 changes from OFF to ON, PLC writes the 2-byte data in D100 to P5-04 of servo 3 by using the COPRW

instruction. When the writing is finished, M100 is ON.

3. When M2 changes from OFF to ON, PLC reads the value of P4-07 of servo 3 and the read value is stored in D106.

When the reading is finished, M106 is ON.

6-783
 AS Ser ies Pro gra mm in g M anu al

_6

6-784
 12
7
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

Table of Contents
7.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.1 Basic troubleshooting steps ............................................................. 7-2
7.1.2 Clear the States of Errors................................................................ 7-2
7.1.3 Troubleshooting SOP ...................................................................... 7-3
7.1.4 System Log ................................................................................... 7-4

7.2 Troubleshooting for CPU Modules ...................................................... 7-5

7.2.1 ERROR LED Indicator’s Being ON ..................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ............................ 7-5
7.2.3 ERROR LED Indicator’s Rapid Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds.................... 7-7
7.2.4 ERROR LED Indicator’s Slow Blinking Every 3 Seconds and Lighting up for
1 Second ...................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.5 BAT. LOW LED Indicator’s Being ON ................................................. 7-7
7.2.6 BAT. LOW LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds ........................ 7-7
7.2.7 The LED Indicators of RUN and ERROR are Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds
Simultaneously ............................................................................. 7-7
7.2.8 The LED Indicators of RUN and ERROR are Blinking One After Another
Every 0.5 Seconds......................................................................... 7-8
7.2.9 Other Errors (Without LED Indicators) .............................................. 7-8

7.3 Troubleshooting for I/O Modules .................................................... 7-14

7.3.1 Troubleshooting for Analog Modules (AD/DA/XA) and Temperature Modules
(RTD/TC) ....................................................................................7-14
7.3.2 Troubleshooting for Load Cell Module AS02LC...................................7-15
7.3.3 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM as a Communication Module .....7-15
7.3.4 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM as a Remote Module ................7-17

7.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules ............................ 7-18
7.4.1 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules ..............................7-18
7.4.2 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Analog/Temperature Modules .......7-23
7.4.3 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Load Cell Module AS02LC .............7-24
7.4.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a Communication
Module ........................................................................................7-25
7.4.5 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a Remote
Module ........................................................................................7-25

7-1
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

7.1 Troubleshooting
7.1.1 Basic troubleshooting steps
This chapter includes kinds of possible errors occurred during operation and the causes of them and what actions should
be taken to correct the errors.

(1) Check the followings:

 PLC should be operated in a safe environment (the environmental, electronical, vibrational safeties should be
considered.)

 Power supply should be correctly connected and supply power to the PLC.

 Installations of modules, terminals and cables are secured.

 All the LED indicators are shown correct.

 All the switches are correctly set.

(2) Check the followings for the AS series to operate:

 Switch the RUN/STOP

 Check the settings for the AS series to RUN/STOP

 Check and eliminate the errors from the external devices

 Use the System Log function of the ISPSoft to check the system operation and the logs.

(3) Identify the source of the possible causes:

 AS series or external device

 CPU modules or the extension modules

 Setting parameters or programs

7.1.2 Clear the States of Errors

_7 Use the following methods to clear the status of errors when errors occurred. But if the source of error is not fixed, the
system will still show errors.

(1) Switch the state of the CPU model to STOP and then to RUN.

(2) Turn off the CPU and turn on again.

(3) Use the ISPSoft to clear the error logs.

(4) Reset the CPU and set the settings to defaults and download the project again to operate.

7-2
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

7.1.3 Troubleshooting SOP

An error
occurred

Basic
troub leshoot in g No Refer to s ec tion 7 .1 .1 for
Basic troubleshooti ng steps
steps
done

Yes
Mo dule 1. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .1.4 f or the s ys tem l og
error 2. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .4 for error codes and
CP U mo d u le e r ro r L ED indic ators for CPU modules
o r mo d u le s er r or 3. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .3 for tr oubles hooting f or
I/O modules

CP U module
error
1. Refer to s ection 7 . 1. 4 for the s ys tem log
Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .4 for error codes and
ERRO R L E D O N L ED indic ators for CPU modules
3. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .2 for tr oubles hooting f or
C PU modul es

No

1. Refer to s ection 7 . 1. 4 for the s ys tem log

E RROR L ED b li nki ng Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .4 for error codes and
n or mal ly L ED indic ators for CPU modules
( eve ry 0 .5 se c.) 3. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .2 for tr oubles hooting f or
C PU modul es

No

1. Refer to s ection 7 . 1. 4 for the s ys tem log

ERRO R L E D b l in kin g Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .4 for error codes and
fast L ED indic ators for CPU modules
( eve ry 0 .2 se c.) 3. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .2 for tr oubles hooting f or
C PU modul es

No

1. Refer to s ection 7 . 1. 4 for the s ys tem log

E RR O R LE D bl in k in g
sl o wl y (e ve r y 1 se c. ,
Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .4 for error codes and
L ED indic ators for CPU modules 7_
sto p fo r 3 se c.) 3. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .2 for tr oubles hooting f or
C PU modul es

No

1. Refer to s ection 7 . 1. 4 for the s ys tem log

Yes 2. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .4 for error codes and
Oth er LE D b li nki ng L ED indic ators for CPU modules
3. Refer to s ec ti on 7 .2 for tr oubles hooting f or
C PU modul es

No

Afte r g oi ng t hr ou gh
tro ub le sho oti ng s tep s,
Yes If the p roblem per sis ts , pleas e c ontact
the i ssu es a re s til l n ot s upport.
r eso lve d.

No

The system runs normally.

7-3
 AS Series Programming Manual

7.1.4 System Log

If ISPSoft is connected to an AS series normally, users can view the actions and the errors occur in the AS series after
they click System Log on the PLC menu. Up to 20 piece of error logs can be stored in the CPU. After the 20 sets are
st st
stored, the 1 log will be replaced with the 21 if there are new logs coming in; the old logs will be replaced with the new
ones accordingly. When the memory card is installed in the CPU module, 20 pieces of the old logs will be backed up in the
memory card and up to 10000 logs can be recorded. If the stored log exceeds the limitation of 1000, the oldest 20 logs will
be replaced with the newest 20 logs in the memory card.

(1) Click System Log on the PLC menu. PLC> System Log.

(2) After users click System Log on the PLC menu, the System Log window will appear. After users click Clear Log, the
error log in the window and the error log in the CPU module will be cleared, and the CPU module will be reset.

_7

 Group No.: The number 1 indicates the error occurred in the CPU module or the right-side module 1. The number
2~16 indicates the error occurred in the remote module 1~15.

 Module No.: The number 0 indicates the error occurred in the CPU module or the remote module. The number
1~32 indicates the error occurred in the right-side module of the CPU module / remote module. (The
number 1 represents the closest module to the CPU module or the remote module; this number
increases from the closest to the furthest to the CPU module or the remote module.) Note: Up to 8
extension modules can be connected to the right-side of the remote module.

 PLC/Module name: Model names of the CPU modules, remote modules and the extension modules.

7-4
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

 Error Code: Error codes of the error log.

 Date & Time: The error occurred date and time. The most recent occurred error will be listed on the

top.

 The last column shows the relative descriptions for the error.

7.2 Troubleshooting for CPU Modules

Check the LED indicators and the error codes from the CPU module and refer to the following table for troubleshooting. V
in the Log column indicates the error will be recorded in the log; X in the Log column indicates the error will not be
recorded in the log; H in the Log column indicates whether to record the error in the log or not can be set in HWCONFIG.

7.2.1 ERROR LED Indicator’s Being ON

Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)

1. Check the setting of the watchdog timer in HWCONFIG.

000A Scan timeout SM8 V
2. Check whether the program causes the long scan time

7.2.2 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)

The program in the PLC is

000C Download the program again. SM9 V
damaged.
The access to the memory in the
0010 Please contact the factory. SM9 V
CPU is denied.
The access to the external memory
002E
of the CPU is denied.
Please contact the factory. SM9 V
7_
PLC programs are not consistent
002F Download the program again. SM34 V
with the system logs.
The actual arrangement of the
Check whether the settings in HWCONFIG are consistent
0070 function cards is not consistent with SM10 V
with the actual arrangement of the function cards.
the settings.
The interrupt number exceeds the Check the program, compile the program again, and
0102 SM5 X
range. download the program again.
The MC instruction exceeds the Check the program, compile the program again, and
0202 SM5 X
range. download the program again.
The MCR instruction exceeds the Check the program, compile the program again, and
0302 SM5 X
range. download the program again.
The operands used in DHSCS are Check the program, compile the program again, and
0D03 SM5 X
not used properly. download the program again.
The operands HCXXX used in Check the program, compile the program again, and
0E05 SM5 X
DCNT are not used properly. download the program again.

7-5
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)

1300
Errors occurred in the remote Refer to section 12.3.4 for more information on the error
~ SM30 V
modules codes of the remote modules.
130F
The actual arrangement of the I/O
Check whether the settings in HWCONFIG are consistent
1402 modules is not consistent with the SM10 V
with the actual arrangement of the I/O modules.
settings.
The communication modules exceed
140B Check the total number of the communication modules. SM10 V
the limit of 4.
The extension modules exceed the
140D Check the total number of the extension modules. SM10 V
limit of 32.
The remote modules exceed the
Check the total number of the remote modules on the
140E limit of 8 on the right side of the CPU SM30 V
right side of the CPU module.
module.
1. Make sure the module is well-connected to the CPU
The ID of the extension module
1600 module and turn-on the modules again. SM10 V
exceeds the range.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Make sure the module is well-connected to the CPU
The ID of the extension module
1601 module and turn-on the modules again. SM10 V
cannot be set.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Make sure the module is well-connected to the CPU
The ID of the extension module is
1602 module and turn-on the modules again. SM10 V
duplicated.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Make sure the module is well-connected to the CPU
The extension module cannot be
1603 module and turn-on the modules again. SM10 V
operated.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Make sure the module is well-connected to the CPU
Extension module communication
1604 module and turn-on the modules again. SM10 V
timeout
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1605 Hardware failure Please contact the factory. SM10 V
_7 1606
Errors on the function card of the Make sure the function card is well-connected to the CPU
SM10 V
communication module module and turn-on the modules again.
Check whether the external 24 V power supply to the
1607 The external voltage is abnormal. SM10 V
module is normal.
The Internal factory calibration or the
1608 Please contact the factory. SM10 V
CJC is abnormal.
1609
~ Reserved (Error codes for the extension modules)
160F
Check the program, compile the program again, and
200A Invalid instruction SM5 V
download the program again.
The number of the MODBUS TCP Check if the number of the superior devices exceeds the SM
6010 V
connections exceeds the range. limit of 32. 1092
The number of the EtherNet/IP Check if the number of the connections exceeds the SM
6011 V
connections exceeds the range. range of 16. 1093

7-6
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

7.2.3 ERROR LED Indicator’s Rapid Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds

This happens when the power supply 24VDC of the CPU module is disconnecting or the power supply is not sufficient, not
stable or abnormal so that it cannot be operated.

Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)
Check whether the external 24 V power supply to the
002A The external voltage is abnormal. SM7 V
module is normal.

7.2.4 ERROR LED Indicator’s Slow Blinking Every 3 Seconds and

Lighting up for 1 Second
Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)
1500 Connection lost in the remote
Please check the network connection cable. SM30 V
modules
1502
Errors occurred in the remote Refer to section 12.3.4 for more information on the error
~ SM30 V
modules codes of the remote modules.
150F
1800
Errors occurred in the extension Refer to section 12.3 for more information on the error
~ SM10 V
modules codes of the extension modules.
180F
1. Check the CANopen connection cable.
1900 2. Check if the specific salve is working properly.
Heartbeat errors occurred in the
~ Note: The last 2 digits of the error code represent the ID - V
slave of Delta ASD-A2 control.
191C number of the slave (hexadecimal should convert to
decimal).

7.2.5 BAT. LOW LED Indicator’s Being ON

This happens when there is no battery (CR1620) or the power is low. Users can set this option off in the HWCONFIG >
CPU > Device Setting > Show Battery Low Voltage Error CPU, when users don’t need the function of RTC to keep track
of the current time. (Default is enabled.)
7_
Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)
0027 Battery Low Change battery or set this option off SM219 X

7.2.6 BAT. LOW LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

This happens when RTC cannot keep track of the current time.

Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)
RTC cannot keep track of the
0026 Please contact the factory. SM218 V
current time

7.2.7 The LED Indicators of RUN and ERROR are Blinking Every 0.5
Seconds Simultaneously
This happens when the firmware of the CPU module is being upgraded. If this happens once the power is supplied to the

7-7
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

CPU module, it means errors occurred during the previous firmware upgrade. Users need to upgrade the firmware again
or contact your point of purchase.

7.2.8 The LED Indicators of RUN and ERROR are Blinking One After
Another Every 0.5 Seconds.
This happens when the memory card of the CPU module is backing up / restoring / or saving.

7.2.9 Other Errors (Without LED Indicators)

Error
Code Description Solution Flag Log
(16#)
0011 The PLC ID is incorrect. Please check the PLC ID. SM34 V
0012 The PLC password is incorrect. Please check the PLC password. SM34 V
The PLC maximum password attempts Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU module
002D SM34 V
exceeded. to its factory settings.
1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU
The memories in the latched special module to its factory settings, and then download
0050 SM6 V
auxiliary relays are abnormal. the program and the parameters again.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU
The latched special data registers are module to its factory settings, and then download
0051 SM6 V
abnormal. the program and the parameters again.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU
The memories in the latched auxiliary module to its factory settings, and then download
0052 SM6 V
relays are abnormal. the program and the parameters again.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU
module to its factory settings, and then download
0054 The latched counters are abnormal. SM6 V
the program and the parameters again.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.

_7 1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU

The latched 32-bit counters are module to its factory settings, and then download
0055 SM6 V
abnormal. the program and the parameters again.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU
The latched special auxiliary relay is module to its factory settings, and then download
0056 SM6 V
abnormal. the program and the parameters again.
2. If the error still occurs, please contact the factory.
1. Reset the CPU module or restore the CPU
The latched data registers are module to its factory settings, and then download
0059 SM6 V
abnormal. the program and the parameters again.
2. If the error still occurs, contact the factory.
The CPU module does not detect a Check whether a memory card is inserted into the
005D SM453 V
memory card. CPU module correctly.
The memory card is initialized
005E Check whether the memory card is broken. SM453 V
incorrectly.
An error occurs when data is written to Check whether the file path is correct, or whether
0063 SM453 V
the memory card. the memory card breaks down.

7-8
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

A file in the memory card cannot be Check whether the file path is correct, or whether
0064 SM453 V
read. the file is damaged.
The initialization of Delta ASD-A2
1. Check the CANopen connection cable.
control has not yet been completed, the
1950 2. Check if the specific salve is working properly. - V
CANopen instructions cannot be
3. If nothing is wrong, initialize Delta ASD-A2 again.
executed.
Without using the FCOMP card or not in
the right mode for the ASDA-A2 while Make sure to use the FCOMP card in the function
2001 SM0 V
using the CANopen communication card 2 and check if the operation mode is correct.
instruction.
The device used in the program Check the program, compile the program again,
2003 SM0 V
exceeds the device range. and download the program again.
The operand n or the other constant Check the program, compile the program again,
200B SM0 V
operands K/H exceed the range. and download the program again.
Check the program, compile the program again,
200C The operands overlap. SM0 V
and download the program again.
The binary to the binary-coded decimal Check the program, compile the program again,
200D SM0 V
conversion is incorrect. and download the program again.
Check the program, compile the program again,
200E The string does not end with 00. SM0 V
and download the program again.
Check the program, compile the program again,
2012 Incorrect division operation SM0 V
and download the program again.
The value exceeds the range of values
Check the program, compile the program again,
2013 which can be represented by the SM0 V
and download the program again.
floating-point numbers.
Check the program, compile the program again,
The task designated by TKON/YKOFF
2014 and download the program again. SM0 V
is incorrect, or exceeds the range.

The instruction BREAK is written outside Check the program, compile the program again,
2017 SM0 V
of the FOR-NEXT. and download the program again.
1. Check the program, compile the program again,
No such position planning table number
2027 and download the program again. SM0 V
or the format is incorrect.
2. Check the settings of the position planning table.
The high speed output instruction is
Refer to SR28 for the record of the axis number and 7_
2028 being executed. Only one instruction - V
rearrange the output control procedures.
can be executed at a time.
Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module in
6004 The IP address filter is set incorrectly. SM1108 X
HWCONFIG again.
600D RJ45 port is not connected. Check the connection. SM1100 X
1. Check if there are devices using the same IP
There are devices using the same IP address.
6012 SM1101 V
address. 2. Check if there is more than 1 DHCP or BOOTP
server on the network.
Retry the email connection later. (This error does
not cause the PLC to stop running. Users can
6100 The email connection is busy. SM1113 X
perform the corresponding solution by means of the
related flag in the program.)
Set up the trigger attachment mode in HWCONFIG
The trigger attachment mode in the > CPU Module > Device Setting > Options >
6103 SM1113 X
email is set incorrectly. Ethernet Port Advanced > Email > Trigger Setting >
Trigger Attachment Mode.

7-9
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

The attachment in the email does not Check whether the attachment exists in the
6104 SM1113 X
exist. memory card.
The attachment in the email is Check the size of the attachment. If the size is over
6105 SM1113 X
oversized. 2 MB, the file cannot be sent as an attachment.
Check for the correct address and set up the SMTP
There is an SMTP server response server in HWCONFIG > CPU Module > Device
6106 SM1113 X
timeout. Setting > Options > Ethernet Port Advanced >
Email again.
1. Check whether the status of the SMTP server is
normal.
There is an SMTP server response 2. Retry the sending of the email later. (This error
6107 SM1113 X
timeout. does not cause the PLC to stop running. Users
can perform the corresponding solution by
means of the related flag in the program.)
Check for the correct ID/Password and set up in
6108 SMTP verification failed HWCONFIG > CPU Module > Device Setting > SM1113 X
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > Email again.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The remote communication IP address 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6200 - X
set in the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The local communication port set in the 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6201 - X
TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The remote communication port set in 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6202 - X
the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
_7 Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The device from which the data is sent 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6203 - X
in the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The device which receives the data in 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6206 - X
the TCP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The data which is received through the 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6208 - X
TCP socket exceeds the device range. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > TCP
Socket.

7-10
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

1. Check the program and the related special data

registers.
The remote communication IP address 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6209 - X
set in the UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > UDP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The local communication port set in the 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
620A - X
UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > UDP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The device from which the data is sent 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
620C - X
in the UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > UDP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The device which receives the data in 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
620F - X
the UDP socket function is illegal. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > UDP
Socket.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.
The data which is received through the 2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
6210 - X
UDP socket exceeds the device range. in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > UDP
Socket.
There is no response from the remote
6212 Make sure that the remote device is connected. - X
device after the timeout period.
1. Check the program and the related special data
registers.

6213 The data received exceeds the limit.

2. Set the Ethernet parameter for the CPU module
in HWCONFIG CPU Module > Device Setting >
- X 7_
Options > Ethernet Port Advanced > UDP
Socket.
The remote device refuses the Make sure that the remote device operates
6214 - X
connection. normally.
Check whether operational sequence in the
6215 The socket is not opened. - X
program is correct.
Check whether operational sequence in the
6217 The socket is opened. - X
program is correct.
The data has been sent through the Check whether operational sequence in the
6218 - X
socket. program is correct.
The data has been received through the Check whether operational sequence in the
6219 - X
socket. program is correct.
Check whether operational sequence in the
621A The socket is closed. - X
program is correct.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication function
7011 and the communication setting in slave. - H
code in COM1 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.

7 - 11
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

1. Check the communication setting in the master,

The device communication address
7012 and the communication setting in slave. - H
used in COM1 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device used in COM1 exceeds the
7013 and the communication setting in slave. - H
device range.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device length of the communication
7014 and the communication setting in slave. - H
data in COM1 exceeds the limit.
2. Check the communication cable.
The device checksum for the 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
7017 communication serial port of COM1 is and the communication setting in slave. - H
incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication function
7021 and the communication setting in slave. - H
code in COM2 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication address
7022 and the communication setting in slave. - H
used in COM2 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device used in COM2 exceeds the
7023 and the communication setting in slave. - H
device range.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device length of the communication
7024 and the communication setting in slave. - H
data in COM2 exceeds the limit.
2. Check the communication cable.
The device checksum for the 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
7027 communication serial port of COM2 is and the communication setting in slave. - H
incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication function
7031 and the communication setting in slave. - H
code in the Ethernet is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication address
7032 and the communication setting in slave. - H
used in the Ethernet is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
_7 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device used in the Ethernet
7033 and the communication setting in slave. - H
exceeds the device range.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device length of the communication
7034 and the communication setting in slave. - H
data in the Ethernet exceeds the limit.
2. Check the communication cable.
The device checksum for the 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
7037 communication serial port of the and the communication setting in slave. - H
Ethernet is incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication function
7041 and the communication setting in slave. - H
code in the USB is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication address
7042 and the communication setting in slave. - H
used in the USB is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device used in the USB exceeds
7043 and the communication setting in slave. - H
the device range.
2. Check the communication cable.

7-12
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

1. Check the communication setting in the master,

The device length of the communication
7044 and the communication setting in slave. - H
data in the USB exceeds the limit.
2. Check the communication cable.
The device checksum for the 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
7047 communication serial port of the USB is and the communication setting in slave. - H
incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication function
70B1 and the communication setting in slave. - H
code in the function card 1 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication address
70B2 and the communication setting in slave. - H
used in the function card 1 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device used in the function card 1
70B3 and the communication setting in slave. - H
exceeds the device range.
2. Check the communication cable.
The device length of the communication 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
70B4 data in the function card 1 exceeds the and the communication setting in slave. - H
limit. 2. Check the communication cable.
The device checksum for the 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
70B7 communication serial port of the function and the communication setting in slave. - H
card 1 is incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication function
70C1 and the communication setting in slave. - H
code in the function card 2 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device communication address
70C2 and the communication setting in slave. - H
used in the function card 2 is incorrect.
2. Check the communication cable.
1. Check the communication setting in the master,
The device used in the function card 2
70C3 and the communication setting in slave. - H
exceeds the device range.
2. Check the communication cable.
The device length of the communication 1. Check the communication setting in the master,
70C4 data in the function card 2 exceeds the and the communication setting in slave. - H
limit. 2. Check the communication cable.
The device checksum for the 1. Check the communication setting in the master, 7_
70C7 communication serial port of the function and the communication setting in slave. - H
card 2 is incorrect. 2. Check the communication cable.
Refer to the function codes defined by the
7203 Invalid communication function code - H
communication protocols
The contents of the program
8105 downloaded are incorrect. Download the program and the parameters again. - H
The program syntax is incorrect.
The contents of the program
downloaded are incorrect.
8106 Download the program and the parameters again. - H
The length of the execution code
exceeds the limit.
The contents of the program
downloaded are incorrect.
8107 Download the program and the parameters again. - H
The length of the source code exceeds
the limit.

7-13
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

7.3 Troubleshooting for I/O Modules

 Introduction of modules

Digital I/O modules, analog I/O modules, temperature measurement modules, load cell modules, and network
modules can be installed in an AS series system. There are 2 types of error codes, for errors and for warning. The
CPU module and its modules will stop operating when errors occurred. The CPU modules and its modules will not
stop operating when warnings triggered.

7.3.1 Troubleshooting for Analog Modules (AD/DA/XA) and

Temperature Modules (RTD/TC)
7.3.1.1 ERROR LED Indicator’s Being ON
The Following errors will be specified as warnings. Users need to set up in HWCONFIG to have them shown as errors
when the following errors occurred.

Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1605 Hardware failure Please contact the factory.
16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.
The factory calibration or the CJC is
16#1608 Please contact the factory.
abnormal.

7.3.1.2 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are
triggered by its AIO modules. Users can set up in HWCONFIG to have them shown as errors when the first 4 errors
occurred.

Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.
16#1802 Hardware failure Please contact the factory.
16#1804 The factory calibration is abnormal. Please contact the factory.
_7 16#1807 The CJC is abnormal. Please contact the factory.
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds
16#1808 Check the signal received by channel 1
the range of analog inputs (temperature).
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds
16#1809 Check the signal received by channel 2
the range of analog inputs (temperature).
The signal received by channel 3 exceeds
16#180A Check the signal received by channel 3
the range of analog inputs (temperature).
The signal received by channel 4 exceeds
16#180B Check the signal received by channel 4
the range of analog inputs (temperature).

7-14
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

7.3.2 Troubleshooting for Load Cell Module AS02LC

7.3.2.1 ERROR LED Indicator’s Being ON
Users can set up in HWCONFIG to have them shown as errors when the following errors occurred.

Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1605 Hardware failure (e.g. the diver board) Please contact the factory.
16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.

7.3.2.2 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are
triggered by its AIO modules. Users can set up in HWCONFIG to have them shown as errors when the first 3 errors
occurred.

Error
Description Solution
Code
16#1801 The external voltage is abnormal. Check the power supply.
16#1802 Hardware failure Please contact the factory.
16#1807 Diver board failure Please contact the factory.
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds
Check the signal received by channel 1 and the cable
16#1808 the range of analog inputs or the SEN
connections.
voltage is abnormal.
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds Check the value inputted in channel 1 and the setting of
16#1809
the weight limit. the maximum weight.
The factory calibration in channel 1 is
16#180A Check the weight calibration in channel 1.
incorrect.
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds
Check the signal received by channel 2 and the cable
16#180B the range of analog inputs or the SEN
connections.
voltage is abnormal.
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds Check the value inputted in channel 2 and the setting of
16#180C
the weight limit. the maximum weight.
The factory calibration in channel 2 is
16#180D Check the weight calibration in channel 1.
incorrect. 7_

7.3.3 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM as a Communication

Module
7.3.3.1 ERROR LED Indicator’s Being ON
The following error codes are for users to identify possible errors occurred when the AS00SCM module is installed on the
right side of the CPU module and acts as a communication module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check if the module is securely installed.
16#1605 Hardware failure 2. Change and install a new AS00SCM or contact the
factory.

7-15
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check if the function card is securely installed.
2. Change and install a new function card or contact the
factory.
16#1606 The setting of the function card is incorrect. 3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent with
the actual setting in the function card.
4. Change and install a new AS00SCM or contact the
factory.

7.3.3.2 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

The following error codes are for users to identify possible errors occurred when the AS00SCM module is installed on the
right side of the CPU module and acts as a communication module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG, and the parameter.
16#1802 Incorrect parameters
Download the parameter again.
1. Check whether the communication cable is
connected well.
2. Check if the station number and the communication
16#1803 Communication timeout
format are correctly set.
3. Check if the connection with the function card is
working fine.
1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#1804 The setting of the UD Link is incorrect.
2. Check the settings to trigger warnings in the PLC.

The following error codes can only be viewed via SCMSoft; when the following errors occurred, they will not be shown on
the LED indicators and the system will not send the error messages to the CPU module.

Error
Description Solution
Code
The settings in HWCONFIG and actual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and actual manual
16#0107 manual settings are not consistent for the settings for the function card 1.
_7 function card 1.
The settings in HWCONFIG and actual Check the settings in HWCONFIG and actual manual
16#0108 manual settings are not consistent for the settings for the function card 2.
function card 2.
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG, and the parameter.
16#0201 Incorrect parameters
Download the parameter again.
1. Check if the station number and the communication
format are correctly set.
16#0301 Function card 1 communication timeout
2. Check if the connection with the function card is
working fine.
1. Check if the station number and the communication
format are correctly set.
16#0302 Function card 2 communication timeout
2. Check if the connection with the function card is
working fine.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for the function 1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#0400
card 1 2. Check the settings to trigger warnings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Group ID for the function 1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#0401
card 2 2. Check the settings to trigger warnings in the PLC.

7-16
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

Error
Description Solution
Code
Invalid UD Link Command for the function 1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#0402
card 1 2. Check the settings to trigger warnings in the PLC.
Invalid UD Link Command for the function 1. Check the settings of the UD Link.
16#0403
card 1 2. Check the settings to trigger warnings in the PLC.

7.3.4 Troubleshooting for Module AS00SCM as a Remote Module

Errors from the remote modules are regarded as warnings for AS CPU modules. The LED indicator of the CPU module
will blink and the CPU module can still operate. Users can use the flag SM30 to work with the programs in the PLC to
manage the ways to present the errors from the remote modules.

7.3.4.1 Error LED Indicator’s Being ON

Error codes for the error type

Error
Description Solution
Code
1. Check if the module is securely installed.
16#1301 Hardware failure 2. Change and install a new AS00SCM or contact the
factory.
1. Check if the function card is securely installed with
the AS-FCOPM card.
2. Change and install a new function card or contact the
factory.
16#1302 The setting of the function card is incorrect.
3. Check if the setting in HWCONFIG is consistent with
the actual setting in the function card.
4. Change and install a new AS00SCM or contact the
factory.

7.3.4.2 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.5 Seconds

Error codes for the warning type

Error
Description Solution
7_
Code
Check the parameter in HWCONFIG, and the parameter.
16#1502 Incorrect parameters
Download the parameter again.
Make sure the module is well-connected to the CPU
16#1503 Extension module communication timeout
module and turn-on the modules again.

7.3.4.3 ERROR LED Indicator’s Blinking Every 0.2 Seconds

This happens when the power supply of 24VDC for the remote module is not sufficient. Please check the power supply. If
the power supply is normal, remove the extension module from the CPU module and then check if the SCM remote
module is out of order. The error codes below are of the warning types.

Error
Description Solution
Code
24VDC power supply is not sufficient and Check whether the 24 V power supply to the module is
16#1303 then is recovered from a low-voltage less normal.
than 10ms situation.

7-17
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

7.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules

A. Columns
a. Error code: If the error occurs in the system, the error code is generated.
b. Description: The description of the error
c. CPU status: If the error occurs, the CPU stops running, keeps running, or in the status defined by users.

 Stop: The CPU stops running when the error occurs.

 Continue: The CPU keeps running when the error occurs.

d. LED indicator status: If the error occurs, the LED indicator is ON, OFF, or blinks.

 ERROR: The system error

 Descriptions

Module Type LED indicator Descriptions

There are 5 types of error indicator status for the errors of the CPU module,
including LED indicator ON, OFF, blinking fast, blinking normally, and blinking
slowly. When the LED indicator is ON, blinking fast/normally, users need to clear
the problems first in order to run the CPU module. When the LED indicator is
blinking slowly, indicating a warning type of error codes, it does not require
immediate action. It is suggested to clear the problems when the module is
power-off.

Error type:
ON: A serious error occurs in the module.
CPU Error LED Blinking fast (every 0.2 seconds): unstable power supply or hardware
failure
Blinking normally (every 0.5 second): system program errors or system
cannot run.

Warning type:
Blinking slowly (every 1 second and stop for 3 seconds): a warning is
_7 triggered, but the system can still run.
OFF: a warning is triggered, but the system can still run. Users can
modify the rules of how a warning is triggered or use the SM/SR to show
the warnings.

7.4.1 Error Codes and LED Indicators for CPU Modules

Note: refer to the section 12.3 for the status descriptions of the Error LED indicators.

ERROR LED indicator status

Error CPU
Description
code status Blinking Blinking Blinking
ON OFF
fast normally slowly

000A Scan timeout Stop V

000C The program in the PLC is damaged. Stop V

0010 The access to the memory in the CPU is denied. Stop V
0011 The PLC ID is incorrect. Continue V

7-18
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

ERROR LED indicator status

Error CPU
Description
code status Blinking Blinking Blinking
ON OFF
fast normally slowly
0012 The PLC password is incorrect. Continue V
RTC cannot keep track of the current time (The
0026 Continue
battery LED is blinking.)
0027 Battery low (The battery LED is ON.) Continue
24VDC power supply is not sufficient and then is
002A recovered from a low-voltage less than 10ms Continue V
situation.
002D The PLC maximum password attempts exceeded. Continue V
The access to the external memory of the CPU is
002E Stop V
denied.
PLC programs are not consistent with the system
002F Stop V
logs.
The memories in the latched special auxiliary relays
0050 Continue V
are abnormal.
0051 The latched special data registers are abnormal. Continue V
The memories in the latched auxiliary relays are
0052 Continue V
abnormal.
0054 The latched counters are abnormal. Continue V
0055 The latched 32-bit counters are abnormal. Continue V
0056 The latched special auxiliary relay is abnormal. Continue V
0059 The latched data registers are abnormal. Continue V
005D The CPU module does not detect a memory card. Continue V
005E The memory card is initialized incorrectly. Continue V
An error occurs when data is written to the memory
0063 Continue V
card.
0064 A file in the memory card cannot be read. Continue V
The actual arrangement of the function cards is not
0070 Stop V
consistent with the settings. 7_
0102 The interrupt number exceeds the range. Stop V
0202 The MC instruction exceeds the range. Stop V
0302 The MCR instruction exceeds the range. Stop V
The operands used in DHSCS are not used
0D03 Stop V
properly.
The operands HCXXX used in DCNT are not used
0E05 Stop V
properly.
1300
~ Errors occurred in the remote modules Continue V
130F
The actual arrangement of the I/O modules is not
1402 Stop V
consistent with the settings.
140B The communication modules exceed the limit of 4. Stop V
140D The extension modules exceed the limit of 32. Stop V
The remote modules exceed the limit of 8 on the
140E Stop V
right side of the CPU module.

7-19
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

ERROR LED indicator status

Error CPU
Description
code status Blinking Blinking Blinking
ON OFF
fast normally slowly

1500 Connection lost in the remote modules Continue V

1502
~ Errors occurred in the remote modules Continue V
150F
1600 The ID of the extension module exceeds the range. Stop V
1601 The ID of the extension module cannot be set. Stop V
1602 The ID of the extension module is duplicated. Stop V
1603 The extension module cannot be operated. Stop V
1604 Extension module communication timeout Stop V
1605 Hardware failure Stop V
Errors on the function card of the communication
1606 Stop V
module
1607 The external voltage is abnormal. Stop V
The Internal factory calibration or the CJC is
1608 Stop V
abnormal.

1609
~ Reserved (Error codes for the extension modules) Stop V
160F

1800
~ Errors occurred in the extension modules Continue V
180F
1900
Heartbeat errors occurred in the slave of Delta
~ Continue V
ASD-A2 control.
191C
The initialization of Delta ASD-A2 control has not
_7 1950 yet been completed, the CANopen instructions Continue V
cannot be executed.
Without using the FCOMP card or not in the right
2001 mode for the ASDA-A2 while using the CANopen Continue V
communication instruction.
The device used in the program exceeds the device
2003 Continue V
range.
200A Invalid instruction Stop V
The operand n or the other constant operands K/H
200B Continue V
exceed the range.
200C The operands overlap. Continue V
The binary to the binary-coded decimal conversion
200D Continue V
is incorrect.
200E The string does not end with 00. Continue V
2012 Incorrect division operation Continue V
The value exceeds the range of values which can
2013 Continue V
be represented by the floating-point numbers.

7-20
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

ERROR LED indicator status

Error CPU
Description
code status Blinking Blinking Blinking
ON OFF
fast normally slowly
The task designated by TKON/YKOFF is incorrect,
2014 Continue V
or exceeds the range.
The instruction BREAK is written outside of the
2017 Continue V
FOR-NEXT.
No such position planning table number or the
2027 Continue V
format is incorrect.
The high speed output instruction is being
2028 executed. Only one instruction can be executed at a Continue V
time.
6004 The IP address filter is set incorrectly. Continue V
600D RJ45 port is not connected. Continue V
The number of the MODBUS TCP connections
6010 Continue V
exceeds the range.
The number of the EtherNet/IP connections
6011 Continue V
exceeds the range.
6012 There are devices using the same IP address. Continue V
6100 The email connection is busy. Continue V
The trigger attachment mode in the email is set
6103 Continue V
incorrectly.
6104 The attachment in the email does not exist. Continue V
6105 The attachment in the email is oversized. Continue V
6106 There is an SMTP server response timeout. Continue V
6107 There is an SMTP server response timeout. Continue V
6108 SMTP verification failed Continue V
The remote communication IP address set in the
6200 Continue V
TCP socket function is illegal.
The local communication port set in the TCP socket
6201 Continue V
function is illegal.
The remote communication port set in the TCP
7_
6202 Continue V
socket function is illegal.
The device from which the data is sent in the TCP
6203 Continue V
socket function is illegal.
The device which receives the data in the TCP
6206 Continue V
socket function is illegal.
The data which is received through the TCP socket
6208 Continue V
exceeds the device range.
The remote communication IP address set in the
6209 Continue V
UDP socket function is illegal.
The local communication port set in the UDP socket
620A Continue V
function is illegal.
The device from which the data is sent in the UDP
620C Continue V
socket function is illegal.
The device which receives the data in the UDP
620F Continue V
socket function is illegal.

7-21
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

ERROR LED indicator status

Error CPU
Description
code status Blinking Blinking Blinking
ON OFF
fast normally slowly
The data which is received through the UDP socket
6210 Continue V
exceeds the device range.
There is no response from the remote device after
6212 Continue V
the timeout period.
6213 The data received exceeds the limit. Continue V
6214 The remote device refuses the connection. Continue V
6215 The socket is not opened. Continue V
6217 The socket is opened. Continue V
6218 The data has been sent through the socket. Continue V
6219 The data has been received through the socket. Continue V
621A The socket is closed. Continue V
The device communication function code in COM1
7011 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device communication address used in COM1
7012 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device used in COM1 exceeds the device
7013 Continue V
range.
The device length of the communication data in
7014 Continue V
COM1 exceeds the limit.
The device checksum for the communication serial
7017 Continue V
port of COM1 is incorrect.
The device communication function code in COM2
7021 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device communication address used in COM2
7022 Continue V
is incorrect.
The device used in COM2 exceeds the device
7023 Continue V
range.
The device length of the communication data in
_7 7024
COM2 exceeds the limit.
Continue V

The device checksum for the communication serial

7027 Continue V
port of COM2 is incorrect.
The device communication function code in the
7031 Continue V
Ethernet is incorrect.
The device communication address used in the
7032 Continue V
Ethernet is incorrect.
The device used in the Ethernet exceeds the device
7033 Continue V
range.
The device length of the communication data in the
7034 Continue V
Ethernet exceeds the limit.
The device checksum for the communication serial
7037 Continue V
port of the Ethernet is incorrect.
The device communication function code in the
7041 Continue V
USB is incorrect.
The device communication address used in the
7042 Continue V
USB is incorrect.

7-22
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

ERROR LED indicator status

Error CPU
Description
code status Blinking Blinking Blinking
ON OFF
fast normally slowly
The device used in the USB exceeds the device
7043 Continue V
range.
The device length of the communication data in the
7044 Continue V
USB exceeds the limit.
The device checksum for the communication serial
7047 Continue V
port of the USB is incorrect.
The device communication function code in the
70B1 Continue V
function card 1 is incorrect.
The device communication address used in the
70B2 Continue V
function card 1 is incorrect.
The device used in the function card 1 exceeds the
70B3 Continue V
device range.
The device length of the communication data in the
70B4 Continue V
function card 1 exceeds the limit.
The device checksum for the communication serial
70B7 Continue V
port of the function card 1 is incorrect.
The device communication function code in the
70C1 Continue V
function card 2 is incorrect.
The device communication address used in the
70C2 Continue V
function card 2 is incorrect.
The device used in the function card 2 exceeds the
70C3 Continue V
device range.
The device length of the communication data in the
70C4 Continue V
function card 2 exceeds the limit.
The device checksum for the communication serial
70C7 Continue V
port of the function card 2 is incorrect.
7203 Invalid communication function code Continue V
The contents of the program downloaded are
8105 incorrect. Continue V
7_
The program syntax is incorrect.
The contents of the program downloaded are
8106 incorrect. Continue V
The length of the execution code exceeds the limit.
The contents of the program downloaded are
8107 incorrect. Continue V
The length of the source code exceeds the limit.

7.4.2 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Analog/Temperature Modules

ERROR LED indicator status

Error code Description AD/

DA/ ERROR
A ↔D
16#1605 Hardware failure OFF ON
16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON

7-23
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

ERROR LED indicator status

Error code Description AD/

DA/ ERROR
A ↔D
16#1608 The factory calibration or the CJC is abnormal. OFF ON
16#1801*1 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking
16#1802*1 Hardware failure OFF Blinking
RUN: Blinking
16#1804*1 The factory calibration is abnormal. Blinking
STOP: OFF
16#1807*1 The CJC is abnormal. OFF Blinking
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of
16#1808
analog inputs (temperature).
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of
16#1809
analog inputs (temperature). RUN: Blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 3 exceeds the range of STOP: OFF
16#180A
analog inputs (temperature).
The signal received by channel 4 exceeds the range of
16#180B
analog inputs (temperature).
*1: The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are
triggered by its AIO modules. Users can set up in HWCONFIG to have them shown as errors when the first 4 errors
occurred.

7.4.3 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Load Cell Module AS02LC

ERROR LED indicator status

Error code Description
AD ERROR

16#1605 Hardware failure (the diver board included) OFF ON

16#1607 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF ON
_7 16#1801*1 The external voltage is abnormal. OFF Blinking
16#1802*1 Hardware failure OFF Blinking
16#1807*1 Diver board failure OFF Blinking
The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the range of
16#1808
analog inputs or the SEN voltage is abnormal.
16#1809 The signal received by channel 1 exceeds the weight limit.
16#180A The factory calibration in channel 1 is incorrect. RUN: Blinking
Blinking
The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the range of STOP: OFF
16#180B
analog inputs or the SEN voltage is abnormal.
16#180C The signal received by channel 2 exceeds the weight limit.
16#180D The factory calibration in channel 2 is incorrect.
*1: The following errors are specified as warnings to ensure the CPU module can still run even when the warnings are
triggered by its AIO modules. Users can set up in HWCONFIG to have them shown as errors when the 3 errors occurred.

7-24
 Ch a p t er 7 Tr o u b l es h o o t i n g

7.4.4 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a

Communication Module

ERROR LED indicator status

Error Code Description
ON Blinking

16#1605 Hardware failure V

16#1606 The setting of the function card is incorrect. V
16#1802 Incorrect parameters V
16#1803 Communication timeout V
16#1804 The setting of the UD Link is incorrect. V

7.4.5 Error Codes and LED Indicators for Module AS00SCM as a Remote
Module

ERROR LED indicator status

Error Code Description
Blinking
ON Blinking
fast
16#1301 Hardware failure V
16#1302 The setting of the function card is incorrect. V
24VDC power supply is not sufficient and then is recovered
16#1303 V
from a low-voltage less than 10ms situation.
16#1502 Incorrect parameters V
16#1503 Extension module communication timeout V

7_

7-25
 AS Ser i es Pr o g r a m m i n g Ma n u a l

MEMO

_7

7-26